JP2023108123A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve convenience of a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes input means for allowing a player to perform predetermined input to performance execution means. The input means includes detection means resulting in a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection object is brought closer to or brought into contact with a predetermined detection part up to predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state. The detection means includes output means for outputting multiple pieces of information that are stored in a predetermined storage part and are related to the performance execution means when a first input state in which the detection means becomes a predetermined detection state occurs, and is configured so as to be capable of inputting and outputting information regarding predetermined settable information in the performance execution means when a second input state in which predetermined information corresponding to multiple pieces of outputted information is detected occurs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure363

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of the game, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the following eighth embodiment)
a success/fail lottery means for executing a success/failure lottery based on determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established that the predetermined lottery condition has been established;
variable display means for executing variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
a specific game executing means for executing a specific game state after a specific variable display for displaying a specific display result executed when the result of the lottery is a specific result;
effect execution means for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
Input means that allows a player to make a predetermined input to the effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The input means
A detection means that enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state,
This game machine is
Output means for outputting a plurality of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and related to the effect execution means when a first input state occurs in which the detection means is in the predetermined detection state. with
When a second input state occurs in which input of predetermined information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of output information is detected, input and output of information relating to predetermined settable information in the effect executing means is enabled. A gaming machine characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the above aspect, the above problems can be solved.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 1st starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 2nd starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is a front view of the game board when the main rotating accessory for production has moved to the lowest position. FIG. 10 is a schematic right side view showing a main rotating accessory for presentation and a main rotating accessory for presentation driving section for operating the main rotating accessory for presentation. It is an explanatory view showing the operation of the production main rotating role in the one-shot announcement production process. It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production. It is a schematic right side view showing the sub-rotating role for production and the sub-rotating role for production driving section for operating the sub-rotating role for production. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the main rotating accessory for effect and the sub rotating accessory for effect by the big or small effect processing; It is an explanatory view showing a second predetermined rotation stop position of the main rotating accessory for production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a second specific rotation stop position of the sub rotating accessory for effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the main rotating accessory for production is at a second predetermined rotation stop position, and the sub-rotating accessory for production is at a second specific rotation stop position; It is a side schematic diagram of a rotating device of a comparative example. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production in a modification. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the operation at the time of the jackpot in Case 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation at the time of a big hit in Case 2; It is an explanatory view showing the operation at the time of the big hit in Case 3. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for gates. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 1st starting ports. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process of setting the variable time for the first starting opening; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing first fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the decision processing for the 2nd starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for a 2nd starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process when a standby state transition flag is ON. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of opening period flag ON. 9 is a flow chart showing processing when an opening/closing processing period flag is ON; It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing when an ending period flag is ON; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a small hit opening and closing process. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing; It is a flow chart which shows game round production setting processing for special 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first effect pattern setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability high support state for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing a high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the game round production|presentation setting process for special 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second effect pattern setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of low probability high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of the high-precision high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of high probability low support state for the second start opening. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a front view of a game board provided in a pachinko machine as a modification. It is a front view of a game board provided in a pachinko machine as a modification. It is an explanatory view showing a left round number sorting device. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switching scenario selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; It is an explanatory view explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a battle production|presentation and a battle result production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a countdown effect, an opportunity suggesting effect, and information on the number of balls entered; It is explanatory drawing which shows step-up production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for the V winning prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switching scenario selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; It is an explanatory view explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an electric distribution apparatus aim right hitting information production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a battle production|presentation and a battle result production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a countdown effect, an opportunity suggesting effect, and information on the number of balls entered; It is explanatory drawing which shows step-up production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for the V winning prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a fifth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success-or-failure table for special figure per lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for small hits. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table for the V prize jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched depending on the value of the number-of-ceilings counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the information production|presentation of a game method. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation mode when the lottery result of lottery per special figure 1 turns into small hit winning in a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a ceiling time saving process. 10 is a flow chart showing V target profit/loss determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart showing a transition process at the end of the V winning jackpot game. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched according to the value of the number-of-ceilings counter in the modified example. 10 is a flowchart showing V target profit/loss determination processing in a modified example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of profit-and-loss examination recommendation notification production. It is an explanatory view showing a part of the island facilities installed in the game hall when explaining the sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a sixth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success-or-failure table for special figure per lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for big hits. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing a normal electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an external terminal board and a data display; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the data display device with which a data display is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a high support state in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in a high support state in a pachinko machine and a V winning big win is won. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in a pachinko machine in a high support state and a V winning big win is not won. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the pachinko machine loses in all the game rounds in the high support state (no special 2 remaining hold). It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won with special 2 balance pending at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small hit is won with a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when it is out in all the game rounds based on special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 9 is a flowchart showing outer-end output signal management processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a fixed time elapsing process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for extension flag OFF. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric opening/closing pattern selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the performance movable accessory moves to the lowest point position, each petal part separates (enlarges) from the rotating shaft part, and rotates counterclockwise at the lowest point position. FIG. 3 is a schematic right side view showing a movable performance accessory and a movable performance drive mechanism for driving the movable accessory for presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the character-linked battle production which is an example of the character-linked production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the character-linked battle production which is an example of the character-linked production. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each driving scenario; 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation effect setting process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode effect setting process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for production|presentation operation buttons performed in MPU of an audio|voice light emission control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance movable accessory driving process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each driving scenario provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. It is an explanatory view explaining a sound 0 amount light amount adjustment image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an option image; It is an explanatory view explaining the game history information displayed on the display surface 041a. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM 64; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric opening/closing pattern selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; 3 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PS1; 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PS2; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern PS3; 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY3; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY5; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY6; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY7; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY3; 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY5; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY6; 10 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY7; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY8; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DS1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DS2; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY3; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY5; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY6; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY7; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY8; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the sound and light side MPU 92; It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting processing during the special electric opening and closing execution mode. 4 is a flowchart showing button operation corresponding processing. It is a flow chart which shows movable accessory drive processing for production. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect custom setting image PSGa in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a call with an initial operation image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a model selection image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a one-shot notification effect frequency setting image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a hibiscus flash effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for setting the degree of expectations for bubble effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect setting image; It is an explanatory view explaining the image for a round music setting. It is an explanatory view explaining the image for connection operation. It is an explanatory view explaining a connection completion image. It is an explanatory view explaining a game history information reception image. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a custom setting information reception completion image; It is an explanatory view explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the value of the expected degree of fish school effect set in the pachinko machine 10; It is an explanatory view explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining a modification of processing about one-shot announcement production frequency. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the processing related to the degree of expectation for effect of a school of fish; It is an explanatory view explaining a modification of processing about a bubble production expectation level.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<<1>> First embodiment (feature xA group to feature xU group):
<<2>> Second embodiment (feature yA group to feature yζ group):
<<3>> Third embodiment (feature zA group to feature zU group):
<<4>> Fourth embodiment (feature aA group to feature aU group):
<<5>> Fifth embodiment (feature bA group to feature bU group):
<<6>> Sixth embodiment (characteristic cA group):
<<7>> Seventh embodiment (feature dA group):
<<8>> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponding to characteristic eA group of <<8-10>> below):
Connection method, communication method and disconnection method between pachinko machine 10 and smartphone 200 <8-0> Introduction:
<<8-1>> Game machine structure:
<<8-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
<<8-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
<<8-4>> Overview of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment:
<<8-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
<<8-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
<<8-7>> Problems and effects in the eighth embodiment:
<<8-8>> Modified example of the eighth embodiment:
<<8-9>> Application to other configurations:
<<8-10>> Regarding feature groups extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
<<9>> Ninth embodiment (mainly corresponding to characteristic fA group of <<9-8>> below):
Custom setting method for production <9-0> Introduction:
<<9-1>> Custom setting of production using production operation button 24 and cross key 27:
<<9-2>> Custom settings for performance using a smartphone:
<<9-3>> Processing for externally input custom setting information:
<<9-4>> Various processes executed in the main control device, sound emission control device, and display control device:
<<9-5>> Problems and effects in the ninth embodiment:
<<9-6>> Modified example of the ninth embodiment:
<<9-7>> Application to other configurations:
<<9-8>> Regarding feature groups extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

<<1>> First Embodiment:
<<1-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as a first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine has a rotating body as the rotating means of the present invention. The rotator includes a first rotator configured so that the light source positioned on the back side can be visually recognized, and a second rotator movable to the back side of the rotating first rotator. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of transparent resin, and in this embodiment, is made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. However, as a modification, the game board 30 may be made of other kinds of transparent resin such as ABS resin and acrylic resin. A game area PA is formed in front of the game board 30 . A plurality of light emitting parts such as lamps and LEDs are provided on the back side of the game board 30, and by illuminating the game area PA from the back side, the game area PA shines when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A design performance is made in.

An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as a windmill 96 are arranged.

The game ball is a sphere made of a uniform material, and is made of steel (iron) in this embodiment. The outer shape of the game ball is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the game ball when viewed from the front, and is a sphere that is close to a true sphere. Characters and symbols such as the name and logo of the game hall are written on the surface of the game ball. As described above, the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, then flows down the game area PA, and reaches above the windmill 96. From the position it flows down towards the windmill 96 . The falling game ball can change its rotation speed and the direction of its rotation axis during rotation by the nail or the pinwheel 96, and can also reverse its rotation direction. A player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game ball through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and can see how the game ball flows down the game area PA. Incidentally, when game balls are continuously shot from the game ball shooting mechanism, a plurality of game balls can exist in the game area PA.

The nail 42 is made of brass, and distributes and organizes the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA. A game ball flowing down the game area PA is guided in a falling direction restricted by the nail 42 while rotating by hitting the nail 42 .

The windmill 96 is a structure that can be switched between a rotating state and a stopped state by receiving mechanical energy from the game ball, and its rotating direction and rotating speed can also be changed. In this embodiment, the windmill 96 is provided at a fixed position on the left side of the game board 30, and includes a shaft cylinder 96a for inserting a nail set upright on the game board 30, and an outer circumference of the shaft cylinder 96a. It has three blades 96b arranged radially, and a front disk 96c attached to the front side of the shaft tube 96a and the blades 96b (forward direction of the game board 30). In this embodiment, the shaft cylinder 96a, the blade plate 96b, and the front disc 96c are integrally formed of a transparent resin material, and configured to be rotatable about a nail inserted through the shaft cylinder 96a. . A shaft cylinder 96a functioning as a rotation shaft of the windmill 96 and a nail inserted through the shaft cylinder 96a are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. Since the front disk 96c is made of transparent resin, the light source located on the back side of the game board 30 can be visually recognized. The front disc 96c has a high light transmission region where the light transmittance is high because the blade plate 96b is not provided, and a high light transmission region where the light transmittance is high due to the blade plate 96b being provided. a low light transmission region, which is a region that is lower than the

By planting a plurality of nails 42 in the left area of the game board 30, there are a plurality of paths that can reach from a position above the windmill 96 to a position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96. is provided. The game ball can move between a position above the windmill 96 and a position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96 by flowing down one of the plurality of paths. During movement, repeated collisions with the nail 42 can change its movement speed, rotation direction, and rotation speed.

The game ball that reaches the windmill 96 is determined by the rotation mode of the front disk 96c (rotation direction, rotation speed, position of the blade plate 96b, etc.) at the timing when the game ball moves to the position on the back side of the front disk 96c of the windmill 96. ), the route is divided into either a central route that makes it easier to enter the first starting port 33 described later, or an outer (left) route that makes it difficult to enter the first starting port 33. . Specifically, each time the game ball moves to the back side of the front disc 96c of the windmill 96, the rotation direction of the windmill 96 is either counterclockwise or clockwise. It's up to you. When the windmill 96 rotates in the clockwise direction, it is easier for the game balls to be distributed to the above-described central route, which is highly advantageous for the player. easy to become When the game ball is distributed to the above-described central route, the possibility of the game ball entering the first start hole 33 increases, and the state becomes highly advantageous for the player. When the ball is distributed to the outer (left) route described above, the possibility of the game ball entering the first start hole 33 decreases, resulting in a low advantage for the player.

Further, according to the windmill 96 of the present embodiment, since the blade plate 96b and the front disk 96c are made of a transparent resin material, the game ball can be shot while the game ball is being shot from the game ball shooting mechanism. In a situation where the game ball is flowing down above the pinwheel 96, the light-emitting part provided on the back side of the game board 30 can be visually recognized through the front disk 96c of the pinwheel 96. - 特許庁Therefore, aesthetics can be enhanced. On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down from a position above the windmill 96 moves to the back side of the front disc 96c of the windmill 96 (the back side of the above-described high light transmission region), the game ball is moved to the game board. The game ball can be visually recognized through the front disc 96c of the pinwheel 96 by blocking the light from the light emitting part provided on the back side of the 30.例文帳に追加Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has moved to the windmill 96, and the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the center side of the game board 30 by the windmill 96 can be enhanced. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down above the pinwheel 96 can be visually recognized without passing through the front disk 96c of the pinwheel 96.例文帳に追加

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls roll on the surface of the game board 30 and enter the general prize winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36, respectively. The entered game ball is guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 30 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a main rotating accessory for presentation 170 as an example of a first rotating body and a pair of sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 as an example of a second rotating body. .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a big win is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. and the closed state are repeated. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can be entered into the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. Similarly, even if a big win is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43 .

The game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown, the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1 to 8. FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown, the display surface 41a displays a main display area MA and a sub-area SA located below the main display area MA. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. One unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit In either one of the 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device At 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. A game ball is a rotating body that circulates while rotating. The time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

In the sub-area SA located below the main display area MA, a first start opening reservation area Ds1, a reserved digestion area Dm, and a second start opening reservation area Ds2 are displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first start opening reservation area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 is displayed in the reservation digestion area Dm. displayed on the right. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, the number of reserved balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four. The details of the operation of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1, the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, and the reservation digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of FIG. The main rotating accessory for effect 170 is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable downward from the illustrated origin position. Each of the pair of production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 is arranged below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable upward from the illustrated origin position. When the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 Only a portion of 190 protrudes from cover plate 199 . The configuration of the main rotating accessory for production 170 and the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 and their operations will be described later in detail.

A pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b. In addition, depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the center side or the outer side (left side) of the game board 30 by the windmill 96, the probability of the game ball entering the first start port 33 changes. The advantage for the player changes. That is, the windmill is a rotating body that changes the advantage for the player depending on the direction of rotation.

<<1-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 has a capacitor (not shown), and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 88 (FIG. 2) is turned off. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entry openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. . The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, it is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1, and counters other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns in the remaining pattern rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. This includes reducing or hiding a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed, and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach performance. Also, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach performance in which expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed at the start of the variation display in the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. used in determining the variation pattern in A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probability variable jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big prize in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the big win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode is the value of the winning random number counter C1 set as the big win in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big win are arbitrary.

It should be noted that a "small win" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery, although it is not used in the win/fail table in this embodiment.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. . On the other hand, "missing" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or to the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no game balls enter in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-fail table, and a win-fail mode as a win-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability success/failure table, a winning lottery is more likely to be won than when a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessary 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is directed to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 8(a), the distribution table for the first start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, A 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter simply “lottery mode”). ) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R variable variable jackpot and the 8R variable variable jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is different, the 16R variable variable jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R variable variable jackpot is 8. times (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end is the high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times. times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. , "65 to 89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. A 16R probability variable jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, in the case of a 16 probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, as described above, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high probability mode, but this high probability mode The state is continued until the next big win is won in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 9(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the values of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that will be the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, according to the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery, the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low frequency support mode. .

<<1-3>> Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device in which a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, on the output side of the MPU 92, a main rotating accessory drive section 97 for presentation that operates the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and a pair of sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 are provided. The sub-rotary accessory drive units 98 and 99 for use are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<1-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine and Effect Action:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<1-4-1>> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the sub-area SA located below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, there is a holding game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33. 1st start opening reservation area Ds1 indicating the number, 2nd start opening reservation area Ds2 indicating the number of reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second start opening 34, and 1st start opening reservation area Ds1 A reserved digestion area Dm located between the second start opening reservation areas Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start opening retention area Ds1 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, up to four reservation display icons corresponding to each reservation (each of up to four reservations) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. 11(a), the first hold display icon H1 and the second hold A display icon H2 is shown. In the first start opening reservation area Ds1, the first reservation display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start opening reservation area Ds1, each time a game ball enters the first start opening 33, the reservation display icon is displayed so as to increase one by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm has a trapezoidal shape whose upper base is longer than its lower base, and in the example shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and a variable display is performed to notify the result of the winning lottery. At the timing when this variable display is started, the pending display icon is placed on the upper portion of the pending digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the hold display icon H0 placed on the upper portion of the hold digest area Dm. The player can know that the suspension corresponding to the suspension display icon H0 is completed by observing that the suspension display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the suspension completion area Dm.

In the state shown in FIG. 11(a), when the variable display ends and the display is stopped, the pending display icon H0 placed on the upper portion of the pending digestion area Dm disappears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11(b), the first reservation display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 moves to the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. At this time, the second reservation display icon H2 positioned second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position in the first start opening reservation area Ds1. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the third and fourth pending display icons from the right side to the left side do not exist, but if they exist, the third pending display icon moves (shifts) to the second position, and the fourth positioned pending display icon moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 11(b), the state shown in FIG. 11(c) is obtained. That is, the first reservation display icon H1 is placed on the upper portion of the reservation digestion area Dm, and the second reservation display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start opening reservation area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation (reservation information) corresponding to the first reservation display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each time the variable display and the stop display corresponding to one game round are executed, each holding display icon displayed in the first start opening holding area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side. , eventually move from the rightmost position to the top of the retained digestion region Dm. Then, variable display and stop display for informing the result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information corresponding to the reservation display icon are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the first start opening holding region Ds1, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start opening retention area Ds2 and the retention digestion area Dm. In the second starting opening reservation area Ds2, up to four holding display icons H corresponding to each holding (each of up to four holdings) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are arranged in the horizontal direction. is displayed. The manner of change of the second starting opening reservation area Ds2 is roughly the same as the manner of change of the first starting opening reservation area Ds1 shown in FIG. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the pending display icon H is displayed so as to increase one by one from the left side to the right side. Each time a game round is executed, the pending display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening pending region Ds2, and finally moves to the upper part of the pending digestion region Dm, and the pending display is displayed. Fluctuation display and stop display for announcing the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H are executed. In this way, in each of the holding display icons displayed in the second start opening holding area Ds2, the holding information corresponding to each holding display icon is arranged in the order from left to right (that is, the order of holding). Subject to lottery.

The holding display icons displayed in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 and the second starting opening holding area Ds2 were circular as described above, but instead of this, triangles, squares, pentagons, etc. Other polygonal shapes are also possible. Further, the pending display icon is not limited to a graphical image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Although the reserved digestion area Dm was trapezoidal as described above, it may be an image of other shapes such as triangles, squares, circles, etc. instead. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to a graphic image, and may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the reservation display icon moved from the first start opening reservation area Ds1 or the second start opening reservation area Ds2 to the reservation digestion area Dm is configured to be placed on the upper part of the reservation digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, it may be displayed in such a manner that it disappears after entering the reserved digestion area Dm.

<<1-4-2>> Suspended change notice effect:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to increase the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), The value of the included winning random number counter C1 is confirmed before it becomes an object of the winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, a performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, so-called look-ahead performance is performed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the display color of each pending display icon from the default color (for example, white) to another color as one of the look-ahead effects, so that the pending display icon whose display color has changed A pending change notice effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as “holding change notice”) suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) of jackpot winning for the corresponding pending information is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are white, blue, green, and red as default colors for the display colors of the pending display icons, and in this order, it is expected that a jackpot will be won in the winning lottery. Four levels from low to high degree (reliability) are associated with each other. That is, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot to be associated is lowest in white as a display color, higher in blue than white, higher in green than blue, and highest in red. In other words, according to the reservation change notice, if the display color of the reservation display icon remains white, which is the default color, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, and if the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is white. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning a big win is higher than when it is green. When the reservation change notice changes the display color of the reservation display icon H to a display color with a high degree of expectation for winning the big win, the player's expectation for winning the big win can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the winning lottery, the value of the winning random number counter C1 included in the pending information left in the pending information storage area 64b is confirmed at the end of the game cycle related to the winning of the big win. Then, based on the confirmed results, it is determined whether or not the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, that is, whether or not there is a so-called reservation series (=reserved series chan).

<<1-4-3>> Configuration of the main rotating role for production:
As described above, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable downward from the origin position shown in FIG.

FIG. 13 is a front view of the game board 30 when the effect main rotating accessory 170 has moved to the lowest position (hereinafter referred to as the lowest point position). As shown in the figure, at the lowest position, the main rotary accessory 170 for effect is positioned near the center of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is configured to be movable from the origin position shown in FIG. 3 to the lowest point position shown in FIG. The main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position and returns from the lowest point position to the origin position in accordance with the execution of the predetermined effect processing.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 13, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is configured such that five petal portions 172 are arranged around a rotating shaft portion 171. As shown in FIGS. . Each petal portion 172 is a plate-like member, and has a petal shape when viewed from the front (hereinafter simply referred to as "front view" means the front view of the game board 30). The rotary shaft portion 171 extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30) and is rotatable around the rotary shaft portion 171. As shown in FIG. By rotating the rotating shaft portion 171, each petal portion 172 connected to the rotating shaft portion 171 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The production main rotating accessory 170 is configured such that five petal portions 172 are gathered on the rotating shaft portion 171 when positioned at the origin position shown in FIG. It will look like this. On the other hand, the production main rotating accessory 170 is configured such that each of the five petal portions 172 is separated from the rotating shaft portion 171 when positioned at the lowest position shown in FIG. It becomes a shape like an open flower at

Each of the five petal portions 172 is molded from a resin material with a translucent color (for example, cherry blossom), and one of the five petal portions 172 is formed with a through hole. A magnifying lens LZ is embedded in the hole. With this configuration, light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 partially passes through four of the five petal portions 172, and the remaining one petal portion 172 (hereinafter referred to as the one petal portion 172 is also called a petal portion 172L), the light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is magnified through the magnifying lens LZ.

In summary, the production main rotating accessory 170 performs the following four actions or actions.
・Moving operation: An operation of moving from the origin position shown in FIG. 3 to the lowest point position shown in FIG. 13, and returning from the lowest point position to the origin position ・Rotational operation: An action of rotating, for example, counterclockwise when viewed from the front・Scaling operation: At the origin position, the petals 172 gather around the rotation shaft 171 to form a closed flower-like shape, and at the lowest point, the petals 172 separate from the rotation shaft 171 to form an open flower-like shape. Shaped operation/light transmission action: The action of enlarging and transmitting the light emitted from the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 through the magnifying lens LZ in one petal portion 172L of the five petal portions 172.

FIG. 14 is a schematic right side view showing the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the main rotating accessory for presentation driving section 97 ( FIG. 10 ) for operating the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 . The production main rotating accessory 170 includes the rotating shaft portion 171 and the five petal portions 172 as described above. The performance main rotary accessory drive section 97 includes a main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 , a rack and pinion mechanism section 175 , a pinion connection motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism section 177 .

The motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory is a unit that controls the above-described rotating operation of the main rotating accessory for production 170, and is the end portion of the rotating shaft portion 171 on the side opposite to the side to which the petal portion 172 is connected. connected to Upon receiving the driving force of the motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, the speed of this rotation is set to a constant speed so that each petal portion 172 provided in the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation can be visually recognized. The main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is configured by, for example, a stepping motor.

The rack-and-pinion mechanism 175 and the pinion-connecting motor 176 are units that control the movement of the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation. The rack and pinion mechanism section 175 includes a rack 175a and a pinion 175b. A mounting portion 174a of the main rotary accessory rotating motor 174 is connected to one end of the rack 175a. A pinion coupling motor 176 is coupled to the center shaft of the pinion 175b. The rack and pinion mechanism 175 can convert the rotational motion of the pinion coupling motor 176 into linear motion. Upon receiving the driving force of the pinion connecting motor 176 , the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reciprocate integrally in the vertical direction Y of the game board 30 . The pinion connection motor 176 is configured by, for example, a stepping motor.

The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is a unit that controls the above-described enlargement/reduction operation of the production main rotating accessory 170 , and is attached to the rotation shaft 171 and connected to each petal 172 . The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 allows the production main rotary accessory 170 to have a flower-like shape in which the petals 172 gather around the rotary shaft 171 at the origin position (hereinafter referred to as a closed petal state). At the lowest position of the main rotating accessory for production 170, each petal part 172 can be formed in a flower-like shape in which each petal part 172 is separated from the rotating shaft part 171 (hereinafter referred to as an open petal state).

A main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 , a pinion connection motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism section 177 provided in the performance main rotary accessory drive section 97 receive control signals from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 . As a result, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 , the pinion connecting motor 176 , and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 are controlled by the sound emission control device 90 . As processing for performing the control, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a one-shot notification effect processing for performing a one-shot notification effect, and a big or small effect processing for performing a big or small effect (=big or small effect). to run. The one-shot notification effect processing will be described in detail below.

<<1-4-4>> One-shot announcement effect:
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the one-shot notification performance when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a big win, and decides to execute the one-shot notification performance. When it is done, execute the one-shot notification effect processing. The one-shot notification performance is a performance for notifying that the winning lottery result is a jackpot winning before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the jackpot winning. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect is performed by generating a random number for one-shot notification and determining whether or not the random number matches a predetermined value.

When the execution of the one-shot notification effect processing is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 controls the pinion connection motor 176 at the start of the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a big win. The main rotating accessory 170 is moved from the origin position shown in FIG. 3 to the lowest point position shown in FIG. In this embodiment, an origin position detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting that the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the origin position and detecting that the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the lowest point position. A possible lowest point position detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and when the main rotating accessory for production 170 is moved from the origin position to the lowest point position, the main rotating accessory for production 170 The pinion coupling motor 176 is driven until it is detected by the lowest point position detection sensor.

The MPU 92 controls the main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the movement of the main rotary accessory for production 170 (timing before reaching the lowest point position). , the production main rotary accessory 170 is rotated counterclockwise RL in front view, and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is controlled to change each petal part 172 from the petal closed state to the petal open state.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the production main rotary accessory 170 in the one-shot notification production process. As described above, as a result of controlling the motor 174 for rotating the main rotating accessory and controlling the scaling mechanism 177 at the above timing, the main rotating accessory for production 170 is moved to the origin as shown in FIG. 15(a). While moving from the position to the lowest position (while moving in the +Y direction), the petal closed state changes to the petal open state and rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view.

After that, when the main rotating accessory for production 170 reaches the lowest position, the MPU 92 rotates the main rotating accessory for production 170 until a predetermined period elapses from the time when the main rotary accessory for production 170 reaches the lowest position, and enters the petal open state. to continue. As a result, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the production main rotating accessory 170 rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view with the petals open for a predetermined period at the lowest position.

When the predetermined period has passed, the MPU 92 controls the main rotary accessory rotating motor 174 to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170, and controls the scaling mechanism 177. , each petal portion 172 is changed from the petal open state to the petal closed state. Thereafter, the MPU 92 controls the pinion coupling motor 176 to return from the lowest position shown in FIG. 13 to the origin position shown in FIG. When returning the performance main rotating accessory 170 from the lowest point position to the origin position, the pinion coupling motor 176 is driven until the performance main rotating accessory 170 is detected by the origin position detection sensor.

The sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to display a predetermined image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 during the above-described predetermined period in which the effect main rotating accessory 170 is at the lowest position. conduct. FIG. 15(b) shows the display surface 41a on which the predetermined image is displayed. As described above, when the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is at the lowest position, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view with the petals open for a predetermined period. , the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 rotates on a circular orbit centered on the rotating shaft portion 171 of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in a front view. The sound emission control device 90 has a plurality of (10 in this embodiment) circular high-brightness portions HB arranged at regular intervals so as to overlap the circular orbit in a front view with respect to the display control device 100. The (drawn) image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as a predetermined image.

The light emitted from each high-brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image travels toward the front side of the game board 30, but on the way, it partially passes through each rotating petal portion 172 or passes through a gap between the adjacent petal portions 172 to the player. It escapes to the side or is magnified through the magnifying lens LZ embedded in one petal portion 172L and sent to the player side. For this reason, during a predetermined period in which the production main rotating accessory 170 is at the lowest position, the player will be able to see the high brightness that was visible through the rotating petals 172 and the gaps between the adjacent petals 172 . The portion HB can be magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided in the petal portion 172L and can be visually recognized as shining brightly.

According to the one-shot notification effect configured as described above, the high-brightness part HB shines brightly through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L during a predetermined period in which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the lowest position. When it becomes visible as described above, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for winning the jackpot and improve the amusement of the game. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-brightness portion HB that is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and shines brightly can be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to further increase the interest of

<<1-4-5>> Configuration of sub-rotating role for production:
As described above, each of the pair of sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 for production is arranged below the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is moved upward from the origin position shown in FIG. configured as possible. When the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 Only a portion of 190 protrudes from cover plate 199 .

FIG. 16 is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation. First, the sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation arranged on the right side in the front view will be described. The sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 includes a rotating shaft portion 181 and a rotating body 182 .

The rotating body 182 is a plate-like member having an outer shape in which one pair of opposite sides are parallel and the other pair of opposite sides are semicircular. The rotating body 182 is molded from a resin material with a non-transparent color (eg, red). In addition, as a modification, it may be transparent instead of the non-transparent color. A rotating shaft portion 181 is connected to the center of the rotating body 182 . The rotating shaft portion 181 extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30) Z, and is rotatable around the rotating shaft portion 181 . When the rotating shaft portion 181 is rotationally driven, the rotating body 182 coupled to the rotating shaft portion 181 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The outer shape of the rotating body 182 is symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the rotating body 182 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front.

A circular through hole is provided near one end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 182, and a transparent resin 183 is embedded in the through hole. A character string 183a of “BIG” is drawn on the transparent resin 183 in rainbow-colored characters. A circular through hole is provided near the other end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 182, and a transparent resin 184 is embedded in the through hole. A character string 184a of "BIG" is drawn on the transparent resin 184 in black characters.

The production sub-rotary accessory 180 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction Y, moves from the origin position to the uppermost position (hereinafter referred to as the top position), and then returns from the top position to the origin position. . A long flat connecting rod 185 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 181 .

FIG. 17 is a schematic right side view showing the sub rotating accessory for presentation 180 and the sub rotating accessory for presentation driving section 98 that operates the sub rotating accessory for presentation 180. FIG. The production sub-rotary accessory 180 includes the rotating shaft portion 181 and the rotating body 182 as described above. The sub-rotating accessory drive section 98 for presentation includes a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 , a rack and pinion mechanism section 187 , and a pinion connecting motor 188 .

The sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is a unit that controls the rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, and is connected to the end of the rotating shaft portion 181 opposite to the side to which the rotating body 182 is connected. It is Receiving the driving force of the motor 186 for rotating the sub-rotating role, the sub-rotating role for production 180 rotates, for example, in the direction of the arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the speed of this rotation is set to a speed at which the rotating body 182 provided in the sub-rotating accessory 180 for production can be visually recognized.

The rack and pinion mechanism 187 and the pinion connection motor 188 are units that control the movement of the sub-rotary accessory 180 for presentation. The rack and pinion mechanism section 187 includes a rack 187a and a pinion 187b. A mounting portion 186a of a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is connected to one end of the rack 187a. A pinion coupling motor 188 is coupled to the center shaft of the pinion 187b. The rack and pinion mechanism 187 can convert the rotational motion of the pinion coupling motor 188 into linear motion. As a result, the driving force of the pinion connecting motor 188 is received, and the sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 and the sub-rotating accessory for production 180 integrally move from the origin position indicated by the solid line in the figure. It moves to the top position indicated by the dashed line, and then returns from the top position to the origin position. Note that the illustration of the connecting rod 185 shown in FIG. 16 is omitted in the drawing. The connecting rod 185 has a function of hiding the rack 187a when viewed from the front, and does not govern the movement of the sub-rotary accessory 180 for presentation.

When the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is at the origin position indicated by the solid line in the drawing, the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 has most of the rotating body 182 behind the cover plate 199 (rear surface) in front view. side). Specifically, in the front-rear direction Z of the game board 30, the rotating body 182 of the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 is located behind the cover plate 199, and the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180 is at the origin position. Sometimes, the production sub-rotary accessory 180 is positioned at a position where most of the rotating body 182 is hidden behind the cover plate 199 .

When the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is at the highest position indicated by the dashed line in the figure, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves to the lowest position, the sub rotating accessory for effect 180 is When viewed from the front, it is possible to position a part of the rotating body 182 of the sub rotating accessory for presentation 180 behind the petal portion 172 of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 (back side). Specifically, in the front-rear direction Z of the game board 30, since the rotating body 182 of the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180 is positioned behind the petal portion 172, the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180 is positioned at the top. When it is at the point position, it is possible to position a part of the rotary body 182 of the sub-rotary accessory for production 180 at a position hidden behind the petal part 172 .

Returning to the description of FIG. The sub-rotating accessory for production arranged on the left side in the front view (hereinafter also referred to as the second sub-rotating accessory for production) is arranged on the right side in the front view (hereinafter referred to as the first production sub-rotating accessory) It has almost the same configuration as compared with 180 (also called a sub-rotary accessory for use) 180. That is, the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 includes a rotating shaft portion 191 and a rotating body 192 in the same manner as the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 . The rotating body 192 is different from the rotating body 182 of the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 in that the character strings 193a and 194a drawn on the transparent resins 193 and 194 are "SML". are the same. That is, on the rotating body 192, a rainbow-colored character string 193a of "SML" and a black-colored character string 194a of "SML" are drawn. SML is an abbreviation for SMALL. A long flat connecting rod 195 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 191 .

The sub-rotating accessory drive section for presentation (hereinafter referred to as the sub-rotating accessory drive section for second presentation) 99 that operates the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 190 also operates the sub-rotary accessory for presentation 180. It has almost the same configuration as the effect sub-rotary accessory drive section 98 (FIG. 17, hereinafter referred to as the first effect sub-rotary accessory drive section) to be operated. That is, the second effect sub-rotational accessory driving section 99 includes a sub-rotating accessory rotating motor, a rack and pinion mechanism, and a pinion coupling motor. The second effect sub-rotating accessory drive unit 99 rotates the second effect sub-rotating accessory drive 190 counterclockwise in front view in the same manner as the first effect sub-rotary accessory drive unit 98, It is moved from the position to the highest point position, and then returned from the highest point position to the origin position. When the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is at the origin position, the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is located at a position where most of the rotating body 192 is hidden behind the cover plate 199 in a front view. . When the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is at the highest point position, when the effect main rotating accessory 170 moves to the lowest point position, the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is in the front view , a part of the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 can be positioned behind the petal part 172 of the effect main rotating accessory 170 .

<<1-4-6>> Big or Small Production:
The big or small effect processing will be described in detail below. In the big or small effect processing, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 cooperate to win a jackpot in a winning lottery. A big or small production is performed for announcing the number of round games acquired and the presence or absence of a holding group. First, the control of the production main rotating accessory 170 by the big or small production process will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the big or small performance when the result of the winning lottery in the game cycle is a big win, and decides to execute the big or small performance. If so, big or small effect processing is executed. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the big or small effect is performed by generating a random number for the big or small effect and determining whether or not the random number matches a predetermined value.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 connects the pinion after the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a big win (at the start of the opening period described later). The motor 176 (see FIG. 14) is controlled to move the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 from the origin position to the lowest position. In addition, the MPU 92 rotates the main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 (Fig. 14) to rotate the production main rotating accessory 170 counterclockwise RL in the front view, and control the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 (see FIG. 14) to move the petals 172 from the petal closed state. Change to petal open state.

FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the production main rotating accessory 170 and the like in the big or small production process. As a result of controlling the main rotary accessory rotation motor 174 and controlling the scaling mechanism 177 at the above timing, as shown in FIG. While moving to the position (while moving in the +Y direction), it changes from the petal closed state to the petal open state and rotates counterclockwise RL in the front view.

Thereafter, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 reaches the lowest position, the MPU 92 controls the motor for rotating the main rotating accessory 174 to rotate the rotating main rotating accessory for effect 170 to a predetermined level. Stop at the rotation stop position. The state shown in FIG. 18(b) is a state in which the rotation is stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position. A predetermined rotation stop position (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined rotation stop position) will be described later. Next, the MPU 92 controls the enlargement/reduction mechanism section 177 after a specific time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed from the stopped state to change each petal section 172 from the petal open state to the petal closed state. After that, the MPU 92 controls the pinion connection motor 176 to return the production main rotating accessory 170 from the lowest point position to the origin position.

The predetermined rotation stop position will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a first predetermined rotation stop position and a second predetermined rotation stop position are prepared in advance as predetermined rotation stop positions at the lowest position of the main rotating accessory 170 for effect. ing. The first predetermined rotation stop position is a position at which the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 can be engaged. position. As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the first predetermined rotation stop position, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is equipped with With respect to the magnifying lens LZ, the rainbow-colored character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 that has moved to the highest point position can overlap. Become. That is, in the front view of the game board 30, for the rainbow character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 positioned at the highest position, The position of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 when the centers of the magnifying lenses LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 overlap corresponds to the first predetermined rotation stop position. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position, the first effect sub-purpose that has moved to the highest point position in the front view of the game board 30 The center of the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory 170 for presentation overlaps with the position of the rainbow-colored character string 183a or the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the rotating accessory 180. is possible, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170 at the first predetermined rotation stop position.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the second predetermined rotation stop position of the main rotating accessory for production 170. As shown in FIG. The second predetermined rotation stop position is a position where it is possible to interact with the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190, specifically, the position of the effect main rotating accessory 170 shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 19, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is at the second predetermined rotation stop position, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is On the other hand, the rainbow character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 that has moved to the highest point position can be overlapped. That is, in the front view of the game board 30, for the rainbow character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 located at the highest position, The position of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 when the centers of the magnifying lenses LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 overlap corresponds to the second predetermined rotation stop position. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest point position, the second effect sub-purpose that has moved to the highest point position in the front view of the game board 30 The center of the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory 170 for production overlaps the position of the rainbow-colored character string 193a or the black character string 194a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the rotating accessory 190. is possible, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop the rotating performance main rotating accessory 170 at the second predetermined rotation stop position.

It should be noted that which of the first predetermined rotation stop position and the second predetermined rotation stop position is adopted as the predetermined rotation stop position is obtained at the time of winning the jackpot that triggers the execution of the big or small effect processing. It is determined according to the number of round games. Specifically, when the result of the allocation determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 16R normal jackpot, the main By controlling the rotating accessory rotating motor 174, the production main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at the first predetermined rotation stop position. On the other hand, when the result of the allocation determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing is the 8R variable variable jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the main rotating accessory at the lowest point position. The rotation motor 174 is controlled to stop the production main rotating accessory 170 at the second predetermined rotation stop position.

In the big or small production process, the main rotating accessory for production 170 described above is controlled, and the sub-rotating accessory for first production 180 and the sub-rotating accessory for second production 190 are controlled. . Next, the control of the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 will be described. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first effect sub-rotating role 180 and the second effect sub-rotating role 180 and the second effect sub-rotating role 190 move in the same manner. The control for the second production sub rotating accessory 190 is performed.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 operates each pinion connecting motor in synchronization with moving the effect main rotary accessory 170 from the origin position to the lowest point position. (See FIG. 17) to move the sub-rotating accessory 180, 190 for effect from the origin position to the highest point position. The moving speed at this time was constant. In addition, the MPU 92 rotates each sub-rotary role product rotation motor at a timing (timing before reaching the top position) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the movement of each of the sub-rotary role products 180 and 190 for production. 186 (see FIG. 17) is controlled to rotate each sub rotating accessory 180, 190 for presentation counterclockwise RL when viewed from the front. At this time, the rotation speed was kept constant. As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(a), each of the effect sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 moves from the origin position to the highest point position (while moving in the -Y direction), Rotate around RL. When the main rotating accessory for production 170 and the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 are in the form shown in FIG. Since the rotating accessories 180 and 190 are separated from each other in terms of distance, the rotating bodies 182 and 192 of the respective sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 are the main rotating accessories for production when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. It is visible without passing through the petal portion 172 of 170 . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in synchronism with moving the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 from the origin position to the lowest position, each secondary rotating accessory for presentation 180 , 190 are moved from the origin position to the highest point position, the timing of movement of both need not always be the same, and as a modification, the timing of movement of both may be shifted. Specifically, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 may be first moved to the lowest position, and then the sub rotating accessories for effect 180 and 190 may be moved to the highest position. After moving the secondary sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 to the highest position, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 may be moved to the lowest position.

Thereafter, the MPU 92 controls the motors 186 for rotating the sub-rotating role products when the respective sub-rotating role products 180 and 190 for production reach the highest position, and the sub-rotating role products for production that are rotating 180, 190 are stopped at a specific rotation stop position. The state shown in FIG. 18(b) is a state in which the rotation is stopped at a specific rotation stop position. A specific rotation stop position (hereinafter referred to as a specific rotation stop position) will be described later. The timing at which each sub-rotary accessory for effect 180, 190 stops at a specific rotation stop position is controlled so as to be synchronized with the timing at which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at a predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position. ing. It should be noted that the timings of stopping the rotation of both do not necessarily have to match, and as a modification, the timings of stopping the rotation of both may be shifted. Specifically, after the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 that is rotating is first stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position, the rotating sub-rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 are stopped at a specific rotation stop position. Alternatively, after first stopping the rotating production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 at a specific rotation stop position, the rotating production main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at a predetermined rotation stop position. It is good also as a structure stopped by. Next, the MPU 92 controls each pinion connection motor 188 after a specific time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed from the stopped state, and moves each sub-rotation accessory 180, 190 for production from the highest point position. Return to origin position.

The specific rotation stop position will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a first specific rotation stop position and a second specific rotation stop position are set in advance as the specific rotation stop position at the top position of each sub-rotary accessory 180, 190 for production. prepared. The first specific rotation stop position is a position where the rainbow-colored character string 183a (or 193a) is on the upper side, as shown in FIG. The second specific rotation stop position is a position in which the vertical direction is reversed from that shown in FIG.

In FIG. 18(b), in synchronism with the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reaching the lowest position, the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 reach the highest position, and then each of the presentations A state in which the sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 for the player are stopped at the first specific rotation stop position is shown. As described above, at the first specific rotation stop position, the sub-representative rotating accessories 180 and 190 are in a state in which the rainbow-colored character string 183a (or 193a) is on the upper side. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 18(b), the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the first predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position. The rainbow-colored character string 183a "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary role 180 overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating role 170. FIG. That is, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in a rotated state and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 in a rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The character string 183a of the rainbow color "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first sub-rotary accessory 180 for the first production overlaps perfectly with the LZ. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored character string "SML" 193a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

In FIG. 19 as well, in synchronism with the effect main rotating accessory 170 reaching the lowest position, the effect sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 reach the highest point position, and then each effect sub-rotating accessory reaches the lowest point position. A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the first specific rotation stop position is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 19, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the second predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, so that when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 A rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the rotator 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided in the . That is, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub rotating accessory for presentation 190 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The rainbow-colored character string 193a of "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 overlaps perfectly with LZ. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the second specific rotation stop position for each sub-rotation accessory 180, 190 for production. In FIG. 20, in synchronism with the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 reaching the lowest point position, the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 reach the highest point position, and then each sub rotating accessory for presentation reaches the lowest point position. A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the second specific rotation stop position is shown. As described above, at the second specific rotation stop position, the sub-representative rotating accessories 180 and 190 are in a state in which the black character string 184a (or 194a) is on the upper side. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 20, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the first predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, so that when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating role for effect A black character string 184a of "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first sub-rotating accessory 180 for presentation overlaps with the magnifying lens LZ provided on the object 170. FIG. That is, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in a rotated state and the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 in a rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The black character string 184a of "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 exactly overlaps with LZ. On the other hand, the character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

In FIG. 21 as well, in synchronism with the effect main rotating accessory 170 reaching the lowest position, each of the effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 reaches the highest point position, and then each of the effect sub rotating accessories A state in which the accessories 180 and 190 are stopped at the second specific rotation stop position is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 21, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 stops at the second predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position, so that when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the main rotating accessory for effect 170 A black character string 194a of "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 is superimposed on the magnifying lens LZ provided in the . In other words, both the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in the rotated state and the sub rotating accessory for presentation 190 in the rotated state are stopped, and the magnifying lens provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is stopped. The character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 exactly overlaps with LZ. On the other hand, the character string 184a of black "BIG" drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 does not overlap the position of the magnifying lens LZ.

Whether the first specific rotation stop position or the second specific rotation stop position is used as the specific rotation stop position is determined according to the presence or absence of the holding train. Specifically, when the determination result of the presence or absence of the holding series executed at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the big or small production process indicates that there is a holding series, each production sub-rotation is performed. Each sub-rotating accessory rotating motor 186 is controlled at the top position of the accessory 180, 190 to stop each sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 at the first specific rotation stop position. On the other hand, when the determination result of the presence/absence of the holding series executed at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is no holding series, each sub rotating accessory 180 for production. , 190, each main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is controlled to stop each sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 at a second specific rotation stop position.

The sound emission control device 90 instructs the display control device 100 to display an image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 during the specific time period in which the rotation of the production main rotating accessory 170 is stopped at the lowest position. A process for displaying a predetermined image is performed. The predetermined image is the same image as the predetermined image displayed during the one-shot notification effect. That is, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 19 to 21, the magnifying lens LZ can be moved on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when the main rotating accessory for production 170 is at the lowest position. An image in which a plurality of (10 in this embodiment) circular high-brightness portions HB are arranged at equal intervals so as to overlap the circular orbit is displayed as a predetermined image.

The light emitted from each high-brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image travels toward the front side of the game board 30, but is blocked by each petal portion 172 on the way, or escapes to the player side through gaps between adjacent petal portions 172. Or, it is magnified through a magnifying lens LZ embedded in one petal portion 172L and sent to the player side. According to the big or small effect processing, as described above, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 or the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is displayed with respect to the magnifying lens LZ. Since the character strings (any one of 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a) provided in the image overlap each other, the character strings are enlarged and conspicuously displayed by the light emitted from the high luminance portion HB included in the predetermined image. can be done.

In summary, according to the big or small effect processing, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 operate as follows. become.

When the execution of the big or small effect process is started, after the end of the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the main rotary accessory for effect 170 moves from the origin position shown in FIG. 3 to the lowest point position. At the same time, the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 move from the origin position shown in FIG. 3 to the highest point position. The performance main rotating accessory 170 changes from the petal closed state to the petal open state while moving from the origin position to the lowest point position, and rotates counterclockwise RL when viewed from the front. The first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 rotate counterclockwise RL in the front view while moving from the origin position to the highest point position (see FIG. 18). As a modification of the present embodiment, when the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the first and second effect sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 start to move, a voice saying "big or small" is produced. It may be configured to output.

When the production main rotating accessory 170 reaches the lowest position, it stops at the first or second predetermined rotation stop position. When the first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 reach the top position, they stop at the first or second specific rotation stop position. The timing at which the production main rotating accessory 170 stops at the predetermined rotation stop position at the lowest position is synchronized with the timing at which the production sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 stop at the specific rotation stop position. controlled. After that, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170, the sub rotating accessory for first presentation 180, and the sub rotating accessory for second presentation 190 are kept stopped for a specific time (for example, 3 seconds). During this specific time period, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 are shown in FIGS. 18(b), 19, 20, Alternatively, it can take the form shown in FIG.

According to the form shown in FIG. 18(b), the rainbow-colored character string 183a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the sub rotating accessory 180 for the first effect is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. be. According to the form shown in FIG. 19, the rainbow-colored character string "SML" 193a drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. According to the form shown in FIG. 20, the black character string 184a drawn on the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 is enlarged by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. According to the aspect shown in FIG. 21, the character string 194a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. In other words, when the main rotating accessory for effect 170 and the sub rotating accessory for effect 180, 190 are in the form shown in FIG. 18(b), FIG. 19, FIG. A rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a, a rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a, and a black "BIG" character drawn on the rotating bodies 182, 192 of the second production sub-rotating accessories 180, 190. Column 184a, or black "SML" text 194a, is visible through petal 172L with magnifying lens LZ.

During the period of the specific time, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 are shown in FIGS. Which of the forms shown in FIG. 21 can be taken is specified from the result of the allocation judgment executed at the time of the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small effect process, as described above. It is determined by the number of round games to be played and the determination result of the presence or absence of the holding series which is executed at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot which triggered the execution of the big or small effect processing. That is, when the number of round games is 16 and there is a holding group, the form shown in FIG. It can take the form shown. When the number of round games is 16 and there is no holding ream, the form shown in FIG. obtain. When the number of round games is 8 and there is a holding string, the form shown in FIG. 19, that is, the form in which the rainbow-colored character string 193a "SML" is enlarged by the magnifying lens LZ is displayed. can take When the number of round games is 8 and there is no holding ream, the form shown in FIG. obtain.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the game cycle in which the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot winning, the main rotary accessory for presentation 170 rotates and descends to the lowest point position. , the first and second effect sub-rotary accessories 180, 190 come up to the highest position while rotating, and then the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the first and second effect sub-rotating accessory 180. , 190 stop rotating together, and the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a drawn on the first or second sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 are drawn by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170. , 194a is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can be informed of the number of round games and the presence/absence of a holding group.

According to the big or small production of the above configuration, the character string 183a drawn on the first or second sub-rotary accessory for production 180, 190 with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170, It is possible to give the player a feeling of urgency (feeling of excitement) such as which one of 184a, 193a, and 194a coincides (stops). In addition, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a is drawn on the first sub-rotary accessory for production 180 by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170. is displayed in an enlarged manner, the number of acquisition round games in the case of winning a big win in a winning lottery becomes 16 times, and the player can be given the double joy of having a holding run. Further, according to the big or small effect, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for effect 170 enlarges the character string 184a of the black "BIG" drawn on the sub rotating accessory for effect 180. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the joy that the number of acquired round games will be 16 times in the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, hold the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that there is no ren. Further, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the production main rotating accessory 170. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of having a holding group in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, the winning round game in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that the number of times is eight. Furthermore, according to the big or small production, the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170 enlarges the character string 194a of the black "SML" drawn on the sub rotary accessory for production 190. is displayed, the number of winning round games in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will be 8 times, and there will be no pending series, so the feeling that it was better than not winning the jackpot feeling) can be imparted to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 22 is a schematic side view of a rotating device of a comparative example. The rotating device includes a performance rotating accessory 970 , a rotating motor 974 , a scaling mechanism 977 , and an LED (light emitting diode) 979 . The production rotating accessory 970 includes a rotating shaft portion 971 and a plurality of petal portions 972 . Each petal portion 972 is a plate-like member and has a petal shape when viewed from the front, similarly to the petal portion 172 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The rotation motor 974 has substantially the same configuration as the main rotation accessory rotation motor 174 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The enlarging/reducing mechanism section 977 has substantially the same configuration as the enlarging/reducing mechanism section 177 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the rotating device of this comparative example, each petal portion 972 is made of a translucent material. An LED 979 is attached to the rear surface side of each petal portion 972 . Each LED 979 irradiates each translucent petal portion 972 from the back side. The mounting position of each LED 979 is a position very close to each petal portion 972 , and each LED 979 is configured to rotate in synchronization with each petal portion 972 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an image in which the circular high-brightness portion HB is drawn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, so that the high-brightness portion HB is used as a light source for illuminating the petal portion 172L. In contrast, in the conventional rotating device, the LEDs 979 attached in the immediate vicinity of the back side of the petal portions 972 directly illuminate each petal portion 972 .

In the rotating device of the comparative example, the distance between each petal portion 972 and each LED 979 was short. Therefore, in the rotating device of the comparative example, it was impossible to insert a plate-like member between each petal portion 972 and each LED 979 . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the light source for illuminating the flower petal portion 172L is configured by the high brightness portion HB displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, so that the flower petal portion 172L and the flower petal The distance between the light source that irradiates the part 172L is lengthened so that the sub-rotary accessories 180, 190 for presentation can be inserted into the space between them. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 can cooperate with the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 having the petal portion 172L. In this embodiment, it is possible to implement a big or small effect for notifying the number of round games obtained when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery and the presence or absence of a holding group.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is provided with a plurality of petal portions 172 rotatable around a rotating shaft portion 171, and is one of the plurality of petal portions 172. The flower petal portion 172L is provided with a magnifying lens LZ so that the high brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 can be visually recognized. can switch to Rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation are configured to be rotatable, and when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is not seen through. a possible first position (see, eg, FIG. 18(a)) and a second position visible through the petal portion 172L (see, eg, FIG. 18(b), FIG. 19, FIG. 20, or FIG. 21); can be displaced between Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the one-shot announcement effect, the high brightness portion HB is in the first state in which the high brightness portion HB can be visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal portion 172L, and in the big or small effect, the rotating petal portion By moving the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 to the back side of 172L, the rotating body 182 or the rotating body 192 blocks the light from the high brightness part HB and rotates. A second state is entered in which the body 182 or the rotating body 192 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. For this reason, when the first state is brought about by the one-shot notification performance, the winning lottery result is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win, as described above. A player can be notified of something. In addition, when the second state is reached by the big or small effect, as described above, it is determined whether the number of acquired round games is 16 or 8, and whether there is a holding group. Players can be notified of this. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given the joy of winning the jackpot by the result of winning lottery before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to winning the jackpot by the one-shot notification effect. In addition to being able to do it, there is a little expectation and a little bit of expectation such as whether the number of round games acquired in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery will be 16 or 8, and whether there will be a pending group due to the big or small production. A feeling of discouragement can be imparted to the player. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the outer shape of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for effect is the same as that of the rotating bodies 182 and 192. Since the points are symmetrical with respect to the center of , the beauty of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 can be enhanced when the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 are rotated. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the petal portion 172 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 and the rotors 182 and 192 provided in the producing sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 are formed of a resin material. Since these parts are formed easily, the degree of freedom in the shape of these parts is high. For this reason, the production using the production main rotary accessory 170 and the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 having these parts, that is, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production should have a higher impact. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the rotating shaft portion 171 provided in the effect main rotary accessory 170 is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30, It is possible to rotate the petal portion 172 on a parallel plane with high accuracy. Therefore, it is easy to increase the outer diameter of the production main rotary accessory 170, and as a result, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, conventionally known rotating accessories have a light-emitting part, and can perform an effect of simply rotating while the light-emitting part emits light. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, and the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 are illuminated from the back side. Since the design display device 41 that functions as a display device 41 has an independent configuration, there is a one-shot notification effect in which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 rotates while the light source on the back side emits light, and the light source on the back side does not emit light. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180, 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are involved in the state, and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 itself only mainly rotates. Both big or small production became feasible. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize various kinds of effects than before by making the rotating accessory and the light source independent. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 functioning as the light source can perform variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery and various effects such as character display. As a result, more efficient use of the device is possible.

<<1-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sx0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entrance detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0102.

At step Sx0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0103.

In step Sx0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, and variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 27) described later.

In step Sx0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sx0104 will be described later. After executing step Sx0104, the process proceeds to step Sx0105.

In step Sx0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sx0105 will be described later. After executing step Sx0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 23: Sx0104).

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sx0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sx0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 (Sx0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0203.

In step Sx0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0204.

In step Sx0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out as the start reservation number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reservation number RaN), and the first start reservation number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0209.

In step Sx0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sx0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sx0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sx0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sx0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sx0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0208.

In step Sx0208, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the number of reserved starts RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved number of starts RbN) is read, and the second reserved number of starts RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0209.

In step Sx0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sx0204 or step Sx0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sx0209, if the number N of start suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (Sx0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (Sx0209: YES), proceed to step Sx0210, add 1 to the start pending number N of the corresponding reserved area, and then proceed to step Sx0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0212.

In step Sx0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sx0103 (FIG. 23) are stored in the first of the free storage areas in the corresponding reservation area. Store in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sx0103, It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. In addition, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sx0103 is set to the second suspension It is stored in the first memory area of the empty memory areas of the area Rb, ie, the memory area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sx0210. After executing step Sx0212, the process proceeds to step Sx0213.

In step Sx0213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining whether or not there is an occurrence, etc., before the hold information is subject to a winning lottery by the main controller 60 . The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step Sx0213, the process proceeds to step Sx0214.

In step Sx0214, a process of setting pending commands is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information of each value (pending information) of hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 27 : step Sx0503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sx0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 24: Sx0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the pending information, determines the success or failure of the winning lottery, determines the type of big win, determines whether or not reach occurs, and the like. It is a process to be executed before becoming the target of

In step Sx0301, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 24) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to this ball entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery due to the current ball entry Also, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined by grasping the presence or absence of winning in the falling lottery.

In step Sx0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (Sx0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0303 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (FIG. 7(a)) stored in the area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sx0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big winning.

On the other hand, in step Sx0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round (Sx0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0304 to store the success/failure table. Refer to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (FIG. 7(b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win.

In step Sx0305, if it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big win (Sx0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the start opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be sorted this time is obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 33, the first start port sort table is referred to. , the distribution table for the second starting opening is referred to when the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 . After executing step Sx0307, the process proceeds to step Sx0308.

In step Sx0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step Sx0308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (Sx0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0309, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx0308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (Sx0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0315.

In step Sx0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to a big hit (Sx0305: NO), proceed to step Sx0311, The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sx0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sx0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sx0313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (Sx0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (Sx0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0315.

In step Sx0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 24) is grasped. After that, it proceeds to step Sx0316, refers to the variation time table for big hit stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and obtains variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. After executing step Sx0316, the process proceeds to step Sx0317.

In step Sx0317, a variation pattern is identified from the variation time information acquired in step Sx0316, and the type of the identified variation pattern is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sx0317, the current destination determination process ends.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 23: Sx0105).

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. At step Sx0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sx0401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sx0401: YES), proceed to step Sx0402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sx0401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sx0402, when it is determined that the reserved role number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sx0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0404.

In step Sx0404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sx0103 (FIG. 23) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sx0402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sx0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0502.

At step Sx0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0503.

In step Sx0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sx0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sx0503, the process proceeds to step Sx0504.

In step Sx0504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0505.

In step Sx0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sx0506. In step Sx0506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sx0506, the process proceeds to step Sx0507.

At step Sx0507, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0508.

In step Sx0508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0509.

In step Sx0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sx0503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sx0509, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sx0509: NO), in steps Sx0510 and Sx0511, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sx0510, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sx0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sx0509: YES), the process returns to step Sx0503, and each process from step Sx0503 to step Sx0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sx0503 to step Sx0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 27: Sx0506).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sx0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

At step Sx0601, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sx0601: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sx0602. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sx0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0602.

In step Sx0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variable display flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the variable display, and is turned OFF when the variable display is finished.

In step Sx0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is not displayed in a variable manner (Sx0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0603.

In step Sx0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sx0603, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx0602, when it is determined that the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display (Sx0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0604.

In step Sx0604, a variation end process for ending the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation end processing will be described later. After executing step Sx0604, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sx0603) of the game round control process.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sx0701, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Sx0701 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sx0701: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx0701 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sx0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0702.

In step Sx0702, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sx0703. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sx0703, a win determination process including a process when a big win is won in a win lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sx0703, the process proceeds to step Sx0704.

In step Sx0704, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the like. is the processing of Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx0704, the process proceeds to step Sx0705.

At step Sx0705, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. It contains information indicating whether or not it relates to hold information, as well as information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sx0706. After executing step Sx0705, the process proceeds to step Sx0706.

At step Sx0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about winning lottery as information on the jackpot type. is

The variation command and type command set at steps Sx0705 and Sx0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sx0503 in the normal process (FIG. 27). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sx0706, the process proceeds to step Sx0707.

In step Sx0707, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sx0707, the process proceeds to step Sx0708.

In step Sx0708, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx0708, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the change start process (FIG. 29: Sx0702).

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the pending information shift process. In step Sx0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) (the hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sx0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step Sx0801, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sx0801: YES), reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sx0802 to Sx0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sx0801, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sx0801: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sx0808 to Sx0813 is executed.

In step Sx0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sx0803 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0804. At step Sx0804, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0805.

In step Sx0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sx0805, the process proceeds to step Sx0806.

In step Sx0806, if the second pattern display portion flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0807.

In step Sx0807, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sx0807 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 of the normal processing (FIG. 27).

In step Sx0801, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sx0801: NO), step Proceed to Sx0808.

In step Sx0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0809. In step Sx0809, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step Sx0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0811.

In step Sx0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sx0811, the process proceeds to step Sx0812.

In step Sx0812, if the second pattern display flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0813.

In step Sx0813, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sx0813 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 of the normal process (FIG. 27). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 29: Sx0703).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sx0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sx0901, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode (Sx0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0902, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a big hit in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sx0901: NO), the process advances to step Sx0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0904.

In step Sx0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) in step Sx0902 or step Sx0903 is a big hit. In step Sx0904, when the result of the winning/failure determination is jackpot winning (Sx0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0905.

At step Sx0905, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sx0905, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sx0905: NO), proceed to step Sx0906 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step Sx0905, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sx0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0907, and a distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numeric range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sx0906 or step Sx0907, the process proceeds to step Sx0908.

In step Sx0908, a flag (jackpot flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sx0906 or step Sx0907 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON, and when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal jackpot flag is turned on. When it is 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step Sx0908, the process proceeds to step Sx0909.

In step Sx0909, the process of setting the stop result for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn in which the big win is won, it is set whether the variable display is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 5), the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step Sx0906 or step Sx0907. Address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sx0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sx0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sx0902 or step Sx0903 is not a big win (Sx0904: NO), proceed to step Sx0910, refer to the reach determination table, and reach occurs in the game round. or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 5). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sx0911.

In step Sx0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sx0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sx0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx0912, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx0912, the process proceeds to step Sx0913.

On the other hand, in step Sx0911, if the result of reach determination in step Sx0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sx0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx0913 without executing step Sx0912.

In step Sx0913, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sx0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 29: Sx0704).

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sx1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1002.

In step Sx1002, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence or absence of the jackpot and time saving provision, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. In step Sx1002, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state It is determined whether it is in any of the above, the result of the determination, the result of the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot or time saving, and the determination result of the reach determination that determines whether or not the reach occurs. One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 based on the above. After executing step Sx1002, the process proceeds to step Sx1003.

In step Sx1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sx1002, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sx1001 is obtained. After executing step Sx1003, the process proceeds to step Sx1004.

In step Sx1004, the variable time information acquired in step Sx1003 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation end processing will be described. The fluctuation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 28: Sx0604).

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation ending process. In step Sx1101, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sx1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 32). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sx1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sx1101: NO), this fluctuation ending process is terminated.

In step Sx1101, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sx1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1102, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game turn. A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. Subsequently, in step Sx1103, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sx1103, the process proceeds to step Sx1104.

In step Sx1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. At step Sx1104, none of the above flags is ON, that is, when it is determined that the win lottery win/fail result for the current game round is not a big win (Sx1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1105.

In step Sx1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sx1105, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sx1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1106 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sx1106, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sx1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1107, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sx1107, the process proceeds to step Sx1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1106 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sx1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1108 without executing step Sx1107.

In step Sx1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sx1108, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sx1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1109 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero.

If it is determined in step Sx1109 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sx1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1110 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After step Sx1110 is executed, this variable time ending process is terminated.

If it is determined that the high probability mode flag is ON in step Sx1108 (Sx1108: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC is greater than 0 in step Sx1109 (step Sx1109: YES) , the variable time ending process ends without executing step Sx1110. If it is determined at step Sx1105 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sx1105: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sx106 to Sx1110.

On the other hand, in step Sx1104, any one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, and 8R normal jackpot flag is ON. is determined to be a big hit (Sx1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1111, and the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sx1111, the process proceeds to step Sx1112. In step S1112, the value of the winning random number counter C1 included in the pending information left in the pending information storage area 64b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot winning in the remaining pending information. In step Sx1112, when it is determined that there is a jackpot winning in the remaining pending information (Sx1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1113 to set a command with a pending run. The command for the existence of pending ream is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that there is a jackpot winning in the reserving information left in the reserving information storage area 64b, that is, that there is a reserving ream. command. After step Sx1113 is executed, this variable time ending process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx1112, when it is determined that there is no jackpot winning in the remaining hold information (Sx1112: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1114 to set a no hold ream command. The no-holding ream command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub-side, recognize that there is no jackpot winning in the holding information left in the holding information storage area 64b, that is, there is no holding ream. command. After step Sx1114 is executed, this variable time ending process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 27: Sx0507).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sx1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sx1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sx1201: NO), the process advances to step Sx1202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sx1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sx1202: NO), the process advances to step Sx1203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sx1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sx1203: NO), the process advances to step Sx1204 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sx1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sx1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1205. On the other hand, in step Sx1204, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sx1204: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

At step Sx1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1206. At step Sx1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1207.

In step Sx1207, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sx1207, the process advances to step Sx1208 described above.

In step Sx1208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sx1208, the process proceeds to step Sx1209.

At step Sx1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sx0503 in the normal process (FIG. 27). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sx1209, the process advances to step Sx1210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sx1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sx1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1211.

In step Sx1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sx1211 that the opening period has ended (Sx1211: YES), the process advances to step Sx1212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1213.

In step Sx1213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sx1213, the process proceeds to step Sx1214.

In step Sx1214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sx1215, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 27: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1215, the game state transition processing is terminated.

At step Sx1202, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sx1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1216 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sx1216, the process proceeds to step Sx1217.

In step Sx1217, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. In step Sx1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sx1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1218. On the other hand, in step Sx1217, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sx1217: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sx1218, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sx1219.

In step Sx1219, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sx1219, the process proceeds to step Sx1220.

In step Sx1220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sx1220, the process proceeds to step Sx1221.

In step Sx1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx0503 in the normal processing (FIG. 27). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sx1221, the process proceeds to step Sx1222.

In step Sx1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sx1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sx1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1223.

In step Sx1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sx1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sx1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sx1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1224.

At step Sx1224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sx1225 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sx1225, the process advances to step Sx1226 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step Sx1226, the process proceeds to step Sx1227.

In step Sx1227, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. If it is determined in step Sx1227 that the total pending number CRN is "0" (Sx1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1228.

In step Sx1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is used to make the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the pattern variation (game round) ends. is a command that contains information about This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sx1228 in the normal processing (FIG. 27). After executing step Sx1228, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx1227, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is not "0" (Sx1227: NO), this game round control process is ended. Also, in step Sx1223, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sx1223: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 34: Sx1216).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. At step Sx1301, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step Sx1301 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sx1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1302.

In step Sx1302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sx1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sx1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1303.

In step Sx1303, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1304.

In step Sx1304, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 27: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1304, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step Sx1302 that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sx1302: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sx1303 and Sx1304.

If it is determined in step Sx1301 that the open/close door 36b is open (Sx1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1305.

In step Sx1305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sx1305 that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sx1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1306.

In step Sx1306, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1307.

In step Sx1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 27: step Sx0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sx1307, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sx1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sx1305: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sx1306 and Sx1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 34: Sx1225).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sx1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot in the jackpot flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sx1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag or the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 is ON (Sx1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1402, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of RAM64 The ON flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sx1402, the process proceeds to step Sx1403.

At step Sx1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step Sx1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. Thus, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1405.

In step Sx1405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1406.

In step Sx1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1411.

On the other hand, in step Sx1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM64 are not ON (Sx1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1407, and the 16R normal jackpot flag and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM64 are turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1408.

At step Sx1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sx1409, and 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1410.

In step Sx1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1411.

In step Sx1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 27: Sx0508).

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step Sx1501, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sx1501 that the supported flag is not ON (Sx1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1502.

In step Sx1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sx1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sx1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1503.

At step Sx1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sx1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1504.

In step Sx1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step Sx1504 that it is time to end the variable display (Sx1504: YES), the process advances to step Sx1505 to set the off display, and then the electronic support process ends. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sx1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1506.

In step Sx1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sx1506, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sx1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (Sx1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1507.

In step Sx1507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sx1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sx1507 (Sx1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sx1508 (Sx1508: YES), the process advances to step Sx1509 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1510.

In step Sx1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sx1509 is support winning. In step Sx1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sx1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sx1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sx1510: NO), the process for electric role support ends without executing the process of step Sx1511.

If it is determined in step Sx1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sx1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sx1508 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sx1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1512, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1513.

In step Sx1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sx1512 is support winning. In step Sx1513, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sx1513: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sx1513, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sx1513: YES), the process advances to step Sx1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

In step Sx1502, when it is determined that the support win flag is ON (Sx1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1515 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sx1515, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1515: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal picture unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sx1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1516.

In step Sx1516, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sx1517 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sx1501, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sx1501: YES), the process advances to step Sx1518 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: Sx1518) of the electric power support process.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sx1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sx1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1602.

In step Sx1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sx1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sx1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1602: YES), the process advances to step Sx1603 to perform a closing process of controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sx1603, the process proceeds to step Sx1604.

At step Sx1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sx1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sx1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sx1605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sx1605: YES), the process advances to step Sx1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sx1601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sx1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sx1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sx1607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sx1607: YES), the process advances to step Sx1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1609.

In step Sx1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sx1609: NO), the process advances to step Sx1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sx1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sx1610: YES), the process advances to step Sx1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1609 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sx1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sx1610 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (Sx1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<1-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sx1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sx1701, the process proceeds to step Sx1702.

In step Sx1702, pending command handling processing is executed. In pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sx1701 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sx1702, the process proceeds to step Sx1703.

In step Sx1703, a game round effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx1703, the process proceeds to step Sx1704.

In step Sx1704, a one-shot notification effect process is executed. The one-shot announcement effect process is a process for realizing the one-shot announcement effect described in detail in the "one-shot announcement effect" column included in the "outline of processing by game machine and effect operation" column. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is that the result of the winning lottery is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win by the operation of the main rotary accessory 170 for production. It is a production to announce. Specifically, the one-shot notification effect is effected with the content illustrated in FIG. 15 . After executing step Sx1704, the process advances to step Sx1705.

In step Sx1705, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sx1705, the process proceeds to step Sx1706.

In step Sx1706, big or small effect processing is executed. The big or small effect processing is a process for realizing the big or small effect described in detail in the "big or small effect" column included in the "outline of processing by game machine and effect operation" column. As described above, in the big or small effect, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, the sub-rotating accessory for first effect 180, and the sub-rotating accessory for second effect 190 work together to win a prize. This is an effect for notifying the number of round games obtained and the presence/absence of a holding group when a jackpot is won in the lottery. Specifically, in the big or small production, the contents illustrated in FIGS. 18 to 21 are produced. After executing step Sx1706, the process proceeds to step Sx1707.

In step Sx1707, background rendering processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sx1707, the process proceeds to step Sx1708.

In step Sx1708, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sx1708, the process proceeds to step Sx1709.

In step Sx1709, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sx1709, the process proceeds to step Sx1710.

At step Sx1710, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sx1710, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 39: Sx1702).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sx1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sx1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sx1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1802.

In step Sx1802, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is the one transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sx1802, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sx1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1803, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sx1803, the process proceeds to step Sx1804.

In step Sx1804, processing for pending change notice effect is executed. The pending change notice effect process is a process for realizing the hold change notice effect described in detail in the "hold change notice effect" column included in the "outline of processing by gaming machine" column. As described above, the pending change notice effect corresponds to the pending display icons H, Z whose display colors have changed by changing the display colors of the respective pending display icons H, Z from the default colors to other colors. This is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the jackpot with respect to the reserved information. After executing step Sx1804, the process proceeds to step Sx1806.

In step Sx1802, if it is determined that the hold command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (Sx1802: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sx1805 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sx1805, the process proceeds to step Sx1806.

The reason why steps Sx1803 and Sx1805 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sx1806, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Sx1806, the process proceeds to step Sx1807.

If it is determined in step Sx1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sx1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx1807 without executing steps Sx1802 to Sx1806.

In step Sx1807, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sx1803, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sx1805, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (lighting LED lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Sx1807, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39: Sx1703).

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a game cycle effect setting process. In step Sx1901, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sx1901, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sx1901: NO), this game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx1901 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sx1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sx1902.

In step Sx1902, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of the big hit, the presence or absence of the time saving addition, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are grasped respectively. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1903.

In step Sx1903, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (the contents of the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production and the execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sx1903, the process proceeds to step Sx1904.

In step Sx1904, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot, or the 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 4). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same of even symbol combinations can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. Further, when the winning lottery result of the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of a loss, the presence or absence of the reach generation is determined from the contents of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sx1905, a process for setting the variation pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sx1904 is obtained. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx1906.

At step Sx1906, the production pattern set at step Sx1903, the stop pattern set at step Sx1904, the variation pattern information set at step Sx1905, and the hold display information obtained at step Sx1906 in the current game round are produced. Set to command. After that, the process advances to step Sx1907 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sx1907, the process proceeds to step Sx1908.

In step Sx1908, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 or the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 . The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sx1908, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 41: Sx1903) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing effect pattern setting processing. At step Sx2001, random number RN for effect pattern is obtained from lottery counter area 94c of sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2002.

At step Sx2002, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of production pattern tables are stored according to the presence or absence of a big hit, the presence or absence of time saving, and the presence or absence of reach generation. At step Sx2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the presence or absence of the time reduction grant, the type of the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the reach generation grasped in step Sx1902 of the game round production setting process (FIG. 41), the production pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 One effect pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sx2002, the process proceeds to step Sx2003.

In step Sx2003, the effect pattern table specified in Sx2002 is referred to, and the fluctuation time grasped in step Sx1902 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 41) and the value of the current effect pattern random number RN obtained in step Sx2001 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sx2003, the process proceeds to step Sx2004.

At step Sx2004, the effect pattern acquired at step Sx2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sx2004, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 41: Sx1909) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sx2101, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. If it is determined in step Sx2101 that the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sx2101: YES), proceed to step Sx2102, Information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sx2101 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sx2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sx2103. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2104.

In step Sx2104, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sx2201, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2202.

In step Sx2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sx2301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sx2401, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 45) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sx2401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sx2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sx2401), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2403.

In step Sx2403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sx2402), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2404.

In step Sx2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sx2403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sx2405, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<1-7>> Functions and effects:
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the game cycle in which the winning lottery result is a jackpot, the main rotating accessory for production 170 rotates to the lowest point position. , the first and second effect sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 come up to the highest position while rotating, and then the main rotating accessory for effect 170 and the first and second effect Both the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 stop rotating, and the character string drawn on the first or second sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation is drawn by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for presentation 170. The player can be informed of the number of round games and the presence/absence of a hold train by executing a big or small effect of enlarging and displaying any one of 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a.

According to the big or small production of the above configuration, the character string 183a drawn on the first or second sub-rotary accessory for production 180, 190 with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170, It is possible to give the player a feeling of urgency (feeling of excitement) such as which one of 184a, 193a, and 194a coincides (stops). In addition, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "BIG" character string 183a is drawn on the first sub-rotary accessory for production 180 by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotary accessory for production 170. is displayed in an enlarged manner, the number of acquisition round games in the case of winning a big win in a winning lottery becomes 16 times, and the player can be given the double joy of having a holding run. Further, according to the big or small effect, the magnifying lens LZ provided on the main rotating accessory for effect 170 enlarges the character string 184a of the black "BIG" drawn on the sub rotating accessory for effect 180. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the joy that the number of acquired round games will be 16 times in the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, hold the case of winning a big win in the winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that there is no ren. Further, according to the big or small production, the rainbow-colored "SML" character string 193a drawn on the second production sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ provided on the production main rotating accessory 170. is displayed, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of having a holding group in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery, and on the other hand, the winning round game in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery It is possible to give the player a slight sense of disappointment that the number of times is eight. Furthermore, according to the big or small production, the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotary accessory for production 170 enlarges the character string 194a of the black "SML" drawn on the sub rotary accessory for production 190. is displayed, the number of winning round games in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will be 8 times, and there will be no pending series, so the feeling that it was better than not winning the jackpot feeling) can be imparted to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is provided with a plurality of petal portions 172 rotatable around a rotating shaft portion 171, and is one of the plurality of petal portions 172. The flower petal portion 172L is provided with a magnifying lens LZ so that the high brightness portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 can be visually recognized. can switch to Rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub rotating accessory 180 for presentation are configured to be rotatable, and when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is not seen through. a possible first position (see, eg, FIG. 18(a)) and a second position visible through the petal portion 172L (see, eg, FIG. 18(b), FIG. 19, FIG. 20, or FIG. 21); can be displaced between Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the one-shot announcement effect, the high brightness portion HB is in the first state in which the high brightness portion HB can be visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal portion 172L, and in the big or small effect, the rotating petal portion By moving the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 to the back side of 172L, the rotating body 182 or the rotating body 192 blocks the light from the high brightness part HB and rotates. A second state is entered in which the body 182 or the rotating body 192 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. For this reason, when the first state is brought about by the one-shot notification performance, the winning lottery result is a big win before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to the big win, as described above. A player can be notified of something. In addition, when the second state is reached by the big or small effect, as described above, it is determined whether the number of acquired round games is 16 or 8, and whether there is a holding group. Players can be notified of this. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given the joy of winning the jackpot by the result of winning lottery before the combination of symbols becomes a predetermined combination corresponding to winning the jackpot by the one-shot notification effect. In addition to being able to do it, there is a little expectation and a little bit of expectation such as whether the number of round games acquired in the case of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery will be 16 or 8, and whether there will be a pending group due to the big or small production. A feeling of discouragement can be imparted to the player. As a result, with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the outer shape of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 for effect is the same as that of the rotating bodies 182 and 192. Since the points are symmetrical with respect to the center of , the beauty of the rotating bodies 182 and 192 can be enhanced when the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 are rotated. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the petal portion 172 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 and the rotors 182 and 192 provided in the producing sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 are formed of a resin material. Since these parts are formed easily, the degree of freedom in the shape of these parts is high. For this reason, the production using the production main rotary accessory 170 and the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 having these parts, that is, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production should have a higher impact. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the rotating shaft portion 171 provided in the effect main rotary accessory 170 is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30, It is possible to rotate the petal portion 172 on a parallel plane with high accuracy. Therefore, it is easy to increase the outer diameter of the production main rotary accessory 170, and as a result, the one-shot announcement production and the big or small production can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, conventionally known rotating accessories have a light-emitting part, and can perform an effect of simply rotating while the light-emitting part emits light. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main rotating accessory for effect 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, and the petal portion 172L of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 are illuminated from the back side. Since the design display device 41 that functions as a display device 41 has an independent configuration, there is a one-shot notification effect in which the main rotating accessory for effect 170 rotates while the light source on the back side emits light, and the light source on the back side does not emit light. The main rotating accessory for presentation 170 and the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180, 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are involved in the state, and the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 itself only mainly rotates. Both big or small production became feasible. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize various kinds of effects than before by making the rotating accessory and the light source independent. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 functioning as the light source can perform variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery and various effects such as character display. As a result, more efficient use of the device is possible.

<<1-8>> Modified example of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted. Various modifications of the production main rotating accessory 170 and the production main rotating accessory driving unit 97 as an example of the first rotating body will be described as first to 12 variations.

<<1-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the production main rotating accessory 170 as an example of the first rotating body is configured to include five petal portions 172 as rotating plate portions, but instead of this, The number of petal parts may be a plurality of other numbers such as 2, 3, 4, or 6, or may be 1. That is, the number of rotating plate portions included in the first rotating body may be any number, and may be one. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the first rotating body is used for presentation, but it is not necessarily for presentation, and may be used for various purposes. In short, the first rotating body may be used for any purpose as long as the effect of the present invention can be exhibited by the interaction between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. .

<<1-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, a petal shape is adopted as the shape of the rotating plate provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 as an example of the first rotating body, but instead of this, the first rotating body Other shapes such as rectangular, triangular, elliptical, circular (perfect circular or distorted circular) may be adopted as the shape of the rotating plate portion. In short, the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body has a rotating surface, and if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side (rear side) of the surface, any shape can be used. There may be.

<<1-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the petal portion 172 as the rotating plate portion provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 is formed of a translucent material, but is instead formed of a transparent material. You may The material may be either resin material, glass material, or the like. In this case, the transparent portion in the petal portion may not be the entire petal, but may be a part of the petal. In the first embodiment and its modification in which the petal portion 172 is made of a translucent material, the translucent portion may not be the entire petal, but may be a part of the petal.

<<1-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the petal portion 172 is formed of a translucent material, and the magnifying lens LZ is provided in one petal portion 172L. , and a magnifying lens LZ may be provided in one petal portion 172L. In short, if one of the plurality of petal portions 172L is provided with the magnifying lens LZ, the other petal portions 172L can be made of any transparent, translucent, or opaque material. good too.

<<1-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the petal portion 172 is formed of a translucent material and the magnifying lens LZ is provided in one petal portion 172L. , and none of the petals 172 is provided with a magnifying lens. The material may be either resin material, glass material, or the like. The term "transparency" as used herein means transparency to the extent that the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a provided in the first effect sub-rotary accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 can be visually recognized through the petal portion 172. Any degree of transparency is acceptable as long as it has transparency. According to this configuration, the character strings 183 a , 184 a , 193 a , 194 a described in the sub rotating accessories 180 , 190 for presentation can be clearly visually recognized through the petal portion 172 . In addition, when the petal portion 172 is formed of a resin material having transparency, it is easy to form, so the degree of freedom in the shape of the petal portion 172 is increased. It is possible to make the effect used have a higher impact. Furthermore, as another modified example, the petal portion as the rotating plate portion may have a region with a high light transmittance and a region with a lower light transmittance than the portion. In the case of this configuration, at the timing when each of the effect sub-rotating roles 180 and 190 stops at a specific rotation stop position, each of the effect sub-rotating roles is placed on the back side of the high light transmittance region provided in the petal portion. It is assumed that the objects 180 and 190 move. According to this configuration, after the timing at which each of the sub-rotating accessory for effects 180 and 190 stops at the specific rotation stop position, the player can set each sub-rotating role for effect 180 and 190 so that the light transmittance of the petal portion is Clearly visible through high areas. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<1-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modified example, one petal portion 172L as a rotating plate portion is provided with the magnifying lens LZ. Alternatively, a configuration in which a transparent plastic plate is provided, a configuration in which a through hole is provided, or the like may be used. In short, the inside of the rotating plate portion may be configured in any way as long as the second rotating body can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion when the second rotating body moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion.

<<1-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the structure includes the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 for enlarging/reducing each petal portion 172. Instead, the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is eliminated and each petal portion 172 is enlarged/reduced. It may be configured not to allow In this configuration, as described in Modification 1, one petal portion may be provided as the rotating plate portion, or the single petal portion may be circular as described in Modification 2. In short, if the rotating plate portion has a rotating surface and the second rotating body can move to the back side (rear side) of the rotating plate portion, the number of the rotating plate portion is one. The rotating plate portion may have any shape.

<<1-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the rack and pinion mechanism 175 and the pinion coupling motor 176 are used to vertically move the production main rotary accessory 170. The pinion mechanism part 175 and the pinion connection motor 176 may be eliminated, and the production main rotating accessory 170 may be fixed at a specific position. The term “fixed” here means that the position in the vertical direction is fixed, and the petal portion 172 rotates. Specifically, the rotation shaft portion 171 provided in the production main rotating accessory 170 is fixed at a specific position. The specific position can be, for example, the origin position of the production main rotating accessory 170 in the first embodiment. According to this configuration, it becomes easy to move the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 to the back side of the rotating rendition main rotating accessory 170 . Therefore, according to this modification, simplification of control can be achieved. It should be noted that the production main rotating accessory 170 may be arranged at a fixed position not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, for example, the main rotating accessory for production 170, the first rotating body is It may be fixed at a specific position or moved to a specific position.

<<1-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is configured by a stepping motor, but instead, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is a DC motor with a brush or a DC motor without a brush. may be configured. These use a DC power supply as a power source for rotating the main rotating accessory for production 170, but instead of this, an AC power supply, ultrasonic waves generated using a piezoelectric element, and Coulomb imprinting force and repulsive force due to static electricity are used. , the kinetic energy of the game ball discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43 of the game board 30, or other kinetic energy of the game ball may be used as the power source for rotating the main rotary accessory 170 for presentation. . In short, in a configuration in which the first rotating body can rotate, exemplified by the production main rotating accessory 170, any device configuration can be used as a device for performing the rotation. Any power may be used as a power source for moving the .

<<1-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 is configured to rotate the main rotating accessory 170 for production at a constant speed. 174 may be configured to change the rotation speed of the main rotating accessory 170 for production. According to this configuration, since the rotation speed of the production main rotary accessory 170 changes, in the one-shot announcement production, the visibility of the high-brightness part HB seen through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L changes. It is possible to As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The rotational speed of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 may be changed at random, and the rotational speed may be set to 0 in the middle of the rotation, that is, the rotation may be stopped. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rotation speed changes with a predetermined trigger, and even in this configuration, the rotation speed may change to any magnitude including zero. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example, the rotation of the first rotating body The magnitude of the speed and the mode of change in the rotational speed may be any, including the case where the rotation is stopped halfway.

<<1-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the main rotating accessory rotating motor 174 rotates the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The object 170 may be configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. Further, instead of setting the direction of rotation of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 to a fixed direction, the rotating direction of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 may be reversed from one direction to the other direction. According to this configuration, since the rotation direction of the production main rotary accessory 170 changes, in the one-shot notification production, the visibility of the high-brightness part HB seen through the magnifying lens LZ of the rotating petal part 172L changes. It is possible to As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for production 170 as an example, the rotation of the first rotating body The direction may be any direction, and the configuration may be such that the direction of rotation is switched in the middle. In addition, as another modification, each time the opportunity to rotate the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is established, the rotation direction of the main rotating accessory for effect 170 is changed to the counterclockwise rotation direction and the clockwise rotation when viewed from the front. As a configuration for determining which direction to use, even if it is easier for the player to increase the advantage when it is decided to rotate clockwise than when it is decided to rotate counterclockwise. good. Specifically, when the result of the allocation judgment executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is the 8R probability variable jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the main rotary accessory 170 for production. rotate counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the result of the distribution determination executed in the winning lottery that triggered the execution of the big or small production process is the 16R variable variable jackpot or the 16R normal jackpot, the main rotary accessory 170 for production is rotated clockwise. rotate to With this configuration, it is more advantageous for the player when the rotation direction of the first rotating body is determined to be clockwise than when it is determined to be counterclockwise. According to this configuration, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 as an example of the first rotating body, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<1-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the production main rotating accessory 170, which is an example of the first rotating body, is arranged above the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. A configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating body is provided inside the display surface 41a of the device 41, inside the game area PA, inside the big winning opening 36a, or the like. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 as an example, any part of the game board 30 A configuration in which the first rotating body is provided at the position may be adopted.

Various modifications of the production sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 and the production sub-rotary accessory driving units 98 and 99 as examples of the second rotating body will be described below as modifications 13 to 22.

<<1-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modified example, in the vertical direction of the game board 30, the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190, which are examples of the second rotating body, are positioned below the rendition main rotating accessory 170. However, instead of this, the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 may be arranged above the main rotating accessory for production 170 . In this case, the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation are moved toward the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 from above the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 by the rack and pinion mechanism and the motor for connecting the pinion. It is configured to allow According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such that the sub-representative rotating accessories 180 and 190 pour down from above toward the main revolving accessory for effect 170, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotating body may be arranged on either the upper or lower side with respect to the first rotating body. In addition, as another modified example, the second rotating body, which is an example of the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190, moves from the origin position to the highest point position, and then returns from the highest point position to the origin position. However, instead of this, the second rotating body may move from the origin position to the highest point position, and then move further upward from the highest point position. Further, in the configuration in which the second rotating body is arranged above the first rotating body, the second rotating body moves from the origin position to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, and then further downward. It is good also as a structure which moves to. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotating body may be in any direction. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the production sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body are used for producing, but the second rotating body is not necessarily for producing. It is not necessary and may be used for various purposes. In short, the second rotating body may be used for any purpose as long as the effect of the present invention can be exhibited by the interaction between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. .

<<1-8-14>> Modification 14:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, it is configured to include two production sub-rotation accessories 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body. It may be configured to include one rotating accessory. In this case, for example, when the number of round games obtained when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery is 16, the sub rotating accessory for presentation is operated, and when the number of round games is 8, it is for presentation. The configuration is such that the sub-rotating accessory is not operated. According to this configuration, it is possible to announce that the number of round games obtained when a big win is won in the winning lottery is 16 and whether or not there is a holding series. In addition, as another modified example, three or more sub rotating accessories for presentation as the second rotating body may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment and its modification, most of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is hidden by the cover plate 199 when the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is at the origin position. , and only a part of each of the sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 is configured to protrude from the cover plate 199. , The entirety of each of the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for production may be covered by a cover plate 199. Also, the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for presentation may be detachable from the pachinko machine 10, and even in the detached state, the presentation using only the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 can be performed like the one-shot announcement presentation. It can be carried out. In short, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second rotating body constituted by the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 may move from any position including the outside of the pachinko machine. It suffices if it can move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the rotating body. In other words, the second rotating body does not need to always exist on the game board (on the game area), and may exist temporarily. Further, as a configuration in which the second rotating body moves to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, a configuration in which the entire second rotating body moves to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion may be used. A part of the 2-rotating body may be configured to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion.

<<1-8-15>> Modification 15:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the rotation shaft portion 181 of the first effect sub-rotation accessory 180 arranged on the right side and the rotation shaft portion 191 of the second effect sub-rotation accessory 190 arranged on the left side The first production sub-rotation accessory 180 and the second production sub-rotation accessory 190 were controlled so that the movement would be the same in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but instead of this, the first The rotating shaft portion 181 of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180 and the rotating shaft portion 191 of the second sub-rotating accessory for presentation 190 may move differently in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 toward the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 in various movements. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the rotating body 182 provided in the first directing sub-rotating role 180 arranged on the right side and the second directing sub-rotating role 190 arranged on the left side The first effect sub-rotating accessory 180 and the second effect sub-rotating accessory 190 are controlled so that the rotating body 192 provided rotates in the same manner. The rotating body 182 provided in the first effect sub rotating accessory 180 and the rotating body 192 provided in the second effect sub rotating accessory 190 may be rotated in different rotation modes. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the fact that the sub rotating accessories for presentation 180 and 190 rotate in various manners. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, in a configuration in which a plurality of second rotating bodies exemplified by the first and second production sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 are moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, Each of the plurality of second rotating bodies may independently and independently move in any direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and the rotation mode of each of the plurality of second rotating bodies may be any rotation mode. good.

<<1-8-16>> Modification 16:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, each sub rotating accessory 180, 190 for production is configured to move from the origin position to the highest point position in one route, but instead, it moves in a plurality of routes. may be configured. Further, the route is not limited to a straight route, and may be a curved route. According to these configurations, the player can enjoy the movement of the sub-rotating accessory for effect 180, 190 toward the main rotating accessory for effect 170 through various paths. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation There may be a plurality of movement routes of the body, and the shape of the movement route may take any shape.

<<1-8-17>> Modification 17:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, the speed at which each of the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 moves from the origin position to the highest point position is configured to be constant, but instead, each sub-for production It may be configured such that the speed at which the rotating accessories 180 and 190 move from the origin position to the highest point position can be changed. According to this configuration, when the moving speed is reduced, each sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 reaches the highest position while the sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 is moving. It is possible to impart a negative feeling to the player that the big or small effect will not be executed without the game being played. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The movement speed of the body may be of any size and mode of change.

<<1-8-18>> Modification 18:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the rotation speed of each sub-rotating accessory for production 180, 190 is configured to be constant. A configuration in which the speed can be changed is also possible. According to this configuration, when the sub-representation rotating accessories 180 and 190 move to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L, the direction of rotation of the rendition sub-rotating accessories 180 and 190 can be changed variously. can be made Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The speed of rotation of the body can be of any magnitude and manner of change.

<<1-8-19>> Modification 19:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the sub-rotating accessory rotating motor rotates the sub-rotating accessory 180, 190 for effect in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The sub-rotary accessories 180 and 190 may be configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, instead of setting the direction of rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 to a fixed direction, the direction of rotation of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is reversed from one direction to the other direction. may be According to this configuration, when the production sub-rotational accessories 180 and 190 move to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L, the rotation of the production sub-rotational accessories 180 and 190 can be changed in various ways. can be made Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The rotation direction of the body may be any direction, and the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

<<1-8-20>> Modification 20:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the rotating bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 as an example of the second rotating body are supported by the rotating shafts 181 and 191. However, instead of this configuration, the second rotating body may be configured to be rotatable without having a rotation shaft. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The body can be in any rotational mode.

<<1-8-21>> Modification 21:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, the rotary bodies 182 and 192 provided in the sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 are made of a resin material. It is good also as the structure formed with the material. Further, each rotating body 182 (192) is provided with a circular through-hole, and transparent resin 183, 184 (193, 194) is embedded in the through-hole. Although the rows 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) are drawn, instead, each rotating body is made of a uniform material (for example, iron) without through holes, and has a A configuration in which characters are written may also be used. With this configuration, the configuration of the rotating body 182 (192) can be simplified, and the manufacturing of the rotating body 182 (192) is easy. In addition, there is also the effect that the rotating body 182 (192) rotates smoothly without rattling. In short, the second rotating body moves from the light source to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body. As long as the characters can be visually recognized in a state in which the second rotating body is visible through the rotating plate portion by blocking the light, any configuration for writing the characters may be used.

<<1-8-22>> Modification 22:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the rotating shafts 181 and 191 provided in the sub-rotary accessories for effect 180 and 190 are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as the vertical direction of the game board 30). ), and the direction of each rotating shaft 181, 191 was fixed in the vertical direction of the game board 30, but instead, the direction of each rotating shaft 181, 191 is set to The vertical direction of the board 30 may be changed to a direction inclined by a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees) from the vertical direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect in which the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 is rotated while changing the direction of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 like a so-called swing. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the inclination angle from the vertical direction is not limited to one direction, and may be changed in various directions. In short, if it is possible for the second rotating body, such as each sub-rotary accessory for production 180 and 190, to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, the second rotation The body can be in any rotational mode.

<<1-8-23>> Modification 23:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, when the number of round games is 16 by the big or small production and there is a holding group, the rotating body 182 of the first production sub-rotary accessory 180 is drawn. The rainbow-colored character string 183a labeled "BIG" is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. character string 184a of "BIG" is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. In addition, when the number of round games is eight and there is a holding group, the rainbow-colored character string 193a "SML" drawn on the rotating body 192 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 190 is magnified. When the number of round games is 8 and there are no holding runs, the character string 194a in black "SML" drawn on the rotor 192 is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ. can take the form of On the other hand, as a modified example, the following configuration may be adopted.

FIG. 47 is a front view showing a pair of production sub-rotary accessories 880 and 890 in this modification. In this modification, when there is a holding group due to the big or small effect, and the number of round games is 16, the rainbow colored When the character string 883a of "BIG" is magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed, there is a holding ream, and the number of round games is eight, the rainbow-colored "SML" drawn on the rotating body 882 '' 884a is magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. Further, when there is no holding ream and the number of round games is 16, the character string 893a of the black "BIG" drawn on the rotary body 892 of the second effect sub-rotary accessory 890 is displayed by the magnifying lens. When the character string 894a of black "SML" drawn on the rotating body 892 is magnified and displayed by the LZ, and there is no holding ream and the number of round games is 8, the magnifying lens LZ magnifies the character string 894a. can take the form of In other words, in the first embodiment, when the number of round games is 16, the rainbow or black "BIG ” are magnified and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ, and when the number of round games is eight, the rainbow color or While the character strings 193a and 194a of black "SML" are enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ, in this modified example, when there is a holding stanza, the sub-rotation for the first effect shown in FIG. The rainbow-colored character strings 883a and 884a of "BIG" or "SML" drawn on the rotating body 882 of the role object 880 are magnified by the magnifying lens LZ and displayed. The character strings 893a and 894a of black "BIG" or "SML" drawn on the rotating body 892 of the sub rotating accessory 890 are enlarged and displayed by the magnifying lens LZ. According to this modified example, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player the ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment. In short, the second rotating body, which is an example of the second effect sub rotating accessory 180, 190, can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion provided in the first rotating body, which is an example of the main rotating accessory for effect 170. A first mode in which the frequency of winning a big win in a winning lottery during a predetermined period is high, and a second mode in which the frequency of winning a big win in a winning lottery in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode, according to the rotation mode of the rotating plate portion when the winning lottery is turned. The configuration of the second rotating body may be any configuration as long as it can be configured to be one of the two modes.

<<1-8-24>> Modification 24:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the big or small effect processing causes 10 circular high-brightness Although the predetermined image in which the part HB is arranged is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, instead of this, an image in which another number (one or more) of the high luminance parts HB are arranged. may be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . In short, the rotary bodies 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, 182, respectively, respectively, are moved to the uppermost position with respect to the magnifying lens LZ provided in the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 by the big or small presentation processing. If the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a drawn in 192 can be clearly recognized when the character strings 183a, 184a, 193a, and 194a are drawn on top of each other, what are the number of high-brightness portions HB and how are the positions of the high-brightness portions HB arranged? may be

<<1-8-25>> Modification 25:
In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the light source visible through the magnifying lens LZ provided in the petal portion 172L is the high luminance portion HB included in the predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. However, instead of this, the light source may be composed of various light emitting units such as a mercury lamp, an LED, and a laser light source. In addition, the overlapping position of the sub-rotating accessory for presentation 180, 190 with respect to the main rotating accessory for presentation 170 is defined as the outside of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the position of the game board 30 corresponding to the overlapping position is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting portion as the light source is arranged on the back surface side. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. The light emitting unit as the light source arranged on the back side of the overlapping position of the game board 30 may be newly provided for illuminating the main rotating accessory 170 for production, or may be made of polycarbonate resin. A light-emitting portion originally provided on the back side of the game board 30 for design effects may be used as the light source. According to this configuration, the configuration can be simplified. Further, the light source is arranged on the back side of the overlapping position of the game board 30, but the back side referred to here does not necessarily have to be a position that coincides with the overlapping position when viewed from the front. As long as the light from the two can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion, the position may not coincide with the overlapping position when viewed from the front. In short, as long as the light from the light source can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion, the configuration of the light source may be any, and the position of the light source may be any.

<<1-8-26>> Modification 26:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the rotating body 182 (192) provided in the production sub-rotating accessory 180 (190) moves to the back side of the rotating petal portion 172L. The character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) described in (192) block the light from the high brightness portion HB, and the character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) are visually recognized through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L. It was possible. On the other hand, as a modification, the portion that blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB may be the entire rotating body 182 (192). In short, the portion that blocks the light from the high luminance portion HB may be any portion as long as it is at least a portion of the rotating body 182 (192).

<<1-8-27>> Modification 27:
In the first embodiment and its modification, when the pair of sub-rotary accessories for production 180 and 190 move to the highest point position, the main rotating accessory for production 170 that has moved to the lowest position is equipped with As a first mode that is advantageous to the player, depending on which character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) of the sub-rotary accessory 180 (190) for presentation exactly match with the magnifying lens LZ, A mode in which the number of round games won is 16 when the player wins, and a second mode in which the player's advantage is lower than the first mode, in which the number of round games won is 8 when the jackpot is won. It was configured to be distributed to one of the modes of turning. On the other hand, as a modification, as a first mode that is advantageous to the player, instead of the mode in which the number of round games is 16, the result of the winning lottery is that the big win is confirmed. As a second mode in which the advantage is lower than that of the first mode, the result of winning lottery may be a loss. In addition, as the first mode that is advantageous to the player, it is also possible to replace with a configuration that increases the degree of expectation for the variable display, a configuration that increases the actual profit, a configuration that notifies highly profitable items, and the like. As a configuration that increases the expectation for the variable display, the type of reach develops into a type with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the advance notice effect is replaced with a performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, and the time until the effect and result announcement. Various things can be adopted, such as one in which a timer that defines is activated. The actual benefits include a configuration in which the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, a configuration in which it is possible to win a time-saving grant, a configuration in which a small win is won in a jackpot lottery, and the frequency at which a game ball enters the first start port 33. Various configurations can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the "Time-saving provision" is a success/failure result that triggers the transition to the support mode, but does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Various items such as pachinko machine settings (settings that determine the probability of winning a jackpot) and a base value that indicates the ball payout rate at normal times can be used as the highly useful notification items. The second mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the first mode, is less advantageous to the player than these examples. With these configurations as well, similar to the first embodiment and its modification, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In short, when the pair of sub rotating accessories for production 180 and 190 move to the highest point position, the magnifying lens LZ provided for the main rotating accessory for production 170 that has moved to the lowest position, Depending on which character strings 183a, 184a (193a, 194a) of the sub rotating accessory 180 (190) for presentation exactly match, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first advantage for the player are selected. Each of the first mode and the second mode may be of any type as long as it is a configuration that can be assigned to either of the second mode and the second mode, which is lower than the mode.

<<1-8-28>> Modification 28:
In the first embodiment and its modified example, the big or small effect using the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the effecting sub rotating accessory 180, 190 is a jackpot when the winning lottery result in the game round is won. However, instead of this, it may be configured to be executed when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a big win. In short, during any period of time when a game is being played in the pachinko machine, an effect using the effect main rotating accessory 170 and the effecting sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 is executed. may be For example, during the period from when the game ball launching mechanism starts shooting the game ball to the front surface of the game board until the last game ball is discharged from the out port 43 provided at the bottom of the game board 30, an effect It may be configured to execute an effect using the main rotating accessory 170 and the sub rotating accessories 180 and 190 for each effect.

<<1-8-29>> Modification 29:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the game balls provided in the pachinko machine may be stamped balls with characters written thereon, or may be blank balls with no characters written on them. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<1-8-30>> Modification 30:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<1-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiment and each of the modifications described above may be implemented by hardware, or part of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software. good too.

<<1-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature xA group>
The feature xA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xA1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; Displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate portion,
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
A game machine characterized by having

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xA2]
The gaming machine according to feature xA1,
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position (whether the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 18(b) or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode is advantageous to the player, and the advantage to the player is greater than that of the first mode. It can be either aspect with the low second aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower in quality than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA3]
A gaming machine according to feature xA1 or feature xA2,
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light source visually recognized through the rotating rotary plate portion in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA3,
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further improved.

[Feature xA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA4,
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be colored evenly. can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA5,
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the back surface of the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the side, after a predetermined timing, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA6,
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

[Feature xA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA7,
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, the rotation can be performed on a plane parallel to the surface of the game board with high accuracy. The rotating plate portion can be rotated. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA8,
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means is provided (structure of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means rains down toward the first rotating means from above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA9,
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA10,
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed. , the negative feeling that the second rotating means will not reach the second position and the second state will not occur can be imparted to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA11,
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the manner of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA12,
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA13,
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible to enhance the beauty of the second rotating means when the second rotating means is closed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA14,
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various modes in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA15,
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, when the second state is established, the characters written on the second rotating means can be visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion. can. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA16,
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

[Feature xA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA17,
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotating shaft during rotation can be changed, it is possible to change the rotation mode of the second rotating means in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA18,
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the light source is configured by the light emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

[Feature xA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xA1 to xA19,
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position (whether the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 18(b) or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. In a predetermined period (a period during which the reserved information remaining in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the jackpot winning is digested), the special information is determined by the determination means. and a first mode in which the frequency of satisfying the predetermined condition is high (in the modified example 23, there is a holding group), and the frequency of the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means is lower than in the first mode during the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be in either mode of the second mode (the holding group is eliminated in Modification 23).

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the first mode in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition with a high frequency in the predetermined period by the determination means; A second mode in which the frequency of the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xB group>
The feature xB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xB1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position (whether the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 18(b) or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first mode advantageous to the player It can be any aspect with a second aspect that is lower than the aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower in quality than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xC group>
The feature xC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xC1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotation speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the viewing mode of the light source viewed through the rotating rotating plate portion in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xD group>
The feature xD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature x D1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; Displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate portion,
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, according to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

<Feature xE group>
The feature xE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xE1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. The second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be made uniform in color, and in the second state, A player can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xF group>
The feature xF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xF1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance after a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xG group>
The feature xG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature x G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

<Feature xH group>
The feature xH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xH1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, The rotating plate portion can be rotated on planes that are parallel with precision. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xI group>
The feature xI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xI1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means is provided (structure of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means pours down toward the first rotating means from above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Features x J group>
The feature xJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xJ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; Displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate portion,
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristics x K group>
The feature xK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xK1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can change, for example, when the displacement speed decreases, the second rotating means is moving at its maximum. During this, it is possible to give the player a negative feeling that the second rotating means will not reach the second position and enter the second state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xL group>
The feature xL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xL1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. The second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. can be varied in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xM group>
The feature xM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xM1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. can be varied in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xN group>
The xN group of features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xN1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; Displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate portion,
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. The second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. The beauty of the second rotating means when rotated can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xO group>
The feature xO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xO1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various aspects in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xP group>
The feature xP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xP1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, the characters written on the second rotating means are visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion when the second state is established. be able to. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature x Q group>
The feature xQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xQ1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotating plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. If each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

<Feature xR group>
The feature xR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xR1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured so that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed, it is possible to change the rotation mode of the second rotating means in various ways. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature xS group>
The feature xS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xS1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Thus, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the light source is composed of the light emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature xT group>
The feature xT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xT1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The game machine is
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
has
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position (whether the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 18(b) or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. In a predetermined period (a period in which the reserved information remaining in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the jackpot winning is digested), the special information is determined by the determination means. and a first mode in which the frequency of satisfying the predetermined condition is high (in the modified example 23, there is a holding group), and a frequency in which the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means is lower than in the first mode in the predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized in that it can be in either mode of the second mode (there is no holding group in Modification 23).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Furthermore, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotary plate portion and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition at a high frequency in the predetermined period in the first mode. and a second mode in which the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means during the predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Feature xU group>
The feature xU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature xU1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a jackpot);
a first rotating means;
a second rotating means;
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (directing main rotating accessory 170) includes a rotating plate portion (petal portion 172L) rotatable around a rotating shaft (rotating shaft portion 171),
The rotating plate portion is configured so that a light source (high-brightness portion HB included in a predetermined image displayed on the display surface 41a) located on the back side can be visually recognized (configured to include a magnifying lens LZ), and a predetermined A configuration that can be switched between a rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (rotating body 182) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board is viewed from the front, at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means; displaceable between a second position visible through the rotating plate;
The rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position (whether the petal portion 172L is at the rotation stop position shown in FIG. 18(b) or the petal portion 172L is rotated as shown in FIG. A first mode (the number of round games is 16) that is advantageous to the player and a second mode (a round game that is lower than the first mode) that is advantageous to the player. 8 times).

According to this feature, the first rotating means can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined resting state. When the game board is viewed from the front, the second rotating means is displaced between at least a first position visible without passing through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means and a second position visible through the rotating plate portion. It is possible. Further, according to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, the first mode advantageous to the player and the first mode advantageous to the player It can be either aspect with the second aspect which is lower than the aspect. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotating state of the rotating plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode advantageous to the player, is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation, which is the first mode. Further, in the case where the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotating means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, which is less advantageous for the player than the first mode, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the first mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU2]
The gaming machine according to feature xU1,
A first state in which the light source can be seen through the rotating rotating plate portion in a predetermined game state (a state in which the result of the winning lottery is a big win) a state in which the high-brightness portion HB is visible);
When the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Possible second state (state in which the rotating body 182 blocks the light from the high-brightness portion HB in the big or small effect, and the rotating body 182 is visible through the magnifying lens LZ of the petal portion 172L, FIG. 18(b), state of FIG. 19, etc.),
A game machine characterized by having

According to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the first state in which the light source can be visually recognized through the rotating rotating plate portion and the second rotating means moving to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be achieved in the second state. and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. For this reason, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, it is possible to execute an effect constituted by the first state in which the light source is visible through the rotating rotary plate portion, and the first rotating means rotates the light source. By moving the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source, and the second rotating means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means. It is possible to execute an effect configured by the second state. When each of the first state effect and the second state effect can suggest that the player will be in an advantageous state, according to this feature, in a predetermined game state, the rotating rotating plate In the first state in which the light source can be seen through the part, the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate part rotated by the first rotating means, and the second rotating means blocks the light from the light source. Therefore, when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xU3]
A gaming machine according to feature xU1 or feature xU2,
The rotation speed of the first rotation means can be changed (configuration of modification 10)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the first rotating means can be changed, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light source visually recognized through the rotating rotary plate portion in a predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU3,
Each time an opportunity to rotate the first rotating means is established, the rotating direction of the first rotating means is selected from the first rotating direction and the second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. decide which one it will be,
Rotation in the second rotation direction tends to be more advantageous for the player than rotation in the first rotation direction (configuration of Modified Example 11).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the advantage for the player changes depending on whether the rotation direction of the first rotation means is determined to be the first rotation direction or the second rotation direction. Therefore, since the player becomes concerned about the direction of rotation of the first rotating means, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced.

[Feature xU5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU4,
The rotating plate portion is configured to be formed of a material having uniform transparency (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotating plate portion is formed of a material having uniform transparency, the rotating plate portion can be colored evenly. can clearly see the second rotating means through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU5,
The rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region,
At a predetermined timing, the second rotating means moves at least to the back surface side of the second area (configuration of Modified Example 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the rotating plate portion has a first region with a predetermined light transmittance and a second region with a higher light transmittance than the first region, and at a predetermined timing, at least the back surface of the second region Since the second rotating means moves to the side, after a predetermined timing, the player can clearly see the second rotating means through the second region of the rotating plate portion having a high light transmittance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU6,
The first rotating means is fixed at a specific position (configuration of modification 8)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the first rotating means is fixed at a specific position, it is easy to move the second rotating means to the rear side of the rotating rotating plate portion. Therefore, according to this feature, simplification of control can be achieved.

[Feature xU8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU7,
A game machine, wherein the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board.

According to this feature, since the rotating shaft provided in the first rotating means is arranged along the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board, the rotation can be performed on a plane parallel to the surface of the game board with high accuracy. The rotating plate portion can be rotated. Therefore, it is easy to increase the size of the first rotating means, and as a result, the performance using the first rotating means can be made gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU8,
A means for moving the second rotating means toward the first rotating means from above the first rotating means is provided (structure of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect in which the second rotating means pours down toward the first rotating means from above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU9,
A plurality of paths through which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position (configuration of modification 16)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since a plurality of paths for displacing the second rotating means from the first position to the second position are provided, the player can enjoy transitioning to the second state through various paths. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU10,
The speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can be changed (configuration of modification 17).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the speed at which the second rotating means is displaced from the first position to the second position can change. , the negative feeling that the second rotating means may not reach the second position and enter the second state can be imparted to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU11,
The rotational speed of the second rotating means can be changed (configuration of modification 18)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the rotation speed of the second rotating means can be changed, the manner of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU12,
The direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed (configuration of modification 19)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the direction of rotation of the second rotating means can be reversed, the mode of rotation of the second rotating means when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion can be varied. can be changed to Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU13,
A gaming machine, wherein the outer shape of the second rotating means is point symmetric with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front.

According to this feature, the outer shape of the second rotating means is point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation of the second rotating means when the game board is viewed from the front. It is possible to enhance the beauty of the second rotating means when the second rotating means is closed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU14,
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotating means (rotating body 182, rotating body 192).

According to this feature, since a plurality of second rotating means are provided, it is possible to obtain various modes in which the second state can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU15,
A gaming machine characterized in that characters (such as a rainbow-colored character string 183a of "BIG") are written on the second rotating means.

According to this feature, since the characters are written on the second rotating means, when the second state is established, the characters written on the second rotating means can be visually recognized by the player through the rotating plate portion. can. For this reason, according to this feature, it is possible to notify various sorts by visually recognizable characters. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature xU17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU16,
The second rotating means is made of a uniform material (configuration of modification 21)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is made of a uniform material, the rotation of the second rotating means is smooth without rattling.

[Feature xU18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU17,
The second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotation axis during rotation can be changed (configuration of modification 22).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the second rotating means is configured such that the direction of the rotating shaft during rotation can be changed, it is possible to change the rotation mode of the second rotating means in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature xU19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU18,
The light source is configured by a light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board (configuration of Modified Example 25).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the light source is configured by the light-emitting portion arranged on the back side of the game board, the configuration can be simplified.

[Feature xU20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features xU1 to xU19,
In the first mode, the frequency that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the determination means during a predetermined period (a period during which the reserved information left in the reserved information storage area 64b at the end of the game round related to the winning of the jackpot is consumed). is high (there is a holding ream in modification 23),
The second mode is a mode in which the frequency in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is lower than in the first mode (there is no holding group in Modification 23). game machine.

According to this feature, according to the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, the first mode in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition with a high frequency in the predetermined period by the determination means; A second mode in which the frequency of the special information satisfying the predetermined condition by the determination means in a predetermined period is lower than that in the first mode. For this reason, according to this feature, when the rotation mode of the rotary plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the first mode, the determination means outputs the special information for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of the first mode in which the predetermined condition is frequently met. Further, when the rotation mode of the rotor plate portion when the second rotation means moves to the second position, which can be the second mode, the frequency at which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition by the determination means in the predetermined period is the first. It is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the second mode is lower than the mode. Therefore, according to this feature, by providing the player with ups and downs of conflicting emotions such as anticipation and disappointment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of the game, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature group described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

<<2>> Second embodiment:
<<2-0>> Introduction:
Conventionally, there has been a request to increase the number of balls to be put out other than the jackpot winning, and in order to meet the request, it is possible to increase the number of balls by winning a small win with a high probability (that is, becoming a small win rush). rice field. However, according to the rules concerning gaming machines, it is forbidden to increase the number of gaming balls in the player's hand in a high support state (during a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later). In the state, a configuration was considered to increase the number of balls by becoming a small hit rush. In this configuration, as an example of distinguishing the game state of the small hit rush from the normal state (low probability low support state), adopting a high probability low support state (so-called latent probability variable state) as the game state of the small hit rush can be done. Specifically, for example, a second starting port is provided in an area where a ball can be entered by hitting to the right, and a game ball can be entered into the second starting port by hitting right in a high-probability and low support state. 2 It is configured to enable a small winning lottery in a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into a starting hole. Furthermore, when adopting a configuration in which a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew) is provided at the second start port, the electric chew is frequently opened even in the low support state during the small hit rush, 2 It is necessary to have a configuration that allows a game ball to enter the starting port. However, in such a configuration, even in the normal state (normal time), which is the low support state, when the player hits to the right, it is possible to frequently enter the game ball into the second start hole. As a result, there will appear players who frequently enter the game ball into the second start hole in normal times to increase the chances of the winning lottery. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, a configuration has been devised in which the fluctuation time of the special 2 hold in the normal time is set to an extremely long time (long) such as 10 minutes. However, when this configuration is adopted for a pachinko machine that preferentially variably displays Special 2 reserve over Special 1 reserve (hereinafter referred to as a special 2 priority machine) or a pachinko machine that variably displays in order of winning. In this case, if the state is shifted to the normal state while the special 2 reserve remains, or if the player erroneously hits to the right in the normal state, the game cannot be played until the variable time set to the long state of the special 2 reserve is over. , there was a demerit that the game could not be continued smoothly. In addition, a malicious person normally enters a plurality of game balls into the second start port and leaves the pachinko machine unattended, thereby making the machine unplayable for several tens of minutes. However, there is also the disadvantage that the operating rate of the pachinko machines in the hall may be extremely reduced. Therefore, in order to eliminate these demerits, which will be described later in detail, by adopting a simultaneous change function that allows the special 1 pattern and the special 2 pattern to fluctuate at the same time, even during the fluctuation of the special 2 pattern It became possible to play a game with one symbol, and the above-described small winning rush was realized.

According to the simultaneous variation machine equipped with the above small hit rush function, when the small hit rush (high probability low sapo state) or the so-called time saving state (low probability high sapo state) ends and returns to normal state, If there are 2 to 4 2 reserves remaining, and the remaining special 2 reserves (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 reserves) are winning the winning lottery result, it will be announced that the jackpot has been won. A few tens of minutes later could have happened. On the other hand, when the small winning rush or the time saving state ends and the state returns to the normal state, it is often possible for the player to end the game as having escaped from an advantageous state. As described above, even if the player knows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with special 2 balance pending after returning to the normal state, in a state where it is not clear whether the jackpot It is usual to end the game without waiting for the minute. In this case, when a jackpot is won with special 2 remaining reserved in an empty pachinko machine where no player is present, the jackpot is suddenly opened. In order to prevent this, conventional pachinko machines have a configuration in which a large winning opening operating gate is provided on the upper right side of the game board, and the large winning opening does not open unless a game ball passes through the large winning opening operating gate. Proposed.

However, even the conventional pachinko machine described above has the following problems. Conventional pachinko machines are known to have so-called right-handed ramps. The right-handed lamp is a lamp such as an LED for informing the player that the recommended shooting mode is right-handed. Therefore, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine equipped with a right-handed ramp, there is a waiting state in which a jackpot is won in a winning lottery related to the special 2 hold in the normal state, and a game ball is waiting for the game ball to enter the big winning opening operation gate. If so, the recommended firing mode is right-handed, and the right-handed lamp is lit. Then, a person who finds a pachinko machine with a right-handed lamp lit from among vacant pachinko machines and attempts to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine by entering game balls into the special winning opening operation gate. There was a problem of generating (commonly known as hyena).

A game machine according to the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as the game machine) aims to improve soundness of games by preventing the above-described hyena from occurring. A detailed description will be given below.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "ball entry section" as a "first specific ball entry area" and a "second specific ball entry area", and a privilege as a "privilege ball entry means". Equipped with a ball-entering unit, a ``notification indicator'' as a ``notification means'', a ``condition establishment standby state'' as a ``predetermined standby state'', a ``switching control'' as a ``predetermined control'', It has a "restricted state" as a "first state", a "second state" and a "third state", and a "starting process" as a "predetermined process".

In addition, the "first specific ball entry area" and the "second specific ball entry area" of the present invention may be areas defined with respect to other game areas into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a large winning opening operating gate, a through gate, a winning opening, a starting opening, a hole (opening) drilled in the board surface, and a game ball can temporarily stay and the like.

The "privilege ball entry means" has a member that becomes an open state when the opportunity to open is established, and it is sufficient if it is an area where the game ball can enter when the member is in the open state. If it is possible to realize the gist of the above, for example, a large winning opening with a special electric accessory, a V winning opening with a movable member that will win a jackpot when a game ball enters, a movable member and a game ball will enter. When the game state is changed to a probability variable state, a V fixed winning opening, a start opening with an ordinary electric accessory, and the like are included.

The "notification means" can be switched between at least two modes, and the mode should be controlled in correspondence with the firing mode of the firing means. Light-emitting displays such as LEDs, fluorescent lamps, and incandescent lamps, liquid crystal displays, and displays in which physically visible regions are switched can be used. In addition, it is possible to distinguish between character information, numeric information, patterns, characters, their colors, their display areas, and their display densities, and the like.

The "predetermined standby state" may be a state in which a privilege game such as a jackpot that has already been determined to be granted is delayed until the granting condition is satisfied. A state in which determination processing for determining whether or not fulfillment of the grant condition is detected while holding data such as a flag is repeatedly performed until the occurrence of fulfillment of the grant condition is detected. During the predetermined standby state, display or notification indicating the predetermined standby state may be executed, or display or notification may not be executed. As "predetermined standby state", if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, normal game state, probability variable game state, time saving game state, latent probability variable game state, special symbol variable game state, normal symbol variable game state, jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, waiting state during demonstration display, and the like.

The "predetermined control" may be control to switch the game state in order to start a special game such as a big win before starting a special game such as a big win. Examples include a process of updating data such as flags, and a process of erasing or initializing data relating to the previous game state. In addition, the switching control may include execution of display or notification corresponding to the start of the privilege game such as the big win after this switching, and display or notification corresponding to the start of the privilege game such as the big win may be performed before the switching. The switching control may include execution.

The 'first state', 'second state' and 'third state' may be regulation states that regulate the start of a bonus game such as a big win according to predetermined conditions in each gaming state. , so long as it is a game state that can be controlled by dividing it from other game states. "1st state", "2nd state" and "3rd state", if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, normal game state, probability variable game state, time-saving game state, special symbol variable game state , Normal symbol fluctuation game state, jackpot game state, small hit game state, standby state during demonstration display, and the like.

The "predetermined process" may be a process of starting a predetermined game state when a game ball enters at least the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, realizing the gist of the present invention. If possible, for example, the start of opening the big prize mouth, the start of displacement of the opening and closing member of the big prize mouth, the start of opening the electric accessory, the start of displacement of the opening and closing member of the electric role, the start of displacement of the distribution member Start, start of displaying predetermined information on a specific display, start of a special symbol variation game, start of a normal symbol variation game, and the like.

Although the details will be described later, when the game state is the first regulation state, the game machine enables the first ball entry section provided in the left game area and sets the ball entry section provided in the right game area. Since the second ball entering portion is set to be invalid, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering portion, the start process for detecting the game ball entering the second ball entering portion is not executed. Then, when the game state is the first restricted state, the recommended shooting mode is "left-handed", which allows the game ball to enter the first ball-entering portion. is controlled to turn off. Although the details will be described later, this first regulated state is a condition establishment waiting state in which the jackpot is won with special 2 remaining hold in the normal state, so there is a case where the player has already left the gaming machine. many. If a configuration is adopted in which the second ball-entering portion is effectively set in this state, the notification display device is controlled to be lit, and the above-described hyena finds out the game machine. However, in this gaming machine, as described above, the notification display machine is controlled to be in the off state in the first regulation state. Therefore, a gaming machine with an illuminated notification display is found out of the gaming machines with vacant seats, and a game ball is entered into the ball entry section to execute the start process, thereby obtaining an unfair profit from the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of those who try to do so (commonly known as hyenas).

In addition, although the details will be described later, when the gaming state is the second regulation state, the gaming machine sets the second ball-entering section to valid and sets the first ball-entering section to invalid. Even if a game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the start process for detecting the game ball entering the first ball entering portion is not executed. Then, when the gaming state is the second restricted state, the recommended shooting mode is "right-handed" which allows the game ball to enter the second ball-entering portion. is controlled to be lit. Although the details will be described later, the second regulation state is a so-called condition fulfillment standby state during consecutive games, so the player generally does not leave the gaming machine. Therefore, even if the notification display machine is controlled to be lit, the above-mentioned hyena cannot obtain an unfair profit from the game machine.

Further, in this gaming machine, although the details will be described later, when the gaming state is the third restricted state, both the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section are disabled. Even if a game ball enters the ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion, the start process for detection of the game ball is not executed. Then, when the game state is the third restricted state, the recommended shooting mode is not "right-handed", so the notification display is controlled to be turned off. Although the details will be described later, the third restricted state is the normal state, so the player does not need to hit right.

In this way, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion, the gaming machine appropriately controls whether the ball entering portion is enabled/disabled and the start processing is executed/not executed according to the game state. Along with this, the lighting/extinguishing of the notification display device is properly controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas and to appropriately notify the player of the appropriate shooting mode of the game ball.

A more specific configuration of the game machine will be described below as a second embodiment.

<<2-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 48 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the second embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism as shooting means provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized. It should be noted that, without operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player may perform an operation that maximizes the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 to hit to the right.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

49 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

50 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a variable winning device 36, and a variable winning device 97 dedicated to small prizes. The variable winning device 36 is a device that operates when a big win is won in a winning lottery, and the small winning variable winning device 97 is a device that operates when a small winning is won in a winning lottery. That is, a device that operates when a small win is won is called a small win-only variable winning device, whereas a device that operates when a big win is won is simply called a "variable prize winning device".

The game balls entering the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36, and the small winning variable winning device 97 are individually formed on the game board 30. is guided to the opening of Also, the game board 30 is provided with a through gate 35 and a pair of big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, a round display section 39, and a right-handed informing lamp (hereinafter also referred to as a right-handed lamp) 39a.

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 49).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In general, shooting a game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 is called "left hitting", and shooting a game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is called "right hitting". A game ball can enter the port 33 when the player is left-handed, and a game ball cannot be entered when the player is right-handed. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the lower right side of the game board 30 . The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The through gate 35 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30 and has a through-hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through type gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow-down route of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port. It is possible to enter 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

One of the pair of large winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 , the large winning opening operating gate 95 , is a first ball entry portion and is provided on the upper left side of the game board 30 . The other big winning opening operating gate 96 of the pair of big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 is a second ball entry portion and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30 . Hereinafter, the large winning opening operating gate 95 provided on the upper left side is also referred to as the left large winning opening operating gate 95, and the large winning opening operating gate 96 provided on the upper right side is also referred to as the right large winning opening operating gate 96. The first ball-entering portion allows a game ball to enter when the player hits left-handed, and does not allow a game ball to enter the player when the player hits right-handed. However, when hitting left, the first ball entering section does not necessarily need to enter (that is, with a probability of 100%). A game ball that does not play a ball can occur. In this embodiment, the position of the nail 42 is adjusted so that the first ball-entering portion can enter the ball with a high probability (for example, 50% or more) when hitting left-handed. The high probability may be 50% or less instead of 50% or more. In the case of left-handed hitting, there may be game balls that enter the first ball-entering portion and game balls that do not enter the first ball-entering portion. An attempt is made to find a pachinko machine that is in a waiting state for fulfillment of conditions in which execution of a jackpot game is confirmed by firing only one game ball in order from the machine, and to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of hyenas (left one-shot hyenas described later). Further, as a modified example, the game ball may enter the first ball entering portion without fail (that is, with a probability of 100%) when hitting to the left.

The second ball-entering portion allows a game ball to enter when the player hits to the right, and does not allow a game ball to enter the player when the player hits to the left. However, when hitting to the right, the second ball entering section does not necessarily need to enter (that is, with a probability of 100%). A game ball that does not play a ball can occur. In the present embodiment, the position of the nail 42 is adjusted so that the second ball entry portion can be entered with a high probability (for example, 50% or more) when hitting to the right. The high probability may be 50% or less instead of 50% or more. Further, as a modified example, when hitting to the right, the game ball may enter the second ball entering portion without fail (that is, with a probability of 100%).

Each of the big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 has a through hole extending in the vertical direction. Each of the big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 can be a trigger for shifting the variable winning device 36 to an opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, when a big win is won as a result of an internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60. It is a through type gate. Although the details will be described later, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main control device 60, after the game round ends, the left side big winning opening set to be valid according to the game state is activated. Waiting for the game ball to pass through the gate 95 or the right big winning opening operation gate 96, and when the passage is detected, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main controller 60, the left big winning opening operation gate 95 or the right big winning opening operation gate 95 set to be valid according to the game state after the end of the game round. As long as the passage of the game ball to the big winning opening operating gate 96 is not detected, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if game balls pass through the big winning opening operation gates 90 and 91, the prize balls are not paid out. Each specific ball-entering part is a through-type ball-entering area through which a game ball can pass, but instead of this, it may be a ball-entering-type ball-entering area that leads to the back side of the game board 30. . In addition, each specific ball-entering portion is a through-type ball-entering area through which game balls can pass, and a ball-entering opening leading to the back side of the game board 30 is provided under each specific ball-entering portion. may be

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the downstream side of the right big winning opening operation gate 96 in the downflow route of the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 . The variable prize winning device 36 includes a large prize winning opening 36a as a bonus ball entering portion that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning prize opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, a big win is won, and the game ball passes through the left big prize opening operation gate 95 or the right big prize opening operation gate 96 which is set to be valid according to the game state. , when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open/close execution mode means that a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main controller 60 triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, and is set to be valid according to the game state. This is a mode in which the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state when a game ball passes through the left big prize winning opening operating gate 95 or the right big winning winning opening operating gate 96.例文帳に追加That is, as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, a big win is won, and after the end of the game round, the left side large which is set to be valid according to the game state When the game ball passes through the winning opening operating gate 95 or the right big winning opening operating gate 96, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the ball can enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. Similarly, as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game cycle based on the entry of a ball into the second start hole 34, a big win is won, and after the end of the game cycle, the left big winning hole set to be valid according to the game state. Also when passing through the operation gate 95 or the right large winning opening operating gate 96, the opening/closing execution mode including the large winning opening opening/closing process in which the ball can enter the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is shifted to. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The small winning variable winning device 97 is provided downstream of the second starting port 34 in the downflow route of the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 . The small winning variable winning device 97 includes a large winning opening 97a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 97b for opening and closing the large winning opening 97a. The opening/closing door 97b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 97a. As a result of the internal lottery (hit lottery) by the main controller 60, when a small win is won, the opening/closing door 97b is in an open state in which a game ball can enter, and then in a closed state. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 97a of the small winning variable winning device 97, the payout device 71 pays out 10 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and the ball enters the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36, or the small winning variable winning device 97. The game balls not played are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

The ball entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the big winning opening 97a of the variable winning device 97 dedicated to small winning, and the out opening 43. The game balls are guided to the back side of the game board 30 through individual openings formed in the game board 30, and are configured to finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. there is The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33. , to perform the variable display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. , to perform the variable display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed until it is stopped is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started.

The right-handed lamp 39a is a notification indicator for notifying (recommending) the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed, and is composed of one LED. Around the right-handed lamp 39a, the letters "Right-handed" are written. In this embodiment, the right-handed lamp 39a lights up when the recommended shooting mode is right-handed shooting, and goes out when the recommended shooting style is left-handed shooting. When the recommended shooting mode is right-handed, the game ball is entered into the through gate 35, the big winning opening 36a, the second starting opening 34, and the small winning dedicated variable winning device 97 located on the right side of the game board 30. It is a game state in which it is preferable to make a ball. Specifically, it is a game state of a big win (an opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process to be described later), a game state of a high probability mode, and a game of a high frequency support mode. state, etc. When the recommended shooting mode is left-handed, it is, for example, a normal gaming state. Note that the notification indicator may be replaced with an LED and may be another light-emitting indicator such as a fluorescent lamp or an incandescent lamp. Further, the notification display device may be a liquid crystal display device or a display device in which a physically visible area is switched instead of the light-emitting display device. Further, the notification display device may be configured to be identifiable by differentiating character information, numeric information, patterns, characters, their colors, their display areas, and their display densities.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Furthermore, the symbol display device 41 provides an effect (right-handed notification effect) for notifying the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will be a right-handed shot, and changes the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism from right-handed to left-handed. A production for notifying the player of returning to hitting (left-hand hitting notification production) is also performed. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 51(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first decorative design or the second decorative design that is variably displayed on the design display device 41. FIG. The first decorative design is an image displayed on the design display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display section 37a. The second decorative design is an image displayed on the design display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the second design displayed on the second design display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays symbols representing numbers 1-8. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 51(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub-display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first decorative design is displayed and where the image of the second decorative design is displayed. Similarly, in the sub-display area SA, as in the main display area MA, there are cases where the image of the first decorative design is displayed and where the image of the second decorative design is displayed. When the image of the first decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the image of the second decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA. , an image of the first decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, patterns of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order as the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 51(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are various. can be adopted.

Three pattern rows Z4, Z5 and Z6 on the left, middle and right are displayed in the sub-display area SA. In each of the pattern rows Z4 to Z6, patterns of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers as the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 51(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6 and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the variable display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L2. The mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-described mode. For example, the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc., display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are various. can be adopted.

As the above-described right-handed informing effect, characters such as "Aim right" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. Further, as a left-handed notification effect, characters such as "Return to the left" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. The execution of the hitting to the right notification effect is started in synchronism with the switching of the hitting to the right lamp 39a from the extinguished state to the lit state. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the execution was started, the right-handed informing effect is terminated. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the right-handed informing effect is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the player may perform a right-handed operation (or operation of the game ball launch button 26) that maximizes the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 25. A configuration may be adopted in which the hitting to the right notification effect is terminated when the game is executed. The execution of the left-handed informing effect is started in synchronism with the switching of the right-handed lamp 39a from the ON state to the OFF state. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of execution, the left-handed informing effect is terminated. Instead of ending the left-handed informing effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the player performs a left-handed operation in which the operation handle 25 is rotated by a predetermined amount corresponding to the left-handed from the maximum. Sometimes, the configuration may be such that the left-handed informing effect is terminated. It should be noted that the timing of starting the execution of the hitting to the right notification effect and the hitting to the left notification effect does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the operation of the hitting to the right lamp 39a, and the execution may be started at a timing independent of the operation of the hitting to the right lamp 39a.

Here, the "game cycle" means the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display. One unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display is performed for each game round. In either one of the portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern is displayed for each game. In the main display area MA or the sub display area SA of the device 41, after the predetermined pattern row is variably displayed, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is In this embodiment, the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b can be performed in parallel (simultaneously). In addition, the variable display of the predetermined symbol sequence in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 and the variable display of the predetermined symbol sequence in the sub-display area SA can be executed in parallel (simultaneously).

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is displayed. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls entered into the second starting port 34 . In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs the blinking display and the lighting display synchronized with the second design variable display and stop display displayed on the second design display unit 37b of the special design unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub-display area SA, the first synchronization display area Sync1, and the second synchronization display area Sync2. A configuration in which some or all of these displays are not displayed may be employed.

As shown in FIG. 50, a pair of nails (so-called dead nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. As shown in FIG. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the spacing between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

As described above, on the right side of the game board 30, there are a second starting port 34 as a ball entrance member, a variable winning device 36, a variable winning device 97 dedicated to small winning, and a through gate 35 as a through type gate. , and a right big winning opening operating gate 96 are provided, and these operate from the upstream side to the downstream side along the flow-down route of the game ball shot toward the right side of the game board 30 by hitting to the right. , the right big winning opening operation gate 96, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, the second start opening 34, and the variable winning device 97 dedicated to small winning are arranged in this order. The above-mentioned flow-down routes are roughly defined by nails 42 so as to form one system. It should be noted that the left side large winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball entry portion is provided on the upper left side of the game board 30, but instead of this, the first ball entry portion may be provided at other positions on the route where the ball can be entered. In addition, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 as the second ball entry part is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30, but instead of this, the second ball entry part may be provided at other positions on the route where the ball can be entered.

When the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is closed, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is closed, and the opening/closing door 97b of the small winning variable winning device 97 is closed, A game ball shot toward the right side of the game board 30 by hitting to the right flows with a probability close to 100% down the above-mentioned flow-down route, and finally passes through the out port 43 provided at the bottom and leaves the game area PA. Ejected. For example, when the open/close door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is in an open state, a game ball shot toward the right side of the game board 30 by hitting to the right has a probability close to 100%, and the right side big prize opening operation gate 96, pass through the through gate 35, and enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. For example, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is closed and the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is open, a game launched toward the right side of the game board 30 by hitting to the right The ball passes through the right big prize winning opening operation gate 96, the through gate 35, the open/close door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36, and enters the second start opening 34 with a probability close to 100%. . For example, when the open/close door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is in the closed state, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the closed state, and the open/close door 97b of the small winning variable prize device 97 is in the open state. , a game ball launched toward the right side of the game board 30 by hitting it to the right passes through the right big winning opening actuation gate 96, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 with a probability close to 100%. It passes over the opening/closing door 36b, touches the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34, and enters the big winning opening 97a of the variable winning device 97 dedicated to small winning.

<<2-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission controller 90 , and a display controller 100 .

The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 49) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67a to 67h are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. Concretely, general winning opening 32, first starting opening 33, second starting opening 34, through gate 35, big winning opening operating gates 95, 96, variable winning device 36, variable winning device 97 dedicated to small winning, etc. It is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at the entrance of the. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67h, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. 35 or the big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 is determined. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 has a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed. In addition, control of turning on/off the right hitting lamp 39a is executed according to the shooting mode by the recommended game ball shooting mechanism.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when entering the ball into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, the payout of three game balls is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . In addition, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 1 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special 2 retained ) is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In the above explanation, how the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is shifted, but the value of the winning random number counter C1 is limited. Instead, each value of the counter (jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS) other than the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb shifted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is A process of moving to the execution area, collating with the winning/failing table stored in the winning/failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and determining whether or not there will be a big hit, and entering the game ball into the second start port 34. In this case, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. A process of collating and determining whether or not a jackpot will be achieved is executed in parallel. Determination processing of whether or not a big hit will be triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, and determination of whether or not a big win will be triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34. The pachinko machine of the present embodiment is capable of parallelly executing determination processing and the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b in parallel (simultaneously). 10 is a so-called simultaneous variator.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns in the remaining pattern rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. This includes reducing or hiding a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed, and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach performance. Also, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach performance in which expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed when the variation display in the second symbol display unit 37b starts and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. High-probability mode (also called high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a variable probability jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than the low-probability mode. To tell. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33. and a success/failure table for collating with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, Each is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 54(a) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), and FIG. 54(b) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 54(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(b), 198 values from 0 to 197 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for the high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. It is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (198 to 3979) other than the 198 values from 0 to 197 are outliers. "Off" is a success/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

In this embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode) is set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode). It is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is set as a big win. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big win are arbitrary.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 55(a) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 55(b) shows the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 55(a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. there is Of the values from 0 to 3979, the values (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(b), 198 values from 0 to 197 are set in the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) as the value of the winning random number counter C1 for the big win. It is Also, 1891 values from 198 to 2088 are set as the value of the winning random number counter C1 that is a small winning. Of the values from 0 to 3979, 1891 values other than the values from 0 to 2088 (2089 to 3979) are outliers. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of 1/2 of the values (198 to 3979) other than the value of 0 to 197 which is the big hit among the values of 0 to 3979 is set to be the small hit. ing. "Small win" is a success/fail result that triggers the transition to the mode in which the open/close door 97b of the small prize dedicated variable prize winning device 97 is opened and closed, but does not trigger the transition for both the lottery mode and the support mode. be. In the present embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing door 97b is opened is limited to one time. The opening time of the opening/closing door 96b of the small winning variable winning device 97 at the time of the small winning is, for example, 0.2 seconds. As a modified example, the number of times the open/close door 97b is opened in the mode in which the open/close door 97b is opened and closed may be set to two times or more instead of once. The opening time of the opening/closing door 96b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 97 at the time of the small win may be changed to 0.2 seconds and other time such as 0.1 seconds. 198 values among the values 0 to 3979 represent a big win, so the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, it is set so as to give a small hit with a high probability of 1/2 of the 198 to 3979 values excluding the value that becomes the big hit among the values of 0 to 3979. However, the probability need not be limited to 1/2, and may be replaced with another value. For example, all of the values 198 to 3979 excluding the value that is the big win among the values 0 to 3979, that is, it may be set to give a small win with a higher probability of 1/1.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the success/failure table for the second start port (for low probability mode) is the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). ) is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 set as a jackpot. However, as long as the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the big wins are arbitrary.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed multiple times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of hit balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec passes or the ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no game balls enter in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high-probability win-or-fail table as a win-fail table, and a win-fail mode as a win-fail table. A low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low-probability success/failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the winning lottery using the high-probability success/failure table is more favorable than the winning lottery using the low-probability success/failure table. High chance of winning the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric accessory 34a is elected is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. good too. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a is set to have a long opening time once. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 56(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 56(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to during a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 56(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, "8R probability variable jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", and "16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush" are set.

In the probability variable jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter also simply referred to as "lottery mode") is high. It is a probability mode, and it is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the normal jackpot, the mode of opening and closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is after the opening and closing execution mode. is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode. In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds).

The probability variable big win + small win rush is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, and a winning lottery lottery mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "lottery mode") after the opening and closing execution mode. ) is the high probability mode, the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and furthermore, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is a big hit that will be a rush. Here, the small winning rush is a mode in which a small winning can be repeatedly won, which is a trigger for opening the opening/closing door 97b of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 97 to an open state. In the 16R probability variable big hit + small hit rush, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, and "20 to 64". corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these three types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot + small winning rush, followed by the 8R variable variable jackpot and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, 8R probability variable jackpot, 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, and "40 to 64". corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot is distributed based on the ball entering the first start port 33 and when the jackpot is won. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the case of winning the jackpot based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is more favorable than the case of winning the jackpot based on the ball entering the first starting port 33. is determined so as to increase the advantage for the player.

In addition, when the winning lottery results in a loss, the mode is not changed to the opening/closing execution mode, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the big winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 57(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the electric accessory opening lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) contains 0 to 419 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that means that the short opening of the electric accessory has been won. 420 values are set. Forty-six values from 420 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role short open lottery is won with a probability of 210/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. .

FIG. 57(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessary item opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessary item opening counter C4, which means that the electric accessary item opening has been won, is 0 to 461. 462 values of are set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, it means that the electric chief opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role length opening is won in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds. .

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. . As a result, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down toward the second starting port 34 enters the second starting port 34 with a probability close to 100%. It should be noted that the respective opening times in the case of winning the short-term opening and in the case of winning the long-term opening do not have to be limited to the above examples, and may be other times.

<<2-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 57 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 52) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device in which a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<2-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<2-4-1>> High/low transition between lottery mode and support mode:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode. transitions to high-frequency support mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a win lottery and the type of the jackpot won is a probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode. transitions to high-frequency support mode. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a win lottery and the type of the jackpot won is variable probability jackpot + small win rush, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. , and the support mode shifts to low-frequency support mode.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that the jackpot is won by the winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is the normal jackpot, the game cycle is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter also referred to as the maximum number of times of time reduction). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of time saving is, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is continued up to 50 times, which is the maximum number of times of time saving. When the number of game times executed after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 50 times, which is the upper limit number of time reduction, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. It should be noted that the upper limit number of times of time saving is not necessarily limited to 50 times as described above, and may be set to another number of times. After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode based on the fact that the type of the won jackpot is the variable probability jackpot, the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is not limited by the upper limit number of times of time reduction.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is extremely high, 231/233, is 231/233. The electric accessory 34a is frequently in the long open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism is right-hand hitting. The player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism is right-hand hitting. The player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as game states to be transitioned as the game progresses, depending on the combination of high and low between the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) a low-probability low-probability support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, and ii) the lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is Low probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) high probability high support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is high frequency support mode, and iv) lottery mode is high probability mode and a high-probability low-support state in which the support mode is a low-frequency support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a high-probability mode flag that specifies the lottery mode and a high-frequency support mode flag that specifies the support mode are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. The lottery mode is identified as the low probability mode when the high probability mode flag is OFF, and the lottery mode is identified as the high probability mode when the high probability mode flag is ON. The support mode is identified as the low-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the support mode is identified as the high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. For this reason, each of the above-described low probability low support state, low probability high support state, high probability low support state, and high probability high support state is specified by a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least one of the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag is switched, thereby progressing the flow of the game while switching between the four states described above.

<<2-4-2>> Small hit rush:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the jackpot won is determined to be a 16R probability variable jackpot + a small win rush by distribution determination, as described above. After the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the lottery mode shifts to a high-probability low support state in which the lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. In this high-probability-low support state, a small hit rush is executed as a benefit given to the player.

In the high-probability-low support state, the recommended shooting mode is right-hand hitting, and the game is played so that the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, there is a high probability of 210/233 for short-open wins (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, in the high-probability-low support state, the game ball that has flowed down to the right side of the game area PA by hitting to the right has a high probability of passing through the through gate 35 and hitting the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34. It can be an opportunity to open once (opening time is 0.6 seconds). As a result, in the high-probability-low support state, although the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high. can be determined.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-low support state, as described above, the game ball that has flowed down to the right side of the game area PA due to hitting to the right entered the second start hole 34. In the winning lottery resulting from this, it is possible to win a small winning with a high probability (see FIG. 55(b)). On the other hand, when a small win is won, the opening and closing door 97b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 97 opens once (opening time is 0.2 seconds), so to the big winning mouth 97a of the small winning variable winning device 97 It becomes possible to enter a game ball. For this reason, since there is a high probability of winning a small hit as described above, it is possible to frequently win a small hit and increase the number of game balls (balls out) in a high-probability low support state. becomes. In this way, a small hit rush is executed.

Here, the flow of game balls to the big winning opening 97a of the small winning variable winning device 97 will be described. In the high-probability-low support state, as described above, the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA by hitting to the right, but the game ball passes through the right big winning opening operation gate 96 and passes through the through gate. 35, passes over the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 (at this time, the opening/closing door 36b is in a closed state), and heads for the second starting port 34. At this time, when the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is in the open state, the game ball enters the second start port 34, but the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is closed. In the case of , the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and goes to the small hit dedicated variable winning device 97 provided downstream of the second starting port 34. - 特許庁In this way, when the opening/closing door 97b of the small winning variable winning device 97 is in the open state, the game ball enters the big winning opening 97a of the small winning variable winning device 97.

In the high-probability-low support state, the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode is performed, so that the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is open. is short open. When the electric role short opening is won in the electric role opening lottery, the game ball flowing down to the electric role 34a enters the second start port 34 with a probability lower than 100% (for example, 50%). , and when a plurality of game balls have flowed down to the electric accessory 34a, some of the game balls are kicked by the electric accessory 34a that has shifted to the closed state and flow down toward the small winning variable winning device 97. Then, the ball enters the big winning opening 97a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 97 which is in the open state. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability-low support state, while the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, while allowing the game ball to enter the second start port 34, It is possible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 97a of the variable winning device 97 dedicated to winning.

Even in a high-accuracy high support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is moved to the right side of the game area PA by setting the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism to the right-handed shot. However, at this time also, in the winning lottery caused by the game ball flowing down to the right side of the game area PA entering the second start port 34, there is a high probability that a small win will be won. Win (see FIG. 55(b)). However, in this embodiment, as described above, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, there is a high probability of 231/233 that the electric chief will be opened (see FIG. 57(b)). Therefore, in the high accuracy and high support state, the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the electric accessory 34a is picked up by the opened electric accessory 34a, and the game ball goes to the second start port 34 with a probability close to 100%. I will enter the ball with. For this reason, in the high-probability-high support state, the game ball does not enter the open/close door 97b of the variable winning device 97 dedicated to small hits. Therefore, in the high probability high support state, the small hit rush is not executed.

In addition, even in the low-probability low support state (normal time) where the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the game area PA is set to the right-handed shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism. It is conceivable that the game is played so that the game ball flows down to the right side of the . In this case, as in the high-probability-low support state, a small win is won with a high probability in the winning lottery caused by the game ball flowing down to the right side of the game area PA entering the second start port 34. , a game ball enters the large winning opening 97a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 97 that has shifted to the open state, and a small winning rush can be executed. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b in the low-probability-low support state (normal time) (hereinafter also referred to as the special 2 variation time) is a very long time such as 10 minutes. By setting it to (long), it is suppressed that the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is repeatedly executed in a short period of time in the low probability low support state (normal time). It was configured to As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player give up hitting to the right in the low-probability and low support state and concentrate on hitting to the left. Note that the special 2 fluctuation time in the normal time may be set to a length of 5 minutes or longer (for example, 5 minutes, 8 minutes, 20 minutes, 60 minutes, etc.) instead of the 10 minutes. If the length is 5 minutes or longer, it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in a short period of time under normal conditions.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously (simultaneously) executing the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b. A variator. The function of the above-mentioned small hit rush and the configuration for setting the fluctuation time of the special 2 reserve at normal time to be long are displayed with priority to the special 2 reserve over the special 1 reserve without the simultaneous fluctuation function. If it is used in a pachinko machine with a special 2 priority machine or a pachinko machine with a variable display in the order of winning, if it shifts to the normal state while the special 2 hold remains, or if you accidentally hit the right in the normal state In this case, there is a demerit that the game cannot be played until the long variable time of the special 2 reservation is over, and the game cannot be continued smoothly. In addition, a malicious person normally enters a plurality of game balls into the second start port and leaves the pachinko machine unattended, thereby making the machine unplayable for several tens of minutes. However, there is also the disadvantage that the operating rate of the pachinko machines in the hall may be extremely lowered. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a simultaneous variation function, so that even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the second start hole at normal times, special 1 reserve Since it is possible to perform the variable display of the , the above-described demerits can be eliminated.

《2-4-3》Valid / Invalid of each grand prize gate operation:
As described above, each of the big winning opening operating gates 95 and 96 is a through gate that can be a trigger for shifting the variable winning device 36 to an opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, when a big win is won by a winning lottery. . That is, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main controller 60, after the game round ends, the left big winning opening operation gate 95 set to be valid according to the game state or the right side big winning opening operation gate 95 Waiting for the game ball to pass through the big winning opening operation gate 96, and when the passage is detected, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, the function of causing each of the big winning gates 95 and 96 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is enabled/disabled depending on the combination of the level of the support mode and the level of the lottery mode. Specifically, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode in the low-probability low-support state, when the jackpot is won, the left large winning opening operation gate 95 becomes effective, and the right large winning opening operation gate 95 becomes effective. The winning opening operating gate 96 is disabled. When the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is low-probability mode in a low-probability-high support state, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is high-probability mode In a high-probability high support state, Alternatively, when a jackpot is won in a high-probability low-support state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes effective and the left big winning opening operates. Gate 95 is disabled.

That is, in the low-probability and low-probability support state, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main control device 60, after the game round ends, the left big winning opening operation gate that is valid After waiting for the game ball to pass through 95, when the passage is detected, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Even if a game ball passes through the disabled right side big winning opening operation gate 96 after the end of the game cycle, the variable winning device 36 does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Although the details will be described later, as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main controller 60, when a big win is won, the recommended firing mode is effective after the game round is completed. A game ball can be entered into the left big winning opening operation gate 95, and the right hitting lamp 39a is extinguished. In addition, along with turning off the right hitting lamp 39a, the pattern display device 41 displays a left gate aim informing effect for informing the player to aim at the left big prize opening operation gate 95. - 特許庁

In the low probability high support state, the high probability high support state, or the high probability low support state, if a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round by the main control device 60, the type of the winning big win. In any of the cases of the normal big win, the variable probability big win, the variable probability big win + small winning rush, after the end of the game round, the game ball waits for the game ball to pass through the activated right big winning opening operation gate 96. Then, when the passage is detected, the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Even if a game ball passes through the disabled left side big winning opening operation gate 95 after the end of the game round, the variable winning device 36 does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode. From the end of the game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the activated left side big prize opening operation gate 95 or the right side big prize opening operation gate 96, and the open/close execution mode is started. A period of time until the device is ready is hereinafter referred to as a standby state.

<<2-4-4>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the game state to be transitioned in the course of the game, as described above, the low probability low support state, the low probability high support state, It can take a high probability high support state and a high probability low support state. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the above-described standby state and an opening/closing execution mode in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be taken as game states. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. When the game is started, it is initially in the low probability low support state H1. That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. In the low probability low support state H1, the recommended shooting mode is left-handed hitting, and the player makes the game ball flow down to the left side of the game area PA by executing left-handed hitting, and the game ball is pushed to the first start port 33. let the ball in In addition, in the low probability low support state H1, since the recommended firing mode is left-handed, the right-handed lamp 39a is extinguished. In addition, in the low probability low support state H1, the left large winning opening operating gate 95 (simply referred to as "left gate" in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) and the right large winning opening operating gate 96 (simply referred to as "right gate" in the figure) , the same applies hereinafter) does not work the function of shifting the variable winning device 36 to the opening/closing execution mode (disabled). When the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is sent to the player. A game round for notification is executed.

Since the game times executed in the low probability low support state H1 are executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33, in the low probability low support state H1 Special 1 fluctuation state can be. When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the low-probability and low support state H1 is lost, the low-probability and low support state H1 is continued, and the player enters the game ball into the first start port 33. , to execute a game round.

When a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle executed in the low-probability/low-probability support state H1, regardless of whether the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a probability variable jackpot + small win rush. , the opening/closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the game cycle ends. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, after the end of the game round, the game ball passes through the activated left large winning opening operating gate 95 or right large winning opening operating gate 96. After that, when the passage is detected, the opening/closing execution mode for opening/closing the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is entered. That is, after the end of the game round in which the big win is won in the winning lottery, the open/close execution mode is activated based on the game ball passing through the activated left side big prize opening operation gate 95 or the right side big prize opening operation gate 96. When the state until the start is set to the standby state H2, the low probability low support state H1 goes through the standby state H2 to the opening/closing execution mode H3. In addition, in the low probability low support state H1 as the regulation state, even if the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 or the right large winning opening operating gate 96, the left large winning opening operating gate 95 or the right large winning opening operating gate 95 The start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3, which is the start processing for detecting the game ball to the mouth operating gate 96, is not executed.

In the standby state H2, the execution of the opening/closing execution mode including the big winning game opening/closing process for making the big winning game that has already been determined to be awarded, that is, the big winning game opening/closing process for performing a predetermined number of round games, is executed according to the game state. It is a condition establishment waiting state for waiting until a condition for starting a big hit is established such that a game ball passes through the left big winning opening operating gate 95 or the right big winning opening operating gate 96 which is set to be valid. Specifically, in the internal control, the condition fulfillment standby state is set to be valid according to the game state while holding data such as a flag corresponding to the granting of the jackpot game. It is a state in which determination processing for determining whether or not it is detected that a game ball passes through the right big winning opening operation gate 96 is repeatedly performed until the passage of the game ball is detected. During the condition-satisfaction standby state, display or notification indicating the condition-satisfaction standby state may be executed, or display or notification may not be executed.

In the standby state H2, the operation differs depending on the combination of high and low levels of the lottery mode and the support mode. That is, the game state determined from the lottery mode and the support mode before shifting to the standby state H2 is the low probability low support state H1, the low probability high support state H4, the high probability high support state H5, and the high probability low support state H6. The operation differs depending on which one.

In the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability low support state H1, the left big prize winning opening operation gate 95 becomes effective and the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes invalid. Therefore, in the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the recommended shooting mode is that the game ball can be entered into the activated left side large winning opening operation gate 95. The ball is hit to the left, and the lamp 39a to the right is turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability low support state H1, which is the condition establishment standby state, the right-handed lamp extinguishing control process for controlling the right-handed lamp 39a to be extinguished is executed. It is possible. This right-handed lamp extinguishing control process is a non-notification control process.

Further, in the standby state H2, the right-handed lamp 39a is extinguished, and the symbol display device 41 displays a left-gate aiming notification effect for informing the player that the left-side big winning opening operating gate 95 is aimed. The left gate aiming notification effect is for instructing the player to enter the game ball into the left big winning opening operation gate 95, and the recommended shooting mode is left-handed hitting. Specifically, as the left gate aiming notification effect, characters such as "Aim for the left gate" are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG. However, when the jackpot winning that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to special 1 suspension caused by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the left gate aiming notification effect , and is not executed in the case of a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. In other words, in the low probability low support state H1, the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 is due to the special 2 remaining reservation caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. In the case of , even if a game ball is shot with a left stroke and a game ball enters the left big winning opening operation gate 95, a jackpot game state can occur, even if the game is played. A jackpot winning that triggers a transition to a standby state H2 without executing a left gate target notification effect or a left hitting notification effect, which are effects for informing the player that the shooting mode of the ball shooting mechanism is left-handed. The left gate aiming notification effect is executed only when the winning lottery related to the special 1 reservation is obtained.

The player aims at the left side large prize winning opening operation gate 95 according to the left gate aim notification effect, that is, by executing left hitting, the game ball flows down to the left side of the game area PA, and the effective left side large prize opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 95. - 特許庁In the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, waiting for the game ball to pass through the valid left side large winning opening operation gate 95, and when the passage is detected, the opening and closing execution mode H3. transition to That is, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability low support state H1, the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a based on the entry of the game ball into the activated left large winning opening operation gate 95 is established. In this case, before starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the big winning opening opening/closing process, switching control for updating data such as a flag is executed in order to start the opening/closing execution mode H3, and after execution of the switching control, the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Move to H3. Specifically, as the switching control, control for turning ON an opening/closing execution mode flag, which will be described later, is executed. The switching control may be control (switching control) for switching the game state in order to start a bonus game such as a big hit. It may also be a process for converting. Further, the switching control may include execution of display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win after the switching, and display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win may be performed before the switching. The switching control may include execution. In addition, when the game state is a standby state H2 that has shifted from the low probability low support state H1 as a regulation state for regulating the start of a privilege game such as a big hit, the disabled right side large winning opening operation gate Even if the game ball passes through 96, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3 is on standby (not executed) while the game state is in the standby state H2, and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is not entered.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation time of special 2 suspension in normal time is set to long, the time saving state (low probability high support state H4) ends and normal When returning to time (low probability low support state H1), 2 to 4 special 2 reserves remain, and if the result of the winning lottery is a big win with the special 2 remaining reserve, the jackpot is won. It could happen that the announcement was made several tens of minutes later. On the other hand, when the time saving state (low-probability high support state H4) ends and returns to normal time (low-probability low support state H1), the player often ends the game as having escaped from an advantageous state. It was possible. Even if the player knows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with the special 2 remaining balance reserved at normal times, the player cannot wait for the above several tens of minutes and ends the game in a state where it is not clear whether the jackpot will be won or not. Always terminate. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko machine becomes an empty pachinko machine with no players, the right hand lamp 39a lights up in the standby state H2 shifted from the normal state as described above. Not at all. In addition, since the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the left gate aim notification is given. The effect and the left-handed notification effect are not displayed. That is, in a pachinko machine with no players present, when a big win is won in a winning lottery related to the special 2 balance reservation and the state shifts to the standby state H2, the right hitting lamp 39a as well as the right hitting notification effect and the left hitting are displayed. The notification effect and the left gate aim notification effect are not executed. In other words, even if a jackpot game can occur based on the game ball being shot left-handed and entering the first ball entry portion, the recommended shooting mode is left-handed. Do not execute the effect to notify something. For this reason, although it will be described in detail later, among the pachinko machines with empty seats, there are pachinko machines with the right-handed lamp 39a in a lighting state, left-gate aim notification effects, left-handed hits notification effects, or right-handed hits notification effects. It is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas who find the pachinko machine in operation and try to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine.

In the open/close execution mode H3, the recommended firing mode is right-handed hitting, and the right-handed hitting lamp 39a is lit. In addition, prior to the round game in the open/close execution mode, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The player makes the game ball flow down to the right side of the game area PA by executing right-hand hitting according to the right-hand hitting notification effect, enters the game ball into the big winning prize opening 36a, and obtains the prize ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the right-handed lamp lighting control process for controlling the right-handed lamp 39a to light up can be executed in the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the big winning opening opening/closing process. This right-handed lamp lighting control process is an information control process.

When the type of jackpot that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is the normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, the game shifts to the low probability high support state H4. That is, the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode (limited to 50 times, which is the maximum number of times of time reduction).

In the low-probability support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in order to enter the game ball into the second start port 34, the recommended firing mode is right-handed. Therefore, the right strike lamp 39a is lit. Also, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed informing performance for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The player causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by executing right hitting according to the right hitting notification performance.

Since the game times executed in the low-probability support state H4 are executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34, in the low-probability support state H4, special 2 fluctuations can be in a state When the winning lottery in the game round executed in the low-probability support state H4 is lost, the low-probability support state H4 is continued, and the player enters the game ball into the second start port 34, and the game round. to run. In the low-probability-high support state H4, when the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 50 times, which is the time-saving upper limit number of times, the state shifts to the low-probability-low support state H1. In addition, when the number of games after the start of the high frequency support mode reaches the upper limit number of times of time reduction and shifts to the low probability low support state H1, it synchronizes when the right striking lamp 39a switches from the lighting state to the extinguishing state. Then, a left-handed informing effect is executed for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will return from right-handed to left-handed.

In the low-probability support state H4, the number of games after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving upper limit number of games (for example, the 30th game). (Regardless of whether it is a jackpot or a probability variable jackpot + a small hit rush), the opening and closing execution mode is provided as a benefit given to the player after the game round in which the jackpot was won (for example, the 30th game round). executed. That is, the low-probability support state H4 temporarily shifts to the standby state H2, and then shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3.

In the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability support state H4, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes effective and the left big winning opening operation gate 95 becomes invalid. For this reason, in the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability support state H4, the recommended shooting mode is that it is possible to enter the game ball into the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96. The ball is hit to the right, and the right-hand hitting lamp 39a is lit. Further, in the standby state H2, along with lighting of the right hitting lamp 39a, the symbol display device 41 displays a right gate aiming notification effect for notifying the player to aim at the right big winning opening operation gate 96.例文帳に追加

The player aims at the right side large winning opening operation gate 96 according to the right gate aiming notification effect, that is, by executing the right hitting, the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA, and the effective right side large winning opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 96. - 特許庁In the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability support state H4, waiting for the game ball to pass through the valid right side large winning opening operation gate 96, and when the passage is detected, the opening and closing execution mode H3. transition to That is, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability support state H4, the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a based on the entry of the game ball into the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96 is established. In this case, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered after execution of switching control for updating data such as a flag in order to start the opening/closing execution mode H3. Specifically, as the switching control, control for turning ON an opening/closing execution mode flag, which will be described later, is executed. The switching control may be control (switching control) for switching the game state in order to start a bonus game such as a big hit. It may also be a process for converting. Further, the switching control may include execution of display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win after the switching, and display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win may be performed before the switching. The switching control may include execution. In addition, when the game state is a standby state H2 that has shifted from the low-probability support state H4 as a regulation state that regulates the start of a bonus game such as a big hit, the left large winning opening operation gate that is disabled Even if the game ball passes through 95, while the game state is the standby state H2, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3 is on standby (non-execution), and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is not entered.

When the type of the jackpot that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is the variable probability jackpot, the game shifts to the high probability and high support state H5 after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends. That is, the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode.

In the high-accuracy high support state H5, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the recommended firing mode is right-handed in order to enter the game ball into the second start port 34.例文帳に追加Therefore, the right strike lamp 39a is lit. Also, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed informing performance for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The player causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by executing right hitting according to the right hitting notification performance.

Since the game times executed in the high probability high support state H5 are executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, in the high probability high support state H5 Special 2 fluctuation state can be. When the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high-probability-high support state H5 is lost, the high-probability-high support state H5 is continued, and the player enters the game ball into the second start port 34, and the game round is performed. to run.

In the high probability high support state H5, if you win a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a probability variable jackpot + small hit rush) in the winning lottery, it will be awarded to the player after the game round in which the jackpot was won. Opening and closing execution mode is executed as a special benefit. That is, the high-accuracy-high support state H5 is temporarily shifted to the standby state H2, and then the opening/closing execution mode H3 is changed.

The operation in the standby state H2 shifted from the high probability high support state H5 is the same as the operation in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability high support state H4. That is, in the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability-high support state H5, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes effective and the left big winning opening operation gate 95 becomes invalid. For this reason, in the case of the standby state H2 that has shifted from the high-accuracy-high support state H5, the recommended firing mode is the right side that allows the game ball to enter the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96. The ball is hit, and the right-hand hitting lamp 39a is lit. Further, in the standby state H2, along with lighting of the right hitting lamp 39a, the symbol display device 41 displays a right gate aiming notification effect for notifying the player to aim at the right big winning opening operation gate 96.例文帳に追加

The player aims at the right side large winning opening operation gate 96 according to the right gate aiming notification effect, that is, by executing the right hitting, the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA, and the effective right side large winning opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 96. - 特許庁In the standby state H2 shifted from the high-accuracy-high support state H5, waiting for the game ball to pass through the valid right side large winning opening operating gate 96, and when the passage is detected, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is executed. transition to That is, in the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability-high support state H5, the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a based on the entry of the game ball into the valid right large winning opening operation gate 96 is established. In this case, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered after execution of switching control for updating data such as a flag in order to start the opening/closing execution mode H3. Specifically, as the switching control, control for turning on an opening/closing execution mode flag, which will be described later, is executed. The switching control may be control (switching control) for switching the game state in order to start a bonus game such as a big hit. It may also be a process for converting. Further, the switching control may include execution of display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win after the switching, and display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win may be performed before the switching. The switching control may include execution. In addition, when the game state is the standby state H2 that has shifted from the high-accuracy high support state H5 as a regulation state for regulating the start of privilege games such as big wins, the left large winning opening operation gate that is disabled Even if the game ball passes through 95, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3 is on standby (not executed) while the game state is in the standby state H2, and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is not entered.

When the type of jackpot that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is variable probability jackpot+small hit rush, after the opening/closing execution mode H3 ends, the game shifts to a high-probability low support state H6. That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the high-probability low support state H6, as described above, since the privilege of the small hit rush is given, it is recommended to enter the game ball into the big prize opening 97a of the small win dedicated variable prize winning device 97. The firing mode to be shot is right-handed. Therefore, the right strike lamp 39a is lit. Also, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed informing performance for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The player makes the game ball flow down to the right side of the game area PA by executing the right hitting according to the right hitting informing performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 97a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 97. - 特許庁

Since the game round executed in the high probability low support state H6 is executed with the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 as a trigger, in the high probability low support state H6 Special 2 fluctuation state can be. When the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high-probability low support state H6 is a small win, the high-probability low support state H6 is continued, and the player enters the large winning opening 97a of the variable prize winning device 97 dedicated to the small win. A game ball is entered to obtain a prize ball. When the winning lottery is lost in the game round executed in the high-probability low support state H6, the high-probability low support state H6 is continued, and the player enters the game ball into the second start port 34 and the game round. to run.

In the high probability low support state H6, if you win a jackpot (regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a probability variable jackpot + small hit rush) in the winning lottery, the game times that won the jackpot (for example, the above 30th game times), the open/close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the high-probability-low support state H6 temporarily shifts to the standby state H2, and then shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3.

The operation in the standby state H2 shifted from the high probability low support state H6 is the same as the operation in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability high support state H4 or the high probability high support state H5. That is, in the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability-low support state H6, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes effective and the left big winning opening operation gate 95 becomes invalid. For this reason, in the case of the standby state H2 that has shifted from the high-probability-low support state H6, the recommended shooting mode is the right side that allows the game ball to enter the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96. The ball is hit, and the right-hand hitting lamp 39a is lit. Further, in the standby state H2, along with lighting of the right hitting lamp 39a, the symbol display device 41 displays a right gate aiming notification effect for notifying the player to aim at the right big winning opening operation gate 96.例文帳に追加

The player aims at the right side large winning opening operation gate 96 according to the right gate aiming notification effect, that is, by executing the right hitting, the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA, and the effective right side large winning opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 96. - 特許庁In the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability-low support state H6, waiting for the game ball to pass through the valid right-side large winning opening operation gate 96, and when the passage is detected, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is executed. transition to That is, in the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability low support state H6, the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a based on the entry of the game ball into the activated right side large winning opening operating gate 96 is established. In this case, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered after execution of switching control for updating data such as a flag in order to start the opening/closing execution mode H3. Specifically, as the switching control, control for turning on an opening/closing execution mode flag, which will be described later, is executed. The switching control may be control (switching control) for switching the game state in order to start a bonus game such as a big hit. It may also be a process for converting. Further, the switching control may include execution of display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win after the switching, and display or notification corresponding to the start of the special game such as the big win may be performed before the switching. The switching control may include execution. In addition, when the game state is the standby state H2 that has shifted from the high-probability low support state H6 as a regulation state for regulating the start of privilege games such as big wins, the left large winning opening operation gate that is disabled. Even if the game ball passes through 95, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3 is on standby (not executed) while the game state is in the standby state H2, and the opening/closing execution mode H3 is not entered.

The operation in the standby state H2 is summarized as follows.

In the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability low support state H1, the left big prize winning opening operation gate 95 becomes effective and the right big winning opening operation gate 96 becomes invalid. Therefore, in the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability low support state H1, the recommended firing mode is left-handed, and the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off. In addition, the pattern display device 41 displays a left gate aiming notification performance for notifying the player that the left big winning opening operating gate 95 is aimed. However, when the jackpot winning that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to special 1 suspension caused by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the left gate aiming notification effect Limited to. The player aims at the left side large prize winning opening operation gate 95 according to the left gate aim notification effect, that is, by executing left hitting, the game ball flows down to the left side of the game area PA, and the effective left side large prize opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 95. - 特許庁When it is detected that a game ball has passed through the activated left side large winning opening operating gate 95, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the large winning opening opening/closing process. In addition, in a pachinko machine with an empty seat where no player is present, when a big win is won in a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining reserve caused by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 and the machine shifts to the standby state H2. , the right hitting lamp 39a, the right hitting information effect, the left hitting information effect, and the left gate aim informing effect are not executed.

In the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability high support state H4, the high-probability high support state H5, or the high-probability low support state H6, the right large winning opening operating gate 96 becomes effective, and the left large winning opening operating gate 95. is invalid. Therefore, in the case of the low-probability support state H4, the high-probability-high support state H5, or the standby state H2 shifted from the high-probability-low support state H6, the recommended firing mode is right-handed, and the right-handed ramp 39a is illuminated. In addition, the pattern display device 41 displays a right gate aiming notification effect for notifying the player that the right big winning opening operation gate 96 is aimed at. The player aims at the right side large winning opening operation gate 96 according to the right gate aiming notification effect, that is, by executing the right hitting, the game ball flows down to the right side of the game area PA, and the effective right side large winning opening operation is performed. A game ball is entered into the gate 96. - 特許庁When it is detected that a game ball has passed through the activated right-side large winning opening operating gate 96, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the large winning opening opening/closing process.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, (i) when the gaming state is a waiting state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1 as a regulating state for regulating the start of a privilege game such as a big hit, Even if a game ball enters the right large winning opening operation gate 96, while the game state is in the standby state H2, the opening and closing execution mode H3 which is the start processing for detecting the game ball to the right large winning opening operation gate 96 is performed. is not executed, and (ii) the gaming state is a low-probability high support state H4, a high-probability high support state H5, or a high-probability low support state as a regulation state that regulates the start of a privilege game such as a big hit In the case of the standby state H2 (second state) shifted from H6, even if a game ball enters the left side large winning opening operation gate 95, the left side large winning opening operation gate is kept while the game state is in the standby state H2. The start processing of the opening/closing execution mode H3, which is the start processing for detection of the game ball to 95, is not executed.

<<2-4-5>> Detailed operation at the time of jackpot:
How the operation changes depending on the game state when a big win is won in the winning lottery will be described in detail below. Three cases, case 1 to case 3, will be described here.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation at the time of a big win in Case 1. FIG. Case 1 is a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 during a low probability/low support state (normal time). For case 1, the operation proceeds as follows.

In the low-probability-low support state H1 (normal state), when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry is performed. Next, in order to notify the player of the lottery result of this winning lottery, after starting the variable display of the segment display in the first symbol display section 37a, the segment display is changed so as to display corresponding to the lottery result. Stop the fluctuation of (one game round). Further, after each game round, the symbol display device 41 variably displays a predetermined symbol row, and then stops and displays the symbol row so as to correspond to the symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. . When the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning, the game shifts to a standby state H2 after the end of the game round.

In the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the recommended shooting mode is left-handed hitting that allows the game ball to enter the activated left side large winning opening operation gate 95. Therefore, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off at the start of the standby state H2. In addition, in the standby state H2, since the jackpot winning that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 1 suspension caused by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, Along with the turning off of the right hitting lamp 39a, the pattern display device 41 displays a left gate aim informing effect for informing the player to aim at the left big prize opening operating gate 95. - 特許庁The player aims at the left large prize winning opening operating gate 95 according to the left gate aiming notification performance, that is, hits to the left, thereby entering the game ball into the effective left large winning opening operating gate 95.例文帳に追加In the standby state H2, it waits for a game ball to enter the activated left side large winning opening operation gate (described as a left gate in the drawing) 95, and opens and closes when the entry is detected. After executing the control to turn ON the execution mode flag, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered. The opening/closing execution mode H3 includes an opening period for performing an opening effect prior to the round game, a large winning hole opening/closing processing period for causing the large winning hole 36a to perform a predetermined number of round games, and an ending period for performing an effect after the round game. Prepare.

In case 1, the recommended firing mode is left-handed in the low-probability low support state H1, and the right-handed lamp 39a has been turned off before shifting to the standby state H2. For this reason, the above-mentioned "the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off at the start of the standby state H2" means that if the lamp is already in the off state, the off state is continued. That is, the right-handed lamp 39a is in the off state during the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation shown in the drawing, and the right-handed lamp 39a continues to be in the off state even in the standby state H2.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation at the time of a big win in Case 2. FIG. Case 2 is when a big hit is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33 at the time of high probability high support state H5, low probability high support state H4, or high probability low support state H6. is. For case 2, the operation proceeds as follows.

When the game ball enters the second start port 34 in the high-probability support state H5, the low-probability support state H4, or the high-probability low support state H6, it is acquired based on the entry. A lucky draw for special information will be held. Next, in order to notify the player of the lottery result of this winning lottery, after starting the variable display of the segment display in the second symbol display section 37b, the segment display is changed to display corresponding to the lottery result. Stop the fluctuation of (one game round). In addition, after each game round, the symbol display device 41 variably displays a predetermined symbol row, and then stops and displays the symbol row so as to correspond to the symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. . When the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning, the game shifts to a standby state H2 after the end of the game round.

When the standby state H2 is shifted from the high-accuracy high support state H5, the low-accuracy high support state H4, or the high-accuracy low support state H6, the recommended firing mode is right-handed, so the standby state H2 At the start of , the right hitting lamp 39a is lit, and a right hitting notification effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁The player makes the game ball enter the valid right big winning opening operating gate 96 by executing right hitting according to the right hitting informing effect. In the standby state H2, it waits for a game ball to enter the valid right big winning opening operation gate (described as a right gate in the drawing) 96, and opens and closes when the entry is detected. After executing the control to turn ON the execution mode flag, the opening/closing execution mode H3 is entered. The opening/closing execution mode H3 includes an opening period for performing an opening effect prior to the round game, a large winning hole opening/closing processing period for causing the large winning hole 36a to perform a predetermined number of round games, and an ending period for performing an effect after the round game. Prepare.

In the case of case 2, at the time of high probability high support state H5, at the time of low probability high support state H4, or at the time of high probability low support state H6, the recommended firing mode is right hitting, and the right hitting lamp 39a is in the standby state It has been in the lighting state before transitioning to H2. Therefore, the above-mentioned "the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on at the start of the standby state H2" means to continue the lighting state if it is already in the lighting state. In the case of case 2, from the state of enjoying the game by hitting right in the high-probability high support state H5, the low-probability high support state H4, or the high-probability low support state H6, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Since the recommended shooting mode is right-handed shooting until the player wins the game and executes the opening/closing execution mode H3 through the standby state H2, the player maintains the right-handed shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism all the time. , You can enjoy so-called consecutive chan, in which the jackpot is continuous.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation at the time of a big win in case 3. FIG. Case 3 is a case where a big hit is won in a winning lottery related to special 2 remaining hold caused by entering a ball into the second start port 34 in a low probability low support state (normal time).

In the low probability high support state H4, when the game round of 50 times, which is the upper limit number of time reduction, is completed without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, the low probability is shifted to the low probability low support state H1 (normal time). 2 to 4 stored Special 2 reserves may remain due to the gaming ball entering the second starting port 34 in the high support state H4. Case 3 is the case where the winning lottery result of the winning lottery related to one of the remaining 2 to 4 special 2 reservations (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 remaining reservations) is a big win. As shown in FIG. 62, in order to notify the player that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 balance reservation, in the second symbol display unit 37b, after starting the variable display of the segment display, the winning lottery The variation of the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponding to the result of the lottery, that is, the winning of the jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, as a countermeasure for preventing right-handed hitting in normal times, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation, that is, the special 2 hold in normal time The variable time is set to a very long time (long) such as 10 minutes. After that, when the lottery result of the winning lottery related to this variation is a big win, the game shifts to the standby state H2 after the variation is stopped.

In the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the recommended firing mode is left-handed, so the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off at the start of the standby state H2. In addition, in the standby state H2, the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. , the left gate aiming notification effect is not displayed on the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁After that, the standby state H2 continues as it is.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a small winning rush function as described above. In this configuration, as described above, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by hitting right even in the normal state of low support. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to set the fluctuation time of the special 2 hold in the normal time to an extremely long time (long) such as 10 minutes. However, when this configuration is adopted for a pachinko machine (special 2 priority machine) that preferentially variably displays special 2 reserve over special 1 reserve, or a pachinko machine that variably displays in order of winning, special 2 It is said that if the state is shifted to the normal state while the hold remains, or if the player accidentally hits right in the normal state, the game cannot be played until the special 2 hold long fluctuation time ends, and the game cannot be continued smoothly. There were disadvantages. In addition, a malicious person normally enters a plurality of game balls into the second start port and leaves the pachinko machine unattended, thereby making the machine unplayable for several tens of minutes. However, there is also the disadvantage that the operating rate of the pachinko machines in the hall may be extremely lowered. In order to eliminate these demerits, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a small winning rush function as a simultaneous variation machine.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the above configuration, when returning from the low probability high support state H4 to the low probability low support state H1 (normal time), 2 to 4 special 2 reservations remain, and the remaining When the result of the winning lottery is that the winning lottery wins the jackpot with the special 2 balance reserved, it may take several tens of minutes before the jackpot winning is announced. On the other hand, when the low-probability high support state H4 ends and returns to the low-probability low support state H1 (normal time), it is often possible for the player to end the game as having escaped from an advantageous state. rice field. Even if the player knows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with the special 2 remaining balance reserved at normal times, the player cannot wait for the above several tens of minutes and ends the game in a state where it is not clear whether the jackpot will be won or not. Always terminate. Therefore, during the operation shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 may become empty without a player. Also in this case, the variable display continues until the variable stops, after which the display shifts to the standby state H2. In this standby state H2, as described above, the right-handed lamp 39a does not turn on. In addition, since the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 2 hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the left gate aiming notification effect And the left-handed notification effect is not displayed. For this purpose, a pachinko machine with the right-handed hitting lamp 39a in the lit state, or a pachinko machine in which the left-gate aiming notification effect, the left-handed hitting notification effect, or the right-handed hitting notification effect is executed is selected from among the pachinko machines with vacant seats. It is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas who find out and try to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine in which execution of a big win game is confirmed.

Here, the effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be further described by specifically citing a conventional example. This conventional pachinko machine differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the following configurations (i) and (ii), but the rest of the configuration is the same.
(i) A configuration in which the left big prize winning opening operation gate 95 is not provided and the right big prize winning opening operation gate 96 is provided.
(ii) If a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 after the end of the game round regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Waiting for the passage of the game ball, and shifting the variable winning device 36 to the opening/closing execution mode when the passage is detected.

That is, the conventional pachinko machine is a simultaneous variation machine and is equipped with a small winning rush function. According to this conventional pachinko machine, when the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the ball entering the second start port 34 is executed in the low probability and low support state (normal time), this As in the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the fluctuation time corresponding to one game round for notifying the player of the lottery result of this winning lottery becomes extremely long. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the conventional example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 at normal times. Even when the game is played, the player may end the game and become an empty seat. Also in this case, after the variation stops displaying the symbols corresponding to the winning of the big win, the game shifts to the standby state in which the execution of the round game is confirmed. In the conventional pachinko machine, the recommended shooting mode in the standby state is right-handed hitting, so the right-handed hitting lamp 39a is turned on at the start of the standby state. As a result, according to this conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win and the start of the round game is confirmed, the seats are vacant seats without players. Despite this, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on.

Here, when considering a pachinko machine having neither the left big prize opening operating gate 95 nor the right big winning opening operating gate 96, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, the game round is executed. Immediately after the end of the game, the opening/closing execution mode would be entered, and the opening/closing execution mode could be started in a state where the seats were vacant without any players. According to this conventional pachinko machine, by providing the right-hand big winning opening operation gate 96, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing execution mode from being started in a state where there is no player and the seat is vacant. As described above, even though the pachinko machine has vacant seats with no players, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on.

Therefore, according to the conventional pachinko machine, a person who tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine by finding the pachinko machine with the right-handed lamp 39a lit from among the empty pachinko machines in the hall. There was a problem of generating (commonly known as hyena). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described in case 3 (see FIG. 62), during the low probability low support state (normal time), the ball entering the second start port 34 When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold due to the above, the right-handed lamp 39a is in the off state at the start of the standby state H2 that shifts after the fluctuation is stopped, so the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold Even if the lottery result is a jackpot winning and the start of the round game is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the right hitting lamp 39a. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of case 3, as described above, in the standby state H2 that has shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the jackpot that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 Since winning is based on a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining reserve caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the left gate aiming notification effect and the left hitting notification effect are displayed on the pattern display device 41. never For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold is a jackpot winning, and the state that the start of the round game is confirmed is the left gate aim notification. There is no such thing as being found by hyenas from the production or the left-handed notification production.

Furthermore, in the normal time, when a big win is won in a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, the game ball enters the effective left big winning hole operation gate 95. Only those who start the game of the pachinko machine 10 without knowing that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot game can start the jackpot game by entering a ball. can be limited. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the right-handed lamp 39a is controlled to be lit during execution of the opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, so that the player can set the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism to the left. As a hit, after the game ball is entered into the left-side large winning opening operating gate 95, when control for starting the opening/closing execution mode (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag) is performed, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on. Since the lighting state is established, it is possible to know immediately from the lighting state of the right hitting lamp 39a that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism needs to be switched to the right hitting. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to inform the player of appropriate operations.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability-low support state H1 is left-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, even after the transition to the standby state H2, the opening and closing execution mode start processing can be executed while the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism is left-handed. A game ball can be entered into the left large winning opening operation gate 95 which is possible and enabled. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the activated left side large winning opening operation gate 95 without switching the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism one by one. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operability of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability support state H4, high-probability-high support state H5, or high-probability-low support state H6 is right-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability-high support state H4, the high-probability-high support state H5, or the high-probability-low support state H6, even after the transition to the standby state H2, the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism is changed to the right. The game ball can be entered into the activated right side big winning opening operation gate 96 which can execute the start processing of the open/close execution mode while being hit. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter a game ball into the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96 without switching the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism one by one. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operability of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability-low support state H1 is left-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, since the right hitting lamp 39a is controlled to be extinguished, the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism according to the extinguishing state of the right hitting lamp 39a is left hitting. In the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1 while continuing to do, the game ball can be entered into the left large winning opening operation gate 95 capable of executing the start processing of the opening and closing execution mode. . For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the left-side big winning opening operating gate 95 without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one. can improve sexuality.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability support state H4, high-probability-high support state H5, or high-probability-low support state H6 is right-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability high support state H4, the high probability high support state H5, or the high probability low support state H6, since the right hitting lamp 39a is controlled to the lighting state, the right hitting lamp 39a In the standby state H2 shifted from the low-accuracy high-support state H4, the high-accuracy high-support state H5, or the high-accuracy low support state H6, while continuing to make the firing mode by the shooting means right-handed according to the lighting state of A game ball can be entered into the right big winning opening operating gate 96 capable of executing the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the right big winning opening operation gate 96 without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one. can improve sexuality.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the left-side large winning opening operation gate 95 allows a game ball to enter when hitting to the left, and does not allow a game ball to enter when hitting to the right. When hit, the left big winning opening operation gate 95 is configured so that the ball does not enter without fail (that is, with a probability of 100%). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the right-handed lamp 39a is not lit in the standby state for establishing the conditions for the start of the jackpot. By searching for a pachinko machine in a lighting state, it is not possible to find a pachinko machine in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if it is configured such that the game ball always enters the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 when hitting to the left, an empty pachinko machine is found and the pachinko machine is used. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is in a standby state for establishing conditions for starting a big win simply by taking a seat and shooting one game ball with a left stroke. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player finds an empty pachinko machine because it is configured so that the ball does not always enter the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 when the ball is hit to the left. When the player sits at the pachinko machine and shoots one game ball with the left hand, it cannot be determined whether or not the pachinko machine is in a standby state for establishing conditions for the start of a big win. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a state of waiting for satisfaction of start conditions. Therefore, according to this configuration, by firing only one game ball in order to the pachinko machines with vacant seats in the hall, the pachinko machines in the condition fulfillment standby state in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed are activated. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out and try to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machine.

<<2-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Timer interrupt processing is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 .

In step Sy0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (entering ball detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0102.

In step Sy0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0103.

In step Sy0103, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 65) described later.

In step Sy0104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sy0104 will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0105.

In step Sy0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step St0105 will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0106.

In step Sy0106, a ball entry process for the gate accompanying a ball entering the left big prize opening operating gate 95 or the right big winning opening operating gate 96 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the gate in step St0106 will be described later. After executing step Sy0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 63: Sy0104).

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step Sy0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (start winning). In step Sy0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sy0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0203.

In step Sy0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0204.

In step Sy0204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reservation area Ra is read out as the start reservation number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reservation number RaN), and the first start reservation number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0209.

In step Sy0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sy0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0205, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sy0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sy0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sy0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sy0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0208.

In step Sy0208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0209.

In step Sy0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sy0204 or step Sy0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sy0209, if the number N of start suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sy0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sy0209, if the number N of pending starts is less than the upper limit (Sy0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0210, adds 1 to the number N of pending starts in the corresponding reserved area, and then proceeds to step Sy0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0212. In addition, when it is in a regulated state at the time of start winning, addition of the number N of start suspension is executed, but the change is not started immediately, and the change start process is put on standby (non-execution). As a case of being in a regulated state at the time of start winning, there is a case of special 1 fluctuation when a game ball enters the first start port 33, and a case of special 2 when a game ball enters the second start port 34. There are a case of fluctuation and a case of executing a jackpot game.

In step Sy0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sy0103 (FIG. 63) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In Sy0210, 1 is added and stored in a storage area corresponding to the pending number. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sy0103 (FIG. 63) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, ie, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sy0210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sy0103 (FIG. 63) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sy0210. After executing step Sy0212, the process proceeds to step Sy0213.

In step Sy0213, the first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing determination of the presence or absence of such pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of a winning lottery. After executing step Sy0213, the process proceeds to step Sy0214.

In step Sy0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the preceding judgment process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a holding command do.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 66 : step Sy0402) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is displayed on hold. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 according to the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step Sy0214, the main MPU 62 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening. Although the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine, the pachinko machine of the type that performs variable display in the order of winning is also subject to the same regulation state. Also, in the case of the special 2 priority machine, during the special 2 fluctuation when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and during the special 1 change when the game ball enters the second start port 34 Join the regulatory state. Also in the case of special 1 priority machine, during the special 1 fluctuation when the game ball enters the second start port 34, and during the special 2 change when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the regulation state join.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 63: Sy0105).

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for through. In step Sy0301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sy0301, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sy0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0302, and whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step Sy0301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sy0301: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sy0302, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (Sy0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0303, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0304.

In step Sy0304, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step St0103 (FIG. 61) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sy0302, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sy0302: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for the gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the gate will be described. The ball-entering process for the gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 63: Sy0106).

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the gate. In step Sy0401, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the standby state flag is turned ON after transition to the standby state, and turned OFF at the timing of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. In step Sy0401, when it is determined that the standby state flag is ON (Sy0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0402, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the left large winning opening operation gate 95. In step Sy0402, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the left side large winning opening operation gate 95 (Sy0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0403, the left gate valid flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of RAM64 is ON. The left gate valid flag is a flag for determining whether or not the function of causing the shift to the opening/closing execution mode for the left big prize opening operating gate 95 is valid or invalid. It is turned ON when a jackpot is won in a low-probability low-probability support state in which the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is a low-probability mode. In the high probability support state, the support mode is high frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is high probability mode, or the support mode is low frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is high probability mode. It is turned off when a jackpot is won in a certain high-probability-low support state. If it is determined in step Sy0403 that the left gate valid flag is ON (Sy0403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0406.

In step Sy0402, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the left side large winning opening operation gate 95 (Sy0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0404, and the game ball enters the right side large winning opening operation gate 96. determine whether or not In step Sy0404, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the right side large winning opening operation gate 96 (Sy0404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0405, the right gate valid flag stored in various flag storage area 64g of RAM64 is ON. The right gate valid flag is a flag for determining whether the function of causing the shift to the opening/closing execution mode for the right big winning opening operation gate 96 is valid or invalid. It is turned ON when a jackpot is won in a support state, a high-probability high-support state, or a high-probability-low support state, and is turned OFF when a jackpot is won in a low-probability-low support state. If it is determined in step Sy0405 that the right gate valid flag is ON (Sy0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0406.

In step Sy0406, as switching control, the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0407.

In step Sy0407, the standby state flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the ball entry processing for the main through ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0401 that the standby state flag is not ON (Sy0401: NO), the ball entering processing for this through is terminated. If it is determined in step Sy0403 that the left gate valid flag is not ON (Sy0403: NO), the ball entering processing for this through is terminated. In step Sy0404, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the right big winning opening operation gate 96 (Sy0404: NO), the ball entering processing for this through is terminated. If it is determined in step Sy0405 that the right gate enable flag is not ON (Sy0405: NO), the ball entering processing for this through is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sy0501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0502.

In step Sy0502, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sy0502, the process proceeds to step Sy0503.

In step Sy0503, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0504.

In step Sy0504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sy0505. In step Sy0505, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sy0505, the process proceeds to step Sy0506.

In step Sy0506, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0507.

In step Sy0507, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided at the right first start port 44 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0508.

In step Sy0508, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (start of the command output processing in step Sy0502 in the second and subsequent rounds). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process.

In step Sy0508, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sy0508: NO), in steps Sy0509 and Sy0510, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sy0509, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sy0510, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing (Sy0508: YES), the process returns to step Sy0502, and each process from step Sy0502 to step Sy0507 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sy0502 to step Sy0507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Sy0505 in FIG. 67).

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sy0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing when the variation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won is completed, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the standby state, and the opening/closing execution mode is finished. turned off. If it is determined in step Sy0601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sy0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0602. In step Sy0602, it is determined whether or not it is in a standby state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the standby state flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sy0601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and in step Sy0602, by determining whether or not the standby state is in progress, step Sy0604 (or step Sy0605) is not executed during the standby state and the opening/closing execution mode. make it As a result, it is possible to prevent the game round from starting during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed and the period in the standby state. Details will be described below.

In step Sy0601, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sy0601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game cycle is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sy0602. End the control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. .

In step Sy0602, if it is determined that the standby state flag is ON (Sy0602: YES), it is determined that it is in the standby state, and this game round control is performed without executing any of the processing after step Sy0603. End the process. That is, when the game is in the standby state, regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the game cycle is not started.

In step Sy0603, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the first start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped and the display is stopped. When it is determined in step Sy0603 that the first fluctuating flag is not ON (Sy0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0604.

In step Sy0604, a fluctuation start process for the first start port is executed. The fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is processing for starting the game round for the first starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening will be described later. After executing step Sy0604, the process proceeds to step Sy0606.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0603 that the first fluctuating flag is ON (Sy0603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0605.

In step Sy0605, the first fluctuation stopping process is executed. The first fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols of the started game round for the first starting port. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sy0605, the process proceeds to step Sy0606.

In step Sy0606, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the second starting opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped and the display is stopped. . When it is determined in step Sy0606 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (Sy0606: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0607.

In step Sy0607, the variation start process for the second start port is executed. The variation start processing for the second starting port is processing for starting the game round for the second starting port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step Sy0607, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0606 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (Sy0606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0608.

In step Sy0608, a second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second fluctuation stopping process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the pattern of the started game round for the second starting port. The details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sy0608, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the variation start processing for the first start port will be described. The variation start process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 68: Sy0604).

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start processing for the first start port. In step Sy0701, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension number RaN=0. If it is determined in step Sy0701 that the first start suspension number RaN is not 0 (Sy0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0701 that the first start suspension number RaN=0 (Sy0701: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the first start port ends.

In step Sy0702, the hold information shift process for the first starting port is executed. In the holding information shift process for the first starting port, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Sy0702, the process proceeds to step Sy0703.

In step Sy0703, determination processing for the first start opening is executed. In the determination process for the first start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, the hit/fail decision to determine the presence or absence of the jackpot, the distribution decision to distribute the jackpot type , reach determination is performed to determine the presence or absence of reach occurrence. The details of the determination processing for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Sy0703, the process proceeds to step Sy0704.

In step Sy0704, a variable time setting process for the first start port is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the first starting port, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Sy0704, the process proceeds to step Sy0705.

In step Sy0705, the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the reach Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sy0704 are included. After executing step Sy0705, the process proceeds to step Sy0706.

In step Sy0706, the first type command is set. The first type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or off information.

The first variation command and the first type command set in steps Sy0705 and Sy0706 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. After executing step Sy0706, the process proceeds to step Sy0707.

In step Sy0707, the variable display in the first symbol display section 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step Sy0708 to turn on the first variable flag. The first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the first starting opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a becomes a stop display. After executing step Sy0708, the process proceeds to step Sy0709.

At step Sy0709, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After executing step Sy0709, the fluctuation start processing for the first start opening is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing for the first start port>
Next, the hold information shift processing for the first start port will be described. The holding information shift process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start port (Sy0702 in FIG. 69).

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the first start port. In step Sy0801, 1 is subtracted from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0802.

In step Sy0802, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0803.

In step Sy0803, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sy0803, the main reservation information shift process for the first start port ends.

<Determination processing for the first start port>
Next, the determination processing for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the first start opening (FIG. 69: Sy0703).

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the first start port. In step Sy0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the next jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the fall opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sy0901, when it determines with it being high probability mode (Sy0901:YES), it progresses to step Sy0902.

In step Sy0902, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 54(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sy0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0903.

In step Sy0903, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 54(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sy0904.

In step Sy0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step Sy0902 or step Sy0903 is a big hit. In step Sy0904, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (Sy0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0905.

In step Sy0905, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The first winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 as a trigger is a big win, and the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is turned on. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the variable display of the first symbol by the ball stops and the display becomes stationary. After executing step Sy0905, the process proceeds to step Sy0906.

In step Sy0906, the allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the first start port (see FIG. 56(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step Sy0906, the process proceeds to step Sy0907.

In step Sy0907, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (jackpot type) in step Sy0906 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sy0907, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (Sy0907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0908. In addition, in step Sy0907, when the result of the distribution determination is "probability variable big hit + small hit rush", it is determined that it is not a probability variable big hit.

In step Sy0908, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy0906 is turned ON. After executing step Sy0908, the process proceeds to step Sy0909.

In step Sy0909, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy0906 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy0909, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

In step Sy0907, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot (Sy0907: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0910.

In step Sy0910, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination in step Sy0906 (big hit type) is probability variable big hit + small hit rush. In step Sy0910, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is probability variable jackpot + small hit rush (Sy0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0911.

In step Sy0911, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step Sy0906 is turned ON. After executing step Sy0911, the process proceeds to step Sy0912.

In step Sy0912, stop design setting processing for probability variable big hit + small hit rush is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, in the current game round of the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, the variable display is ended with any stop result displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a ( Execute processing for setting whether to stop display). Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy0906. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy0912, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

In step Sy0910, when it is determined that the sorted jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush (Sy0910: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sy0913.

In step Sy0913, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy0906 is turned ON. After executing step Sy0913, the process proceeds to step Sy0914.

In step Sy0914, a stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display part 37a in the current game round which is the normal jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step Sy0906 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After step Sy0914 is executed, the determination processing for the first starting opening, which is the first ball entrance portion, is terminated.

In step Sy0904, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step Sy0902 or step Sy0903 is not a big hit (Sy0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy0915.

In step Sy0915, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referenced to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step Sy0915 is executed when the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sy0904 is not a big win, that is, when the win is lost. That is, in step Sy0915, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of the win/loss determination is not a big win. After executing step Sy0915, the process proceeds to step Sy0916.

In step Sy0916, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step Sy0915 is reach occurrence. In step Sy0916, when it is determined that reach has occurred (Sy0916: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy0917, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sy0917, the process proceeds to step Sy0918. In step Sy0916, if it is determined that reach has not occurred (Sy0916: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Sy0918.

In step Sy0918, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn to be a loss, the first symbol display portion 37a is used for setting which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy0918, the determination process for the first start opening is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for first start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first start port will be described. The variable time setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the change start process for the first start port (FIG. 69: Sy0704).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variable time for the first start port. In step Sy1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1002.

In step Sy1002, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1002 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sy1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1003.

In step Sy1003, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1003 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1004.

In step Sy1004, low-probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port is executed. In the low-probability-low-support state variable time information acquisition processing for the first starting port, the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the first starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Sy1004, the process proceeds to step Sy1009.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1003 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1005.

In step Sy1005, the fluctuation time information acquisition process during the low probability high support state for the first starting opening is executed. In the low-probability support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first start port, the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low probability high support state (state H4) in FIG. 59, when the first starting opening game round is executed, the fluctuation time information of the first starting opening game round is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1005, the process proceeds to step Sy1009.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy1002 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sy1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1006.

In step Sy1006, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1006 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy1006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1007.

In step Sy1007, high-probability high support state time fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting opening is executed. In the high-probability-high support state variable time information acquisition processing for the first start port, the first start port game round is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, when the first start opening game round is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 59, the variation time information of the first start opening game round is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1007, the process proceeds to step Sy1009.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1006 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy1006: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1008.

In step Sy1008, high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port is executed. In the high-probability-low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port, the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first starting port. Specifically, in the high probability low support state (state H6) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the first starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1008, the process proceeds to step Sy1009.

In step Sy1009, the variable time information obtained in each process of steps Sy1004, Sy1005, Sy1007, and Sy1008 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the first starting opening is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening in the low probability low support state will be described. The low-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 72: Sy1004).

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the low-probability low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Sy1101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy1101: YES), step Proceed to Sy1102.

In step Sy1102, the variable time table for the big win is specified from the group of variable time tables during the low-probability low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability and low-support state fluctuation time table group, (i) a big-hit fluctuation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability and low-support state, (ii) in a low-probability and low-support state, winning Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (iii) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in a low probability low support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Sy1102, first, (i) is specified from among (i) to (iii). (i) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for big wins. Then, by referring to the specified jackpot variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Sy01001 (FIG. 72) is acquired. After executing step Sy1102, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1101 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Sy1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1103.

In step Sy1103, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy1103, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1104.

In step Sy1104, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the low probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (ii) in a low probability low support state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, Identify. (ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing normal effects for reach generation. Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1104, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

In step Sy1103, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Sy1103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1105.

In step Sy1105, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (iii) in a low probability low support state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. (iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a non-reach normal effect. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1105, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low-probability support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening in the low-probability support state will be described. The variable time information acquisition process for the first start port in the low-probable-height support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 72: Sy1005) of the variable time setting process for the first start port.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the low-probability support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Sy1201, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination relating to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy1201: YES), step Proceed to Sy1202.

In step Sy1202, the fluctuation time table for the big hit is specified from the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group, (iv) a big-hit fluctuation time table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability support state, (v) in a low-probability support state, hit Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (vi) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in a low-probability sapo state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Sy1202, first, (iv) is identified from among (iv) to (vi). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After step Sy1202 is executed, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening during the low probability height support state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy1201 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big hit (step Sy1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1203.

In step Sy1203, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy1203, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1204.

In step Sy1204, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the group of variable time tables for low probability support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (iv) to (vi), (v) in a low probability high support state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1204, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

In step Sy1203, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Sy1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1205.

In step Sy1205, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low-probability support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first, from (iv) to (vi), (vi) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1205, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening during low probability height support state is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high-precision high support state for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting opening in the high-probability-high support state will be described. The high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 72: Sy1007).

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the high-precision high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Sy1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy1301: YES), step Proceed to Sy1302.

In step Sy1302, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables during the high probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. During the time specified by this variable time information, that is, during the variable state in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the main display unit 45 And the variable display by the pattern display device 41 is performed. During this change, internally, it is a waiting state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot in which the execution of the opening and closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening and closing process is confirmed, and whether the opening and closing execution mode is executed in the game round. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying various expectation level effects and the like. In the high-probability high support state fluctuation time table group, (vii) the big hit fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the high-probability high support state, (viii) in the high-probability high support state, hit Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (ix) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-certainty high sapo state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Sy1302, first, (vii) is specified from among (vii) to (ix). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1302, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy1301 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Sy1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1303.

In step Sy1303, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy1303, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1304.

In step Sy1304, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the variable time table group during the high probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), (viii) in a high-certainty high support state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1304, the low probability height support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is ended.

In step Sy1303, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sy1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1305.

In step Sy1305, from the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time table for reach non-occurrence is specified, and the specified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), (ix) in a high-certainty high sapo state, the reach non-occurrence variable time used when the hit lottery does not win the jackpot and the reach does not occur Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1305, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening in the low probability height support state is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the high-probability-low support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 72: Sy1008).

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the high-probability-low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Sy1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination relating to the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy1401: YES), step Proceed to Sy1402.

In step Sy1402, the variable time table for the big win is specified from the high probability/low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-probability-low support state variable time table group includes (x) a high-probability-low support state, a big hit fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery, (xi) a high-probability-low support state, a hit. Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (xii) In a high-probability low support state, reach non-reach used when no reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Sy1402, first, (x) is identified from among (x) to (xii). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is acquired. After executing step Sy1402, the high-probability-low support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1401 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big hit (that is, if it is determined that the game is out) (step Sy1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1403.

In step Sy1403, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy1403, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1404.

In step Sy1404, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the high probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is used. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (x) to (xii), (xi) in a high probability low support state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1404, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

In step Sy1403, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (Sy1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1405.

In step Sy1405, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the high probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (x) to (xii), (xii) in a high probability and low support state, the reach non-occurrence variable time used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1001 (FIG. 72) is obtained. After executing step Sy1405, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting opening during the low probability height support state is ended.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 68: Sy0605).

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the first fluctuation stopping process. In step Sy1501, it is determined whether or not the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is a "jackpot", and the game to the second starting port 34 is started. The variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball stops, and is turned off when the display is stopped. If it is determined in step Sy1501 that the second hit flag is not ON (Sy1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1502.

In step Sy1502, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 71) for the first starting port has elapsed. If it is determined in step Sy1502 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (Sy1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1503. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy1502 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended (Sy1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1512.

In step Sy1503, the movement of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stopped symbols) is set in step Sy0909, step Sy0912, step Sy0914, or step Sy0918 of the determination process for the first start opening (FIG. 71). During the variable display of the first symbol that will result in a big win based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the right-handed lamp 39a is controlled to be extinguished. After executing step Sy1503, the process proceeds to step Sy1504.

In step Sy1504, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is turned ON when the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 as a trigger. 1 symbol is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. After executing step Sy1504, the process proceeds to step Sy1505.

In step Sy1505, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second fluctuating flag is turned ON when the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger. 2 is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. If it is determined in step Sy1505 that the second fluctuating flag is not ON (Sy1505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1506.

In step Sy1506, the first winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1505 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (Sy1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1512.

If it is determined in step Sy1501 that the second hit flag is ON (Sy1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1507.

In step Sy1507, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 81) for the second starting opening to be described later has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sy1507 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Sy1507: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1502. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy1507 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (Sy1507: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1508.

In step Sy1508, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sy1508, the process proceeds to step Sy1509.

In step Sy1509, the movement of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. In other words, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. In the present embodiment, as the symbol to be stopped and displayed (stop symbol), a stop symbol for losing is used. Further, in step Sy1509, various flags such as the probability variable jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the first start game round are turned off, and in the winning lottery related to the first start game round, Even if a jackpot is won, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Sy1509, the process proceeds to step Sy1510.

In step Sy1510, the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1511.

At step Sy1511, the standby state transition flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. That is, at this timing when the variation of the symbols in the game round in which the big hit is won is completed and the game shifts to the standby state, the standby state transition flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1512.

In step Sy1512, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sy1512, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy1512: YES), the process advances to step Sy1513 to determine whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sy1513, if it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy1513: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1514, and the number of times the game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is the upper limit of the time-saving upper limit number of times (For example, 50 times) It is determined whether it is before reaching (=within the time saving upper limit number of times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. Since the game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of times of the time saving upper limit number, by determining whether PNC > 0, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high frequency support mode It is possible to determine whether or not it is before the time saving upper limit number of times is reached.

In step Sy1514, if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sy1514: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the time reduction upper limit number of times, the process proceeds to step Sy1515, high frequency support mode Turn off the flag. After executing step Sy1515, the process proceeds to step Sy1516.

In step Sy1516, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After executing step Sy1516, the process proceeds to step Sy1517.

In step Sy1517, the right-handed lamp 39a is extinguished. After executing step S1517, the first fluctuation stopping process is ended.

<Variation start processing for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening will be described. The variation start process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 68: Sy0607).

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening. In step Sy1601, it is determined whether or not the second start suspension number RbN=0. If it is determined in step Sy1601 that the second start suspension number RbN is not 0 (Sy1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1601 that the second start suspension number RbN=0 (Sy1601: YES), the fluctuation start processing for the second start opening is terminated.

In step Sy1602, a hold information shift process for the second starting port is executed. In the hold information shift process for the second start port, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described later. After executing step Sy1602, the process proceeds to step Sy1603.

In step Sy1603, determination processing for the second start port is executed. In the determination process for the second start opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, the judgment of whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined, and the big hit type is distributed. Distribution judgment and reach judgment for judging presence/absence of reach occurrence are performed. The details of the determination process for the second start opening will be described later. After executing step Sy1603, the process proceeds to step Sy1604.

In step Sy1604, a variable time setting process for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening, the variation time, which is the time from when the pattern starts to change until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the variable time for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step Sy1604, the process proceeds to step Sy1605.

In step Sy1605, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the reach Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sy1604 are included. After executing step Sy1605, the process proceeds to step Sy1606.

In step Sy1606, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot + small hit rush information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, small hit information, or off information.

The variation command and the second type command set in steps Sy1605 and Sy1606 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and the second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sy1606, the process proceeds to step Sy1607.

In step Sy1607, the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start changing display, and then the process proceeds to step Sy1608 to turn on the second changing flag. The second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game cycle for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b becomes a stop display. After executing step Sy1608, the process proceeds to step Sy1609.

At step Sy1609, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. After step Sy1609 is executed, the fluctuation start processing for the second start port ends.

<Holding information shift process for the second start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described. The hold information shift process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (Sy1602 in FIG. 78).

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the hold information shift process for the second start port. In step Sy1701, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1702.

In step Sy1702, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1703.

In step Sy1703, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After step Sy1703 is executed, this second start port holding information shift process is ended.

<Determination processing for the second start port>
Next, the determination processing for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process for the second start port (Sy1603 in FIG. 78).

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing determination processing for the second starting port. In step Sy1801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , is normally turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode relating to the winning of the jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the fall opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step Sy1801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (Sy1801:YES), it progresses to step Sy1802.

In step Sy1802, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 55(b). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sy1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1803.

In step Sy1803, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big win in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 55(a). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1804.

In step Sy1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step Sy1802 or step Sy1803 is a big hit. In step Sy1804, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot (Sy1804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1805.

In step Sy1805, the second winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 as a trigger is "big win", and the game ball enters the second start port 34. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball stops and the stop display is displayed. After executing step Sy1805, the process proceeds to step Sy1806.

In step Sy1806, the allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 56(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in which jackpot type numerical range. After executing step Sy1806, the process proceeds to step Sy1807.

In step Sy1807, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination (jackpot type) in step Sy1806 is a variable probability jackpot. In step Sy1807, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (Sy1807: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1808. In addition, in step Sy1807, when the result of the distribution determination is "probability variable big hit + small hit rush", it is determined that it is not a probability variable big hit.

In step Sy1808, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy1806 is turned ON. After executing step Sy1808, the process proceeds to step Sy1809.

In step Sy1809, stop symbol setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot, it is set whether to end the variable display (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed in the second symbol display part 37b in the current game round to be the probability variable jackpot. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy1806 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy1809, the determination process for the second start opening is terminated.

In step Sy1807, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot (Sy1807: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sy1810.

In step Sy1810, it is determined whether or not the result of distribution determination in step Sy1806 (big hit type) is probability variable big hit + small hit rush. In step Sy1810, when it is determined that the sorted jackpot type is probability variable jackpot + small hit rush (Sy1810: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1811.

In step Sy1811, the probability variation jackpot + small hit rush flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy1806 is turned ON. After executing step Sy1811, the process proceeds to step Sy1812.

In step Sy1812, stop design setting processing for probability variable big hit + small hit rush is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, in the current game round that is the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush, the variation display is ended with any stop result displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b ( Execute processing for setting whether to stop display). Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy1806. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy1812, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

In step Sy1810, when it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot + small hit rush (Sy1810: NO), that is, when the distributed jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sy1813.

In step Sy1813, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sy1806 is turned ON. After executing step Sy1813, the process proceeds to step Sy1814.

In step Sy1814, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal big win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which is the normal big win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step Sy1806 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy1814, the determination process for the second start opening is terminated.

In step Sy1804, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in step Sy1802 or step Sy1803 is not a big hit (Sy1804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1815, and the result of the success/failure determination in step Sy1802 or step Sy1803 is a small hit. Determine whether or not In step Sy1815, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (Sy1815: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1816, and the small hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sy1813, the process proceeds to step Sy1817.

In step Sy1817, stop symbol setting processing for a small hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the small win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game turn to be the small win. process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the small win stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small win is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store in the stop result address storage area. After step Sy1817 is executed, the determination processing for the second start opening, which is the second ball entry portion, is terminated.

In step Sy1815, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is not a small hit (Sy1815: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1818.

In step Sy1818, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referenced to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table referred to. The process of step Sy1818 is executed when the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sy1804 is neither a big win nor a small win. That is, in step Sy1812, it is determined whether or not it is a game round in which reach occurs among the game rounds in which the result of winning/failure determination is neither a big win nor a small win. After executing step Sy1818, the process proceeds to step Sy1819.

In step Sy1819, it is determined whether or not the result of reach determination in step Sy1818 is reach occurrence. In step Sy1819, when it is determined that reach has occurred (Sy1819: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1820, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sy1820, the process proceeds to step Sy1821. In step Sy1819, when it is determined that reach has not occurred (Sy1819: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1821 without executing step Sy1820.

In step Sy1821, stop symbol setting processing for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for loss, in the current game turn that is a loss, the second symbol display portion 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sy1821, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time for second start port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described. The process of setting the variation time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second start port (Sy1604 in FIG. 78).

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port. In step Sy1901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy1902.

In step Sy1902, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1902 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1903.

In step Sy1903, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1903 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1904.

In step Sy1904, low-probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the low-probability-low-support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the second starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1904, the process proceeds to step Sy1909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1903 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1905.

In step Sy1905, the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. In the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second start port, the game round for the second start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the low probability high support state (state H4) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the second starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the low-probability support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1905, the process proceeds to step Sy1909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1902 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1906.

In step Sy1906, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy1906 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy1907.

In step Sy1907, high-probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the high-probability-high support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port, the second start port game round is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 59, the variation time information of the game round for the second starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1907, the process proceeds to step Sy1909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy1906 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy1906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy1908.

In step Sy1908, high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port is executed. In the high-probability-low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port, the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the variation time information of the game round for the second starting opening is acquired. processing. The details of the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy1908, the process proceeds to step Sy1909.

In step Sy1909, the variable time information obtained in each process of steps Sy1904, Sy1905, Sy1907 and Sy1908 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting opening in the low probability low support state will be described. The low probability low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sy1904) of the variable time setting process for the second start port.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the low-probability low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second start port. In step Sy2001, long fluctuation time information is obtained. Specifically, an extremely long variation time of 10 minutes (long variation time) is acquired as the variation time information. After executing step Sy2001, the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during low-probability support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting opening at the time of the low-probability support state will be described. The variable time information acquisition process for the second start opening in the low definite height support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable time setting process for the second start opening (FIG. 81: Sy1805).

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Sy2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy2101: YES), step Proceed to Sy2102.

In step Sy2102, the fluctuation time table for the big hit is specified from the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the low-probability support state fluctuation time table group, (I) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the low-probability support state, (II) in the low-probability support state, hit Variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (III) Reach non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a low-probability sapo state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Sy2102, first, (I) is specified from among (I) to (III). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2102, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy2101 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Sy2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2103.

In step Sy2103, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy2103, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2104.

In step Sy2104, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the variable time table group during the low-probability support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), (II) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery. Identify. Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2104, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

In step Sy2103, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Sy2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2105.

In step Sy2105, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the low-probability support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), (III) in a low-probability sapo state, a variable time for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery Identify the table. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2105, the low probability height support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port ends.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high-precision high support state for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port at the time of high-precision high support state will be described. The high-probability-high-support-state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sy1907) of the fluctuation time setting process for the second start opening.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the high-precision high support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Sy2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy2201: YES), step Proceed to Sy2202.

In step Sy2202, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the group of variable time tables during the high probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. During the time specified by this fluctuation time information, that is, during the fluctuation state in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the main display unit 45 And the variable display by the pattern display device 41 is performed. During this change, internally, it is a waiting state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot in which the execution of the opening and closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening and closing process is confirmed, and whether the opening and closing execution mode is executed in the game round. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying various expectation level effects and the like. In the high-probability high support state fluctuation time table group, (IV) in the high-probability support state, the big hit fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, (V) in the high-probability support state, hit Variable time table for small hits used when winning a small win in a lottery, (VI) Reach generation used when a reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery in a high-probability high support state Variable time table for (VII) high-probability high support state, variable time table for non-reach generation used when reach does not occur without winning either a big or small win in a winning lottery. there is In step Sy2202, first, (IV) is identified from among (IV) to (VII). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2202, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy2201 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Sy2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2203.

In step Sy2203, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (Sy2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2204.

In step Sy2204, from the high probability high support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time table for the small hit is specified, and the fluctuation time table for the specified small hit By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from among (IV) to (VII), (V) in the high-probability high support state, the small winning fluctuation time table used when winning the small winning in the winning lottery is specified. Then, by referring to the specified small winning variation time table, to acquire the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81). After executing step Sy2202, the high-probability-high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

In step Sy2203, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is not a small hit (step Sy2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2205.

In step Sy2205, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy2205, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2206.

In step Sy2206, the variable time table for reach generation is specified from the variable time table group during the high probability high support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first of all, from (IV) to (VII), in the high-precision high sapo state (VI), the reach generated when the reach occurs without winning either the jackpot or the small hit in the winning lottery Specify the variable time table for Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2206, the high probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

In step Sy2206, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Sy2206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2207.

In step Sy2207, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the high-probability high support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Specifically, first of all, (VII) from (IV) to (VII) is used when a reach does not occur without winning either a jackpot or a small hit in a winning lottery in a high-certainty high support state. Specify the variable time table for reach non-occurrence. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2207, the high probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition processing during high probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the high-probability-low-support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The high-probability-low support state variable time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sy1908) of the variable time setting process for the second starting port.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the high-probability-low support state time fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port. In step Sy2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination for the current game round is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag, the probability variable jackpot + small hit rush flag, or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (Sy2301: YES), step Proceed to Sy2302.

In step Sy2302, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the high probability/low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the high-probability low support state fluctuation time table group, (VIII) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the high-probability low support state, (IX) in the high-probability low support state, hit Variable time table for small hits used when winning a small win in a lottery, (X) Reach generation used when reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery in a high-probability low support state. variable time table for (XI) high probability low support state, variable time table for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery there is In step Sy2302, first, (VIII) is identified from among (VIII) to (XI). Next, by referring to the specified big hit variation time table, variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2302, the high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy2301 that the result of the winning/failure determination for the current game round is not a big win (step Sy2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2303.

In step Sy2303, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination relating to the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (Sy2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2304.

In step Sy2304, the variable time table for the big win is specified from the group of variable time tables for the high probability/low support state stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for the big win is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (VIII) to (XI), (IX) in a high-probability low support state, a small winning fluctuation time table used when winning a small winning in a winning lottery is specified. Then, by referring to the specified small winning variation time table, to acquire the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81). After executing step Sy2302, the high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

In step Sy2303, when it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination related to the current game round is not a small hit (step Sy2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2305.

In step Sy2305, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. In step Sy2305, when it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step Sy2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2306.

In step Sy2306, a variable time table for reach generation is specified from the high-probability-low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified variable time table for reach generation is selected. By referring to it, the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (VIII) to (XI), (X) in a high probability low sapo state, reach generation used when reach occurs without winning either a jackpot or a small hit in a winning lottery Specify the variable time table for Next, by referring to the identified reach generation fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2306, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is ended.

In step Sy2306, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step Sy2306: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2307.

In step Sy2307, a variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the high probability low support state variable time table group stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified reach non-occurrence variable time By referring to the table, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (VIII) to (XI), it is used when (XI) is in a high-probability-low support state, and no reach occurs without winning either a jackpot or a small hit in a winning lottery. Specify the variable time table for reach non-occurrence. Next, by referring to the identified reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sy1901 (FIG. 81) is obtained. After executing step Sy2307, the high probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port is ended.

<Second Fluctuation Stop Processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stopping process will be explained. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 68: Sy0608).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the second fluctuation stopping process. In step Sy2401, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first win flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the win lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 as a trigger is "big win", and the game ball enters the first start hole. The variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the ball is stopped, and is turned OFF when the display is stopped. If it is determined in step Sy2401 that the first hit flag is not ON (Sy2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2402.

In step Sy2402, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The small winning flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is "small winning", and the game to the second starting port 34 is started. The variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball stops, and is turned off when the display is stopped. In step Sy2402, when it determines with a small hit flag not being ON (Sy2402:NO), it progresses to step Sy2403.

At step Sy2403, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening (FIG. 81) has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sy2403 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (Sy2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2404. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy2403 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Sy2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2419.

In step Sy2404, the movement of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. In other words, the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stopped symbols) is set in step Sy1809, step Sy1812, step Sy1814, or step Sy1821 of the determination process for the second start opening (FIG. 80). After executing step Sy2404, the process proceeds to step Sy2405.

In step Sy2405, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the second fluctuating flag is turned ON when the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger. 2 is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. After executing step Sy2405, the process proceeds to step Sy2406.

In step Sy2406, it is determined whether or not the first fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is turned ON when the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37b starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 as a trigger. 1 symbol is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. If it is determined in step Sy2406 that the first fluctuating flag is not ON (Sy2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2407.

At step Sy2407, the second winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the second fluctuation stopping process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy2406 that the first fluctuating flag is ON (Sy2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2419.

If it is determined in step Sy2401 that the first hit flag is ON (Sy2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2408.

In step Sy2408, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 72) for the first starting port has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sy2408 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Sy2408: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy2408 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37b has ended (Sy2408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2409.

In step Sy2409, the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sy2409, the process proceeds to step Sy2410.

At step Sy2410, the movement of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. In other words, the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. In the present embodiment, as the symbol to be stopped and displayed (stop symbol), a stop symbol for losing is used. Further, in step Sy2410, various flags such as the probability variable jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag related to the second start game round are turned off. Even if a jackpot is won, the winning is invalidated. After executing step Sy2410, the process proceeds to step Sy2411.

In step Sy2411, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy2412.

At step Sy2412, the standby state transition flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. That is, at this timing when the variation of the symbols in the game round in which the big hit is won is completed and the game shifts to the standby state, the standby state transition flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy2413.

In step Sy2402, when it determines with a small hit flag being ON (Sy2402:YES), it progresses to step Sy2413.

In step Sy2413, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening (FIG. 81) has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sy2403 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (Sy2413: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2414. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy2413 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (Sy2413: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2419.

In step Sy2414, the small hit flags in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy2415.

In step Sy2415, the movement of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. In other words, the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b is shifted from the variable display to the stop display. The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (stopped symbols) is set in step Sy1809, step Sy1812, step Sy1814, or step Sy1821 of the determination process for the second start opening (FIG. 80). After executing step Sy2415, the process proceeds to step Sy2416.

At step Sy2416, the second fluctuating flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. As described above, the second fluctuating flag is turned ON when the second pattern of the second pattern display portion 37b starts to fluctuate with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 as a trigger. 2 is a flag that is turned OFF when the variation is stopped. After executing step Sy2416, the process proceeds to step Sy2417.

In step Sy2417, the small hit execution mode flag of various flag storage areas 64g of RAM64 is turned OFF. The small winning execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b executed with the result of winning the winning lottery as a small winning win stops varying. . After executing step Sy2417, the process proceeds to step Sy2418.

In step Sy418, a small hit rush command is set. The small hit rush command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that it is in a small hit rush state. The small hit rush command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After executing step Sy2418, the process proceeds to step Sy2419.

In step Sy2419, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sy2419 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy2419: YES), the process advances to step Sy2420 to determine whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sy2420, if it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy2420: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2421, and the number of games that are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is the time-saving upper limit number (for example, 50 Times) before reaching (= within the time saving upper limit number of times) or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. Since the game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of times of the time saving upper limit number, by determining whether PNC > 0, the number of games that are continuously executed in the high frequency support mode It is possible to determine whether or not it is before the time saving upper limit number of times is reached.

In step Sy2421, if it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sy2421: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the time reduction upper limit number of times, the process proceeds to step Sy2422, high frequency support mode Turn off the flag. After executing step Sy2422, the process proceeds to step Sy2423.

In step Sy2423, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After that, the second fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy2419 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy2419: NO), this second fluctuation stop process is ended. If it is determined in step Sy2420 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy2420: YES), this second fluctuation stopping process is terminated. Also, in step Sy2421, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Sy2421: YES), the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 67: Sy0506).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sy2501, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sy2501 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sy2501: NO), the process advances to step Sy2502 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy2502 that the opening/closing period flag is not ON (Sy2502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2503 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sy2503, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sy2503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2504, and it is determined whether or not the small hit execution mode flag is ON. The small hit execution mode flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process of the small hit dedicated variable winning device 97 and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process of the small hit dedicated variable winning device 97 .

In step Sy2504, when it is determined that the small hit execution mode flag is not ON (Sy2504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2505, and it is determined whether or not the standby state transition flag is ON. The standby state transition flag is turned ON at the timing of transitioning to the standby state after the pattern variation in the game round in which the big win is won is completed, and is turned OFF after the transition to the standby state.

If it is determined in step Sy2505 that the standby state transition flag is not ON (Sy2505: NO), the process advances to step Sy2506 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game cycle that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Sy2506 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sy2506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2507. On the other hand, in step Sy2506, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sy2506: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

At step Sy2507, the high probability mode flag is turned off. A high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to change the lottery mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to the low-probability mode. After executing step Sy2507, the process proceeds to step Sy2508.

At step Sy2508, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. A high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during execution of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sy2508, the process proceeds to step Sy2509.

In step Sy2509, a jackpot open/close execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started when the jackpot is won. The jackpot open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 67: step Sy0502) of the normal process. After executing step Sy2509, the process proceeds to step Sy2510.

In step Sy2510, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in the wake of the winning of the jackpot or in the wake of the small win. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of the big win or the small win. The open/close execution mode start command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 67 : step Sy0502) of the normal process. After executing step Sy2510, the process proceeds to step Sy2511.

In step Sy2511, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines the pattern of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game. It is a program in which conditions for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed conditions") are recorded. The opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sy2511, the process proceeds to step Sy2512. In step Sy2512, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sy2512, the process proceeds to step Sy2513.

At step Sy2513, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of big win, and information on the big win or small win that triggered execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sy2513, the process advances to step Sy2514 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated. The processing from step Sy2507 to step Sy2514 is the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sy2505 that the standby state transition flag is ON (Sy2505: YES), the process advances to step Sy2515 to execute processing when the standby state transition flag is ON. The details of the processing when the standby state transition flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Sy2515, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy2503 that the opening period flag is ON (Sy2503: YES), the process advances to step Sy2516 to execute processing when the opening period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Sy2516, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy2502 that the opening/closing period flag is ON (Sy2502: YES), the process advances to step Sy2517 to execute a process when the opening/closing period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Sy2517, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy2501 that the ending period flag is ON (Sy2501: YES), the process advances to step Sy2518 to execute processing when the ending period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Sy2518, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sy2504, when it determines with the small hit execution mode flag being ON (Sy2504:YES), it progresses to step Sy2519 and performs small hit opening/closing processing. The details of the small winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sy2519, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2512).

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the opening time setting process. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, in step Sy2601, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sy2601, the opening time setting process ends.

<Processing when standby state transition flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the standby state transition flag is ON will be described. The standby state transition flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2515).

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing processing when the standby state shift flag is ON. At step Sy2701, the standby state transition flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. The standby state transition flag is turned ON at the timing of transitioning to the standby state after the pattern variation in the game round in which the big win is won is completed, and is turned OFF after the transition to the standby state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy2702.

At step Sy2702, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sy2702 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy2702: NO), the process advances to step Sy2703 to determine whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sy2703 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy2703: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy2704.

At step Sy2704, the left gate valid flag is turned ON. The left gate valid flag is a flag for determining whether or not the function of causing the left big winning opening operating gate 95 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is valid or invalid. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy2705 to turn off the right gate valid flag. The right gate valid flag is a flag for determining whether or not the function of causing the right big winning opening operation gate 96 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is valid or invalid. That is, by step Sy2702 and step Sy2703, if it is determined that the support mode is a low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is a low-probability low-probability support state, step Sy2704 and step Sy2705, The left gate valid flag is turned ON, and the right gate valid flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sy2705, the process proceeds to step Sy2706.

In step Sy2706, the right-handed lamp 39a is extinguished. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy2710 to turn on the standby state flag. After that, the processing when the standby state transition flag is ON ends.

If it is determined in step Sy2702 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy2702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2707.

At step Sy2707, the left gate valid flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy2708 to turn on the right gate valid flag. That is, by step Sy2702 and step Sy2703, the game state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, or the game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode (that is, low probability high support state, high probability high support state, or high probability If it is in the low support state), the left gate valid flag is turned OFF and the right gate valid flag is turned ON in steps Sy2707 and Sy2708. After executing step Sy2708, the process proceeds to step Sy2709.

In step Sy2709, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy2710 to turn on the standby state flag. After that, the processing when the standby state transition flag is ON ends.

<Processing when the opening period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described. The opening period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2516).

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing processing when the opening period flag is ON. In step Sy2801, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sy2801 that the opening period has ended (Sy2801: YES), the process advances to step Sy2802 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy2803.

In step Sy2803, round display start processing is executed to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, the big hit type is displayed on the round display section 39 . After executing step Sy2803, the process proceeds to step Sy2804.

In step Sy2804, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After executing step Sy2804, the process proceeds to step Sy2805.

In step Sy2805, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on. In the open/close execution mode, the recommended shooting mode is right-handed, and the right-handed lamp 39a is lit. After that, the processing when the opening period flag is ON ends.

If it is determined in step Sy2801 that the opening period has not ended (Sy2801: NO), this opening period flag ON processing ends.

<Processing when opening/closing processing period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the opening/closing processing period flag is ON will be described. The open/close process period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2517).

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the process when the open/close process period flag is ON. In step Sy2901, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sy2901, the process proceeds to step Sy2902.

In step Sy2902, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process is completed. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sy2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy2903. On the other hand, in step Sy2902, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sy2902: NO), the main opening/closing process period flag ON time process ends.

In step Sy2903, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sy2904.

In step Sy2904, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sy2404, the process proceeds to step Sy2905.

In step Sy2905, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step Sy2905, the process proceeds to step Sy2906.

In step Sy2906, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period. After executing step Sy2906, the process proceeds to step Sy2907.

In step Sy2907, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main opening/closing processing period flag ON time processing ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the opening/closing process period flag ON time process (FIG. 91: Sy2901).

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sy3001, it is determined whether or not the door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Sy3001 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sy3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3002.

In step Sy3002, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are met. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sy3002 that the conditions for opening the door 36b are met (Sy3002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3003.

In step Sy3003, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3004.

In step Sy3004, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 66: Sy0402) of the normal process. After executing step Sy3004, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sy3002, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b is not established (Sy3002: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy3001 that the door 36b is open (Sy3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3005.

In step Sy3005, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the door 36b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the big winning opening 36a. holds when If it is determined in step Sy3005 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sy3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3006.

In step Sy3006, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3007.

In step Sy3007, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the open/close door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 66: Sy0402) of the normal process. After executing step Sy3007, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sy3005, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sy3005: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Processing when the ending period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described. The ending period flag ON time process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2518).

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing processing when the ending period flag is ON. In step Sy3101, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sy2805), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sy2805 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sy3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3102.

In step Sy3102, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy3103 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sy3103, the process advances to step Sy3104 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy3105 to set an opening/closing execution mode end command. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After that, the process when the ending period flag is ON ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3101 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sy3101: NO), this ending period flag ON time processing is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the process when the ending period flag is ON (FIG. 93: Sy3103).

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sy3201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot. Specifically, when any one of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the current trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot.

In step Sy3201, when it is determined that the current trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (Sy3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3202, and the current trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability variable jackpot. Determine whether or not Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot.

In step Sy3202, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot (Sy3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3203. On the other hand, in step Sy3202, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the variable probability jackpot (Sy3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3208.

In step Sy3203, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, among the 16R probability variation big hit flag and the 8R probability variation flag, a process of turning off the flag that is ON is executed. After executing step Sy3203, the process proceeds to step Sy3204.

At step Sy3204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Sy3204, the process proceeds to step Sy3205.

At step Sy3205, the high-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The high-probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step Sy3205, the process proceeds to step Sy3206.

In step Sy3206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3207.

In step Sy3207, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is terminated.

In step Sy3202, if it is determined that the current opportunity to switch to the opening/closing execution mode is not the probability variable jackpot (Sy3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3208, and the current opportunity to switch to the opening/closing execution mode is the probability variable jackpot + It is determined whether or not it is a small hit rush. Specifically, when the variable probability big win + small winning rush flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability big winning + small winning rush.

In step Sy3208, when it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable big hit + small hit rush (Sy3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3209. On the other hand, in step Sy3208, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variable big hit + small hit rush (Sy3208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3214.

In step Sy3209, the corresponding probability variable big hit flag + small hit rush is turned off. After executing step Sy3209, the process proceeds to step Sy3210.

At step Sy3210, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Sy3210, the process proceeds to step Sy3211.

At step Sy<b>3211 , the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The high-probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step Sy3211, the process proceeds to step Sy3212.

In step Sy3212, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After executing step Sy3212, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step Sy3208, when it is determined that the current opportunity to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is not the variable probability big win + small winning rush, it means that the current opportunity to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is the normal jackpot. Therefore, in step S3213, the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step Sy3213, the process proceeds to step Sy3214. In addition, the right-handed lamp 39a is controlled to be turned off, and the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is in a fluctuating state ( That is, in the condition establishment standby state in which the execution of the opening and closing execution mode is confirmed, the special 1 symbol is fluctuating), and based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the jackpot is won. When the winning random number counter C1 is acquired, as switching control for generating the opening/closing execution mode, control for holding and storing the value of the winning random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot winning, control for shifting the value, control for the value It is possible to execute a series of processes such as determination of success or failure of a winning lottery.

In step Sy3214, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The low-probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win-or-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step Sy3214, the process proceeds to step Sy3215.

At step Sy3215, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sy3216, and 50 is set as the counter value in the number-of-games counter PNC. After executing step Sy3216, the process proceeds to step Sy3217.

In step Sy3217, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sy0502 in the normal process (FIG. 67). After that, the transition processing at the end of this ending period is ended.

In step Sy3201, when it is determined that the timing of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big win (Sy3201: NO), the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Small win opening and closing process>
Next, the small winning opening/closing process will be described. The small winning opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 87: Sy2519).

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the small winning opening/closing process. In step Sy3301, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 97b of the small winning variable winning device 97 is open. If it is determined in step Sy3301 that the opening/closing door 97b is not open (Sy3301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3302.

In step Sy3302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 97b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 97b. If it is determined in step Sy3302 that the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 97b are met (Sy3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3303.

In step Sy3303, the opening/closing door 97b is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3304.

In step Sy3304, a door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for making the control device on the sub side recognize that the open/close door 97b of the small winning variable winning device 97 has been opened. The opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 66: Sy0402) of the normal process. After executing step Sy3304, the small winning opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sy3302, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 97b is not established (Sy3302: NO), the main small winning opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy3301 that the opening/closing door 97b is open (Sy3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3305.

In step Sy3305, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the opening/closing door 97b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening/closing door 97b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 97b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or that a preset number of game balls have entered the big winning opening 36a. holds when If it is determined in step Sy3305 that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 97b is satisfied (Sy3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3306.

In step Sy3306, the opening/closing door 97b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3307.

In step Sy3307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the control device on the sub side recognize that the opening/closing door 97b of the variable winning device 97 dedicated to the small winning has been closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 66: Sy0402) of the normal process. After executing step Sy3307, the process proceeds to step Sy3307.

In step Sy3307, the small hitting execution mode flag of various flag storage areas 64g of RAM64 is turned OFF. As described above, the small winning execution mode flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b executed with the result of winning the winning lottery as a small winning win stops changing. is a flag that After execution of step Sy3307, the small winning opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sy3305, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 97b is not established (Sy3305: NO), the main small winning opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Sy0507 in FIG. 67).

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. In step Sy3401, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is opened and turned OFF when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sy3401 that the supported flag is not ON (Sy3401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3402.

In step Sy3402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 44a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sy3402 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sy3402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3403.

In step Sy3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sy3403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sy3403: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sy3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3404.

In step Sy3404, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38. FIG. If it is determined in step Sy3404 that it is time to end the variable display (Sy3404: YES), the process advances to step Sy3405 to set the off display and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sy3404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3406.

In step Sy3406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sy3406, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sy3406: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sy3406 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Sy3406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3407.

In step Sy3407, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sy3408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in Step Sy3407 (Sy3407: NO) and if it is in the high-frequency support mode in Step Sy3408 (Sy3408: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sy3409, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the electric officer holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric officer opening is won. becomes. In addition, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3410.

In step Sy3410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sy3409 is support winning. In step Sy3410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sy3410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is released. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sy3410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sy3410: NO), the process for supporting the electric role is terminated without executing the process of step Sy3411.

If it is determined in step Sy3407 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sy3407: YES), or if it is determined in step Sy3408 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sy3408: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3412, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 419, the electric role short opening is won. becomes. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, "300" (that is, 0.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3413.

In step Sy3413, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sy3412 is support winning. In step Sy3413, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sy3413: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sy3413, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sy3413: YES), the process advances to step Sy3414 to turn on the support winning flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sy3402 that the support win flag is ON (Sy3402: YES), the process advances to step Sy3415 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sy3415, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sy3415: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3415 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sy3415: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3416.

In step Sy3416, the win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sy3417 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sy3401, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sy3401: YES), the process advances to step Sy3418 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 44a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electrical opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electrical support process (Sy3418 in FIG. 96).

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step Sy3501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (Sy3501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3502.

In step Sy3502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Sy3502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sy3502: NO), the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, when the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sy3502, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sy3502: YES), the process advances to step Sy3503 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the closed state, "5" (that is, 0.01 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sy3503, the process proceeds to step Sy3504.

In step Sy3504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sy3505 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sy3505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sy3505: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sy3505: YES), the process advances to step Sy3506 to turn off the in-support flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sy3501 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (Sy3501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3507 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Sy3507 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sy3507: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sy3507: YES), the process advances to step Sy3508 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary 44a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy3509.

In step Sy3509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sy3509: NO), the process advances to step Sy3510 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sy3510 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sy3510: YES), the process advances to step Sy3511 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy3509 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sy3509: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step Sy3510 (Sy3510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy3512, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

<<2-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sy3601, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sy3601, the process proceeds to step Sy3602.

In step Sy3602, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the pending command among the commands stored in step Sy3601 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sy3602, the process proceeds to step Sy3603.

In step Sy3603, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sy3603, the process proceeds to step Sy3604.

In step Sy3604, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sy3604, the process proceeds to step Sy3605.

In step Sy3605, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing are displayed. . After executing step Sy3605, the process proceeds to step Sy3606.

In step Sy3606, a notification effect process is executed. In the notification effect processing, a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a effect image (moving image) determined according to various commands received from the main MPU 62 is performed. Specifically, a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will be right-handed, and a game that changes the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism from right-handed to left-handed. Processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 a left-handed hitting notification effect for informing the player and a left-gate aiming notification effect for instructing the player to enter the game ball into the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 is performed. . After executing step Sy3606, the process proceeds to step Sy3607.

In step Sy3607, small winning rush effect processing is executed. In the small winning rush effect processing, a process of displaying on the symbol display device 41 an effect image (moving image) determined according to the small winning rush command received from the main side MPU 62 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image determined according to the small winning rush displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player can recognize that the state has shifted to the small winning rush. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. After executing step Sy3607, the process proceeds to step Sy3608.

In step Sy3608, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sy3608, the process proceeds to step Sy3609.

In step Sy3609, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sy3609, the process proceeds to step Sy3610.

At step Sy3610, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sy3610, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sy3702 in FIG. 98).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sy3701, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step Sy3701, when it is determined that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3702.

In step Sy3702, the hold command received this time is read, and hold information is read from the hold command. The reservation information includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether or not there is reach, and variation time. Then, the hold information read out is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . As for the hold information, information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved first starting ports 33, and information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of reserved second starting ports 34, are updated and stored. After executing step Sy3702, the process proceeds to step Sy3703.

In step Sy3703, update processing at the time of ball entry is executed. In the update process at the time of ball entry, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, Processing is executed so that the sound and light side MPU 92 can specify the total number of these pieces of hold information. The details of the updating process at the time of ball entry in step Sy3703 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of holding information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first holding number", and the holding information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 The number is also called the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also called the "total reserved number". After executing step Sy3703, the process proceeds to step Sy3704.

At step Sy3704, a pending display control process is executed. Specifically, in correspondence with the first reserved number and the second reserved number specified in step Sy3703, the display in the first start opening reservation area Ds1 and the second start opening reservation area Ds2 (the reservation display icon is A command for changing the display of how many pieces are arranged is sent to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 and the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the first reservation number and the second reservation number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100, which has received the command, defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the first start gate pending region Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first pending number. display in position. In addition, the display control device 100 defines the display positions of the icons of the pending display in the second starting point pending region Ds2, and displays the icons corresponding to the second pending number at the display positions. After executing step Sy3704, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of ball entry>
Next, update processing at the time of ball entry will be described. The update process at the time of ball entry is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (FIG. 99: Sy3703).

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of ball entry. In step Sy 3801 , it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 . In step Sy3801, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sy3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3802, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sy3802, the process proceeds to step Sy3804.

In step Sy3801, if it is determined that the hold command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (Sy3801: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sy3803 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sy3803, the process proceeds to step Sy3804.

The reason why steps Sy3802 and Sy3803 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sy3804, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step Sp3704, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 98: Sy3603).

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sy3901, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU62.

If it is determined in step Sy3901 that the high-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3902. The side high probability mode flag is turned ON.

If it is determined in step Sy3901 that the high-probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3901: NO), the process advances to step Sy3903 to check whether the low-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. judge.

If it is determined in step Sy3903 that the low-probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3904. The side high probability mode flag is turned off.

If it is determined in step Sy3903 that the low-probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3903: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Sy3905. Also, after executing step Sy3902 or after executing step Sy3904, the process advances to step Sy3905.

In step Sy3905, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62.

In step Sy3905, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3906, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON.

If it is determined in step Sy3905 that the high-frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3905: NO), the process advances to step Sy3907 to determine whether the low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. determine whether

In step Sy3907, if it is determined that the low frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy3908, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side high frequency support mode flag is turned off.

If it is determined in step Sy3907 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sy3907: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Sy3909. Also, after executing step Sy3906 or after executing step Sy3908, the process advances to step Sy3909.

In step Sy3909, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area for displaying the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first starting game round and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second starting opening game round. Specifically, the first decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the second decorative design is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA is displayed. , a process for switching between displaying the first decorative pattern is executed. The details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Sy3909, the process advances to step Sy3910.

In step Sy3910, a special 1 game round effect process is executed. The special 1 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start opening game round. The details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sy3910, the process proceeds to step Sy3911.

In step Sy3911, a special 2 game round effect process is executed. The special 2 game round effect processing is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start opening game round. The details of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sy3911, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Display Mode Switching Processing>
Next, display mode switching processing will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Sy3909 in FIG. 101) of the game cycle effect setting process.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step Sy4001, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is ON.

If it is determined in step Sy4001 that the sound and light side high probability mode flag is not ON (Sy4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4002, and the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a is turned ON. It is determined whether or not.

If it is determined in step Sy4002 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy4002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4003.

In step Sy4003, a special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command controls the display of the pattern display device 41 to display the first decoration pattern corresponding to the game round for the first start opening in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41. , and a second decorative pattern corresponding to the second starting opening game cycle is displayed in the sub display area SA of the pattern display device 41 . That is, in the low-probability low support state in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41, and the pattern display device 41 The second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of .

If it is determined in step Sy4001 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4004. If it is determined in step Sy4002 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy4002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4004.

In step Sy4004, a special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. FIG. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command controls the display of the pattern display device 41 to display the second decorative pattern corresponding to the game round for the second start opening in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41. , and the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first starting game cycle is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the pattern display device 41 . That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, the support mode is a high frequency support mode, the low probability high support state, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. And, in each of the high-probability low support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main display area MA of the pattern display device 41, and the pattern is displayed. A first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the device 41 .

After executing step Sy4003 or after executing step Sy4004, the display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game turn effect setting process>
Next, the special 1 game round effect setting process will be described. The special 1 game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 101: Sy3910).

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing special 1 game round effect setting processing. In step Sy4101, it is determined whether or not the first variation command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU62. When it is determined in step Sy4101 that at least one of the first variation command and the first type command has not been received (Sy4101: NO), the special 1 game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4101 that the first variation command and the first type command have been received (Sy4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4102.

In step Sy4102, the command for the first variation received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of the special small win, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4103.

In step Sy4103, a first effect pattern setting process for setting a pattern of effects to be executed in game rounds such as a big win, a small win, and a ready-to-win game is executed. Details of the first effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sy4103, the process proceeds to step Sy4104.

In step Sy4104, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L of the pattern display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L, and the result is a stop result in which the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does not materialize on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Sy4104, the process proceeds to step Sy4105.

In step Sy4105, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a first variation display pattern) for the current first starting game cycle is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current first start opening game cycle is specified from the contents of the first variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information set in step Sy4104 are specified. A first variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of stop symbol information is selected. When selecting the first variation display pattern, the first variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. B08) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4106.

In step Sy4106, the information of the first effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the first variable display pattern set in the game round for the first starting opening this time is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Sy4107 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sy4107, the process proceeds to step Sy4108.

In step Sy4108, update processing of pending information is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated so that the first pending number stored in the first pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step Sy4108, the process proceeds to step Sy4109.

In step Sy4109, a pending display control process is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step Sy3604 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 99). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display of how many pending display icons are arranged) in the first starting point holding area Ds1 corresponding to the first pending number specified in step Sy4108 is It transmits to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 so as to correspond to the first reservation number. After executing step Sy4109, the special 1 game round effect setting process is terminated.

<First effect pattern setting process>
Next, the first effect pattern setting process will be explained. The first effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103: Sy4103).

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the first effect pattern setting process. In step Sy4101, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4201 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy4201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4202.

In step Sy4202, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4202 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy4202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4203.

In step Sy4203, low probability low support state effect pattern setting processing for the first start opening is executed. The low-probability low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is performed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first opening opening. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability low support state for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Sy4203, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4202 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4204.

In step Sy4204, a low probability high support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is performed when the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, when the low probability high support state (state H4) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the first starting opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first starting opening. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability high support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy4204, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4201 that the sound/light high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy4201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4205.

In step Sy4205, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4205 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy4205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4206.

In step Sy4206, the production pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the high-precision high support state is executed. The production pattern setting process for the high-probability high support state for the first starting port is performed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, when the first start opening game round is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 59, the process of setting the effect pattern of the first start opening game round. is. The details of the production pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-probability-high support state will be described later. After executing step Sy4206, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4205 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy4205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4207.

In step Sy4207, high-probability-low support state performance pattern setting processing for the first start opening is executed. The high-probability-low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed when the game cycle for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state (state H6) in FIG. 59, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern for the game round for the first opening opening. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-probability-low support state will be described later. After executing step Sy4207, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing at the time of low probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the low-probability-low-support state performance pattern setting process for the first starting port will be described. The low probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first effect pattern setting process (FIG. 104: Sy4203).

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening in the low probability low support state. In step Sy4301, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4302.

In step Sy4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4002 of the game round effect setting process for special 1 (FIG. 103), whether the result of the winning judgment is the winning jackpot judge. In step Sy4302, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4303.

In step Sy4303, the effect pattern table for the big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low-probability, low-frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM93. The low-probability, low-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (a) a jackpot effect pattern table used when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a low-probability, low-frequency state, and (b) a win in a low-probability, low-frequency state. A production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the lottery, (C) In a low probability low frequency state, non-reach used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Sy4303, (a) is specified from among (a) to (c). (a) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy4303, the process proceeds to step Sy4304.

In step Sy4304, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy4303 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy1102 (FIG. 73) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy4301 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy4305, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy4304 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy4305, the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening at the time of low probability low support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sy4302, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not a big hit (Sy4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4306, and it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103). In step Sy4306, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (Sy4306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4307.

In step Sy4307, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low-probability and low-support state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-described (a) low-probability and low-probability support state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big win in a winning lottery is specified. (a) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy4307, the process proceeds to step Sy4304 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4307 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1104 (FIG. 73) and the current time obtained in step Sy4301 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for production pattern is acquired.

In step Sy4306, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy4306: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4308.

In step Sy4308, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the group of effect pattern tables for low-probability and low-support state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-described (c) low-probability-low support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when no big hit is won in the winning lottery and no reach occurs is specified. (c) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Sy4308, the process proceeds to step Sy4304 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4308 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1105 (FIG. 73) and the current time obtained in step Sy4301 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for production pattern is acquired.

<Production pattern setting processing in low-probability support state for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low-probability support state for the first starting opening will be described. The low probability high support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first effect pattern setting process (FIG. 104: Sy4204).

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first start opening in the low probability support state. At step Sy4401, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4402.

In step Sy4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103), whether the result of the win/loss judgment is the jackpot winning judge. In step Sy4402, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4403.

In step Sy4403, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. The low-probability sapo production pattern table group includes (d) a low-probability support pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (o) a low-probability support, a jackpot in a winning lottery. Production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning, (f) production pattern for non-reach generation used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with a low probability high support A table is provided. In step Sy4403, (d) is specified from among (d) to (f). (d) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy4403, the process proceeds to step Sy4404.

In step Sy4404, the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4403 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1202 (FIG. 74) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy4401 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy4405, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy4404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy4405, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sy4402, if it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sy4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4406, and it is determined whether reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103). In step Sy4406, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Sy4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4407.

In step Sy4407, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-described (E) low probability support, the production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a big win in the winning lottery is specified. (E) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy4407, the process proceeds to step Sy4404 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4407 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1204 (FIG. 74) and the current time obtained in step Sy4401 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is obtained.

In step Sy4406, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy4406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4408.

In step Sy4408, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM93. Specifically, in the above-described (f) low-probability support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (F) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for failure. After executing step Sy4408, the process proceeds to step Sy4404 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4408 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1205 (FIG. 74) and the current time obtained in step Sy4401 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is acquired.

<Production pattern setting processing at high-precision high support state for the first start port>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the first starting opening at the time of the high-precision high support state will be described. The production pattern setting process for the high-precision high support state for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: Sy4204) of the first production pattern setting process.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the production pattern setting process for the first start opening in the high-precision high support state. In step Sy4501, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4502.

In step Sy4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103), whether the result of the win/loss judgment is the jackpot winning judge. In step Sy4502, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4503.

In step Sy4503, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. The production pattern table group for high probability high support includes (g) a high probability high support, a jackpot production pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (h) a high probability high support, a jackpot in a winning lottery Production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning, (ke) production pattern for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-certainty high sapo A table is provided. In step Sy4503, (g) is specified from (g) to (g). (g) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy4503, the process proceeds to step Sy4504.

In step Sy4504, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy4503 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy1302 (FIG. 75) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy4501 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy4505, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening at the time of high-precision high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sy4502, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sy4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4506, and it is determined whether reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103). In step Sy4506, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Sy4506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4507.

In step Sy4507, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-described (h) high-probability support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big win in a winning lottery is specified. (h) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy4507, the process proceeds to step Sy4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4507 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1304 (FIG. 75) and the current time obtained in step Sy4501 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is obtained.

In step Sy4506, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy4506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4508.

In step Sy4508, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision, high-support support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (i) high probability and high support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when no big hit is won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (ix) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for failure. After executing step Sy4508, the process proceeds to step Sy4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4508 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1305 (FIG. 75) and the current time obtained in step Sy4501 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is acquired.

<Production pattern setting processing at high probability low support state for the first start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening in the high-probability-low support state will be described. The high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first effect pattern setting process (FIG. 104: Sy4204).

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the first starting opening in the high-probability-low support state. In step Sy4501, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4502.

In step Sy4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103), whether the result of the win/loss judgment is the jackpot winning judge. In step Sy4502, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4503.

In step Sy4503, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. The production pattern table group for high probability high support includes (C) high probability high support, jackpot production pattern table used when winning in the winning lottery, (C) high probability high support, jackpot in winning lottery Production pattern table for reach occurrence used when reach occurs without winning, (C) production pattern for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery in a high-certainty high sapo A table is provided. In step Sy4503, (ko) is specified from among (co) to (si). (J) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy4503, the process proceeds to step Sy4504.

In step Sy4504, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy4503 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy1402 (FIG. 76) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy4501 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy4505, the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sy4502, if it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sy4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4506, and it is determined whether reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4102 of the special 1 game round effect setting process (FIG. 103). In step Sy4506, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Sy4506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4507.

In step Sy4507, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (S) high-probability support, the production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is specified. (h) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy4507, the process proceeds to step Sy4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4507 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1404 (FIG. 76) and the current time obtained in step Sy4501 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is obtained.

In step Sy4506, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy4506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4508.

In step Sy4508, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision, high-support support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the high-probability-low support state (vi) described above, a non-reach effect pattern table used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Sy4508, the process proceeds to step Sy4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy4508 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy1405 (FIG. 76) and the current time obtained in step Sy4501 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is obtained.

<Special 2 game turn effect setting process>
Next, the special 2 game round effect setting process will be described. The special 2 game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 101: Sy3911).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing special 2 game round effect setting processing. In step Sy4701, it is determined whether or not the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sy4701 that at least one of the second variation command and the second type command has not been received (Sy4701: NO), the special 2 game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4701 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received (Sy4701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4702.

In step Sy4702, the command for the second variation received this time is read, and from the command, the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the information of the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4703.

In step Sy4703, a second effect pattern setting process is executed for setting a pattern of effects to be executed in game rounds such as at the time of a big win or at the time of reach. Details of the second effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sy4703, the process proceeds to step Sy4704.

In step Sy4704, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L of the pattern display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the same combination of symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L, and the result is a stop result in which the combination of the ready-to-win symbols does not materialize on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step Sy4704, the process proceeds to step Sy4705.

In step Sy4705, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a second variation display pattern) for the current second starting game cycle is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current second start opening game cycle is specified from the content of the second variation command received this time, and the information on the variation time and the information set in step Sy4704 are specified. A second variable display pattern corresponding to a combination of information of stop symbols is selected. When selecting the second variation display pattern, the second variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. B08) of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy4706.

In step Sy4706, the information of the second effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the second variable display pattern set in the current second start opening game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Sy4707 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sy4707, the process proceeds to step Sy4708.

In step Sy4708, update processing of pending information is executed. In the pending information update process, the information in the second pending number counter area is updated so that the second pending number stored in the second pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step Sy4708, the process advances to step Sy4709.

In step Sy4709, a pending display control process is executed. The pending display control process is similar to the pending display control process executed in step Sy3604 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 99). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display of how many pending display icons are arranged) in the second starting point holding area Ds2 corresponding to the second pending number specified in step Sy4708 is It transmits to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the second reservation number. After executing step Sy4709, the game round effect setting process for special 2 ends.

<Second effect pattern setting process>
Next, the second effect pattern setting process will be explained. The second effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 109: Sy4703).

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the second effect pattern setting process. In step Sy4801, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4801 that the sound/light-side high-probability mode flag is not ON (Sy4801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4802.

In step Sy4802, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4802 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy4802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4803.

In step Sy4803, a low-probability low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The low-probability/low-probability support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed when the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 59, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second start opening game round. is. The details of the low-probability-low-support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy4803, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4802 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy4802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4804.

In step Sy4804, a low probability high support state production pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The production pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second starting opening game round is executed in the low probability high support state (state H4) in FIG. 59, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second starting opening game round. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability height support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy4804, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4801 that the sound/light high-probability mode flag is ON (Sy4801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4805.

In step Sy4805, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sy4805 that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sy4805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy4806.

In step Sy4806, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the high-precision high support state is executed. The production pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of high probability and high support state is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high probability high support state (state H5) in FIG. 59, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second start opening game round. is. The details of the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the high-precision high support state will be described later. After executing step Sy4806, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sy4805 that the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sy4805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy4807.

In step Sy4807, the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed. The high-probability-low support state performance pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game cycle for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. 2, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second starting opening game round is executed in the high-probability-low support state (state H6) in FIG. 59, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second starting opening game round. is. The details of the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sy4807, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting processing at low probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the low probability low support state will be described. The low probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the second effect pattern setting process (FIG. 110: Sy4803).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the low-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening. In step Sy4901, a long variation effect pattern is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. After executing step Sy4901, the process proceeds to step Sy4902.

At step Sy4902, the effect pattern table identified at step Sy4902 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time obtained at step Sy1901 (FIG. 81). Subsequently, in step Sy4903, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy4902 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy4903, the low-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing in low-probability support state for second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low-probability support state for the second starting port will be described. The low probability high support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the second effect pattern setting process (FIG. 110: Sy4804).

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the second start opening in the low probability support state. In step Sy5001, a production pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5002.

In step Sy5002, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination (hit lottery) in the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4702 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 109), whether the result of the win/fail judgment is the jackpot or not. judge. In step Sy5002, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy5002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5003.

In step Sy5003, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. The group of low-probability sapo production pattern tables includes (S) a low-probability support pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (C) a low-probability support, a jackpot in a winning lottery. Production pattern table for reach generation used when reach occurs without winning, (S) Production pattern for non-reach generation used when reach does not occur without winning a jackpot in a winning lottery with a low probability high sapo A table is provided. In step Sy5003, (s) is specified from (s) to (s). (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy5003, the process proceeds to step Sy5004.

In step Sy5004, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy5003 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy2102 (FIG. 83) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy5001 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy5005, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy5004 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy5005, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting port at the time of the low probability high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sy5002, if it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sy5002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5006, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4602 of the game round effect setting process for special 2 (FIG. 109). In step Sy5006, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach occurrence (Sy5006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5007.

In step Sy5007, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (C) low-probability support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big win in a winning lottery is specified. (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy5007, the process advances to step Sy5004 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5007 is referred to. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

In step Sy5006, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy5006: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5008.

In step Sy5008, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (S) low probability high support state, the non-reach effect pattern table used when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur is specified. (G) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Sy5008, the process advances to step Sy5004 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5008 is referred to, and the variable time obtained in step Sy2105 (FIG. 83) and the current effect pattern random number value are Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the high-precision high support state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening in the high-precision high support state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the second effect pattern setting process (FIG. 110: Sy4806).

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for the second start opening in the high-precision high support state. In step Sy5101, random number acquisition processing for effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5102.

In step Sy5102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4702 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 109), whether the result of the win/fail judgment is the jackpot or not. judge. In step Sy5102, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy5102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5103.

In step Sy5103, the effect pattern table for the big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. The production pattern table group for high-accuracy high sapo includes (T) a high-accuracy high-accuracy sapo, and a jackpot production pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, (h) a high-accuracy high sapo, a small A production pattern table for small hits used when a win is won, (2) A production pattern table for reach generation used when a reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery with a high-certainty high sapo. , and (te) a production pattern table for reach non-occurrence, which is used when reach does not occur because neither a big win nor a small win is won in a winning lottery in a high probability and high support. In step Sy5103, (ta) is specified from (ta) to (te). (T) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy5103, the process proceeds to step Sy5104.

In step Sy5104, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy5103 is referred to, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy2202 (FIG. 84) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy5101 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy5105, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy5104 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy5105, the effect pattern setting process for the second start port at the time of the high-precision high support state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sy5102, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Sy5102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5106.

In step Sy5106, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination relating to the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (Sy5106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5107.

In step Sy5107, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-described (h) high-probability support, specify a small winning effect pattern table used when winning a small winning in a winning lottery. (h) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a small winning effect. After executing step Sy5107, the process advances to step Sy5104 described above, the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5107 is referred to, and the variable time obtained in step Sy2204 (FIG. 84) and the current effect pattern random number value Acquire the production pattern corresponding to .

On the other hand, in step Sy5106, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not a small hit winning (Sy5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5108.

In step Sy5108, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game cycle. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4602 of the game round effect setting process for special 2 (FIG. 109). In step Sy5108, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Sy5108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5109.

In step Sy5109, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high-precision and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (6) high-probability support, the production pattern table for reach occurrence used when reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in the winning lottery is specified. (T) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy5107, proceed to step Sy5104 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5107, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy2206 (FIG. 84) and the current time obtained in step Sy5101 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for production pattern is acquired.

In step Sy5106, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5108.

In step Sy5108, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the group of effect pattern tables for high-precision and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (te) high-probability support, specify the production pattern table for reach non-occurrence used when reach does not occur without winning either a big win or a small win in the winning lottery. . (Te) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Sy5108, the process proceeds to step Sy5104 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5108 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy2207 (FIG. 84) and the current time obtained in step Sy5101 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is acquired.

<Production pattern setting processing at high probability low support state for the second start port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the second starting opening at the time of the high-probability-low support state will be described. The high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the second effect pattern setting process (FIG. 110: Sy4807).

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second start opening. In step Sy5101, random number acquisition processing for effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5102.

In step Sy5102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a big win. Specifically, from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by step Sy4702 of the special 2 game round effect setting process (FIG. 109), whether the result of the win/fail judgment is the jackpot or not. judge. In step Sy5102, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (Sy5102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5103.

In step Sy5103, the effect pattern table for big win is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. The high-probability and low-probability support pattern table group includes (g) a high-probability-low support and a jackpot production pattern table used when winning a jackpot in a winning lottery; (d) A production pattern table for reach generation used when a reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery in a high-probability low support. , (j) A performance pattern table for non-reach is used when the hit lottery does not win a big win or a small win in a winning lottery with a high-probability-low support. In step Sy5103, (t) is specified from (t) to (n). (T) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for big wins. After executing step Sy5103, the process proceeds to step Sy5104.

In step Sy5104, the effect pattern table identified in step Sy5103 is referenced, and effect patterns corresponding to the variable time obtained in step Sy2302 (FIG. 85) and the value of the current effect pattern random number obtained in step Sy5101 are displayed. to get Subsequently, in step Sy5105, the effect pattern acquired in step Sy5104 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sy5105, the high-probability-low support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sy5102, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not the jackpot winning (Sy5102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5106.

In step Sy5106, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination relating to the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (Sy5106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5107.

In step Sy5107, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (n) high-probability-low support, a small win effect pattern table used when winning a small win in a winning lottery is specified. (Na) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a small winning effect. After executing step Sy5107, the process advances to step Sy5104 described above, and the effect pattern table identified in step Sy5107 is referred to, and the variable time acquired in step Sy2304 (FIG. 85) and the current effect pattern random number value Acquire the production pattern corresponding to .

On the other hand, in step Sy5106, when it is determined that the result of the winning/failure determination in the current game round is not a small hit winning (Sy5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5108.

In step Sy5108, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game cycle. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach occurs from the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 by Sy4602 of the game round effect setting process for special 2 (FIG. 109). In step Sy5108, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is reach generation (Sy5108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sy5109.

In step Sy5109, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of ROM93. Specifically, in the above-described (d) high-probability-low support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning either a big win or a small win in a winning lottery is specified. (d) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Sy5107, proceed to step Sy5104 described above, refer to the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5107, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy2306 (FIG. 85) and the current time obtained in step Sy5101 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for production pattern is acquired.

In step Sy5106, when it is determined that the result of the success/failure determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Sy5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sy5108.

In step Sy5108, a non-reach effect pattern table is specified from the high-probability-low support effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. B08) of the ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (J) high-probability-low support, the production pattern table for reach non-occurrence, which is used when neither the big win nor the small win is won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur, is specified. . (N) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for losing. After executing step Sy5108, the process proceeds to step Sy5104 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Sy5108 is referred to, and the fluctuation time obtained in step Sy2307 (FIG. 85) and the current time obtained in step Sy5101 A production pattern corresponding to the value of the production pattern random number is obtained.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sy5301, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5302.

In step Sy5302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sy5401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sy5501, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (E19), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sy5501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Sy5502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sy5501), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5503.

In step Sy5503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sy5502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step Sy5504.

In step Sy5504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sy5503), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step Sy5505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<2-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the ball entering portion, the game ball entering the ball entering portion depends on the regulation state of the game state. The execution/non-execution of the start process for the detection of is appropriately controlled, and along with the control, the lighting/extinguishing of the notification display is appropriately controlled, so that the player can turn on/off the notification display By switching the shooting mode accordingly, the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the ball entering the second start port 34 in the low probability low support state (normal time) can be. In this case, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the operation proceeds as follows.

In the low probability high support state H4, when the game round of 50 times, which is the upper limit number of time reduction, is completed without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, the low probability is shifted to the low probability low support state H1 (normal time). 2 to 4 stored Special 2 reserves may remain due to the gaming ball entering the second starting port 34 in the high support state H4. Case 3 is the case where the winning lottery result of the winning lottery related to one of the remaining 2 to 4 special 2 reservations (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 remaining reservations) is a big win. As shown in FIG. 62, in order to notify the player that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 balance reservation, after starting the variable display of the segment display in the second symbol display unit 37b, the winning The variation of the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery, that is, the winning of the jackpot is displayed (one game time). In addition, after each game round, the symbol display device 41 variably displays a predetermined symbol row, and then stops and displays the symbol row so as to correspond to the symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, as a countermeasure for preventing right-handed hitting in normal times, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation, that is, the special 2 hold in normal time The variable time is set to a very long time (long) such as 10 minutes. After that, when the lottery result of the winning lottery related to this variation is a big win, the game shifts to the standby state H2 after the variation is stopped.

In the case of the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the recommended firing mode is left-handed, so the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off at the start of the standby state H2. In addition, in the standby state H2, the jackpot winning that triggered the shift to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. , the left gate aiming notification effect is not displayed on the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁After that, the standby state H2 continues as it is.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a small winning rush function as described above. In this configuration, as described above, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 even in the normal state. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to set the fluctuation time of the special 2 hold in the normal time to an extremely long time (long) such as 10 minutes. This configuration can be applied to a pachinko machine that variably displays special 2 reserve over special 1 reserve (special 2 priority machine) or a pachinko machine that variably displays in order of winning prizes, and changes in special 2 reserve during normal operation. When the time is set to a long time, there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls are entered into the second starting hole and the pachinko machine is left unattended. According to this, the operating rate of the pachinko machines in the hall is extremely lowered. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a small winning rush function as a simultaneous variation machine.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when returning from the low probability high support state H4 to the low probability low support state H1 (normal time), 2 to 4 special 2 reservations remain, and the remaining special 2 When the result of the winning lottery is that the winning lottery is a big win with the remaining pending, it may take several tens of minutes before the big win is announced. On the other hand, when the low-probability high support state H4 ends and returns to the low-probability low support state H1 (normal time), it is often possible for the player to end the game as having escaped from an advantageous state. rice field. Even if the player knows that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with the special 2 remaining balance reserved at normal times, the player cannot wait for the above several tens of minutes and ends the game in a state where it is not clear whether the jackpot will be won or not. Always terminate. Therefore, during the operation shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 may become empty without a player. Also in this case, the variable display continues until the variable stops, after which the display shifts to the standby state H2. In this standby state H2, as described above, the right-handed lamp 39a does not turn on. In addition, since the jackpot winning that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 is due to the winning lottery related to the special 2 hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the left gate aiming notification effect And the left-handed notification effect is not displayed. For this purpose, a pachinko machine with the right-handed hitting lamp 39a in the lit state, or a pachinko machine in which the left-gate aiming notification effect, the left-handed hitting notification effect, or the right-handed hitting notification effect is executed is selected from among the pachinko machines with vacant seats. It is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas who find out and try to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine in which execution of a big win game is confirmed.

Here, the effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be further described by specifically citing a conventional example. This conventional pachinko machine differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the following configurations (i) and (ii), but the rest of the configuration is the same.
(i) A configuration in which the left big prize winning opening operation gate 95 is not provided and the right big prize winning opening operation gate 96 is provided.
(ii) If a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, the right big winning opening operation gate 96 after the end of the game round regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Waiting for the passage of the game ball, and shifting the variable winning device 36 to the opening/closing execution mode when the passage is detected.

That is, the conventional pachinko machine is a simultaneous variation machine, and is equipped with a small winning rush function. According to this conventional pachinko machine, when the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the ball entering the second start port 34 is executed in the low probability and low support state (normal time), this As with the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the fluctuation time corresponding to one game round for informing the player of the lottery result of this winning lottery is extremely long. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the conventional example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 at normal times. Even in such a case, the player may end the game and become an empty seat. Also in this case, after the variation stops displaying the symbols corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, the game shifts to the standby state in which the execution of the round game is confirmed. In the conventional pachinko machine, the recommended shooting mode in the standby state is right-handed hitting, so the right-handed hitting lamp 39a is turned on at the start of the standby state. As a result, according to this conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win and the start of the round game is confirmed, the seats are vacant seats without players. In spite of this, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on.

Here, when considering a pachinko machine having neither the left big prize opening operating gate 95 nor the right big winning opening operating gate 96, when a big win is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, the game round is executed. Immediately after the end of the game, the opening/closing execution mode would be entered, and the opening/closing execution mode could be started in a state where the seats were vacant without any players. According to this conventional pachinko machine, by providing the right-hand big winning opening operation gate 96, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing execution mode from being started in a state where there is no player and the seat is vacant. As described above, even though the pachinko machine has vacant seats with no players, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on.

Therefore, according to the conventional pachinko machine, a person who tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine by finding the pachinko machine with the right-handed lamp 39a lit from among the empty pachinko machines in the hall. There was a problem of generating (commonly known as hyena). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described in case 3 (see FIG. 62), during the low probability low support state (normal time), the ball entering the second start port 34 When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold due to the above, the right-handed lamp 39a is in the off state at the start of the standby state H2 that shifts after the fluctuation is stopped, so the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold Even if the lottery result is a jackpot winning and the start of the round game is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the right hitting lamp 39a. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of case 3, as described above, in the standby state H2 that has shifted from the low probability low support state H1, the jackpot that triggered the transition to the standby state H2 Since winning is based on a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining reserve caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the left gate aiming notification effect and the left hitting notification effect are displayed on the pattern display device 41. never For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold is a jackpot winning, and the state that the start of the round game is confirmed is the left gate aim notification. There is no such thing as being found by hyenas from the production or the left-handed notification production.

Furthermore, in the normal time, when a big win is won in a winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, the game ball enters the effective left big winning hole operation gate 95. Only those who start the game of the pachinko machine 10 without knowing that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the jackpot game can start the jackpot game by entering a ball. can be limited. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the right-handed lamp 39a is controlled to be lit during execution of the opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, so that the player can set the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism to the left. As a hit, after the game ball is entered into the left-side large winning opening operating gate 95, when control for starting the opening/closing execution mode (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag) is performed, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned on. Since the lighting state is established, it is possible to know immediately from the lighting state of the right hitting lamp 39a that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism needs to be switched to the right hitting. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate operation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability-low support state H1 is left-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, even after the transition to the standby state H2, the opening and closing execution mode start processing can be executed while the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism is left-handed. A game ball can be entered into the left big winning opening operating gate 95 which is possible and enabled. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the activated left side large winning opening operation gate 95 without switching the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism one by one. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operability of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability support state H4, high-probability-high support state H5, or high-probability-low support state H6 is right-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low-probability-high support state H4, the high-probability-high support state H5, or the high-probability-low support state H6, even after the transition to the standby state H2, the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism is changed to the right. The game ball can be entered into the activated right side big winning opening operation gate 96 which can execute the start processing of the open/close execution mode while being hit. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter a game ball into the activated right side large winning opening operation gate 96 without switching the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism one by one. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operability of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability-low support state H1 is left-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1, since the right hitting lamp 39a is controlled to be extinguished, the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism according to the extinguishing state of the right hitting lamp 39a is left hitting. In the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1 while continuing to do, the game ball can be entered into the left large winning opening operation gate 95 capable of executing the start processing of the opening and closing execution mode. . For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the left-side big winning opening operating gate 95 without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one. can improve sexuality.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism in the low-probability support state H4, high-probability-high support state H5, or high-probability-low support state H6 is right-handed. Then, in the standby state H2 shifted from the low probability high support state H4, the high probability high support state H5, or the high probability low support state H6, since the right hitting lamp 39a is controlled to the lighting state, the right hitting lamp 39a In the standby state H2 shifted from the low-accuracy high-support state H4, the high-accuracy high-support state H5, or the high-accuracy low support state H6, while continuing to make the firing mode by the shooting means right-handed according to the lighting state of A game ball can be entered into the right big winning opening operating gate 96 capable of executing the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the game ball into the right big winning opening operation gate 96 without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one. can improve sexuality.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the left-side large winning opening operation gate 95 allows a game ball to enter when hitting to the left, and does not allow a game ball to enter when hitting to the right. When hit, the left big winning opening operation gate 95 is configured so that the ball does not enter without fail (that is, with a probability of 100%). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the right-handed lamp 39a is not lit in the standby state for establishing the conditions for the start of the jackpot. By searching for a pachinko machine in a lighting state, it is not possible to find a pachinko machine in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if it is configured such that the game ball always enters the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 when hitting to the left, an empty pachinko machine is found and the pachinko machine is used. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is in a standby state for establishing a condition for starting a big win simply by taking a seat and shooting one game ball by hitting with the left hand. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball is not always entered into the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 when hitting to the left. When the player sits at the pachinko machine and shoots one game ball with the left hand, it cannot be determined whether or not the pachinko machine is in a standby state for establishing conditions for the start of a big win. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a state of waiting for satisfaction of start conditions. Therefore, according to this configuration, by firing only one game ball in order to the pachinko machines with vacant seats in the hall, the pachinko machines in the waiting state for fulfilling the conditions in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out and try to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machine.

<<2-8>> Modified example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<2-8-1>> Modification 1:
FIG. 118 is a front view of a game board 230 provided in a pachinko machine as this modified example. The game board 230 does not include the right large winning opening operating gate 96, and has a large winning opening operating gate 295 corresponding to the left large winning opening operating gate 95, as compared with the game board 30 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The difference is that the That is, the big winning opening operating gate 295 has the same configuration as the left big winning opening operating gate 95 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and is provided at the same position. In the figure, the same reference numerals as in the second embodiment are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this modification, when a jackpot is won as a result of a winning lottery in a predetermined game round, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, after the end of the game round It is compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment in that it waits for the game ball to pass through the big winning opening operation gate 295 and shifts the variable winning device 36 to the opening and closing execution mode when the passage is detected. and differ. The pachinko machine of this modified example is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment in other respects.

According to the pachinko machine of the present modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the low-probability support state H4, 50 game rounds, which is the time-saving upper limit number of times, are completed without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. By doing so, it moves to the low probability low support state H1 (normal state), and in this low probability low support state H1 (normal state), the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold can be executed. When the winning lottery related to this special 2 remaining reservation is executed, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable time corresponding to one game round for notifying the player of the lottery result of this winning lottery. becomes a very long time (long). Therefore, it is possible that the player ends the game and leaves the seat of the pachinko machine of the present modification during the game round of the variable time. In this case, even if the player leaves the seat, the fluctuation display will continue until the fluctuation stops. , the process shifts to the standby state H2 in which the execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process is confirmed. Since the shooting mode recommended in the standby state H2 is left-handed hitting that allows the game ball to enter the big winning opening operation gate 295, the right-handed lamp 39a is turned off at the start of the standby state H2. becomes. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of this modified example, even if the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win and the start of the round game is confirmed, this state can be known from the right hitting lamp 39a. can't Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, it is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas and improve the soundness of the game.

<<2-8-2>> Modification 2:
FIG. 119 is a front view of a game board 330 provided in the pachinko machine as this modified example. The game board 330 is provided with a left side round number distribution device 340 in place of the left side large winning opening operating gate 95, and a right side large winning opening operating gate 96 as compared with the game board 30 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. A right round number distribution device 350 is provided instead. The left side round number distribution device 340 is a device that determines the number of rounds when the result of a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is a big win, It is provided at a position corresponding to the left big winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball entry portion in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. That is, when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the number of rounds is determined. The right round number distribution device 350 is a device that determines the number of rounds when the result of a winning lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is a big win, It is provided at a position corresponding to the right big winning opening operation gate 96 as the second ball entry portion in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In other words, the number of rounds is determined when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a distinction between a normal jackpot, a variable probability jackpot, and a small hit rush and the number of rounds are determined by distribution determination using a distribution table. However, in the pachinko machine as this modified example, it is determined whether it is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a small hit rush by sorting judgment using a sorting table, and the number of rounds on the left side is sorted. The number of rounds is determined by the device 340 or the number-of-rounds sorting device 350 on the right side.

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the left round number sorting device 340. As shown in FIG. This figure is a front view of the game board 330 . Since the left round number apportioning device 340 and the right round number apportioning device 350 have the same configuration, the left round number apportioning device 340 will be described as a representative. The left round number sorting device 340 includes an entrance passage 341, a first branch passage 342 branching from the middle of the entrance passage 341 and extending downward to the left, and a second branch passage 342 branching from the middle of the entrance passage 341 and extending downward to the right. A branch passage 343, an exit portion 344 provided at the lower end of the left round number sorting device 340 and at a position where the first branch passage 342 and the second branch passage 343 merge, and near the lower end of the entrance side passage 341 A game ball sorting device 345 is provided.

The game ball distribution device 345 includes a reciprocating rotating shaft 345a and a distributing piece portion 345b fixed to the reciprocating rotating shaft 345a. By reciprocating rotation (swinging) of the reciprocating rotary shaft 345a, the sorting piece portion 345b moves between a first position Q1 indicated by a broken line in the figure and a second position Q2 indicated by a solid line in the figure. Reciprocating motion is possible. Specifically, 345a is connected to a game ball distribution drive unit (not shown), and the game ball distribution drive unit reciprocates 345a, thereby moving the distribution piece 340b to the first position Q1. and the second position Q2.

In this modification, the sorting piece portion 345b is repeatedly held at the first position Q1 for 6.5 seconds and then held at the second position Q2 for 3.5 seconds. , to execute drive control of the game ball distribution drive unit. As a result, the distribution piece portion 345b is displaced to the first position Q1 for 6.5 seconds every 10 seconds (=6.5 seconds + 3.5 seconds), and is displaced to the second position Q2 for the remaining 3.5 seconds. Displace. This repetitive operation is always executed after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It should be noted that the repeated operation of the sorting piece portion 345b is not limited to the above example, and may be configured to be performed at any time as long as it is performed when the jackpot is won.

The first branch passage 342 is located on the left side of the left round number sorting device 340 when the game board 330 is viewed from the front. In the middle of the first branch passage 342, a detection sensor (hereinafter also referred to as a first branch passage side detection sensor) 346 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided. Entry of a game ball into the branch passage 342 is detected. The second branch passage 343 is located on the right side of the left round number sorting device 340 when the game board 330 is viewed from the front. In the middle of the second branch passage 343, a detection sensor (hereinafter also referred to as a second branch passage side detection sensor) 347 that detects the passage of the game ball is provided. Entry of a game ball into the branch passage 343 is detected.

A game ball entering the left round number distribution device 340 reaches the game ball distribution device 345 from the entrance side passage 341, and is branched to the first branch passage 342 or the second branch passage 343 by the game ball distribution device 345. be. After that, the game ball passes through the branched first branch passage 342 or the second branch passage 343, reaches the exit portion 344, and exits from the left round number distribution device 340 from the exit portion 344. In this modified example, the entrance side passage 341, the first branch passage 342, and the second branch passage 343 are made of a transparent resin material, and the player can play games inside the left round number sorting device 340. It is possible to observe the stream of spheres.

In the pachinko machine of this modification, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first branch passage side detection sensor 346, the number of rounds is determined to be 16 times (16 rounds), and the second branch passage side detection sensor 347 When the passage of the game ball is detected by , the number of rounds is determined to be 8 times (8 rounds). As described above, the sorting piece portion 345b is displaced to the first position Q1 for 6.5 seconds every 10 seconds, and is displaced to the second position Q2 for the remaining 3.5 seconds. The probability that the game ball enters the branch passage 342 is 65/100, and the probability that the game ball enters the second branch passage 343 is 35/100. As a result, the probability of 16 rounds is 65/100 and the probability of 8 rounds is 35/100. The probability of allocating 16 rounds and 8 rounds is the same as the probability of allocating 16 rounds and 8 rounds according to the allocation table in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. That is, the pachinko machine of this modified example is configured to distribute 16 rounds and 8 rounds at the same probability as the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. It should be noted that the distribution probability is not necessarily limited to the above example, and may be a probability of another value.

In the pachinko machine of this modification, when the result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is a big win, the winning lottery After the game round is completed, the switch is shifted to the standby state H2, and when passage of the game ball is detected by the first branch passage side detection sensor 346 or the second branch passage side detection sensor 347 during the standby state H2, the opening/closing is performed. Execution mode H3 is entered. That is, the left side round number distribution device 340 has a function of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H3 when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first branch passage side detection sensor 346 or the second branch passage side detection sensor 347. . Similarly, the right round number distribution device 350 also has the function of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H3 when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first branch path side detection sensor 346 or the second branch path side detection sensor 347. have.

In this modified example, the function of determining the number of rounds and the function of causing the transition to the open/close execution mode of the left round number distribution device 340 and the right round number distribution device 350 respectively are high and low of the support mode and the lottery mode. Enabled/disabled is switched by a combination of high and low of . Specifically, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode of the low-probability, low-probability support state, when the jackpot is won, the left round frequency distribution device 340 becomes effective, and the right round is activated. The number distribution device 350 is disabled. When the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is low-probability mode in a low-probability-high support state, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is high-probability mode In a high-probability high support state, Alternatively, when a jackpot is won in a high-probability low support state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the right-side round number distribution device 350 becomes effective, and the left-side round number distribution is enabled. Device 340 is disabled. In the low probability low support state (normal time), both the left round number distribution device 340 and the right round number distribution device 350 are disabled. That is, the function of causing each of the left round number distribution device 340 and the right round number distribution device 350 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode in the present modification is the same as that in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The opening and closing gates 95, 96 switch under the same conditions that cause the transition to open and close execution mode.

In this modification, the configuration other than the configuration described above is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment.

The pachinko machine of this modified example configured as described above has the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. That is, the pachinko machine of the present modification, in the low probability low support state (normal time), in the winning lottery pertaining to the special 2 remaining hold caused by the ball entering the second start port 34, when the jackpot is won, the fluctuation Since the right-handed lamp 39a is in an extinguished state at the start of the standby state H2 that shifts after stopping, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the special 2 remaining hold is a big win, and it is decided that the round game will start. Even in this state, this state cannot be known from the right-handed lamp 39a. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modified example, it is possible to prevent the generation of hyenas and improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the present modification, when the winning lottery result is a big win, the left round number distribution device 340 or the right round number distribution device 350 that has become effective, the first branch The number of rounds distributed is switched depending on which of the path-side detection sensor 346 and the second branch path-side detection sensor 347 detects the passage of the game ball. That is, when the opportunity to open the big winning opening 36a is established based on the game ball entering the left round number distribution device 340 or the right round number distribution device 350 that has become effective, it becomes effective. The number of rounds is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first branch passage 342 or the second branch passage 343 provided in the left round number distribution device 340 or the right round number distribution device 350 . That is, when the opportunity to open the big winning opening is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section, to the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section The number of rounds is determined based on the number of game balls entered. Therefore, the player decides which of the first branch passage 342 and the second branch passage 343 the game ball will flow in the left round number distribution device 340 or the right round number distribution device 350 that has been activated. As a result, the player's expectation for the number of rounds to be distributed can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 1 described above, instead of the big winning opening operation gate 295, a left side round number distribution device 340 may be provided. That is, in the configuration of Modification 1 having only one large winning opening operating gate on the left side, the configuration adopted in each modification of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment includes the left large winning opening operating gate 95, that is, A modified example of modified example 1 may be adopted by appropriately adopting the portion related to the first ball entry portion.

<<2-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above-described second embodiment and each of the modifications described above, the flow-down route of the game ball to the right-side big winning opening operating gate 96 as the second ball-entering portion on the right side of the game board 30 is defined by the nail 42. Alternatively, the configuration may be defined by a resin passage. Specifically, an entrance-side passage, a first branch passage branching from the middle of the entrance-side passage and extending downward to the left, and a second branch passage branching from the middle of the entrance-side passage and extending downward to the right are provided, The configuration is such that the second ball entrance portion is provided at the downstream end of the first branch passage. According to this configuration, when the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball enters the entrance side passage, and then the game ball flows into the first branch passage and enters the second ball entering portion. It is sorted into a case where it flows into the branch passage and a case where it does not enter the second ball entering section. As a result, when hitting to the right, the game ball can enter the second ball entry portion with a probability of 50%. Furthermore, as a modification of this configuration, a plate-like valve body is provided at a position immediately before the entrance side passage branches into the first branch passage 342 and the second branch passage 343, and the swinging position of the valve body is switched. By doing so, it may be configured to be capable of assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion. That is, it may be configured to include a ball entry assisting section capable of assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section. According to this modification, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball-entering part, so it is possible to reduce the player's stress that the game ball does not easily enter the second ball-entering part.

<<2-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-described second embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the standby state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot, the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball-entering section or the right-side big winning opening as the second ball-entering section is activated. When a game ball enters the mouth operating gate 96 and the opportunity to open the big winning mouth 36a is established, after a certain period of time (after the time required for control has elapsed), the opening and closing execution mode is entered. bottom. On the other hand, as a modification, predetermined information is temporarily stored (reserved) in the memory when the game ball passes through the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section, and based on the predetermined information, As a configuration for determining the timing of performing control for starting the opening and closing execution mode (that is, the time from when the game ball enters the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section until the transition to the opening and closing execution mode) good too. The timing of performing the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode is, for example, the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the game ball entered the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion, or the timing when 20 seconds have passed. It can be determined by timing or the like. According to this modification, the player is given a sense of disappointment that the game ball does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode even though the game ball has passed through the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion. It is possible to give great joy such as suddenly shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the passage of a predetermined time.

It should be noted that this modification is the same as the pachinko machine of modification 1 provided with the game board 230 provided with the big winning opening operating gate 295 corresponding to the left big winning opening operating gate 95 without the right big winning opening operating gate 96. It can be applied in the same manner to the other, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<<2-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described second embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the standby state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot, the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball-entering section or the right-side big winning opening as the second ball-entering section is activated. When the opportunity to open the big winning opening 36a is established based on the entry of the game ball into the opening operation gate 96, the opening/closing execution mode is always performed. On the other hand, as a modified example, opening and closing is executed in spite of detection of a game ball entering the activated first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion in the standby state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot. A configuration in which the mode may not be changed in some cases may be adopted. Specifically, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and depending on the result of the predetermined lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. and the case of not shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. According to this modified example, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting the results of the predetermined lottery to be transferred to the opening/closing execution mode as soon as possible.

Further, when the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion is detected, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and depending on the result of the predetermined lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is entered, or the opening/closing execution mode is not entered. Another advantage in the case of adopting the configuration for distributing to and will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, since the right-handed lamp 39a is not lit in the waiting state for establishing the conditions for the start of the jackpot, the right-handed lamp 39a is lit from among the pachinko machines with vacant seats. By searching for a pachinko machine, it is not possible to find a pachinko machine that is in a standby state for satisfying conditions for starting a big win. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section that has been activated, the opening/closing execution mode is always entered. Is it a pachinko machine that is in a standby state for establishing a condition for starting a big win just by taking a seat at the vacant pachinko machine and hitting one game ball with a left hand into the first ball entry section? It is possible to determine whether or not For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, only one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the vacant gaming machines in the hall, and one game ball is placed in the first ball entering section. A hyena that attempts to gain unfair profits from a pachinko machine by finding out a pachinko machine that is in a condition-satisfaction standby state where execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter (so to speak, a left-shot hyena). ) is allowed to occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of this modified example, a player searches for an empty pachinko machine, takes a seat at the empty pachinko machine, and fires one (or several) game balls by hitting left. Since there is a possibility that the opening/closing execution mode may not be entered simply by entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion, it is immediately determined whether or not the pachinko machine is in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modification, only one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the vacant pachinko machines in the hall, and one game ball enters the first ball entry section. To find a pachinko machine in a waiting state for fulfillment of a condition in which the execution of a jackpot game is determined by making a ball, and to suppress the occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. can be done.

Furthermore, in this modification, after the game ball enters the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion, different effects can be executed depending on whether the opening/closing execution mode is entered or not. may be configured. The effect in the case of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode may be, for example, the effect of winning the battle in which the characters face each other, and the effect in the case of not shifting to the opening/closing execution mode may be, for example, the effect of the character losing in the battle in which the characters face each other. may be According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the character will win the battle and shift to the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this modified example, a lottery is used to determine whether to shift to the opening/closing execution mode or not to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to alternately switch between the case where the execution mode is entered and the case where the opening/closing execution mode is not entered. With this configuration as well, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a left-shot hyena.

It should be noted that this modification is the same as the pachinko machine of modification 1 provided with the game board 230 provided with the big winning opening operating gate 295 corresponding to the left big winning opening operating gate 95 without the right big winning opening operating gate 96. It can be applied in the same manner to the other, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<<2-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described second embodiment and each of the above modifications, in the standby state for establishment of the conditions for the start of the jackpot, the left-side big winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball-entering section or the right-side big winning opening as the second ball-entering section is activated. When the opportunity to open the big winning opening 36a is established based on the entry of the game ball into the opening operation gate 96, the opening/closing execution mode is always performed. On the other hand, as a modification, a first case in which the opening and closing execution mode is entered after a first period (for example, a length of 30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the first ball entering portion; Open/close execution mode after a second period longer than the first period (for example, length of 1 minute) after the game ball enters the left side large winning opening operation gate 95 as the first ball entering section. A second case in which the mode shifts to the open/close execution mode and a third case in which the mode does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode may be divided. The first case, the second case, and the third case may be sorted by lottery. That is, when a game ball entering the first ball entering portion is detected, a predetermined lottery is performed, and according to the result of the predetermined lottery, opening and closing is executed after the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A first case in which the period until transition to the mode is the first period, and a second case in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is longer than the first period. A configuration may be adopted in which the second case is the period and the third case is the case in which the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not performed in the first place. According to the pachinko machine of this modified example, a player searches for an empty pachinko machine, sits on the empty pachinko machine, shoots one (or several) game balls by hitting left, and shoots one game ball. Because there is a possibility that the opening/closing execution mode may not be entered only by entering the ball into the first ball entering portion, it is immediately determined whether or not the pachinko machine is in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a state of waiting for the establishment of conditions for the start of a big win. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modified example, only one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the pachinko machine in the hall, and one game ball enters the first ball entry section. To find a pachinko machine in a waiting state for fulfillment of a condition in which the execution of a jackpot game is determined by making a ball, and to suppress the occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. can be done.

Furthermore, in this modification, after the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, different effects may be executed in the first case, the second case, and the third case. According to this configuration, for normal players who are not hyenas, by providing various effects according to the length of the period until the special game state occurs, what effect is being executed this time? It is possible to create a sense of anticipation, such as whether the production corresponds to the situation.

Furthermore, in this modification, in the first period of the first case, a predetermined effect can be executed, and in the second period of the second case, the same effect as the predetermined effect is executed. In the third case where the opening/closing execution mode is not entered even if the game ball enters the first ball-entering unit, the first ball-entering unit is operated. After the game ball is entered, the same effect as the predetermined effect may be executed. According to this configuration, during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed after the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the player determines whether the first case, the second case, or the third case. It is not possible to determine whether or not the open/close execution mode is to be entered, and it is possible to create a sense of tension as to when to shift to the opening/closing execution mode or not to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. can make you feel.

In this modified example, the first case, the second case, and the third case are sorted by lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which the case, the second case, and the third case are switched in order. With this configuration as well, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a left-shot hyena.

In this modification, the pachinko machine of modification 1 is provided with a game board 230 provided with a large winning opening operating gate 295 corresponding to the left large winning opening operating gate 95 without the right big winning opening operating gate 96. It can be applied in the same manner to the other, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<<2-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the second embodiment and each modification described above, each of the large winning opening operation gates 95 and 96 as each ball entry portion has a function of causing a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, but this function is not the same as that of the support mode. It is configured to switch between valid/invalid depending on the combination of high/low and the high/low of the lottery mode. Then, when the entry of the game ball into the valid big winning opening operation gate 95 (96) is detected, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the invalid big winning opening operation gate 95 (96) is entered. When the entry of a game ball is detected, the start processing of the opening/closing execution mode as the start processing is not executed (becomes non-executed). On the other hand, as a modified example, as a configuration for controlling the start processing for detection of a game ball to the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section so as not to be executed, the execution of the start processing is postponed (the start processing is may be configured to temporarily control non-execution). Furthermore, when the start process is temporarily controlled to be non-executable, it stores the detection of the game ball entering the first ball entering section or the second ball entering section, and stores the number of times of detection. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

<<2-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the second embodiment and each of the modifications described above, the standby state H2, which is a condition establishment standby state in which execution of the opening/closing execution mode is confirmed, is a predetermined flag (waiting state H2) stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. It is realized by control using a transition flag, a flag during a standby state, etc.). However, the condition-satisfaction standby state may be realized by various other controls as long as the state in which execution of the opening/closing execution mode is confirmed is realized. For example, the condition-satisfaction waiting state may be realized by control processing using time setting or a timer. As the control process, for example, a standby time is set at a predetermined timing, a timer is used to determine whether or not the standby time has elapsed from the predetermined timing, and when the standby time has passed The configuration may be such that the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

<<2-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the second embodiment and each modification described above, in the standby state H2 in which the left large winning opening operating gate 95 as the first ball entering portion is enabled, the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95. When the ball is detected, it is configured to immediately shift to the opening/closing execution mode H3, but instead of this configuration, it may be configured to shift to the opening/closing execution mode H3 after a predetermined time lag. That is, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, it may be configured to immediately shift to the opening and closing execution mode, or after a predetermined time lag. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode shifts from the mode to the opening/closing execution mode. As the time lag, it may take time to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, or it may take time to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a predetermined lottery may be conducted and the length of the time lag may be changed according to the lottery result. It should be noted that there is no need to limit the time lag to the opening/closing execution mode after the opportunity to open the big winning opening based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion is established, and another process is interposed. may be Furthermore, when the opportunity to open the big winning hole is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part, the processing loop executed when the opportunity to open the big winning hole is established In the next processing loop, the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing processing may be performed. Further, the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode may be executed in the next processing loop, or the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode may be executed in the third processing loop or later. good too.

Similarly, in the above-described second embodiment and each of the modifications described above, in the standby state H2 in which the right-side large winning opening operating gate 96 is enabled, entry of a game ball into the right-side large winning opening operating gate 96 is detected. However, instead of this configuration, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode H3 may be performed after a predetermined time lag. That is, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion, it may be configured to immediately shift to the opening and closing execution mode, or after a predetermined time lag. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode is shifted from the mode to the opening/closing execution mode. As the time lag, it may take time to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, or it may take time to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a predetermined lottery may be conducted, and the length of the time lag may be changed according to the lottery result. It should be noted that there is no need to limit the time lag to the opening/closing execution mode after the opportunity to open the large winning opening is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion, and another process is interposed. may be Furthermore, when the opportunity to open the big winning hole is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering part, the processing loop executed when the opportunity to open the big winning hole is established. In the next processing loop, control may be performed to start the opening and closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening and closing processing. Further, the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode may be executed in the next processing loop, or the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode may be executed in the processing loop after the third time. good too.

<<2-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the second embodiment and each modification described above, the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously executing the variation display of the first symbol display section 37a and the variation display of the second symbol display section 37b. rice field. On the other hand, as a modified example, the pachinko machine may be configured such that the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b cannot be executed at the same time. Specifically, when the special 1 suspension due to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33 and the special 2 suspension due to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 coexist, It may be a special 2 priority machine that variably displays the 2 hold with priority over the special 1 hold.

<<2-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<2-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<2-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment and each modification may be realized by hardware, or part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software. good too.

<<2-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example will be appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristics yA group>
The feature yA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yA1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area A game machine, comprising: a ball entry area control means for not executing predetermined processing (processing for starting an opening/closing execution mode) for detection of a game ball even if a ball is struck.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yA2]
The gaming machine according to feature yA1,
A game ball that enters the first specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the first specific ball entering area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed hitting). A game machine characterized by the fact that

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, a game ball that enters the first specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the first specific ball entering area are separated. Since it can occur, there is a case where the special game state does not occur because the game ball does not enter the first specific ball entry area only by hitting one game ball in the first shooting mode (left hitting). could be. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the feature yA1, if the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball that is shot will always enter the first specific ball entering area. A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by simply finding a game machine with an empty seat, taking a seat at the game machine with the vacant seat, and shooting one game ball with a left-hand shot. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a machine. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yA1, by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, a predetermined waiting state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed is entered. This would allow the generation of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out pachinko machines that are out of reach and attempt to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machines. On the other hand, in the gaming machine with this feature, if you just look for an empty seat, sit on the empty seat, and shoot one game ball in the first shooting mode, you will not be able to play a special game. Since there is a possibility that the state does not occur, it is not possible to determine whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, and the execution of the special game state is confirmed. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a predetermined standby state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this characteristic, by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, the execution of the special game state is confirmed and the predetermined standby state is established. To suppress the occurrence of a left-shot hyena who finds a pachinko machine and tries to obtain unfair profit from the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yA3]
A gaming machine according to feature yA1 or feature yA2,
A gaming machine, wherein the first state includes the predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the first shooting mode.

According to this feature, since the first state includes a predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the first shooting mode, even after transition to the predetermined standby state, the shooting means can shoot the ball. While the mode is set to the first shooting mode, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first specific ball entering area where predetermined processing can be executed for detecting the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area. can. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

[Feature yA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA3,
A gaming machine, wherein the second state includes the predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the second shooting mode.

According to this feature, since the second state includes a predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the second shooting mode, even after the transition to the predetermined standby state, the shooting means can shoot the ball. While the mode is the second shooting mode, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second specific ball entry area where predetermined processing can be executed for detecting the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area. can. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

[Feature yA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA4,
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A game machine, comprising means for determining timing for performing the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates the special game state based on the predetermined information. For the player, for example, the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to give a feeling of disappointment once, and then give a great joy that a special game state suddenly occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA5,
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting between the case of occurrence and the case of non-occurrence based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, the special game state is generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, and the special game state is generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. There is a case where it is not made, and based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, the case where the special game state is generated and the case where it is not generated are sorted, so that the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. Depending on the result of the lottery, the special game state may not occur even though the game is played. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in the game machine of this feature, a player searches for an empty seat, takes a seat in the game machine with the vacant seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed because there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur only by entering the game ball into the first specific ball entry area. Therefore, it is difficult to find out a pachinko machine in a predetermined waiting state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA6,
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball is generated or not generated after the game ball has entered the first specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, the special game state is generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, and the special game state is generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Since there is a case where it is not allowed, it is possible that the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. The game machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is determined because there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur simply by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the hyena is provided with means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the special game state is generated or not. When a game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, a special game state is generated by executing an effect corresponding to the case where the special game state is to be generated. It can give you hope. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature yA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA7,
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting among the first case, the second case, and the non-occurrence case based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, the first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which a special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed after the ball is played, and the special game state is not generated even if a game ball enters a first specific ball entry area. There is a case, and based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, the first case, the second case, and the case where it does not occur are distributed, so that the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. Depending on the result of the second lottery, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area in spite of the fact that the ball has been landed. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes time longer than the length of the second period until the determination However, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA8,
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
After the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on the first case, the second case, and the case of not occurring. .

According to this feature, the first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has passed after the ball is played, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Therefore, although the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state, wait for the second period after the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area. Also, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes time longer than the length of the second period until the determination However, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the means capable of executing different effects in the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state is not generated is provided. Since it is provided, for normal players who are not hyenas, various effects are provided according to the length of the period until the special game state occurs. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation, such as whether it is a corresponding production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA9,
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the first period of the first case;
means capable of executing an effect identical to the predetermined effect in the second period of the second case, and executing an effect different from the predetermined effect following the effect;
When the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the same production as the predetermined production after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has passed after the ball is played, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Therefore, although the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state, wait for the second period after the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area. Also, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat A special game state can be executed just by sitting at the gaming machine and shooting game balls one by one (or several) with left hand hitting and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a fixed predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes a time longer than the length of the second period until the determination, It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the first period of the first case, the means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and in the second period of the second case, the same effect as the predetermined effect is executed, A means capable of executing a performance different from a predetermined performance following the performance, and even if a game ball enters the first specific ball-entering region, even if a game ball enters the first specific ball-entering region, the special game state is not generated. After the game ball enters the game ball, the period during which the predetermined effect is executed after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. , the player cannot distinguish between the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state does not occur, and at what timing the special game state occurs, or when the special game state does not occur. It is possible to make the player have a sense of tension such as whether or not the game is played, and to make the player feel discouraged when the special game state does not occur. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature yA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA10,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production execution means is
Even if the special game state can occur based on the game ball being launched in the first shooting mode and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area, the recommended shooting mode means for not executing an effect (left gate aiming effect, left-throwing notification effect) for notifying that the is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shot).

According to this feature, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect is provided, and the effect executing means is based on the fact that the game ball is shot in the first shooting mode and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Even if a special game state can occur, the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode. Even if a transition is made to a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is determined by winning a jackpot in , no performance is executed to inform that the recommended shooting mode is the first shooting mode. For this reason, a game machine executing an effect informing that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode is found out of the vacant gaming machines, and unfair profits are obtained from the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas trying to

[Feature yA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA11,
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area, based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area A gaming machine comprising round number determination means (left side round number distribution device 340 in modified example 3) for determining the number of round games in the special game state.

According to this feature, when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Since the round number determining means for determining the number of round games in the special game state based on the ball is provided, when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area and the opportunity to open the privilege ball entering means is established. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to what the number of round games will be in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA12,
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area, based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area A gaming machine comprising round number determining means (right side round number distribution device 350 in modified example 3) for determining the number of round games in the special game state.

According to this feature, when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area, the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area. Since the round number determining means for determining the number of round games in the special game state based on the ball is provided, when the game ball enters the second specific ball entering area and the opportunity to open the privilege ball entering means is established. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to what the number of round games will be in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA13,
A game ball that enters the second specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the second specific ball entering area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed hitting). A game machine characterized by the fact that

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, game balls that enter the second specific ball entering area and game balls that do not enter the second specific ball entering area are separated. Since it can occur, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting the game ball to quickly enter the second specific ball entry area in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA14,
The special game state generating means is
A predetermined lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the privilege Since the opportunity for opening the ball-entering means is established, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA15,
The special game state generating means is
A predetermined lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means.

According to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the privilege Since the opportunity for opening the ball-entering means is established, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA16,
A game characterized by comprising a notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening and closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening and closing process, ie, the jackpot game). machine.

According to this feature, since the notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode is provided during execution of the special game state, the player can set the firing mode by the firing means as the first firing mode to the first specific input. When the predetermined control is performed after the game ball is entered into the ball area, the notifying means has changed to the notifying mode, so that the notifying means is notified that the shooting mode by the shooting means needs to be switched to the second shooting mode. You can immediately know from the notification mode. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate operation.

[Feature yA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA17,
A game machine, wherein the first state includes a game state in which the notification means is controlled in the non-notification mode.

According to this feature, since the first state includes the game state in which the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode, the first state is maintained while the firing mode by the firing means is set to the first firing mode. In state 1, a game ball can be made to enter the first specific ball entry area where predetermined processing can be executed for detection of the game ball entry into the first specific ball entry area. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

[Feature yA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA18,
A game machine, wherein the second state includes a game state in which the notification means is controlled in the notification mode.

According to this feature, since the second state includes the game state in which the notification means is controlled to the notification mode, the second state is maintained while the firing mode by the firing means is set to the second firing mode. In the state, the game ball can be entered into the second specific ball entry area where predetermined processing can be executed for detection of the game ball entry into the second specific ball entry area. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

[Feature yA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA19,
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A game machine, comprising means for determining timing for performing the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates the special game state based on the predetermined information. For the player, for example, the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area. It is possible to give a feeling of disappointment once, and then give a great joy that a special game state suddenly occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yA21]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yA1 to yA20,
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry assisting means capable of assisting the entry of a game ball into the second specific ball entry area.

According to this feature, since the ball entry assisting means capable of assisting the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is provided, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second specific ball entry area. 2 It is possible to reduce the stress of the player that the game ball does not easily enter the specific ball entry area.

<Characteristic yB group>
The feature yB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yB1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A game ball that enters the first specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the first specific ball entering area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed hitting). A game machine characterized by the fact that

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball that enters the first specific ball entering area and the game ball that does not enter the first specific ball entering area Since this can occur, the game ball does not enter the first specific ball entry area and the special game state does not occur when only one game ball is hit in the first shooting mode (left-handed). There are cases. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the feature yA1, if the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball that is shot will always enter the first specific ball entering area. A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by simply finding a game machine with an empty seat, taking a seat at the game machine with the vacant seat, and shooting one game ball with a left-hand shot. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a machine. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yA1, by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, a predetermined waiting state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed is entered. This would allow the generation of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out pachinko machines that are out of reach and attempt to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machines. On the other hand, in the gaming machine with this feature, if you just look for an empty seat, sit on the empty seat, and shoot one game ball in the first shooting mode, you will not be able to play a special game. Since there is a possibility that the state does not occur, it is not possible to determine whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, and the execution of the special game state is confirmed. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a predetermined standby state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this characteristic, by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, the execution of the special game state is confirmed and the predetermined standby state is established. To suppress the occurrence of a left-shot hyena who finds a pachinko machine and tries to obtain unfair profit from the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic yC group>
The feature yC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yC1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A gaming machine, wherein the first state includes the predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the first shooting mode.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the first state includes a predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the first shooting mode, even after the transition to the predetermined standby state, the shooting means Entering a game ball into a first specific ball entry area capable of executing a predetermined process for detecting the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area while keeping the shooting mode by the first shooting mode. be able to. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

<Characteristic yD group>
The feature yD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yD1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A gaming machine, wherein the second state includes the predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the second shooting mode.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the second state includes a predetermined standby state in which the game ball is being shot in the second shooting mode, even after the transition to the predetermined standby state, the shooting means A game ball is entered into a second specific ball entry area where predetermined processing can be executed for detection of the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area while the shooting mode is set to the second launch mode. be able to. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

<Characteristic yE group>
The feature yE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yE1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A gaming machine comprising means for determining timing for performing the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates a special game state based on the predetermined information. Since the means for determining the timing of performing the predetermined control for generating the game state is provided, for example, the special game state is generated even though the game ball has entered the first specific ball entry area for the player. It is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that it will not occur, and then give a great pleasure that a special game state suddenly occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yF group>
The feature yF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yF1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area a ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detection of a game ball even if a ball is hit;
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising: means for sorting between the case of occurrence and the case of non-occurrence based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can be entered when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, the special game state is generated, and even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, the special game state is generated. is not generated, and based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, the case where the special game state is generated and the case where it is not generated are divided, so that the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined waiting state. Depending on the result of the lottery, the special game state may not occur even though the ball is entered. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in the game machine of this feature, a player searches for an empty seat, takes a seat in the game machine with the vacant seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed because there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur only by entering the game ball into the first specific ball entry area. Therefore, it is difficult to find out a pachinko machine in a predetermined waiting state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic yG group>
The feature yG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yG1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball is generated or not generated after the game ball has entered the first specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, the special game state is generated, and even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, the special game state is generated. is not generated, it is possible that the special game state is not generated even though the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, a game machine with an empty seat is searched for, a player takes a seat at the game machine with the empty seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode to complete one game. The game machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is determined because there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur simply by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the hyena is provided with means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the special game state is generated or not. When a game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, a special game state is generated by executing an effect corresponding to the case where the special game state is to be generated. It can give you hope. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic yH group>
The feature yH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yH1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting among the first case, the second case, and the non-occurrence case based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first case of generating a special game state after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which a special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has passed since the ball entered, and the special game state is generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. There is a case where it is not generated, and based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, the first case, the second case, and the case where it is not generated are sorted, so that the game ball is placed in the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. Although the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, depending on the result of the second lottery, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes time longer than the length of the second period until the determination However, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristics yI group>
The feature yI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yI1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
After the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on the first case, the second case, and the case of not occurring. .

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first case of generating a special game state after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the ball entered, and a special game state is generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Since there are cases where it is not allowed, the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area despite the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state, Even if you wait, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat Execution of the special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the gaming machine, shooting one (or several) game balls with a left hand, and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes time longer than the length of the second period until the determination However, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the means capable of executing different effects in the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state is not generated is provided. Since it is provided, for normal players who are not hyenas, various effects are provided according to the length of the period until the special game state occurs. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation, such as whether it is a corresponding production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yJ group>
The feature yJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yJ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
When the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. and
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the first specific ball-entering area;
includes
means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the first period of the first case;
means capable of executing an effect identical to the predetermined effect in the second period of the second case, and executing an effect different from the predetermined effect following the effect;
When the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area, the same production as the predetermined production after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first case of generating a special game state after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the first specific ball entering area, and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the ball entered, and a special game state is generated even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. Since there are cases where it is not allowed, the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area despite the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state, Even if you wait, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yA1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yA1, if the special gaming state is always generated when the game ball enters the first specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the vacant seat A special game state can be executed just by sitting at the gaming machine and shooting game balls one by one (or several) with left hand hitting and making one game ball enter the first specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a fixed predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yA1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. A hyena (a so-called left-shot hyena) who finds a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by making a ball enter and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. allow it to occur. On the other hand, in this feature, a game machine with an empty seat is searched for, a player takes a seat at the game machine with the empty seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode to complete one game. Because the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the first specific ball-entering area only by allowing the ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area. , it is not possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, and it takes a period of time equal to or longer than the length of the second period until the determination is made; It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to the vacant gaming machines in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the first specific ball entry area. A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is fixed can be found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the first period of the first case, the means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and in the second period of the second case, the same effect as the predetermined effect is executed, A means capable of executing a performance different from a predetermined performance following the performance, and even when a game ball enters the first specific ball-entering region, even if a game ball enters the first specific ball-entering region, the special game state is not generated. After the game ball enters the game ball, the period during which the predetermined effect is executed after the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area. , the player cannot distinguish between the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state does not occur, and at what timing the special game state occurs, or when the special game state does not occur. It is possible to make the player have a sense of tension such as whether or not the game is played, and to make the player feel discouraged when the special game state does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic yK group>
The feature yK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yK1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
Even if the special game state can occur based on the game ball being launched in the first shooting mode and the game ball entering the first specific ball entering area, the recommended shooting mode means for not executing an effect (left gate aiming effect, left-throwing notification effect) for notifying that the is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shot).

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect is provided, and the effect executing means causes the game ball to be shot in the first shooting mode and enter the first specific ball entry area. Even if a special game state can occur based on, it is equipped with a means that does not execute an effect that notifies that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode, so based on special 2 remaining reservation Even if the machine shifts to a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a special game state is determined by winning a big win in a winning lottery, the performance for notifying that the recommended shooting mode is the first shooting mode is not executed. For this reason, a game machine executing an effect informing that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode is found out of the vacant gaming machines, and unfair profits are obtained from the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas trying to do so.

<Characteristic yL group>
The feature yL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yL1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area, based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area A gaming machine comprising round number determination means (left side round number distribution device 340 in modified example 3) for determining the number of round games in the special game state.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area, the game ball to the first specific ball entry area Since the number of rounds determination means for determining the number of round games in the special game state is provided based on the entry of the ball, the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means when the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area is established. In this case, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to what the number of round games will be in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yM group>
The feature yM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yM1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
When the opportunity to release the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area, based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area A gaming machine comprising round number determining means (right side round number distribution device 350 in modified example 3) for determining the number of round games in the special game state.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the second specific ball entry area, the game ball to the second specific ball entry area Since the number of rounds determining means for determining the number of round games in the special game state is provided based on the entry of the ball, the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means when the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area is established. In this case, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to what the number of round games will be in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yN group>
The feature yN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yN1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A game ball that enters the second specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the second specific ball entering area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed hitting). A game machine characterized by the fact that

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, a game ball that enters the second specific ball entering area and a game ball that does not enter the second specific ball entering area can occur, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting the game ball to quickly enter the second specific ball entry area in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yO group>
The feature yO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yO1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
A predetermined lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, Since the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yP group>
The feature yP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yP1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The special game state generating means is
A predetermined lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, Since the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yQ group>
The feature yQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yQ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
A game characterized by comprising a notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during the execution of the special game state (opening and closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening and closing process, that is, the jackpot game). machine.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode is provided during execution of the special game state, the player can set the firing mode by the firing means as the first firing mode. When the predetermined control is performed after the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry area, since the notification means has changed to the notification mode, it is notified that the firing mode by the firing means needs to be switched to the second firing mode. It can be known immediately from the notification mode of the means. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate operation.

<Characteristic yR group>
The feature yR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yR1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operating gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A game machine, wherein the first state includes a game state in which the notification means is controlled in the non-notification mode.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. The non-notification mode can be left as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the first state includes the game state in which the notification means is controlled in the non-report mode, the firing mode by the firing means continues to be the first firing mode. , in the first state, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first specific ball-entering area where predetermined processing can be executed for detection of the game ball entering the first specific ball-entering area. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

<Characteristic yS group>
The feature yS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yS1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
A game machine, wherein the second state includes a game state in which the notification means is controlled in the notification mode.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the second state includes a game state in which the notification means is controlled to the notification mode, while continuing to set the firing mode by the firing means to the second firing mode, In the second state, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second specific ball-entering area where predetermined processing can be executed for detection of the game ball entering the second specific ball-entering area. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second specific ball entering area without switching the shooting mode by the shooting means one by one, so that the operability of the game can be improved. can.

<Characteristic yT group>
The feature yT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yT1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
a means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball-entering area, while the game state is the second state, a predetermined process for detecting a game ball entering the first specific ball-entering area (opening/closing execution mode start process ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A game machine, comprising means for determining timing for performing the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates a special game state based on the predetermined information. Since means for determining the timing of performing the predetermined control for generating the game state is provided, for example, the special game state is not generated for the player even though the game ball has entered the second specific ball entry area. It is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that it will not occur, and then give great joy that a special game state will suddenly occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yU group>
The feature yU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yU1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) a first specific ball entry area (left grand prize winning opening operating gate 95) where the ball cannot be entered;
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, the game ball cannot enter. A certain second specific ball entry area (right big winning opening operation gate 96),
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, a predetermined control (opening/closing execution mode is started) a special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of control for (control to turn ON the opening/closing execution mode flag);
means for determining a game state;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game state is the first state (standby state H2 shifted from the low probability low support state H1), even if the game ball enters the second specific ball entry area, the game state is the first state While the predetermined processing (processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode) for detecting the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is not executed,
When the game state is a second state (low probability high support state H4, high probability high support state H5, or standby state H2 shifted from high probability low support state H6) different from the first state, Even if a game ball enters one specific ball entry area, while the game state is the second state, predetermined processing for detection of the game ball into the first specific ball entry area (opening/closing execution mode start processing ) as non-executable, and
When the game state is a third state (low probability low support state H1) different from the first and second states, the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area ball entry area control means for not executing a predetermined process (starting process of opening/closing execution mode) for detecting a game ball even if a ball is hit;
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry assisting means capable of assisting the entry of a game ball into the second specific ball entry area.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), the game ball can enter the first specific ball entering area, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second. A second specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter when the shooting mode (for example, right-handed hitting) is provided, and the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after the execution of the predetermined control when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the above. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first state, even if the game ball enters the second specific ball-entering area, the game ball does not enter the second specific ball-entering area while the gaming state is the first state. A second state in which the game state is different from the first state even if the game ball enters the first specific ball entry area without executing the predetermined processing for the detection when the game state is the second state. , the predetermined process for detecting the game ball into the first specific ball entry area is not executed, and when the game state is the third state different from the first and second states, the first Even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry area or the second specific ball entry area, the predetermined processing for detection of the game ball is not executed.

Here, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. Let us consider, as a comparative example, a configuration in which a notification mode (lighting mode) is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner is confirmed. , the game ball does not enter the second specific ball entry area, and the state does not move to the special game state continues. In this case, after the player leaves the seat In this game machine, there is a case where the notification means continues the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means controls to a non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed. Then, the gaming ball is detected in the first specific ball-entering area or the second specific ball-entering area depending on whether the game state is the first state, the second state, or the third state. By not executing the predetermined process for the game, the specific ball-entering area in which the predetermined process can be executed can be appropriately switched between the first specific ball-entering area and the second specific ball-entering area according to the game state. becomes possible. Therefore, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entering means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode. It is possible to leave the non-notification mode as it is. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, since the ball entry assisting means capable of assisting the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry area is provided, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second specific ball entry area. , it is possible to reduce the player's stress that the game ball does not easily enter the second specific ball-entering area.

<Characteristics yV group>
The feature yV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yV1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yV2]
The gaming machine according to feature yV1,
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed hitting), a game ball enters the specific ball entry area and a game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, a game ball may enter the specific ball entering area and a game ball may not enter the specific ball entering area. Therefore, if one game ball is hit in the first shooting mode (left-hand shot), the game ball may not enter the specific ball-entering area and the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the feature yV1, if the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the game ball that is shot is configured to enter the first specific ball-entering area without fail, A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by simply finding a game machine with an empty seat, taking a seat at the game machine with the vacant seat, and shooting one game ball with a left-hand shot. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a machine. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, a predetermined waiting state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed is entered by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall. This would allow the generation of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out pachinko machines that are out of reach and attempt to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machines. On the other hand, in the gaming machine with this feature, if you just look for an empty seat, sit on the empty seat, and shoot one game ball in the first shooting mode, you will not be able to play a special game. Since there is a possibility that the state does not occur, it is not possible to determine whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, and the execution of the special game state is confirmed. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a predetermined standby state. Therefore, according to this feature, the pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of left-shot hyenas who find out and try to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yV3]
A gaming machine according to feature yV1 or feature yV2,
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A gaming machine comprising means for determining a timing for generating the special game state after execution of the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates the special game state based on the predetermined information. Since the means for determining the timing for performing the predetermined control for making the game play is provided, for example, the player does not feel disappointed that the special game state does not occur even though the game ball has entered the specific ball entry area. After giving it once, it is possible to give a great pleasure such as a sudden occurrence of a special game state after that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yV4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV3,
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting between the case of occurrence and the case of non-occurrence based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, there are cases where the special game state is generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Yes, based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, since the case of generating the special game state and the case of not generating it are sorted, even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area during the predetermined waiting state, Depending on the result of the lottery, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in the game machine of this feature, a player searches for an empty seat, takes a seat in the game machine with the vacant seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Since there is a possibility that the special game state does not occur just by making one game ball enter the specific ball entry area, the game machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined waiting state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yV5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV4,
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball is generated or not generated after the game ball has entered the specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, there are cases where the special game state is generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Therefore, it is possible that the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Since there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur simply by allowing the ball to enter the specific ball-entering area, whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, it is provided with a means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the special game state is generated or not. Players have expectations that when a game ball enters a specific ball entry area, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a special game state is executed and a special game state is generated. can let Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yV6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV5,
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting among the first case, the second case, and the non-occurrence case based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a case where the game ball enters the specific ball entering area There are a second case in which a special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has passed, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if a game ball enters a specific ball entry area. Based on the lottery result of the lottery, the first case, the second case, and the case where it does not occur are sorted. 2 Depending on the result of the lottery, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the state is fixed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature yV7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV6,
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on the first case, the second case, and the non-occurring case after a game ball enters the specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a case where the game ball enters the specific ball entering area Since there are a second case in which the special game state is generated after the second period longer than the first period has passed, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, In spite of the game ball entering the specific ball entering area during the predetermined standby state, the special game state does not occur even after waiting for a second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area. could be. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the state is fixed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, after the game ball has entered the specific ball entry area, means is provided for executing different effects in the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state is not generated. Therefore, for normal players who are not hyenas, by providing various effects according to the length of the period until the special game state occurs, the effect being executed this time corresponds to which case. It can create a sense of anticipation, such as whether it is a performance. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature yV8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV7,
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the first period of the first case;
means capable of executing an effect identical to the predetermined effect in the second period of the second case, and executing an effect different from the predetermined effect following the effect;
When the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the same production as the predetermined production can be executed after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. means and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a case where the game ball enters the specific ball entering area Since there are a second case in which the special game state is generated after the second period longer than the first period has passed, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, In spite of the game ball entering the specific ball entering area during the predetermined standby state, the special game state does not occur even after waiting for a second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area. could be. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Execution of a special game state is determined only by taking a seat on the machine and shooting game balls one by one (or several) by hitting with the left hand and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state whose execution is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the first period of the first case, the means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and in the second period of the second case, the same effect as the predetermined effect is executed, A means capable of executing a performance different from a predetermined performance following the performance, and a game ball entering the specific ball entering area even when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area without generating a special game state. After the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, the first effect is executed during the period in which the predetermined effect is executed after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area. The player cannot discriminate whether it is the case, the second case, or the case when the special game state does not occur, and the player feels a sense of tension such as at what timing the special game state occurs or whether the special game state does not occur. It is possible to make the player have a feeling of disappointment when the special game state does not occur. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature yV9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV8,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
Even if the special game state can occur based on the game ball being launched in the first shooting mode and the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the recommended shooting mode is the A game machine characterized by comprising means for not executing an effect (left gate aim effect, left-throw notification effect) for informing that the first shooting mode (left-hand shot) is in effect.

According to this feature, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect is provided, and the effect executing means has a special effect based on the game ball being shot in the first shooting mode and the game ball entering the specific ball entry area. Even if a game state can occur, the jackpot lottery based on the special 2 remaining reserve is provided by means for not executing the effect of informing that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode. Even if the game goes to a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed by winning, the performance for notifying that the recommended shooting mode is the first shooting mode is not performed. For this reason, a game machine executing an effect informing that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode is found out of the vacant gaming machines, and an unfair profit is obtained from the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas trying to do so.

[Feature yV10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV9,
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the special game state based on the game ball entry into the specific ball entry area A game machine characterized by comprising a round number determination means (the left side round number distribution device 340 in Modification 2) that determines the number of round games in .

According to this feature, when the opportunity to open the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area is established, based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area Since the round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special game state is provided, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area and the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established, the special game state It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation as to which number of times the round game will be played. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature yV11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features yV1 to yV10,
The special game state generating means is
performing a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area, and means for establishing an opportunity for the privilege ball entry means to open when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the special game state generation means Since the means is provided with the means for establishing the opening opportunity, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yW group>
The feature yW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yW1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
When the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed hitting), a game ball enters the specific ball entry area and a game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, a specific ball entry area is provided in which a game ball can enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed hitting), and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered when it is in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball-entering means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notifying means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, game balls that enter the specific ball entering area and game balls that do not enter the specific ball entering area are generated. Therefore, it is possible that the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area and the special game state does not occur when only one game ball is hit in the first shooting mode (left-handed). In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the feature yV1, if the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the game ball that is shot is configured to enter the first specific ball-entering area without fail, A game in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed by simply finding a game machine with an empty seat, taking a seat at the game machine with the vacant seat, and shooting one game ball with a left-hand shot. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a machine. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, a predetermined waiting state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed is entered by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall. This would allow the generation of hyenas (so to speak, left-shot hyenas) who find out pachinko machines that are out of reach and attempt to gain unfair profits from the pachinko machines. On the other hand, in the gaming machine with this feature, if you just look for an empty seat, sit on the empty seat, and shoot one game ball in the first shooting mode, you will not be able to play a special game. Since there is a possibility that the state does not occur, it is not possible to determine whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, and the execution of the special game state is confirmed. It is difficult to find a pachinko machine that is in a predetermined standby state. Therefore, according to this characteristic, the pachinko machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed by firing only one game ball in order to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of left one-shot hyenas who find out and try to make an unfair profit from the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic yX group>
The feature yX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yX1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
The game machine further
Predetermined information storage means for storing predetermined information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the specific ball entry area;
The special game state generating means is
A gaming machine comprising means for determining a timing for generating the special game state after execution of the predetermined control (control for starting the opening/closing execution mode) based on the predetermined information.

According to this feature, a specific ball entry area is provided in which a game ball can enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed hitting), and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notification means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered when it is in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball-entering means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notifying means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area is provided, and the special game state generating means generates the special game state based on the predetermined information. For example, the player is disappointed that the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is possible to provide great pleasure such as a sudden occurrence of a special game state after giving a sense of feeling. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yY group>
The feature yY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yY1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting between the case of occurrence and the case of non-occurrence based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered when it is in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball-entering means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notifying means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. Since the case where the special game state is generated and the case where it is not generated are sorted based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state However, depending on the result of the lottery, the special game state may not occur. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in the game machine of this feature, a player searches for an empty seat, takes a seat in the game machine with the vacant seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Since there is a possibility that the special game state does not occur just by making one game ball enter the specific ball entry area, the game machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined waiting state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic yZ group>
The feature yZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yZ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball is generated or not generated after the game ball has entered the specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered when it is in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball-entering means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notifying means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the special game state is generated, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the special game state is not generated. Therefore, it is possible that the special game state does not occur even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. Since there is a possibility that the special game state will not occur simply by allowing the ball to enter the specific ball-entering area, whether the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed. Therefore, it is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, it is provided with a means capable of executing different effects depending on whether the special game state is generated or not. Players have expectations that when a game ball enters a specific ball entry area, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a special game state is executed and a special game state is generated. can let Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yα group>
The feature yα group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yα1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for sorting among the first case, the second case, and the non-occurrence case based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered when it is in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball-entering means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notifying means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even if execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined release is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, there are a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a game ball entering the specific ball entering area. There are a second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since then, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Since the first case, the second case, and the case not to occur are sorted based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, even though the game ball enters the specific ball entry area during the predetermined standby state. Depending on the result of the second lottery, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the state is fixed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic yβ group>
The feature yβ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yβ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing different effects in the first case, the second case, and the case of not generating after a game ball enters the specific ball-entering area.

According to this feature, a specific ball entry area is provided in which a game ball can enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed hitting), and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notification means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, there are a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a game ball entering the specific ball entering area. There are a second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since then, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the specific ball entering area during the predetermined standby state, the special game state does not occur even if the second period is waited after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area. It is possible. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Predetermined standby in which execution of a special game state is confirmed only by taking a seat at the machine and shooting one (or several) game balls with left-handed hitting and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the occurrence of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, a game machine with an empty seat is searched for, a player takes a seat at the game machine with the empty seat, and shoots one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode to complete one game. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to immediately determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the state is fixed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, after the game ball has entered the specific ball entry area, means is provided for executing different effects in the first case, the second case, and the case where the special game state is not generated. Therefore, for normal players who are not hyenas, by providing various effects according to the length of the period until the special game state occurs, the effect being executed this time corresponds to any case. It can create a sense of anticipation, such as whether it is a performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yγ group>
The feature yγ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yγ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
There are cases where the special game state is generated when a game ball enters the specific ball entry area, and cases where the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area,
In the case of generating the
A first case in which the special game state is generated after a first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entry area;
A second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific ball-entering area;
includes
The game machine further
means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the first period of the first case;
means capable of executing an effect identical to the predetermined effect in the second period of the second case, and executing an effect different from the predetermined effect following the effect;
When the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area, the same production as the predetermined production can be executed after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. means and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, there are a first case in which the special game state is generated after the first period has passed since the game ball entered the specific ball entering area, and a game ball entering the specific ball entering area. There are a second case in which the special game state is generated after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed since then, and a case in which the special game state is not generated even if the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the specific ball entering area during the predetermined standby state, the special game state does not occur even if the second period is waited after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area. It is possible. In the gaming machine having the feature yV1 described above, in the predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the notifying means is in the non-notifying mode. By searching for the gaming machine in the mode, it is impossible to find out the gaming machine in the predetermined standby state in which execution of the special game state is confirmed. However, in the gaming machine having the characteristic yV1, if the special game state is always generated when the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, a vacant gaming machine is searched and the game of the vacant seat is searched. Execution of a special game state is determined only by taking a seat on the machine and shooting game balls one by one (or several) by hitting with the left hand and allowing one game ball to enter a specific ball entry area. It is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is in a predetermined standby state. For this reason, according to the gaming machine having the feature yV1, one (or several) game balls are sequentially shot to the gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall, and one game ball enters the specific ball entry area. By allowing the player to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state is confirmed, the generation of hyenas (so-called left-shot hyenas) trying to obtain unfair profits from the pachinko machine is prevented. I will allow it. On the other hand, in this feature, one game machine is played by searching for an empty seat, sitting in the game machine with the empty seat, and shooting one (or several) game balls in the first shooting mode. If the ball is only entered into the specific ball entry area, the special game state may not occur even after waiting for the second period after the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. It is not possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of It is difficult to find a pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state whose execution is confirmed. Therefore, according to this feature, by sequentially launching one (or several) game balls to gaming machines with vacant seats in the hall and allowing one game ball to enter the specific ball entry area, a special A pachinko machine in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a game state is fixed is found, and occurrence of a left one-hit hyena trying to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the soundness of the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the first period of the first case, the means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and in the second period of the second case, the same effect as the predetermined effect is executed, A means capable of executing an effect different from a predetermined effect following the effect, and even if the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, the game ball entering the specific ball entering area does not generate a special game state. Since the means for executing the same effect as the predetermined effect after the ball enters, during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed after the game ball enters the specific ball entering area, the first The player cannot discriminate whether it is the case, the second case, or the case when the special game state does not occur, and the player feels a sense of tension such as at what timing the special game state occurs or whether the special game state does not occur. It is possible to make the player have a feeling of disappointment when the special game state does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic yδ group>
The feature yδ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yδ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
The game machine further
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
Even if the special game state can occur based on the game ball being launched in the first shooting mode and the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the recommended shooting mode is the A gaming machine comprising means for not executing an effect (a left gate aiming effect, a left hitting informing effect) for notifying that the first shooting mode (left-handed shooting) is in effect.

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the effect executing means is provided to execute the effect, and the effect executing means is based on the fact that the game ball is shot in the first shooting mode and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. Even if a special game state can occur, the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode. Even if a transition is made to a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state is determined by winning a jackpot in , no performance is executed to inform that the recommended shooting mode is the first shooting mode. For this reason, a game machine executing an effect informing that the recommended firing mode is the first firing mode is found out of the vacant gaming machines, and unfair profits are obtained from the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas trying to do so.

<Characteristic yε group>
The feature yε group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yε1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
The game machine further
When the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the special game state based on the game ball entry into the specific ball entry area A game machine characterized by comprising a round number determination means (the left side round number distribution device 340 in Modification 2) that determines the number of round games in .

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area, the game ball entering the specific ball entry area Based on the provision of the round number determination means for determining the number of round games in the special game state, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry area and the opportunity to open the privilege ball entry means is established, the special game It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to which number of round games will be played in the state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature yζ group>
The feature yζ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature yζ1]
a launching means for launching a game ball;
A game ball can be entered when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left-handed), and a game when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right-handed) A specific ball entry area (left large winning opening operating gate 95, large winning opening operating gate 295 in modification 1) where the ball cannot enter,
A special ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) that allows a game ball to enter when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting);
an informing means (right-handed lamp 39a) capable of becoming an informing mode (lighting mode) for informing that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode;
A special game state (opening and closing execution mode including a large winning opening opening and closing process, ie, a jackpot game) that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is confirmed to be executed in a predetermined standby state (low-probability low support state H1) a non-notification control means for controlling the notification means to a non-notification mode (extinguishing mode) in which the notification is not performed in the standby state H2);
A notification control means for controlling the notification means to the notification mode (lighting mode) during execution of the special game state (opening/closing execution mode including the big winning opening opening/closing process, that is, the jackpot game);
In the predetermined standby state in which the notifying means is controlled in the non-notifying mode (extinguishing mode), an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entering means is established based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area. When the game ball enters the left large winning opening operating gate 95 and the large winning opening operating gate 295, when the opportunity to open the large winning opening 36a is established), predetermined control (large winning special game state generating means for generating the special game state after execution of the control for starting the opening/closing execution mode H3 including the mouth opening/closing process;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game state generating means is
performing a predetermined lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the specific ball entry area, and means for establishing an opportunity for the privilege ball entry means to open when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (for example, left-handed), a specific ball entry area is provided in which the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry area. A special game state is generated after execution of a predetermined control when an opportunity for opening the privilege ball entry means is established based on the entry of a ball. In addition, there is provided an informing means that can be in an informing mode for informing that the recommended shooting mode is the second shooting mode, and execution of a special game state that causes the privilege ball entry means to perform a predetermined opening is provided. In the determined predetermined standby state, the notification means is controlled to the non-notification mode in which the notification is not performed, and during execution of the special game state, the notification means is controlled to the notification mode to perform the notification.

Here, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry area when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode (right hitting), and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode (left hitting). Consider as a comparative example a configuration in which a game ball cannot be entered in the case of a hit (ie, a configuration in which the specific ball entry area is provided in the right game area). In this comparative example, in a predetermined standby state in which the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, the notifying means notifies that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. It becomes a notification mode (lighting mode) in which notification is performed. In the gaming machine of this comparative example, after the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the gaming machine determines the execution of the special game state in which the bonus ball entry means performs a predetermined release. , the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry area, and the state does not transition to the special game state continues. In the gaming machine, the notification means may continue the notification mode to notify that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. In this case, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, in the hall, the notifying means from among the vacant gaming machines is in a notification mode for notifying that the recommended firing mode is the second firing mode. There is a problem of creating a person (commonly known as a hyena) who seeks out a game machine that has a pachinko machine and tries to obtain an unfair profit from the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific ball entry area can enter the game ball when the shooting mode by the shooting means is the first shooting mode, and the shooting mode by the shooting means is the second shooting mode. Since the game ball cannot be entered in the shooting mode (right-handed), in a predetermined standby state in which execution of a special game state in which the privilege ball entry means is made to perform a predetermined release is confirmed, the notification means Control is performed in a non-notification mode in which notification is not performed. Therefore, even in a state where execution of a special game state in which the bonus ball-entering means performs a predetermined opening is confirmed, this state cannot be known from the notification means. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hyenas as described above, and to improve the soundness of the game.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the special game state generating means performs a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry area, and if the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the privilege Since the ball-entering means is provided with the means for establishing the opportunity to open, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of wanting a predetermined result as soon as possible in a predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and performance are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

A game machine such as a slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means. A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

<<3>> Third Embodiment:
<<3-0>> Introduction:
Conventionally, there is a desire to increase the number of balls to be put out other than winning a big win, and in order to meet this demand, it is possible to win a small win with a high probability, and the more the small win is won, the more the game balls in the player's hand are. Pachinko machines have been developed with increasing game states (so-called small win rushes). In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when a small winning is won in a second special lottery during a small winning rush and the variable display of the second special pattern stops at a pattern corresponding to the small winning, The special electric accessory is opened to allow the game ball to enter the big winning hole. That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

Thus, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period such that the small winning rush ends as it is without obtaining the profit from the small winning.

A game machine according to the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as the game machine) aims to solve the above-described problem of the small winning rush. A detailed description will be given below.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "first ball-entering section" as a "first ball-entering area" and a "second ball-entering area" as a "second ball-entering area". a "third ball entry area" as a "third ball entry area"; an "internal lottery" as a "predetermined lottery"; a "specific result" as a "predetermined result"; A "first passage" as a "flow path", a "second passage" as a "second flow path", a "third passage" as a "third flow path", and a "sorting means" ``distribution unit'' as ``switching means'', ``transition processing'' as ``transition means'', and ``variation display part'' as ``variation display means'' , a "setting process" as a "setting means", a "rolling part" as a "rolling means", a "transition condition" as a "predetermined transition condition", and a "predetermined advantageous result" with a “specific favorable outcome” of

The "first ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A second special symbol starting port at which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the ball is hit, and a first special symbol at which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game ball enters. Special figure start gate, normal figure start gate where variable display of normal symbols is executed when game ball enters, general figure where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when game ball enters A winning opening, a big winning opening, a special winning opening, and a special electric starting opening that activates a special electric accessory when a game ball enters.

The "second ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A variable display of the first special symbol is executed when a special prize winning port where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the ball is hit, a general prize winning port, a large winning prize port, or when a game ball enters. The first special figure start opening, the second special figure start opening where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the game ball enters, and the variation display of the normal symbol when the game ball enters Ordinary figure starting gate that will be executed, special electric starting gate that special electric accessories will be activated when the game ball enters, and the like.

The "third ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. When a game ball enters a big winning hole, a special winning hole, a general winning hole, or when a game ball enters, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The first special figure start opening, the second special figure start opening where the second special symbol variation display is executed when the game ball enters, and the normal symbol variation display when the game ball enters Ordinary figure start gate that will be executed, special electric start gate that special electric accessories will be activated when the game ball enters the ball, and the like.

The "predetermined lottery" may be a lottery in which a random number is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the result is determined based on the random number, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. , For example, the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening, the first executed based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening Special figure lottery, normal figure lottery that is executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the normal figure start gate, and the like.

The "predetermined result" may be a result that triggers the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state. If possible, for example, a special figure small hit, a special figure big hit (variable, normal, 2R, 16R, etc.), a general figure hit, and the like.

The 'first flow path', 'second flow path' and 'third flow path' may be passage-like areas in which game balls can flow and which are separated from other areas, which is the gist of the present invention. can be realized, for example, passages formed by nails, passages formed by resin, grooves formed in the game board, space areas where game balls can flow down (fall), etc.

The "distribution means" may distribute game balls to any of a plurality of flow paths, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, game balls can be distributed according to an arrangement pattern of a plurality of game nails. A configuration, a configuration in which game balls are distributed by repeating a certain action, a configuration in which game balls are distributed by operating based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and after a game ball temporarily stays while repeating reciprocating motion, it is placed in multiple places. A retention area (so-called stage) that can flow down from any point, and a rotating disc (so-called cloon) provided with a plurality of holes through which game balls can pass.

The "switching means" may be configured to switch the ball entrance of the ball entry area between the state where the ball can be entered and the state where the ball cannot be entered. Special electric accessories that shift from the closed state to the open state when winning a special small hit or a special jackpot, or a normal electric that shifts from a closed state to an open state when winning a general drawing in a general drawing lottery role, etc. In addition, as a configuration of the special electric accessory and the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a plate-shaped member closing the ball entrance slides in the front and back direction of the game board to open the ball entrance ( shutter type), a configuration in which the plate-shaped member that closes the ball entrance rotates around a rotation axis parallel to the game board, so that the ball entrance can be opened, and the ball entrance is closed. A structure (so-called electric tulip type) that can open the ball entrance by rotating a pair of piece members (blade member, valve member) clockwise or counterclockwise, closing the ball entrance Various configurations can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the entrance can be opened by rotating a piece member (blade member, valve member) clockwise or counterclockwise.

The 'variable display means' may be configured to display (variably display) a state in which predetermined patterns, characters, graphics, symbols, images, etc. fluctuate (change state) for a predetermined period of time. If the gist of can be realized, for example, a second special symbol display unit configured by an LED lamp, a first special symbol display unit, a symbol display device configured by a liquid crystal display device, a normal LED lamp configured by A pattern display part, etc. are mentioned.

The "rolling means" may be any structure as long as it allows the game ball to roll for a predetermined period of time and enter the ball entry area. A plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction (a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board), a plate-shaped member that can rotate around a rotation axis parallel to the game board, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise possible piece members (blade members, valve members), and the like.

The "predetermined transition condition" may be a condition that triggers the transition of the game state, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, winning a probability variable jackpot in the normal game state, or in the normal game state A game ball enters a V fixed winning hole, winning a normal jackpot in a variable probability game state, and performing a special figure variation of a predetermined upper limit number in a time saving game state.

The "predetermined advantageous result" may be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a special figure jackpot (variable, normal, 2R, 16R, etc.), a normal figure hit, etc.

Although the details will be described later, this gaming machine is capable of executing an expectation performance that indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the internal lottery will be a specific advantageous result during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. During execution of the variable display, the switching unit maintains the third ball-entering unit in a non-enterable state, so that the game ball distributed to the first passage can enter the third ball-entering unit. It is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entering portion without the need to enter the ball. In other words, the player can obtain a profit during execution of the variable display in which the expectation effect is executed. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this gaming machine, even though the expectation effect is executed during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery, the player does not win the specific advantageous result in the internal lottery, and the result is disadvantageous to the player. Even if the advantageous game state is ended by winning, the player can acquire many prize balls during the period when the expectation performance is executed, so the advantageous game state is ended. It is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large number of prize balls are paid out immediately before, and to alleviate the player's anger and loss due to the end of the advantageous game state. becomes. Thus, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state where the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the second ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as a third embodiment.

<<3-1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 121 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the third embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a special lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, or at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can "hit to the right". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

122 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the game area PA consists of a left side game area PAL in which game balls fired by "left hitting" can circulate, and a central lower game area PAC in which game balls circulating in the left side game area PAL can reach. , and a right game area PAR in which game balls shot by "right hitting" can circulate.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 32, a first special prize starting port 33, a second special prize starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, a general prize starting gate 35, a first special electric prize winning device 57, and a second special electric winning prize. A device 58, a special winning opening 32s, an out-opening 43, a right-side out-opening 43r, a first sorting nail group 36a, a second sorting nail group 36b, and a stage 36x are provided. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided in the central lower game area PAC where the game ball fired by "left hitting" can reach, and the stage 36x above the first special figure starting port 33 is provided, and in order from the upstream side of the right game area PAR where the game ball fired by "right hitting" can reach, the first special electric winning device 57, the first distribution nail group 36a, the normal figure start gate 35 , a normal electric accessory 34b, a second special figure starting port 34, a second sorting nail group 36b, a right side out port 43r, a second special electric prize winning device 58 and a special winning prize port 32s. Each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entry part having a ball entry hole into which game balls can enter, and five game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls when the game balls enter. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 .

The first special figure start port 33 is a ball entrance portion having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are released from the payout device 71 as prize balls. Along with the payout, the first special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is executed. As a result of the first special drawing lottery, when a special jackpot is won, a special electric opening/closing execution mode in which a special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b) described later executes an opening/closing operation starts. be done. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening and closing process of the special electric accessory is started, the special electric opening and closing period is the period in which the opening and closing of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is the special After the opening and closing process of the electric accessory is completed, it is a waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b is the object of opening/closing operation is started. In this way, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability. In this embodiment, the prize balls (three pieces) paid out when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 are the game balls entering the second special figure starting port 34 described later. It adopts a configuration that is more than the prize balls (one) paid out by.

The first special electric prize winning device 57 includes a first big prize winning port 57a into which a game ball can enter, and a first special electric accessory 57b having a function of opening and closing the entrance of the first big prize winning port 57a. In addition, in the present embodiment, inside the first big winning hole 57a, a V winning hole 57av into which a game ball can enter is provided.

The first special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 57a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a.

In the present embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member and is provided at both ends of the lower side of the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward (front side). and a support that supports the In the closed state, the first special electric accessory 57b is stored so that the plate-like member is flush with the game board 30, and the first special electric accessory 57b flows from above. A game ball can pass through the front side (front side) of the first special electric accessory 57b. On the other hand, in the open state, the plate-like member of the first special electric accessory 57b is rotated forward (front side) around the support portion, and the first special electric accessory 57b A game ball circulating from the above becomes a state in which it can be entered into the first big winning hole 57a.

The first big winning hole 57a is a ball hole into which a game ball can enter when the first special electric accessory 57b is in an open state. Game balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as prize balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first big winning opening 57a.

The V fixed winning opening 57av is an entrance into which a game ball that has entered the first big winning opening 57a can enter. The lottery mode of the special lottery is a high probability mode. The details of the lottery mode of the special figure lottery will be described later.

The first sorting nail group 36a is a nail group for changing the direction of distribution (falling) of game balls, and is provided below the first special electric accessory 57b. The first sorting nail group 36a sorts the arriving game balls into a route leading to the normal figure starting gate 35 and a route leading to the second sorting nail group 36b at a ratio of about 1:4.

The normal pattern start gate 35 is a through-hole type ball entry part having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball that enters the normal pattern start gate 35 remains in the game area PA and can be distributed. is. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main controller 60 executes the normal pattern lottery. As a result of the general drawing lottery, there are "normal drawing hit" that shifts the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter, and "normal drawing off" that does not shift the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter. include. As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern lottery is won, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a transition process for shifting the normal electric accessory 34b to the open state, is executed. The general electric switching execution mode is composed of a general electric opening period, a general electric switching processing period, and a general electric ending period. The general electric opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the general electric opening/closing period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The electric ending period is a standby period after the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessary 34b is completed, until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

A second special figure start port 34 having a normal electric accessory 34b is arranged downstream of the normal figure start gate 35, and a game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 is provided with the normal electric accessory 34b. It is guided to the second special figure starting port 34.

The ordinary electric accessary 34b is a switching part that can switch the second special figure start port 34 between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-unable state (closed state), and causes the game ball to roll for a predetermined period. It has a blade member that is a rolling part that can be made to enter the second special figure starting port 34 by pressing. The ordinary electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second special figure start port 34, and when the above-described ordinary electric open/close execution mode is started, the game ball becomes an open state in which the ball can enter the second special figure starting port 34.

The second special figure starting port 34 is a first ball-entering portion having a ball-entering port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided in the right-side game area PAR in this embodiment. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71, and the second special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is performed. executed. As a result of the second special figure lottery, when the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit as a specific result is won, the above-described special electric opening and closing execution mode is started. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, the special figure off is not set, and only the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit is set. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the special figure big win or special figure small win is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the second special electric accessory 58b is the object of the opening/closing operation is started. In this way, when the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 34, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability. In this embodiment, the second special figure starting port 34 is provided in the right side game area PAR, but the position of the second special figure starting port 34 is not limited to this, and the gist of the present invention is not limited to this. Other locations may be provided if feasible. For example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be provided in the left side game area PAL, or may be provided below the stage 36x in the central lower game area PAC.

The second sorting nail group 36b is a nail group for giving a change to the direction of distribution (falling) of the game balls, and is provided below the second special figure starting port 34. The second sorting nail group 36b is a sorting part that sorts the reached game balls into the first route 36b1 as the first passage and the second route 36b2 as the second passage at a ratio of about 1:2. . The game balls distributed to the first route 36b1 are guided to the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second route 36b2 is guided to the right side out port 43r, enters the game ball, and is discharged from the game area PA.

The second special electric prize winning device 58 includes a second large prize winning port 58a, which is a third ball entering portion having an entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a ball entering state (open state) of the second big prize winning port 58a. ) and a second special electric accessory 58b having a function as a switching unit capable of switching between a ball-entering disabled state (closed state).

The second special electric accessory 58b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 58a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the second big winning hole 58a.

In this embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b includes a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member and a drive section capable of moving the plate-like member in the front-rear direction. In the closed state, the second special electric accessory 58b is in a state in which the plate-like member protrudes forward (front side) of the game board 30, and a game ball can roll on the upper surface of the plate-like member. It is in a state in which a simple rolling part is configured. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is in a state where the plate-like member is housed on the rear side of the game board 30, and rolls on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate-like member. The game ball that was being held or the game ball that circulated (dropped) from above the second special electric accessory 58b can enter the second big winning hole 58a provided below the plate-like member. . In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b. This protrusion reduces the speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b. As a result, the time required for the game ball to roll from the right end to the left end of the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b of this embodiment is 2.0 seconds or longer.

The second big winning hole 58a is a third ball-entering part having a ball-entering hole into which a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in an open state. , two game balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as prize balls. It should be noted that the above-described V guaranteed winning opening is not provided inside the second big winning opening 58a.

The special winning opening 32s is a second ball-entering part having a ball-entering opening into which game balls can enter. In this embodiment, the special prize winning port 32s is provided on the left end side and the downstream side of the second special electric prize winning device 58, and flows through the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state to the left end. Only game balls are allowed to enter. In other words, when the second special electric accessory 58b shifts to the open state while the game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state, the game ball moves downward. , the ball falls into the second big prize-winning hole 58a, cannot reach the special prize-winning hole 32s, and cannot enter the special prize-winning hole 32s.

The out port 43 is provided at the lowest part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. Not only the mode, but also a mode in which the game ball remains in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area and continues to flow (flow down). In addition, general winning opening 32, special winning opening 32s, first special starting opening 33, second special starting opening 34, first big winning opening 57a, second big winning opening 58a and V fixed winning opening 57av In some cases, the entry of the ball is expressed as "winning".

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first special figure display portion 37a, a second special figure display portion 37b, a first special figure reservation display portion 37c, and a second special figure reservation display portion 37d.

The first special symbol display unit 37a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. The first special symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the first special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first special symbol starting port 33 as a trigger. When the first special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. After that, the first special symbol display unit 37a performs stop display of the first special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display section 37a to when it is stopped is also referred to as the first special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the 7-segment display that constitutes the first special symbol display unit 37a flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), then the first special figure lottery lights up (stopped display) in a predetermined mode corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the first special symbol display section 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also referred to as a first special symbol game cycle. That is, the first special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery for each first special figure game round. In addition, the time required for one first special game round is also called the first special game time. The first special symbol game time is the first special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 37a to the stop display of the result of the first special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the first special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the first special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the first special figure stop time is constant (1.0 seconds). Therefore, by determining the first special figure fluctuation time, the first special figure game time is uniquely determined.

The second special symbol display portion 37b is a variable display portion that performs variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second special symbol starting port 34 as a trigger. When the second special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34, the second special symbol display unit 37b displays a display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. After that, the second special symbol display unit 37b performs stop display of the second special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the second special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol display portion 37b is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the 7 segment display device that constitutes the second special figure display part 37b flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), and then the second special figure lottery. Lights up (stops display) in a predetermined manner corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the second special symbol display portion 37b is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also referred to as a second special symbol game cycle. That is, the second special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery for each second special figure game. In addition, the time required for one second special game time is also called the second special game time. The second special symbol game time is the second special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b to the stop display of the result of the second special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the second special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the second special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special figure stop time is constant. Therefore, by determining the second special figure fluctuation time, the second special figure game time is uniquely determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the game ball is the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, it has a function to suspend the execution of the first special figure lottery or the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball (also called special figure reservation function), A first special figure reservation display unit 37c that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations in the first special figure lottery, and a second special figure reservation display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations in the reserved second special figure lottery. 37d.

The first special figure reservation display unit 37c is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special figure lottery that has been reserved (information on the number of game balls entered in the first special figure start port 33). be. In this embodiment, the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is suspended up to four (4 times). In the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation display portion 37c is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 1 lottery lights up.

The second special figure reservation display portion 37d is a display portion that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved second special figure lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is suspended up to four (4 times). In the present embodiment, the second special figure reservation display portion 37d is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 2 lottery lights up.

Further, in the present embodiment, when both the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery are reserved, the second special figure lottery is preferentially executed, and the second special figure lottery is all reserved. It is configured such that the first special figure lottery is executed after the lottery is gone. Specifically, for example, when the first special lottery is held two (twice) and the second special lottery is held three (three times), the second special lottery After being executed three times and no longer held, the first special figure lottery will be executed twice. However, if the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 before the last second special figure lottery that has been withheld ends and the second special figure lottery is suspended again, it will be suspended. The first special figure lottery will not be executed until the second special figure lottery is completed.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display portion 38a and a normal pattern reservation display portion 38b.

The normal symbol display unit 38a is a variable display unit that performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols. The normal symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery, is executed with the entry of a game ball into the normal figure start gate 35 as a trigger. When the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display unit 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. , Performs variable display of normal symbols. After that, the normal symbol display unit 38a performs a normal symbol stop display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to the stop display in the normal symbol display section 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 38a is composed of a 7-segment display device in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the 7-segment display that constitutes the normal pattern display part 38a blinks in a predetermined manner (after the variable display), and corresponds to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. Lights up in a predetermined manner (stops display). However, the normal symbol display section 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal pattern game cycle. That is, the normal game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the normal game lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the normal game start gate 35 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one normal-pattern lottery for each normal-pattern game round. In addition, the time required for one normal game time is also called normal game time. The normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display in the normal pattern display section 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped. It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the displayed time. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal map stop time is constant (0.1 second). Therefore, the normal pattern game time is uniquely determined by the normal pattern fluctuation time being determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball It has a function to suspend execution (also referred to as a normal pattern reservation function), and includes the above-described normal pattern reservation display section 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved general pattern lottery reservations.

The normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the normal pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 pieces (4 times). In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery lights up.

The round display unit 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game means that a predetermined time (maximum open time) has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls entered) of game balls enter the big winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games differs according to the type per special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display unit 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening/closing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening/closing period. In this embodiment, the round display unit 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment displays in which 7 segment light-emitting units are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. However, the round display section 39 is not limited to the two 7-segment displays, and may have another configuration.

Each display unit constituting the main display unit 45 described above is not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light-emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices, such as a matrix display, capable of showing the draw process and the draw results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display) is employed as the pattern display device 41 . The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100 which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display), and various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT may be employed.

When the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is displayed variably and stopped, the symbol display device 41 variably displays the decorative symbols accordingly. and stop display. In addition, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols, and also displays various effects such as advance notice effects and effects during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the decorative pattern and the pattern display device 41 which are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. FIG. 123(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 123B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a. As a modified example, a sub-display area SA, which is smaller than the main display area MA, may be displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns with numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 123(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design is displayed in a stationary state on the active line L1 for each decorative design row.

In this embodiment, the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol display part 37a or the second special symbol display part 37b When the variable display of the two special symbols is started, the variable display in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each decorative design to be scrolled is switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative design row Z1, decorative design row Z3, and decorative design row Z2. After that, in synchronization with the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display part 37a or the second special symbol display part 37b, one for each of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed. When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery by the main control device 60 is a special big hit, when the variable display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row is finished and the display is stopped. Then, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The manner of variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative design row is not limited to the above-described manner, but includes the number of decorative design rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of decorative designs in each decorative design row, and the Various modes can be adopted as modes of variable display of decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be described. Reach means the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to winning is formed on the activated line L1 in some of the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It means a display state in which a certain combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and in this state, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the win refers to the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1, and in the state in which the reach line is formed, the decorative patterns are scrolled (variably displayed) in the decorative pattern row Z2. ) state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern forming the reach line is stop-displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the decorative patterns are displayed in the remaining decorative pattern row in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform the ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, a combination of decorative patterns formed with reach lines is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to produce a reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 123(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first special figure reservation display area Ds1 and a second special figure reservation display area Ds2.

In the first special figure reservation display area Ds1, the number of the first special figure lotteries reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 (number of reserved first special figure lotteries) is displayed. be done. The pending first special drawing lottery is the first special drawing drawing that has not been executed, and the first special drawing that has not started the variable display of the first special drawing for informing the result of the drawing of the first special drawing drawing. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of first special figure lotteries that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved first special figure lotteries.

In the second special figure reservation display area Ds2, the number of second special figure lotteries (the number of reserved second special figure lotteries) that are reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is displayed. be done. The second special lottery pending is the second special lottery that has not been executed, and the second special lottery that has not started the variable display of the second special symbol for informing the lottery result of the second special lottery. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of second special figure lotteries that can be reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved second special figure lotteries.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123(B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, blinking display and The first special figure synchronization display unit Sync1 that performs lighting display and the second special figure synchronization that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol displayed in the second special symbol display unit 37b and a display unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed in the first special symbol display portion 37a, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync1 blinks and displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol display portion 37b, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync2 blinks and the second special symbol stops in the second special symbol display portion 37b. When displaying, the special figure synchronous display unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a first special figure reservation display area Ds1, a second special figure reservation display area Ds2, and a first special figure synchronization display section Sync1. , And, although the second special figure synchronous display part Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

Below the pattern display device 41, a stage 36x is provided. The stage 36x is composed of a rolling stage 36x1 and a distribution stage 36x2. The rolling stage 36x1 is a downstream part that rolls and flows down game balls toward the sorting stage 36x2. The distribution stage 36x2 is a distribution section capable of distributing game balls to at least a central route, a right route and a left route, and is a portion that directly affects the distributed game balls as a result. In this embodiment, when distributing game balls, the distribution stage 36x2 is configured to distribute more game balls to the right route and the left route than to the central route. That is, the total number of game balls distributed to the right route and the game balls distributed to the left route is larger than the number of game balls distributed to the central route. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided below the distribution stage 36x2, and the game balls distributed to the central route are likely to enter the first special figure starting port 33. . Therefore, the central route is more valuable to the player than the right and left routes. In the present embodiment, the sorting stage 36x2 is made of resin and adopts a configuration that does not operate. Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described out port 43, which does not pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters the position where the game ball distributed to the right route or the left route by the distribution stage 36x2 can enter, is provided. is provided. In addition, there is a case where the game ball distributed to the central route by the distribution stage 36x2 does not enter either the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the sorting stage 36x2 is configured to have three routes, namely, the central route as the first passage, the right route as the second passage, and the left route as the third passage. Alternatively, the left route (or right route) may be omitted, and more game balls may be distributed to the right route (or left route) than to the central route when distributing game balls. . Also in this configuration, the game balls distributed to the central route are more likely to enter the first special figure starting port 33, so the central route is more valuable to the player than the right route (or left route). is high.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 34b is set to the non-enterable state during execution of the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure start port 34. , The game balls distributed to the central route by the distribution stage 36x2 are, regardless of the state of the normal electric accessory 34b and each special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b and second special electric accessory 58b), It is possible to enter the first special figure start opening 33 having an entrance opening whose upper surface is open. According to this configuration, for example, when the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure start port 34 during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol, or the number of reservations of the second special figure lottery is the maximum value (4 pieces) and there is no profit even if the game ball is entered into the second special figure start port 34, the player aims at the first special figure start port 33 to shoot the game ball. becomes possible. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of always aiming for a profit by appropriately hitting different game balls according to the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general figure start gate 35, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure start port 34 are provided on the upper side of the distribution stage 36x2 (in other words, the distribution stage 36x2 is The configuration provided below the normal figure start gate 35, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure start port 34) was adopted, but instead of this configuration, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure A configuration in which the starting port 34 is provided on the lower side of the distribution stage 36x2 may be adopted, and the game ball distributed to the right route by the distribution stage 36x2 may reach the normal electric accessory 34b. . According to this configuration, even if the game ball is distributed to the right route by the distribution stage 36x2, if the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state, the game ball is transferred to the second special figure start port 34 Since there is a possibility that the ball will hit the ball at the time, it is possible to give the player a further chance and improve the interest in the game.

<<3-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the detection sensors provided for each of the above-described various entrances. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from these detection sensors. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, and the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. Run a special draw.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are the main display unit 45, the first special electric accessory driving unit 57c for opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b, and the second special electric accessory driving unit 57c for opening and closing the second special electric accessory 58b. 2 The special electric accessory drive unit 58c and the normal electric accessory drive unit 34c for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 34b are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, when the first special figure lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first special symbol display portion 37a in the main display portion 45, and when the second special figure lottery is performed , the display control of the second special symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45 is performed, and when the normal figure lottery is performed, the display control of the normal symbol display portion 38a in the main display portion 45 is performed, and the special electric opening and closing execution When the mode is executed, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed. Further, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives the first special electric role product 57c or the second special electric role product driving unit 57c or the second special electric role product drive so that the first special electric role product 57b or the second special electric role product 58b is opened and closed. The drive control of the unit 58c is executed, and in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, the drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 34c is executed so that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and closed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . The main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls set for each ball entrance based on the ball entry determination result to the payout controller 70 . When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns that are finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, the content of ready-to-win presentation, and the content of presentation to be executed while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game cycle, is uniquely determined by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in the RAM 64. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the RAM 64 is provided with various counters used for internal lottery by the MPU 62 . Specifically, in this embodiment, the RAM 64 includes a special figure validity determination counter Cs1, a special figure type determination counter Cs2, a special figure reach determination counter Cs3, a special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and a general figure validity determination counter Cs1. A decision counter Cn1, a normal figure type decision counter Cn2, and a random number initial value counter Cini are provided. The special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used when determining the lottery result of the special figure lottery. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used for the special figure reach determination to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 are varied. Also, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b. In addition, the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 are used for the general pattern lottery. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial value when the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4 and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

Moreover, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure reservation area 64b, a special figure determination area 64c, a general figure reservation area 64d, and a general figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entrance ball It is stored in time series in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the special figure success judgment counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry ball, the special figure Each value of the figure type determination counter Cs2 and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in time series in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 at the timing of the entry are stored in time series in the normal pattern reservation area 64d. be.

Next, the details of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not to win the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure success/failure determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. Special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1. Incidentally, the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 65535).

The value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entering ball is a special figure. It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the reservation area 64b. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

Each time a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, up to four values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 are stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b. Similarly, the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and is moved to the special figure determination area 64c in the order in which it was stored. Then, the value of the special figure judgment counter Cs1 moved to the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the special figure is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of this special symbol, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is updated periodically, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the value of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the above-described special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 in the order in which they are stored.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure validity determination using the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64e. Then, from among a plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure propriety determination is selected, and a special figure determination area 64e The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of special symbol. And MPU62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator which the special design display part 38a stops and displays based on the classification of the determined special design.

Next, the details of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 will be described. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used when determining whether or not the reach occurs when the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is not per special figure. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is periodically updated, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the values of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special figure success determination counter Cs1 and special figure type determination It is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b together with the value of the counter Cs2.

The value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the values of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 described above in order of being stored.

MPU62, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit in the special figure propriety determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM63 It is compared with the special figure reach determination table, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. In addition, when the result of the special figure propriety determination in the special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the MPU 62 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is acquired immediately before the start of the special symbol variation display. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, the details of the general/universal pattern right/wrong determination counter Cn1 will be described. The general pattern success/failure determination counter Cn1 is used to determine whether or not to be elected per general pattern. The general pattern success determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per this general pattern, is part of the general pattern lottery described above. The normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1.

The normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d at the timing of the passage.

Each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, up to four values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and are moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 moved to the general pattern determination area 64e is collated with the general pattern correctness determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the general pattern is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the normal pattern type. The normal pattern type determination, which is the determination of the type of normal pattern, is part of the normal pattern lottery described above. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored in the general pattern holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 described above is stored in the order of storage. It moves to the normal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern validity determination. Then, from among a plurality of general pattern type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one general pattern type determination table corresponding to the result of the general pattern propriety determination is selected, and a general pattern determination area 64e is selected. The value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general pattern type determination table, and the normal pattern type is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a based on the determined normal symbol type.

Next, the special figure propriety determination table will be described.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values within the range from 0 to 65535 in the special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1 be done. Then, according to the acquired value of the special figure success determination counter Cs1 and the special figure success determination table, the special figure success determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is performed. done.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low probability mode with a low probability of winning the special figure jackpot as a lottery mode for special figure win/loss determination (special figure lottery), and a probability of winning the special figure jackpot higher than the low probability mode. It is configured to be able to execute a high probability mode and a special figure lottery table for the low probability mode used in the special figure lottery in the low probability mode, and a special figure lottery in the high probability mode. It is equipped with a special figure propriety determination table for high probability mode. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, different special figure propriety determination tables are provided for the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery. That is, in this embodiment, the following four types of special figure propriety determination tables are provided as the special figure propriety determination tables used in the special figure lottery.
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)

In the first special figure determination table (for low probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the low probability mode, 0 654 values from 653 to 653 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to be special figure out. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/100.2 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

In the second special figure determination table (for low probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the low probability mode, 0 654 values from to 653 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to win the special figure small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success judgment) in the low probability mode is about 1/100.2 probability that the special figure jackpot will be won, and the special figure jackpot will be won. If you do not win, you will win a special prize.

In the first special figure determination table (for high probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the high probability mode, 0 655 values from to 654 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to be special figure out. That is, in the present embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode, the special figure jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/100.1.

In the second special figure determination table (for high probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the high probability mode, 0 655 values from to 654 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to win the special figure small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure suitability determination) in the high probability mode is about 1/100.1 probability of winning the special figure jackpot, and the special figure jackpot If you do not win, you will win a special prize.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values in the range from 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2 be done. Then, special figure type determination for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is performed based on the result of the above-described special figure propriety determination and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment comprises a first special figure type determination table used in the first special figure lottery and a second special figure type determination table used in the second special figure lottery.

As shown in FIG. 127, according to the first special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure success/failure determination is the special figure jackpot winning, the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 Regardless, the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is determined to be a special symbol A (2R probability variation jackpot), and if the result of the special figure propriety determination is out of the special figure, the acquired special figure type determination Regardless of the value of the counter Cs2, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined to be the special symbol Z (out).

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, according to the second special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure success/failure determination is a special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is If the value is from 0 to 98, the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is determined to be special symbol B (2R normal jackpot), and the result of the special symbol win/no determination is the special jackpot winning, and acquired. If the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is 99, the special symbol type (stop symbol type) is determined as a special symbol C (16R probability variation big hit), and the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is a special figure In the case of winning a small hit, regardless of the value of the acquired special symbol type determination counter Cs2, the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is determined to be a special symbol a (small hit).

Of the special design types (types of stop design), special design A (2R probability variation jackpot), special design B (2R normal jackpot), special design C (16R probability variation jackpot) and special design a (small hit) are common in that they trigger the execution of the special electric switching execution mode, but differ in the type of the special electric switching scenario selected when the special electric switching execution mode is executed.

The special electric switching scenario is a control program that stores the mode of control of the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b in the special electric switching execution mode. The mode of opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switching scenario selection table. The special electric opening/closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of the special symbol when winning the special figure jackpot or the special figure small prize.

As shown in FIG. 128, in the special electric switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment, a special electric switching scenario A is set corresponding to the special symbol A, and a special electric switching scenario B is set corresponding to the special symbol B. A special electric switching scenario C is set corresponding to the special symbol C, and a special electric switching scenario a is set corresponding to the special symbol a. That is, if the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol A, the special electric opening and closing scenario A is selected when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, and the special figure If the special figure jackpot is won in the success/failure determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is a special symbol B, the special electric opening/closing scenario B is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the special figure in the special determination When the figure jackpot is won and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol C, the special electric opening and closing scenario C is selected when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, If you win and the result of the special symbol type determination is a special symbol a, the special electric opening/closing scenario a will be selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed twice (two rounds). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. or the maximum number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 57a is satisfied. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 1.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. The ball is entered into the provided V winning prize opening 57av. In this case, the lottery mode after the completion of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is the high probability mode.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.1 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed twice (two rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 2.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 0.1 second. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.1 seconds is started.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. or the maximum number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 57a is satisfied. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 1.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. The ball is entered into the provided V winning prize opening 57av. In this case, the lottery mode after the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C is the high probability mode.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario a is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.1 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 1.8 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.1 seconds is started.

Next, the normal figure right/wrong determination table will be described.

FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the general-purpose suitability determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. Then, according to the obtained value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern correctness determination table, the general pattern correctness determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the general pattern correctness determination table of the present embodiment, 65535 values of 0 to 65534 out of 65536 values of 0 to 65535 of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are per normal pattern. It is set as a value that will be elected, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination is elected per general pattern with a probability of 1/1.0000153.

The "universal map hit" is a judgment result that triggers the start of the general electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the normal pattern" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal switching execution mode.

Next, the normal figure classification determination table is demonstrated.

FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2. Then, based on the obtained value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness determination, and the general pattern type determination table, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined Normal pattern type determination is performed.

As shown in FIG. 130, according to the general figure type determination table of the present embodiment, if the result of the general figure correctness determination is the winning per general figure, regardless of the value of the acquired general figure type determination counter Cn2 First, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined to be normal pattern A (per normal pattern), and if the result of the normal pattern right or wrong determination is normal pattern out, the acquired normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 Regardless of the value of , the type of normal design (type of stop design) is determined to be normal design Z (normal design out).

Among the types of normal patterns (types of stop patterns), the normal pattern A (per normal pattern) triggers the execution of the normal switching execution mode, and the normal switching scenario is executed when the normal switching execution mode is executed. loaded. The general electric switching scenario is a control program in which the manner of control of the general electric accessory 34b in the general electric switching execution mode is stored.

Next, the normal switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal switching scenario selection table. The normal switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when winning per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 131, normal switching scenarios A corresponding to normal symbols A are set in the normal switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment. That is, in the general pattern correctness determination, when the general pattern is won and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern A, the general pattern opening and closing scenario A is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed. It will be. The details of the normal switching scenario A will be described below.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario A is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 0.01 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. During the normal voltage switching period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for one time is set to 1.0 second. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 0.01 seconds is started.

It should be noted that, in the following description, for example, winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure propriety determination, and the fact that it was determined as a special symbol A (2R probability variation jackpot) in the special figure type determination, "2R probability variation jackpot in the special figure lottery It is also expressed as "I was elected." Also, for example, it is expressed as "per normal pattern lottery was elected in general pattern lottery" that it was elected per normal pattern in general pattern propriety determination and was determined as normal pattern A in normal pattern type determination.

<<3-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 132 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

A sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 that is a computing device that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal. and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98 to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 97 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 97 reads corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the production operation buttons 24 , and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives signals indicating the operation modes of the production operation buttons 24 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<3-4>> Overview of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment:
Next, the outline of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Below, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG. 122 described above.

The normal state F1 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Generally, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player starts playing is the normal state F1. In the normal state F1 in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the player adjusts the launch intensity so that the game ball enters the first special figure start hole 33 provided in the lower center of the game board 30. The operation handle 25 is operated to shoot a game ball (to hit left). When the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described first special symbol lottery, and changes the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 37a. start the display. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 displays the decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the start of the variable display of the first special symbols in the first special symbol display section 37a. to start the fluctuating display of

After that, when the set first special figure fluctuation time elapses, the main control device 60 displays the first special figure that is fluctuating in the first special figure display section 37a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. , and the sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. The player confirms the display mode of the first special symbol stop-displayed in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the display mode of the decorative symbol stop-displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41. It is possible to recognize the lottery result of 1 special figure lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the main display area MA are displayed in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is stopped and displayed in the same display mode (for example, "777"). On the other hand, when the result of the first special figure lottery is a special figure out, the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the main display area MA are displayed so that the numbers of the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (not aligned). Stop display in a mode (for example, "135").

In the normal state F1, the player repeatedly enters the game ball into the first special figure starting port 33 while expecting to win the special figure jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot) in the first special figure lottery.

Here, the case where the player hits to the right in this normal state F1 without following the normal flow of the game will be described below. As a case where the player hits to the right in the normal state F1, for example, when the player tries to hit to the right in the normal state F1 to see if there is any profit from the pachinko machine 10 (trying to capture the pachinko machine 10). ), or unintentionally turning the operating handle 25 to the right by a large amount, thereby unintentionally hitting to the right.

In the normal state F1, when the player hits to the right, the game ball shot toward the right game area PAR passes through the front side of the first special electric prize winning device 57 in the closed state, and the first sorting peg group 36a. to reach The game balls reaching the first sorting nail group 36a are sorted at a ratio of about 1:4 into a route leading to the normal pattern start gate 35 and a route leading to the second sorting nail group 36b which is the sorting part. . More specifically, in this embodiment, 100 game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 per minute, and about 5 minutes out of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR Approximately 20 game balls, which is 1, enter the normal figure start gate 35, and about 80 game balls, which is about 4/5, reach the second sorting nail group 36b which is the sorting part. . And, in this embodiment, the probability of winning per normal figure lottery is set to 65534/65535, and the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 0.01 seconds regardless of the result of the general figure lottery, The general pattern opening period in the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is set to 0.01 seconds, the opening time in the general pattern opening and closing period is set to 1.0 seconds, and the general pattern ending period is set to 0.01 seconds. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the normal figure starting gate 35 to reach the normal electric accessory 34b is about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, at the timing when the game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 reaches the normal electric accessory 34b with a probability of almost 100%, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 as it is. It will be.

The game balls reaching the second sorting nail group 36b are sorted to the first route 36b1 as the first passage and the second route 36b2 as the second passage at a ratio of about 1:2. The game balls distributed to the first route 36b1 are guided to the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second route 36b2 is guided to the right side out port 43r, enters the game ball, and is discharged from the game area PA. More specifically, in this embodiment, about 27 game balls, which is about one-third, out of about 80 game balls that reach the second sorting nail group 36b in one minute are the second special electric About 53 game balls, which are about two-thirds, are led to the right end side of the winning device 58, are led to the right side outlet 43r, enter, and are discharged from the game area PA.

In summary, in the normal state F1, when the player hits to the right, about 20 game balls out of 100 game balls fired in one minute enter the second special figure start port 34, and about 27 game balls reach the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58, and the remaining about 53 game balls are discharged from the game area PA.

Here, in this embodiment, in the normal state F1, the second special figure fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, is a very short time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second short fluctuation time) is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, "out" is not set as the result of the second special lottery. be elected. Therefore, when the player hits to the right in the normal state F1, the second special figure lottery is repeated in a short period of time, the special figure small winning as a specific result frequently occurs, and the special electric opening/closing based on the special figure small winning. The execution mode is frequently executed, and the transition process for shifting the second special electric accessory 58b to the open state is frequently executed.

In the normal state F1, the game ball reaching the right end side of the second special electric prize device 58 rolls toward the left end side on the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state. Thus, in this embodiment, the second special electric role 58b, which is a switching unit, is frequently opened, so that the second special electric role before the game ball rolls to the left end and reaches the special winning opening 32s When the object 58b is released, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a and does not enter the special winning hole 32s. In other words, in the normal state F1, even if the player hits to the right, the second special electric accessory 58b, which is the switching unit, is frequently opened so that the game ball enters the special winning hole 32s. will be hindered.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the second special figure start hole 34 is set to one, and when the game ball enters the second big prize hole 58a, The number of awarded balls to be paid out is set to two. Therefore, when 100 game balls are fired toward the right side game area PAR in one minute, about 20 game balls out of 100 enter the second special figure starting port 34, and about 27 The game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a, and as a result, about 74 game balls are paid out as prize balls. That is, in the normal state F1, even if the player hits to the right, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (=about 74) is greater than the number of game balls fired (=100). There is no merit for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the types of special figure jackpots set in the second special figure lottery, 99% of the distribution is the 2R normal jackpot, and only 1% is the 16R variable jackpot. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the 2R normal jackpot is about 10, in the second special lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 Even if the special figure jackpot is won and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed with a probability of 99%, the player cannot increase the number of game balls in his hand. In addition, even if the special figure jackpot is won in the second special lottery, the probability of being distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot is 1%, so the player hits right in the normal state F1 in anticipation of winning the 16R probability variable jackpot. However, the number of game balls fired until winning the 16R variable jackpot is greater than the expected value (profit) of the prize balls obtained by winning the 16R variable jackpot (loss is greater ), the player cannot increase the number of game balls in his/her possession.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that even if the player hits to the right in the normal state F1, the number of game balls on hand cannot be increased, and there is no merit for the player.

Returning to the description of the case where the player hits left in the normal state F1.

In the normal state F1, when the player hits to the left and the game ball enters the first special figure start hole 33, and the first special figure lottery is executed to win the 2R probability variable jackpot, the game state of the pachinko machine 10. , shifts to the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot. In this embodiment, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b of the first special electric prize winning device 57 opens twice. Further, when the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot is started, the sound emission control device 90 starts the right hitting notification process. The right hitting notification process is a process for prompting the player to hit right. In this embodiment, an image combining a character string "right hitting" and an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a process of displaying the display and outputting a voice such as "Right shot!" from the speaker 46. FIG. The player who recognizes that he/she should "hit right" by the right-handed informing process makes it possible to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 57a and win the prize ball by hitting right. .

Furthermore, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, so the player can enter the game ball into the V winning opening 57av in the first big winning opening 57a. When the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot becomes the high probability mode, while the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av. When the ball is not hit, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot becomes the low probability mode, and the state shifts to the normal state F1 again. That is, in the normal state F1, when the transition condition is satisfied that the 2R probability variable jackpot is won and the game ball enters the V probability winning opening 57av, the transfer to the high probability state F3 via the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 will do. Below, the case where the game ball enters the V fixed winning prize opening 57av in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot will be described.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot ends, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state F3 in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode.

Since the high-probability state F3 is a game state in which hitting to the right is more advantageous for the player than hitting to the left, the sound emission control device 90 executes the above-described hitting to the right notification process. When the player recognizes that he/she should "hit to the right" by the right-handed notification process and hits to the right, about 20 out of 100 game balls shot in one minute are shot, as in the case of the above-described normal state F1. The number of game balls enter the second special figure starting port 34, and about 27 game balls reach the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58. - 特許庁

In the high probability state F3, the second special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is generally longer than the normal state F1 (20 seconds to 180 seconds long variation time in this embodiment ) is executed. During the variation of the second special symbol, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the jackpot winning or the small winning winning does not occur, and the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state, so the second in the high certainty state F3 The second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state longer than the normal state F1. Then, the game ball that reaches the right end side of the second special electric role winning device 58 and rolls toward the left end side on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric role product 58b in the closed state is the second special electric role product. If the closed state of 58b is maintained for two seconds or more without being opened, the ball will not enter the second big winning hole 58a but will enter the special winning hole 32s.

That is, in the high-probability state F3, the longer the period in which the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state, the more the game balls reaching the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58 enter the special prize winning opening 32s. The number of entering game balls increases. In other words, the longer the second special figure fluctuation time set in the high probability state F3, the longer the period during which the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closure, so the special winning opening 32s is entered. The number of game balls increases. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the special winning hole 32s is set to 15 pieces. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the longer the second special figure fluctuation time set in the high probability state F3, the more prize balls the player can win.

In addition, even in the high probability state F3, the second special figure fluctuation time has elapsed, and as a result of the second special figure lottery, the special figure small hit that is the specific result is elected, and the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed, the transition processing for shifting the second special electric accessory 58b to the open state is executed, so the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state is turned to the left end side. The game ball that rolls is entered into the second big winning hole 58a and is not entered into the special winning hole 32s.

Then, in the high probability state F3, when the second special figure fluctuation time elapses and the 2R normal jackpot is won as a result of the second special lottery, the high probability state F3 ends and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes to 2R. It shifts to the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 based on a normal jackpot.

In the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 based on the 2R normal jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened twice, but the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a is two. , the player cannot win many prize balls.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 ends, the state shifts to the above-described normal state F1. The player returns from right-handed to left-handed, enters the game ball into the first special figure starting port 33, and plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot again.

On the other hand, in the high probability state F3, when the second special figure fluctuation time elapses and the 16R probability variable jackpot is won as a result of the second special lottery, the high probability condition F3 ends and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes 16R. It shifts to the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the probability variable jackpot.

In the special electric opening/closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b of the first special electric prize winning device 57 is opened 16 times. It is possible to enter a game ball into the ball and win many prize balls.

Furthermore, in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, so the player enters the game ball into the V fixed prize winning port 57av in the first big winning prize port 57a. can be made When a game ball enters the V definite winning prize opening 57av, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R definite variable jackpot becomes the high probability mode, and shifts to the high definite state F3 again. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the V definite winning prize opening 57av, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R definite variable jackpot becomes the low probability mode, and shifts to the normal state F1.

Thus, in the present embodiment, winning the special jackpot in the high-probability state F3 and being distributed to the 2R normal jackpot is an advantageous state (high-probability It means that the state F3) is terminated. On the other hand, winning the special figure jackpot in the high probability state F3 and being distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot means that many prize balls can be won in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, and many Since the state (high-probability state F3) that is advantageous to the player who can win the prize ball continues, it means that the player who can obtain the most profit will get the best result. However, in this embodiment, only 1% of the cases where the special figure jackpot is won in the second special figure lottery can be distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot, so the player positively special figures in the high probability state F3. Do not wish to win the jackpot, continue the high probability state F3 as long as possible without winning the special figure jackpot, and set the second special figure fluctuation time as long as possible to conduct the second special figure lottery. The game is played while expecting that the result will be a special prize, and that if the special prize is won, the 2R normal jackpot will be distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Next, effects that can be executed in the above-described high-probability state F3 and information and images that can be displayed on the pattern display device 41 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the expectation degree production suggesting the degree of expectation whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot, which is the specific advantageous result, will occur. is configured to be executable. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134(A), as a ready-to-win effect, it is possible to execute a battle effect in which a female character representing the player and a pirate character representing the enemy fight. is. It should be noted that even during the execution of the battle effect as the ready-to-win effect, the above-described right-handed notification processing is executed, and the character string "Right-handed" and the rightward arrow are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Image GD1 is displayed. The same is true during execution of other effects executed in the high-probability state F3 described below.

Then, when winning the 16R probability variable jackpot advantageous to the player, after the battle production, as a battle result production to announce the result of the battle (lottery result), a battle victory production to announce that the battle has been won. is executed (Fig. 134 (B)), and when the player wins the 2R normal jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, a battle defeat effect for announcing that the player has lost the battle is executed as the battle result effect (Fig. 134 (C )), when winning a special prize that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, a battle draw effect (Fig. 134 (D)) is executed to notify that the battle has ended in a draw as a battle result effect. .

Thus, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ready-to-win production, which is the expectation production that suggests the expectation of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot, which is the specific advantageous result, will occur, is executed. Since it is configured to be possible, the player is expected to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the high probability state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable big win occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. , and the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, so the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 A ball cannot be entered into the special winning opening 58a, but can be entered into the special winning opening 32s. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high probability state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, is configured to be executable. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135, as a countdown effect, an effect of displaying an image G1 showing the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends is executed. By executing this countdown effect, the player is suggested the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning hole 32s. can be done. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, a favorable state for the player is during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set for a long variable time. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to understand it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variation time is set, the opportunity suggesting effect which is an effect suggesting that the player is in a favorable state is configured to be executable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135, for example, a female character image G2 and a character string G3 such as "Throw in a lot of balls during fluctuations! It's your chance to win prize balls!" is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol with the long variable time set is the best opportunity for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 32s is counted instead of the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 58a. important to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability state F3, it is possible to display information about the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 32s. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135, the number of game balls entered into the special winning hole 32s after shifting to the high probability state F3 and the prize balls obtained by the game balls entering the special winning hole 32s is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the important special winning hole 32s.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, not only the lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol, but also how long the period of the variable display of the second special symbol is. It is important for the player whether it continues. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability state F3, step-up effect 1 is executed during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and step-up effect 2 can be executed continuously after step-up effect 1. It is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136(A), as step-up effect 1, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a female character image G5 and a character string G6 such as "Step 1! How long will this change last?" At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(B), as a step-up effect 2, the character display device 41 is caused to display a character image G7 of a whale and a character string G8 such as "Step 2! This fluctuation will continue!" An effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed for the player, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and the variable display of the second special symbol is still continued. It can give you a feeling of hope.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set. There is a high probability state F3, but the difference between these game states is only the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and the normal electric accessory 34b of the present embodiment is in the game state Therefore, the player cannot easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state F1 or the high-probability state F3. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and the second special figure variation time The background image for the high-precision state F3 can be displayed in the high-probability state F3 in which a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as. Specifically, for example, as the background image for the normal state F1, it is possible to display the background image of the blue sea, and as the background image for the high probability state F3, it is possible to display the background image of the red sea. be. Therefore, the player can easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state F1 or the high probability state F3.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, it is not advantageous to the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a state (open state) where balls can be entered, but it is disadvantageous. That's what it is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the second special electric accessory 58b puts the second big winning hole 58a in the ball-enterable state (open state), the second big prize-winning hole 58a is in the ball-enterable state ( Since the effect suggesting that the second big winning hole 58a will be in an open state) is not executed, the player misunderstands that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered. You can avoid giving

As described above, according to the present embodiment, each ball entry portion is appropriately arranged, and the length of the period set as the variable display time is appropriately controlled, so that the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible. Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush.

In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the variable display of the second special symbol stops during the small winning rush, and when a small winning is won in the second special drawing lottery corresponding to the variable display, a special The electric accessory is opened and the game ball can be entered into the big winning hole. That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

In this way, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop the game. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period that the small winning rush ends as it is without being able to obtain the profit from the small winning.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state, so the game distributed to the first route 36b1 The ball cannot enter the second big winning hole 58a, but can enter the special winning hole 32s. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even though the ready-to-win effect has been executed, the special figure jackpot advantageous to the player in the second special figure lottery (16R probability variable jackpot where there is a ball output and the rush continues) is won. However, even if the player wins a special jackpot (2R normal jackpot where there is no ball and the rush ends) and the high-probability state F3 ends, the ready-to-win effect is executed. Since the player can win a large number of prize balls during the period of stay, the player can be given a feeling of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large amount of prize balls are paid out just before the end of the high-probability state F3. It is possible to relieve the player's anger and sense of loss at the end of the high-probability state F3. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the advantage of the player (the number of prize balls that the player can acquire) changes depending on the length of the set second special figure fluctuation time. be able to. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the longer the variation time set as the second special figure variation time, the greater the number of prize balls that the player can obtain. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new feeling of expectation that a long variation time should be set as the second special figure variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, maintaining the closed state of the second special electric accessory 58b is an event advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a conventional general pachinko machine, winning a small prize and releasing a special electric accessory is an event that is advantageous to the player. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the events that are advantageous to the player are reversed from the conventional ones.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not have a function that allows simultaneous variation (so-called simultaneous variation function), it is possible for the player to win a large number of prize balls. A game state (so-called rush) can be realized. A pachinko machine with a simultaneous variation function has problems such as complicating the control and how to handle the remaining hold after the end of the rush. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that these problems do not occur.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability state F3 are prize balls based on the gaming balls entering the special winning hole 32s. In other words, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability state F3 are not prize balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the values of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio of the pachinko machine 10, and to widen the range of the number of prize balls that can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Become.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, many game balls that have reached the second sorting nail group 36b are sorted to the second route 36b2, which has a lower value for the player than the first route 36b1. On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the second sorting nail group 36b are sorted to the first route 36b1, which is higher in value for the player than the second route 36b2, and the second special route, which is higher in value for the player. It reaches the electric accessory 58b. Therefore, many game balls reaching the second sorting nail group 36b end up reaching the second special electric accessory 58b, which is of high value to the player, resulting in a situation that is excessively advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

And, according to the present embodiment, when the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is the special figure small hit, The game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the non-enterable state (closed state) is before the game ball completely rolls on the plate-shaped member. After a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) has passed, the second special electric accessory 58b enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s. Can not do it. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the second big winning hole 58a is two, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a without reaching the special winning hole 32s. If so, the player has little profit.

On the other hand, if a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special figure small hit, the ball cannot be entered (closed state), the game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b is set on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It rolls all the way to reach the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 32s. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the special winning opening 32s is 15, the game ball rolls on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b and ends up in the special winning opening 32s. If the ball hits the , the player can get a lot of profit.

Thus, according to this embodiment, according to the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 can not reach the special winning opening 32s It is possible to create a situation in which a ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and a situation in which a ball reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s and enters the special prize-winning hole 32s. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and as described later, when the game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, By adopting a configuration that is more advantageous for the player than when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, a new feeling of wanting a longer period to be set as the second special figure fluctuation display time is generated. It can be held by the player, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the prize balls (15 pieces) paid out when the game balls enter the special winning hole 32s are the prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a ( 2) is adopted. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In the normal state F1 immediately after the start of the game, when the player hits to the right aiming at the second splitting nail group 36b, a short variation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time. Therefore, the launched game ball does not enter the special winning hole 32s, but enters the second big winning hole 58a. However, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls (two) paid out when the game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a are the prizes paid out when the game balls enter the special winning hole 32s. Since the number of balls is less than 15 balls, the player cannot increase the number of game balls in his/her hand, and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal state F1 immediately after the start of the game, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the second split nail group 36b to the right.

On the other hand, in the high probability state F3 in which a long variation time (20 seconds to 120 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 reaches the special winning opening 32s It becomes possible to enter the special winning hole 32s. According to this embodiment, more prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the special winning hole 32s than when game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. Since it is advantageous to , it is possible to make the player have a new feeling of wanting a longer period to be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distributing portion for distributing the game balls to the first route 36b1 and the second route 36b2 is configured as the second distributing nail group 36b, which is a collection of nails that are inoperative objects that do not operate. ing. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If the distribution part adopts a configuration in which the working object is activated, the player can shoot the game ball at the timing of the operation of the working object, so that only the high-value first route 36b1 There is a possibility that it becomes possible to distribute the game balls.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the sorting section is composed of the second sorting peg group 36b, which is a non-working object that does not operate, so that the player can only use the high-value first route 36b1. It becomes impossible to measure the timing of the operation of the operating object and shoot the game balls so that the game balls can be distributed to each other. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed at the distribution ratio intended when the pachinko machine 10 is designed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a right outlet 43r is provided at a position where game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 can enter, which does not pay out prize balls even if game balls enter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 from reaching the second special electric accessory 58b contrary to the initial design assumption of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the normal state F1 in which a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball enters the V fixed prize opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot. When such a transition condition is established, via the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2, it moves to a high certainty state F3 in which a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as the second special figure fluctuation time. In this embodiment, the case where the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time is more for the player than the case where the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) is set Since it is advantageous, I want the player to quickly win a variable probability jackpot in the normal state F1 and enter the game ball into the V-definite winning prize opening 57av, so that the transition condition is established and shift to the high probability state F3. It can give you a sense of hope.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win performance, which is an expectation performance that suggests the expectation level of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot, which is a specific advantageous result, will occur. Since it is configured, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation whether or not the high probability state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In addition, since the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 is the second big prize. The ball cannot enter the opening 58a, and the ball can enter the special winning opening 32s. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, until the variable display of the second special symbol ends. , that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, a favorable state for the player is during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set for a long variable time. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to understand it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set, it is possible to execute the good opportunity suggesting effect, which is the effect that suggests to the player that the player is in a good opportunity. , the player can be made to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set with the long variable time is the best opportunity for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, not only the lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol but also the period of the variable display of the second special symbol is long. It is important for the player whether it continues. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the step-up effect 1 and execute the step-up effect 2 continuously to the step-up effect 1 during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and there is an expectation that the variable display of the second special symbol will continue. can let

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 32s is counted instead of the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 58a. important to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to display information about the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 32s. can be brought to the player's attention.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set. There is a high probability state F3, but the difference between these game states is only the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and the normal electric accessory 34b of the present embodiment is in the game state Therefore, the player cannot easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state F1 or the high-probability state F3. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and the second special figure variation time Since the background image for the high-precision state F3 can be displayed in the high-probability state F3 in which a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as, the player is wondering whether the current game state is the normal state F1 It is possible to easily determine whether the state is the high-probability state F3.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, the state in which the second big winning hole 58a can enter (open state) is not advantageous to the player but disadvantageous. That's what it is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the second special electric accessory 58b puts the second big winning hole 58a in the ball-enterable state (open state), the second big prize-winning hole 58a is in the ball-enterable state ( Since the effect suggesting that the second big winning hole 58a will be in an open state) is not executed, the player misunderstands that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered. You can avoid giving

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state where the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the second ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

<<3-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes normal processing and timer interrupt processing. In addition to normal processing and timer interrupt processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing will be explained. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sz0101, start-up initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz0102.

In step Sz<b>0102 , an activation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The activation command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz0103.

In step Sz0103, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 2 ms in this embodiment).

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. In step Sz1101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz0102.

In step Sz1102, various counter updating processes are executed. Specifically, special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1, special figure type determination counter Cs2, special figure reach determination counter Cs3, special figure fluctuation type counter Cs4, general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1, general figure type determination counter Cn2, random number initial value Each value of the counter Cini is incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2 and Cini are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1103.

In step Sz1103, ball entry processing for each ball entrance is executed. Details of ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described later. After executing step Sz1103, the process proceeds to step Sz1104.

In step Sz1104, special figure special electric control processing is executed. The special figure special electric control process executes the special figure lottery described above based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34, and the first special symbol display unit 37a, the second This is a process for controlling the 2 special symbol display portion 37b, the first special electric accessory 57b and the second special electric accessory 58b. The details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sz1104, the process proceeds to step Sz1105.

In step Sz1105, a general map general electric control process is executed. The general pattern general electric control process is a process of executing the general pattern lottery described above based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35, and controlling the normal symbol display unit 38a and the normal electric accessory 34b. The details of the general map general electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sz1105, the process proceeds to step Sz1106.

In step Sz1106, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above processes are transmitted to sub-side control devices such as the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, when a prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to various effects are set, those commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sz1106, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Entering ball processing for each entrance>
Next, ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described. The ball entry process for each ball entrance is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for each ball entrance. In step Sz1201, ball entry processing for a general winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the general winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is detected, a command for transmitting a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls set for the general winning opening 32 is executed. set as After executing step Sz1201, the process proceeds to step Sz1202.

In step Sz1202, ball entry processing for the special winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the special winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 32s is detected, a command for transmitting a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls set in the special winning opening 32s is executed. set as After executing step Sz1202, the process proceeds to step Sz1203.

In step Sz1203, ball entry processing for the big winning opening is executed. In the ball entering process for the big winning hole, when the game ball entering the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a is detected, the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a A prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls set in is set as a command to be transmitted. After executing step Sz1203, the process proceeds to step Sz1204.

In step Sz1204, a ball entry process for the first special figure starting port is executed. In the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening 33 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sz1204, the process proceeds to step Sz1205.

In step Sz1205, a ball entry process for the second special figure starting port is executed. In the ball entry process for the second special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 34 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the second special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sz1205, the process proceeds to step Sz1206.

In step Sz1206, the entry process for the normal figure starting gate is executed. In the entry process for the normal pattern starting gate, when the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 35 is detected, various processes are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the normal figure start gate will be described later. After executing step Sz1206, the process proceeds to step Sz1207.

In step Sz1207, ball entry processing for the V fixed winning opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the V fixed winning opening, various processes are executed when the entry of the game ball into the V fixed winning opening 57av is detected. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described later. After step Sz1207 is executed, this ball entry processing for each ball entrance ends.

<Entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the first special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening. In step Sz1301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 33. In step Sz1301, when it is determined that the game ball entered the first special figure start port 33 (step Sz1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1302, the number of prize balls set in the first special figure start port 33 Set the prize ball command corresponding to as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1303. On the other hand, in step Sz1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first special figure starting opening 33 (step Sz1301: NO), the entering process for the first special figure starting opening is ended.

In step Sz1303, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit. In addition, the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is a value indicating the number of the first special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is four.

In step Sz1303, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit (step Sz1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1304, and 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1305.

In step Sz1305, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number Ns1 to which 1 is added in step Sz1303. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1306.

In step Sz1306, a first special figure destination determination process is executed. In the first special figure destination determination process, each value (the first special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the first special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the first special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. After executing step Sz1306, the process proceeds to step Sz1307.

In step Sz1307, the first special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the first special figure destination determination process described above is set as the first special figure reservation command. The first special figure reservation command is for the sub-side control device, the first special figure destination determination for the first special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start port 33 It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the first special figure reservation information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. When the first special figure reservation command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 according to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After executing step Sz1307, the entering process for the first special figure starting port 33, which is the second entering part, ends.

On the other hand, in step Sz1303, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sz1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is the upper limit , without storing each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this first special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Entering ball processing for the second special figure start port>
Next, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the second special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port. In step Sz1401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 34. In step Sz1401, if it is determined that the game ball entered the second special figure start port 34 (step Sz1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1402, the number of prize balls set in the second special figure start port 34 Set the prize ball command corresponding to as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1403. On the other hand, in step Sz1401, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the second special figure starting port 34 (step Sz1401: NO), the entering process for the second special figure starting port ends.

In step Sz1403, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is a value indicating the number of second special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of game balls into the second special figure starting port 34 . In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is four.

In step Sz1403, when it determines with 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 being less than an upper limit (step Sz1403: YES), it progresses to step Sz1404 and adds 1 to 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1405.

In step Sz1405, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending number Ns2 obtained by adding 1 in step Sz1403. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1406.

In step Sz1406, a second special figure destination determination process is executed. In the second special figure destination determination process, each value (the second special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the second special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the second special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the second special lottery with the variation of the second special symbol. After executing step Sz1406, the process proceeds to step Sz1407.

In step Sz1407, the second special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the second special figure destination determination process described above is set as the second special figure reservation command. The second special figure reservation command is a second special figure destination determination for the second special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start port 34 for the control device on the sub side It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the second special figure reservation information becomes the target of the second special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the second special symbol. When the second special figure pending command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the second special figure pending number Ns2. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 of the design display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After executing step Sz1407, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port 34, which is the third ball entry section, is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sz1403, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not less than the upper limit (step Sz1403: NO), that is, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is the upper limit , without storing each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this second special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Pitch processing for normal map starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The ball entry process for the normal map start gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball entrance described above.

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate. In step Sz1501, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the normal figure starting gate 35. In step Sz1501, when it is determined that the game ball entered the normal figure starting gate 35 (step Sz1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1502. On the other hand, in step Sz1501, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern start gate 35 (step Sz1501: NO), this normal pattern start gate entry process is terminated.

In step Sz1502, it is determined whether or not the number Nn1 of normal pattern reservation is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the number Nn1 of normal pattern reservation is a value indicating the number of normal pattern lottery (waiting for execution) that is reserved based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35. In this embodiment, the upper limit (maximum value) of the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is four.

In step Sz1502, when it is determined that the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation is less than the upper limit (step Sz1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1503, and 1 is added to the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1504.

In step Sz1504, each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the general pattern reservation area 64d of the RAM64, that is, the general pattern in which 1 is added in step Sz1503 Store in a storage area corresponding to the number Nn1 of reservations. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz1505.

In step Sz1505, a normal figure pending command is set. The general pattern reservation command is a command for recognizing that the general pattern lottery has been reserved based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35 for the control device on the sub side. After executing step Sz1505, the ball entry process for the normal figure start gate 35, which is the first ball entry section, is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sz1502, if it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sz1502: NO), that is, if it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is the upper limit, Without storing the respective values of the determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 in the normal pattern reservation area 64d, the entry process for the main normal pattern start gate is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for V fixed winning mouth>
Next, the ball entry processing for the V guaranteed winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V fixed winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball hole described above.

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the V winning hole. In step Sz1601, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the V fixed winning opening 57av. In step Sz1601, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V fixed winning opening 57av (step Sz1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz1602, and the V fixed winning flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. Determine whether or not The V guaranteed winning prize flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the V guaranteed winning prize opening 57av, and is turned OFF when the high probability mode flag is turned ON after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. In step Sz1602, by determining whether or not the V fixed winning prize flag is already ON, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V fixed winning prize opening 57av, steps Sz1603 to step Sz1605 to be described later are performed. It adopts a configuration that does not duplicate the processing of

In step Sz1602, when it is determined that the V guaranteed prize flag is not ON (step Sz1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz1603, and the V guaranteed prize flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sz1604 to set a V winning prize command. The V fixed winning prize command is a command for making the sub side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the V fixed winning prize opening 57av. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V guaranteed prize command, it executes the V guaranteed prize effect, which is a performance suggesting that the game ball has entered the V guaranteed prize hole 57av. After step Sz1604 is executed, the ball entry process for the V winning hole is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz1601 that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 57av (step Sz1601: NO) and if it is determined that the V winning prize flag is ON in step Sz1602 (step Sz1602: YES ), the ball-entering process for the V guaranteed winning hole ends without executing the processes of steps Sz1603 and Sz1604 described above.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing will be described. The special figure special electric control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process. In step Sz2101, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sz2101, the process proceeds to step Sz2102.

In step Sz2102, a special symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sz2102, the process proceeds to step Sz2103.

In step Sz2103, special symbol fluctuation post-stop processing, which is processing after stopping the special symbol fluctuation, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sz2103, the process proceeds to step Sz2104.

In step Sz2104, special electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start process is a process for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode when the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied. The details of the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sz2104, the process proceeds to step Sz2105.

In step Sz2105, processing during special electric opening period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening period is processing executed during the special electric opening period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening period will be described later. After executing step Sz2105, the process proceeds to step Sz2106.

In step Sz2106, processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is processing executed during the special electric opening/closing period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described later. After executing step Sz2106, the process proceeds to step Sz2107.

In step Sz2107, processing during the special electric ending period is executed. The processing during the special electric ending period is processing executed during the special electric ending period. The details of the processing during the special electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sz2107, this special figure special electric control processing is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process described above.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Sz2201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value stored in the main side RAM 64 is "01". The special figure special electric control value is a value indicating what stage the progress status of the control of the special symbol and the special electric accessory is, and in this embodiment, the special figure special electric control value being "01" means that It shows that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, when the special figure special electric control value is "01", the first special symbol or the second special figure when the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more This indicates that it is possible to start changing the symbol. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sz2201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is not "01" (step Sz2201: NO), this special symbol variation start process is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sz2202 described later. finish. That is, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the special symbol does not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sz2201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "01" (step Sz2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz2202.

In step Sz2202, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more. In step Sz2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more (step Sz2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz2203, and 1 is subtracted from the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz2204.

In step Sz2204, a second special figure reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the second special figure reservation information stored in each area of the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b, is executed. Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the second special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb to the special figure determination area 64c, The 2nd special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sz2204, the process advances to step Sz2208, which will be described later.

In step Sz2202, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not "1" or more (step Sz2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz2205, and the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more Determine whether or not In step Sz2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not "1" or more (step Sz2205: NO), this special symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sz2205, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more (step Sz2205: YES), proceed to step Sz2206, subtract 1 from the first special figure reservation number Ns1 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sz2207.

In step Sz2207, the 1st special figure reservation information shift process which is the process which shifts the 1st special figure reservation information memorize|stored in each area of 1st special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b is performed. Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the first special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra to the special figure determination area 64c, The 1st special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sz2207, the process proceeds to step Sz2208.

In step Sz2208, a special figure propriety determination process, which is a process for determining whether or not to win a special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure validity determination process, the above-described special figure validity determination table is selected based on the type of lottery mode and reservation, and the selected special figure validity determination table and the special figure determination area 64c are stored. Based on the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1, it is determined whether or not to win the special figure. After executing step Sz2208, the process proceeds to step Sz2209.

In step Sz2209, a special symbol type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, based on the special figure type determination result, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure type determination table, Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sz2209, the process proceeds to step Sz2210.

In step Sz2210, the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure type determined in the special figure type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a special symbol B, A special symbol B flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag. After executing step Sz2210, the process proceeds to step Sz2211.

In step Sz2211, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed. The special figure variation time setting process is the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 37a (first special symbol variation time) and the variation time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 37b (second Tokuzu fluctuation time) is a process to set. Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the lottery mode, the type of suspension, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure The special figure variation time is determined based on the value of the figure variation type counter Cs4 and the special figure variation time table, and the value corresponding to the determined special figure variation time is set to the special figure variation time timer counter. After executing step Sz2211, the process proceeds to step Sz2212.

In step Sz2212, a special figure variation command is set. In the command for special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is based on the entrance of the game ball to which special figure start opening, the first special figure start opening 33 or the second special figure start opening 34 In addition to containing information indicating the presence or absence of reach, information on the set special figure fluctuation time is included. After executing step Sz2212, the process proceeds to step Sz2213.

In step Sz2213, a special figure type command is set. The special figure type command includes the information of the result of the special figure propriety determination (presence or absence of special figure hit) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation command and the special figure type command set in steps Sz2212 and Sz2213 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received special figure variation command and the special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sz2213, the process proceeds to step Sz2214.

In step Sz2214, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is started to change. Then, it progresses to step Sz2215 and sets "02" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state of being changed. After that, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol variation stop processing will be described. The special symbol variation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control processing.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop processing. In step Sz2301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a fluctuating state. In step Sz2301, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "02" (step Sz2301: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz2301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "02" (step Sz2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz2302.

In step Sz2302, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed do. In step Sz2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has not passed (step Sz2302: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sz2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz2303.

In step Sz2303, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is fluctuating in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b is stopped in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. display. As a result, the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Stop is displayed. After executing step Sz2303, the process proceeds to step Sz2304.

In step Sz2304, a special figure stop display time setting process is executed. The special figure stop display time setting process is the stop display time (first special figure stop display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a and the second special symbol stop display in the second special symbol display portion 37b. It is a process of setting the time (second special figure stop display time). Specifically, in the special figure stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (1.0 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the special figure stop display time timer counter. After performing step Sz2304, it progresses to step Sz2305 and sets "03" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after stopping special symbol fluctuation>
Next, the processing after the special symbol fluctuation stop will be described. The special symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Sz2401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol special electric control value of "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In step Sz2401, if it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "03" (step Sz2401: NO), this special symbol fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz2401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "03" (step Sz2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz2402.

In step Sz2402, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop display time set in the special figure stop display time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the special figure stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sz2402, if it is determined that the special figure stop display time has not passed (step Sz2402: NO), this special symbol variation stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has elapsed (step Sz2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz2403.

In step Sz2403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). In step Sz2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Sz2403: NO), i. If there is, proceed to step Sz2404, turn OFF the special symbol type flag (in this case special symbol Z flag) that is ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz2405 to set the special figure special electric control value to "01". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is "01" is the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more. It shows a state in which it is possible to start the variation of the special symbol or the second special symbol. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sz2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Sz2403: YES), i. If it is a hit, proceed to step Sz2406, and set "04" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode are satisfied. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated. Thereby, when the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric opening and closing execution mode start processing>
Next, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode start process. In step Sz3101, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode have been established. In step Sz3101, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "04" (step Sz3101: NO), this special electric power opening/closing execution mode start processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz3101, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "04" (step Sz3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3102.

In step Sz3102, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is ON. In step Sz3102, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is not ON (step Sz3102: NO), that is, if the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure jackpot is ON, Proceeding to step Sz3103, game state reset processing is executed. The game state reset process is a process of turning OFF the high probability mode flag when it is ON, and maintaining the OFF state as it is when the flag is OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3104, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sz3102, when it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is ON (step Sz3102: YES), without executing the game state reset process of step Sz3103, to step Sz3104 move on.

In step Sz3104, special electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The special electric switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the special electric switching scenario to be referred to in the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario selection table described above and the special electric switching type flag. After executing step Sz3104, the process advances to step Sz3105.

In step Sz3105, special electric opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric opening time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above, and the obtained special electric opening time information is stored in the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sz3105, the process proceeds to step Sz3106.

In step Sz3106, a special electric opening command is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices (various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41) so as to execute the special electric opening production and the right-handed information production. After executing step Sz3106, it proceeds to step Sz3107 and sets "05" to the special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. After that, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated.

<Processing during the special electric opening period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric opening period. In step Sz3201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. In step Sz3201, if it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "05" (step Sz3201: NO), the special electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz3201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "05" (step Sz3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3202.

In step Sz3202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sz3202 that it is not the time to end the special electric opening period (step Sz3202: NO), this special electric opening period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz3202 that it is time to end the special electric opening period (step Sz3202: YES), the process advances to step Sz3203 to set a special electric open/close period command. The set special electric opening/closing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. This special electric opening/closing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing period. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing period command, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect corresponding to the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, based on the received special electric opening/closing period command. It controls various devices for performance so that it does. After performing step Sz3203, it progresses to step Sz3204 and sets "06" to a special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric opening period has ended and the special electric open/close period has started. After that, the processing during the opening period of this special electric transmission ends.

<Processing during special electric opening and closing period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric opening/closing period. In step Sz3301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric open/close period has started. In step Sz3301, when it is determined that the special electric charge control value is not "06" (step Sz3301: NO), this special electric open/close period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz3301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "06" (step Sz3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3302.

In step Sz3302, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the special electric switching period is met. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the special electric switching period set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sz3302 that the conditions for ending the special electric switching period are not satisfied (step Sz3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3303.

In step Sz3303, it is determined whether or not the first special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sz3303, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (step Sz3303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3304.

In step Sz3304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sz3304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established (step Sz3304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3305.

In step Sz3305, the first special electric accessory 57b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3306.

In step Sz3306, the first special electric release command is set. The first special electric opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The first special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sz3306, the process advances to step Sz3310, which will be described later.

In step Sz3304, if it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (step Sz3304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3310, which will be described later.

In step Sz3303, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is being opened (step Sz3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3307.

In step Sz3307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sz3307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (step Sz3307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3308.

In step Sz3308, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3309.

In step Sz3309, the first special electric closing command is set. The first special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has closed. The first special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sz3309, the process advances to step Sz3310, which will be described later.

In step Sz3307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is not established (step Sz3307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3310, which will be described later.

In step Sz3310, it is determined whether or not the second special electric accessory 58b is open. In step Sz3310, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (step Sz3310: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3311.

In step Sz3311, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sz3311, when it is determined that the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (step Sz3311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3312.

In step Sz3312, the second special electric accessory 58b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3313.

In step Sz3313, a second special electric release command is set. The second special electric opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been opened. The second special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sz3313, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Sz3311, when it is determined that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not established (step Sz3311: NO), the process during this special electric open/close period ends as it is.

In step Sz3310, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is open (step Sz3310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3314.

In step Sz3314, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sz3314, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (step Sz3314: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3315.

In step Sz3315, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3316.

In step Sz3316, a second special electric closing command is set. The second special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has closed. The second special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sz3316, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Sz3314, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not established (step Sz3314: NO), the processing during this special electric open/close period ends as it is.

If it is determined in step Sz3302 that the conditions for ending the special electric switching period are satisfied (step Sz3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3317.

In step Sz3317, special electric ending time setting processing is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special electric ending time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection processing described above, and the obtained special electric ending time information is stored in the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sz3317, the process proceeds to step Sz3318.

In step Sz3318, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric ending command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute the special electric ending production. After performing step Sz3318, it progresses to step Sz3319 and sets "07" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. After that, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

<Processing during special electric ending period>
Next, processing during the special electric ending period will be described. The processing during the special electric ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric ending period. In step Sz3401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. In step Sz3401, if it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "07" (step Sz3401: NO), this special electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz3401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "07" (step Sz3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3402.

In step Sz3402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sz3402 that it is not the time to end the special electric ending period (step Sz3402: NO), this special electric ending period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz3402 that it is time to end the special electric ending period (step Sz3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3403.

In step Sz3403, it is determined whether or not the V winning prize flag is ON. In step Sz3403, when it is determined that the V guaranteed prize flag is ON (step Sz3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz3404, and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sz3405 to turn off the V winning prize flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3406. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz3403 that the V winning prize flag is not ON (step Sz3403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz3406 without executing the above-described steps Sz3404 and Sz3405.

In step Sz3406, a game state command including current game state information is set. The set game state command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the game state command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various devices for effects based on the information indicating the game state included in the command so as to enable the execution of the effect corresponding to the game state. After performing step Sz3406, it progresses to step Sz3407 and turns off a special figure classification flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3408.

In step Sz3408, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute an effect corresponding to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz3409.

In step Sz3409, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special figure reserved number Ns1 or the second special figure reserved number Ns2 is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Indicates a possible state. After that, the processing during the special electric ending period ends.

<Public power control processing>
Next, the general map general electric control processing will be described. The normal/universal electric power control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing normal/universal power control processing. In step Sz4101, a normal design fluctuation start process, which is a process for starting the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sz4101, the process proceeds to step Sz4102.

In step Sz4102, a normal design fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sz4102, the process proceeds to step Sz4103.

In step Sz4103, a process after normal design fluctuation stop, which is a process after stopping the fluctuation of the normal design, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sz4103, the process proceeds to step Sz4104.

In step Sz4104, normal electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The normal switching execution mode start process is a process for starting the normal switching execution mode when the conditions for starting the normal switching execution mode are satisfied. The details of the normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sz4104, the process proceeds to step Sz4105.

In step Sz4105, processing is executed during the general electricity opening period. The normal/universal power opening period process is a process executed during the normal/universal power opening period. The details of the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described later. After executing step Sz4105, the process proceeds to step Sz4106.

In step Sz4106, processing during normal electric switching period is executed. The normal power switching period process is a process executed during the normal power switching period. The details of the processing during the normal power switching period will be described later. After executing step Sz4106, the process proceeds to step Sz4107.

In step Sz4107, processing during the general electric ending period is executed. The general electric ending period process is a process executed during the general electric ending period. The details of the processing during the general electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sz4107, this normal figure normal electric control process is complete|finished.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, normal design variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process described above.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Sz4201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal power control value stored in the main RAM 64 is "01". Normal figure normal electric control value is a value indicating which stage the progress status of control of normal symbols and normal electric accessories is, and in this embodiment, normal figure normal electric control value is "01" indicates that the normal symbol is not changed and the normal open/close execution mode is not executed. In other words, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "01" indicates that it is possible to start the normal pattern fluctuation when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more. ing. In the present embodiment, the normal map normal power control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sz4201, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "01" (step Sz4201: NO), without executing any of the processes after step Sz4202 described later, this normal pattern fluctuation start process exit. That is, when the normal symbols are fluctuating or during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal symbols do not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sz4201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "01" (step Sz4201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz4202.

In step Sz4202, it is determined whether or not the number Nn of normal figure reservation is "1" or more. In step Sz4202, when it is determined that the number Nn of reserved normal patterns is greater than or equal to "1" (step Sz4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz4203, and 1 is subtracted from the reserved number Nn of normal patterns. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz4204.

In step Sz4204, the general pattern reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the general pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, after moving the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d to the general pattern determination area 64e, the second area → the first area , 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sz4204, the process proceeds to step Sz4205.

In step Sz4205, the general pattern propriety determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern correctness determination process, based on the general pattern correctness determination table selected based on the game state and the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, the general pattern It is determined whether or not to win a prize. After executing step Sz4205, the process proceeds to step Sz4206.

In step Sz4206, normal pattern type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern), is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern type determination process, based on the result of the general pattern type determination, the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, and the general pattern type determination table, normal Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sz4206, the process proceeds to step Sz4207.

In step Sz4207, the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern type determined in the normal pattern type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is the normal symbol A in the normal pattern type determination process, the normal pattern A flag is turned ON as the normal pattern type flag. After executing step Sz4207, the process proceeds to step Sz4208.

In step Sz4208, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the general pattern fluctuation time is determined based on the game state, the result of the general pattern suitability determination, and the general pattern fluctuation time table, and corresponds to the determined general pattern fluctuation time The value obtained is set in the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter. After executing step Sz4208, the process proceeds to step Sz4209.

In step Sz4209, the normal figure fluctuation command is set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation time that has been set. After executing step Sz4209, the process proceeds to step Sz4210.

In step Sz4210, a normal figure classification command is set. The general figure type command includes the information of the result of the general figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a general figure hit) and the result of the general figure type determination (normally the type of pattern).

Normal figure variation command and normal figure type command set in step Sz4209 and step Sz4210 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received normal map variation command and the received normal map type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sz4210, the process proceeds to step Sz4211.

In step Sz4211, the normal pattern display section 38a is normally started to change its design. Then, it progresses to step Sz4212 and sets "02" to a normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electric control value is "02" indicates that the general pattern is in a state of fluctuation. After that, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, normal design variation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control processing.

FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. In step Sz4301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value is "02" indicates that the normal symbol is in a state of fluctuation. In step Sz4301, when it is determined that the general pattern general electric control value is not "02" (step Sz4301: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz4301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "02" (step Sz4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz4302.

In step Sz4302, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Sz4302, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not passed (step Sz4302: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz4302, when it determines with normal figure fluctuation time having passed (step Sz4302: YES), it progresses to step Sz4303.

In step Sz4303, the normal symbol that is fluctuating in the normal symbol display section 38a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a. After executing step Sz4303, the process proceeds to step Sz4304.

In step Sz4304, normal figure stop display time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern stop display time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern stop display time (normal pattern stop display time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. Specifically, in the normal map stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment) is set in the normal map stop display time timer counter. After performing step Sz4304, it progresses to step Sz4305 and sets "03" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "03" indicates that the normal pattern is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after normal pattern fluctuation stop>
Next, the processing after normal design fluctuation stop will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop post-processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process.

FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing normal symbol fluctuation post-stop processing. In step Sz4401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value of "03" indicates that the normal symbol is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. In step Sz4401, when it is determined that the general pattern general electric control value is not "03" (step Sz4401: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz4401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "03" (step Sz4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz4402.

In step Sz4402, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern stop display time set in the normal pattern stop display time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal map stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the normal map stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sz4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has not passed (step Sz4402: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz4402, when it is determined that the normal map stop display time has elapsed (step Sz4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz4403.

In step Sz4403, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern right or wrong determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern per specific result. In step Sz4403, if it is determined that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is not ON (step Sz4403: NO), that is, the result of the normal pattern propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out of the normal pattern. If there is, proceed to step Sz4404, the normal pattern type flag that is ON (normal pattern Z flag in this case) is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sz4405, and sets "01" to a normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electric control value is "01", when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol state. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sz4403, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON (step Sz4403: YES), that is, the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to this normal pattern fluctuation is the general pattern If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sz4406, and "04" is set to the normal/universal electric power control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal/universal electric power control value is “04” indicates that the conditions for starting the normal/universal electric switching execution mode are met. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

<Commercial power switching execution mode start processing>
Next, normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described. The general electric switching execution mode start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control process.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing normal electric switching execution mode start processing. In step Sz5101, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal power supply control value being “04” indicates that the condition for starting the normal/universal power switching execution mode has been established. In step Sz5101, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "04" (step Sz5101: NO), this normal/universal electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sz5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "04" (step Sz5101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5102.

In step Sz5102, normal electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The normal switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal switching scenario to be referenced in the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario selection table and the normal switching scenario selection table. After executing step Sz5102, the process proceeds to step Sz5103.

In step Sz5103, general electric opening time setting processing is executed. The general electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical opening time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical opening time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of this general electrical opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sz5103, the process proceeds to step Sz5104.

In step Sz5104, a general electric opening command is set. The set general electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After performing step Sz5104, it progresses to step Sz5105 and sets "05" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of "05" indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has started. After that, the normal electric switching execution mode start processing is ended.

<Processing during the opening period of the public electricity>
Next, the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described. The normal/universal electric opening period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal/universal electric power control process.

FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing processing during the general electric opening period. In step Sz5201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric power control value being “05” indicates that the general/universal electric power opening period has started. In step Sz5201, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "05" (step Sz5201: NO), this normal/universal electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "05" (step Sz5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5202.

In step Sz5202, it is determined whether or not it is time for the general electric opening period to end. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical opening time timer counter set as the general electrical opening time in the general electrical opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sz5202 that it is not the time to end the general electric opening period (step Sz5202: NO), this normal electric opening period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz5202 that it is time for the general electric opening period to end (step Sz5202: YES), the process advances to step Sz5203 to set the general electric opening/closing period command. The set electric open/close period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. This general electric switching period command includes information on the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric switching period. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the general electric switching period command controls various production devices so as to execute a production corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened, based on the received general electric switching period command. Control. After performing step Sz5203, it progresses to step Sz5204 and sets "06" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of “06” indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has ended and the general/universal electric opening/closing period has started. After that, the processing during the main electric power opening period ends.

<Processing during normal power switching period>
Next, the processing during the normal power switching period will be described. The general electric switching period processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control processing.

FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the processing during the normal power switching period. In step Sz5301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric switch control value of "06" indicates that the electric open/close period has started. In step Sz5301, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "06" (step Sz5301: NO), this normal/universal electric switching period process ends. On the other hand, in step Sz5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "06" (step Sz5301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5302.

In step Sz5302, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the normal switching period is satisfied. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the normal switching period set in the normal switching scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sz5302 that the conditions for ending the normal switching period are not satisfied (step Sz5302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz5303.

In step Sz5303, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34b is open. In step Sz5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (step Sz5303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sz5304.

In step Sz5304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sz5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sz5304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5305.

In step Sz5305, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz5306.

In step Sz5306, a general power disconnection command is set. The common electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the common electric accessory 34b has been opened. The general electric disconnection command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After step Sz5306 is executed, the process during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sz5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (step Sz5304: NO), the process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

In step Sz5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened (step Sz5303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5307.

In step Sz5307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sz5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sz5307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5308.

In step Sz5308, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz5309.

In step Sz5309, a general electric closing command is set. The general electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the general electric accessory 34b is closed. The general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After step Sz5309 is executed, this processing during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sz5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (step Sz5307: NO), the process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

If it is determined in step Sz5302 that the end condition for the normal switching period is satisfied (step Sz5302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5310.

In step Sz5310, general electric ending time setting processing is executed. The general electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical switching ending time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical ending time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. set to the end time timer counter. The value of this electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sz5310, the process proceeds to step Sz5311.

In step Sz5311, a general electric ending command is set. The set general electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After performing step Sz5318, it progresses to step Sz5319 and sets "07" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. After that, the process during the normal electric switching period ends.

<Processing during the normal ending period>
Next, the processing during the general electric ending period will be described. The normal electric ending period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing processing during the general electric ending period. In step Sz5401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value of "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. In step Sz5401, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "07" (step Sz5401: NO), this normal/universal electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sz5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "07" (step Sz5401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5402.

In step Sz5402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical ending time timer counter set as the general electrical ending time in the general electrical ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sz5402 that it is not the time to end the general electrical ending period (step Sz5402: NO), this general electrical ending period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz5402 that it is time for the general electric ending period to end (step Sz5402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sz5403.

In step Sz5403, the normal figure classification flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz5404.

In step Sz5404, a general electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set general electric switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz5405.

In step Sz5405, "01" is set to the normal/universal electric power control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number Nn of reserved normal patterns is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of normal patterns. After that, the normal electric ending period process ends.

<<3-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sz6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sz6101, the process proceeds to step Sz6102.

In step Sz6102, the process for special figure game round production is executed. In the processing for special figure game round performance, the processing relating to the performance during execution of the special figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when receiving a special figure variation command and a special figure type command, the special symbol type included in the special figure variation time and special figure type command included in the special figure variation command, Based on the current game state, processing related to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 and processing for executing various effects are executed. Specifically, for example, processing for executing the above-described countdown effect, advantageous state suggesting effect, step-up effect, and the like is executed. After executing step Sz6102, the process proceeds to step Sz6103.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned various effects may be configured to be executable regardless of whether or not the normal symbols are fluctuating. In other words, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display of normal symbols (short fluctuation time or long fluctuation time), the expectation degree production (reach production) may be executed, or a production (for example, a countdown production) in which numerical information is displayed while being subtracted may be executed, and an opportunity suggestive production that suggests to the player that it is in an opportunistic state. It may be configured to be executable, or may be configured to be capable of executing a step-up effect. Also, even if the second special figure start port 34 is in a state (open state) that can be entered by a normal electric accessory, the second special figure start port 34 will be in a state (open state) that can be entered. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect suggesting is not executed.

In step Sz6103, special electric opening/closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing relating to the effect during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special electric opening command is received, it is set to execute a special electric opening effect and a right hitting notification process corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario. Further, when a special electric switching period command is received, a special electric switching period production corresponding to the type of the special electric switching scenario is set to be executed. Also, when the special electric open command is received, a special electric open production corresponding to the type of the special electric open/close scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is opened is executed. Also, when the special electric closing command is received, the special electric interval period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times of closing the special electric accessory is executed. Also, when a special electric ending command is received, a special electric ending effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sz6103, the process proceeds to step Sz6104.

In step Sz6104, a V guaranteed prize presentation process is executed. In the V sure win effect processing, when a V win win command is received, an effect suggesting that a V win win has been set to be executed. After executing step Sz6104, the process proceeds to step Sz6105.

In step Sz6105, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sz6105, the process proceeds to step Sz6106.

At step Sz6106, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sz6106, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sz8101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz8102.

In step Sz8102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sz8201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sz8301, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process described above is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a moving image display start command corresponding to the advance notice performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

In the command processing (step Sz8301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step Sz8302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (step Sz8301), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sz8303.

In step Sz8303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (step Sz8302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. are specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, the process proceeds to step Sz8304.

In step Sz8304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (step Sz8303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step Sz8305, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<<3-7>> Functions and effects:

As described above, according to the present embodiment, each ball entry portion is appropriately arranged, and the length of the period set as the variable display time is appropriately controlled, so that the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible. Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush.

In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the variable display of the second special symbol stops during the small winning rush, and when a small winning is won in the second special drawing lottery corresponding to the variable display, a special The electric accessory is opened and the game ball can be entered into the big winning hole. That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

In this way, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop the game. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period that the small winning rush ends as it is without being able to obtain the profit from the small winning.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state, so the game distributed to the first route 36b1 The ball cannot enter the second big winning hole 58a, but can enter the special winning hole 32s. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even though the ready-to-win effect has been executed, the special figure jackpot advantageous to the player in the second special figure lottery (16R probability variable jackpot where there is a ball output and the rush continues) is won. However, even if the player wins a special jackpot (2R normal jackpot where there is no ball and the rush ends) and the high-probability state F3 ends, the ready-to-win effect is executed. Since the player can win a large number of prize balls during the period of stay, the player can be given a feeling of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large amount of prize balls are paid out just before the end of the high-probability state F3. It is possible to relieve the player's anger and sense of loss at the end of the high-probability state F3. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the advantage of the player (the number of prize balls that the player can acquire) changes depending on the length of the set second special figure fluctuation time. be able to. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the longer the variation time set as the second special figure variation time, the greater the number of prize balls that the player can obtain. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new feeling of expectation that a long variation time should be set as the second special figure variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, maintaining the closed state of the second special electric accessory 58b is an event advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a conventional general pachinko machine, winning a small prize and releasing a special electric accessory is an event that is advantageous to the player. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the events that are advantageous to the player are reversed from the conventional ones.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not have a function that allows simultaneous variation (so-called simultaneous variation function), it is possible for the player to win a large number of prize balls. A game state (so-called rush) can be realized. A pachinko machine with a simultaneous variation function has problems such as complicating the control and how to handle the remaining hold after the end of the rush. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that these problems do not occur.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability state F3 are prize balls based on the gaming balls entering the special winning hole 32s. In other words, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability state F3 are not prize balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the values of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio of the pachinko machine 10, and to widen the range of the number of prize balls that can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Become.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, many game balls that have reached the second sorting nail group 36b are sorted to the second route 36b2, which has a lower value for the player than the first route 36b1. On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the second sorting nail group 36b are sorted to the first route 36b1, which is higher in value for the player than the second route 36b2, and the second special route, which is higher in value for the player. It reaches the electric accessory 58b. Therefore, many game balls reaching the second sorting nail group 36b end up reaching the second special electric accessory 58b, which is of high value to the player, resulting in a situation that is excessively advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

And, according to the present embodiment, when the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is the special figure small hit, The game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the non-enterable state (closed state) is before the game ball completely rolls on the plate-shaped member. After a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) has passed, the second special electric accessory 58b enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s. Can not do it. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the second big winning hole 58a is two, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a without reaching the special winning hole 32s. If so, the player has little profit.

On the other hand, if a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special figure small hit, the ball cannot be entered (closed state), the game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b is set on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It rolls all the way to reach the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 32s. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the special winning opening 32s is 15, the game ball rolls on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b and ends up in the special winning opening 32s. If the ball hits the , the player can get a lot of profit.

Thus, according to this embodiment, according to the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 can not reach the special winning opening 32s It is possible to create a situation in which a ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and a situation in which a ball reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s and enters the special prize-winning hole 32s. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and as described later, when the game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, By adopting a configuration that is more advantageous for the player than when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, a new feeling of wanting a longer period to be set as the second special figure fluctuation display time is generated. It can be held by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the prize balls (15 pieces) paid out when the game balls enter the special winning hole 32s are the prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a ( 2) is adopted. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In the normal state F1 immediately after the start of the game, when the player hits to the right aiming at the second splitting nail group 36b, a short variation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time. Therefore, the launched game ball does not enter the special winning hole 32s, but enters the second big winning hole 58a. However, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls (two) paid out when the game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a are the prizes paid out when the game balls enter the special winning hole 32s. Since the number of balls is less than 15 balls, the player cannot increase the number of game balls in his/her hand, and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal state F1 immediately after the start of the game, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the second split nail group 36b to the right.

On the other hand, in the high probability state F3 in which a long variation time (20 seconds to 120 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 reaches the special winning opening 32s It becomes possible to enter the special winning hole 32s. According to this embodiment, more prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the special winning hole 32s than when game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. Since it is advantageous to , it is possible to make the player have a new feeling of wanting a longer period to be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distributing portion for distributing the game balls to the first route 36b1 and the second route 36b2 is configured as the second distributing nail group 36b, which is a collection of nails that are inoperative objects that do not operate. ing. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If the distribution part adopts a configuration in which the working object is activated, the player can shoot the game ball at the timing of the operation of the working object, so that only the high-value first route 36b1 There is a possibility that it becomes possible to distribute the game balls.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the sorting section is composed of the second sorting peg group 36b, which is a non-working object that does not operate, so that the player can only use the high-value first route 36b1. It becomes impossible to measure the timing of the operation of the operating object and shoot the game balls so that the game balls can be distributed to each other. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed at the distribution ratio intended when the pachinko machine 10 is designed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a right outlet 43r is provided at a position where game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 can enter, which does not pay out prize balls even if game balls enter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 from reaching the second special electric accessory 58b contrary to the initial design assumption of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the normal state F1 in which a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball enters the V fixed prize opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot. When such a transition condition is established, via the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2, it moves to a high certainty state F3 in which a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as the second special figure fluctuation time. In this embodiment, the case where the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time is more for the player than the case where the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) is set Since it is advantageous, I want the player to quickly win a variable probability jackpot in the normal state F1 and enter the game ball into the V-definite winning prize opening 57av, so that the transition condition is established and shift to the high probability state F3. It can give you a sense of hope.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win performance, which is an expectation performance that suggests the expectation level of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot, which is a specific advantageous result, will occur. Since it is configured, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation whether or not the high probability state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In addition, since the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1 is the second big prize. The ball cannot enter the opening 58a, and the ball can enter the special winning opening 32s. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, until the variable display of the second special symbol ends. , that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, a favorable state for the player is during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set for a long variable time. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to understand it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set, it is possible to execute the good opportunity suggesting effect, which is the effect that suggests to the player that the player is in a good opportunity. , the player can be made to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set with the long variable time is the best opportunity for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, not only the lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol but also the period of the variable display of the second special symbol is long. It is important for the player whether it continues. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the step-up effect 1 and execute the step-up effect 2 continuously to the step-up effect 1 during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and there is an expectation that the variable display of the second special symbol will continue. can let

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 32s is counted instead of the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 58a. important to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to display information about the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 32s. can be brought to the player's attention.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set. There is a high probability state F3, but the difference between these game states is only the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and the normal electric accessory 34b of the present embodiment is in the game state Therefore, the player cannot easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state F1 or the high-probability state F3. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which a short variation time (0.1 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time, and the second special figure variation time Since the background image for the high-precision state F3 can be displayed in the high-probability state F3 in which a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as, the player is wondering whether the current game state is the normal state F1 It is possible to easily determine whether the state is the high-probability state F3.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, the state in which the second big winning hole 58a can enter (open state) is not advantageous to the player but disadvantageous. That's what it is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the second special electric accessory 58b puts the second big winning hole 58a in the ball-enterable state (open state), the second big prize-winning hole 58a is in the ball-enterable state ( Since the effect suggesting that the second big winning hole 58a will be in an open state) is not executed, the player misunderstands that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered. You can avoid giving

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state where the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the second ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the second ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

<<3-8>> Modified example of the third embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<3-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, the result of the internal lottery includes "loss" that does not allow the switching unit to enter the ball-enterable state, and if the result of the internal lottery is "loss", the change display ends. However, the switching unit may be configured not to shift to the ball-enterable state. Specifically, for example, the result of the second special lottery includes "loss" that does not allow the second special electric accessory 58b to move to the state where it is possible to enter the ball, and the result of the second special lottery is "loss". , the second special electric accessory 58b may be configured so as not to shift to the ball-enterable state even after the variable display ends. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the result of the second special lottery is "lost", the game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b is displayed in the variable display Even after the end of , it is possible to reach the special winning opening 32s and enter the special winning opening 32s. Therefore, according to this modified example, the most unfavorable result for the player in a general pachinko machine, "missing", becomes the most advantageous result for the player. can provide.

<<3-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the first ball entry section may be configured such that the game ball that has entered may remain in the game area and circulate. Specifically, for example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be configured such that the entering game ball may remain in the right game area PAR and circulate. More specifically, for example, a passage where the game ball entering the second special figure start port 34 returns to the right side game area PAR from the back of the game board 30, a passage that does not return to the right side game area PAR, It is good also as a structure provided with the distribution mechanism which distributes the game ball which entered the 2 special figure starting port 34 to either of these two passages. When this configuration is adopted, the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 34 may then return to the right side game area PAR and reach the second sorting nail group 36b. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, the more game balls that reach the second sorting nail group 36b, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, whether or not the game ball that entered the second special figure start port 34 remains in the right side game area PAR (returns) or not, and if it remains, how the right side It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of whether or not the game area PAR is distributed.

<<3-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the first ball entering section may be configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. Specifically, for example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. Advantages of adopting this configuration will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, in the normal state F1 immediately after the game is started, when the player hits to the right aiming at the second special figure start opening 34, the game ball enters the second special figure start opening 34. There is a case to ball. However, according to the present modification, the second special figure starting port 34 is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters, so the player can use the second special figure starting port 34 Even if a game ball is shot aiming at , the number of game balls on hand cannot be increased and there is no merit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand aiming at the second special figure starting port 34 in the normal state F1 immediately after starting the game.

<<3-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration may be such that when a game ball enters the second ball-entering portion, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability. Specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the special winning hole 32s, the game state may be shifted with a predetermined probability. According to this configuration, in addition to the joy of the game ball entering the high-value special winning hole 32s, the player is nervous that the current advantageous high-probability state F3 will end. can give you a feeling.

<<3-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the game state may be shifted with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the third ball-entering portion. Specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, the game state may be shifted with a predetermined probability. According to this configuration, every time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, the player feels a sense of urgency that the current advantageous high-probability state F3 will end. In addition, the timing of launching the game ball is adjusted so that the game ball does not reach the second special electric accessory 58b at the timing when the second special electric accessory 58b is in a ball-enterable state. A new game can be provided to the player.

<<3-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above embodiment, the distribution part (second distribution nail group 36b) that distributes the game balls to the first route 36b1 as the first passage and the second route 36b2 as the second passage is formed by a plurality of iron nails. However, instead of this configuration, the distribution section may be configured by a plurality of resin-made projections. Advantages of adopting this configuration will be described. As in the above-described embodiment, when the distribution portion is made of iron (nails), the game balls repeatedly collide with the distribution portion, thereby plastically deforming the distribution portion. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed at a rate different from the assumption at the beginning of the design. In this pachinko machine 10, if the distribution ratio of the game balls by the distribution section changes, the main premise of the design will collapse, and the game will not be established. However, according to this modification, since the distribution part is formed of resin, it is difficult to plastically deform even if the game ball repeatedly collides (only momentary elastic deformation). Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall for a long period of time and the game balls repeatedly collide with the distribution part, it is possible to distribute the game balls at the rate assumed at the beginning of the design of the pachinko machine 10. Become.

<<3-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above embodiment, the game ball distributed to the first route 36b1, which is the first path, is either the special winning hole 32s, which is the second ball entering part, or the second big winning hole 58a, which is the third ball entering part However, instead of this configuration, there are cases where the game ball distributed to the first passage does not enter either the second ball entering section or the third ball entering section. A certain configuration may be used. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls distributed to the first route 36b1 may enter neither the special winning opening 32s nor the second big winning opening 58a. As a more specific configuration, for example, a nail that changes the behavior of the game ball is provided between the second special electric role product 58b and the special winning opening 32s, and the plate of the second special electric role product 58b A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that crosses the top of the shaped member toward the left side may jump over the special winning opening 32s. According to this modification, even if the game balls are distributed to the first route 36b1, the distribution destination of the game balls is not narrowed down to the special winning opening 32s and the second big winning opening 58a. further diversification can be achieved.

<<3-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and each modification, a third passage different from the first passage and the second passage is further provided. A configuration may be provided in which an out port is provided so that prize balls are not paid out even if a ball is entered. Specifically, for example, a third route different from the first route 36b1 and the second route 36b2 is further provided, and the game ball is placed at a position where the game ball distributed to the third route can enter. A configuration may be provided in which an out port is provided so that prize balls are not paid out even if the ball enters. In this configuration, the second sorting nail group 36b may be configured to sort more game balls to the second route 36b2 and the third route than to the first route 36b1. According to this configuration, it is possible to further increase the value of the game balls being distributed to the first route 36b1. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the pleasure when the game ball is distributed to the first route 36b1.

<<3-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment, the game ball distributed to the second route 36b2, which is the second path, always enters the right outlet 43r and does not reach the second special electric accessory 58b, which is the switching section. However, instead of this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls distributed to the second path may reach the switching section. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 may reach the second special electric accessory 58b. As a more specific configuration, for example, a branch point is provided at the end of the second route 36b2 to provide a route that can reach the right outlet 43r and a route that can reach the second special electric accessory 58b. good too. According to this configuration, the player reaches the second special electric role product 58b even for the game balls distributed to the second route 36b2, and then moves the plate member of the second special electric role product 58b. There is a sense of expectation that the ball will cross over and enter the special winning hole 32s. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<3-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment, game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 are guided to the right outlet 43r, enter the ball, and are discharged from the game area PA. Instead of the right side out port 43r, a distribution ball entrance may be provided at the destination to which the game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 are guided. The distribution ball entrance has a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and the entered game balls are divided into an area where prize balls are paid out (prize ball opening) and an area where prize balls are not paid out (out It is an entry ball part that can be distributed to the mouth). Specifically, inside the sorting ball entrance, there are a first internal passage, a second internal passage, and a game ball entered into the sorting ball entrance through the first internal passage and the second internal passage. A distribution valve for distributing to either is provided. The distribution valve has a first distribution state in which game balls that enter the distribution ball entrance are distributed to the first internal passage, and a second distribution state in which game balls that have entered the distribution ball entrance are distributed to the second internal passage. The two distribution states are alternately repeated, and in this modified example, the game balls entering the distribution ball entrance are sent to the first internal passage and the second internal passage at a ratio of 1:1. It operates to distribute to A winning hole is provided at the end of the first internal passage, and one game ball is paid out as a winning ball when a game ball enters the winning hole. On the other hand, an out port is provided at the end of the second internal passage, and prize balls are not paid out when a game ball enters the out port. According to this configuration, the game balls distributed to the second route 36b2 are distributed to the first internal path with a probability of 1/2 after entering the distribution ball entrance and enter the prize winning opening. , one prize ball will be paid out. According to this configuration, even if the player hits to the right in the normal state F1, the number of game balls that are shot (=100) and the number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls (=about 100) The number of prize balls paid out in the high-probability state F3 is substantially the same, so that the player does not benefit from hitting right in the normal state F1. can be raised.

<<3-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the low-frequency support mode (low support state) as a support mode that defines the winning probability per normal drawing in the normal drawing lottery, the fluctuation time of normal patterns, and the operation mode of normal electric accessories and a high frequency support mode (high support state) in which the normal electric accessory operates more frequently than in the low frequency support mode under the same conditions. Then, for example, the probability of winning per normal drawing in the normal drawing lottery executed during the high support state is set higher than the probability of winning per normal drawing in the normal drawing drawing executed during the low support state. may be Also, for example, during the high support state, a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a normal pattern, and during the low support state may be configured to execute a setting process for setting a long variable time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the short variable time. Further, for example, when a transition condition is satisfied that the special figure lottery is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times in the high support state, the transition to the low support state may be made. In addition, in order to allow the player to easily determine the state of the current support mode, the background image for the high support state can be displayed on the pattern display device 41 in the high support state, and the low support state in the low support state. The background image for status may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 . In this way, by providing a plurality of types of support modes, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<3-8-12>> Modification 12:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<3-8-13>> Modification 13:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<3-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiment and each of the modifications described above may be implemented by hardware, or part of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software. good too.

<<3-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature zA group>
The feature zA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zA1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A game machine, wherein a ball can be entered into the second ball entry area.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature zA2]
The gaming machine according to feature zA1,
The prize balls (15 pieces) paid out by the game balls entering the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) are the game balls entering the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out is greater than the number of prize balls (two) paid out by hitting the ball.

In this feature, the prize balls (15 pieces) paid out by the game balls entering the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) are placed in the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It adopts a configuration that is larger than the prize balls (two) that are paid out by entering the ball. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, when the player aims at the distribution means (second distribution peg group 36b) and fires the game ball (hit to the right), Since the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time), the launched game ball is the second ball entering area (special winning opening 32s) The ball does not enter into the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). However, according to this feature, the prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) are placed in the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s). is smaller than the prize balls paid out by entering the ball, the player cannot increase the number of game balls on hand, and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, the player aims at the distribution means (second distribution peg group 36b) and fires the game ball (hit to the right). can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the gaming state (high probability state F3) in which the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 120 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time), the first flow path (second The game ball distributed to 1 route 36b1) reaches the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and enters the second ball entering area (special winning opening 32s). And, according to this characteristic, when the game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning opening 58a). To give the player a new feeling that a longer period should be set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) because more prize balls are paid out than in the case where the game is played, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature zA3]
A gaming machine according to feature zA1 or feature zA2,
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of a non-working object (nail) that does not operate.

According to this feature, the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of non-working objects (nails) that do not operate. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If a configuration is adopted in which the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b) is an actuation object that operates, the player can shoot a game ball at the timing of the actuation of the actuation object, thereby increasing the value. It may become possible to distribute the game balls only to the first flow path (first route 36b1) having a high value.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of non-working objects (nails) that do not operate, so that the player can It becomes impossible to measure the timing of the operation of the operating object and shoot the game balls so that the game balls are distributed only to the path (first route 36b1). Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls at a ratio as originally assumed when the game machine is designed.

[Feature zA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA3,
A ball entry area (right out port 43r) that does not pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters a position where the game ball distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) can enter. A game machine characterized by

According to this feature, since a ball entry area is provided at a position where a game ball distributed to the second flow path can enter, no prize ball is paid out even if the game ball enters the second flow path. It is possible to suppress the game ball that has been hit from reaching the switching means contrary to the initial design assumption of the game machine.

[Feature zA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA4,
A gaming machine, wherein the result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) includes "missing" that does not cause the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state.

According to this feature, the result of the predetermined lottery includes "loss" that does not cause the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is "loss", the change display is completed, the switching means does not shift to the ball-enterable state. In this case, the game ball rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is kept in the second ball entry area (special winning opening) even after the end of the variable display. 32s), and can enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Therefore, according to this feature, in general gaming machines, the most disadvantageous result for the player, "missing", becomes the most advantageous result for the player. can do.

[Feature zA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA5,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that a game ball that has entered may remain in the game area and circulate.

According to this feature, the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that the entered game ball may remain in the game area and circulate, so for example, the first There is a case where the game ball entered into the entering ball area (second special figure starting port 34) then reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b). In particular, in this feature, the more game balls that reach the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b), the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the pleasure of whether or not the game ball that entered the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) remains in the game area, and the pleasure of how to circulate the game area after that if it remains can be provided to the player.

[Feature zA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA6,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters.

According to this feature, the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. In this game machine, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, when the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) ( When hitting to the right), the game ball may enter the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34). However, according to this feature, the first ball entering area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters, so the player can Even if game balls are shot aiming at one ball entry area (second special figure starting port 34), the number of game balls on hand cannot be increased and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, the player aims at the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) and shoots the game ball (hit to the right) ) can be suppressed.

[Feature zA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA7,
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

According to this feature, when a game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), the means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability is provided. In addition to the joy of entering the high-value second ball-entering area (special winning hole 32s), it is possible to give a sense of tension that the current advantageous game state will end.

[Feature zA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA8,
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a).

According to this feature, when the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), the means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability is provided, so that the player can To create a sense of urgency that a current advantageous game state (high-probability state F3) may end every time a ball enters a third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). can be performed, and the game ball is launched so that the game ball does not reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) at the timing when the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state. It is possible to provide the player with a new game such as adjusting the timing of .

[Feature zA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA9,
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b) is made of resin.

According to this feature, the sorting means is made of resin. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If, unlike this feature, a structure in which the distribution means is made of iron is adopted, the distribution means will be plastically deformed by repeated collisions of game balls with the distribution means. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed at a rate different from the assumption. In this game machine, if the distribution ratio of the game balls by the distribution means changes, the main premise of the design will collapse, and the game will not be established. However, according to this feature, since the distribution means is formed of resin, even if the game ball repeatedly collides, it is difficult to plastically deform (only momentary elastic deformation). Therefore, even if the game machine is installed in the game hall for a long period of time and the game balls repeatedly collide with the distribution means, it is possible to distribute the game balls at the rate assumed at the beginning of the design of the game machine.

[Feature zA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA10,
The game ball distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) enters both the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and the third ball entering area (second big winning opening 58a). A gaming machine characterized in that there are times when a ball is not played.

According to this feature, the game balls distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) are the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and the third ball entering area (second big winning opening 58a). Therefore, even if the game ball is distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1), the distribution destination of the game ball is the second ball entry area (special winning prize Since it is not narrowed down to the opening 32s) and the third ball-entering area (the second big winning opening 58a), it is possible to further diversify the game results.

[Feature zA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA11,
a third flow path (third route) different from the first flow path (first route 36b1) and the second flow path (second route 36b2);
a ball entry area (out port) where no winning ball is paid out even if the game ball enters a position where the game ball distributed to the third flow path (third route) can enter;
with
The distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path and the third flow path than to the first flow path. game machine.

According to this feature, even if the game ball enters the third channel different from the first channel and the second channel, and the position where the game ball distributed to the third channel can enter. and a ball entry area in which no prize balls are paid out, and the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path and the third flow path than to the first flow path. can further increase the value of being distributed to the first flow path. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the pleasure when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path.

[Feature zA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA12,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that game balls distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) may reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b).

According to this feature, the game ball distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) may reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b). The game balls distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) also reach the switching means (second special electric role product 58b), and then the switching means (second special electric role product 58b ) to cross over the rolling means (plate-like member) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature zA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA13,
A predetermined transition condition is established in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (When the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot), the second period (long fluctuation time) as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is provided with means for shifting to a second game state (high probability state F3).

According to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display in the first game state (normal state F1) When the transition condition is satisfied (when the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot), the second period (long A means for shifting to a second game state (high probability state F3) in which a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set is provided. In this feature, the first period (short fluctuation Since it is more advantageous for the player than when the time (0.1 second)) is set, the predetermined transition condition is established early in the first game state (normal state F1) for the player (variable probability jackpot) , and the game ball enters the V-certain prize-winning opening 57av), and the expectation that the player wants to shift to the second game state (high-probability state F3) can be given.

[Feature zA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA14,
Means capable of executing an expectation performance (reach performance) that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), the expectation degree production (reach production) that suggests the degree of expectation whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur is provided, a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) occurs and the advantageous state continues after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is completed. While executing the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is executed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is In order to maintain the non-enterable state (closed state), the game ball distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) can enter the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). It is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the expectation degree performance (reach performance), the expectation degree performance The player can win many prize balls during the period during which the (ready-to-win effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended, the reach It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get any profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is.

[Feature zA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA15,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) of displaying numerical information while subtracting numerical information during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols).

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), since it has a means capable of executing the effect (countdown effect) that displays while subtracting the numerical information, the variable display (second special It is possible to suggest to the player the time until the pattern fluctuation display) ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball can no longer reach the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) from the numerical information displayed in the effect. By adjusting the presence/absence and timing of shooting, it is possible to suppress useless shooting of game balls.

[Feature zA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA16,
During the execution of the variable display in which the second period is set as the variable display time (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set), an effect to suggest that the player is in a good opportunity. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing (opportunity suggesting presentation).

In this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the state of good opportunity for the player is during the execution of the variable display in which the second period is set (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set). is. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game on this gaming machine for the first time to understand.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display in which the second period is set as the variable display time (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set), it is suggested to the player that it is a good opportunity. Since means capable of executing the performance (opportunity suggesting performance) is provided, the variable display in which the second period is set (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set) is being executed for the player. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that this is a favorable situation for the player.

[Feature zA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA17,
During the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), a first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and a second production different from the first production is executed following the first production. A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing the production (step-up production 2).

In this game machine, unlike a general game machine, not only the lottery result after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) but also the period of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) It is important for the player whether it continues for a long time.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), the first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and the first production (step-up production 1) is performed continuously. Since means for executing a second effect (step-up effect 2) different from the first effect (step-up effect 1) is provided, the first effect (step-up effect 1) is executed for the player. When the second effect (step-up effect 1) is executed, the second effect (step-up effect 2) is executed continuously, and the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is still continued. It can make you feel the expectation that you want to do it.

[Feature zA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA18,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of displaying information on the number of game balls that have entered the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) (performance suggesting the number of game balls entered).

In this gaming machine, unlike a general gaming machine, the number of game balls entered in the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) is not counted, but in the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s). The number of game balls entered is important for the player.

According to this feature, the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) is provided with means capable of displaying information about the number of game balls that have entered the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s). It is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the opening 32s).

[Feature zA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA19,
The first background image in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (Normal state F1 background image) can be displayed, and the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display A gaming machine comprising means capable of displaying a second background image (background image for high-probability state F3) different from the first background image in a second game state (high-probability state F3).

In a general gaming machine, when the game state is different, for example, the behavior of the normal electric accessory is different, so the player can easily determine which game state the current game state is.

However, in this game machine, the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display , There is a second game state (high probability state F3) in which a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, but the difference between these game states is the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display Since it is only the length of the period set as (second special figure fluctuation time), the player can determine whether the current game state is the first game state (normal state F1) or the second game state (high probability state F3) cannot be easily determined.

According to this feature, in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display 1 background image (background image for normal state F1) can be displayed, and the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display Means capable of displaying a second background image (background image for high probability state F3) different from the first background image (background image for normal state F1) in a second game state (high probability state F3) that can be played Therefore, the player can easily determine whether the current game state is the first game state (normal state F1) or the second game state (high probability state F3).

[Feature zA21]
A gaming machine according to any one of features zA1 to zA20,
Even if the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is put into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), A gaming machine comprising means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entrance of the 3rd ball entrance area (second big winning entrance 58a) will be in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered.

In this gaming machine, unlike a general gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the ball entrance of the third ball entrance area (second big winning mouth 58a) is in a ball-enterable state (open state). It's a disadvantage, not a thing.

According to this feature, when the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is brought into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), also has a means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a) will be in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the ball entry opening of the 3 ball entry area (the second big winning opening 58a) is in a ball entry possible state (open state). .

<Feature zB group>
The feature zB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zB1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The prize balls (15 pieces) paid out by the game balls entering the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) are the game balls entering the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out is greater than the number of prize balls (two) paid out by hitting the ball.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this feature, the prize balls (15 pieces) paid out by the game ball entering the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) are placed in the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). A configuration is adopted that is larger than the prize balls (two) paid out when the game balls enter. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, when the player aims at the distribution means (second distribution peg group 36b) and fires the game ball (hit to the right), Since the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time), the launched game ball is the second ball entering area (special winning opening 32s) The ball does not enter into the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). However, according to this feature, the prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) are placed in the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s). is smaller than the prize balls paid out by entering the ball, the player cannot increase the number of game balls on hand, and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, the player aims at the distribution means (second distribution peg group 36b) and fires the game ball (hit to the right). can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the gaming state (high probability state F3) in which the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 120 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time), the first flow path (second The game ball distributed to 1 route 36b1) reaches the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and enters the second ball entering area (special winning opening 32s). And, according to this characteristic, when the game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning opening 58a). To give the player a new feeling that a longer period should be set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) because more prize balls are paid out than in the case where the game is played, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature zC group>
The feature zC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zC1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of a non-working object (nail) that does not operate.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of non-working objects (nails) that do not operate. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If a configuration is adopted in which the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b) is an actuation object that operates, the player can shoot a game ball at the timing of the actuation of the actuation object, thereby increasing the value. It may become possible to distribute the game balls only to the first flow path (first route 36b1) having a high value.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) is composed of non-working objects (nails) that do not operate, so that the player can It becomes impossible to measure the timing of the operation of the operating object and shoot the game balls so that the game balls are distributed only to the path (first route 36b1). Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls at a ratio as originally assumed when the game machine is designed.

<Feature zD group>
The feature zD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zD1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A ball entry area (right out port 43r) that does not pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters a position where game balls distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) can enter. A game machine characterized by

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the player does not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game ball during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, a ball entry area is provided at a position where the game ball distributed to the second flow path can enter, and no prize ball is paid out even if the game ball enters the second flow path. It is possible to suppress the game balls distributed to reach the switching means contrary to the initial design assumption of the game machine.

<Feature zE group>
The feature zE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zE1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A gaming machine, wherein the results of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) include "missing" that does not cause the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the result of the predetermined lottery includes "loss" that does not cause the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state, and when the result of the predetermined lottery is "loss", the Even if the variable display ends, the switching means does not shift to the ball-enterable state. In this case, the game ball rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is kept in the second ball entry area (special winning opening) even after the end of the variable display. 32s), and can enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Therefore, according to this feature, in general gaming machines, the most disadvantageous result for the player, "missing", becomes the most advantageous result for the player. can do.

<Feature zF group>
The feature zF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zF1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that a game ball that has entered may remain in the game area and circulate.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that the entered game ball may remain in the game area and circulate. A game ball entered into the first ball entry area (second special figure starting port 34) may then reach the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b). In particular, in this feature, the more game balls that reach the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b), the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the pleasure of whether or not the game ball that entered the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) remains in the game area, and the pleasure of how to circulate the game area after that if it remains can be provided to the player.

<Feature zG group>
The feature zG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zG1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. In this game machine, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, when the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) ( When hitting to the right), the game ball may enter the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34). However, according to this feature, the first ball entering area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters, so the player can Even if game balls are shot aiming at one ball entry area (second special figure starting port 34), the number of game balls on hand cannot be increased and there is no merit. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal state F1) immediately after the start of the game, the player aims at the first ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) and shoots the game ball (hit to the right) ) can be suppressed.

<Characteristic zH group>
The feature zH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zH1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when the game ball enters the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), it is provided with means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability. In addition to the joy of having the ball enter the high value second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s), it is possible to give a sense of tension that the current advantageous game state will end.

<Feature zI>
The feature zI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zI1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and a distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can be entered in the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a), the means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability is provided. , every time a game ball enters the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a), there is a sense of urgency that the current advantageous game state (high probability state F3) may end. In addition, the game ball so that the game ball does not reach the switching means (second special electric role product 58b) at the timing when the switching means (second special electric role product 58b) is in a state where it can be entered. It is possible to provide the player with a new game such as adjusting the timing of the launch of the .

<Feature zJ group>
The feature zJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zJ1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting means (the second group of sorting nails 36b) is made of resin.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the distribution means is made of resin. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. If, unlike this feature, a structure in which the distribution means is made of iron is adopted, the distribution means will be plastically deformed by repeated collisions of game balls with the distribution means. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed at a rate different from the assumption. In this game machine, if the distribution ratio of the game balls by the distribution means changes, the main premise of the design will collapse, and the game will not be established. However, according to this feature, since the distribution means is formed of resin, even if the game ball repeatedly collides, it is difficult to plastically deform (only momentary elastic deformation). Therefore, even if the game machine is installed in the game hall for a long period of time and the game balls repeatedly collide with the distribution means, it is possible to distribute the game balls at the rate assumed at the beginning of the design of the game machine.

<Feature zK group>
The feature zK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zK1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game ball distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) enters both the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and the third ball entering area (second big winning opening 58a). A gaming machine characterized in that there are times when a ball is not played.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the game balls distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) are the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) and the third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a), even if the game ball is distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1), the distribution destination of the game ball is the second ball entry area ( Since it is not narrowed down to the special winning hole 32s) and the third ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a), it is possible to further diversify the game results.

<Feature zL group>
The feature zL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zL1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
a third flow path (third route) different from the first flow path (first route 36b1) and the second flow path (second route 36b2);
A ball entry area (out port) in which prize balls are not paid out even if a game ball enters a position where the game ball distributed to the third flow path (third route) can enter;
with
The distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path and the third flow path than to the first flow path. game machine.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the game ball enters the third channel different from the first channel and the second channel, and the position where the game ball distributed to the third channel can enter. and a ball-entering area where no prize balls are paid out even if the game ball is put out, and the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path and the third flow path than to the first flow path. It is possible to further increase the value of the game balls being distributed to the first flow path. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the pleasure when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path.

<Feature zM group>
The feature zM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zM1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that game balls distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) may reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the game ball distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2) may reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), The player reaches the switching means (second special electric role 58b) for the game balls distributed to the second flow path (second route 36b2), and then switches the switching means (second special electric role The expectation is that the player wants the ball to cross over the rolling means (plate-like member) of the object 58b) and enter the second ball-entering area (special winning hole 32s). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature zN group>
The feature zN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zN1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and a distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can be entered in the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A predetermined transition condition is established in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (When the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot), the second period (long fluctuation time) as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is provided with means for shifting to a second game state (high probability state F3).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when the game ball enters the V fixed winning opening 57av by winning the probability variable jackpot), the second period as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is provided with means for shifting to a second game state (high probability state F3). In this feature, the first period (short fluctuation Since it is more advantageous for the player than when the time (0.1 second)) is set, the predetermined transition condition is established early in the first game state (normal state F1) for the player (variable probability jackpot) , and the game ball enters the V-certain prize-winning opening 57av), and the expectation that the player wants to shift to the second game state (high-probability state F3) can be given.

<Feature zO group>
The feature zO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zO1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
Means capable of executing an expectation performance (reach performance) that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), the expectation degree production (reach production) is provided, a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) occurs and the advantageous state continues after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is completed. can be held by the player, and during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is executed, the switching means (second special electric role 58b ) maintains the non-enterable state (closed state), the game ball distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) enters the third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a). It is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the expectation degree performance (reach performance), the expectation degree performance The player can win many prize balls during the period during which the (ready-to-win effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended, the reach It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get any profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is.

<Feature zP group>
The feature zP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zP1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and a distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can be entered in the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) for displaying numerical information while subtracting numerical information during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), it is provided with a means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) that displays while subtracting the numerical information. The time until the 2 special symbol fluctuation display) ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) can be suggested to the player. can. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball can no longer reach the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) from the numerical information displayed in the effect. By adjusting the presence/absence and timing of shooting, it is possible to suppress useless shooting of game balls.

<Feature zQ group>
The feature zQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zQ1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
During the execution of the variable display in which the second period is set as the variable display time (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set), an effect to suggest that the player is in a good opportunity. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing (opportunity suggesting presentation).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the favorable state for the player is the variable display in which the second period is set (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set). is running. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game on this gaming machine for the first time to understand.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display in which the second period is set as the variable display time (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set), it is suggested to the player that it is a good opportunity. Since means capable of executing the performance (opportunity suggesting performance) is provided, the variable display in which the second period is set (the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set) is being executed for the player. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that this is a favorable situation for the player.

<Feature zR group>
The feature zR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zR1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
During execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), a first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and a second production different from the first production is executed continuously with the first production. A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing the production (step-up production 2).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, not only the lottery result after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), but also the period of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) How long it lasts is important for the player.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), the first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and the first production (step-up production 1) is performed continuously. Since means for executing a second effect (step-up effect 2) different from the first effect (step-up effect 1) is provided, the first effect (step-up effect 1) is executed for the player. When the second effect (step-up effect 1) is executed, the second effect (step-up effect 2) is executed continuously, and the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is still continued. It can make you feel the expectation that you want to do it.

<Feature zS group>
The feature zS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zS1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of displaying information on the number of game balls that have entered the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) (performance suggesting the number of game balls entered).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike a general gaming machine, the number of game balls entering the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) is not determined, but the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) is important for the player.

According to this feature, the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) is provided with means capable of displaying information about the number of game balls that have entered the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s). It is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the opening 32s).

<Feature zT group>
The feature zT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zT1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
The first background image in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display (Normal state F1 background image) can be displayed, and the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display A gaming machine comprising means capable of displaying a second background image (background image for high-probability state F3) different from the first background image in a second game state (high-probability state F3).

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming advantageous to

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a general gaming machine, when the game state is different, for example, the behavior of the normal electric accessory is different, so the player can easily determine which game state the current game state is.

However, in this game machine, the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display , There is a second game state (high probability state F3) in which a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, but the difference between these game states is the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display Since it is only the length of the period set as (second special figure fluctuation time), the player can determine whether the current game state is the first game state (normal state F1) or the second game state (high probability state F3) cannot be easily determined.

According to this feature, in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) can be set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display 1 background image (background image for normal state F1) can be displayed, and the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display Means capable of displaying a second background image (background image for high probability state F3) different from the first background image (background image for normal state F1) in a second game state (high probability state F3) that can be played Therefore, the player can easily determine whether the current game state is the first game state (normal state F1) or the second game state (high probability state F3).

<Feature zU group>
The feature zU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature zU1]
A first ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area;
Provided on the lower side than the first ball entry area, game balls are passed through a first flow path (first route 36b1 to the second special electric accessory 58b) and a second flow path (second route to the right out port 43r). 36b2) and distributing means (second distributing nail group 36b) capable of distributing at least
a second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) provided below the distribution means and having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A third ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
a switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first channel than in the second channel,
When the game balls are distributed, the distribution means is configured to distribute more game balls to the second flow path than to the first flow path,
The game machine further
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) according to a predetermined condition;
with
The switching means comprises a rolling means (a plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the third ball entry area,
When the second period is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the non-enterable state, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are A ball can enter the second ball entry area,
The game machine further
Even if the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is put into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), A gaming machine comprising means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entrance of the 3rd ball entrance area (second big winning entrance 58a) will be in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered.

According to this feature, many game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting peg group 36b) have a lower value for the player than the first route (first route 36b1). (Second route 36b2). On the other hand, the few remaining game balls that have reached the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b) have a higher value for the player than the second route (second route 36b2). It is distributed to the route 36b1) and reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) which is of high value to the player. Therefore, many game balls that have reached the distribution means (second distribution nail group 36b) reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), which has a high value for the player, and are excessive for the player. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming an advantageous situation for

Then, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-shaped member) has a first period (a short fluctuation time (0.0. After 1 second)) has passed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the third ball-entering area (second big winning hole 58a). It cannot reach the 2 ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the second It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the second ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display, distributed to the first flow path (first route 36b1) A situation where the game ball enters the third ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) without reaching the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), and the second ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) ) and enter the second ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set, the player shoots a game ball so that it reaches the sorting means (second sorting nail group 36b), thereby displaying the variable display. It is possible to make a profit during the execution of Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike a general gaming machine, the fact that the entrance of the third ball entrance area (second big winning entrance 58a) is in a ball-enterable state (open state) is not understood by the player. It's a disadvantage, not an advantage.

According to this feature, when the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is brought into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), also has a means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball-entering opening of the third ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a) will be in a state (open state) in which a ball can be entered. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the ball entry opening of the 3 ball entry area (the second big winning opening 58a) is in a ball entry possible state (open state). .

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and performance are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

<<4>> Fourth Embodiment:
<<4-0>> Introduction:
Conventionally, there is a desire to increase the number of balls that are put out other than winning a big win. Pachinko machines have been developed with increasing game states (so-called small win rushes). In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when a small winning is won in a second special lottery during a small winning rush and the variable display of the second special pattern stops at a pattern corresponding to the small winning, The special electric accessory is opened to allow the game ball to enter the big winning hole. That is, in a conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

In this way, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop the game. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period that the small winning rush ends as it is without being able to obtain the profit from the small winning.

In recent years, liquid crystal displays arranged in the center of the game board have been enlarged in order to increase the impact of the presentation, and the game area in which game balls can be distributed is becoming narrower. For this reason, in order to adopt a configuration for realizing a new game property for solving the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, it is necessary to efficiently flow down the game ball and adjust the area according to the new game specifications. There was a problem that it was necessary to efficiently arrange a new mechanism for leading to the game board.

A game machine according to the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as the game machine) aims to solve the problem of the small winning rush described above and to realize new game characteristics even in a narrow game area. A detailed description will be given below.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "first privilege" as a "first benefit", a "first ball entry section" as a "first ball entry area", and a "first It has a "first passage" as a "second flow path", a "second privilege" as a "second benefit", a "second ball entry area" as a "second ball entry area", and a "second passage". It has a "second passage" as a "second flow path", a "third ball entry part" as a "third ball entry area", a "third passage" as a "third flow path", and " It has an "actuating member" as the "actuating means", an "action part" as the "action area", a "rectification part" as the "rectification area", and a "fourth ball entrance area" as the "fourth ball entry area". a "fifth ball entry area" as a "fifth ball entry area"; an "internal lottery" as a "predetermined lottery"; and a "specific result" as a "predetermined result". a "switching unit" as a "switching means"; a "transition process" as a "transition means"; a "variation display unit" as a "variation display means"; A setting process” is provided, a “rolling portion” is provided as a “rolling means”, and a “specific advantageous result” is provided as a “predetermined advantageous result”.

The "first profit" may be anything that benefits the player, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls or a large number of prize balls are obtained. Transition to a game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) that is easy to play, transition to a game state (high probability mode) with a high probability of winning a special jackpot in a special lottery, increase the probability of winning a normal lottery in a normal lottery Transition to a high game state (high frequency support mode), transition to a game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, and the like.

The "first ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A special winning opening where a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out when a ball is hit, a general winning opening, a big winning opening, a winning ball giving area in the big winning opening, and a first special symbol when a game ball enters. 1st special figure starting port where variable display is executed, 2nd special figure starting port where variable display of 2nd special symbol is executed when game ball enters, game ball enters A normal pattern start gate where the variable display of the normal pattern is executed when the game ball enters, a V probability area where the game state shifts to the high probability mode when the game ball enters, special when the game ball enters Area V where the electric accessory shifts to a game state (special electric open/close execution mode) in which the electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, an out port provided at the bottom of the game board, and a special electric accessory that operates when a game ball enters. A special electric start gate, etc. can be mentioned.

The "first flow path" may be any passage-like area through which game balls can flow and which is separated from other areas. Passages, passages formed of resin, grooves formed in the game board, passages formed on the back side of the game board, space areas where game balls can flow down (can fall), and the like.

The "second profit" may be anything that benefits the player, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls or a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Transition to a game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) that is easy to play, transition to a game state (high probability mode) with a high probability of winning a special jackpot in a special lottery, increase the probability of winning a normal lottery in a normal lottery Transition to a high game state (high frequency support mode), transition to a game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, and the like.

The "second ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A general winning opening, a special winning opening, a large winning opening, a winning ball giving area in the big winning opening, and a third winning opening when a game ball enters. 1st special symbol starting port where the variable display of 1 special symbol is executed, the second special symbol starting port where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the game ball enters, game A normal pattern start gate where variable display of normal symbols is executed when a ball enters, a V probability area where the game state shifts to a high probability mode when a game ball enters, and a game ball enters V area where the special electric accessory shifts to a game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, the out port provided at the bottom of the game board, and the special electric accessory when the game ball enters A special electric starter that will operate, etc.

The "second flow path" may be any passage-like area through which game balls can flow and which is separated from other areas. Passages, passages formed of resin, grooves formed in the game board, passages formed on the back side of the game board, space areas where game balls can flow down (can fall), and the like.

The "third ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A ball entrance where one prize ball is paid out with a probability of 1/2 when a ball is hit, a special prize prize hole where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, The general winning opening, the big winning opening, the prize ball giving area in the big winning opening, the first special figure start opening where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game ball enters, and the game ball enters A second special symbol starting gate where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the ball is hit, a normal symbol start gate where the variable display of the normal symbol is executed when the game ball enters, V certain area where the game state shifts to the high probability mode when the game ball enters, V shifts to the game state (special electric open/close execution mode) where the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times when the game ball enters area, the out port provided at the bottom of the game board, a special electric starting port where the special electric accessory will operate when the game ball enters, and the like.

The "third flow path" may be any passage-like area through which game balls can flow and which is separated from other areas. Passages formed in, passages formed by nails, passages formed by resin, grooves formed in the game board, passages formed on the surface side of the game board, game balls can flow down (can fall) spatial domain, and the like.

The "operating means" may be any structure that can be in a non-operating state (stationary state) and an operating state. , a rotating device that can be in a stationary state and a predetermined rotating state, a special electric accessory that can be in a closed state and a state in which opening and closing operations are being performed, and a normal electric accessory. .

The "fourth ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A second special symbol starting port at which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the ball is hit, and a first special symbol at which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game ball enters. Special figure start gate, normal figure start gate where variable display of normal symbols is executed when game ball enters, general figure where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when game ball enters Winning opening, big winning opening, special winning opening, V certain area where game state shifts to high probability mode when game ball enters, game in which special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times when game ball enters The V area that shifts to the state (special electric opening and closing execution mode), the out port provided at the bottom of the game board, the special electric accessory that will operate when the game ball enters, etc. be done.

The "fifth ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. When a game ball enters a big winning hole, a special winning hole, a general winning hole, or when a game ball enters, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The first special figure start opening, the second special figure start opening where the second special symbol variation display is executed when the game ball enters, and the normal symbol variation display when the game ball enters will be executed, the V probability area where the game state shifts to the high probability mode when the game ball enters, and the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times when the game ball enters The V area that shifts to the game state (special electric open/close execution mode), the out port provided at the bottom of the game board, the special electric accessory that activates the special electric accessory when the game ball enters, etc. mentioned.

The "predetermined lottery" may be a lottery in which a random number is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the result is determined based on the random number, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. , For example, the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening, the first executed based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening Special figure lottery, normal figure lottery that is executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the normal figure start gate, and the like.

The "predetermined result" may be a result that triggers the switching means to shift to the ball-enterable state. If possible, for example, a special figure small hit, a special figure big hit (variable, normal, 2R, 16R, etc.), a general figure hit, and the like.

The "switching means" may be configured to switch the ball entrance of the ball entry area between the state where the ball can be entered and the state where the ball cannot be entered. Special electric accessories that shift from the closed state to the open state when winning a special small hit or a special jackpot, or a normal electric that shifts from a closed state to an open state when winning a general drawing in a general drawing lottery role, etc. In addition, as a configuration of the special electric accessory and the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a plate-shaped member closing the ball entrance slides in the front and back direction of the game board to open the ball entrance ( shutter type), a configuration in which the plate-shaped member that closes the ball entrance rotates around a rotation axis parallel to the game board, so that the ball entrance can be opened, and the ball entrance is closed. A structure (so-called electric tulip type) that can open the ball entrance by rotating a pair of piece members (blade member, valve member) clockwise or counterclockwise, closing the ball entrance Various configurations can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the entrance can be opened by rotating a piece member (blade member, valve member) clockwise or counterclockwise.

The 'variable display means' may be configured to display (variably display) a state in which predetermined patterns, characters, graphics, symbols, images, etc. fluctuate (change state) for a predetermined period of time. If the gist of can be realized, for example, a second special symbol display unit configured by an LED lamp, a first special symbol display unit, a symbol display device configured by a liquid crystal display device, a normal LED lamp configured by A pattern display part, etc. are mentioned.

The "rolling means" may be any structure as long as it allows the game ball to roll for a predetermined period of time and enter the ball entry area. A plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction (a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board), a plate-shaped member that can rotate around a rotation axis parallel to the game board, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise possible piece members (blade members, valve members), and the like.

The "predetermined advantageous result" may be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a special figure jackpot (variable, normal, 2R, 16R, etc.), a normal figure hit, etc.

Although the details will be described later, this gaming machine is capable of executing an expectation performance that indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the internal lottery will be a specific advantageous result during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. During execution of the variable display, the switching unit maintains the fifth ball-entering unit in a non-enterable state, so that the game ball distributed to the first passage can enter the fifth ball-entering unit. It is possible to enter the ball into the first ball entering portion without the first ball entering portion. In other words, the player can obtain a profit during execution of the variable display in which the expectation effect is executed. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this gaming machine, even though the expectation effect is executed during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery, the player does not win the specific advantageous result in the internal lottery, and the result is disadvantageous to the player. Even if the advantageous game state is ended by winning, the player can acquire many prize balls during the period when the expectation performance is executed, so the advantageous game state is ended. It is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large number of prize balls are paid out immediately before, and to alleviate the player's anger and loss due to the end of the advantageous game state. becomes. Thus, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state in which the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the first ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to this game machine, in the normal game state in which the operating member is in the non-operating state, the game ball that has reached the operating member flows down the third passage and cannot reach the switching portion. On the other hand, in the new rush state that solves the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, the operating member is in the operating state, and the game ball that reaches the operating member in the new rush state flows down the first passage or the second passage. , the game balls distributed to the first path are guided to the switching section.

Therefore, according to this gaming machine, in the normal gaming state, the player cannot obtain a profit even if the game ball is shot aiming at the operating member, and on the other hand, the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above In the new rush state (game state in which the operating member is in the operating state) that solves the problem, the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the operating member so that the game ball can reach the switching part efficiently. A new playability can be realized.

According to the game machine, the first passage and the second passage through which the game ball that has reached the operating member in the operating state flows down, and the third passage through which the game ball that has reached the operating member in the non-operating state flows down are provided. Since the surfaces of the game board on which the flow paths are formed are different in the front and back directions, it is possible to efficiently provide three passages for guiding game balls to predetermined areas in a narrow area of the game board. A passage (first passage and second passage) through which game balls that reach the operating member in the operating state flow down, and a passage (third passage) through which the game ball that reaches the operating member in the non-operating state flows down. They can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

As described above, according to the present game machine, by appropriately setting the value of the passage distributed by the operating member, the player can have a sense of anticipation, and a plurality of passages can be efficiently provided on the game board. becomes possible.

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as a fourth embodiment.

<<4-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 164 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the fourth embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a special lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, or at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can "hit to the right". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

165 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the game area PA consists of a left side game area PAL in which game balls fired by "left hitting" can circulate, and a central lower game area PAC in which game balls circulating in the left side game area PAL can reach. , and a right game area PAR in which game balls shot by "right hitting" can circulate.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 32, a first special prize starting port 33, a second special prize starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, a general prize starting gate 35, a first special electric prize winning device 57, and a second special electric winning prize. A device 58, a special winning opening 32s, a right winning opening 36i, a lower entrance opening 36h, an out opening 43, a sorting nail group 36a, an action nail area 36c, a straightening nail area 36d, an electric sorting device 36e, and a stage 36x are provided. ing. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided in the central lower game area PAC where the game ball fired by "left hitting" can reach, and the stage 36x above the first special figure starting port 33 is provided, and in order from the upstream side of the right game area PAR where the game ball fired by "right hitting" can reach, the first special electric winning device 57, the distribution nail group 36a, the normal figure start gate 35, the normal Electric accessories 34b, second special figure start opening 34, working nail area 36c, rectifying nail area 36d, electric distribution device 36e, right winning opening 36i, second special electric winning apparatus 58, special winning opening 32s and lower ball entrance 36h is provided. Each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entry part having a ball entry hole into which game balls can enter, and five game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls when the game balls enter. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 .

The first special figure start port 33 is a ball entrance portion having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are released from the payout device 71 as prize balls. Along with the payout, the first special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is executed. As a result of the first special drawing lottery, when a special jackpot is won, a special electric opening/closing execution mode in which a special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b) described later executes an opening/closing operation starts. be done. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening and closing process of the special electric accessory is started, the special electric opening and closing period is the period in which the opening and closing of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is the special After the opening and closing process of the electric accessory is completed, it is a waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b is the object of opening/closing operation is started. In this way, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability.

The first special electric prize winning device 57 includes a first big prize winning port 57a into which a game ball can enter, and a first special electric accessory 57b having a function of opening and closing the entrance of the first big prize winning port 57a. In addition, in the present embodiment, inside the first big winning hole 57a, a V winning hole 57av into which a game ball can enter is provided.

The first special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 57a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a.

In the present embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member and is provided at both ends of the lower side of the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward (front side). and a support that supports the In the closed state, the first special electric accessory 57b is stored so that the plate-like member is flush with the game board 30, and the first special electric accessory 57b flows from above. A game ball can pass through the front side (front side) of the first special electric accessory 57b. On the other hand, in the open state, the plate-like member of the first special electric accessory 57b is rotated forward (front side) around the support portion, and the first special electric accessory 57b A game ball circulating from the above becomes a state in which it can be entered into the first big winning hole 57a.

The first big winning hole 57a is a ball hole into which a game ball can enter when the first special electric accessory 57b is in an open state. Game balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as prize balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first big winning opening 57a.

The V fixed winning opening 57av is an entrance into which a game ball that has entered the first big winning opening 57a can enter. The lottery mode of the special lottery is a high probability mode. The details of the lottery mode of the special figure lottery will be described later.

The sorting nail group 36a is a nail group for changing the direction of distribution (falling) of game balls, and is provided below the first special electric accessory 57b. The sorting nail group 36a sorts the reached game balls into a route leading to the normal figure starting gate 35 and a route leading to the action nail region 36c at a ratio of about 1:4.

The normal pattern start gate 35 is a through-hole type ball entry part having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball that enters the normal pattern start gate 35 remains in the game area PA and can be distributed. is. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main controller 60 executes the normal pattern lottery. As a result of the general drawing lottery, there are "normal drawing hit" that shifts the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter, and "normal drawing off" that does not shift the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter. include. As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern lottery is won, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode including the transition processing for shifting the normal electric accessory 34b to the open state is executed. The general electric switching execution mode is composed of a general electric opening period, a general electric switching processing period, and a general electric ending period. The general electric opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the general electric opening/closing period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The electric ending period is a standby period after the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessary 34b is completed, until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

A second special figure start port 34 having a normal electric accessory 34b is arranged downstream of the normal figure start gate 35, and a game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 is provided with the normal electric accessory 34b. It is guided to the second special figure starting port 34.

The ordinary electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second special figure start port 34, and when the above-described ordinary electric open/close execution mode is started, the game ball becomes an open state in which the ball can enter the second special figure starting port 34.

The second special figure start port 34 is a fourth ball entry portion having a ball entry port into which a game ball can be entered, and is provided in the right side game area PAR in this embodiment. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71, and the second special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is performed. executed. As a result of the second special drawing lottery, when winning a special jackpot or a special small prize as a specific result, a special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b) to be described later is opened. A special electric opening and closing execution mode including transition processing to shift to is started. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, the special figure off is not set, and only the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit is set. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the special figure big win or special figure small win is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the second special electric accessory 58b is the object of the opening/closing operation is started. In this way, when the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 34, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability. In this embodiment, the second special figure starting port 34 is provided in the right side game area PAR, but the position of the second special figure starting port 34 is not limited to this, and the gist of the present invention is not limited to this. Other locations may be provided if feasible. For example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be provided in the left side game area PAL, or may be provided below the stage 36x in the central lower game area PAC.

The action nail region 36c is a region provided with a plurality of game nails, and is a region that functions as an action portion that randomly acts on the game ball to flow down by the game nail. A rectifying nail region 36d is provided below the working nail region 36c.

The rectifying nail region 36d is a region that functions as a rectifying section that rectifies the reached game balls so that they can flow down one by one. In this embodiment, adjacent two nails are provided in the straightening nail region 36d in a bilaterally symmetrical manner, and game balls can flow downward one by one from the gaps between the two nails. there is An electric distribution device 36e is provided below the straightening nail region 36d.

The electric distribution device 36e is a rotatably supported operating member having a V-shape, and is configured to be in a non-operating state (stationary state) and an operating state according to the game state. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (normal state F1) described later, the V-shaped corners are in a non-operating state (see FIG. 165(A)) facing downward. After reaching the non-operating electric distribution device 36e, the game ball is temporarily held between the two V-shaped pieces of the electric distribution device 36e, and then the game board on the back side of the electric distribution device 36e. The ball is guided to the back communicating ball entrance 36f, which is the ball entrance provided in the 30, and enters the ball. A game ball entering the back communication ball inlet 36f is guided to the back side of the game board 30 and circulates through a central route U, which is a third passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. - 特許庁A back communicating ball opening 36g is provided at the end point of the central route U, and a game ball entering the back communicating ball entrance 36f circulates through the central route U and then again from the back communicating ball opening 36g to the game board. 30 is led to the surface side. A lower ball entry port 36h, which is a third ball entry portion into which a game ball can be entered, is provided below the rear communicating ball entry port 36g.

On the other hand, in the later-described high-accuracy-high support state (high-accuracy-high support state F3), the electric distribution device 36e distributes the reached game ball to the left route L, which is the first passage, in the left distribution state (Fig. 165 (B ) in which the V-shaped corner faces upward to the right), and a right distribution state in which the reached game ball is distributed to the right-hand route R, which is the second passage (V-shaped corner shown in FIG. 165(C) is pointing upward to the left), and the operating state alternately repeats. In this operating state, since the back communicating ball entrance 36f on the back side of the electric sorting device 36e is closed by the V-shaped corner, the game ball that reaches the electric sorting device 36e in the operating state It becomes impossible to enter the ball through the communication entrance 36f, and the ball is sorted to the left route L or the right route R. In this embodiment, the electric sorting device 36e maintains the left sorting state for 0.3 seconds in the operating state, then shifts to the right sorting state over 0.05 seconds, and shifts the right sorting state to 0. 0. After maintaining for 6 seconds, it takes 0.05 seconds to shift to the left side distribution state, and the operation of maintaining the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds is repeated. As a result, the game balls reaching the operating electric sorting device 36e are sorted to the left route L and the right route R at a ratio of 1:2. The game balls distributed to the left route L are guided to the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58 . On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the right route R is guided to the right winning hole 36i, which is the second ball entering part, and enters, and one prize ball is paid out as the second privilege.

The second special electric prize winning device 58 includes a second large prize winning port 58a which is a fifth ball entering portion having a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter, and a ball entering state (open state) of the second large prize winning port 58a. ) and a second special electric accessory 58b having a function as a switching unit capable of switching between a ball-entering disabled state (closed state).

The second special electric accessory 58b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 58a. is in an open state in which a ball can enter the second big winning hole 58a.

In this embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b includes a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member and a drive section capable of moving the plate-like member in the front-rear direction. In the closed state, the second special electric accessory 58b is in a state in which the plate-like member protrudes forward (front side) of the game board 30, and a game ball can roll on the upper surface of the plate-like member. It is in a state in which a simple rolling part is configured. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is in a state where the plate-like member is housed on the rear side of the game board 30, and rolls on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate-like member. The game ball that was being held or the game ball that circulated (dropped) from above the second special electric accessory 58b can enter the second big winning hole 58a provided below the plate-like member. . In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b. This protrusion reduces the speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b. As a result, the time required for the game ball to roll from the right end to the left end of the rolling portion on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b of this embodiment is 2.0 seconds or longer.

The second big prize-winning opening 58a is a fifth ball-entering portion having a ball-entering opening into which a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in an open state. , two game balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as prize balls. It should be noted that the above-described V guaranteed winning opening is not provided inside the second big winning opening 58a.

The special winning hole 32s is a first ball-entering part having a ball-entering hole into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, 15 prize balls are paid out from a payout device 71 as a first privilege. . In this embodiment, the special prize winning port 32s is provided on the left end side and the downstream side of the second special electric prize winning device 58, and flows through the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state to the left end. Only game balls are allowed to enter. In other words, when the second special electric accessory 58b shifts to the open state while the game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the plate member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state, the game ball moves downward. , the ball falls into the second big prize-winning hole 58a, cannot reach the special prize-winning hole 32s, and cannot enter the special prize-winning hole 32s.

The lower ball entrance 36h is a third ball entrance portion having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the rear communicating ball entrance 36g. A game ball ejected to the surface side of the game board 30 from the back communicating ball opening 36g can enter the lower ball entrance 36h.

Inside the lower ball entrance 36h, there are a first internal passage 36h1, a second internal passage 36h2, and a game ball entered into the lower ball entrance 36h through either the first internal passage 36h1 or the second internal passage 36h2. A sorting valve 36h3 for sorting is provided. The distribution valve 36h3 distributes a game ball that has entered the lower ball entrance 36h to the first internal passage 36h1, and a game ball that has entered the lower ball entrance 36h to the second internal passage 36h2. The second distribution state of distributing and the operation of repeating alternately are performed, and in this embodiment, the game balls entered into the lower ball entrance 36h are transferred to the first internal passage 36h1 and the second internal passage 36h1 at a ratio of 1:1. It operates so as to be distributed to the internal passage 36h2.

A winning opening 36h1a is provided at the end of the first internal passage 36h1, and when a game ball enters the winning opening 36h1a, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball. On the other hand, an out port 36h2a is provided at the end of the second internal passage 36h2, and prize balls are not paid out when a game ball enters the out port 36h2a. That is, one or less prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h.

The out port 43 is provided at the lowest part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. Not only the mode, but also a mode in which the game ball remains in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area and continues to flow (flow down). In addition, general winning opening 32, special winning opening 32s, first special starting opening 33, second special starting opening 34, first big winning opening 57a, second big winning opening 58a and V fixed winning opening 57av In some cases, the entry of the ball is expressed as "winning".

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first special figure display portion 37a, a second special figure display portion 37b, a first special figure reservation display portion 37c, and a second special figure reservation display portion 37d.

The first special symbol display unit 37a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. The first special symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the first special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first special symbol starting port 33 as a trigger. When the first special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, the first special symbol display unit 37a displays corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. After that, the first special symbol display unit 37a performs stop display of the first special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display section 37a to when it is stopped is also referred to as the first special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the 7-segment display that constitutes the first special symbol display unit 37a flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), then the first special figure lottery lights up (stopped display) in a predetermined mode corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the first special symbol display section 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also referred to as a first special symbol game cycle. That is, the first special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery for each first special figure game round. In addition, the time required for one first special game round is also called the first special game time. The first special symbol game time is the first special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 37a to the stop display of the result of the first special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the first special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the first special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the first special figure stop time is constant (1.0 seconds). Therefore, by determining the first special figure fluctuation time, the first special figure game time is uniquely determined.

The second special symbol display portion 37b is a variable display portion that performs variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second special symbol starting port 34 as a trigger. When the second special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34, the second special symbol display unit 37b displays a display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. After that, the second special symbol display unit 37b performs stop display of the second special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the second special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol display portion 37b is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the 7 segment display device that constitutes the second special figure display part 37b flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), and then the second special figure lottery. Lights up (stops display) in a predetermined manner corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the second special symbol display portion 37b is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also referred to as a second special symbol game cycle. That is, the second special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery for each second special figure game. In addition, the time required for one second special game time is also called the second special game time. The second special symbol game time is the second special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b to the stop display of the result of the second special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the second special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the second special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special figure stop time is constant. Therefore, by determining the second special figure fluctuation time, the second special figure game time is uniquely determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the game ball is the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, it has a function to suspend the execution of the first special figure lottery or the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball (also called special figure reservation function), A first special figure reservation display unit 37c that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations in the first special figure lottery, and a second special figure reservation display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations in the reserved second special figure lottery. 37d.

The first special figure reservation display unit 37c is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special figure lottery that has been reserved (information on the number of game balls entered in the first special figure start port 33). be. In this embodiment, the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is suspended up to four (4 times). In the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation display portion 37c is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 1 lottery lights up.

The second special figure reservation display portion 37d is a display portion that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved second special figure lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is suspended up to four (4 times). In the present embodiment, the second special figure reservation display portion 37d is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 2 lottery lights up.

Further, in the present embodiment, when both the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery are reserved, the second special figure lottery is preferentially executed, and the second special figure lottery is all reserved. After it is gone, it is configured to execute the first special figure lottery (so-called special 2 priority machine). Specifically, for example, when the first special lottery is held two (twice) and the second special lottery is held three (three times), the second special lottery After being executed three times and no longer held, the first special figure lottery will be executed twice. However, if the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 before the last second special figure lottery that has been withheld ends and the second special figure lottery is suspended again, it will be suspended. The first special figure lottery will not be executed until the second special figure lottery is completed.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display portion 38a and a normal pattern reservation display portion 38b.

The normal symbol display unit 38a is a variable display unit that performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols. The normal symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery, is executed with the entry of a game ball into the normal figure start gate 35 as a trigger. When the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display unit 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. , Performs variable display of normal symbols. After that, the normal symbol display unit 38a performs a normal symbol stop display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to the stop display in the normal symbol display section 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 38a is composed of a 7-segment display device in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the 7-segment display that constitutes the normal pattern display part 38a blinks in a predetermined manner (after the variable display), and corresponds to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. Lights up in a predetermined manner (stops display). However, the normal symbol display section 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display section 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal pattern game cycle. That is, the normal game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the normal game lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the normal game start gate 35 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one normal-pattern lottery for each normal-pattern game round. In addition, the time required for one normal game time is also called normal game time. The normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display in the normal pattern display section 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped. It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the displayed time. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal map stop time is constant (0.1 second). Therefore, the normal pattern game time is uniquely determined by the normal pattern fluctuation time being determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball It has a function to suspend execution (also referred to as a normal pattern reservation function), and includes the above-described normal pattern reservation display section 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved general pattern lottery reservations.

The normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the normal pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 pieces (4 times). In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery lights up.

The round display unit 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game means that a predetermined time (maximum open time) has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls entered) of game balls enter the big winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is met. The number of round games differs according to the type per special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display unit 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening/closing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening/closing period. In this embodiment, the round display unit 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment displays in which 7 segment light-emitting units are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. However, the round display section 39 is not limited to the two 7-segment displays, and may have another configuration.

Each display unit constituting the main display unit 45 described above is not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light-emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices, such as a matrix display, capable of showing the draw process and the draw results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display) is employed as the pattern display device 41 . The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100 which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display), and various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT may be employed.

When the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is displayed variably and stopped, the symbol display device 41 variably displays the decorative symbols accordingly. and stop display. In addition, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols, and also displays various effects such as advance notice effects and effects during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the decorative pattern and the pattern display device 41 which are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. FIG. 166(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 166(A), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 166B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a. As a modified example, a sub-display area SA, which is smaller than the main display area MA, may be displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 166(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1 for each decorative design row.

In this embodiment, the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol display part 37a or the second special symbol display part 37b When the variable display of the two special symbols is started, the variable display in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each decorative design to be scrolled is switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative design row Z1, decorative design row Z3, and decorative design row Z2. After that, in synchronization with the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display part 37a or the second special symbol display part 37b, one for each of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed. When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery by the main control device 60 is a special big hit, when the variable display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row is finished and the display is stopped. Then, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The manner of variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative design row is not limited to the above-described manner, but includes the number of decorative design rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of decorative designs in each decorative design row, and the Various modes can be adopted as modes of variable display of decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be explained. Reach means the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to winning is formed on the activated line L1 in some of the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It means a display state in which a certain combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and in this state, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the win refers to the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1, and in the state in which the reach line is formed, the decorative patterns are scrolled (variably displayed) in the decorative pattern row Z2. ) state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern forming the reach line is stop-displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the decorative patterns are displayed in the remaining decorative pattern row in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform the ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, a combination of decorative patterns formed with reach lines is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to produce a reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 166(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first special figure reservation display area Ds1 and a second special figure reservation display area Ds2.

In the first special figure reservation display area Ds1, the number of the first special figure lotteries reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 (number of reserved first special figure lotteries) is displayed. be done. The pending first special drawing lottery is the first special drawing drawing that has not been executed, and the first special drawing that has not started the variable display of the first special drawing for informing the result of the drawing of the first special drawing drawing. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of first special figure lotteries that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved first special figure lotteries.

In the second special figure reservation display area Ds2, the number of second special figure lotteries (the number of reserved second special figure lotteries) that are reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is displayed. be done. The second special lottery pending is the second special lottery that has not been executed, and the second special lottery that has not started the variable display of the second special symbol for informing the lottery result of the second special lottery. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of second special figure lotteries that can be reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved second special figure lotteries.

Further, as shown in FIG. 166(B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, blinking display and The first special figure synchronization display unit Sync1 that performs lighting display and the second special figure synchronization that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol displayed in the second special symbol display unit 37b and a display unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed in the first special symbol display portion 37a, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync1 blinks and displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol display portion 37b, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync2 blinks and the second special symbol stops in the second special symbol display portion 37b. When displaying, the special figure synchronous display unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a first special figure reservation display area Ds1, a second special figure reservation display area Ds2, and a first special figure synchronization display section Sync1. , And, although the second special figure synchronous display part Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

Below the pattern display device 41, a stage 36x is provided. The stage 36x is composed of a rolling stage 36x1 and a distribution stage 36x2. The rolling stage 36x1 is a downstream part that rolls and flows down game balls toward the sorting stage 36x2. The distribution stage 36x2 is a part that can distribute game balls to at least the central route, the right route, and the left route, and directly acts on the distributed game balls as a result. In this embodiment, when distributing game balls, the distribution stage 36x2 is configured to distribute more game balls to the right route and the left route than to the central route. That is, the total number of game balls distributed to the right route and the game balls distributed to the left route is larger than the number of game balls distributed to the central route. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided below the distribution stage 36x2, and the game balls distributed to the central route are likely to enter the first special figure starting port 33. . Therefore, the central route is more valuable to the player than the right and left routes. In the present embodiment, the sorting stage 36x2 is made of resin and adopts a configuration that does not operate. In addition, in this embodiment, the third ball entering section does not pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters a position where the game ball sorted to the right route or the left route by the sorting stage 36x2 can enter. An out port 43 is provided. In addition, there is a case where the game ball distributed to the central route by the distribution stage 36x2 does not enter either the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34. In the present embodiment, the distribution stage 36x2 is configured to have three routes, namely, the central route, the right route, and the left route, but instead of this configuration, the left route (or the right route) is provided. This may be omitted, and when game balls are distributed, more game balls may be distributed to the right route (or left route) than to the central route. Also in this configuration, the game balls distributed to the central route are more likely to enter the first special figure starting port 33, so the central route is more valuable to the player than the right route (or left route). is high.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the normal electric accessory 34b is set to the non-enterable state during execution of the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure start port 34. , The game balls distributed to the central route by the distribution stage 36x2 are, regardless of the state of the normal electric accessory 34b and each special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b and second special electric accessory 58b), It is possible to enter the first special figure start opening 33 having an entrance opening whose upper surface is open. According to this configuration, for example, when the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure start port 34 during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol, or the number of reservations of the second special figure lottery is the maximum value (4 pieces) and there is no profit even if the game ball is entered into the second special figure start port 34, the player aims at the first special figure start port 33 to shoot the game ball. becomes possible. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of always aiming for a profit by appropriately hitting different game balls according to the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general figure start gate 35, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure start port 34 are provided on the upper side of the distribution stage 36x2 (in other words, the distribution stage 36x2 is The configuration provided below the normal figure start gate 35, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure start port 34) was adopted, but instead of this configuration, the normal electric accessory 34b and the second special figure A configuration in which the starting port 34 is provided on the lower side of the distribution stage 36x2 may be adopted, and the game ball distributed to the right route by the distribution stage 36x2 may reach the normal electric accessory 34b. . According to this configuration, even if the game ball is distributed to the right route by the distribution stage 36x2, if the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state, the game ball is transferred to the second special figure start port 34 Since there is a possibility that the ball will hit the ball at the time, it is possible to give the player a further chance and improve the interest in the game.

<<4-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the detection sensors provided for each of the above-described various entrances. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from these detection sensors. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, and the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. Run a special draw.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are the main display unit 45, the first special electric accessory driving unit 57c for opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b, and the second special electric accessory driving unit 57c for opening and closing the second special electric accessory 58b. The 2 special electric accessory drive unit 58c, the normal electric accessory drive unit 34c that opens and closes the normal electric accessory 34b, and the electric distribution device drive unit 36ez that operates the electric distribution device 36e are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, when the first special figure lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first special symbol display portion 37a in the main display portion 45, and when the second special figure lottery is performed , the display control of the second special symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45 is performed, and when the normal figure lottery is performed, the display control of the normal symbol display portion 38a in the main display portion 45 is performed, and the special electric opening and closing execution When the mode is executed, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is executed. Further, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives the first special electric role product 57c or the second special electric role product driving unit 57c or the second special electric role product drive so that the first special electric role product 57b or the second special electric role product 58b is opened and closed. The drive control of the unit 58c is executed, and in the normal electric opening and closing execution mode, the drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 34c is executed so that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and closed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . The main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls set for each ball entrance based on the ball entry determination result to the payout controller 70 . When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns that are finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, the content of ready-to-win presentation, and the content of presentation to be executed while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game cycle, is uniquely determined by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in the RAM 64. FIG. As shown in FIG. 168, the RAM 64 is provided with various counters used for internal lottery by the MPU 62 . Specifically, in this embodiment, the RAM 64 includes a special figure validity determination counter Cs1, a special figure type determination counter Cs2, a special figure reach determination counter Cs3, a special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and a general figure validity determination counter Cs1. A decision counter Cn1, a normal figure type decision counter Cn2, and a random number initial value counter Cini are provided. The special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used when determining the lottery result of the special figure lottery. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used for the special figure reach determination to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 are varied. Also, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b. In addition, the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 are used for the general pattern lottery. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial value when the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2, and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

Moreover, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure reservation area 64b, a special figure determination area 64c, a general figure reservation area 64d, and a general figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entrance ball It is stored in time series in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the special figure success judgment counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry ball, the special figure Each value of the figure type determination counter Cs2 and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in time series in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 at the timing of the entry are stored in time series in the normal pattern reservation area 64d. be.

Next, the details of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not to win the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure success/failure determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. Special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1. Incidentally, the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 65535).

The value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entering ball is a special figure. It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the reservation area 64b. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

Each time a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, up to four values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 are stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b. Similarly, the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and is moved to the special figure determination area 64c in the order in which it was stored. Then, the value of the special figure judgment counter Cs1 moved to the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the special figure is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of this special symbol, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is updated periodically, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the value of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the above-described special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 in the order in which they are stored.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure validity determination using the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64e. Then, from among a plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure propriety determination is selected, and a special figure determination area 64e The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of special symbol. And MPU62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator which the special design display part 38a stops and displays based on the classification of the determined special design.

Next, the details of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 will be described. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used when determining whether or not the reach occurs when the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is not per special figure. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is periodically updated, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the values of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special figure success determination counter Cs1 and special figure type determination It is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b together with the value of the counter Cs2.

The value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the values of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 described above in order of being stored.

MPU62, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit in the special figure propriety determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM63 It is compared with the special figure reach determination table, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. In addition, when the result of the special figure propriety determination in the special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the MPU 62 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is acquired immediately before the start of the special symbol variation display. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, the details of the general/universal pattern right/wrong determination counter Cn1 will be described. The general pattern success/failure determination counter Cn1 is used to determine whether or not to be elected per general pattern. The general pattern success determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per this general pattern, is part of the general pattern lottery described above. The normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1.

The normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d at the timing of the passage.

Each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, up to four values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and are moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 moved to the general pattern determination area 64e is collated with the general pattern correctness determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the general pattern is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the normal pattern type. The normal pattern type determination, which is the determination of the type of normal pattern, is part of the normal pattern lottery described above. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored in the general pattern holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 described above is stored in the order of storage. It moves to the normal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern validity determination. Then, from among a plurality of general pattern type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one general pattern type determination table corresponding to the result of the general pattern propriety determination is selected, and a general pattern determination area 64e is selected. The value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general pattern type determination table, and the normal pattern type is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 38a based on the determined normal symbol type.

Next, the special figure propriety determination table will be described.

FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values within the range from 0 to 65535 in the special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1 be done. Then, according to the acquired value of the special figure success determination counter Cs1 and the special figure success determination table, the special figure success determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is performed. done.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low probability mode with a low probability of winning the special figure jackpot as a lottery mode for special figure win/loss determination (special figure lottery), and a probability of winning the special figure jackpot higher than the low probability mode. It is configured to be able to execute a high probability mode and a special figure lottery table for the low probability mode used in the special figure lottery in the low probability mode, and a special figure lottery in the high probability mode. It is equipped with a special figure propriety determination table for high probability mode. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, different special figure propriety determination tables are provided for the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery. That is, in this embodiment, the following four types of special figure propriety determination tables are provided as the special figure propriety determination tables used in the special figure lottery.
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)

As shown in FIG. 169(A), the first special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 654 values from 0 to 653 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/100.2 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 169(B), the second special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 654 values from 0 to 653 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to win the special figure small hit there is That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success judgment) in the low probability mode is about 1/100.2 probability that the special figure jackpot will be won, and the special figure jackpot will be won. If you do not win, you will win a special prize.

As shown in FIG. 169(C), the first special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 655 values from 0 to 654 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode, the special figure jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/100.1.

As shown in FIG. 169 (D), the second special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 655 values from 0 to 654 are set as values to win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values to win the special figure small hit there is That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure suitability determination) in the high probability mode is about 1/100.1 probability of winning the special figure jackpot, and the special figure jackpot If you do not win, you will win a special prize.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values in the range from 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2 be done. Then, special figure type determination for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is performed based on the result of the above-described special figure propriety determination and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment comprises a first special figure type determination table used in the first special figure lottery and a second special figure type determination table used in the second special figure lottery.

As shown in FIG. 170 (A), according to the first special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure success determination is the special figure jackpot winning, the acquired special figure type determination counter Regardless of the value of Cs2, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design A (2R probability variation jackpot), and if the result of the special figure propriety determination is out of the special figure, the acquired special Regardless of the value of the figure type determination counter Cs2, the special symbol type (stop symbol type) is determined to be the special symbol Z (off).

As shown in FIG. 170 (B), according to the second special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is the special figure jackpot winning, the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 0 to 49, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design B (2R normal jackpot), and the result of the special design hit/fail determination is a special jackpot winning, When the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 50 to 99, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined as a special symbol C (16R probability variation big hit), and the special figure right or wrong When the result of the determination is the special figure small winning, regardless of the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special symbol type (stop symbol type) is determined to be a special symbol a (small hit). be done.

Of the special design types (types of stop design), special design A (2R probability variation jackpot), special design B (2R normal jackpot), special design C (16R probability variation jackpot) and special design a (small hit) are common in that they trigger the execution of the special electric switching execution mode, but differ in the type of the special electric switching scenario selected when the special electric switching execution mode is executed.

The special electric switching scenario is a control program that stores the mode of control of the first special electric role 57b or the second special electric role 58b in the special electric switching execution mode. The mode of opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switching scenario selection table. The special electric opening/closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of the special symbol when winning the special figure jackpot or the special figure small prize.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the special electric switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment, a special electric switching scenario A is set corresponding to the special symbol A, and a special electric switching scenario B is set corresponding to the special symbol B. A special electric switching scenario C is set corresponding to the special symbol C, and a special electric switching scenario a is set corresponding to the special symbol a. That is, if the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol A, the special electric opening and closing scenario A is selected when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, and the special figure If the special figure jackpot is won in the success/failure determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is a special symbol B, the special electric opening/closing scenario B is selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the special figure in the special determination When the figure jackpot is won and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol C, the special electric opening and closing scenario C is selected when the special electric opening and closing execution mode is executed, If you win and the result of the special symbol type determination is a special symbol a, the special electric opening/closing scenario a will be selected when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed twice (two rounds). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. or the maximum number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 57a is satisfied. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 1.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. The ball is entered into the provided V winning prize opening 57av. In this case, the lottery mode after completion of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is the high probability mode, and the support mode described later is the high frequency support mode.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.1 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed twice (two rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 2.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 0.1 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.1 seconds is started.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. or the maximum number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 57a is satisfied. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 1.0 second. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. The ball is entered into the provided V winning prize opening 57av. In this case, the lottery mode after the completion of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C is the high probability mode, and the support mode described later is the high frequency support mode.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario a is started, first, a special electric opening period of 0.1 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 1.8 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. , or that the maximum number of 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 58a. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 0.1 seconds is started.

Next, the normal figure right/wrong determination table will be described.

FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure right/wrong determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. Then, according to the obtained value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern correctness determination table, the general pattern correctness determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low frequency support mode (low support state) as a support mode that defines the winning probability per normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the operation mode of the normal electric role. , Under the same conditions, it is configured to be able to execute a high-frequency support mode (high-support state) in which normal electric accessories operate more frequently than in low-frequency support mode, and is used in the general drawing lottery in low-frequency support mode. It has a general pattern suitability determination table for the low frequency support mode and a general pattern suitability determination table for the high frequency support mode used in the general pattern lottery in the high frequency support mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the following two types of general pattern correctness determination tables are provided as the general pattern correctness determination table used in the general pattern lottery.
・Normal map right/wrong judgment table (for low-frequency support mode)
・General map right/wrong judgment table (for high-frequency support mode)

As shown in FIG. 172 (A), in the general figure success determination table (for low frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the low frequency support mode, 0 to 65535 of the general figure accuracy determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the individual values, three values of 0 to 2 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the low-frequency support mode is the winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/21845.66.

The "universal map hit" is a judgment result that triggers the start of the general electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the normal pattern" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal switching execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 172 (B), the general figure success determination table (for high frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the high frequency support mode includes 0 to 65535 of the general figure accuracy determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the values, 65535 values of 0 to 65534 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the high-frequency support mode is winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/1.0000153.

Next, the normal figure classification determination table is demonstrated.

FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2. Then, based on the obtained value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness determination, and the general pattern type determination table, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined Normal pattern type determination is performed.

As shown in Figure 173, according to the general figure type determination table of the present embodiment, if the result of the general figure accuracy determination is the winning per general figure, regardless of the value of the acquired general figure type determination counter Cn2 First, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined to be normal pattern A (per normal pattern), and if the result of the normal pattern right or wrong determination is normal pattern out, the acquired normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 Regardless of the value of , the type of normal design (type of stop design) is determined to be normal design Z (normal design out).

Among the types of normal patterns (types of stop patterns), the normal pattern A (per normal pattern) triggers the execution of the normal switching execution mode, and the normal switching scenario is executed when the normal switching execution mode is executed. loaded. The general electric switching scenario is a control program in which the manner of control of the general electric accessory 34b in the general electric switching execution mode is stored.

Next, the normal switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal switching scenario selection table. The normal switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when winning per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 174, normal switching scenarios A corresponding to normal symbols A are set in the normal switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment. That is, in the general pattern correctness determination, when the general pattern is won and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern A, the general pattern opening and closing scenario A is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed. It will be. The details of the normal switching scenario A will be described below.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario A is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 0.01 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. During the normal voltage switching period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for one time is set to 1.0 second. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 0.01 seconds is started.

It should be noted that, in the following description, for example, winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure propriety determination, and the fact that it was determined as a special symbol A (2R probability variation jackpot) in the special figure type determination, "2R probability variation jackpot in the special figure lottery It is also expressed as "I was elected." Also, for example, it is expressed as "per normal pattern lottery was elected in general pattern lottery" that it was elected per normal pattern in general pattern propriety determination and was determined as normal pattern A in normal pattern type determination.

In addition, the game state in which the lottery mode of the above-mentioned special figure lottery is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is also referred to as "low probability low support state" or "normal state", and the lottery mode of the special figure lottery is a high probability mode, and the game state in which the support mode is a low frequency support mode is also called "high probability low support state" or "latent probability variable state (latent probability state)", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a low probability mode , The game state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode is also called a "low-probability high support state" or "time-saving state", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. This game state is also referred to as "high probability high support state" or "probability variable state".

<<4-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 175 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

A sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92 that is a computing device that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal. and an audio data ROM 98, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to a sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98 to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 97 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 97 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 97 reads corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the production operation buttons 24 , and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives signals indicating the operation modes of the production operation buttons 24 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<4-4>> Overview of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment:
Next, the outline of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Below, the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176 and FIG. 165 described above.

The normal state F1 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Generally, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player starts playing is the normal state F1. In the normal state F1, the player operates the operation handle 25 while adjusting the shooting intensity so that the game ball enters the first special figure start hole 33 provided in the lower center of the game board 30 to play the game. Fire the ball (hit left). When the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described first special symbol lottery, and changes the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 37a. start the display. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 displays the decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the start of the variable display of the first special symbols in the first special symbol display section 37a. to start the fluctuating display of

After that, when the set first special figure fluctuation time elapses, the main control device 60 displays the first special figure that is fluctuating in the first special figure display section 37a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. , and the sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. The player confirms the display mode of the first special symbol stop-displayed in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the display mode of the decorative symbol stop-displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41. It is possible to recognize the lottery result of 1 special figure lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the main display area MA are displayed in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is stopped and displayed in the same display mode (for example, "777"). On the other hand, when the result of the first special figure lottery is a special figure out, the decorative symbols that are fluctuating in the main display area MA are displayed so that the numbers of the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (not aligned). Stop display in a mode (for example, "135").

In the normal state F1, the player repeatedly enters the game ball into the first special figure starting port 33 while expecting to win the special figure jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot) in the first special figure lottery.

Here, the case where the player hits to the right in the normal state F1 without following the normal flow of the game will be described. As a case where the player hits to the right in the normal state F1, for example, when the player tries to hit to the right in the normal state F1 to see if there is any profit from the pachinko machine 10 (trying to capture the pachinko machine 10). ), or unintentionally turning the operating handle 25 to the right by a large amount, thereby unintentionally hitting to the right.

In the normal state F1, when the player hits to the right, the game ball shot toward the right side game area PAR passes through the front side of the first special electric prize winning device 57 in the closed state and reaches the sorting peg group 36a. do. The game balls that have reached the sorting nail group 36a are sorted into a route leading to the normal pattern starting gate 35 and a route leading to the working nail region 36c at a ratio of about 1:4. More specifically, in this embodiment, 100 game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 per minute, and about 5 minutes out of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR Approximately 20 game balls, which is 1, enter the normal pattern starting gate 35, and approximately 80 game balls, which is about 4/5, reach the action nail area 36c. And in this embodiment, the probability of winning per normal drawing in the general drawing lottery in the low frequency support mode is set to 3/65535. , Since the normal electric accessory 34b does not shift to the open state, about 20 game balls that enter the normal figure start gate 35 do not enter the second special figure start port 34 and enter the action nail area 36c as they are. It will come. That is, as a result, all of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR reach the action nail area 36c.

The action nail region 36c is a region provided with a plurality of game nails, and is a region that functions as an action portion that randomly acts on the game ball to flow down by the game nail. The game ball that has reached the action nail region 36c is acted upon by the game nail and flows down at random timing. A rectifying nail region 36d is provided below the working nail region 36c.

The rectifying nail region 36d is a region that functions as a rectifying section that rectifies the reached game balls so that they flow downward one by one. In this embodiment, adjacent two nails are provided in the straightening nail region 36d in a bilaterally symmetrical manner, and game balls can flow downward one by one from the gaps between the two nails. there is The game balls flowed down one by one from the straightening nail area 36d reach the electric distribution device 36e.

The electric distribution device 36e is a rotatably supported operating member having a V-shape, and is configured to be in a non-operating state (stationary state) and an operating state according to the game state. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal state F1, the V-shaped corner is in a non-operating state (see FIG. 165 (A)) facing downward, and the electric sorting device in the non-operating state The game ball that reaches 36e is temporarily held between the two V-shaped pieces of the electric distribution device 36e, and then enters the ball entrance provided in the game board 30 on the back side of the electric distribution device 36e. The ball is guided to the back communicating ball entrance 36f and enters the ball.

A game ball entering the back communication ball inlet 36f is guided to the back side of the game board 30 and circulates through a central route U, which is a third passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. - 特許庁A back communicating ball opening 36g is provided at the end point of the central route U, and a game ball entering the back communicating ball entrance 36f circulates through the central route U and then again from the back communicating ball opening 36g to the game board. 30 is led to the surface side. A lower ball entrance 36h, which is a third ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter, is provided below the back communicating ball opening 36g, and is discharged from the back communicating ball opening 36g to the surface side of the game board 30. The game ball can enter the lower ball entrance 36h.

Inside the lower ball entrance 36h, there are a first internal passage 36h1, a second internal passage 36h2, and a game ball entered into the lower ball entrance 36h through either the first internal passage 36h1 or the second internal passage 36h2. A sorting valve 36h3 for sorting is provided. The distribution valve 36h3 distributes a game ball that has entered the lower ball entrance 36h to the first internal passage 36h1, and a game ball that has entered the lower ball entrance 36h to the second internal passage 36h2. The second distribution state of distributing and the operation of repeating alternately are performed, and in this embodiment, the game balls entered into the lower ball entrance 36h are transferred to the first internal passage 36h1 and the second internal passage 36h1 at a ratio of 1:1. It operates so as to be distributed to the internal passage 36h2.

A winning opening 36h1a is provided at the end of the first internal passage 36h1, and when a game ball enters the winning opening 36h1a, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball. On the other hand, an out port 36h2a is provided at the end of the second internal passage 36h2, and prize balls are not paid out when a game ball enters the out port 36h2a. That is, one or less prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h.

As described above, in the normal state F1, when the player hits to the right, all of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR in one minute are in the working nail area 36c and the straightening nail area. 36d is reached, and the ball enters the back communicating ball entrance 36f. Of the 100 game balls that enter the back communicating ball entrance 36f, about 50 game balls finally enter the prize winning opening 36h1a, and about 50 game balls finally exit the exit. Enter the ball at 36h2a. That is, in the normal state F1, even if the player hits to the right, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (=about 50) is greater than the number of game balls fired (=100). Since there are fewer players, the player does not get any profit and there is no advantage. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to discourage the player from trying to make a profit by hitting to the right in the normal state F1. As a result, in the normal state F1, the player does not hit to the right, but hits to the left to enter the game ball into the first special figure starting port 33, and in the first special figure lottery, the special figure jackpot (2R A game is played with the aim of winning a probability variable jackpot.

Returning to the description of the case where the player hits left in the normal state F1.

In the normal state F1, when the player hits to the left and the game ball enters the first special figure start hole 33, and the first special figure lottery is executed to win the 2R probability variable jackpot, the game state of the pachinko machine 10. , shifts to the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot. In this embodiment, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b of the first special electric prize winning device 57 opens twice. In addition, when the special electric open/close execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot is started, the sound emission control device 90 starts the first special electric role target hitting right notification effect. The first special electric role object aiming right hitting notification effect is an effect that encourages hitting to the right, which is a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach the first special electric role object 57b, and in this embodiment, the first special electric role object As a aiming right hit notification effect, an image combining a character string such as "Right hit" and an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the speaker 46 outputs "Right hit and the first special on the upper right. Aim for the electric accessory!” is executed. The player who recognizes that he/she should "hit right" by the first special electric accessory aiming right-hitting notification process makes the game ball enter the first big winning hole 57a by hitting right, and wins a prize ball. can be obtained.

Furthermore, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, so the player can enter the game ball into the V winning opening 57av in the first big winning opening 57a. In this embodiment, the game ball entering the first big winning hole 57a is configured to enter the V fixed winning hole 57av as it is. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 57av, the sound emission control device 90 executes a V winning effect, which is a effect suggesting that the player is awarded a profit such as a high probability mode. After the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. That is, when the game ball enters the V certainty winning opening 57av, the game state shifts from the normal state (low probability low support state) to high probability high support state. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the V fixed winning hole 57av (that is, when the game ball does not enter the first big winning hole 57a), the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot After the end of , the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, and the state shifts to the normal state F1 again. Below, the case where the game ball enters the V fixed winning prize opening 57av in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot will be described.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode F2 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot ends, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability high support state F3 in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

When shifting to the high-accuracy-height support state F3, the electric distribution device 36e distributes the reached game ball to the left route L, which is the first passage, in the left side distribution state (the V-shaped corner shown in FIG. 165(B) is and a right distribution state (a state in which the V-shaped corner shown in FIG. 165(C) faces upward to the left), in which the game balls that arrive are distributed to the right route R, which is the second passage. , are alternately repeated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the player can obtain a large profit by causing game balls to reach the electric distribution device 36e as an operating member that is in an operating state. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the operating member is in the operating state, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach the operating member. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high accuracy and high support state F3 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the operating state, the game ball is fired in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach the electric distribution device 36e. It is configured to be able to execute an electric distribution device aim right hitting notification effect as an effect prompting that (to hit right). More specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 177, a character string such as "Right hit" and a rightward arrow are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as an electric distribution device aim right hit notification effect. image GD1, a female character image GA, and a character string GB such as "Rit right and aim for the electric sorting device on the right!" Execute the production to let you. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the game ball should reach the electric sorting device 36e in the operating state.

In the high-accuracy-high support state F3, when the player who recognizes that he/she should hit right by the electric distribution device aiming right hitting notification effect hits right, the right side game area PAR is entered in the same manner as in the normal state F1. The game ball shot toward it passes through the front side of the first special electric prize winning device 57 in the closed state and reaches the sorting nail group 36a. The game balls that have reached the sorting nail group 36a are sorted into a route leading to the normal pattern starting gate 35 and a route leading to the working nail region 36c at a ratio of about 1:4. More specifically, in this embodiment, 100 game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 per minute, and about 5 minutes out of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR Approximately 20 game balls, which is 1, enter the normal pattern starting gate 35, and approximately 80 game balls, which is about 4/5, reach the action nail area 36c. However, in the high probability high support state F3, the probability of winning per normal drawing is set to 65534/65535 in the normal drawing lottery, and the normal drawing fluctuation time is set to 0.01 seconds regardless of the result of the normal drawing lottery. set, the normal pattern opening period in the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is set to 0.01 seconds, the opening time in the general pattern opening and closing period is set to 1.0 seconds, and the general pattern ending period is set to 0.01 seconds. be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the normal figure starting gate 35 to reach the normal electric accessory 34b is about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, in the high probability high support state F3, the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state with a probability of almost 100% at the timing when the game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 arrives, and the game ball is the second special as it is. The ball will be entered into the figure starting hole 34 .

As a result, in the high probability high support state F3, about 20 game balls, which is about one-fifth, out of 100 game balls fired toward the right side game area PAR are the second special figure start port 34 , and about 80 game balls, which is about four-fifths, reach the operating electric sorting device 36e.

In the operating state of the electric sorting device 36e, since the back communication inlet 36f on the back side of the electric sorting device 36e is sealed by the V-shaped corner, the electric sorting device 36e in the operating state is reached. The game ball cannot be entered into the back communication ball entrance 36f, and is distributed to the left route L or the right route R. In this embodiment, the electric sorting device 36e maintains the left sorting state for 0.3 seconds in the operating state, then shifts to the right sorting state over 0.05 seconds, and shifts the right sorting state to 0. 0. After maintaining for 6 seconds, it takes 0.05 seconds to shift to the left side distribution state, and the operation of maintaining the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds is repeated. As a result, the game balls reaching the operating electric sorting device 36e are sorted to the left route L and the right route R at a ratio of 1:2. That is, about 27 game balls out of about 80 game balls reaching the operating electric distribution device 36e are distributed to the left route L, and about 53 game balls are distributed to the right route R. become. The game balls distributed to the left route L are guided to the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 58 . On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the right route R is guided to the right winning hole 36i, which is the second ball entering part, and enters, and one prize ball, which is the second privilege, is paid out.

The game ball reaching the right end side of the second special electric prize device 58 rolls toward the left end side on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state, but rolls all the way to the left end. When the second special electric accessory 58b is opened before reaching the special winning opening 32s, the game ball enters the second big winning opening 58a and enters the special winning opening 32s. no. On the other hand, if the second special electric accessory 58b does not open and remains closed for 2 seconds or more, the ball does not enter the second big winning hole 58a, but enters the special winning hole 32s. become.

Here, in the high-probability-high support state F3, as described above, about 1/5 of the 100 game balls shot toward the right game area PAR, about 20 game balls are the second Since the ball enters the special figure starting port 34, the second special figure lottery is executed. And, in this embodiment, the second special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, can be set to a short variation time (0.1 seconds) and a long variation time of 20 seconds to 180 seconds. It is In addition, in this embodiment, "out" is not set as the result of the second special lottery. be elected.

During the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure jackpot winning or the special figure small winning winning does not occur, and the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state. Then, the game ball that reaches the right end side of the second special electric role winning device 58 and rolls toward the left end side on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric role product 58b in the closed state is the second special electric role product. If the closed state of 58b is maintained for two seconds or more without being opened, the ball will not enter the second big winning hole 58a but will enter the special winning hole 32s. On the other hand, the game ball rolling toward the left end on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state rolls to the left end and reaches the special winning opening 32s before the second special When the electric accessory 58b is opened, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a and does not enter the special winning hole 32s.

Specifically, for example, a long fluctuation time (20 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and when the special figure small hit is won in the second special figure lottery, the second special electric motor in the closed state The game ball that rolls on the plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b toward the left end side does not open the second special electric accessory 58b and maintains the closed state for 20 seconds. does not enter the ball, and enters the special winning hole 32s. On the other hand, a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and when the special figure small hit is won in the second special figure lottery, the second special electric accessory 58b in the closed state The game ball that rolls toward the left end on the plate-shaped member is rolled to the left end and before reaching the special winning opening 32s, the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. The second special electric accessory 58b is opened and the ball enters the second big winning hole 58a.

That is, in the high-accuracy high support state F3, the longer the period in which the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state, the special winning opening among the game balls that reached the right end side of the second special electric winning device 58. The number of game balls entering in 32s increases. In other words, the longer the second special figure fluctuation time set in the high certainty high support state F3, the longer the period during which the second special electric accessory 58b maintains its closure. The number of game balls to be played increases. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the special winning hole 32s is set to 15 pieces. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the longer the second special figure fluctuation time set in the high probability/high support state F3, the more prize balls the player can win.

Then, in the high certainty high support state F3, the second special figure fluctuation time in the second special figure lottery has passed, and as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the 2R normal jackpot is won, the high probability high support state F3 ends. Then, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 based on the 2R normal jackpot.

In the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 based on the 2R normal jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened twice, but the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a is two. , the player cannot win many prize balls.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode F4 ends, the state shifts to the above-described normal state F1. The player changes from right-handed to left-handed, enters the game ball into the first special figure starting port 33, and plays the game with the aim of winning the special figure jackpot in the first special figure lottery again.

On the other hand, in the high certainty high support state F3, the second special figure fluctuation time in the second special figure lottery has passed, and as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the 16R probability variable jackpot is won, the high probability high support state F3 ends. Then, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special electric opening/closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot.

In the special electric opening/closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b of the first special electric prize winning device 57 is opened 16 times. It is possible to enter a game ball into the ball and win many prize balls.

Furthermore, in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, so the player enters the game ball into the V fixed prize winning port 57av in the first big winning prize port 57a. can be made When the game ball enters the V winning prize opening 57av, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, and the high probability again. It shifts to the high support state F3. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the V fixed prize opening 57av, the lottery mode after the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. , to the normal state F1.

Thus, in this embodiment, winning the special jackpot in the high-probability and high support state F3 and being distributed to the 2R normal jackpot is an advantageous state ( This means that the high-precision height support state F3) ends. On the other hand, winning the special figure jackpot in the high-probability high support state F3 and being distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot means that many prize balls can be obtained in the special electric opening and closing execution mode F5 based on the 16R probability variable jackpot, and Since the state (high probability and high support state F3) that is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls continues, it means that the player who can obtain the most profit will get the best result. However, in this embodiment, when the special figure jackpot is won in the second special figure lottery, the ratio of being distributed to the 16R probability variable jackpot is 50%. Therefore, the player does not want to win the special figure jackpot positively in the high probability high support state F3, and the high probability high support state F3 continues as long as possible without winning the special figure jackpot. And, the second special figure fluctuation time is set as long as possible and the result of the second special figure lottery becomes a special figure small hit, and when winning the special figure jackpot, it is not a 2R normal jackpot, but a 16R probability variable jackpot. A game is played in anticipation of being sorted.

Next, effects that can be executed in the above-described high-probability-high support state F3 and information and images that can be displayed on the symbol display device 41 will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an expectation performance indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not a specific advantageous result will occur during the execution of the variable display relating to the internal lottery. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is an expectation performance that suggests the expectation of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot will occur. It is configured to be able to execute a reach effect. More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 178(A), as a ready-to-win effect, a battle effect is executed in which a female character representing the player and a pirate character representing the enemy fight. It is possible. It should be noted that even during the execution of the battle effect as a ready-to-win effect, a part of the above-described electric distribution device aim right-handed notification effect is executed, and the character string "right-handed" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. and an arrow pointing right is displayed. The same applies during execution of other effects executed in the high-accuracy-high support state F3 described below.

Then, when winning the 16R probability variable jackpot advantageous to the player, after the battle production, as a battle result production to announce the result of the battle (lottery result), a battle victory production to announce that the battle has been won. is executed (Fig. 178 (B)), and when the 2R normal jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won, as a battle result production, a battle defeat production for announcing that the player has lost the battle is executed (Fig. 178 (C )), when winning a special prize that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, a battle draw effect (Fig. 178 (D)) is executed to announce that the battle ended in a draw as a battle result effect. .

Thus, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the ready-to-win production, which is the expectation production that suggests the expectation of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot, which is the specific advantageous result, will occur, is executed. Since it is configured to be possible, the player has a sense of expectation whether or not the high probability high support state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In addition, since the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the game ball distributed to the left route L is the second It is possible to enter the ball into the special winning hole 32s without entering the second big winning hole 58a. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect of displaying while subtracting numerical information during execution of variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, is configured to be executable. there is More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, an effect of displaying an image G1 showing the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends is executed as a countdown effect. By executing this countdown effect, the player is suggested the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning hole 32s. can be done. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, a favorable state for the player is during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol set for a long variable time. However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to understand it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the player is in an opportune state during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set, an effect that suggests that the player is in a good opportunity is configured to be executable. More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, the female character image G2 and "Throw in a lot of balls during the fluctuation! It's a chance time to win prize balls!" Such character string G3 is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol with the long variable time set is the best opportunity for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 32s is counted instead of the number of game balls entering the second large winning opening 58a. important to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, information about the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 32s can be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 32s after shifting to the high-probability high support state F3 and the game ball entering the special winning opening 32s were obtained. The pattern display device 41 is caused to display an image G4 showing the number of prize balls. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the important special winning hole 32s.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike a general pachinko machine, the profit that the player aims to obtain is that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a as the fifth ball entering section. It is a prize ball paid out by entering a game ball into the special winning hole 32s as the first ball entering portion, not the prize ball paid out by the game ball. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering portion. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, a special winning opening ball entry effect is configured to be executable as an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player. ing. More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, as a special winning hole entry effect, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays " When the game ball enters there, a lot of prize balls will come out!” is displayed, and at the timing when the game ball enters the special prize winning port 32s, a loud sound effect such as “picon!” is output from the speaker 46. After that, an effect of outputting a sound effect such as "Do-do-do-do!" as if a large number of prize balls are being paid out is executed. Therefore, the profit that the player aims to obtain is that the game ball enters the special winning hole 32s, not the prize ball paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a. It is possible to clearly recognize that it is a prize ball paid out by.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, not only the lottery result after the variable display of the second special symbol, but also how long the period of the variable display of the second special symbol is. It is important for the player whether it continues. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first effect during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery, and to execute the second effect different from the first effect following the first effect. is configured to Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, step-up effect 1 is executed during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, step-up effect 1 is followed by step-up effect 2. is configured to be executable. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180(A), a female character image G5 and a character string G6 such as "Step 1! How long will this change last?" At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 180(B), as a step-up effect 2, the character display device 41 is caused to display a character image G7 of a whale and a character string G8 such as "Step 2! This fluctuation will continue!" An effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed for the player, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and the variable display of the second special symbol is still continued. It can give you a feeling of hope.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric distribution device 36e can be in a non-operating state and an operating state. Since it does not know that the difference in the state of 36e is caused by the difference in the game state, it changes from the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the non-operating state to the high certainty in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the operating state. Even in the case of shifting to the support state F3, there is a possibility that the player will not notice that the game state has shifted. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first background image can be displayed in the first game state in which the operating member is in the non-operating state, and the first background image can be displayed in the second game state in which the operating member is in the operating state. It is configured to be able to display a different second background image. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the non-operating state, and the electric distribution device 36e is in the operating state. In the support state F3, the background image for the high-accuracy-high support state F3 can be displayed. More specifically, in this embodiment, as the background image for the normal state F1, a background image in the blue sea can be displayed, and as the background image for the high-precision high support state F3, a background image in the red sea can be displayed. A background image can be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the game state has changed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, unlike the general pachinko machine 10, the second big winning hole 58a as the fifth ball-entering portion is in a ball-enterable state (open state). It is a disadvantage rather than an advantage for Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section is put in the ball-enterable state by the switching section, the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section is put into the ball-enterable state. It is configured not to execute the suggested production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, even when the second special electric accessory 58b causes the second large prize winning port 58a to be opened, it is suggested that the second large prize winning port 58a is open. It is configured so as not to execute the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a ball-enterable state (open state).

Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush.

Conventionally, there is a desire to increase the number of balls to be put out other than winning a big win, and in order to meet this demand, it is possible to win a small win with a high probability, and the more the small win is won, the more the game balls in the player's hand are. Pachinko machines have been developed with increasing game states (so-called small win rushes). In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when a small winning is won in a second special lottery during a small winning rush and the variable display of the second special pattern stops at a pattern corresponding to the small winning, The special electric accessory is opened to allow the game ball to enter the big winning hole. That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

In this way, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop the game. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period that the small winning rush ends as it is without being able to obtain the profit from the small winning.

In recent years, liquid crystal displays arranged in the center of the game board have been enlarged in order to increase the impact of the presentation, and the game area in which game balls can be distributed is becoming narrower. For this reason, in order to adopt a configuration for realizing a new game property for solving the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, it is necessary to efficiently flow down the game ball and adjust the area according to the new game specifications. There was a problem that it was necessary to efficiently arrange a new mechanism for leading to the game board.

To solve the above problems, in the present embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is distributed to the left route L in order to maintain the closed state while the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed is changed. The game ball can enter the special winning hole 32s without entering the second big winning hole 58a. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even though the ready-to-win effect has been executed, the special figure jackpot advantageous to the player in the second special figure lottery (16R probability variable jackpot where there is a ball output and the rush continues) is won. Even if the player wins a special jackpot (2R normal jackpot where there is no ball and the rush ends) and the high probability and high support state F3 ends, the ready-to-win effect is executed. To give the player a feeling of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large amount of prize balls are paid out immediately before the end of the high-accuracy and high-support state F3 because the player can win many prize balls during the period. In addition, it is possible to relieve the player's anger and sense of loss for the fact that the high-quality support state F3 has ended. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in a non-operating state, the game ball that has reached the electric distribution device 36e flows down the central route U, so the second special electric role product 58b cannot be reached. On the other hand, in the high-precision high support state F3, which is a new rush state that solves the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, the electric distribution device 36e is in an operating state, and the electric distribution device 36e is reached in the new rush state. The game ball that has been dropped flows down the left route L or the right route R, and the game ball distributed to the left route L is guided to the second special electric accessory 58b. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the normal state F1, the player cannot obtain a profit even if the game ball is shot aiming at the electric sorting device 36e. In the high-accuracy-high support state F3 (game state in which the operating member is in the operating state), which is a new rush state that solves the problem of 1, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the electric distribution device 36e to play the game. It is possible to realize a new playability such that the ball can be efficiently reached the electric sorting device 36e.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the advantage of the player (the number of prize balls that the player can acquire) changes depending on the length of the set second special figure fluctuation time. be able to. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the longer the variation time set as the second special figure variation time, the greater the number of prize balls that the player can obtain. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new feeling of expectation that a long variation time should be set as the second special figure variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, maintaining the closed state of the second special electric accessory 58b is an event advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a conventional general pachinko machine, winning a small prize and releasing a special electric accessory is an event that is advantageous to the player. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the events that are advantageous to the player are reversed from the conventional ones.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not have a function that allows simultaneous variation (so-called simultaneous variation function), it is possible for the player to win a large number of prize balls. A game state (so-called rush) can be realized. A pachinko machine with a simultaneous variation function has problems such as complicating the control and how to handle the remaining hold after the end of the rush. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that these problems do not occur.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability-high support state F3 are prize balls based on the game balls entering the special winning opening 32s. In other words, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability-high support state F3 are not prize balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the values of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio of the pachinko machine 10, and to widen the range of the number of prize balls that can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as the variable display time of the variable display when the result of the internal lottery is the specific result, it is possible to set a short variable time and a long variable time longer than the short variable time. The part is provided with a rolling part capable of rolling a game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entering part, and when a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation display time, the switching part puts the ball in a non-enterable state. A game ball that has been set and reached the operating member in the operating state and distributed to the first passage can enter the first ball entering portion. Specifically, in this embodiment, as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special special figure small hit, the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) and the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds). When a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the figure fluctuation time, the second special electric accessory 58b is set to the closed state, reaches the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state, and left route L The game balls distributed to can enter the special prize winning opening 32s.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when a short variation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a small special figure, The game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the non-enterable state (closed state) is before the game ball completely rolls on the plate-shaped member. After a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) has passed, the second special electric accessory 58b enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s. Can not do it. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the second big winning hole 58a is two, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a without reaching the special winning hole 32s. If so, the player has little profit.

On the other hand, if a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special figure small hit, the ball cannot be entered (closed state), the game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b is set on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It rolls all the way to reach the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 32s. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the special winning opening 32s is 15, the game ball rolls on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b and ends up in the special winning opening 32s. If the ball hits the , the player can get a lot of profit.

Thus, according to this embodiment, according to the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball distributed to the left route L can not reach the special winning opening 32s A situation in which the ball enters the second major winning opening 58a (that is, a situation in which the player cannot obtain a profit), and a situation in which the special winning opening 32s is reached and can be entered in the special winning opening 32s (that is, the player can create a situation where a company can benefit from

As a result, in a situation where a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a small special figure, the player can play the game ball. By firing to reach the activated motorized diverter 36e, it is possible to obtain profit during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the game To solve a problem that a player cannot obtain a profit and the tempo of a game becomes worse, and a problem that a player is made to waste game balls without being able to stop and hit during execution of a ready-to-win performance. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the value imparted by entering the game ball into the first ball entering section is higher than the value imparted by entering the game ball into the fifth ball entering section. ing. Specifically, the prize balls (15) given by entering the game balls into the special winning hole 32s are the prize balls (2) given by entering the game balls into the second big winning hole 58a. ). The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. In this embodiment, when the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is the special figure small hit, the closed state The game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the set second special electric accessory 58b rolls on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It cuts and reaches the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can enter the special winning opening 32s. According to the present embodiment, the prize balls (15 pieces) provided by the game balls entering the special winning hole 32s are the prizes given by the game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a. Since the number of balls is larger than the number of balls (two), the player can have a new feeling that a longer period should be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first path that allows the game ball to enter the first ball entering section that provides the first privilege and the second ball entering section that provides the second privilege allows the game ball to enter. and a third passage into which a game ball can enter the third ball entry part. Further, it is provided with an operating member that allows the game ball to flow down to the first path or the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, and causes the game ball to flow down to the third path in the non-operating state. The value for the player is higher in the first passage than in the second passage, and higher in the second passage than the third passage. Specifically, the left route L, in which a game ball can enter a special winning hole 32s that gives 15 prize balls, and the right winning hole 36i, in which one prize ball can be given, can enter a game ball. It has a right route R and a central route U through which a game ball can enter a lower ball entry port 36h. Furthermore, based on the transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3, it becomes an operating state (operating state that alternately repeats the left distribution state and the right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down the left route L or the right route R, An electric distribution device 36e is provided to flow down game balls to the central route U in a non-operating state, and the left route L is higher than the right route R, and the right route R is higher than the central route U for the player.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the operating state in which the operating member is operating can be a gaming state with higher value for the player than the non-operating state in which the operating member is not operating. , it is possible to create a feeling of expectation that a predetermined operating condition will be established and the operating member will be in an operating state, and an expectation that a game ball that has reached the operating member in the operating state will flow down the first passage. can make you feel. Specifically, the operation state in which the electric distribution device 36e alternately repeats the left distribution state and the right operation state is a game with a higher value for the player than the non-operation state in which the electric distribution device 36e is not in operation. Since it can be in the state, the player can have a sense of expectation that the electric distribution device 36e will be in the operating state by shifting to the high-accuracy high support state F3, and the electric vibration in the operating state. It is possible to make the player feel expectation that the game ball that has reached the separator 36e will flow down the left route L.

According to this embodiment, the first passage and the second passage through which the game ball that reaches the operating member in the operating state flows down, and the third passage through which the game ball that reaches the operating member in the non-operating state flows down are provided. , and the portions on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board 30 are different. Specifically, a left route L and a right route R through which game balls that have reached the operating electric distribution device 36e flow down, and a central route U through which game balls that have reached the non-operating electric distribution device 36e flow down. , includes a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back directions of the game board 30 is different.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently provide three passages in a narrow area of the game board 30, and to provide the player with a passage (second 1 passage and second passage), and the passage (third passage) through which the game ball that has reached the non-operating operating member flows down can be clearly distinguished and recognized. Specifically, it is possible to efficiently provide three routes leading game balls to a predetermined area in the narrow right side game area PAR of the game board 30, and to inform the player of the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state. A route (a left route L and a right route R) along which the game balls that have arrived flow down and a route (a central route U) along which the game balls that reach the non-operating electric distribution device 36e flow down are made to be clearly distinguished and recognized. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entering portion is one or less. Specifically, one or less prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. A game ball reaching the non-operating electric sorting device 36e passes through the central route U and enters the lower ball entrance 36h, but one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h. The number of prize balls paid out by doing is one or less. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the player hits to the right while aiming at the non-operating electric distribution device 36e, the player cannot increase the number of game balls on hand, and there is no merit. As a result, according to the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the original game flow is to hit left in the normal state F1, the player aims at the electric distribution device 36e in the non-operating state and moves to the right. Hitting can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the operating member is configured so that the game ball always flows down to the first passage or the second passage in a predetermined operating state, and the rate at which the game ball flows down is set to the second passage. The number of passages is configured to be greater than that of the first passages. Specifically, the electric distribution device 36e is configured so that the game ball always flows down the left route L or the right route R in the left distribution state or the right side operation state, and the ratio of the game balls flowing down is , the number of right routes R is greater than that of left routes L. More specifically, in this embodiment, the electric distribution device 36e maintains the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds in the operating state, and then shifts to the right side distribution state over 0.05 seconds, After maintaining the right side distribution state for 0.6 seconds, the operation of shifting to the left side distribution state over 0.05 seconds and maintaining the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds is repeated. As a result, the game balls reaching the operating electric sorting device 36e are sorted to the left route L and the right route R at a ratio of 1:2. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. According to this configuration, in the high-probability-high support state F3, the player shoots the game ball by timing the operation of the electric distribution device 36e so that the game ball flows down only to the left route L, which has a high value. However, the rate at which game balls flow down is greater on the right route R than on the left route L, so the electric distribution device 36e is instructed to the player so that the game balls flow down only on the left route L, which has a higher value. It is possible to give up shooting the game ball by measuring the timing of the operation of.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the third path is configured so that the game ball enters only the third ball entering portion in the predetermined game state. Specifically, the central route U is configured such that, in the normal state F1, the game ball enters only the lower ball entrance 36h. Therefore, in the normal state F1, even if the player aims for the game ball to circulate through the central route U, the game ball enters only the lower ball entrance 36h, which has the lowest value, and there is no merit for the player. . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand aiming at the central route U in the normal state F1.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the flow path leading to the actuating member, there are provided an action portion that acts on the game balls to flow down at random by the game nails, and a straightening portion that straightens the game balls so that they can flow down one by one. Prepare. Specifically, in the flow path up to the electric distribution device 36e, there are an action nail region 36c in which the game nails act on the flow of the game balls at random, and a rectification nail region in which the game balls can flow down one by one. 36d. According to this configuration, the timing at which game balls reach the electric distribution device 36e can be made random, and the game balls reaching the electric distribution device 36e can be made one ball at a time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the electric distribution device 36e becomes random, so that the electric distribution device 36e is arranged so that the game ball flows down only to the left route L, which has a high value. In addition, the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state can always distribute the game balls one by one to the left route L or the right route R. , the player can be made to pay attention to the game balls distributed one by one.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an expectation performance indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not a specific advantageous result will occur during execution of the variable display relating to the internal lottery. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is an expectation performance that suggests the expectation of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot will occur. It is configured to be able to execute a reach effect. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the player is given a sense of expectation as to whether or not the high probability high support state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. Since the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state while the second special symbol is fluctuating while the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the game ball distributed to the left route L is It is possible to enter the ball into the special winning hole 32s without entering the second big winning hole 58a. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect of displaying while subtracting numerical information during execution of variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, is configured to be executable. there is Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning hole 32s. can be done. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting that the player is in a good opportunity during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set, an effect that suggests that the player is in a good opportunity is configured to be executable. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can be made to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set is the best opportunity for the player. can be done.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to display information regarding the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 32s in the high-probability-high support state F3. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the important special winning hole 32s.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering section. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, a special winning opening ball entry effect is configured to be executable as an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player. ing. Therefore, the profit that the player aims to obtain is that the game ball enters the special winning hole 32s, not the prize ball paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a. It is possible to clearly recognize that it is a prize ball paid out by.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first effect is executed during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery, and the second effect different from the first effect is performed following the first effect. It is configured to be able to execute production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, step-up effect 1 is executed during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, step-up effect 1 is followed by step-up effect 2. is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed for the player, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and the variable display of the second special symbol is still continued. It can give you a feeling of hope.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first background image can be displayed in the first game state in which the operating member is in the non-operating state, and the first background image can be displayed in the second game state in which the operating member is in the operating state. It is configured to be able to display a second background image different from the image. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the non-operating state, and the electric distribution device 36e is in the operating state. In the support state F3, the background image for the high-accuracy-high support state F3 can be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the game state has changed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the switching unit puts the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section into the ball-enterable state, the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section is in the ball-enterable state. It is configured so as not to execute the production that suggests that it will be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, even when the second special electric accessory 58b causes the second large prize winning port 58a to be opened, it is suggested that the second large prize winning port 58a is open. It is configured so as not to execute the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a ball-enterable state (open state).

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state in which the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the first ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, by appropriately setting the value of the passage distributed by the operating member, the player can have a new sense of expectation, and a plurality of passages can be efficiently provided on the game board. becomes possible.

<<4-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing performed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing performed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes normal processing and timer interrupt processing. In addition to normal processing and timer interrupt processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing will be explained. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing normal processing. At step Sa0101, a startup initial setting process is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa0102.

At step Sa0102, a start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The activation command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa0103.

At step Sa0103, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 2 ms in this embodiment).

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. In step Sa1101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa0102.

In step Sa1102, various counter updating processes are executed. Specifically, special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1, special figure type determination counter Cs2, special figure reach determination counter Cs3, special figure fluctuation type counter Cs4, general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1, general figure type determination counter Cn2, random number initial value Each value of the counter Cini is incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2 and Cini are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1103.

In step Sa1103, ball entry processing for each ball entrance is executed. Details of ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described later. After executing step Sa1103, the process proceeds to step Sa1104.

In step Sa1104, special figure special electric control processing is executed. The special figure special electric control process executes the special figure lottery described above based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34, and the first special symbol display unit 37a, the second This is a process for controlling the 2 special symbol display portion 37b, the first special electric accessory 57b and the second special electric accessory 58b. The details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sa1104, the process proceeds to step Sa1105.

In step Sa1105, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed. The general pattern general electric control process is a process of executing the general pattern lottery described above based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35, and controlling the normal symbol display unit 38a and the normal electric accessory 34b. The details of the general map general electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sa1105, the process proceeds to step Sa1106.

In step Sa1106, an electric sorting device drive process is executed. In the electric distribution device drive process, in the normal state F1, the electric distribution device 36e is controlled to be in the above-described non-operating state, and in the high accuracy and height support state F3, the electric distribution device 36e is in the above-described operating state. control so that After executing step Sa1106, the process proceeds to step Sa1107.

In step Sa1107, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above processes are transmitted to sub-side control devices such as the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, when a prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to various effects are set, those commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sa1107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for each entrance>
Next, ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described. The ball entry process for each ball entrance is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for each ball entrance. In step Sa1201, ball entry processing for a general winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the general winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is detected, a command for transmitting a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls set for the general winning opening 32 is executed. set as After executing step Sa1201, the process proceeds to step Sa1202.

In step Sa1202, a ball entry process for a special winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the special winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 32s is detected, a command for transmitting a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls set in the special winning opening 32s is executed. set as After executing step Sa1202, the process proceeds to step Sa1203.

In step Sa1203, ball entry processing for the big winning opening is executed. In the ball entering process for the big winning hole, when the game ball entering the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a is detected, the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a A prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls set in is set as a command to be transmitted. After executing step Sa1203, the process proceeds to step Sa1204.

In step Sa1204, a ball entry process for the first special figure start opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening 33 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sa1204, the process proceeds to step Sa1205.

In step Sa1205, a ball entry process for the second special figure starting port is executed. In the ball entry process for the second special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 34 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the second special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sa1205, the process proceeds to step Sa1206.

In step Sa1206, the entry process for the normal figure starting gate is executed. In the entry process for the normal pattern starting gate, when the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 35 is detected, various processes are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the normal figure start gate will be described later. After executing step Sa1206, the process proceeds to step Sa1207.

In step Sa1207, ball entry processing for the V fixed winning opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the V fixed winning opening, various processes are executed when the entry of the game ball into the V fixed winning opening 57av is detected. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole will be described later. After step Sa1207 is executed, this ball entry processing for each ball entrance ends.

<Entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the first special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port. In step Sa1301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 33. In step Sa1301, when it is determined that the game ball entered the first special figure start port 33 (step Sa1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1302, the number of prize balls set in the first special figure start port 33 Set the prize ball command corresponding to as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1303. On the other hand, in step Sa1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first special figure starting opening 33 (step Sa1301: NO), the entering process for the first special figure starting opening is ended.

In step Sa1303, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit. In addition, the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is a value indicating the number of the first special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is four.

In step Sa1303, when it determines with 1st special figure reservation number Ns1 being less than an upper limit (step Sa1303: YES), it progresses to step Sa1304 and adds 1 to 1st special figure reservation number Ns1. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1305.

In step Sa1305, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number Ns1 to which 1 is added in step Sa1303. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1306.

In step Sa1306, a first special figure destination determination process is executed. In the first special figure destination determination process, each value (the first special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the first special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the first special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. After executing step Sa1306, the process proceeds to step Sa1307.

In step Sa1307, the first special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the first special figure destination determination process described above is set as the first special figure reservation command. The first special figure reservation command is for the sub-side control device, the first special figure destination determination for the first special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start port 33 It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the first special figure reservation information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. When the first special figure reservation command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 according to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After executing step Sa1307, the ball entering process for the first special figure start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sa1303, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sa1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is the upper limit , without storing the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this first special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Entering ball processing for the second special figure start port>
Next, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the second special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port. In step Sa1401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 34. In step Sa1401, when it is determined that the game ball entered the second special figure start port 34 (step Sa1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1402, the number of prize balls set in the second special figure start port 34 Set the prize ball command corresponding to as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1403. On the other hand, in step Sa1401, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the second special figure starting port 34 (step Sa1401: NO), the entering process for the second special figure starting port ends.

In step Sa1403, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is a value indicating the number of second special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of game balls into the second special figure starting port 34 . In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is four.

In step Sa1403, when it determines with 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 being less than an upper limit (step Sa1403: YES), it progresses to step Sa1404 and adds 1 to 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1405.

In step Sa1405, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 which added 1 in the first storage area, ie, step Sa1403, among the empty storage areas. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1406.

In step Sa1406, the second special figure destination determination processing is executed. In the second special figure destination determination process, each value (the second special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the second special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the second special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the second special lottery with the variation of the second special symbol. After executing step Sa1406, the process proceeds to step Sa1407.

In step Sa1407, the second special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the second special figure destination determination process described above is set as the second special figure reservation command. The second special figure reservation command is a second special figure destination determination for the second special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start port 34 for the control device on the sub side It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the second special figure reservation information becomes the target of the second special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the second special symbol. When the second special figure pending command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the second special figure pending number Ns2. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 of the design display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After executing step Sa1407, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port 34, which is the fifth ball entry section, is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sa1403, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not less than the upper limit (step Sa1403: NO), that is, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is the upper limit , without storing each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this second special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Pitch ball processing for normal map starting gate>
Next, the entry process for the normal figure starting gate will be described. The ball entry process for the normal map starting gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball entrance described above.

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate. At step Sa1501, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35. In step Sa1501, when it is determined that the game ball entered the normal figure starting gate 35 (step Sa1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1502. On the other hand, in step Sa1501, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern start gate 35 (step Sa1501: NO), this normal pattern start gate entry process is terminated.

In step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the number Nn1 of normal pattern reservation is a value indicating the number of normal pattern lottery (waiting for execution) that is reserved based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35. In this embodiment, the upper limit (maximum value) of the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is four.

In step Sa1502, when it is determined that the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation is less than the upper limit (step Sa1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1503, and 1 is added to the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1504.

In step Sa1504, each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the general pattern reservation area 64d of the RAM64, that is, the general pattern in which 1 is added in step Sa1503 Store in a storage area corresponding to the number Nn1 of reservations. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1505.

In step Sa1505, the normal figure pending command is set. The general pattern reservation command is a command for recognizing that the general pattern lottery has been reserved based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35 for the control device on the sub side. After executing step Sa1505, the ball entry process for the normal figure start gate 35, which is the fourth ball entry section, is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sa1502, when it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sa1502: NO), that is, when it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is the upper limit, Without storing the respective values of the determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 in the normal pattern reservation area 64d, the entry process for the main normal pattern start gate is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for V fixed winning mouth>
Next, the ball entry processing for the V guaranteed winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball hole described above.

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the V winning hole. In step Sa1601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the V fixed winning opening 57av. In step Sa1601, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V fixed winning opening 57av (step Sa1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1602, and the V fixed winning flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is ON. Determine whether or not The V guaranteed winning prize flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the V guaranteed winning prize opening 57av, and is turned OFF when the high probability mode flag is turned ON after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. In step Sa1602, by determining whether or not the V fixed winning prize flag is already ON, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V fixed winning prize opening 57av, step Sa1603 to step Sa1605 described later. It adopts a configuration that does not duplicate the processing of

In step Sa1602, when it is determined that the V guaranteed prize flag is not ON (step Sa1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1603, and the V guaranteed prize flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sa1604 and sets a V fixed prize command. The V fixed winning prize command is a command for making the sub side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the V fixed winning prize opening 57av. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V guaranteed prize command, it executes the V guaranteed prize effect, which is a performance suggesting that the game ball has entered the V guaranteed prize hole 57av. After executing step Sa1604, the ball-entering process for the first ball-entering portion, the V guaranteed winning opening 57av, is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1601 that the game ball has not entered the V fixed winning opening 57av (step Sa1601: NO) and if it is determined that the V fixed winning prize flag is ON in step Sa1602 (step Sa1602: YES ), without executing the processing of steps Sa1603 and Sa1604 described above, the ball-entering process for the V guaranteed winning hole ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a V fixed winning hole 57av is provided downstream of the first big winning hole 57a inside the first special electric accessory 57b, and the game ball entering the first big winning hole 57a has a configuration in which the ball is always entered into the V-positive prize opening 57av, but instead of this configuration, a high-probability mode is given to the back side of the game board 30 inside the first special electric accessory 57b. A game ball enters the V route, which can enter the game ball into the winning hole 57av, and the prize ball giving ball hole, which is the second ball entering part that gives the prize ball that is the second privilege but does not give the high probability mode. A non-V route that can be played and a distribution valve that distributes game balls that enter the first big prize winning port 57a to either the V route or the non-V route are provided, and the first big prize winning port 57a A modified configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that enters into flows down either the V route or the non-V route. In this configuration, the rate at which game balls flow down may be higher in the non-V route than in the V route L.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing will be described. The special figure special electric control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process. In step Sa2101, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sa2101, the process proceeds to step Sa2102.

In step Sa2102, a special symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display part 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display part 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sa2102, the process proceeds to step Sa2103.

In step Sa2103, a special symbol variation stop post-processing, which is a process after the special symbol variation is stopped, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sa2103, the process proceeds to step Sa2104.

In step Sa2104, special electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start process is a process for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode when the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied. The details of the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sa2104, the process proceeds to step Sa2105.

In step Sa2105, processing during the special electric opening period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening period is processing executed during the special electric opening period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening period will be described later. After executing step Sa2105, the process proceeds to step Sa2106.

In step Sa2106, processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is processing executed during the special electric opening/closing period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described later. After executing step Sa2106, the process proceeds to step Sa2107.

In step Sa2107, processing during the special electric ending period is executed. The processing during the special electric ending period is processing executed during the special electric ending period. The details of the processing during the special electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sa2107, this special figure special electric control processing is ended.

<Special symbol variation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process described above.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Sa2201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value stored in the main side RAM64 is "01". The special figure special electric control value is a value indicating what stage the progress status of the control of the special symbol and the special electric accessory is, and in this embodiment, the special figure special electric control value being "01" means that It shows that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, when the special figure special electric control value is "01", the first special symbol or the second special figure when the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more This indicates that it is possible to start changing the symbol. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sa2201, if it is determined that the special symbol electric train control value is not "01" (step Sa2201: NO), this special symbol variation start process is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sa2202 described later. finish. That is, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the special symbol does not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sa2201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "01" (step Sa2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2202.

In step Sa2202, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more. In step Sa2202, when it determines with the 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 being more than "1" (step Sa2202: YES), it progresses to step Sa2203 and subtracts 1 from 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa2204.

In step Sa2204, the 2nd special figure reservation information shift processing which is processing which shifts the 2nd special figure reservation information stored in each area of the 2nd special figure reservation area Rb of special figure reservation area 64b is performed. Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the second special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb to the special figure determination area 64c, The 2nd special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sa2204, the process proceeds to step Sa2208, which will be described later.

In step Sa2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not "1" or more (step Sa2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2205, and the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more Determine whether or not In step Sa2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not "1" or more (step Sa2205: NO), this special symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more (step Sa2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2206, and 1 is subtracted from the first special figure reservation number Ns1 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sa2207.

In step Sa2207, the 1st special figure reservation information shift process which is the process which shifts the 1st special figure reservation information memorize|stored in each area of the 1st special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b is performed. Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the first special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra to the special figure determination area 64c, The 1st special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sa2207, the process proceeds to step Sa2208.

In step Sa2208, a special figure right or wrong determination process, which is a process for determining whether or not to win a special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure validity determination process, the above-described special figure validity determination table is selected based on the type of lottery mode and reservation, and the selected special figure validity determination table and the special figure determination area 64c are stored. Based on the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1, it is determined whether or not to win the special figure. After executing step Sa2208, the process proceeds to step Sa2209.

In step Sa2209, a special symbol type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, based on the special figure type determination result, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure type determination table, Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sa2209, the process proceeds to step Sa2210.

In step Sa2210, the special figure classification flag corresponding to the classification of the special design determined in the special figure classification determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a special symbol B, A special symbol B flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag. After executing step Sa2210, the process proceeds to step Sa2211.

In step Sa2211, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed. The special figure variation time setting process is the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 37a (first special symbol variation time) and the variation time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 37b (second Tokuzu fluctuation time) is a process to set. Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the lottery mode, the type of suspension, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure The special figure variation time is determined based on the value of the figure variation type counter Cs4 and the special figure variation time table, and the value corresponding to the determined special figure variation time is set to the special figure variation time timer counter. After executing step Sa2211, the process proceeds to step Sa2212.

In step Sa2212, a special figure variation command is set. In the command for special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is based on the entrance of the game ball to which special figure start opening, the first special figure start opening 33 or the second special figure start opening 34 In addition to containing information indicating the presence or absence of reach, information on the set special figure fluctuation time is included. After executing step Sa2212, the process proceeds to step Sa2213.

In step Sa2213, a special figure classification command is set. The special figure type command includes the information of the result of the special figure propriety determination (presence or absence of special figure hit) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation command and the special figure type command set in steps Sa2212 and Sa2213 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received special figure variation command and the special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step Sa2213, the process proceeds to step Sa2214.

In step Sa2214, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 37b is started to change. Then, it progresses to step Sa2215 and sets "02" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state of being changed. After that, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol variation stop processing will be described. The special symbol variation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control processing.

FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop processing. In step Sa2301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a fluctuating state. In step Sa2301, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "02" (step Sa2301: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa2301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "02" (step Sa2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2302.

In step Sa2302, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed do. In step Sa2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has not passed (step Sa2302: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sa2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2303.

In step Sa2303, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is fluctuating in the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b is stopped in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. display. As a result, the first special symbol display portion 37a or the second special symbol display portion 37b displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Stop is displayed. After executing step Sa2303, the process proceeds to step Sa2304.

In step Sa2304, a special figure stop display time setting process is executed. The special figure stop display time setting process is the stop display time (first special figure stop display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 37a and the second special symbol stop display in the second special symbol display portion 37b. It is a process of setting the time (second special figure stop display time). Specifically, in the special figure stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (1.0 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the special figure stop display time timer counter. After performing step Sa2304, it progresses to step Sa2305 and sets "03" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after stopping special symbol fluctuation>
Next, the processing after special symbol fluctuation stop will be described. The special symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Sa2401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol special electric control value of "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In step Sa2401, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "03" (step Sa2401: NO), this special symbol fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa2401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "03" (step Sa2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2402.

In step Sa2402, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop display time set in the special figure stop display time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the special figure stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sa2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has not passed (step Sa2402: NO), this special symbol variation stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has elapsed (step Sa2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2403.

In step Sa2403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). In step Sa2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Sa2403: NO), that is, the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is out of the special figure. When there is, it advances to step Sa2404, turns off the special figure classification flag which is ON (in this case special design Z flag). Then, it progresses to step Sa2405 and sets "01" to a special figure special electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is "01" is the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more. It shows a state in which it is possible to start the variation of the special symbol or the second special symbol. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sa2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Sa2403: YES), i. If it is a hit, it proceeds to step Sa2406 and sets "04" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode are satisfied. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated. Thereby, when the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric opening and closing execution mode start processing>
Next, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode start process. In step Sa3101, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode have been established. In step Sa3101, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "04" (step Sa3101: NO), this special electric power opening/closing execution mode start processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa3101, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "04" (step Sa3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3102.

In step Sa3102, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is ON. In step Sa3102, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is not ON (step Sa3102: NO), that is, if the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure jackpot is ON, Proceeding to step Sa3103, game state reset processing is executed. The game state reset process is a process of turning OFF the high probability mode flag when it is ON, and maintaining the OFF state as it is when the flag is OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3104, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sa3102, when it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure small hit is ON (step Sa3102: YES), without executing the game state reset process of step Sa3103, to step Sa3104 move on.

In step Sa3104, special electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The special electric switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the special electric switching scenario to be referred to in the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario selection table described above and the special electric switching type flag. After executing step Sa3104, the process proceeds to step Sa3105.

In step Sa3105, special electric opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric opening time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric opening time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above, and the obtained special electric opening time information is stored in the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sa3105, the process proceeds to step Sa3106.

In step Sa3106, a special electric opening command is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices (various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41) so as to execute the special electric opening production and the right-handed information production. After performing step Sa3106, it progresses to step Sa3107 and sets "05" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. After that, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated.

<Processing during the special electric opening period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric opening period. In step Sa3201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. In step Sa3201, if it is determined that the special special electric control value is not "05" (step Sa3201: NO), the special electric opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa3201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "05" (step Sa3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3202.

In step Sa3202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sa3202 that it is not the time to end the special electric opening period (step Sa3202: NO), this special electric opening period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3202 that it is time to end the special electric opening period (step Sa3202: YES), the process advances to step Sa3203 to set a special electric opening/closing period command. The set special electric opening/closing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. This special electric opening/closing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing period. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing period command, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect corresponding to the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, based on the received special electric opening/closing period command. It controls various devices for performance so that it does. After performing step Sa3203, it progresses to step Sa3204 and sets "06" to a special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric opening period has ended and the special electric open/close period has started. After that, the processing during the opening period of this special electric transmission ends.

<Processing during special electric opening and closing period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric opening/closing period. In step Sa3301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric open/close period has started. In step Sa3301, when it is determined that the special electric charge control value is not "06" (step Sa3301: NO), this special electric opening/closing period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa3301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "06" (step Sa3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3302.

In step Sa3302, it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the special electric switching period is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the special electric switching period set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sa3302 that the conditions for ending the special electric switching period are not satisfied (step Sa3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3303.

In step Sa3303, it is determined whether or not the first special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sa3303, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (step Sa3303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3304. In addition, in the above modified configuration, the first special electric role product 57b is placed outside the first special electric role product 57b on the surface side of the game board 30 when the first special electric role product 57b is not open. A configuration may be provided in which an outside route is provided so that the game ball that has reached the out port 43 can enter. That is, the V-route and non-V-route in the above modified configuration and the outer route may have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board 30 . According to this configuration, it is possible to efficiently provide three routes (the V route as the first passage, the non-V route as the second passage, and the outer route as the third passage) in a narrow area of the game board 30. Become.

In step Sa3304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sa3304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established (step Sa3304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3305.

At step Sa3305, the first special electric accessory 57b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3306.

In step Sa3306, the first special electric release command is set. The first special electric opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The first special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3306, the process proceeds to step Sa3310, which will be described later.

In step Sa3304, when it is determined that the condition for opening the first special electric accessory 57b is not established (step Sa3304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3310, which will be described later.

In step Sa3303, when it is determined that the first special electric accessory 57b is open (step Sa3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3307.

In step Sa3307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sa3307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b, which is the operating member, is satisfied (step Sa3307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3308.

At step Sa3308, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3309.

In step Sa3309, the first special electric closing command is set. The first special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has closed. The first special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3309, the process proceeds to step Sa3310, which will be described later.

In step Sa3307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is not established (step Sa3307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3310, which will be described later.

In the modified configuration, the first special electric accessory 57b is in an operating state ( Special electric opening and closing execution mode is being executed), and in the closed state where the opening and closing operation is not executed, the game ball may be made to flow down to the outside route. In the V route where the game ball can enter the V fixed winning hole 57av to which the high probability mode is given, the prize ball is given but the high probability mode is not given. More value to the player than possible non-V routes. In addition, since the non-V route is given prize balls, it is more valuable to the player than the outside route, in which even prize balls are not given. Therefore, according to this configuration, the operating state in which the first special electric accessory 57b is executing the opening/closing operation (the state in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed) is replaced by the first special electric accessory 57b executing the opening/closing operation. Since it is possible to make the game state more valuable to the player than in the non-operating state, the player wins the special figure jackpot, shifts to the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and the first special electric accessory 57b is activated. It is possible to create a feeling of anticipation that the player wants to be in an operating state, and to create an expectation that the game ball that reaches the first special electric accessory 57b in the operating state flows down the V route.

In step Sa3310, it is determined whether or not the second special electric accessory 58b is open. In step Sa3310, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (step Sa3310: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3311.

In step Sa3311, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sa3311, when it is determined that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (step Sa3311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3312.

In step Sa3312, the second special electric accessory 58b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3313.

In step Sa3313, the second special electric release command is set. The second special electric opening command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been opened. The second special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3313, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Sa3311, when it is determined that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not established (step Sa3311: NO), the processing during this special electric open/close period ends as it is.

In step Sa3310, when it is determined that the second special electric accessory 58b is open (step Sa3310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3314.

In step Sa3314, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is established. Specifically, the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario is established. In step Sa3314, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is established (step Sa3314: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3315.

At step Sa3315, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3316.

In step Sa3316, a second special electric closing command is set. The second special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has closed. The second special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa3316, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Sa3314, when it is determined that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (step Sa3314: NO), the processing during this special electric open/close period ends as it is.

If it is determined in step Sa3302 that the conditions for ending the special electric switching period are satisfied (step Sa3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3317.

In step Sa3317, special electric ending time setting processing is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, special electric ending time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection processing described above, and the obtained special electric ending time information is stored in the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sa3317, the process proceeds to step Sa3318.

In step Sa3318, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric ending command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute the special electric ending production. After performing step Sa3318, it progresses to step Sa3319 and sets "07" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. After that, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

<Processing during special electric ending period>
Next, processing during the special electric ending period will be described. The processing during the special electric ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric ending period. In step Sa3401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. In step Sa3401, when it is determined that the special special electric control value is not "07" (step Sa3401: NO), this special electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa3401, when it determines with a special figure special electric control value being "07" (step Sa3401: YES), it progresses to step Sa3402.

In step Sa3402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sa3402 that it is not the time to end the special electric ending period (step Sa3402: NO), this special electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3402 that it is time for the special electric ending period to end (step Sa3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3403.

In step Sa3403, it is determined whether or not the V fixed prize flag is ON. In step Sa3403, when it is determined that the V fixed prize flag is ON (step Sa3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3404, and the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sa3405 to turn off the V winning prize flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3406. On the other hand, when it is determined at step Sa3403 that the V guaranteed prize flag is not ON (step Sa3403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3406 without executing the above-described steps Sa3404 and Sa3405. That is, when the game ball does not enter the V fixed winning opening 57av, the high probability mode, which is the first privilege, is not provided.

At step Sa3406, a game state command including information on the current game state is set. The set game state command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the game state command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various devices for effects based on the information indicating the game state included in the command so as to enable the execution of the effect corresponding to the game state. After executing step Sa3406, it progresses to step Sa3407 and turns off a special figure classification flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3408.

In step Sa3408, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute an effect corresponding to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa3409.

In step Sa3409, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special figure reserved number Ns1 or the second special figure reserved number Ns2 is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Indicates a possible state. After that, the processing during the special electric ending period ends.

<Public power control processing>
Next, the general map general electric control processing will be described. The normal/universal electric power control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing normal/universal power control processing. In step Sa4101, a normal design variation start process, which is a process for starting the normal design variation in the design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sa4101, the process proceeds to step Sa4102.

In step Sa4102, a normal design fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display section 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sa4102, the process proceeds to step Sa4103.

In step Sa4103, normal design fluctuation post-stop processing, which is processing after stopping the fluctuation of the normal design, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sa4103, the process proceeds to step Sa4104.

In step Sa4104, normal electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The normal switching execution mode start process is a process for starting the normal switching execution mode when the conditions for starting the normal switching execution mode are satisfied. The details of the normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sa4104, the process proceeds to step Sa4105.

In step Sa4105, processing is executed during the general electricity opening period. The normal/universal power opening period process is a process executed during the normal/universal power opening period. The details of the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described later. After executing step Sa4105, the process proceeds to step Sa4106.

In step Sa4106, processing during normal electric switching period is executed. The normal power switching period process is a process executed during the normal power switching period. The details of the processing during the normal power switching period will be described later. After executing step Sa4106, the process proceeds to step Sa4107.

In step Sa4107, the normal electric ending period process is executed. The general electric ending period process is a process executed during the general electric ending period. The details of the processing during the general electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sa4107, this normal figure normal electric control processing is ended.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, normal design variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process described above.

FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Sa4201, it is determined whether or not the general/universal pattern/universal electric control value stored in the main side RAM64 is "01". Normal figure normal electric control value is a value indicating which stage the progress status of control of normal symbols and normal electric accessories is, and in this embodiment, normal figure normal electric control value is "01" indicates that the normal symbol is not changed and the normal open/close execution mode is not executed. In other words, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "01" indicates that it is possible to start the normal pattern fluctuation when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more. ing. In the present embodiment, the normal map normal power control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sa4201, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "01" (step Sa4201: NO), without executing any of the processes after step Sa4202 described later, this normal pattern fluctuation start process exit. That is, when the normal symbols are fluctuating or during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal symbols do not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sa4201, when it determines with a normal figure normal electric control value being "01" (step Sa4201:NO), it progresses to step Sa4202.

In step Sa4202, it is determined whether or not the number Nn of normal figure reservation is "1" or more. In step Sa4202, when it is determined that the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation is "1" or more (step Sa4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4203, and 1 is subtracted from the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa4204.

In step Sa4204, the general pattern reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the general pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, after moving the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d to the general pattern determination area 64e, the second area → the first area , 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sa4204, the process proceeds to step Sa4205.

In step Sa4205, the normal pattern right or wrong determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not to be elected per normal pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern correctness determination process, based on the general pattern correctness determination table selected based on the game state and the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, the general pattern It is determined whether or not to win a prize. After executing step Sa4205, the process proceeds to step Sa4206.

In step Sa4206, normal pattern type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern), is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern type determination process, based on the result of the general pattern type determination, the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, and the general pattern type determination table, normal Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sa4206, the process proceeds to step Sa4207.

In step Sa4207, the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern type determined in the normal pattern type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is the normal symbol A in the normal pattern type determination process, the normal pattern A flag is turned ON as the normal pattern type flag. After executing step Sa4207, the process proceeds to step Sa4208.

In step Sa4208, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the general pattern fluctuation time is determined based on the game state, the result of the general pattern suitability determination, and the general pattern fluctuation time table, and corresponds to the determined general pattern fluctuation time The value obtained is set in the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter. In this embodiment, during the high frequency support mode (high support state), a short fluctuation time (0.01 seconds) is set as the normal pattern fluctuation display time, and during the low frequency support mode (low support state) , a setting process for setting a long fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) longer than the short fluctuation time. After executing step Sa4208, the process proceeds to step Sa4209.

In step Sa4209, the normal figure fluctuation command is set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation time that has been set. After executing step Sa4209, the process proceeds to step Sa4210.

In step Sa4210, the normal figure classification command is set. The general figure type command includes the information of the result of the general figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a general figure hit) and the result of the general figure type determination (normally the type of pattern).

Normal figure variation command and normal figure type command set in step Sa4209 and step Sa4210 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received normal map variation command and the received normal map type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sa4210, the process proceeds to step Sa4211.

In step Sa4211, the normal pattern display section 38a is normally caused to start changing its design. Then, it progresses to step Sa4212 and sets "02" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electric control value is "02" indicates that the general pattern is in a state of fluctuation. After that, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, normal design variation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control processing.

FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. In step Sa4301, it is determined whether or not the normal map normal electric control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value is "02" indicates that the normal symbol is in a state of fluctuation. In step Sa4301, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "02" (step Sa4301: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa4301, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "02" (step Sa4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4302.

In step Sa4302, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Sa4302, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not passed (step Sa4302: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa4302, when it determines with normal figure fluctuation time having passed (step Sa4302: YES), it progresses to step Sa4303.

In step Sa4303, the normal symbol that is fluctuating in the normal symbol display section 38a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 38a. After executing step Sa4303, the process proceeds to step Sa4304.

In step Sa4304, normal figure stop display time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern stop display time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern stop display time (normal pattern stop display time) in the normal pattern display section 38a. Specifically, in the normal map stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment) is set in the normal map stop display time timer counter. After executing step Sa4304, it progresses to step Sa4305 and sets "03" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "03" indicates that the normal pattern is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the above modified configuration, the normal electric accessory 34b is set to be in a non-enterable state during execution of the variable display of the normal symbol, so the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure starting port 34. , reaches the first special electric role object 57b in the operating state of executing the opening/closing operation (the state of executing the special electric opening/closing execution mode) and is distributed to the V route inside the first special electric role object 57b. The game ball can be entered into the V winning opening 57av regardless of the state of the normal electric accessory 34b. Therefore, according to this configuration, for example, when the game ball cannot be entered into the second special figure start port 34 during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols, or the number of reservations of the second special figure lottery is the maximum value (4 pieces) and even if there is no profit even if the game ball is entered into the second special figure start port 34, the state in which the first special electric accessory 57b is executing the opening and closing operation ( If the special electric open/close execution mode is being executed), the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the special electric accessory. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible for the player to always aim for a profit by appropriately hitting the game balls according to the state of the electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory or special electric accessory). can be provided to

<Processing after normal pattern fluctuation stop>
Next, the processing after normal design fluctuation stop will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation post-stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control processing.

FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Sa4401, it is determined whether or not the general map general electric control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value of "03" indicates that the normal symbol is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. In step Sa4401, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "03" (step Sa4401: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa4401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "03" (step Sa4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4402.

In step Sa4402, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern stop display time set in the normal pattern stop display time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal map stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the normal map stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sa4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has not passed (step Sa4402: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa4402, when it determines with normal figure stop display time having passed (step Sa4402: YES), it progresses to step Sa4403.

In step Sa4403, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern right or wrong determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern per specific result. In step Sa4403, if it is determined that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is not ON (step Sa4403: NO), that is, the result of the normal pattern propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out of the normal pattern. If there is, proceed to step Sa4404, turn OFF the normal pattern type flag (normal pattern Z flag in this case) that is ON. Then, it progresses to step Sa4405 and sets "01" to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electric control value is "01", when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol state. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sa4403, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON (step Sa4403: YES), that is, the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the normal pattern fluctuation of this time is the general pattern If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sa4406, and "04" is set to the normal/universal power control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal/universal electric power control value is “04” indicates that the conditions for starting the normal/universal electric switching execution mode are met. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

<Commercial power switching execution mode start processing>
Next, normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described. The general electric switching execution mode start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control process.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing normal electric switching execution mode start processing. In step Sa5101, it is determined whether or not the normal map normal electric control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal power supply control value being “04” indicates that the condition for starting the normal/universal power switching execution mode has been established. In step Sa5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "04" (step Sa5101: NO), this normal/universal electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sa5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "04" (step Sa5101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5102.

In step Sa5102, a general electric switching scenario selection process is executed. The normal switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal switching scenario to be referenced in the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario selection table and the normal switching scenario selection table. After executing step Sa5102, the process proceeds to step Sa5103.

In step Sa5103, general electric opening time setting processing is executed. The general electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical opening time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical opening time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of this general electrical opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sa5103, the process proceeds to step Sa5104.

At step Sa5104, a general electric opening command is set. The set general electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa5104, it progresses to step Sa5105 and sets "05" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of "05" indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has started. After that, the normal electric switching execution mode start processing is ended.

<Processing during the opening period of the public electricity>
Next, the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described. The normal/universal electric opening period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal/universal electric power control process.

FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing processing during the general electric opening period. In step Sa5201, it is determined whether or not the normal map normal electric control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric power control value being “05” indicates that the general/universal electric power opening period has started. In step Sa5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "05" (step Sa5201: NO), this normal/universal electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "05" (step Sa5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5202.

In step Sa5202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical opening time timer counter set as the general electrical opening time in the general electrical opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sa5202 that it is not the time to end the general electric opening period (step Sa5202: NO), this general electric opening period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5202 that it is time for the general electric opening period to end (step Sa5202: YES), the process advances to step Sa5203 to set the general electric opening/closing period command. The set electric open/close period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. This general electric switching period command includes information on the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric switching period. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the general electric switching period command controls various production devices so as to execute a production corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened, based on the received general electric switching period command. Control. After executing step Sa5203, it progresses to step Sa5204 and sets "06" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of “06” indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has ended and the general/universal electric opening/closing period has started. After that, the processing during the main electric power opening period ends.

<Processing during normal power switching period>
Next, the processing during the normal power switching period will be described. The general electric switching period processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control processing.

FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the processing during the normal power switching period. In step Sa5301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric switch control value of "06" indicates that the electric open/close period has started. In step Sa5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "06" (step Sa5301: NO), this normal/universal electric switching period process ends. On the other hand, in step Sa5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "06" (step Sa5301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5302.

In step Sa5302, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the normal switching period is satisfied. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the normal switching period set in the normal switching scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sa5302 that the end condition of the normal switching period is not satisfied (step Sa5302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5303.

In step Sa5303, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34b, which is a switching unit capable of switching the second special figure starting port 34 between the open state and the closed state, is in the process of opening. In step Sa5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (step Sa5303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5304.

In step Sa5304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sa5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sa5304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5305.

In step Sa5305, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5306.

In step Sa5306, a utility power disconnection command is set. The common electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the common electric accessory 34b has been opened. The general electric disconnection command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After step Sa5306 is executed, the process during normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sa5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not established (step Sa5304: NO), the process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

In step Sa5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened (step Sa5303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5307.

In step Sa5307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sa5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sa5307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5308.

In step Sa5308, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. Specifically, the blade member, which is a rolling part capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period and entering the second special figure starting port 34, is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5309.

In step Sa5309, a general electric closing command is set. The general electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the general electric accessory 34b is closed. The general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After step Sa5309 is executed, this processing during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sa5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not established (step Sa5307: NO), the normal electric open/close period processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sa5302 that the conditions for ending the normal switching period are satisfied (step Sa5302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5310.

In step Sa5310, a normal electric ending time setting process is executed. The general electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical switching ending time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical ending time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. set to the end time timer counter. The value of this electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sa5310, the process proceeds to step Sa5311.

In step Sa5311, a general electric ending command is set. The set general electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sa5318, it progresses to step Sa5319 and sets "07" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. After that, the process during the normal electric switching period ends.

<Processing during the normal ending period>
Next, the processing during the general electric ending period will be described. The normal electric ending period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing processing during the general electric ending period. In step Sa5401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value of "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. In step Sa5401, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "07" (step Sa5401: NO), this normal/universal electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sa5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "07" (step Sa5401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5402.

In step Sa5402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical ending time timer counter set as the general electrical ending time in the general electrical ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sa5402 that it is not the time to end the general electrical ending period (step Sa5402: NO), this general electrical ending period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5402 that it is time to end the general electric ending period (step Sa5402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5403.

In step Sa5403, the normal figure classification flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5404.

In step Sa5404, a general electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set general electric switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process in the timer interrupt process. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5405.

In step Sa5405, "01" is set to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number Nn of reserved normal patterns is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of normal patterns. After that, the normal electric ending period process ends.

<<4-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sa6101, the process proceeds to step Sa6102.

In step Sa6102, the process for special figure game round production is executed. In the processing for special figure game round performance, the processing relating to the performance during execution of the special figure game round is executed. Specifically, for example, when receiving a special figure variation command and a special figure type command, the special symbol type included in the special figure variation time and special figure type command included in the special figure variation command, Based on the current game state, processing related to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 and processing for executing various effects are executed. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high probability high support state F3, the above-mentioned specific advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) is generated. Processing for executing expectations level effects (ready effects), effects that display while subtracting numerical information (e.g., countdown effects), opportunities suggestive effects that suggest to the player that the player is in a good opportunity, step-up effects, etc. to run. In addition, in this embodiment, in the high probability high support state F3, it is not important for the player that the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 (with a probability of almost 100%, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34), the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the second special figure start port 34 is in a state (open state) that can be entered Even if there is, it is configured not to execute an effect that suggests that the second special figure start port 34 will be in a state (open state) that can be entered.

In addition, the various productions (expectation degree production, countdown production, opportunity suggestion production, step-up production, etc.) can be executed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high probability high support state F3, but in this embodiment, Since it is configured as a special 2 priority machine that executes the 2 special lottery with priority over the 1st special lottery, the 1st special lottery will be executed at the timing when the execution of the pending 2nd special lottery is completed. When it is reserved, the variation of the first special symbol relating to the first special symbol lottery is executed, but the above various effects are not performed during the variation of the first special symbol. ing. In addition, since the special symbols and the normal symbols can be varied independently, the various effects for the variation of the special symbols may be executed regardless of whether or not the normal symbols are being varied. In other words, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, various effects (expectation level effect, countdown effect, opportunity suggesting effect, step-up effect, etc.) for the above-mentioned special symbol change may be executed. After executing step Sa6102, the process proceeds to step Sa6103.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first special electric accessory 57b instead of the V winning opening 57av, the V winning jackpot is won and the special electric opening and closing execution mode is started V winning An opening (V winning area) may be provided, and in the case of adopting this construction, when a game ball enters the V winning opening, the player is awarded a profit such as winning a V winning jackpot. A configuration may be adopted in which a V winning jackpot winning effect, which is a effect suggesting that the game is to be played, is executed.

In step Sa6103, processing for special electric opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing relating to the effect during the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special electric opening command is received, the special electric opening effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening and closing scenario and the right-handed notification process are set to be executed, and the background image for the special electric opening and closing execution mode is set. A process for displaying on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is executed. Further, when a special electric switching period command is received, a special electric switching period production corresponding to the type of the special electric switching scenario is set to be executed. Also, when the special electric open command is received, a special electric open production corresponding to the type of the special electric open/close scenario and the number of times the special electric accessory is opened is executed. Also, when the special electric closing command is received, the special electric interval period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times of closing the special electric accessory is executed. Also, when a special electric ending command is received, a special electric ending effect corresponding to the type of special electric opening and closing scenario, a background image corresponding to the game state after the end of the special electric opening and closing execution mode (normal state background image, high accuracy A process for displaying the high support state background image on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sa6103, the process proceeds to step Sa6104.

In step Sa6104, processing for V guaranteed winning effect is executed. In the V sure win effect processing, when a V win win command is received, an effect suggesting that a V win win has been set to be executed. After executing step Sa6104, the process proceeds to step Sa6105.

In step Sa6105, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sa6105, the process proceeds to step Sa6106.

At step Sa6106, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sa6106, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sa8101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa8102.

In step Sa8102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sa8201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa8301, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process described above is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a moving image display start command corresponding to the advance notice performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加When a moving image display start command corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the moving image corresponding to the ready-to-win performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

In the command processing (step Sa8301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step Sa8302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (step Sa8301), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa8303.

In step Sa8303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (step Sa8302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is selected. are specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, the process proceeds to step Sa8304.

In step Sa8304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (step Sa8303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sa8305, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush.

Conventionally, there is a desire to increase the number of balls to be put out other than winning a big win, and in order to meet this demand, it is possible to win a small win with a high probability, and the more the small win is won, the more the game balls in the player's hand are. Pachinko machines have been developed with increasing game states (so-called small win rushes). In a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when a small winning is won in a second special lottery during a small winning rush and the variable display of the second special pattern stops at a pattern corresponding to the small winning, The special electric accessory is opened to allow the game ball to enter the big winning hole. That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, a player can obtain a profit when a special electric accessory is released based on winning a small winning in the second special drawing.

However, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the second special lottery executed during the small winning rush also draws a big win, suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to win a big win. There is a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, and during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is executed (the period during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), no small win occurs, so the player can make a profit. There is a problem that the tempo of the game is slowed down, and that the player who wants to obtain a profit by opening the special electric role by winning the small prize has a very frustrating time.

In addition, among pachinko machines equipped with a conventional small winning rush, there is a pachinko machine in which the profit from the small winning cannot be obtained unless game balls are continuously shot during the small winning rush. Specifically, it is a pachinko machine capable of executing a ready-to-win effect even during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for winning a small win, and the ready-to-win effect is performed so that the player cannot obtain a profit. During execution (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), if you stop hitting (temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball) to avoid wasting the game ball, you will get a small hit at the end or end of the reach production. This pachinko machine prevents game balls from reaching a special electric accessory during the opening of the special electric accessory based on the winning of a small win even if the game ball is shot after confirming the winning. In such a pachinko machine, even during the execution of the ready-to-win effect in which no profit can be obtained (during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol), the small win that can occur after the variable display is stopped. There was a problem that it was not possible to stop the game in order to obtain a profit from the game, and the player was forced to waste the game balls and had an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, when the result of the second special lottery related to the ready-to-win effect executed during the small winning rush is lost, the player can execute the ready-to-win effect. In addition, there is a problem in that the player has an unpleasant feeling because he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize, and furthermore, he/she cannot obtain a profit from the small prize even after the variable display is stopped.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small-hit rush, the result of the second special lottery related to the reach effect executed during the small-hit rush ends the small-hit rush (normal jackpot), and if the small winning rush ends, the player will not get any profit from the small winning during the execution of the ready-to-win production, and the small winning rush will end as it is. There was a problem that I had an unpleasant feeling.

In this way, in a pachinko machine equipped with a conventional small winning rush, the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed during the small winning rush (the period during which the second special symbol is fluctuating) gives the player a profit from the small winning. It is a very frustrating period that cannot be obtained, and it is an unpleasant period in which game balls are forced to be wasted without being able to stop the game. has ended, there is a problem that it becomes a very unpleasant period that the small winning rush ends as it is without being able to obtain the profit from the small winning.

In recent years, liquid crystal displays arranged in the center of the game board have been enlarged in order to increase the impact of the presentation, and the game area in which game balls can be distributed is becoming narrower. For this reason, in order to adopt a configuration for realizing a new game property for solving the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, it is necessary to efficiently flow down the game ball and adjust the area according to the new game specifications. There was a problem that it was necessary to efficiently arrange a new mechanism for leading to the game board.

To solve the above problems, in the present embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is distributed to the left route L in order to maintain the closed state while the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed is changed. The game ball can enter the special winning hole 32s without entering the second big winning hole 58a. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even though the ready-to-win effect has been executed, the special figure jackpot advantageous to the player in the second special figure lottery (16R probability variable jackpot where there is a ball output and the rush continues) is won. Even if the player wins a special jackpot (2R normal jackpot where there is no ball and the rush ends) and the high probability and high support state F3 ends, the ready-to-win effect is executed. To give the player a feeling of exhilaration and satisfaction that a large amount of prize balls are paid out immediately before the end of the high-accuracy and high-support state F3 because the player can win many prize balls during the period. In addition, it is possible to relieve the player's anger and sense of loss for the fact that the high-quality support state F3 has ended. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended To solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in a non-operating state, the game ball that has reached the electric distribution device 36e flows down the central route U, so the second special electric role product 58b cannot be reached. On the other hand, in the high-precision high support state F3, which is a new rush state that solves the problem of the conventional small hit rush described above, the electric distribution device 36e is in an operating state, and the electric distribution device 36e is reached in the new rush state. The game ball that has been dropped flows down the left route L or the right route R, and the game ball distributed to the left route L is guided to the second special electric accessory 58b. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the normal state F1, the player cannot obtain a profit even if the game ball is shot aiming at the electric sorting device 36e. In the high-accuracy-high support state F3 (game state in which the operating member is in the operating state), which is a new rush state that solves the problem of 1, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the electric distribution device 36e to play the game. It is possible to realize a new playability such that the ball can be efficiently reached the electric sorting device 36e.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the advantage of the player (the number of prize balls that the player can acquire) changes depending on the length of the set second special figure fluctuation time. be able to. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the longer the variation time set as the second special figure variation time, the greater the number of prize balls that the player can obtain. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new feeling of expectation that a long variation time should be set as the second special figure variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, maintaining the closed state of the second special electric accessory 58b is an event advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a conventional general pachinko machine, winning a small prize and releasing a special electric accessory is an event that is advantageous to the player. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the events that are advantageous to the player are reversed from the conventional ones.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not have a function that allows simultaneous variation (so-called simultaneous variation function), it is possible for the player to win a large number of prize balls. A game state (so-called rush) can be realized. A pachinko machine with a simultaneous variation function has problems such as complicating the control and how to handle the remaining hold after the end of the rush. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that these problems do not occur.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability-high support state F3 are prize balls based on the game balls entering the special winning opening 32s. In other words, the prize balls paid out in the high-probability-high support state F3 are not prize balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the values of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio of the pachinko machine 10, and to widen the range of the number of prize balls that can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as the variable display time of the variable display when the result of the internal lottery is the specific result, it is possible to set a short variable time and a long variable time longer than the short variable time. The part is provided with a rolling part capable of rolling a game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entering part, and when a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation display time, the switching part puts the ball in a non-enterable state. A game ball that has been set and reached the operating member in the operating state and distributed to the first passage can enter the first ball entering portion. Specifically, in this embodiment, as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special special figure small hit, the short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) and the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds). When a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the figure fluctuation time, the second special electric accessory 58b is set to the closed state, reaches the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state, and left route L The game balls distributed to can enter the special prize winning opening 32s.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when a short variation time (0.1 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a small special figure, The game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the non-enterable state (closed state) is before the game ball completely rolls on the plate-shaped member. After a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds) has passed, the second special electric accessory 58b enters a ball-enterable state, so that the ball enters the second big prize-winning hole 58a and reaches the special prize-winning hole 32s. Can not do it. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the second big winning hole 58a is two, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a without reaching the special winning hole 32s. If so, the player has little profit.

On the other hand, if a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a special figure small hit, the ball cannot be entered (closed state), the game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b is set on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It rolls all the way to reach the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 32s. As described above, since the number of prize balls set in the special winning opening 32s is 15, the game ball rolls on the plate-like member of the second special electric accessory 58b and ends up in the special winning opening 32s. If the ball hits the , the player can get a lot of profit.

Thus, according to this embodiment, according to the length of the period set as the second special figure fluctuation time, the game ball distributed to the left route L can not reach the special winning opening 32s A situation in which the ball enters the second major winning opening 58a (that is, a situation in which the player cannot obtain a profit), and a situation in which the special winning opening 32s is reached and can be entered in the special winning opening 32s (that is, the player can create a situation where a company can benefit from

As a result, in a situation where a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set as the second special figure variation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is a small special figure, the player can play the game ball. By firing to reach the activated motorized diverter 36e, it is possible to obtain profit during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the game To solve a problem that a player cannot obtain a profit and the tempo of a game becomes worse, and a problem that a player is made to waste game balls without being able to stop and hit during execution of a ready-to-win performance. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the value imparted by entering the game ball into the first ball entering section is higher than the value imparted by entering the game ball into the fifth ball entering section. ing. Specifically, the prize balls (15) given by entering the game balls into the special winning hole 32s are the prize balls (2) given by entering the game balls into the second big winning hole 58a. ). The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. In this embodiment, when the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as the second special figure fluctuation time when the result of the second special figure lottery is the special figure small hit, the closed state The game ball rolling on the plate-like member of the set second special electric accessory 58b rolls on the plate-like member before the long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) elapses. It cuts and reaches the special winning opening 32s, and the ball can enter the special winning opening 32s. According to the present embodiment, the prize balls (15 pieces) provided by the game balls entering the special winning hole 32s are the prizes given by the game balls entering the second big winning hole 58a. Since the number of balls is larger than the number of balls (two), the player can have a new feeling that a longer period should be set as the second special figure fluctuation time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first path that allows the game ball to enter the first ball entering section that provides the first privilege and the second ball entering section that provides the second privilege allows the game ball to enter. and a third passage into which a game ball can enter the third ball entry part. Further, it is provided with an operating member that allows the game ball to flow down to the first path or the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, and causes the game ball to flow down to the third path in the non-operating state. The value for the player is higher in the first passage than in the second passage, and higher in the second passage than the third passage. Specifically, the left route L, in which a game ball can enter a special winning hole 32s that gives 15 prize balls, and the right winning hole 36i, in which one prize ball can be given, can enter a game ball. It has a right route R and a central route U through which a game ball can enter a lower ball entry port 36h. Furthermore, based on the transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3, it becomes an operating state (operating state that alternately repeats the left distribution state and the right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down the left route L or the right route R, An electric distribution device 36e is provided to flow down game balls to the central route U in a non-operating state, and the left route L is higher than the right route R, and the right route R is higher than the central route U for the player.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the operating state in which the operating member is operating can be a gaming state with higher value for the player than the non-operating state in which the operating member is not operating. , it is possible to create a feeling of expectation that a predetermined operating condition will be established and the operating member will be in an operating state, and an expectation that a game ball that has reached the operating member in the operating state will flow down the first passage. can make you feel. Specifically, the operation state in which the electric distribution device 36e alternately repeats the left distribution state and the right operation state is a game with a higher value for the player than the non-operation state in which the electric distribution device 36e is not in operation. Since it can be in the state, the player can have a sense of expectation that the electric distribution device 36e will be in the operating state by shifting to the high-accuracy high support state F3, and the electric vibration in the operating state. It is possible to make the player feel expectation that the game ball that has reached the separator 36e will flow down the left route L.

According to this embodiment, the first passage and the second passage through which the game ball that reaches the operating member in the operating state flows down, and the third passage through which the game ball that reaches the operating member in the non-operating state flows down are provided. , and the portions on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board 30 are different. Specifically, a left route L and a right route R through which game balls that have reached the operating electric distribution device 36e flow down, and a central route U through which game balls that have reached the non-operating electric distribution device 36e flow down. , includes a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back directions of the game board 30 is different.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently provide three passages in a narrow area of the game board 30, and to provide the player with a passage (second 1 passage and second passage), and the passage (third passage) through which the game ball that has reached the non-operating operating member flows down can be clearly distinguished and recognized. Specifically, it is possible to efficiently provide three routes leading game balls to a predetermined area in the narrow right side game area PAR of the game board 30, and to inform the player of the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state. A route (a left route L and a right route R) along which the game balls that have arrived flow down and a route (a central route U) along which the game balls that reach the non-operating electric distribution device 36e flow down are made to be clearly distinguished and recognized. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entering portion is one or less. Specifically, one or less prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. A game ball reaching the non-operating electric sorting device 36e passes through the central route U and enters the lower ball entrance 36h, but one game ball enters the lower ball entrance 36h. The number of prize balls paid out by doing is one or less. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the player hits to the right while aiming at the non-operating electric distribution device 36e, the player cannot increase the number of game balls on hand, and there is no merit. As a result, according to the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the original game flow is to hit left in the normal state F1, the player aims at the electric distribution device 36e in the non-operating state and moves to the right. Hitting can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the operating member is configured so that the game ball always flows down to the first passage or the second passage in a predetermined operating state, and the rate at which the game ball flows down is set to the second passage. The number of passages is configured to be greater than that of the first passages. Specifically, the electric distribution device 36e is configured so that the game ball always flows down the left route L or the right route R in the left distribution state or the right side operation state, and the ratio of the game balls flowing down is , the number of right routes R is greater than that of left routes L. More specifically, in this embodiment, the electric distribution device 36e maintains the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds in the operating state, and then shifts to the right side distribution state over 0.05 seconds, After maintaining the right side distribution state for 0.6 seconds, the operation of shifting to the left side distribution state over 0.05 seconds and maintaining the left side distribution state for 0.3 seconds is repeated. As a result, the game balls reaching the operating electric sorting device 36e are sorted to the left route L and the right route R at a ratio of 1:2. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described. According to this configuration, in the high-probability-high support state F3, the player shoots the game ball by timing the operation of the electric distribution device 36e so that the game ball flows down only to the left route L, which has a high value. However, the rate at which game balls flow down is greater on the right route R than on the left route L, so the electric distribution device 36e is instructed to the player so that the game balls flow down only on the left route L, which has a higher value. It is possible to give up shooting the game ball by measuring the timing of the operation of.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the third path is configured so that the game ball enters only the third ball entering portion in the predetermined game state. Specifically, the central route U is configured such that, in the normal state F1, the game ball enters only the lower ball entrance 36h. Therefore, in the normal state F1, even if the player aims for the game ball to circulate through the central route U, the game ball enters only the lower ball entrance 36h, which has the lowest value, and there is no merit for the player. . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand aiming at the central route U in the normal state F1.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the flow path leading to the actuating member, there are provided an action portion that acts on the game balls to flow down at random by the game nails, and a straightening portion that straightens the game balls so that they can flow down one by one. Prepare. Specifically, in the flow path up to the electric distribution device 36e, there are an action nail region 36c in which the game nails act on the flow of the game balls at random, and a rectification nail region in which the game balls can flow down one by one. 36d. According to this configuration, the timing at which game balls reach the electric distribution device 36e can be made random, and the game balls reaching the electric distribution device 36e can be made one ball at a time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the electric distribution device 36e becomes random, so that the electric distribution device 36e is arranged so that the game ball flows down only to the left route L, which has a high value. In addition, the electric distribution device 36e in the operating state can always distribute the game balls one by one to the left route L or the right route R. , the player can be made to pay attention to the game balls distributed one by one.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an expectation performance indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not a specific advantageous result will occur during execution of the variable display relating to the internal lottery. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high probability high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it is an expectation performance that suggests the expectation of whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot will occur. It is configured to be able to execute a reach effect. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the player is given a sense of expectation as to whether or not the high probability high support state F3 advantageous to the player will continue after the 16R probability variable jackpot occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol ends. Since the second special electric accessory 58b maintains the closed state while the second special symbol is fluctuating while the ready-to-win effect is being executed, the game ball distributed to the left route L is It is possible to enter the ball into the special winning hole 32s without entering the second big winning hole 58a. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during the variation of the second special symbol in which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the player can You can win many prizes. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special drawing lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush ends It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get the profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is. .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect of displaying while subtracting numerical information during execution of variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the countdown effect, which is the effect of displaying while subtracting the numerical information, is configured to be executable. there is Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the time until the variable display of the second special symbol ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning hole 32s. can be done. As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the special winning opening 32s from the numerical information displayed in the countdown effect, thereby determining whether or not the game ball is to be shot and the timing. It is possible to adjust and suppress useless shooting of game balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting that the player is in a good opportunity during execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set, an effect that suggests that the player is in a good opportunity is configured to be executable. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can be made to clearly recognize that the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the long variable time is set is the best opportunity for the player. can be done.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to display information regarding the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 32s in the high-probability-high support state F3. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls entering the important special winning hole 32s.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering section. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, a special winning opening ball entry effect is configured to be executable as an effect suggesting that a profit is given to the player. ing. Therefore, the profit that the player aims to obtain is that the game ball enters the special winning hole 32s, not the prize ball paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a. It is possible to clearly recognize that it is a prize ball paid out by.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first effect is executed during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery, and the second effect different from the first effect is performed following the first effect. It is configured to be able to execute production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability-high support state F3, step-up effect 1 is executed during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, step-up effect 1 is followed by step-up effect 2. is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the step-up performance 1 is executed for the player, the step-up performance 2 is continuously executed after the step-up performance 1, and the variable display of the second special symbol is still continued. It can give you a feeling of hope.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first background image can be displayed in the first game state in which the operating member is in the non-operating state, and the first background image can be displayed in the second game state in which the operating member is in the operating state. It is configured to be able to display a second background image different from the image. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the background image for the normal state F1 can be displayed in the normal state F1 in which the electric distribution device 36e is in the non-operating state, and the electric distribution device 36e is in the operating state. In the support state F3, the background image for the high-accuracy-high support state F3 can be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the game state has changed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the switching unit puts the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section into the ball-enterable state, the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering section is in the ball-enterable state. It is configured so as not to execute the production that suggests that it will be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, even when the second special electric accessory 58b causes the second large prize winning port 58a to be opened, it is suggested that the second large prize winning port 58a is open. It is configured so as not to execute the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the second big winning hole 58a is in a ball-enterable state (open state).

As described above, in this gaming machine, the switching unit maintains the state in which the ball cannot be entered during the execution of the variable display related to the internal lottery. Although it is not possible, it is possible to enter the first ball entering section. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion when the switching portion is in the ball entering impossible state. That is, by providing a ball-entering section that can enter a ball according to each state of the switching section, it is possible to always provide the player with the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, by appropriately setting the value of the passage distributed by the operating member, the player can have a new sense of expectation, and a plurality of passages can be efficiently provided on the game board. becomes possible.

<<4-7>> Functions and effects:

As described above, according to the present embodiment, each ball entry portion is appropriately arranged, and the length of the period set as the variable display time is appropriately controlled, so that the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible. Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine equipped with a small winning rush.

<<4-8>> Modified example of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<4-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above embodiment and each of the modifications, it is important for the player to determine which path the game balls are distributed to, the left path L as the first path or the right path R as the second path. Therefore, as a modification, the first and second passages may be provided on the back side of the game board 30 and the third passage may be provided on the front side of the game board 30 . Specifically, for example, the left route L and the right route R may be provided on the back side of the game board 30 and the central route U may be provided on the front side of the game board 30 . The game board 30 is made of a transparent (or translucent) member so that the left route L and the right route R can be seen from the front side of the game board 30. A configuration in which a light source (for example, an LED) capable of illuminating L and the right route R may be provided. According to this configuration, the game balls circulating in the left route L and the right route R can be made conspicuous, and attention is improved as to whether the game balls are distributed to the left route L or the right route R. can be made

<<4-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the game state may be changed when the game ball enters the first ball-entering portion. Specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the special winning hole 32s, the game state may be changed. According to this configuration, in addition to the joy of the game ball entering the high-value special prize winning slot 32s, the player is given a sense of tension that the current advantageous game state will end. can give.

<<4-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, the result of the internal lottery includes "loss" that does not allow the switching unit to move to the state where the ball can be entered, and if the result of the internal lottery is "loss", the Even if the variable display ends, the switching unit may be configured not to shift to the ball-enterable state. Specifically, for example, the result of the second special lottery includes "loss" that does not allow the second special electric accessory 58b to move to the state where it is possible to enter the ball, and the result of the second special lottery is "loss". , the second special electric accessory 58b may be configured so as not to shift to the ball-enterable state even after the variable display ends. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the result of the second special lottery is "lost", the game ball rolling on the plate-shaped member of the second special electric accessory 58b is displayed in the variable display Even after the end of , it is possible to reach the special winning opening 32s and enter the special winning opening 32s. Therefore, according to this modified example, the most unfavorable result for the player in a general pachinko machine, "missing", becomes an advantageous result for the player. can do.

<<4-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the fourth ball entering section may be configured such that the entering game ball may remain in the game area and circulate. Specifically, for example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be configured such that the entering game ball may remain in the right game area PAR and circulate. More specifically, for example, a passage where the game ball entering the second special figure start port 34 returns to the right side game area PAR from the back of the game board 30, a passage that does not return to the right side game area PAR, It is good also as a structure provided with the distribution mechanism which distributes the game ball which entered the 2 special figure starting port 34 to either of these two passages. When this configuration is adopted, the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 34 may then return to the right side game area PAR and reach the electric distribution device 36e. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, the more game balls that reach the electric sorting device 36e, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, whether or not the game ball that entered the second special figure start port 34 remains (returns) in the right side game area PAR, and if it remains, how the right side It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of whether or not the game area PAR is distributed.

<<4-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the fourth ball entry section may be configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. Specifically, for example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. Advantages of adopting this configuration will be described. The profit that the player aims to obtain in this pachinko machine 10 is set to a long variation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) as the second special figure variation time, so that the game ball enters the special winning opening 32s, It is a prize ball paid out as a result. However, when adopting the configuration in which the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, as long as the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the second special figure fluctuation time Regardless of whether or not a long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set as a length becomes less important. On the other hand, as in this modification, if the second special figure start port 34 is configured not to pay out the prize ball even if the game ball enters, the second special figure fluctuation time is long. Regardless of whether the variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) is set or not, the player cannot win the fixed prize balls that have been paid out, so it is set as the second special figure variable time. It is possible to further increase the importance of the length of the period.

<<4-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration may be such that when a game ball enters the fifth ball-entering portion, the game state is shifted with a predetermined probability. Specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, the game state may be shifted with a predetermined probability. According to this configuration, every time the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a, the player feels a sense of urgency that the current advantageous high-probability-high support state F3 will end. At the same time that the second special electric accessory 58b is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, the player does not want the game ball to reach the second special electric accessory 58b. can let

<<4-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<4-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<4-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment and each modification may be realized by hardware, or part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software. good too.

<<4-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristics aA group>
The feature aA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aA1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are provided with different parts in which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30). machine.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides two benefits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry area). The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, an operation means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right side route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

[Feature aA2]
The gaming machine according to feature aA1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entry area (lower ball entry hole 36h) is one or less.

According to this feature, the game ball that reaches the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e) passes through the third flow path (central route U) and passes through the third ball entry area (lower ball entrance 36h). However, no more than one prize ball is paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entry area (lower ball entrance 36h). Therefore, according to this feature, even if the game ball is shot aiming at the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e) (even if the game ball is hit to the right), the player increases the game ball in hand. It cannot be done and there is no merit. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from firing a game ball (right hitting) aiming at the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e).

[Feature aA3]
A gaming machine according to feature aA1 or feature aA2,
The operating means (electric distribution device 36e), in a predetermined operation state (left side distribution state or right side operation state), the game ball is always the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right side) route R), and the rate at which game balls flow down is greater in the second flow path (right side route R) than in the first flow path (left side route L). A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e), in a predetermined operation state (left side distribution state or right side operation state), the game ball is always the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow It is configured to flow down the path (right side route R), and the ratio of game balls flowing down is higher in the second flow path (right side route R) than in the first flow path (left side route L). , so that the player can control the timing of the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so that the game balls flow down only to the high-value first flow path (left route L). , the rate at which game balls flow down is greater in the second flow path (right side route R) than in the first flow path (left side route L). It is possible to give up shooting game balls by timing the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so that the game balls flow down only to the flow path (left route L).

[Feature aA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to feature aA3,
The third flow path (central route U) is configured so that a game ball enters only the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h) in a predetermined game state (normal state F1). A game machine characterized by

According to this feature, the third flow path (central route U) is configured so that game balls enter only the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h) in a predetermined game state (normal state F1). Therefore, in the predetermined game state (normal state F1), even if the player aims for the game ball to circulate in the third flow path (central route U), the third ball entry area (lower part) with the lowest value Since the game ball enters only the ball entrance 36h), there is no merit for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, in the predetermined game state (normal state F1), it is possible to suppress the player from shooting the game ball (right hitting) aiming at the third flow path (central route U). can.

[Feature aA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to feature aA4,
In the flow path leading to the operating means (electric distribution device 36e), there is an action region (action nail region 36c) in which the game nails act on the flow of the game balls at random, and a rectification that allows the game balls to flow down one by one. and a rectifying area (rectifying nail area 36d).

According to this feature, in the flow path up to the operating means (electric distribution device 36e), there is an action area (action nail area 36c) in which the game nail acts to randomly flow down the game ball, and one game ball. Since it is provided with a rectifying area (rectifying nail area 36d) that rectifies so that it can flow down one by one, the timing at which the game ball reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) can be randomized, and the operation means (electric distribution device 36e) can be made one ball at a time. Therefore, according to this feature, since the timing at which the game ball reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is random, it is possible for the player to see the game ball only in the high-value first flow path (left route L). It is possible to give up the timing of the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so as to flow down and shoot the game ball, and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state shoots the game ball. Since it is possible to distribute one ball at a time to the first channel (left route L) or the second channel (right route R) without fail, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game balls distributed one by one.

[Feature aA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA5,
A game machine, wherein the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) are provided on the back side of the game board (game board 30).

In this game machine, it is important for the player to decide which of the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) the game balls are distributed to.

According to this feature, the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) are provided on the back side of the game board (game board 30). The game board (game board 30) is made transparent (or translucent) so that the (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) can be seen from the front side of the game board (game board 30). In addition, by providing a light source (for example, an LED) capable of illuminating the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) on the back side of the game board (game board 30), The game balls flowing through the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right side route R) can be conspicuous. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention as to whether the game balls are distributed to the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R). .

In the present application, the "rear side of the game board" means the back side (the side away from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10) in the front view of the game board from the front side of the game board. I wish I had.

[Feature aA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to feature aA6,
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning hole 32s).

According to this feature, when the game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), the means for shifting the game state is provided, so the game ball is highly valuable to the player. In addition to the joy of entering the first ball-entering area (special winning hole 32s), it is possible to give a sense of tension that the current advantageous game state will end.

[Feature aA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA7,
In a situation where the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state (operating state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is caused to shoot a game ball in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing an effect (right-throwing notification effect aimed at an electric sorting device) to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right.

In this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the player can obtain a large profit by causing game balls to reach the actuating means (electric distribution device 36e) that is in an operating state.

According to this feature, in a situation where the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state, the game ball can be fired in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) (right Since it is equipped with a means capable of executing an effect (electric distribution device aiming right hitting notification effect) that prompts the player to hit the game ball It is possible to clearly recognize that it is a situation that should be reached.

[Feature aA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA8,
Means capable of executing an effect (special winning hole entrance effect) suggesting that a player is awarded a profit when a game ball enters the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) A gaming machine characterized by:

In this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the profit that the player aims to obtain is a prize paid out when a game ball enters a fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a) described later. It is not a ball, but a prize ball paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s).

According to this feature, when a game ball enters the first ball-entering area (special winning hole 32s), an effect (special winning hole entering ball effect) is executed to suggest that a profit is given to the player. Since possible means are provided, the profit that the player aims to obtain is not the prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a), It is possible to clearly recognize that the game ball is a prize ball to be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning hole 32s).

[Feature aA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA9,
The first background image (normal state F1 background image) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the non-operating state (non-operating state). , a second background image (high A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of displaying a background image for a certain height support state F3).

According to this feature, the first background image (normal state F1 background image) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state, A second background image (high-precision high-support state F3) different from the first background image in the second game state (high-precision high-support state F3) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state (operating state) (F3 background image) is provided. Advantages of adopting this configuration will be described. In this gaming machine, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) can be in a non-operating state and an operating state. Therefore, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) operates from the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operation means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state. Even in the case of transition to the second game state (high-probability-high support state F3), the player may not notice that the game state has shifted. Therefore, according to this feature, the first background image (normal state F1 background image) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state. There is a second background image (for high-precision height support state F3) different from the first background image in the second game state (high-precision height support state F3) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state Since means for displaying the background image) is provided, the player can easily notice that the game state has changed.

[Feature aA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA10,
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long A variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric role item 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball area (second big winning opening 58a) is provided with a rolling means (plate-like member) that can enter a ball, and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time). In this case, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to a non-enterable state (closed state), reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, and switches to the first flow path (left route L ) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature aA12]
The gaming machine according to feature aA11,
The value (15 prize balls) given by the game ball entering the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is the same as the value given to the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). A gaming machine characterized by a value higher than the value (two prize balls) imparted by the entry of a ball.

In this feature, the value (15 prize balls) given by the game ball entering the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is transferred to the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a) A higher value than the value (two prize balls) given by the entering ball of the game ball is adopted. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In this game machine, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 second to 180 seconds)) is set, above the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) that is set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The rolling game ball rolls over the rolling means (plate-shaped member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and enters the first ball entry area (Special winning opening 32s) is reached, and a ball can enter the first ball entering area (Special winning opening 32s). And, according to this feature, the value (15 prize balls) given by entering the game ball into the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is the fifth ball entering area (second big winning Since it is higher than the value (two prize balls) given by the game ball entering the mouth 58a), it is new that a longer period should be set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time). It is possible to make the player feel emotions and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature aA13]
A gaming machine according to feature aA11 or feature aA12,
The result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) includes "missing" that does not shift the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) to the ball-enterable state (open state). Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) includes "off" that does not shift the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) to the ball-enterable state (open state). If the result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) is "missing", even if the variable display ends, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in the state where the ball can be entered ( open state). In this case, the game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) remains in the first ball entry area (special winning opening) even after the end of the variable display. 32s), and can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Therefore, according to this feature, the most unfavorable result for the player in a general game machine, "miss", becomes an advantageous result for the player, providing the player with a new game that has never existed before. be able to.

[Feature aA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA13,
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that there is a case where the entered game ball remains in the game area and circulates.

According to this feature, the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that the entered game ball may remain in the game area and circulate, so for example, the fourth There is a case where the game ball entered into the entering ball area (second special figure starting port 34) then reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e). In particular, in this feature, the more game balls that reach the operating means (electric sorting device 36e), the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the pleasure of whether or not the game ball that entered the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) remains in the game area, and the pleasure of how to circulate the game area after that if it remains can be provided to the player.

[Feature aA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA14,
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters.

According to this feature, the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if game balls enter. The advantage of adopting this configuration will be described. The profit that the player aims to obtain in this gaming machine is the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time). It is a prize ball that enters the 1-ball entry area (special winning hole 32s) and is paid out as a result. However, when adopting a configuration in which prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34), the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) Regardless of whether or not the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) as long as the game ball enters It becomes possible to win prize balls, and the importance of the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) is reduced. On the other hand, as in this feature, if the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters, the variable display Regardless of whether or not the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the time (second special figure fluctuation time), the player wins the fixed prize balls that have been paid out. Since it is not possible, it is possible to further increase the importance of the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time).

[Feature aA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA15,
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a).

According to this feature, when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), the means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability is provided. Every time the ball enters the fifth ball entry area (the second big winning hole 58a), there is a sense of urgency that the current advantageous game state (high accuracy and high support state F3) may end. At the same time that the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a state where the ball can be entered, the game ball does not want to reach the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b). It is possible to make the player feel emotions.

[Feature aA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA16,
Means capable of executing an expectation performance (reach performance) that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), the expectation degree production (reach production) that suggests the degree of expectation whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur is provided, a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) occurs and the advantageous state continues after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is completed. While executing the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is executed, the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is In order to maintain the non-enterable state (closed state), the game ball distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a). It is possible to enter the ball into the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) without the first ball entering area. That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the expectation degree performance (reach performance), the expectation degree performance The player can win many prize balls during the period during which the (ready-to-win effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended, the reach It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get any profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is.

[Feature aA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA17,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) for displaying numerical information while subtracting numerical information during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols).

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), since it has a means capable of executing the effect (countdown effect) that displays while subtracting the numerical information, the variable display (second special It is possible to suggest to the player the time until the symbol variation display) ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) from the numerical information displayed in the effect. By adjusting the presence/absence and timing of shooting, it is possible to suppress wasteful shooting of game balls.

[Feature aA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA18,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing an effect (opportunity state suggesting effect) to suggest that the player is in an opportunistic state during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol). .

In this gaming machine, unlike a general gaming machine, a favorable state for the player is during execution of variable display (variable display of the second special symbols). However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game on this gaming machine for the first time to understand.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), it is provided with a means capable of executing an effect (opportunity suggestive effect) that suggests to the player that the player is in a favorable opportunity state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution of this variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) is the best opportunity for the player.

[Feature aA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA19,
During execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), a first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and a second production different from the first production is executed continuously with the first production. A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing the production (step-up production 2).

In this game machine, unlike a general game machine, not only the lottery result after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) but also the period of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) It is important for the player whether it continues for a long time.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), the first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and the first production (step-up production 1) is performed continuously. Since means for executing a second effect (step-up effect 2) different from the first effect (step-up effect 1) is provided, the first effect (step-up effect 1) is executed for the player. When the second effect (step-up effect 1) is executed, the second effect (step-up effect 2) is executed continuously, and the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is still continued. It can make you feel the expectation that you want to do it.

[Feature aA21]
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA11 to aA20,
Even if the ball entrance of the fifth ball entrance area (second big prize opening 58a) is put into a ball entrance possible state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), the first A game machine characterized by comprising means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entry opening of the 5 ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a) will be in a ball entry possible state (open state).

In this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, it is advantageous for the player that the ball entrance of the fifth ball entrance area (second big winning mouth 58a) is in a ball-enterable state (open state). It's a disadvantage, not a thing.

According to this feature, when the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is brought into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), also has a means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entrance of the fifth ball entrance area (second big winning mouth 58a) will be in a state (open state) where a ball can be entered. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the ball entry opening of the 5 ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a) is in a ball entry possible state (open state). .

<Feature aB group>
The feature aB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aB1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entry area (lower ball entry hole 36h) is one or less.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the game ball that reaches the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e) passes through the third flow path (central route U) and passes through the third ball entry area (lower ball entrance 36h), but no more than one prize ball is paid out when one game ball enters the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h). Therefore, according to this feature, even if a game ball is shot aiming at the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e) (even if the game ball is hit to the right), the player increases the game ball in hand. It cannot be done and there is no merit. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from firing a game ball (right hitting) aiming at the non-operating operating means (electric distribution device 36e).

<Characteristic aC group>
The feature aC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aC1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The operating means (electric distribution device 36e), in a predetermined operation state (left side distribution state or right side operation state), the game ball is always the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right side) route R), and the rate at which game balls flow down is greater in the second flow path (right side route R) than in the first flow path (left side route L). A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides two benefits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry area). The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, an operation means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e), in a predetermined operation state (left side distribution state or right side operation state), the game ball is always the first flow path (left route L) or the first It is configured to flow down in two flow paths (right route R), and the proportion of game balls flowing down is higher in the second flow path (right route R) than in the first flow path (left route L). Therefore, the player can time the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so that the game balls flow down only to the high-value first flow path (left route L). Even if the game ball is shot, the rate at which the game ball flows down is higher in the second flow path (right side route R) than in the first flow path (left side route L). It is possible to give up shooting game balls by timing the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so that the game balls flow down only to the first flow path (left route L).

<Characteristic aD group>
The feature aD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aD1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The third flow path (central route U) is configured so that a game ball enters only the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h) in a predetermined game state (normal state F1). A game machine characterized by

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides two benefits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry area). The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, an operation means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the third flow path (central route U) is configured so that the game ball enters only the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h) in the predetermined game state (normal state F1). Therefore, in the predetermined game state (normal state F1), even if the player aims for the game ball to circulate in the third flow path (central route U), the third ball entry area with the lowest value Since game balls enter only (lower ball entrance 36h), there is no merit for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, in the predetermined game state (normal state F1), it is possible to suppress the player from shooting the game ball (right hitting) aiming at the third flow path (central route U). can.

<Characteristic aE group>
The feature aE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aE1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which game balls can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
In the flow path leading to the operating means (electric distribution device 36e), there is an action region (action nail region 36c) in which the game nails act on the flow of the game balls at random, and a rectification that allows the game balls to flow down one by one. and a rectifying area (rectifying nail area 36d).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right side route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the action area (action nail area 36c) in which the game nails randomly act on the game balls to flow down and the game balls are placed in the flow path up to the operating means (electric distribution device 36e). Since it is provided with a rectifying area (rectifying nail area 36d) that rectifies so that it can flow down one ball at a time, the timing of game balls reaching the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) can be randomized, and the operating means (electric vibration The number of game balls reaching the minute device 36e) can be made one ball at a time. Therefore, according to this feature, since the timing at which the game ball reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is random, it is possible for the player to see the game ball only in the high-value first flow path (left route L). It is possible to give up the timing of the operation of the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) so as to flow down and shoot the game ball, and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state shoots the game ball. Since it is possible to distribute one ball to the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) without fail, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game balls distributed one by one.

<Characteristic aF group>
The feature aF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aF1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which game balls can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
A game machine, wherein the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) are provided on the back side of the game board (game board 30).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right side route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

In addition, in this gaming machine, it is important for the player to decide which of the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) the game balls are distributed to.

According to this feature, the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) are provided on the back side of the game board (game board 30). The game board (game board 30) is made transparent (or translucent) so that the (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) can be seen from the front side of the game board (game board 30). In addition, by providing a light source (for example, an LED) capable of illuminating the first channel (left route L) and the second channel (right route R) on the back side of the game board (game board 30), The game balls flowing through the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) can be highlighted. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention as to whether the game balls are distributed to the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R). .

In the present application, "the back side of the game board" means the back side (the side away from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10) in the front view of the game board from the front side of the game board. I wish I had.

<Characteristic aG group>
The feature aG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aG1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning hole 32s).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s), the means for shifting the game state is provided. In addition to the joy of entering the ball into the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) with a high value, it is possible to give a sense of tension that the current advantageous game state will end.

<Characteristic aH group>
The feature aH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aH1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which game balls can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
In a situation where the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state (operating state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is caused to shoot a game ball in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing an effect (right-throwing notification effect aimed at an electric sorting device) to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the player can obtain a large profit by making the game ball reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) which is in an operating state. .

According to this feature, in a situation where the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state, the game ball can be fired in a shooting mode in which the game ball can reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) (right Since it is equipped with a means capable of executing an effect (electric distribution device aiming right hitting notification effect) that prompts the player to hit the game ball It is possible to clearly recognize that it is a situation that should be reached.

<Characteristic group aI>
The feature aI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aI1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A means capable of executing an effect (special winning hole entrance effect) suggesting that a player is awarded a profit when a game ball enters the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the profit that the player aims to obtain is paid out when a game ball enters a fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a) described later. It is a prize ball that is paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entry area (special winning hole 32s), not a prize ball that is received.

According to this feature, when a game ball enters the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s), an effect (special winning hole entering ball effect) is executed to suggest that the player is given a profit. Since possible means are provided, the profit that the player aims to obtain is not the prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a), It is possible to clearly recognize that the game ball is a prize ball to be paid out by entering the first ball entry area (special winning hole 32s).

<Characteristic aJ group>
The feature aJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aJ1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
The first background image (normal state F1 background image) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the non-operating state (non-operating state). , a second background image (high A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of displaying a background image for a certain height support state F3).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the first background image (background image for normal state F1) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state. There is a second background image (high-precision high (Background image for support state F3) is provided. Advantages of adopting this configuration will be described. In this gaming machine, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) can be in a non-operating state and an operating state. Therefore, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) operates from the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operation means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state. Even in the case of transition to the second game state (high-probability-high support state F3), the player may not notice that the game state has shifted. Therefore, according to this feature, the first background image (normal state F1 background image) can be displayed in the first game state (normal state F1) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in a non-operating state. There is a second background image (for high-precision height support state F3) different from the first background image in the second game state (high-precision height support state F3) in which the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) is in the operating state Since means for displaying the background image) is provided, the player can easily notice that the game state has changed.

<Characteristic aK group>
The feature aK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aK1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game ball distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-shaped member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display It is possible to make profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the player does not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game ball during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics aL group>
The feature aL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aL1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The value (15 prize balls) given by the game ball entering the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is the same as the value given to the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a). A gaming machine characterized by a value higher than the value (two prize balls) imparted by the entry of a ball.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this feature, the value (15 prize balls) given by entering the game ball into the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a ) is higher than the value (two prize balls) imparted by the entry of the game ball into the game ball. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

In this game machine, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 second to 180 seconds)) is set, above the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) that is set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The rolling game ball rolls over the rolling means (plate-shaped member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and enters the first ball entry area (Special winning opening 32s) is reached, and a ball can enter the first ball entering area (Special winning opening 32s). And, according to this feature, the value (15 prize balls) given by entering the game ball into the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) is the fifth ball entering area (second big winning Since it is higher than the value (two prize balls) given by the game ball entering the mouth 58a), it is new that a longer period should be set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time). It is possible to make the player feel emotions and improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic aM group>
The feature aM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aM1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) includes "missing" that does not cause the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) to shift to the ball-enterable state (open state). Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the player does not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game ball during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) includes "missing" that does not shift the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) to the ball-enterable state (open state). If the result of the predetermined lottery (second special lottery) is "lost", the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) can enter the ball even after the change display ends. It does not transition to the state (open state). In this case, the game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) remains in the first ball entry area (special winning opening) even after the end of the variable display. 32s), and can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). Therefore, according to this feature, the most unfavorable result for the player in a general game machine, "miss", becomes an advantageous result for the player, providing the player with a new game that has never existed before. be able to.

<Characteristic aN group>
The feature aN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aN1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which game balls can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that there is a case where the entered game ball remains in the game area and circulates.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game ball distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display It is possible to make profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect during the small winning rush (during the execution of the variable display), the player does not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game ball during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so that the entering game ball may remain in the game area and circulate. A game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) may then reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e). In particular, in this feature, the more game balls that reach the operating means (electric sorting device 36e), the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the enjoyment of whether or not the game ball that entered the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) remains in the game area, and the enjoyment of how to circulate the game area after that if it remains can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic aO group>
The feature aO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aO1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured so as not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters.

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right side route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if a game ball enters. The advantage of adopting this configuration will be described. The profit that the player aims to obtain in this gaming machine is the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time). It is a prize ball that enters the 1-ball entry area (special winning hole 32s) and is paid out as a result. However, when adopting a configuration in which prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34), the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) Regardless of whether or not the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) as long as the game ball enters It becomes possible to win prize balls, and the importance of the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) is reduced. On the other hand, as in this feature, if the fourth ball entry area (second special figure start port 34) is configured not to pay out prize balls even if the game ball enters, the variable display Regardless of whether or not the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the time (second special figure fluctuation time), the player wins the fixed prize balls that have been paid out. Since it is not possible, it is possible to further increase the importance of the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time).

<Characteristic aP group>
The feature aP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aP1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big prize winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a game state with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display It is possible to make profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game ball during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, when a game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a), the means for shifting the game state with a predetermined probability is provided. , Every time a game ball enters the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a), the sense of urgency that the current advantageous game state (high accuracy and high support state F3) will end. and the game ball reaches the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) at the timing when the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a state where it can be entered. It is possible to make the player feel that there is no such thing.

<Characteristic aQ group>
The feature aQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aQ1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
Means capable of executing an expectation performance (reach performance) that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) will occur during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game ball distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), the expectation degree production (reach production) is provided, a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) occurs and the advantageous state continues after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is completed. can be held by the player, and during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is executed, the switching means (second special electric role 58b ) maintains a non-enterable state (closed state), the game ball distributed to the first flow path (left route L) must enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a). is not possible, and the ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). That is, it is possible for the player to obtain a profit during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) in which the expectation degree effect (reach effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the problem that has occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, the player cannot obtain a profit during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the tempo of the game deteriorates. It is possible to solve the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the ball during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, according to this feature, even if a predetermined advantageous result (16R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player does not occur despite the execution of the expectation degree performance (reach performance), the expectation degree performance The player can win many prize balls during the period during which the (ready-to-win effect) is being executed. Therefore, according to this feature, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, as a result of the special lottery related to the reach production, when the small winning rush has ended, the reach It is possible to solve the problem that the period during which the performance is executed becomes a very unpleasant period in which the player does not get any profit from the small win and the small win rush ends as it is.

<Characteristic aR group>
The feature aR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aR1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) for displaying numerical information while subtracting numerical information during execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display It is possible to make profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the game machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), it is provided with a means capable of executing an effect (countdown effect) that displays while subtracting the numerical information. It is possible to suggest to the player the time until the 2 special symbol fluctuation display) ends, that is, the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s). . As a result, the player can read the remaining time until the game ball cannot reach the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) from the numerical information displayed in the effect. By adjusting the presence/absence and timing of shooting, it is possible to suppress useless shooting of game balls.

<Characteristic aS group>
The feature aS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aS1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing an effect (opportunity state suggesting effect) that suggests to the player that the player is in an opportunistic state during the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol). .

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game ball distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-like member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display It is possible to make profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, a favorable state for the player is the execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbols). However, it may not be easy for a player who has played a game on this gaming machine for the first time to understand.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), it is provided with a means capable of executing an effect (opportunity suggestive effect) that suggests to the player that the player is in a favorable opportunity state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution of this variable display (variable display of the second special symbols) is the best opportunity for the player.

<Characteristic aT group>
The feature aT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aT1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
During execution of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), a first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and a second production different from the first production is executed continuously with the first production. A game machine characterized by comprising a means capable of executing the production (step-up production 2).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it is possible to set a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-shaped member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball-entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-shaped member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to the present gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and at the same time, it is possible to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, not only the lottery result after the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol), but also the period of the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) How long it lasts is important for the player.

According to this feature, during the execution of the variable display (the variable display of the second special symbol), the first production (step-up production 1) is executed, and the first production (step-up production 1) is performed continuously. Since means for executing a second effect (step-up effect 2) different from the first effect (step-up effect 1) is provided, the first effect (step-up effect 1) is executed for the player. When the second effect (step-up effect 1) is executed, the second effect (step-up effect 2) is executed continuously, and the variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is still continued. It can make you feel the expectation that you want to do it.

<Characteristic aU group>
The feature aU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature aU1]
A first flow path (left route L) in which a game ball can enter a first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s) that provides a first profit (15 prize balls);
A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right winning opening 36i) that provides a second profit (one prize ball);
A third flow path (central route U) through which a game ball can enter the third ball entry area (lower ball entry port 36h);
A gaming machine comprising
The value for the player is higher in the first flow path than in the second flow path, and higher in the second flow path than the third flow path,
The game machine further
An operating state (left distribution state and right operating state) in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow path or the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to the high-accuracy-height support state F3) is alternately repeated), and in a non-operating state, an operating means (electric distribution device 36e) that causes the game ball to flow down to the third flow path,
The first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different parts on which the flow paths are formed in the front and back directions of the game board (game board 30),
The game machine further
A fourth ball entry area (second special figure start opening 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
A fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) having a ball entry opening into which game balls can enter;
A lottery execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery (second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the fourth ball entry area;
Switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of switching the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area between a ball-enterable state (open state) and a ball-enterable state (closed state);
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result (special figure small hit), a transition means for transitioning the switching means to the enterable state;
Variation display means (second special symbol display unit 37b) capable of executing variation display (second special symbol variation display) for a predetermined period when the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result;
As the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (long variable time (20 seconds) ~ 180 seconds)) and a setting means capable of setting
with
The switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is a rolling means (second special electric accessory) capable of rolling the game ball for a predetermined period to enter the fifth ball entry area (second big winning hole 58a). a plate-shaped member of the accessory 58b),
When the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the variable display time by the setting means, the switching means is set to the state where the ball cannot be entered, and the A game ball that reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) and is distributed to the first flow path (left route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s),
The game machine further
Even if the ball entrance of the fifth ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a) is put into a ball entry possible state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), the first A game machine characterized by comprising means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entry opening of the 5 ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a) will be in a ball entry possible state (open state).

According to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) in which the game ball can enter the first ball area (special winning hole 32s) that provides the first profit (15 prize balls), A second flow path (right route R) in which a game ball can enter a second ball entry area (right entry hole 36i) that provides 2 profits (one prize ball), and a third ball entry area (lower entry The ball opening 36h) is provided with a third flow path (central route U) into which a game ball can enter. Furthermore, an operation that allows the game ball to flow down the first flow path (left route L) or the second flow path (right route R) based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (transition to high accuracy and height support state F3) state (operating state in which the left side distribution state and the right side operating state are alternately repeated), and in the non-operating state, the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) for flowing down the game ball to the third flow path (central route U) is provided. , the value for the player is higher in the first channel (left route L) than in the second channel (right route R), and the second channel (right route R) is higher in value than the third channel (central route U). higher than

Therefore, according to this feature, the operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is operating is more valuable to the player than the non-operating state in which the operating means (electrical sorting device 36e) is not operating. Since it can be in a high game state, the player wants the predetermined operating condition to be satisfied (transition to the high-accuracy high support state F3) and the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) to be in the operating state. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the game ball that has reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state will flow down the first flow path (left route L). can be done.

And, according to this feature, the first flow path (left route L) and the second flow path (right route R) in which the game balls that have reached the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down, The third flow path (central route U) through which the game balls that reach the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state flow down is provided with a portion on which the flow path is formed in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently provide three flow paths for guiding game balls to a predetermined area in a narrow area (right game area PAR) of the game board, and to provide the player with an operating means (electric distribution system) in an operating state. Device 36e) flow path (left route L and right route R), and a flow path (central route U) can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

Furthermore, according to this feature, as the variable display time of the variable display (second special figure variable time), a first period (short variable time (0.1 seconds)) and a second period longer than the first period (Long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) can be set, and the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) rolls the game ball for a predetermined period Equipped with a rolling means (plate-shaped member) that can enter the ball in the winning opening 58a), and a second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set as the fluctuation display time (second special figure fluctuation time) When the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is set to the non-enterable state (closed state), the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state is reached and the first flow path (left side The game balls distributed to the route L) can enter the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

Therefore, according to this feature, the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member) of the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) set to the ball entry impossible state (closed state) The game ball that is rolling on the rolling means (plate-like member) after the first period (short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds)) has passed before the game ball completely rolls on the rolling means Since the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b) is in a ball-enterable state, the ball enters the fifth ball-entering area (second big winning opening 58a), and the first ball-entering area (special winning opening 32s) cannot be reached.

On the other hand, the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) is set, the rolling means (plate-like member ) rolls over the rolling means (plate-shaped member) before the second period (long fluctuation time (20 seconds to 180 seconds)) elapses and reaches the first It reaches the ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s) and can enter the first ball entry area (special prize winning opening 32s).

Thus, according to this feature, the game distributed to the first flow path (left route L) according to the length of the period set as the variable display time (second special figure variable time) of the variable display A situation where the ball cannot reach the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) and enters the fifth ball entering area (second big winning hole 58a), and the first ball entering area (special winning hole 32s) , and a situation can be created in which a ball can be entered into the first ball entry area (special winning opening 32s).

As a result, the second period (long In a situation where a variable time (20 seconds to 180 seconds) can be set, the player shoots the game ball so that it reaches the operating means (electric distribution device 36e) in the operating state, so that the variable display You can make a profit while running. Therefore, according to this gaming machine, the problem that occurred in the pachinko machine equipped with the conventional small winning rush, that is, during the execution of the reach effect (during the execution of the variable display) during the small winning rush, the player can not make a profit. It is possible to solve the problem that the tempo of the game deteriorates because the game ball cannot be obtained, and the problem that the game ball is wasted because the player cannot stop the game during execution of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the length of the period set as the variable display time, and to create new feelings such as wanting a longer period to be set as the variable display time. It can be held by a person, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this gaming machine, unlike general gaming machines, the fact that the entrance of the fifth ball entry area (second big winning opening 58a) is in a state (open state) where a ball can be entered is not known to the player. It's a disadvantage, not an advantage.

According to this feature, when the ball-entering opening of the fifth ball-entering area (second big prize-winning opening 58a) is brought into a ball-enterable state (open state) by the switching means (second special electric accessory 58b), also has a means for not executing an effect suggesting that the ball entrance of the fifth ball entrance area (second big winning mouth 58a) will be in a state (open state) where a ball can be entered. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is advantageous for the player that the ball entry opening of the 5 ball entry area (second big prize opening 58a) is in a ball entry possible state (open state). .

In addition, the inventions of the above feature groups solve the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature group described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

A game machine such as a slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means. A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups may be used as appropriate to solve part or all of the above-described problems, or to achieve part or all of the above-described effects. , can be replaced or combined. Moreover, if the technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

<<5>> Fifth Embodiment:
<<5-0>> Introduction:

As a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the reference example, a gaming machine that adopts specifications of a mixture of one type and two types and realizes a high retention rate of about 80% can be considered.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine of the reference example, when the result of the lottery is a small win in the normal state (also referred to as normal state), which is neither the variable probability state nor the electric sapo state, the V winning port is inside An opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as "opening and closing execution mode based on a small hit") for opening and closing the first special electric accessory provided in is executed. When the game ball enters the big winning hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win and enters the V winning hole provided inside the big winning hole, the V winning big win occurs. After winning, the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as "opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot") for opening and closing the second special electric accessory related to the big winning opening is executed. A prize ball can be obtained by entering a game ball into the big winning hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win. Also, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the game ball into the big prize opening opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is completed, the game stage is shifted to the first game stage.

In the first game stage, it becomes a high support state until the special figure 2 fluctuation rotates once, and during the special figure 2 fluctuation, for example, a maximum of 4 holdings of the special figure 2 are stored. As a result, when moving to the first game stage, with the special figure 2 variation for the first one rotation and the special figure 2 variation for a maximum of 4 stored during the special figure 2 variation, a maximum of 5 Special figure 2 variation will be executed. For example, if the probability of winning a small hit per time is 1/7.7, the probability of winning a small hit in a maximum of 5 special figures 2 fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as rush rush rate) P1 is calculated as follows. It can be about 50% according to equation (1).

Rush rush rate P1=1-{(77-10)/77}^5...(1)
However, ^ represents exponentiation.

When the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in a maximum of 5 special figures 2 fluctuations, the opening and closing execution mode based on the small hit is executed, and the large opened by the operation of the opening and closing execution mode based on the small hit When the game ball enters the winning hole and enters the V winning hole, the V winning big win is won, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is executed. A prize ball can be obtained by entering a game ball into the big winning hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win. Also, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the game ball into the big prize opening opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is completed, the game stage shifts to the second game stage.

In the second game stage, it becomes a high support state until the special figure 2 fluctuation rotates 7 times, and during the special figure 2 fluctuation, for example, a maximum of 4 holdings of the special figure 2 are stored. As a result, when moving to the second game stage, with the special figure 2 variation for the first 7 rotations and the special figure 2 variation for the maximum of 4 stored during the special figure 2 variation, a maximum of 11 Special figure 2 variation will be executed. Since the probability of winning a small hit per time is 1/7.7, which is the same as in the first game stage, the probability of winning a small win in a maximum of 11 special figure 2 fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as the rush continuation rate) ) P2 can be about 78% according to equation (2) below.

Rush continuation rate P2=1-{(77-10)/77}^11...(2)
However, ^ represents exponentiation.

When the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the maximum of 11 special figures 2 fluctuations, the opening and closing execution mode based on the small hit is executed, and the large opened by the operation of the opening and closing execution mode based on the small hit When the game ball enters the winning hole and enters the V winning hole, the V winning big win is won, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is executed. A prize ball can be obtained by entering a game ball into the big winning hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win. Also, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the game ball into the big prize opening opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is completed, the second game stage is entered again. That is, after shifting to the second game stage, the transition to the second game stage is repeated with a high probability of about 78%. In other words, if a small win can be won with a probability of rush entry rate of about 50%, it is possible to shift to a rush state with a high continuation rate of about 78%.

Generally, a pachinko machine provides a player with a game method that is advantageous to the player by displaying various notification effects on a pattern display device having a liquid crystal display. As this type of notification effect, a right-handed notification effect for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will be right-handed, or returning the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism from right-handed to left-handed. and a V-aiming notification effect such as "Aim for the V!" The pachinko machine of the reference example is also configured to execute these notification effects. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win described above, the V aim notification effect is displayed. In the pachinko machine of the reference example, what kind of notification effect is displayed from the normal time to the first game stage, and how the game method of the player is switched according to the notification effect will be described below. explain in detail.

In the pachinko machine of the reference example, in the normal state (when the support is low), the player plays the game with the game ball shooting mechanism firing the game ball to the left (hereinafter simply "playing the game with the left hand"). Also called), we aim to win a small hit or a big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation. In the normal state, when the game is played with the left hand, the symbol display device does not display any notification effect regarding the game method.

In the pachinko machine of the reference example, the second starting port provided on the right-handed route is more advantageous than the first starting port provided on the left-handed route (for example, the number of distributed round games is many). For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the reference example, by providing the second starting port on the right-handed route and providing the normal electric accessory at the second starting port, in the normal time when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, By adopting a configuration in which a game ball does not enter the second starting hole even if the game is hit to the right, countermeasures against hitting to the right at normal times are taken so that the game is not played by hitting to the right at normal times. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the reference example, the player cannot obtain a profit unless the game is played with the left hand during normal operation. A pattern display device displays a left-handed informing performance for informing a player that a shooting mode is to be returned from right-handed to left-handed.

Normally, the game is played with the left hand, and when the special figure 1 fluctuates and a small hit is won, the player plays the game with the shooting mode of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism as the right hand (hereinafter simply referred to as (referred to as "playing a game with a right-handed stroke"), the game ball is entered into a V-winning opening on the right-handed route, aiming to win a V-winning jackpot. If the game ball does not enter the V winning hole for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) after winning the small win, the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is terminated without winning the V winning big win. Resulting in. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the reference example, when the special figure 1 fluctuates at normal times and becomes a small hit, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win is used to make the shooting mode by the game ball shooting mechanism. A pattern display device displays a V aim notification performance for prompting a player to enter a game ball into a V winning hole by striking to the right. The player plays the game with a right-hand shot according to the V aim notification effect.

Then, when the game ball enters the V winning hole provided on the right-handed route and wins the V winning jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed, and the player plays the game with right hitting. By doing so, a game ball is entered into the big winning hole and a prize ball is obtained. When the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends, the game stage shifts to the first game stage. In the first game stage, the pattern display device displays a right-handed informing effect for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The player plays the right-handed game according to the right-handed notification effect, enters the game ball into the second start port provided with the tulip-shaped normal electric accessory (so-called electric chew), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is 1. Rotate and, during the special figure 2 fluctuation, further enter the game ball into the second start port, and store up to four reserved special figures 2.

In the pachinko machine of the reference example having the above configuration, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds executed in the normal state (low support state) reaches a specified number (for example, 1000 times). It shall be equipped with a ceiling time reduction (so-called idle time) function. Specifically, when the initialization condition is established, a predetermined specified number of times is set in the ceiling number counter, and the value of the ceiling number counter is decremented by 1 each time a game round is executed. When the initialization condition is satisfied, it corresponds to when the pachinko machine is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) or when a jackpot is won (including when a small win is made in a winning lottery and a V prize jackpot is won). . That is, the ceiling frequency counter is set to the prescribed number of times when the pachinko machine is initialized, then decremented by 1 each time a game is played, and reset to the prescribed number of times each time a jackpot is won.

Then, when the value of the number-of-ceilings counter reaches 0, time saving is given a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of time-saving grants referred to here means that the support mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of game rounds executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is a predetermined number (hereinafter also referred to as the number of time-saving grants. ) is to continue the high-frequency support mode as the support mode. In the pachinko machine of the reference example, the number of time reduction grants is a large number of times, for example, 100 times, and it is the number of times that a small win can be won with a high probability close to 100% in the game times within the time reduction grant number. In the pachinko machine of the reference example, the odds of winning a small hit while the time reduction is being given, that is, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, are 1, the same as during the first game stage and the second game stage. Since it is /7.7, if there is a large number of time reduction grants such as 100 times, a small hit will be won with a high probability close to 100%.

In particular, in the pachinko machine of the reference example, if a small win is won during the high-frequency support mode that has shifted due to the number of times the game is executed during the normal state (low support state) reaching the specified number of times, the continuation rate is about It is configured to shift to the second game stage, which is as high as 78%. Therefore, if the number of times the game is executed in the normal state (low support state) reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), the transition to the rush state with a high continuation rate of about 78% is ensured. can be done.

In the pachinko machine of the reference example, even though a certain number of game rounds have been executed since the previous big win (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize big win), , The state where you can not draw a jackpot (so-called addicted state) continues, and when you feel frustrated, remember that the ceiling time saving function is installed, and display it on the data counter installed at the top of the pachinko machine You can enjoy the game while looking at the current number of rotations, etc., and wondering if the ceiling is approaching soon, and looking forward to the number of game executions reaching the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, even the pachinko machine of the above reference example has the following problems.

In the pachinko machine of the reference example, when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a small win, as described above, for example, a V aim notification effect such as "Aim for V!" is displayed on the symbol display device. Is displayed. This display is always displayed even if the number of game rounds to be executed in the normal state is close to the predetermined number. In retrospect, as described above, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win at normal times, the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win are transferred. Since the game state is the first game stage, the rush entry rate in this first game stage is about 50%, and the rush state does not occur with a probability close to 100%. For this reason, if the number of games executed during the normal state is close to the specified number (for example, the 990th game), if you wait a little longer, the ceiling time reduction will be activated, and the rush state will occur with a probability of about 100%. However, because the game ball was entered into the V winning hole according to the V aim notification effect and the game stage was shifted to the first game stage, the winning lottery was lost in the first game stage and the state shifted to the rush state. There was a 50% chance that it wouldn't come true. That is, when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a small win, the V aim notification effect is displayed, thereby providing the player with a game method that is advantageous to the player. However, in reality, there is a problem that there is a risk of inconvenient results for the player as described above.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as the gaming machine) prevents the player from being inconvenienced when the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a small winning. The goal is to raise the expectations of players and improve the interest in games. A detailed description will be given below.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "specific condition" as an "update condition", a "predetermined information" as a "specific information", and an "update process" as an "update means". , a "predetermined game state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", and a "predetermined advantageous state" as a "predetermined profit state" , a "first display mode" as a "first notification mode", a "second display mode" as a "second notification mode", and a "predetermined win win" as a "specific determination result" , a "profit giving condition" as a "predetermined gaming condition", and a "given value" as a "specific profit".

The "update condition" is a condition that triggers the update of the specific information, and may be any condition as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, when the variable display is stopped during a game round. , at the start of the variable display, at the end of the fixed time of the stop display in the game round, at a predetermined timing in the game round, at the time of generation of the V interrupt signal in the game round, etc. mentioned.

The "specific information" is information that is updated to new content when the update condition is satisfied in the game machine, and may be anything as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, to grasp the value of a counter provided in the RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in the RAM, the value of each buffer, flags, a predetermined series of data groups, and the current execution position in the data group. , and the like.

The "update means" may be anything as long as it can update the contents of the specific information to new contents. etc. Another example is update control by a hardware circuit.

The "specific game state" may be a game state in which a predetermined profit state can be generated when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a predetermined update state, and the update condition is satisfied. This excludes a game state in which the specific information is not updated even if the update is performed, and a game state in which the updating means does not operate. As a specific game state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a normal state, a jackpot game state in which a special electric accessory opens and closes, a probability variable game state (also called a high probability state), a time saving game State (also called high support state), state from the time the initialization conditions are met until the jackpot is won (including the case of winning a small win in the winning lottery and winning the V prize jackpot), opening and closing based on the small win from the time the initialization conditions are met The state until the start of the execution mode, the state from the time the initialization conditions are satisfied until the open/close execution mode based on the small win ends, and the jackpot won from the time the power is turned on ), the state from when the power is turned on until the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win starts, the state from when the power is turned on until the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win ends, and the start of fluctuations related to winning the jackpot and the state from when the stop display is finished.

The "predetermined update state" may be a state in which it can be grasped that the result of updating the specific information by the updating means has reached a predetermined result. For example, a counter value becomes zero due to an update, a predetermined flag disappears, a predetermined time elapses, and a predetermined series of data groups are all executed.

The "predetermined profit state" may be any state that can give some profit to the player, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a probability variable game can be played a predetermined number of times or at least until a jackpot game occurs. State, time-saving game state until a predetermined number of times or at least the occurrence of a jackpot game, jackpot game state itself (opening and closing of the second special electric role to be described later), small winning game state itself (opening and closing of the first special electric role to be described later) ), awarding of prize balls, display of a specific image, output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific light emitting means, and the like.

The "notification mode" may be at least two types of events that can be identified by the player. different colors, display areas, and display densities to make them identifiable.

The "specific determination result" may be any determination result that can generate a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player, and the gist of the present invention can be realized. If there is, for example, small winning, V winning big winning, normal big winning, probability variable jackpot winning, advantageous jackpot winning such as jackpot winning in which game ball can enter V probability area in V variable machine, etc. .

The "predetermined game condition" may be any condition that is satisfied when the player performs a predetermined game operation. a game ball that has been launched enters a predetermined area; a lottery is held when the ball enters the predetermined area, and a predetermined lottery result is obtained; a player operates a production operation button; For example, when a player operates a performance operation button, a lottery is performed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

The "specific profit" may be any profit given based on the establishment of a predetermined game condition, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, until a predetermined number of times or at least a jackpot game occurs The probability variation game state, the time-saving game state until the predetermined number of times or at least the occurrence of the jackpot game, the jackpot game state itself (opening and closing of the second special electric role to be described later), the small hit game state itself (the first special electric function to be described later) opening and closing of a character), awarding of prize balls, display of a specific image, output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific light emitting means, and the like.

Although the details will be described later, this game machine updates the predetermined information when a predetermined specific condition in the variable display is satisfied by the update processing, and the predetermined information is in the update end state in the predetermined game state. A predetermined advantageous state is generated at a later predetermined timing. Further, a predetermined notification is given in the first display mode or in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Further, a predetermined determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and if the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a profit is given based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Give value when conditions are satisfied. Further, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a predetermined notification is made in the first display mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update of the predetermined information is completed. At a later specific timing, the display mode is switched to the second display mode. Therefore, according to the game machine, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a predetermined notification is given in the first display mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update of the predetermined information is completed. is performed, and the display mode is switched to the second display mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the user sees that the predetermined notification is switched to the second display mode, the predetermined information enters an update end state, and a predetermined advantageous state is established. We can wait with anticipation to be able to make it happen. Therefore, according to the present gaming machine, when a predetermined win is won by the judging means, the display mode of the predetermined notification does not cause inconvenience to the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and promoting the game. Interest can be improved. Thus, according to the present gaming machine, the problem that has arisen in the pachinko machine that employs the specs of the mixed type of one type and two types of the reference example, that is, when a predetermined win is achieved by the determination means, a predetermined It is possible to solve the problem of inconveniencing the player depending on the display mode of the notification.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine, the first state in which the rate of transition to the privilege granting state for granting the privilege is the first value, and the second value in which the rate of transition to the privilege granting state is higher than the first value. and a second state in which the first display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the first state, and the second display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the second state . Therefore, according to the game machine, when the predetermined notification is given in the second display mode, the player can guess that the rate of transition to the privilege provision state will increase, and the player is given a sense of expectation. be able to.

The problems of the present invention are summarized as follows. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that awards a predetermined profit to a player when a predetermined period of time elapses and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this type of gaming machine, it is desired that the offer of a predetermined profit for a predetermined period of time be favorably suggested to the player.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a new playability without impairing the player's interest by suitably performing the above suggestions. .

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as a fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine of the reference example described above only in the content of the notification effect when a small win is won, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

<<5-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect as the added value by lighting or blinking when a special drawing is performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a win is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism as shooting means provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and has a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance as a given value reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Then, when the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 25 is less than a predetermined amount, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined amount, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26, thereby shooting a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized. It should be noted that, without operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player may perform a right-handed hit by operating the operation handle 25 to rotate by a predetermined amount or more.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

209 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, receiving supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and paying out a predetermined number of game balls according to instructions from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

210 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a variable winning device 36, and a variable winning device 57 dedicated to small prizes. The variable winning device 36 is a device that operates when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery (including a V winning jackpot winning, which will be described later). be. That is, a device that operates when a small win is won is called a small win-only variable winning device, whereas a device that operates when a big win is won is simply called a "variable prize winning device".

The game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the variable winning device 36, and the small winning variable winning device 57 are individually formed on the game board 30. You will be directed to the opening mentioned above. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a through gate 35 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 32, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71 (FIG. 209).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . A game ball can enter the first starting port 33 when the game is played with the left hand, but cannot be entered with the game ball when the game is played with the right hand. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 as a profit provision condition, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a lottery per special figure 1 is executed. As a result of the special figure 1 lottery, when a small win or a big win is won, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric role (first special electric role or second special electric role) executes opening/closing operation is started. The opening/closing execution mode is composed of an opening period, an opening/closing processing period, and an ending period. The opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric role is started, the opening/closing process period is the period in which the opening/closing process of the special electric role is actually executed, and the ending period is the special electric role. It is a waiting period until the next special figure per lottery (special figure 1 per lottery or special figure 2 per lottery) can be executed after the opening and closing process of the accessory is completed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery per special figure 1, the big hit is not set, and only the small hit and the deviation are set. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery per special figure, when a small win is won, the opening and closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory executes the opening and closing operation Special electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 30 in the vertical direction. A game ball can enter the second starting port 34 when the game is played with the right hand, but cannot be entered with the game ball when the game is played with the left hand. The second starting port 34 is provided with a normal electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the normal electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 as a profit provision condition, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a special figure 2 winning lottery is executed. As a result of the special figure 2 lottery, when a small hit or a big hit is won, an opening and closing execution mode in which a special electric role item (first special electric role item or second special electric role item) executes an opening and closing operation is started. . The opening/closing execution mode is composed of an opening period, an opening/closing processing period, and an ending period, as described above. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery per special figure 2, the big hit is not set, and only the small hit and the deviation are set. And in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery for the special figure 2, when a small win is won, the opening and closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory executes the opening and closing operation Special electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

The through gate 35 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30 and has a through-hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through type gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the normal electric accessary 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow-down route of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port. It is possible to enter 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The small hit-only variable winning device 57 is provided downstream of the second starting port 34 in the downflow route of the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 . The small winning variable winning device 57 is a first special electric accessory, and includes a large winning opening 57a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 57b for opening and closing the large winning opening 57a. The opening/closing door 57b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 57a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a small win is won as a condition for giving profit, an opening/closing execution mode for the first special electric accessory (hereinafter referred to as "opening/closing execution mode based on a small win") is entered. ) is started, and the opening/closing door 57b of the small hit dedicated variable winning device 57 becomes an open state in which a game ball can enter, and then becomes a closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 57a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57, 10 game balls, which is a predetermined number of winning balls, are paid out as winning balls as a predetermined advantageous state. 71 pays out. The small-hit exclusive variable winning device 57 allows a game ball to enter when the game is played with the right hand, but does not allow the game ball to enter when the game is played with the left hand.

A V winning opening 59 is provided inside the big winning opening 57a. The V winning opening 59 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, it becomes a V winning big win, which is a predetermined win, and is opened and closed based on the V winning big win as a predetermined advantageous state. mode is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 59 is provided inside the large winning opening 57a, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 57a then surely enters the V winning opening 59. is configured as When the condition that the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 is satisfied as the profit granting condition, the V winning jackpot is won, and the V winning that the second special electric accessory executes the opening/closing operation as the added value. A jackpot-based opening and closing execution mode is started.

The variable winning device 36 is provided downstream of the small winning variable winning device 57 in the downflow route of the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 . The variable prize winning device 36 is a second special electric accessory, and includes a large prize winning port 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big prize winning port 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the V prize opening 59 and wins the V prize jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode for the second special electric accessory (hereinafter also referred to as "opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot"). is started, and the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 as the profit giving condition, 15 game balls, which is the predetermined number of winning balls, are paid out as winning balls by the payout device 71. . The variable winning device 36 allows a game ball to enter when the game is played with the right hand, but does not allow a game ball to enter when the game is played with the left hand.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a ball enters the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36, or the small winning variable winning device 57. The game balls not played are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

A game ball entering each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 59, and the out opening 43 is placed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the formed individual openings and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. In addition, it also includes a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display unit 37a, when the special figure 1 per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is performed, the segment display device until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. As the display mode, the variable display of the first pattern is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is variably displayed or stop-displayed based on the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display unit 37b, when the lottery for the special figure 2 triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed, the segment display device until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. As a display mode, the variable display of the second pattern is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed until it is stopped is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated and a new game cycle is started. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the probability variable jackpot pattern is displayed, the player does not enter the game ball into the big prize opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 during the round game. The opening/closing execution mode ends without awarding prize balls, and the variable display of a new game cycle can be executed. That is, even if a player wins a jackpot in a winning lottery, the player cannot get a prize ball unless the game ball enters the big prize winning opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36. - 特許庁

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display or predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Furthermore, the symbol display device 41 has an effect for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is a right-handed shot as a first display mode (right-handed notification effect) as a second display mode. A production for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will return from right-handed shooting to left-handed shooting (left-handed reporting presentation), and the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism as the third display mode is set to right-handed shooting. By doing so, a V-target notification effect for notifying the player that the game ball is to be entered into the V-winning opening 59 is also performed. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 211(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 211(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 211(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 211(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a small winning, which is a predetermined winning, a predetermined predetermined symbol is displayed. A combination is formed on the pay line L1. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. It should be noted that the manner in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the manner described above, but includes the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of symbols in each symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for the variable display mode of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, the "game cycle" refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display ( In other words, until the fixed time of the stop display ends), the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 , is one unit of processing to notify the player. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a and the second In either one of the pattern display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information, and the stop display is continued for a predetermined period. Continue (also called fixed time). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a predetermined After variably displaying the symbol row, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information, and the stopped display is continued for a fixed time. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a fixed time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 is up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 211(b), on the display surface 41a, a first display mode synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 is displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs flashing display as the second display mode and the lighting display as the second display mode, and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Synchronize with the variable display and stop display. and a second synchronization display unit Sync2 for performing flashing display and lighting display. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be adopted.

<<5-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 212 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 209) being turned off, continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 f are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entrances such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, and the V winning opening 59. is connected with The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67f, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a special figure per lottery (special figure 1 per lottery or special figure 2 per lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and the through gate A normal electric accessary item open lottery is executed based on the entry of a ball into 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a first special electric accessory drive section 57c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 57b of the small winning variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory, and a second special electric accessory. A second special electric accessory drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as a second special electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric accessory 34a, and the main display unit 45 are connected. It is Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the open/close execution mode based on the small win, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the first special electric accessory drive unit 57c so that the open/close door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 is opened and closed. , In the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the drive control of the second special electric accessary product driving section 36c is performed so that the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the normal electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win, when the win type is determined in the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is determined, Display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when a ball entering the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, the payout of three game balls is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57 or the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is specified A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out the prize balls as the given value.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined shooting condition is met as a profit giving condition. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . In addition, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing as a profit giving condition, a game effect reflecting the operation is generated. Various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc. are controlled so as to perform

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win as a given value, contents of ready-to-win performance, contents of advance notice performance to be executed in each game round as a given value, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time (determined time), which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a special figure winning lottery, a normal electric accessory open lottery, and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a random number counter C1 is used for the lottery per special figure (lottery per special figure or lottery per special figure 2). A winning type counter C2 is used when sorting the winning types that determine the number of round games occurring when a small win is won or when a V winning big win is won. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the normal electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS as predetermined information is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the end of updating. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entry is retained information storage. It is stored chronologically in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special figure 2 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 1199, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the update end state. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c each time the game round being executed is completed, and is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is collated with the success/failure table provided, and it is determined whether or not a small win is won. Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not a small hit is won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data as the predetermined information stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Execute the process that causes the The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data as the predetermined information stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. Execute the process that causes the The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In the above explanation, how the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is shifted, but the value of the winning random number counter C1 is limited. Instead, each value of the counter (hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS) other than the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb shifted.

Next, the details of the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the end of updating.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the determination processing execution area The winning type is determined using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 238, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the update end state.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, if the result of the winning lottery is a small win and the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is entered, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a small win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the ready-to-win line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The reach is classified into three types, normal reach as the first display mode, super reach as the second display mode, and special reach as the third display mode. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach performance in which expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the update end state.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed when the variation display in the second symbol display unit 37b starts and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, which is the update end state. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and is used to collate the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are separately provided. are stored as table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores the former success/failure table, that is, the success/failure table for special figure 1 winning lottery, and the latter success/failure table, that is, the success/failure table for special figure 2 winning lottery, in the ROM 63. It is stored in area 63a.

FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for special figure winning lottery. Figure 214 (a) shows the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 1, Figure 214 (b) shows the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 for the special figure 1 winning lottery. Of the 3850 values from 0 to 3849, the values (20 to 3849) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. That is, according to the success/failure table for lottery per special figure, the probability of 20 out of 3850 appearing, that is, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be 1/192.5. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery per special figure 1, the big hit is not set, and only the small hit and the deviation are set. However, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a configuration in which a big win is set in addition to the small win may be used.

"Small win" means that the open/close door 57b of the small win dedicated variable prize device 57 is opened and closed, which is the opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode based on the small win, but the support mode does not become the transition opportunity. is. In this embodiment, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is limited to one time, and the opening time of the opening/closing door 57b at one time is, for example, 1.8 seconds. . As a modified example, the number of times the open/close door 57b is opened in the mode in which the open/close door 57b is opened and closed may be set to two times or more instead of once. The opening time of the opening/closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 at the time of the small win may be changed to 0.2 seconds, and other time such as 0.1 seconds may be used.

"Off" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the support mode.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), 500 values of 0 to 499 are set in the success/failure table for the lottery for the special figure 2 as the value of the random number counter C1 that is a small hit. Of the 3850 values from 0 to 3849, the values (500 to 3849) other than the 500 values from 0 to 499 are outliers. That is, according to the success/failure table for the lottery per special figure 2, the probability of 500 out of 3850 appearing, that is, the winning probability of the small hit is set to be 1/7.7. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the lottery per special figure 2, the big hit is not set, and only the small hit and the deviation are set.

According to FIG. 214, the probability of winning a small hit set in the success/failure table for special figure 2 per lottery in FIG. It is a higher value than the winning probability of the small hit. As a result, the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is better than the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33. is highly advantageous for the player. In addition, the winning probability of the small hit set in the success/failure table for the special figure 1 lottery is not necessarily limited to 1/192.5, and may be another value. In addition, the winning probability of the small winning set in the success/failure table for the special figure 2 lottery is not limited to 1/7.7, and may be set to another value.

In this embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a small hit in the success/failure table for the lottery for the special figure 1 is the hit random number set as a small hit in the success/failure table for the lottery for the special figure 2. Included in the value group of the counter C1. However, the number and value of random numbers set as small hits are arbitrary.

Next, the hit type will be described. A plurality of types of wins can be set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following two aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of wins.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode of the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed one or more times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the opening and closing door It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec passes or the ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open/close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, game balls are shot in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support are provided so that the frequency of the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the continued situation. mode can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role open winning is set more than in the low frequency support mode. may Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a single opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is set long. In addition, when the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode when the open state is won, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is an improvement of a so-called one-and-two mixed machine, and shifts the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode to a high probability mode that increases the winning probability in the winning lottery. We do not adopt a configuration that allows

In this embodiment, when a small win is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the winning type is distributed using the winning type counter C2. The distribution of winning types corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for small winnings. FIG. 215(a) shows a distribution table for a special figure 1 small hit, and FIG. 215(b) shows a distribution table for a special figure 2 small prize. The distribution table for the special figure 1 small hit is referred to when winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and is used for the special figure 2 small hit. The distribution table is referred to when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the distribution table for the special figure 1 small hit, a special figure 1 per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 was won. "1R small hit" is set as the hit type of the event. Specifically, all of the values of the hit type counter C2 from "0 to 99" correspond to the 1R small hit.

For small wins, the mode of opening and closing control of the opening and closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable prize device 57 in the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is the high frequency winning mode, and the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is a transition opportunity. It is a right or wrong result that does not become. For the 1R small win, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is one time (one round). In addition, the target of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit is the first special electric accessory. As a modification, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win may be changed to 2 or more times instead of 1 time (1 round).

As shown in FIG. 215(b), in the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit, a special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 was won. "1R small hit" is set as the hit type of the event. Specifically, all of the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0 to 99" correspond to the 1R small winning. That is, the distribution table for the special figure 2 hit has the same contents as the distribution table for the special figure 1 bonus. In addition, as a modified example, the distribution table for the special figure 1 and the distribution table for the special figure 2 may be configured to be different.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the game to the second start port 34 An open/close door 57b of a variable winning device 57 dedicated to a small prize as a first special electric accessory is opened only for one round both when a small prize is won in a special figure 2 prize lottery triggered by the entry of a ball. As such, it is defined by a distribution table for special figure 1 and a distribution table for special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, even when a game ball enters the V winning hole 59 to win the V winning jackpot, the winning type is distributed using the winning type counter C2 acquired when winning the small winning. . The distribution of winning types corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the V prize jackpot. Fig. 216(a) shows a distribution table for special figure 1V winning big hit, and Fig. 216(b) shows a distribution table for special figure 2V winning big win. The distribution table for the special figure 1V winning big hit wins a small hit in the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, and then the game ball enters the V winning opening. It is referred to when winning the V winning jackpot by playing the ball, and the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit is a small figure in the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. It is referred to when winning the V winning jackpot by winning the winning and then entering the game ball into the V winning opening 59.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 216(a), in the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning big hit, a special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is won. After that, "4R jackpot" is set as the hit type when winning the V prize jackpot by entering the game ball into the V prize opening 59. - 特許庁Specifically, all of the values of the winning type counter C2 from "0 to 99" correspond to the 4R jackpot.

The jackpot is a success/fail result in which the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is the high-frequency winning mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. . In the 4R jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 4 times (4 rounds). The target of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode is the second special electric accessory. The number of executions of the game cycle in which the high support state continues after the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to one.

As shown in FIG. 216(b), in the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning big hit, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. After that, "4R big win" and "15R big win" are set as the winning types when winning the V winning big win by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 59. - 特許庁Specifically, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", 50 values of 0 to 49 are "4R jackpot", and values other than 50 values of 0 to 49 (50 to 99) is the “15R jackpot”.

For the 15R jackpot, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 15 times (15 rounds). In addition, the target of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 216(b) is the second special electric accessory. In addition, the number of times the game is executed in which the high support state continues after the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is limited to seven times. That is, when a small win is won in the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the V winning jackpot is won, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is executed once. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second start hole 34, the small win is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery, and the high support state continues when the V winning big win is made. The number of times of execution is seven times, which is a large number. As a result, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, the game ball enters the first start port 33 when the small win is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery and the V winning big win is achieved. The number of executions of games in which a high support state continues increases compared to when a small win is won in a lottery for one special figure triggered by the entry of a ball and a V winning big win is made, and the advantage for the player is high. It's becoming

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the V winning jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 to become the V winning jackpot. There is a difference between the case and the case of a V winning jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, two types of jackpots, 4R jackpot and 15R jackpot, are set in the distribution table for the special 2V prize jackpot shown in FIG. 216(b). It is not necessary to limit the number of types to two. For example, three types including the 8R jackpot may be used, four types, or five or more types may be used. Furthermore, the number of opening times of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 4R and 15R, and may be other times such as 8R and 16R, for example. Also, in the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning jackpot in FIG. The number of opening times may be changed to 4R and other times. In short, when winning a small prize in the special drawing 2 per lottery and winning the V prize jackpot, it is more advantageous for the player than when winning a small prize in the special drawing 1 per lottery and winning the V prize jackpot. If it is high and the advantage for the player is higher when the ceiling time reduction is activated than when the special figure 1 lottery wins the small prize and wins the V prize jackpot, the special The number of types to be distributed in the distribution table for FIG. 1V prize jackpot and the distribution table for special 2V prize jackpot, and the number of openings of the open/close door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 may be any.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 217 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 217(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 217(a), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low-frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, which means that the short opening of the electric accessory has been won, is 0 to 1. are set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item opening lottery is executed, the electric role short opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. be.

FIG. 217(b) shows a success/failure table for electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 216(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessary item opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessary item opening counter C4, which means that the electric accessary item opening has been won, is 0 to 461. 462 values of are set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, it means that the electric chief opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is won to open the electric officer in the high frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds. be.

In this way, according to the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery, the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low frequency support mode. . As a result, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down toward the second starting port 34 enters the second starting port 34 with a probability close to 100%. It should be noted that the respective opening times in the case of winning the short-term opener and in the case of winning the long-term opener are not necessarily limited to the above examples, and other times may be used.

<<5-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 218 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 212) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device in which a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits commands (effect commands) to the display control device 100 in correspondence with the progress of the game. When the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display data table to be used is selected from the work RAM 104 according to the effect content specified in the effect command. The display data table is stored in the display data table buffer in the work RAM 104, and the pointer for grasping the current execution position in the display data table is set to "0" indicating the initial position. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer is updated by adding 1, and the type of image data to be drawn next is based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer in the display data table. Also, the display position of the image data, the scaling ratio of the image data, etc. (drawing list) are updated, and the updated drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 105 . The addition of pointers in the display data table is performed by software update processing executed by display control device 100 .

Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the received drawing list, draws one frame of image from the read image data at the position and display method based on the drawing list, and displays the video. The drawn image is developed in one of the first frame buffer 107a and the second frame buffer 107b in the RAM 107, and the one-frame image previously developed in the other frame buffer is displayed on the pattern display device. The image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 by outputting to 41 . The VDP 105 performs the one-frame image rendering process and the one-frame image display process in the pattern display device 41 within the image display time of one frame (about 20 milliseconds in this embodiment). 20 milliseconds”).

The VDP 105 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of one frame image is completed. Each time the MPU 102 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing and instructs the VDP 105 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the display process of causing the pattern display device 41 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 and issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105. Therefore, the VDP 105 performs image drawing processing and display processing. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 102 at intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffers 107a and 107b storing the image information.

As described above, after receiving commands (effect commands) corresponding to various effects from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 displays images corresponding to the effect commands independently of the sound emission control device 90. can be displayed.

The display of the image corresponding to the effect command will be described in more detail by taking the symbol variation effect, which is one of the above effects, as an example.

As described above with reference to FIG. 211, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The display is started, and the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. displayed state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a small win, and the distribution result by the distribution table is a 15R big win, the row of symbols displayed stopped (stopped symbols ) results in a combination of "7" symbols, ie, 777. When the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a small win, and the allocation result by the allocation table is a 4R jackpot, the stop symbol is a combination of the same symbols other than 7, that is, 111, 222, 333, 444, 555, 666, or 888.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 outputs a variable display pattern designation command for designating a variable display pattern indicating a variable display from the start of the variable display to the stop symbol as effect commands for specifying the symbol variable effect, and a stop symbol. A stop design designation command designating a design is transmitted to the display control device 100 .

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 determines that when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a small win and the distribution result of the distribution table is a 4R jackpot (hereinafter simply referred to as "4R jackpot win"). ), as the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern designation command, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start variable display, and the last frame is a combination of the same symbols other than 7, which is the same as the stop symbol. Set content. In this case, as the stop symbol information designated by the stop symbol designation command, the content of continuously displaying the combination of the same symbols other than 7, which is the same as the last frame of the variable display pattern, for the fixed time is set.

In addition, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 determines that the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a small win and the distribution result of the distribution table is a 15R jackpot (hereinafter simply referred to as "15R jackpot win ”), as the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern specifying command, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the last frame is set to 777. In this case, as the information of the stop symbol designated by the stop symbol designation command, the content of continuously displaying 777 for the fixed time is set. Also, in this case, as the stop symbol information specified by the stop symbol specification command, the content of the stop symbol 777 is continuously displayed for a certain period of time. A combination of symbols may be displayed, after which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 resume variable display, then change (promote) to 777, and 777 may be continuously displayed for the fixed time.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits a variable display pattern specification command to the display control device 100 in the symbol variation effect, and then transmits a stop symbol specification command to the display control device 100 . In the display control device 100 that has received these commands, the MPU 102 and the VDP 105 of the display control device 100 cooperate to generate the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern specification command and the stop pattern specified by the stop pattern specification command. is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, when a 4R jackpot, which is a predetermined win, is won, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to variably display, and finally stop at a combination of the same symbols other than 7, and then stop. The arrangement of patterns is continuously displayed for a fixed time. In addition, when a 15R big win, which is a predetermined winning prize, is won, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start fluctuating display, finally stop at 777, and the stopped row of 777 is continued for a fixed time. indicate. Alternatively, when the 15R jackpot is won, the symbols in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 start to be variably displayed, and once a combination of the same symbols other than 7 are displayed as if they were allotted to the 4R jackpot, then each symbol is displayed. The symbols in rows Z1 to Z3 resume variable display, then change (promote) to 777, and 777 is continuously displayed for the fixed time.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<5-4>> Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described mainly using FIG.

<<5-4-1>> Composition of the decisive battle stage and the rush stage:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small win is won in a win lottery, and then a game ball enters a V prize opening to win a V prize big win, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win is activated. After the end, the support mode becomes a high support state as a predetermined game state in which the support mode is a high frequency support mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of executions of game rounds in which the high support state continues is the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. Two kinds of game stages are created by making different configurations between the case and the case where the winning lottery is the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.例文帳に追加

As shown in the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning big hit in FIG. In the high support state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the number of times the game is executed is limited to one. In the high support state, which is also a predetermined advantageous state, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is the electric officer open lottery is extremely high at 231/233. The normal electric accessory 34a is frequently in the long open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism is right-hand hitting. The player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 34 provided with the normal electric accessory 34a. In this way, during execution of one game round in the high support state, that is, during special figure 2 fluctuation, the player plays a game so that up to four reserved special figures 2 can be stored. As a result, the special figure 2 variation for the first one rotation and the special figure 2 variation of up to 4 pieces stored during the special figure 2 variation will be executed up to 5 times. Become. The period during which the special figure 2 variation is performed up to 5 times is the first game stage of the two types of game stages. Hereinafter, the first game stage will be referred to as a "decision stage".

In the decisive battle stage, the special figure 2 variation is executed up to 5 times as described above, but the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 per lottery related to this special figure 2 variation is the special figure of FIG. 214 (b) Since it is 1/7.7 as shown in the success/failure table for the winning lottery in FIG. Approximately 50% according to

Rush rush rate P1=1-{(77-10)/77}^5...(3)
However, ^ represents exponentiation.

As shown in the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning big hit in FIG. In the high support state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the number of times the game is executed is limited to 7 times. The player plays the game so that a maximum of four reserves of the special figure 2 can be stored during the execution of this game cycle, that is, during the variation of the special figure 2, by hitting to the right. As a result, a maximum of 11 special figure 2 variations are executed with the special figure 2 variation for the first 7 rotations and a maximum of 4 special figure 2 variations stored during the special figure 2 variation. Become. The period during which the special figure 2 variation is performed up to 11 times is the second game stage of the two types of game stages. Hereinafter, the second game stage will be called a "rush stage".

In the rush stage, a maximum of 11 special figure 2 variations are executed as described above, but the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery related to this special figure 2 variation is the special feature of FIG. 214 (b) Since it is 1/7.7 as shown in the success/failure table for the winning lottery in FIG. Approximately 78% according to

Rush continuation rate P2=1-{(77-10)/77}^11...(4)
However, ^ represents exponentiation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by winning a small win in the normal state H1, the player shifts to the decisive battle stage H4 in which the rush rush rate is about 50%, and wins a small win in the decisive battle stage H4. , the game is advanced so as to shift to the rush stage H7 in which the rush continuation rate realizes a high continuation rate of about 78. The flow of such games will be described in detail later.

<<5-4-2>> Configuration of ceiling time saving function:
Next, the ceiling time reduction (so-called idle time) function provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

The ceiling time saving function is a function that shifts the support mode to the high frequency support mode when the number of game times executed during the normal state (low support state) reaches a specified number (for example, 1000 times in this embodiment). be. The MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 sets a predetermined specified number of times in the ceiling number counter when the initialization condition is satisfied, and increments the ceiling number counter value by 1 as predetermined information each time a game round is executed in the normal state. Decrement (subtract). The ceiling number counter is stored in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. When the initialization conditions are met, it corresponds to when the pachinko machine is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) or when a jackpot is won (including when a small win is made in a winning lottery and a V prize jackpot is won). . When a jackpot is won (including when a small win is won in a winning lottery and a V-prize jackpot is won), it is in a state in which it is guaranteed that the given value will be generated. is set. For this reason, when the player wins the jackpot, the player feels refreshed after the end of the round game if the rush state does not occur, or after exiting the rush state if the rush state occurs. You can enjoy that the value of the ceiling number counter is updated from the specified number of times. In addition, as a modified example, the time when the initialization condition is established may include the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Decrementing of the value of the ceiling count counter is performed by software update processing executed by main controller 60 .

That is, the ceiling number counter is set to a specified number of times when the pachinko machine is initialized, and thereafter is decremented by 1 each time a game round is executed in a normal state, resulting in a big win (a small win in a winning lottery). The specified number of times is reset each time (including the case of winning a V prize jackpot, the same shall apply hereinafter). In other words, the ceiling count counter is decremented by 1 each time a game cycle is performed in a predetermined game state from when the initialization condition is established until the jackpot is won. Here, decrementing the value of the ceiling number counter by 1 each time a game round is executed means that, specifically, when a specific condition is satisfied at the end of the stop display in the game round (at the end of the fixed time) , the value of the ceiling number counter is decremented by 1 when the specific condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the specific condition may be changed to the end of the stop display in the game round, the start of the variable display in the game round, the end of the variable display in the game round, or the like.

Then, when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0, that is, when the predetermined information is in an update end state, the MPU 62 turns on the ceiling condition fulfillment flag and the counter update end flag. The ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag are stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. The ceiling condition satisfaction flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the number of times the game is executed in the normal state after the initialization condition is satisfied has reached a specified number. The counter update end flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the update of the ceiling number counter is ended. Each of the ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag is turned OFF when the above-described initialization condition is satisfied, and turned ON when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches zero. The reason why the ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag are set to ON/OFF at the same timing will be described later.

Further, the MPU 62 performs ceiling condition determination processing for determining whether or not the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON each time a game cycle is executed in the normal mode when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Then, in the ceiling condition determination process, when it is determined that the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON, the time saving provision is executed a predetermined number of times. In addition, when it is determined that the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON in the ceiling condition determination processing, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the ceiling reaching notification performance in which characters such as ``chance time'' appear as the imparted value. In addition, as a modified example, the value of the ceiling number counter is directly checked without preparing the ceiling condition establishment flag, and when the value of the ceiling number counter becomes 0, a predetermined number of time reductions are given. good.

"Predetermined number of time reduction grants" shifts the support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the number of times the game is executed after the high frequency support mode is started is a predetermined number (hereinafter also referred to as the number of time reduction grants). It is to continue the high frequency support mode as the support mode until it reaches. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of time reduction grants is set to a large number of times, for example, 100 times, and is determined to be able to win a small hit with a high probability close to 100% in the game times within the time reduction grant number. It is In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit while the time saving is being given, that is, when the support mode is a high frequency support mode, is the success or failure for the special figure 2 winning lottery in FIG. Since it is 1/7.7 from the table, it is possible to win a small hit with a high probability close to 100% if it is a large number of time reduction grants such as 100 times. Hereinafter, the period during which the high-frequency support mode is continued due to the reduction in working hours is referred to as a "ceiling reaching stage". In the ceiling reaching stage, a small win can be won with a high probability of about 100%, and the rush rush rate is about 100%. In summary, after the predetermined information is in an update end state, specifically at a predetermined timing after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number of times of time saving as a predetermined advantageous state is given. .

In addition, the number of time reduction grants does not need to be limited to 100 times. Other times may be used. Also, the specified number of times is not necessarily limited to 1000 times, and may be other number of times such as 500 times, 800 times, or 1100 times.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the timing for starting the time reduction provision is set at the end of the stop display (at the end of the fixed time) in the game round in which the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0. In addition, instead of the end of the stop display (end of the fixed time), at the start of the variable display in the game round in which the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0, the game round in which the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0 It may be configured to start giving time reduction at the time of stopping the variable display in . In addition, as the timing of giving the time saving, at the start of the variable display in the next game round after the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0, at the time of stopping the variable display in the next game round, or at the next It is also possible to adopt a configuration such as when the stop display ends in the game round (when the fixed time ends).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the update of the above-described ceiling number counter is the game round of the special figure 1 based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 33, the game ball to the second start port 34 It is configured to be performed in any case of the special figure 2 game round based on the entry of the ball. On the other hand, as a modification, only when the game round of the special figure 1 based on the entry ball of the game ball to the first starting port 33 is executed, the ceiling number counter may be updated. Since the execution number of game rounds for generating the ceiling time reduction is limited to the game rounds in the normal state, there is no problem even if the update of the ceiling number counter is limited to the game rounds of the special figure 1. According to this modification, control can be simplified.

When a small win is won in the ceiling reaching stage, an opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is executed, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, a game ball enters a V prize opening 59, thereby winning a V prize big win. An opening/closing execution mode based on the winning jackpot is executed. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is finished, the high support state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode is maintained as the added value. Since the small winning in the ceiling reaching stage is a small winning in the special 2 per lottery, according to the distribution table for the special 2V winning big winning in FIG. 216 (b), the high support state continues. The number of times the game is played is limited to 7 times. As a result, the game state shifts to the rush stage described above.

According to the ceiling time saving function, the ceiling number counter is decremented from the specified number of times, and when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches 0, the ceiling condition establishment flag is turned on. The counter may be incremented from 0, and the ceiling condition satisfied flag may be turned ON when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches a specified number of times. Also, instead of incrementing or decrementing, another calculation may be used to update the ceiling number counter.

As described above, the ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag are turned OFF when the initialization condition is satisfied, and turned ON when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches zero. The ceiling condition establishment flag is a flag that functions as a condition for executing the process of shifting the support mode to the high frequency support mode in the ceiling time saving process. On the other hand, the counter update end flag has a process of determining whether to perform a V aim notification effect or a V aim non-recommended notification effect, which will be described later, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small win. A flag that acts as a condition to be executed. Since the two flags are used for different purposes in this way, in the present embodiment, both the ceiling condition satisfied flag and the counter update end flag are prepared. However, since the ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag are turned on/off at the same timing as described above, as a modification of the present embodiment, one flag is substituted for the other flag. may be Specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, when the counter update end flag is eliminated and the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small winning, either the V aim notification effect or the V aim non-recommended notification effect is performed. A ceiling condition establishment flag may be used as a condition for executing the process of determining whether to perform the above.

<<5-4-3>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the game states to be transitioned as the game progresses are the normal state, the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win, the decisive battle stage, and the rush mode. It can take stages, ceiling-reaching stages, and so on. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the game is started, the game is initially in the normal state H1 as a predetermined game state. The normal state H1 is a low-support state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In the low support state, the recommended shooting mode is left-handed hitting, and the player plays the game with left-handed hitting to cause the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the first start port 33. Let When the game ball enters the first start port 33, a winning lottery (lottery per special figure 1) is made for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the winning lottery. A game round is executed to notify the player of the result of the lottery.

The game round executed in the normal state H1 is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 as a trigger. When the lottery result of the lottery for one special figure in the game round executed in the normal state H1 is lost, the normal state H1 is continued, the player enters the game ball into the first start port 33, and the game round is performed. to run. When the game is played with the left hand in the normal state H1, the symbol display device 41 does not display any notification effect (for example, the left hand notification effect) for informing the player of the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism. not.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the case of entering the game ball into the second starting hole 34 is greater than the case of entering the game ball into the first starting hole 33. is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 is provided on the right-handed route, and the second starting port 34 is provided with the normal electric accessory 34a, so that the support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode. In a certain normal state H1, even if the player hits to the right, the game ball does not enter the second start hole 34, so that the normal right-handed countermeasure is taken so that the game is not played with the right-handed hit in the normal state H1. ing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player cannot obtain a profit unless the game is played with the left hand in the normal state H1. The pattern display device 41 is caused to display a left-handed informing performance for informing the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism is to be returned from right-handed to left-handed.

Also, in the normal state H1, ceiling condition determination processing is executed. According to the ceiling condition determination process, it is determined whether or not the ceiling condition establishment flag, which specifies whether or not the condition for giving the ceiling time reduction is established, is ON.

In the winning lottery in the game round executed in the normal state H1, when a small win, which is a predetermined win, is won, the big winning opening 57a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory is opened and closed. It shifts to the operating opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on a small hit) H2.

In the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on a small hit as a predetermined advantageous state shifted from the normal state H1, the game ball is thrown into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with the right hand as a game method of shooting the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism. In principle, it is recommended to let the ball enter. Here, the “principle” is that the number of times the game times are executed in the normal state in the game times in which the small win is made (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of normal execution) reaches the specified number of times (hereinafter referred to as the number of times the ceiling is reached). If it is close, it is not always advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59. It is recommended that you aim to enter the game ball into the ball. Specifically, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, in the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win that has shifted from the normal state H1, enters the game into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with the right hand as the notification effect of the game method. Two types are prepared, namely, a V aim notification performance recommending that the ball is entered, and a V aim non-recommendation notification performance recommending that the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with left-handed hitting. Then, when the above rule is applied, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the V aim notification effect, and when the above principle is not applied, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the V aim non-recommended notification effect. Incidentally, the V aim notification effect or the V aim non-recommended notification effect is displayed using the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win. The V aim notification effect is the first display mode, and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect is the second display mode.

Conditions for determining whether or not the above principle applies, the V aim notification effect, and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect will be described later in detail. Here, the following description will be given assuming that the V aim notification effect is applied in principle and displayed on the symbol display device 41, and that the game is played with the right hand in accordance with the V aim notification effect.

In the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win, the game is played with the right hand, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win, and the big winning hole 57a. When a game ball enters the V winning port 59 provided inside, it wins the V winning jackpot, and the opening and closing execution mode ( Hereafter, it shifts to H3 (also referred to as "opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot"). A predetermined number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls by entering the game balls into the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win. When a small win is won in the win lottery in the game round executed in the normal state H1, the player switches the game method for shooting the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism from the left shot to the right shot, thereby making a V winning opening. By entering the game ball into 59, it becomes possible to shift to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot as the value to be given, assuming that the profit giving condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can attempt to establish the profit giving condition by positively switching the shooting operation from left-handed to right-handed.

On the other hand, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 within a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) after winning the small win, the V winning jackpot is won. Otherwise, the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot is not executed. As a result, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 59, the state returns to the normal state H1.

In the opening and closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win as a predetermined advantageous state, the recommended shooting mode is right-handed hitting, and the player plays the game with right-handed hitting to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA. A game ball is made to enter the big prize winning opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. It should be noted that, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. may be configured to be displayed in In that case, if the player has already played the game with a right-handed stroke, the configuration may be such that the right-handed informing effect is not performed. In the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 by winning the small winning based on the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33. 216(a), according to the distribution table for the special figure 1 V winning jackpot, the number of round games, that is, the opening and closing door of the variable winning device 36 36b can be opened 4 times (4 rounds). A predetermined number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls each time one game ball enters a big prize hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is finished, the game moves to the decisive battle stage H4 as a predetermined game state.

The decisive battle stage H4 is a high-support state that transitions when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. As explained in the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning jackpot in FIG. In the high support state limited to one game round, the recommended shooting mode is right-handed hitting in order to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34. - 特許庁In this right hitting state H4a, the first game ball is entered into the second starting port 34, and the special figure 2 variation triggered by the entry of the first game ball is executed until one rotation. During the special figure 2 fluctuation, the player accumulates a maximum of 4 reserved special figures 2 by playing the game with right hitting.

When the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 fluctuation for the first one rotation in the right hitting state H4a is lost, the state H4b during special figure 2 pending digestion is shifted.

In the state H4b during special figure 2 pending digestion, the number of games corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 (maximum 4 pieces) stored in the state H4a during right hitting is executed. In addition, in the state H4b during special figure 2 pending digestion, the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

When a small win is won in the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 variation for the first one rotation in the right-handed state H4a, the game exits the decisive battle stage H4 and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win.

In addition, even if a small win is won in the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 fluctuation in the game round executed in the state H4b of the special figure 2 pending digestion, the closing stage H4 is exited and the opening and closing execution based on the small win is performed. Move to mode H5. On the other hand, when the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 variation in the game round executed in the state H4b during special figure 2 pending digestion is out, it returns to the normal state H1.

In the decisive battle stage H4, the special figure 2 variation for the first one rotation in the right-handed state H4a and the special figure 2 variation of up to 4 stored during the special figure 2 variation, up to 5 special The FIG. 2 variation will be implemented. The probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 per lottery related to this special figure 2 variation is 1/7.7 as shown in the success or failure table for the special figure 2 per lottery in FIG. The probability of winning a small prize (rush rush rate) P1 during stage H4 is about 50% as described above. That is, it is possible to shift to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win with a probability of about 50% from the decisive battle stage H4.

In addition, in the decisive battle stage H4, a special effect unique to the decisive battle stage H4 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in order to notify the player of the shift to the decisive battle stage H4. As a special effect, for example, an image is displayed that suggests that the player has moved to the decisive battle stage H4 and that four special-figure 2 reserves are stored. By this special performance, the player can know that the player has shifted to the decisive battle stage H4, which is highly advantageous for the player with a rush entry rate of about 50%, and thus the player is expected to enter the rush. be able to.

In the opening and closing execution mode H5 based on a small hit as a predetermined advantageous state shifted from the decisive battle stage H4, the recommended firing mode is right-handed, and the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with right-handed. The pattern display device 41 is caused to display the V aim notification performance recommended to be executed. The V aim notification effect is displayed using the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win. When the game is played with the right hand according to the V aim notification performance, the game ball enters the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win and enters the big winning hole 57a. When a game ball enters the provided V winning opening 59, it is won as a V winning jackpot, and the opening/closing execution mode H6 (V winning It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H6) based on the jackpot. A predetermined number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls by entering the game balls into the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 within a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) after winning the small win, the V winning big win is won. Otherwise, the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning jackpot is not executed. As a result, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 59, the state returns to the normal state H1.

In the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning jackpot as a predetermined advantageous state, the recommended shooting mode is right-handed hitting, and the player plays the game with right-handed hitting to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA. A game ball is made to enter the big prize winning opening 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize big win. In addition, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning jackpot, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. may be configured to be displayed in In that case, if the player has already played the game with a right-handed stroke, the configuration may be such that the right-handed informing effect is not performed. The opening and closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning jackpot is a small winning prize based on the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the decisive battle stage, and the game ball enters the V winning port 59. 216(b), according to the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning jackpot, the number of round games as a predetermined game state, that is, , The number of opening times of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is 4 times (4 rounds) or 15 times (15 lands). A predetermined number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls each time one game ball enters a big prize hole opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V prize big win. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win is finished, the game moves to a rush stage H7 as a predetermined game state.

Rush stage H7 is a high-support state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. As explained in the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning big hit in FIG. In the high support state limited to the game rounds up to 7 times, the recommended shooting mode is right-hand hitting in order to enter the game ball into the second start port 34 . In this right-handed state H7a, the special figure 2 variation for 7 rotations is executed. The player accumulates a maximum of 4 reserved special figures 2 by playing a game with a right hand during the special figure 2 fluctuation for the 7 rotations.

When the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 fluctuation for the first 7 rotations in the right hitting state H7a is out, it moves to the special figure 2 pending digestion state H7b.

In the state H7b during special figure 2 pending digestion, the number of games corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 (up to 4 pieces) stored in the state H7a during right hitting is executed. In addition, in the state H7b during special figure 2 pending digestion, the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

When a small win, which is a predetermined win, is won in a win lottery related to the special figure 2 variation for the first 7 rotations in the right-handed state H7a, the rush stage H7 is exited and an opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is performed. Move to H5. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, it is possible to shift again to the rush stage H7 via the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning big win.

In addition, even if a small win, which is a predetermined win, is won in the winning lottery related to the change of the special figure 2 in the game cycle executed in the state H7b of the special figure 2 pending digestion, the rush stage H7 is exited, It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on a small hit. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, it is possible to shift again to the rush stage H7 via the opening/closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning big win.

On the other hand, when the winning lottery related to the special figure 2 fluctuation in the game round executed in the state H7b during special figure 2 pending digestion is out, it returns to the normal state H1.

In the rush stage H7 as a predetermined advantageous state, with the special figure 2 variation for the first 7 rotations in the right hitting state H7a and the special figure 2 variation for a maximum of 4 stored during the special figure 2 variation, A maximum of 11 special figure 2 variations will be executed. The probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 per lottery related to this special figure 2 variation is 1/7.7 as shown in the success or failure table for the special figure 2 per lottery in FIG. The probability of winning a small prize (rush continuation rate) P2 during stage H7 is about 78% as described above. That is, it is possible to shift from the decisive battle stage H4 to the rush stage H7 with a probability of about 50%, and after shifting to the rush stage H7, it is possible to repeat the rush stage H7 with a high probability of about 78%.

In the rush stage H7, a special effect specific to the rush stage H7 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in order to notify the player of the shift to the rush stage H7. As a special effect which is a given value, for example, an image is displayed that suggests that the player has moved to the rush stage H7 and that four special 2 reserves are stored. By this special performance, the player can know that the player has shifted to the rush stage H7, which has a rush entry rate of about 78%, which is highly advantageous for the player, so that the player has a sense of anticipation for entering the rush. be able to.

As described above, in the normal state H1, ceiling condition determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON. When the ceiling condition determination process determines that the ceiling condition satisfaction flag is ON, that is, when the number of times the game is executed since the initialization condition is satisfied reaches a specified number in the normal state H1 (that is, When the ceiling is reached), time saving is given a predetermined number of times. As a result, the normal state H1 is shifted to the ceiling reaching stage H8 as a predetermined game state. Also, in the ceiling condition determination processing, when it is determined that the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a ceiling arrival notification performance in which characters such as ``chance time'' appear as the added value. The player can have a premonition of the rush rush by this ceiling reaching notification effect.

In the ceiling reaching stage H8, the support mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support is performed as the support mode until the number of game times executed after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the number of time reduction grants (for example, 100 times). Mode continues. When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the shooting mode recommended by the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. When the stage H8 is shifted to the ceiling reaching stage H8, the pattern display device 41 displays a right-handed informing effect for informing the player that the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. The probability of winning a small prize in the ceiling reaching stage H8 is a high probability close to 100%, as described above. In addition, after winning the small prize, by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small prize, it is possible to shift to the rush stage H7 without going through the decisive battle stage H4. Therefore, in the normal state H1, when the ceiling is reached by the ceiling condition determination process, the robot can move to the ceiling reaching stage H8, and can move to the rush stage H7 from the ceiling reaching stage H8 at a rush inrush rate of about 100%. .

《5-4-4》Information effect of game method:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small winning that has shifted from the normal state H1, that is, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on winning the small winning in the lottery per special figure 1 , as a notification effect of a game method for shooting a game by a game ball shooting mechanism, in principle, a V aim notification effect is displayed, which recommends that a game ball be entered into a V winning hole 59 by playing a game with a right-hand shot; When the principle is not applied, a V aim non-recommendation notification effect is displayed to recommend not to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with left-handed hitting. Here, the “principle” is that the number of times the game times are executed in the normal state (hereinafter referred to as the number of normal execution times) in the game times in which the small win is made reaches the specified number of times (hereinafter referred to as the number of times the ceiling is reached). This is because it is not always advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 59 when it is close. The reason why it is not necessarily advantageous is as follows. In the open/close execution mode H2 based on the small win, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 59 and the V winning big win is won, the transition to the decisive battle stage H4 (see FIG. 219) described above is performed. The rush entry rate in stage H4 is about 50%. On the other hand, when the normal execution count reaches the ceiling reach count, the transition is to the ceiling reach stage H8 (see FIG. 219), and the rush rush rate in the ceiling reach stage H8 is about 100. %. For this reason, when the number of times of normal execution is close to the number of times of reaching the ceiling, entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 59 is stopped in the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the fact that the small winning is won in the special figure 1 lottery. , it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to wait until the normal execution count reaches the ceiling reaching count.

Depending on how close the number of times of normal execution is to the number of times of reaching the ceiling, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the V prize opening 59 and win the V prize jackpot. It is divided into a case where it is more advantageous to stop entering the game ball into the prize winning opening 59 and wait for the number of times of normal execution to reach the number of times of reaching the ceiling. Assuming that the number of times at the boundary between the former and the latter is called the number of break-even times, until the number of times of normal execution reaches the number of break-even times, the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and wins the V winning jackpot. While it is more advantageous for the player to do so, when the number of normal execution times exceeds the break-even times, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 59 is stopped and the normal execution number reaches the ceiling. It is more advantageous for the player to wait until the number of times is reached.

Here, the number of break-even times is
a) The average number of balls put out by the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win and the opening and closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot obtained by winning the small win in the special prize lottery,
b) The total average number of balls put out by repeating the opening and closing execution mode H5 based on the small win and the opening and closing execution mode H6 based on the V winning big win obtained by entering the rush stage H7;
c) The average special figure 1 start winning number that enters the first start port 33 when 100 game balls are launched,
etc., can be calculated.

Specifically, we ask for the following: First, a predetermined range that is expected to include the number of break-even times is set within the range from the specified number of times (1000) to 0 for the value of the ceiling number counter. By setting this predetermined range to be a wide range to some extent, it is possible to include the number of break-even times without fail. Then, in each game round with the value of the counter for the number of ceiling times included in the predetermined range, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and wins the V winning big win, the small win is won. The increase amount A of the game ball obtained from the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the win to the rush stage H7, and the normal that shifts when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win The increase amount B of the game ball obtained from the state H1 through the ceiling reaching stage H8 to the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win to the rush stage H7 is obtained by calculation. Then, the amount of increase A and the amount of increase B are compared, and the number of times corresponding to the value of the ceiling number counter at which the comparison result switches from "increase amount A≧increase amount B" to "increase amount A<increase amount B" is calculated. Set the number of breakeven times.

The amount of increase A can be obtained as follows.

The amount of increase in game balls in the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win (hereinafter referred to as the amount of increase A1) is the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game balls into the large winning opening 57a of the variable winning device 57 dedicated to the small win. By subtracting one of the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening 57a from 10, it becomes 9.

The number of prize balls obtained in one round game in the opening and closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win is 15, and the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the big winning opening 36a is 15. Since the upper limit number is 9, 15×9=135. Here, the calculation is made assuming that game balls are entered up to the upper limit number. By subtracting 9, which is the number of game balls entered into the big prize opening 36a, from 135, the increase in the number of game balls in one round game in the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V prize jackpot is 126. Become. Since the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win is four, the increase amount of the game balls in the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win (hereinafter referred to as the increase amount A2) is , 126×4=504.

In the decisive battle stage H4, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 is five, one in the high-frequency support mode and four in the special 2 reserve. Therefore, the increment A3 in the decisive battle stage H4 is -5.

The increase in the number of game balls obtained from the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small hit to the rush stage H7 is obtained through experiments and simulations. Here, it is assumed that the increased amount of game balls is 8000 pieces. Since the entry rate in the decisive battle stage H4 is about 50%, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win and wins the V winning big win, the transition to the small The expected value of the increase in the number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as the increase A4) obtained from the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the hit to the rush stage H7 is 8000×50%=4000.

Therefore, the increment A is 9+504−5+4000=4508, which is the sum of the increments A1 to A4.

The amount of increase B can be obtained as follows.

First, the average special-figure 1 start winning number that enters the first start hole 33 when 100 game balls are launched is obtained by experiments and simulations. Then, using the average special figure 1 start winning number, in each game round of the value of the ceiling number counter included in the above-mentioned predetermined range in the normal state H1, the value of the ceiling number counter corresponds to the number of times the ceiling is reached (= 0) can be obtained.

A launching amount B2 of the game ball required to win a small hit in the ceiling reaching stage H8 is obtained by experiments and simulations. Further, the increase in the number of game balls obtained from the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the small win to the rush stage H7, which is shifted when the small win is won in the ceiling reaching stage H8, is 8000 as described above.

Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win, the normal state H1 that shifts when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 passes through the ceiling reaching stage H8, and from the opening and closing execution mode H5 based on the small win to the rush stage H7. The increase amount B of the game ball obtained by up to is 8000-B1-B2.

By the above-described method, the increase amount A and the increase amount B corresponding to each game round of the value of the ceiling number counter are obtained, and the increase amount A and the increase amount B of the value of the ceiling number counter are compared for each game round. Then, the point at which the comparison result switches from "Increase amount A≧Increase amount B" to "Increase amount A<Increase amount B" is determined, and the number of times corresponding to the value of the ceiling number counter that is the point is determined as the break-even number. .

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the break-even times are stored in advance in the ROM 63 of the main controller 60 . The MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 has the above-described counter update end flag OFF, and when the lottery result of the lottery per special figure 1 is a small winning, the ceiling number counter representing the number of times of normal execution , and the threshold obtained from the number of break-even times are compared. The threshold is a numerical value obtained by converting the number of break-even times into the value of the ceiling number counter, and specifically, it is a numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of break-even times from the prescribed number of times (1000 times). It should be noted that the number of break-even times does not necessarily have to be obtained by calculation, and may be any number of times as long as the number of times does not impair the effects of the present embodiment.

When the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 determines that the value of the ceiling number counter is equal to or greater than the threshold value (threshold value obtained from the break-even number) through the comparison process, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 enters the game ball into the V winning opening 59 and V Since it is more advantageous for the player to win the winning jackpot, the V aim notification performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when it is determined by the above comparison processing that the value of the counter for the number of ceiling times is less than the threshold value, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 59 is stopped, and the normal execution number reaches the ceiling reaching number. Since it is more advantageous for the player to wait for , the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the non-recommendation notification performance for the V aim.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched depending on the value of the number-of-ceilings counter. In the drawing, the horizontal axis indicates the value of the ceiling number counter and the normal execution number. Here, it is assumed that the number of break-even times is, for example, 900 times, which is 100 times earlier than 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached. A game ball enters the first start port 33 in a game round in which the value of the ceiling number counter is between 1000 and 100, that is, in a game round in which the number of normal execution times is from 1 to 900 (breakeven times). V aim notification performance is displayed on a pattern display device 41 when a small win is won by a lottery for one special figure executed based on the above. In the game times between 99 and 0 when the value of the ceiling number counter is less than 100, that is, in the game times from 901 times to 1000 times when the number of times of normal execution exceeds 900 times (breakeven times), per special figure When a small prize is won by a lottery, a pattern display device 41 is caused to display a V aim non-recommendation notification performance. That is, when the small winning is won by the special figure 1 winning lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the value of the ceiling number counter is, for example, the number of times the ceiling is reached. Until a predetermined timing when reaching a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times of break-even which is 100 times before 1000 times, the notification effect of the game method is performed by the V aim notification effect, and the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times of break-even. At a specific timing (timing of reaching 99) after the predetermined timing of reaching , the notification effect of the game method is switched to the V aim non-recommended notification effect.

After the notification performance of the game method is switched to the non-recommended notification performance of the V aim, the notification performance of the game method is not switched to the V aim notification performance at least until the V winning jackpot win occurs. If, after switching to the V aim non-recommended notification effect, the V aim non-recommended notification effect is switched to, the V aim non-recommended notification effect is an erroneous notification effect, and a small hit is made according to the V aim non-recommended notification effect. If the game ball is not entered into the V winning hole 59 at the time of winning, the player loses the profit obtained by entering the game ball into the V winning hole 59 at the time of winning the small win. I give. Therefore, after the notification performance of the game method is switched to the non-recommended notification performance of the V aim, the notification performance of the game method is not switched to the V aim notification performance at least until the V winning jackpot win occurs. , V aim non-recommendation notification effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the notification effect of the game method. FIG. 221(a) shows a V aim notification effect as a game method notification effect, and FIG. 221(b) shows a V aim non-recommended notification effect as a game method notification effect.

In the V aim notification effect shown in FIG. 221(a), a female character appears, and a video image of the female character shouting, "Aim for V with a right-hand shot! Because that's more profitable!" 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 output sound and light associated with the moving image. However, this aspect is an example, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, in addition to the moving image of shouting as described above, an arrow may be displayed that gives an image of the trajectory of the game ball up to the V winning hole 59 .

By the V aim notification effect shown in FIG. 221(a), the player can feel that ``I won a small prize. can feel.

In the non-recommendation notification effect for the V aim shown in FIG. !” is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and sound and light associated with the moving image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. This is the first display mode. However, this aspect is an example, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, in addition to the moving image of shouting as described above, the second display mode may be such that an image of an arrow with an X indicating the trajectory of the game ball up to the V winning hole 59 is displayed. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the arrow is crossed, the color may be changed such that, for example, a red arrow is attached in the V aim notification effect, and a blue arrow is added in the V aim non-recommendation notification effect. .

221(b), the player can say, ``If you wait a little longer, the rush time will surely come to an end. No, let's stop hitting right." The player thinking in this way, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 (see FIG. 219) based on the small winning that has shifted from the normal state H1, does not execute the right-handed shot and plays the game with the left-handed shot. Stopping the entry of the game ball and entering the game ball into the first start port 33 while being excited to reach the ceiling, the execution of the game round of the special figure 1 is digested.

FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a small winning lottery. FIG. 222(a) shows the case where the V aim notification effect is displayed as the game method notification effect, and FIG. 222(b) shows the case where the V aim non-recommended notification effect is displayed as the game method notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 222(a), the value of the ceiling number counter at the end of the game round is a value of 100 or more (100 in the example shown), that is, the normal execution number is 900, which is the breakeven number. If the lottery result of the special figure 1-per lottery related to the game round before the game round (the 900th game round in the example shown) is a small win, in the 900th game round, the variable display of the decorative pattern (variation A display from the start of the display until the stop of the variable display) and a stop display (a display from the stop of the variable display to the end of the stop display) are displayed on the pattern display device 41 in this order. After the end of the stop display, the execution of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is started, but the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is used to display the V aim notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 222(b), the value of the ceiling number counter at the end of the game round is less than 100 (99 in the example shown), that is, the normal execution number is 900, which is the break-even number. When the lottery result of the lottery for the special figure 1 per lottery related to the game round exceeding the number of times (the 901st game round in the example shown) is a small hit, in the 901st game round, the variable display of the decorative pattern (variation A display from the start of the display until the stop of the variable display) and a stop display (a display from the stop of the variable display to the end of the stop display) are displayed on the pattern display device 41 in this order. After the end of the stop display, the execution of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is started, but the V aim non-recommendation notification effect is displayed using the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, when the number of executions of game rounds in the normal state (low support state) reaches the ceiling number (for example, 1000 times in the present embodiment), Since the support mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, and the ceiling time saving function that surely enters the rush state after that is provided, the player can win the previous big hit ), even though the number of times the game has been executed has passed a certain amount or more, the state where the jackpot cannot be drawn (the so-called addicted state) continues, and when I feel frustrated, the ceiling time-saving function I remembered that it was installed, and looked at the current number of rotations displayed on the data counter installed at the top of the pachinko machine, and thought that I was approaching the ceiling. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to reaching the number of times. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of displaying the non-recommended notification effect for the V aim instead of the notification effect for the V target when it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter is below the threshold value. Consider the pachinko machine of the reference example described in the "Introduction" section. In the pachinko machine of this reference example, when the win lottery result in the game round is a small win, the V aim notification effect is displayed on the pattern display device regardless of the value of the ceiling number counter. This display is always displayed even if the number of times the game is executed in the normal state is close to reaching the ceiling. Looking back, as described above, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in normal times, the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the small win and the opening and closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win are performed. Since the game state to be shifted to is the decisive battle stage H4, the rush entry rate in this decisive battle stage H4 is about 50%, and the rush state is not entered with a probability close to 100%. For this reason, if the number of game rounds executed during the normal state is close to the specified number (for example, the 990th game round), if you wait a little longer, the ceiling time reduction will be activated, and the rush state will occur with a probability of about 100%. However, because the game ball was entered into the V winning hole according to the V aim notification effect and the game ball was shifted to the decisive battle stage H4, it was not possible to lose the winning lottery in the decisive battle stage H4 and shift to the rush state. It was possible with a probability of about 50%. That is, although the display of the V aim notification effect provides the player with a game method that is advantageous to the player, in reality, the result is disadvantageous to the player as described above. There was a problem that there was a risk of being invited.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of game rounds executed in the normal state exceeds the number of break-even times (for example, 900 times), a small win is won by a special figure 1 lottery. In this case, since the V aim non-recommended notification effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the V aim non-recommended notification effect allows the player to say, "If you wait a little longer, you will definitely enter the rush. You don't have to bet on a 50% chance of winning V now, let's stop playing right-handed." Therefore, the player can select the most advantageous game method of stopping the game ball from entering the V prize opening 59 when a small win is won by the lottery for one special figure. When a small win is won and a V aim non-recommended notification performance is displayed on a pattern display device 41, an opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V prize big win is generated when the game ball does not enter the V prize winning opening 59.例文帳に追加A new variable display in the normal state H1 can be executed without any change. For this reason, it is possible to return to the state of updating the counter of the number of ceiling times, and in turn, the number of times of normal execution reaches the number of times of reaching the ceiling, and it is possible to receive a predetermined number of time-saving grants as a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from being inconvenienced by the V aim notification effect.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined specific condition in the variable display is satisfied by the updating process, the predetermined information is updated, and the predetermined information is in the update end state in the predetermined game state. A predetermined advantageous state is generated at a later predetermined timing. Further, a predetermined notification is given in the first display mode or in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Further, a predetermined determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and if the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a profit is given based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Give value when conditions are met. Further, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a predetermined notification is made in the first display mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update of the predetermined information is completed. At a later specific timing, the display mode is switched to the second display mode. Specifically, the ceiling number counter is updated each time a game round is executed, and the game state from the time when the initialization conditions are satisfied until the big win is won (including the case where the V prize big win is won by winning a small win in a winning lottery). In the above, time-saving provision is generated for a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing after the value of the counter for the number of ceiling times reaches a value corresponding to the number of times of reaching the ceiling. In addition, a game method for shooting a game ball at the time of winning a small hit is notified in the V aim notification performance or the V aim non-recommendation notification performance. Further, a winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and when the result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the game ball wins V by the player's shooting operation. When the ball enters the mouth, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V prize jackpot. Furthermore, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the threshold (100) corresponding to the number of breakeven times that is 100 times before the number of times the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling (1000 times) Until the predetermined timing is reached, the game method notification effect is performed with the V aim notification effect, and at the specific timing (timing of 99) after the predetermined timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of breakeven times, the game is played. The notification effect of the method is switched to the V aim non-recommended notification effect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, the first display mode is displayed until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update end state of the predetermined information. , and the display mode is switched to the second display mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. By establishing the profit giving condition based on the game operation of (1), the given value can be generated, and on the other hand, when the predetermined information is switched to the second display mode, the predetermined information is in an update end state, One can wait with anticipation to be able to generate a predetermined advantageous situation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the above determination is a predetermined win, the display mode of the predetermined notification can be used to increase the expectation of the player without causing any inconvenience to the player. can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the threshold value corresponding to the number of breakeven times that is 100 times before the number of times the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling (1000 times) ( 100), the notification effect of the game method is performed in the V aim notification effect, and the specific timing (timing of 99) after the predetermined timing of reaching the threshold (100) corresponding to the break-even times. In , since the notification effect of the game method is switched to the V aim non-recommended notification effect, the player sees the predetermined notification in the V aim notification effect and plays the game with the right hand to win the V winning opening. By entering the game ball into 59, the game state can be shifted to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot. The value of the ceiling number counter reaches the value (0) corresponding to the ceiling reaching number (1000 times), and it is possible to wait with anticipation for the shift to the high support state for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, when the success/failure result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the expectation of the player can be heightened without giving inconvenience to the player by the display mode of the notification performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first state in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state in which the privilege is granted is the first value, and the second value in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state is higher than the first value. and a second state in which the first display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the first state, and the second display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the second state . Specifically, it has a decisive battle stage H4 with a rush rush rate of about 50% and a ceiling reach stage H8 with a rush rush rate of about 100%, and the V aim notification effect can shift to the decisive battle stage H4. This is a mode suggesting that the V aim non-recommendation notification effect can shift to the ceiling reaching stage H8.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined notification is given in the second display mode, the player can guess that the rate of transition to the privilege granting state will increase, and the player is given a sense of anticipation. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the game method is notified by the V aim non-recommended notification effect, the player can guess that the rate of entering the rush state will increase, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. can.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the predetermined advantageous state can be given when the shooting operation that operates the game ball shooting mechanism is the second shooting mode, and the shooting operation is the first shooting mode. If it is in the mode, it is a state in which it is impossible to give a predetermined profit, and the game machine sets the firing operation for operating the firing means to the second firing mode after the predetermined information is in an update end state. means for performing a second shooting mode notification effect for informing the player of the Specifically, a predetermined number of time-saving grants in the ceiling reaching stage H8 can be entered into the second start port 34 when the shooting operation that activates the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed, and a small win can be won. When the shooting operation is left-handed, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second start hole 34, and it is impossible to win a small hit. After reaching a value (0) corresponding to the number of times, means for performing right-handed informing performance for informing the player that the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed is provided. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can receive a predetermined benefit by playing the game in the second firing mode according to the second firing mode notification effect. Specifically, the player can win a small hit by playing a game with hitting to the right according to the hitting to the right notification effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is in the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the game is played. A predetermined ball entry area is provided in which the ball cannot be entered, and the profit giving condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area. Specifically, the V winning hole 59 is provided in which the game ball can enter when the game ball is hit to the right, and the game ball cannot enter when the game ball is hit to the left. A game ball enters the V winning hole 59 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the player changes the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. By making the game ball enter the predetermined ball entry area by switching to the second shooting mode, it becomes possible to establish the profit giving condition. Here, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry area when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the first shooting mode, and the game ball can enter when the shooting operation is in the second shooting mode. Consider a non-enterable configuration. With this configuration, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the game ball is already shot in the first shooting mode toward the predetermined ball entry area. Since it has been done, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area with a high probability. Therefore, when the player sees the second display mode and decides that he/she wants to avoid the establishment of the profit giving condition, the game ball has already been shot in the first shooting mode, so the predetermined It was difficult to stop the game ball from entering the ball entry area. As a result, the player cannot select whether or not to establish the profit provision condition. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry area unless the shooting operation is switched from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. , in order to satisfy the profit giving condition, it is necessary to switch the shooting operation from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the player changes the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. Depending on whether or not to switch to the second shooting mode, it is possible to select whether or not to establish the profit giving condition. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the normal state of left-handed, the player switches from left-handed to right-handed to make a V winning opening. By entering the game ball into 59, it becomes possible to establish the conditions for winning the V-prize jackpot. Therefore, since the game ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 59 unless the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is switched from the left hitting to the right hitting, the player has the condition to win the V winning jackpot. In order to make this happen, it is necessary to switch from hitting left to hitting right. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the normal state of left-handed, the player can switch the shooting operation from right-handed to left-handed. It is possible to select whether or not to establish the conditions for winning the V-prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the profit provision condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period, and the game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period. In this case, the profit provision condition is not satisfied. Specifically, the condition for winning the V winning jackpot is that the game ball enters the V winning hole 59, and if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 59 within a predetermined period, the V The conditions for winning the winning jackpot are not established. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is required to make a determination as to whether or not to satisfy the profit provision condition at least within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is forced to make an early decision, and speeding up of the game can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, it is necessary for the player to determine whether or not the V winning jackpot win is established at least within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is forced to make an early decision, and speeding up of the game can be achieved.

<<5-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing performed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing performed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sb0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves the detection information (entering ball detection information). Then, it progresses to step Sb0102.

In step Sb0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Then, it progresses to step Sb0103.

In step Sb0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. Then, it progresses to step Sb0104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 228) described later.

In step Sb0104, a ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sb0104 will be described later. After executing step Sb0104, the process proceeds to step Sb0105.

In step Sb0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the entering ball processing for through in step Sb0105 will be described later. After executing step Sb0105, the process proceeds to step Sb0106.

In step Sb0106, the ball entering process for the big winning opening accompanying the ball entering the big winning opening 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57 or the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the big winning hole in step Sb0106 will be described later. After executing step Sb0106, the process proceeds to step Sb0107.

In step Sb0107, ball entry processing for the V winning opening associated with the ball entering the V winning opening 59 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning opening in step Sb0107 will be described later. After executing step Sb0107, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 223: Sb0104).

FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the starting opening. In step Sb0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sb0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sb0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. Then, it progresses to step Sb0203.

In step Sb0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. Then, it progresses to step Sb0204.

In step Sb0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . Then, it progresses to step Sb0209.

In step Sb0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sb0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sb0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sb0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls set command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0207. On the other hand, in step Sb0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sb0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sb0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . Then, it progresses to step Sb0208.

In step Sb0208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . Then, it progresses to step Sb0209.

In step Sb0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb0204 or step Sb0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sb0209, if the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sb0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sb0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (Sb0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step Sb0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0212.

In step Sb0212, each value of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 223) is stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. Store in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sb0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 is It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sb0210. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 is set to the second suspension It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sb0210. After executing step Sb0212, the process proceeds to step Sb0213.

In step Sb0213, the first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of determining the type of jackpot when a V prize jackpot is won, the presence or absence of reach, and the like, before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60. After executing step Sb0213, the process proceeds to step Sb0214.

In step Sb0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 228 : step Sb0603) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sb0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 223: Sb0105).

FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for through. In step Sb0301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sb0301, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sb0301: YES), proceed to step Sb0302, whether the number SN of the reserved accessory is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step Sb0301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sb0301: NO), this through ball entering processing ends.

In step Sb0302, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role product number SN (Sb0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0303, and 1 is added to the reserved role product number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0304.

In step Sb0304, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 223) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sb0302, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (Sb0302: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Ball processing for the big winning slot>
Next, the ball entry process for the big winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the big winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 223: step Sb0107).

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a big winning hole. In step Sb0401, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered a large winning opening (hereinafter also referred to as a small winning large winning opening) 57a provided in the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 or not. In step Sb0401, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning (Sb0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0402. On the other hand, in step Sb0401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning (Sb0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0404.

In step Sb0402, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the ball entering the big winning hole 57a for small winning. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 57a for small winning, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls as the added value. After executing step Sb0402, the process proceeds to step Sb0403.

In step Sb0403, the first big winning hole entering ball command is set. The first big winning hole entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning. The first big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process, which will be described later. After executing step Sb0403, the process proceeds to step Sb0404.

In step Sb0404, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered a big winning hole provided in the variable winning device 36 (hereinafter also referred to as a big winning hole for big wins) 36a. In step Sb0404, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a (Sb0404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0405. On the other hand, in step Sb0404, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 36a (Sb0404: NO), the ball entering process for the big winning hole ends.

In step Sb0405, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the balls entering the big winning hole 36a for big wins. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a for big wins, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls as the added value. After executing step Sb0405, the process proceeds to step Sb0406.

In step Sb0406, a second big winning hole entering ball command is set. The second big winning hole ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a for big wins. The second big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process, which will be described later. After step Sb0406 is executed, the ball entry process for the big winning hole ends.

<Ball entry processing for V winning hole>
Next, the ball entry processing for the V winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 223: step Sb0107).

FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. In step Sb0501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 59. In step Sb0501, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 59 (Sb0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0502.

In step Sb0502, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON. A V winning flag as predetermined information is turned ON when a game ball enters the V winning hole 59, and when the V winning flag is turned ON, an opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot is started. This is a flag that turns OFF when the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends. The V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. In step Sb0502, by determining whether or not the V winning flag is already ON, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning opening 59, the processing of steps Sb0503 and Sb0504 to be described later is performed. Adopts a configuration that does not run redundantly.

In step Sb0502, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sb0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0503, and the V winning flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sb0504 and sets a V prize-winning command. The V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 59 and won the V winning jackpot. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process, which will be described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V winning command, the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and wins the V winning jackpot, and based on the V winning, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. A V winning effect, which is a suggested effect, is executed.

After executing step Sm0506, this ball entry process for the V winning hole ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0501 that the game ball has not entered the V winning hole 59 (step Sb0501: NO), and if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sb0502 (step Sb0502: YES) In this case, the ball-entering process for the V winning hole ends without executing steps Sb05 and Sb0504 described above.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from off to on (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sb0601, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and initialization as necessary are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0602.

In step Sb0602, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sb0603.

In step Sb0603, the output data such as the start-up command set in step Sb0602 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are sent to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sb0603, the process proceeds to step Sb0604.

In step Sb0604, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0605.

In step Sb0605, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sb0606. In step Sb0606, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sb0606, the process proceeds to step Sb0607.

In step Sb0607, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0608.

In step Sb0608, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0609.

In step Sb0609, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sb0603). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process that is in the update end state. In step Sb0609, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sb0609: NO), in steps Sb0610 and Sb0611, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sb0610, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sb0611, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0609 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sb0609: YES), the process returns to step Sb0603, and each process from step Sb0603 to step Sb0608 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sb0603 to step Sb0608 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 228: Sb0606).

FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sb0701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag as predetermined information is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win in the game state transition processing to be described later, and the game state transition processing is also performed. is turned off when the opening/closing execution mode is to be terminated at .

In step Sb0701, if it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (Sb0701: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sb0702. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not a ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0701 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sb0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0702.

In step Sb0702, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is executing a game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is executing a game round. Here, "during execution of a game round" corresponds to during variable display or during stop display. The determination of step Sb0702 is stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64, and the special figure stop display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g. It is performed by determining whether or not one of the special figure stop display flags is ON.

In step Sb0702, when the special figure unit 37 determines that the game round is not being executed (Sb0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0703.

In step Sb0703, a variation start process for starting the variation in the special figure unit 37 and the variation in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sb0703, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sb0702, when the special figure unit 37 determines that the game round is being executed (Sb0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0704.

In step Sb0704, a variation stop process for stopping the variation in the special figure unit 37 and the variation in the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sb0704, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 229: Sb0703).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Sb0801, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step Sb0801, when it is determined that the total number of reservations CRN is "0" or less (Sb0801: NO), this fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0801 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sb0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0802.

In step Sb0802, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sb0803. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sb0803, a winning determination process including a process when winning a small winning in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sb0803, the process proceeds to step Sb0804.

In step Sb0804, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process sets the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of small hits, the occurrence of reach, and the like. This process is for Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb0804, the process proceeds to step Sb0805.

In step Sb0805, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, as well as information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variable time set in step Sb0806. After executing step Sb0805, the process proceeds to step Sb0806.

In step Sb0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a small hit and the result of distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information specifying whether the result of the winning lottery is a small win or a losing result, and information specifying whether the result of the distribution judgment is a 4R jackpot or a 15R jackpot. and are included.

The variation command and type command set at steps Sb0805 and Sb0806 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sb0603 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sb0806, the process proceeds to step Sb0807.

In step Sb0807, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sb0807, the process proceeds to step Sb0808. Specific conditions can be set at the start of the variable display.

In step Sb0808, the special figure fluctuation display flag stored in the special figure fluctuation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After step Sb0808 is executed, this fluctuation start processing ends.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (FIG. 230: Sb0802).

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sb0901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (Fig. 213) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sb0901, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step Sb0901, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sb0901: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sb0902 to Sb0907 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sb0901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step Sb0901: NO ), the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area in steps Sb0908 to Sb0913 is executed.

In step Sb0902, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sb0903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0904. In step Sb0904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0905.

In step Sb0905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sb0905, the process proceeds to step Sb0906.

In step Sb0906, if the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display portion flag as predetermined information is information for specifying which of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0907.

In step Sb0907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sb0907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0603 of the normal process (FIG. 228).

In step Sb0901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sb0901: NO), step Proceed to Sb0908.

In step Sb0908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0909. In step Sb0909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sb0910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0911.

In step Sb0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sb0911, the process proceeds to step Sb0912.

In step Sb0912, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb0913.

In step Sb0913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sb0913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0603 of the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (FIG. 230: Sb0803).

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sb1001, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sb1001, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sb1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1002, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 1. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as a small hit in the success or failure table for the lottery for the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 214 (a). Determine whether or not they match. Then, it progresses to step Sb1004.

On the other hand, in step Sb1004, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sb1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1003, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the lottery per special figure 2. . Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as a small hit in the success or failure table for the lottery for the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 214 (b). Determine whether or not they match. Then, it progresses to step Sb1004.

In step Sb1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sb1002 or step Sb1003 is a small hit. In step Sb1004, when the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (Sb1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1005.

At step Sb1005, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sb1005, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sb1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1006, and distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for special figure 1 small hit. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 1 small hit shown in FIG. 215 (a) Determines the result of the sorting decision depending on whether the After executing step Sb1006, the process proceeds to step Sb1007.

In step Sb1007, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning prize jackpot. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 1V winning jackpot shown in FIG. Determines the result of the sorting decision depending on whether the After executing step Sb1007, the process proceeds to step Sb1010.

On the other hand, in step Sb1005, if it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sb1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1008, distribution determination with reference to the distribution table for special figure 2 small per I do. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit shown in FIG. 215 (b) Determines the result of the sorting decision depending on whether the After executing step Sb1008, the process proceeds to step Sb1009.

In step Sb1009, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning prize jackpot. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 2V winning jackpot shown in FIG. Determines the result of the sorting decision depending on whether the After executing step Sb1009, the process proceeds to step Sb1010.

In step Sb1010, a flag (hit flag) corresponding to the type of winning is turned ON based on the results of allocation determination obtained in steps Sb1006 and Sb1007 or steps Sb1008 and Sb1009. As can be seen from FIGS. 215 and 216, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three types of wins, namely, 1R small win, 4R big win, and 15R big win. Three types of flags are prepared: a small win flag, a 4R big win flag, and a 15R big win flag. If the result of distribution determination in step Sb1006 is 1R small hit and the result of distribution determination in step Sb1007 is 4R big hit, the 1R small hit flag is turned ON and the 4R big hit flag is turned ON. Win flags are stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. If the result of distribution determination in step Sb1008 is 1R small hit and the result of distribution determination in step Sb1009 is 4R big hit, the 1R small hit flag is turned ON and the 4R big hit flag is turned ON. On the other hand, if the result of distribution determination in step Sb1008 is 1R small hit and the result of distribution determination in step Sb1009 is 15R big hit, the 1R small hit flag is turned ON and the 15R big hit flag is turned ON.

By ON/OFF of the 1R small winning flag in the winning flag, it is possible to specify the success or failure result of the winning lottery, that is, the presence or absence of the small winning. The result of distribution determination can be specified by ON/OFF of the 4R big win flag and ON/OFF of the 15R big win flag in the winning flags. After executing step Sb1010, the process proceeds to step Sb1011.

In step Sb1011, a process of setting a winning stop result is executed. Specifically, in the current game round in which a small win is won, it is determined whether the variable display is to be ended in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is the processing for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 212), the hits distributed in steps Sb1006 and Sb1007, or steps Sb1008 and Sb1009 The address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM64. After executing step Sb1011, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sb1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sb1002 or step Sb1003 is not a small winning (Sb1004: NO), proceed to step Sb1012, refer to the reach determination table, and reach occurs in the game round It is determined whether or not to Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 212). Determines whether or not it matches the value Then, it progresses to step Sb1013.

In step Sb1013, if the result of reach determination in step Sb1010 indicates that reach occurs in the game round (Sb1013: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1014, and a reach occurrence flag as predetermined information is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sb1014, the process proceeds to step Sb1015.

On the other hand, in step Sb1013, if the result of the reach determination in step Sb1012 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sb1013: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1015 without executing step Sb1014.

In step Sb1015, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sb1015, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variable start process (FIG. 230: Sb0804).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sb1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1102.

In step Sb1102, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, presence or absence of small wins, presence or absence of V winning big wins, presence or absence of time reduction grants, presence or absence of reach generation, etc. there is In step Sb1102, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, the judgment result of the win/loss judgment and the judgment result of the distribution judgment related to the current game round specified from the hit flag as predetermined information, and the reach judgment judgment specified from the reach occurrence flag as predetermined information One variable time table is identified from the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 based on the results. After executing step Sb1102, the process proceeds to step Sb1103.

In step Sb1103, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step Sb1102, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sb1101 is obtained. After executing step Sb1103, the process proceeds to step Sb1104.

In step Sb1104, the variable time information acquired in step Sb1103 is set in variable time counter areas provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation stop processing>
Next, fluctuation stop processing will be described. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 229: Sb0704).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop processing. In step Sb1201, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation displaying flag in the special figure variation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The flag during special figure fluctuation display as the predetermined information is turned ON when one of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is to start the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display is started. It is turned OFF when finished. Therefore, according to the processing of step Sb1201, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display.

In step Sb1201, when it determines with a flag during a special figure fluctuation display being ON (Sb1201:YES), it progresses to step Sb1202.

In step Sb1202, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sb1202, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 233). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

In step Sb1202, when it is determined that the variation time has passed (Sb1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1203, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b corresponding to the current game round A process for ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section is performed. After executing step Sb1203, the process proceeds to step Sb1204.

In step Sb1204, the during special figure variation display flag stored in the during special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sb1204, the process proceeds to step Sb1205.

In step Sb1205, the special figure stop display flag stored in the special figure stop display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special figure stop display flag as the predetermined information is turned ON when the stop display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the stop display ends. be made. After executing step Sb1205, the process proceeds to step Sb1206. Specific conditions can be met when the variable display is stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1202 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sb1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1206 without executing steps Sb1203 to Sb1205. Also, in step Sb1201, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation display flag is not ON (Sb1201: NO), without executing steps Sb1202 to Sb1205, the process proceeds to step Sb1206.

In step Sb1206, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop display flag stored in the special figure stop display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. According to the processing of step Sb1206, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is being stopped and displayed.

In step Sb1206, when it is determined that the special figure stop display flag is ON (Sb1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1207.

In step Sb1207, it is determined whether or not the fixed time (also referred to as stop display time) of the stop display of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, in step Sb1207, it is determined whether or not the value of fixed time information in which a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) is set as an initial value has become "0". The value of the fixed time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sb1207, when it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed (Sb1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1208, and is stored in the special figure stop display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 Turn OFF the special figure stop display flag. After executing step Sb1208, the process proceeds to step Sb1209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1207 that the stop display time has not elapsed (Sb1207: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sb1208 to Sb1217. Also, in step Sb1206, when it is determined that the flag during special figure stop display is not ON (Sb1206: NO), without executing steps Sb1207 to Sb1217, this fluctuation time ending process is terminated.

In step Sb1209, the process for ceiling time saving required for the operation|movement of a ceiling time saving function is performed. The details of the ceiling time saving process will be described later. After executing step Sb1209, the process proceeds to step Sb1210.

In step Sb1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a small winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 1R small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sb1210, if the 1R small hit flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a small hit (Sb1210: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1211.

In step Sb1211, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

At step Sb1211, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sb1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1202 to determine whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. The number-of-games counter PNC is a flag in which a value is set in the number-of-games counter PNC when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the high-frequency support mode. is. The number-of-games counter PNC is stored in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64.

In step Sb1212, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sb1212: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1213, and the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is decremented by one. After executing step Sb1213, the process proceeds to step Sb1214. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1212 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sb1215: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1214 without executing step Sb1213.

If it is determined in step Sb1214 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sb12014: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1215 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sb1215, the variable time end processing is terminated.

At step Sb1214, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Sb1214: YES), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing step Sb1215. If it is determined in step Sb1211 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sb1211: NO), this variable time ending process is terminated without executing steps Sb1212 to Sb1215.

On the other hand, in step Sb1210, the 1R small hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a small hit (Sb1210: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1216. , the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sb1216, the process proceeds to step Sb1217.

In step Sb1217, a V target profit/loss determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is more advantageous for the player to win the V winning jackpot by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 59. Details of the V target profit/loss determination process will be described later. After step Sb1217 is executed, this variable time ending process ends.

<Ceiling time saving treatment>
Next, the ceiling time saving process will be described. The ceiling time saving process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 234: Sb1209).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing processing for reducing ceiling working hours. In step Sb1301, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sb1301 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sb1301: NO), the process advances to step Sb1302 to determine whether or not the counter update end flag is ON. The counter update end flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the updating of the ceiling number counter is finished, and is stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG.

If it is determined in step Sb1302 that the counter update end flag is not ON (Sb1302: NO), the process advances to step Sb1303 to decrement the value of the ceiling number counter TNC by one. The ceiling number counter TNC is a flag whose value is set when the initialization condition is established, and which is decremented by 1 each time a game round is executed while the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. When the initialization condition is satisfied corresponds to when the pachinko machine is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) or when the V winning jackpot game ends. The ceiling number counter TNC is stored in the various counter area 64f of the RAM64. After executing step Sb1303, the process proceeds to step Sb1304.

In step Sb1304, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter TNC exceeds zero. If it is determined in step Sb1304 that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is 0 or less (Sb1304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1305.

In step Sb1305, the ceiling condition satisfaction flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The ceiling condition satisfaction flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the number of times the game is executed in the normal state after the initialization condition is satisfied has reached a specified number of times. After that, the process advances to step Sb1306 to turn on the counter update end flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 . The counter update end flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the update of the number-of-ceilings counter has been completed. Each of the ceiling condition satisfaction flag and the counter update end flag is turned OFF when the above-described initialization condition is satisfied, and turned ON when the value of the ceiling number counter reaches zero. After executing step Sb1306, the process proceeds to step Sb1307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1304 that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC exceeds 0 (Sb1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1307 without executing steps Sb1305 and Sb1306.

In step Sb1307, it is determined whether or not the ceiling condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb1307 that the ceiling condition satisfaction flag is ON (Sb1307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1308.

In step Sb1308, the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1309, and 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PC. The value of 100 is the number of games in the high support state provided by the ceiling time saving function. After executing step Sb1309, the process proceeds to step Sb1310.

In step Sb1310, a ceiling reaching command is set. The ceiling reaching command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the number of executions of game rounds in the normal state has reached a prescribed number of times, which is the ceiling. The ceiling reaching command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 228 : step Sb0603) of the normal process, which will be described later. After executing step Sb1310, the ceiling time saving process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1307 that the ceiling condition establishment flag is not ON (step Sb1307: NO), the ceiling time saving process is terminated without executing steps Sb1308 to Sb1310.

Also, in step Sb1301, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sb1301: YES), this ceiling time saving process is terminated without executing steps Sb1302 to Sb1310.

In step Sb1302, when it is determined that the counter update end flag is ON (Sb1302: YES), the ceiling time saving process is ended without executing steps Sb1303 to Sb1310.

<V target profit and loss determination processing>
Next, the V target profit/loss determination process will be described. The V target profit/loss determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 234: Sb1217).

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing V target profit/loss determination processing. At step Sb1401, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sb1401 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sb1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1402. In step Sb1402, it is determined whether or not the counter update end flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter update end flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sb1402 that the counter update end flag is not ON (Sb1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1403.

In step Sb1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the difference obtained by subtracting the break-even number from 1000 or not. Since the number of breakeven times is 900 in this embodiment, the difference is 100. In step Sb1403, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is equal to or greater than the difference obtained by subtracting the break-even number from 1000 (Sb1403: NO), the process advances to step Sb1404 to issue the first notification command. set. The first notification command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to display a V aim notification effect. After step Sb1404 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1403 that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the difference obtained by subtracting the break-even number from 1000, ie, 100 (Sb1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1405, where the second notification command is issued. set. The second notification command is a command different from the first notification command, and is a command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to display a V aim non-recommended notification effect. After step Sb1405 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process is ended.

In step Sb1402, if it is determined that the counter update end flag is ON (Sb1402: YES), this V-target profit/loss determination process ends.

In step Sb1401, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sb1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1406. In step Sb1406, a first notification command is set. The processing of step Sb1406 is the same as the processing of step Sb1404. After step Sb1406 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process is ended.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process of step Sb1406 is the same as the process of step Sb1404, but instead, in step Sb1406, a third notification command different from the first notification command is set. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 228: Sb0607).

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sb1501, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to both the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big win.

If it is determined in step Sb1501 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sb1501: NO), the process advances to step Sb1502 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening opening/closing process period, which is the period during which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, starts. , is a flag that is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b ends.

If it is determined in step Sb1502 that the opening/closing period flag is not ON (Sb1502: NO), the process advances to step Sb1503 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sb1503 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sb1503: NO), the process advances to step Sb1504 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb1504 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sb1504: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the opening/closing execution mode after step Sb1508, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1504 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sb1504: NO), or if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sb1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1505. , and determine whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step Sb1505, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sb1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1506 to turn ON the open/close execution mode flag, and then to step Sb1507 to turn the execution trigger determination flag ON. do. The execution trigger judgment flag is a flag for judging whether or not the execution trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is due to the V winning jackpot winning. After executing step Sb1507, the process proceeds to a group of processes for starting the opening/closing execution mode from step Sb1508, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sb1505, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sb1505: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, not only when a small win is won in the winning lottery (when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON), but also when a game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and a V winning big win is won. Also in this case (when the V winning flag is turned ON), the opening/closing execution mode is started. This game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step Sb1508, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening and closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 57b provided in the small winning variable winning device 57 in the round game or the opening and closing door 36b provided in the variable winning device 36. In this embodiment, the opening and closing door A condition for shifting the doors 57b and 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "open condition") and a condition for shifting the doors 57b and 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed condition"). and is a recorded program.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b shift from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning openings 57a and 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b shift from the open state to the closed state.

The opening/closing scenario is pre-stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63. FIG. The opening/closing scenario setting process in step Sb1508 is performed by selecting an opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h based on a flag (win flag) corresponding to the type of win and an execution trigger determination flag. After executing step Sb1508, the process proceeds to step Sb1509.

In step Sb1509, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the opening period timer counter area that determines the opening time. The opening period timer counter area is provided in various counter areas 64 f of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sb1509, the process proceeds to step Sb1510.

In step Sb1510, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sb0603 in the normal process (FIG. 228). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sb1510, the process advances to step Sb1511 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sb1503 that the opening period flag is ON (Sb1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1512.

In step Sb1512, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening period timer counter area is "0". If it is determined in step Sb1512 that the opening period has ended (Sb1512: YES), the process advances to step Sb1513 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1514.

In step Sb1514, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sb1514, the process proceeds to step Sb1515.

In step Sb1515, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sb1516, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1516, the game state transition processing is terminated.

At step Sb1502, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sb1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1517 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sb1517, the process proceeds to step Sb1518.

In step Sb1518, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b are opened is "0". judge. In step Sb1518, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sb1518: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1519. On the other hand, in step Sb1518, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sb1518: NO), this game state transition process ends.

In step Sb1519, the open/close process period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sb1520.

In step Sb1520, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sb1520, the process proceeds to step Sb1521.

In step Sb1521, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the ending period timer counter area that determines the ending time. The ending period timer counter area is provided in various counter areas 64 f of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sb1521, the process proceeds to step Sb1522.

In step Sb1522, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0603 in the normal process (FIG. 228). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sb1522, the process proceeds to step Sb1523.

In step Sb1523, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sb1501 that the ending period flag is ON (Sb1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1524.

In step Sb1524, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sb1521), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending period timer counter area set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sb1524 that the value of the ending period timer counter area set as the ending time is "0" (Sb1524: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1525.

In step Sb1525, the ending period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1526 to determine whether or not the execution trigger determination flag is ON.

In step Sb1526, when it is determined that the execution trigger determination flag is not ON (Sb1526: NO), since the trigger for execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the V winning jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step Sb1530.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1526 that the execution trigger determination flag is ON (Sb1526: YES), the trigger for execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the V winning jackpot win, so step Sb1527. to execute transition processing at the end of the V prize jackpot game. The transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game is a processing for setting various modes of game rounds after the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends. The details of the transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game will be described later. After executing step Sb1527, the process proceeds to step Sb1528.

At step Sb1528, the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sb1528, the process advances to step Sb1529 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. After executing step Sb1529, the process proceeds to step Sb1530.

In step Sb1530, an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sb0603) in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 sets to end the ending effect based on the reception of the opening/closing execution mode end command. After executing step Sb1530, the process advances to step Sb1631 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the special electric accessary product control process is terminated.

<Grand Prize Opening/Closing Process>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 237: Sb1517).

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sb1601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing door for small winning) 57b provided in the small winning variable winning device 57 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the first special electric accessory drive section 57c. If it is determined in step Sb1601 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sb1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1602.

In step Sb1602, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 57b for small wins have been established. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 57b for the small win. In step Sb1602, when it determines with opening conditions of the opening-and-closing door 57b for small hits being satisfied (Sb1602:YES), it progresses to step Sb1603.

In step Sb1603, the open/close door 57b for small wins is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1604.

In step Sb1604, a command for opening the first opening/closing door is set. The first opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 57b for a small hit has been opened. The first opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1604, the process proceeds to step Sb1608.

In step Sb1602, when it is determined that the opening condition of the open/close door 57b for small winning is not satisfied (Sb1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1608 without executing steps Sb1603 and Sb1604.

In step Sb1601, when it is determined that the open/close door 57b for small hits is open (Sb1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1605.

In step Sb1605, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the open/close door 57b for small wins is established. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 57b for the small win. In step Sb1605, when it determines with closing conditions of the opening-and-closing door 57b for small hits being satisfied (Sb1605:YES), it progresses to step Sb1606.

In step Sb1606, the open/close door 57b for small wins is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1607.

In step Sb1607, a first open/close door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 57b for a small hit has closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1607, the process proceeds to step Sb1608.

In step Sb1605, when it determines with closing conditions of the opening-and-closing door 57b for small hits not being satisfied (Sb1605:NO), it progresses to step Sb1608, without performing step Sb1606 and step Sb1607.

In step Sb1608, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing door for big win) 36b provided in the variable winning device 36 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the second special electric accessory drive section 36c. In step Sb1608, when it determines with the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits not being open (Sb1608:NO), it progresses to step Sb1609.

In step Sb1609, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the open/close door 36b for the big win is established. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b for the big win. In step Sb1602, when it determines with the opening conditions of the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits being satisfied (Sb1609:YES), it progresses to step Sb1610.

In step Sb1610, the opening/closing door 36b for big wins is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1611.

In step Sb1611, a second opening/closing door open command is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b for the jackpot has been opened. The second opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1611, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sb1609, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b for the big win is not established (Sb1609: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sb1610 and Sb1611.

In step Sb1608, when it determines with the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits being opened (Sb1608:YES), it progresses to step Sb1612.

In step Sb1612, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the open/close door 36b for the big win is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b for the big win. In step Sb1612, when it determines with closing conditions of the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits being satisfied (Sb1612:YES), it progresses to step Sb1613.

In step Sb1613, the opening/closing door 36b for big wins is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1614.

In step Sb1614, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b for the jackpot has been closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 228: step Sb0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1614, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

In step Sb1612, when it is determined that the condition for closing the opening/closing door 36b for the big win is not satisfied (Sb1612: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sb1613 and Sb1614.

<Transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game>
Next, the transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game will be described. The transition process at the end of the V winning jackpot game is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 237: Sb1527).

FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game. In step Sb1701, 1000 is set in the number-of-tops counter TNC stored in the counter area 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. A value of 1000 corresponds to the number of times the ceiling is reached. As a result, the ceiling reaching number is set in the ceiling number counter TNC. After executing step Sb1701, the process proceeds to step Sb1702.

In step Sb1702, the ceiling condition fulfillment flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step Sb1703, where the counter update end flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1704.

At step Sb1704, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sb1704, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is not ON (Sb1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1705.

In step Sb1705, the hit flags (1R small hit flag, 4R big hit flag, and 15R big hit flag) stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step Sb1706 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. As a result, the game state is shifted to the high support state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1707, and 1 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC. As a result, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is set to one. After executing step Sb1707, the process advances to step Sb1711.

In step Sb1704, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sb1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1708.

In step Sb1708, the hit flags (1R small hit flag, 4R big hit flag, and 15R big hit flag) stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sb1709 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. As a result, the game state is shifted to the high support state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1710, and 1 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC. As a result, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is set to seven. After executing step Sb1710, the process proceeds to step Sb1711.

In step Sb1711, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the V winning jackpot game is ended.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 228: Sb0608).

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sb1801, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sb1801 that the supported flag is not ON (Sb1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1802.

In step Sb1802, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step Sb1802 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sb1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1803.

In step Sb1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sb1803 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb1803: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb1803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1804.

In step Sb1804, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step Sb1804 that it is time to end the variable display (Sb1804: YES), the process advances to step Sb1805 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1804 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sb1804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1806.

In step Sb1806, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step Sb1806, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sb1806: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1806 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Sb1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1807.

In step Sb1807, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is on, and then the process advances to step Sb1808 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is on. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sb1807 (Sb1807: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sb1808 (Sb1808: YES), the process advances to step Sb1809 to perform the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1810.

In step Sb1810, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sb1809 is support winning. In step Sb1810, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sb1810: YES), proceed to step Sb1811, turn on the support winning flag, and provide in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sb1810, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sb1810: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the process of step Sb1811.

If it is determined in step Sb1807 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sb1807: YES), or if it is determined in step Sb1808 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sb1808: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1812, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1813.

In step Sb1813, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step Sb1812 is support winning. In step Sb1813, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sb1813: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sb1813, if it is determined that the support is won (Sb1813: YES), the process advances to step Sb1814 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step Sb1802 that the support win flag is ON (Sb1802: YES), the process advances to step Sb1815 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sb1815, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb1815: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1815 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb1815: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1816.

In step Sb1816, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sb1817 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sb1801, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (Sb1801: YES), the process advances to step Sb1818 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 240: Sb1818).

FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sb1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1902.

In step Sb1902, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sb1902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb1902: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, when the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is ended.

In step Sb1902, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb1902: YES), the process advances to step Sb1903 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sb1903, the process proceeds to step Sb1904.

In step Sb1904, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sb1905 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sb1905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sb1905: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sb1905: YES), the process advances to step Sb1906 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sb1901 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sb1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1907 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sb1907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb1907: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1907 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sb1907: YES), the process advances to step Sb1908 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sb1909.

In step Sb1909, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sb1909: NO), the process advances to step Sb1910 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sb1910 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sb1910: YES), the process advances to step Sb1911 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1909 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sb1909: YES), or if it is determined in step Sb1910 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (Sb1910: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1912. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<5-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb2001, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sb2001, the process proceeds to step Sb2002.

In step Sb2002, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command processing, processing corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sb2001 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sb2002, the process proceeds to step Sb2003.

In step Sb2003, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb2003, the process proceeds to step Sb2004.

In step Sb2004, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sb2004, the process proceeds to step Sb2005.

In step Sb2005, a notification effect process is executed. The notification effect process is a process for realizing various notification effects. As one of the notification effects, the V aim notification effect and the V aim non-recommended notification effect described in detail in the "Game method notification effect" column included in the "Outline of processing by game machine" are realized. Specifically, in the notification effect processing, when the first notification command is received from the main MPU 62, the V aim notification effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the second notification command is received from the main MPU 62. In this case, a process of displaying a non-recommended notification effect for V aim on the symbol display device 41 is performed. In addition, as one of the notification effects, the ceiling reaching notification effect described in detail in the column of “configuration of ceiling time saving function” included in the column of “outline of processing by game machine” is realized. Specifically, in the notification effect processing, when a ceiling reaching command is received from the main MPU 62, a process of displaying a ceiling reaching notification effect on the pattern display device 41 is performed. After executing step Sb2005, the process proceeds to step Sb2006.

In step Sb2006, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a background moving image determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a process of displaying a background moving image indicating that the high-frequency support mode is continuing or a background moving image indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended is performed. After executing step Sb2006, the process proceeds to step Sb2007.

In step Sb2007, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. After executing step Sb2007, the process proceeds to step Sb2008.

In step Sb2008, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sb2008, the process proceeds to step Sb2009.

In step Sb2009, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sb2009, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 242: Sb2002).

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sb2101, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sb2101 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2102.

In step Sb2102, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. In step Sb2102, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sb2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2103, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sb2103, the process proceeds to step Sb2105.

In step Sb2102, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sb2102: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sb2104 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sb2104, the process proceeds to step Sb2105.

The reason why steps Sb2103 and Sb2104 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sb2105, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to. After executing step Sb2105, the process proceeds to step Sb2106.

If it is determined in step Sb2101 that no hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2106 without executing steps Sb2102 to Sb2105.

In step Sb2106, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sb2103, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sb2104, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (lighted LED lamp colors and combinations). After executing step Sb2106, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 242: Sb2003).

FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing game round effect setting processing. In step Sb2201, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sb2201, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sb2201: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2201 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sb2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2202.

In step Sb2202, the command for variation and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a small hit, the presence or absence of a short time grant, the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot, Grasp the presence or absence of reach and information on fluctuation time. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . Then, it progresses to step Sb2203.

In step Sb2203, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (the contents of the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production and the execution timing) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb2203, the process proceeds to step Sb2204.

In step Sb2204, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the distribution determination for the current game round is a 4R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the stop result is that the same pattern combination is established on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 2682). The information corresponding to is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game round is a 4R jackpot, the combination of the same symbols other than 7, that is, 111, 222, 333, 444, 555, 666, or 888 can be selected. If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a 15R jackpot, a combination of "7" symbols, that is, 777 can be selected. This is just an example. For example, if the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a 4R jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the winning in the current game round is selected. Other combinations of the same symbols may be used, such as a configuration in which the same combination of even-numbered symbols can be selected when the result of the lottery is a 15R jackpot. Furthermore, instead of the combination of identical symbols, a combination of symbols according to other specific rules (for example, serial numbers) may be used.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of a loss, the presence or absence of the reach generation is determined from the contents of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not materialize on the effective line L1 and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols occurs on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and a stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sb2205, a process for setting the variation pattern of the game round of this time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sb2204 is performed. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb2206.

At step Sb2206, information on the effect pattern set at step Sb2203, the stop pattern set at step Sb2204, and the variation pattern set at step Sb2205 in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Sb2207 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sb2207, the process proceeds to step Sb2208.

In step Sb2208, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 or the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 . The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sb2208, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 244: Sb2203).

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sb2301, the random number RN for effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light RAM 94. FIG. Then, it progresses to step Sb2302.

In step Sb2302, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, there are various types according to the presence or absence of a small hit, the presence or absence of a time saving grant, the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. A production pattern table is stored. In step Sb2302, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the presence or absence of a small hit, the presence or absence of a time saving grant, grasped in step Sb2202 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 244), the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small hit in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot, reach One effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 based on the presence or absence of occurrence. After executing step Sb2302, the process proceeds to step Sb2303.

In step Sb2303, the effect pattern table specified in Sb2302 is referred to, and the variation time grasped in step Sb2202 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 2449) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained in step Sb2301 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sb2303, the process proceeds to step Sb2304.

At step Sb2304, the effect pattern acquired at step Sb2303 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Sb2304, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a small win and the distribution result by the distribution table is a 15R jackpot, the symbol As the content of the stop symbol performance designated by the stop symbol designation command when performing the variable performance, the content of continuously displaying the stop symbol 777 for a certain period of time is set, and the content is set such that the 4R jackpot is once distributed. A combination of the same symbols other than 7 is displayed in the first consecutive predetermined number of frames (for example, 100 frames for 2 seconds in terms of image display), and then the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 resume variable display. After that, there is a case where the content is changed (promoted) to 777, which is a stop symbol, and 777 is continuously displayed for a fixed time. The pattern for the former stop symbol and the pattern for the latter stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as promotion pattern) are determined in step Sb2204 in the game round effect setting process (FIG. 244) in the same way as the effect pattern setting process in FIG. , are distributed by lottery using random numbers.

When the promotion pattern is designated by the stop design designation command, as the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern designation command, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start variable display, and at least the last frame is stopped. The content of the combination of the same symbols other than 7, which is the same as the first continuous predetermined number of frames of the symbols, is set. That is, the variation display pattern is the same as the variation display pattern set when winning the 4R jackpot. Therefore, when notifying the player that he or she has won the 15R jackpot by the promotion performance, the variation display pattern is executed when the 15R jackpot is won, when the 4R jackpot is won, and when the 4R jackpot is won. to change display. Then, as the contents of the stop display performed after that, when the 4R jackpot is won, the stop patterns (combination of the same patterns other than 7) to be executed when the 4R jackpot is won are continuously displayed, and the 15R jackpot is displayed. In the case of winning, the variable display is resumed from the stop symbol (combination of the same symbols other than 7) which is executed when winning the 4R jackpot, and then the stop symbol (777) which is executed when winning the 15R jackpot. ) to switch the displayed pattern. In other words, when the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win and the allocation result by the allocation table is a 15R big win, the drawing list for each one frame for the stop symbols is drawn to the end. Until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period, the variation display is performed in the variation display pattern for the 4R jackpot, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the content is switched to the stop display for the 15R jackpot.

According to this configuration, in the pattern variation performance performed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery, the performance is displayed once as if the 4R jackpot was won, and then it changes again to change to the 15R jackpot ( This is a performance display as if the player had been promoted, and it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment and a great feeling of joy afterwards. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 244: Sb2208).

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sb2401, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. In step Sb2401, if it is determined that the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sb2401: YES), proceed to step Sb2402, Information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sb2404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2401 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sb2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2403. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Sb2404.

In step Sb2404, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

The structure of the symbol variation effect for promotion is to effect the promotion from the 4R jackpot to the 15R jackpot, but this structure may be applied to a pachinko machine of the type having a probability variable state. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of the type having this variable probability state, as a symbol variation performance in the case of winning a variable probability big win as a predetermined winning, the performance is displayed as if the normal jackpot pattern was won, and then the variation is again performed. (That is, a re-lottery display) is configured to change (promote) to a probability variable jackpot symbol. That is, when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning and the distribution table distributes the probability variable jackpot, the pointer reaches the last position in the display data table for the stop symbol, and the stop display of the jackpot winning ends. Until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period, variable display is performed so that normal jackpot patterns are displayed as a first display mode, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the pattern display is a probability variable jackpot as a second display mode. It is configured to switch to a pattern. Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the symbols being re-lottery displayed are displayed in the third display mode. In addition, the display time of the probability variable jackpot pattern during the promotion effect is longer than the display time of the normal jackpot pattern. The stop symbol display data table is determined by specifying one of a plurality of candidates having different fluctuation times. When the stopped and confirmed pattern is a normal jackpot pattern, the game state after the end of the round game is maintained in the low-probability low support state (or shifts to the low-probability high support state), whereas the game is stopped. When the determined pattern is a probability variable jackpot pattern, the game state after the end of the round game shifts to a high probability and high support state.

Normal jackpot symbols are, for example, combinations of identical symbols other than 7, ie, 111, 222, 333, 444, 555, 666, or 888, and variable jackpot symbols are, for example, combinations of 7 identical symbols, namely 777. Instead of this, the normal jackpot pattern is a combination of the same patterns other than 3 and 7, for example, 111, 222, 444, 555, 666, or 888, and the probability variable jackpot pattern is, for example, 3 or 7 of the same pattern. , ie 333 or 777. In this case, when the distribution result by the distribution table is a 5R jackpot, the probability variable jackpot pattern is 333, and when the distribution result by the distribution table is a 15R jackpot, the probability variable jackpot pattern is 777. A winning lottery result may be notified with a profit corresponding to the display mode of the symbol. In addition, each color tone of the normal jackpot pattern and the variable probability jackpot pattern may be the same or may be different. Specifically, the variable probability jackpot pattern may be red or gold, and the normal jackpot pattern may be in a color tone other than red and gold, such as blue.

Therefore, according to this modified configuration, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole 36a after seeing the variable display stop at the normal jackpot symbol. On the other hand, seeing that the variable display is switched to the probability variable jackpot pattern, after the stop display of the probability variable jackpot winning is completed, the game shifts to an opening and closing execution mode in which the big winning opening 36a opens and closes, and then to a high probability state. You will be able to move on and have greater expectations. Therefore, according to this configuration, when a variable probability jackpot is won, by appropriately switching the display mode of the variable display, the player's expectation can be heightened and the interest in the game can be further improved.

The configuration of displaying the re-lottery is not limited to the case of performing the promotion performance, for example, when the result of the winning lottery is a big win and the normal big win is sorted by the sorting table, the normal big win pattern is once displayed. After that, a re-lottery display may be performed, and then the normal jackpot pattern may be determined as it is.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sb2501, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffers 107a and 107b of the video RAM 107. FIG. Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. Then, it progresses to step Sb2502.

In step Sb2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

In the modified configuration, during the re-change when changing (promotion) from the normal jackpot pattern to the probability variable jackpot pattern, that is, during the re-lottery display as if a re-lottery is being performed, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 , left, middle and right three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 scroll from top to bottom or from bottom to top. During this re-lottery display, the symbols rotate through various patterns such as 667, 677, for example. During the re-lottery display, the normal jackpot symbols and the variable probability jackpot symbols may be repeatedly displayed. Specifically, for example, 666 and 777 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . Furthermore, during the re-lottery display, the normal jackpot symbols and the probability variable jackpot symbols may be displayed at the same time. Specifically, for example, 666 and 777 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 at the same time. According to these configurations, it is possible to make the player feel excited as to whether the normal jackpot pattern or the variable probability jackpot pattern is fixed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In the above-described modified configuration, after the re-lottery display is performed and the pattern is changed to the normal jackpot pattern, the pattern is not changed to the normal jackpot pattern until at least the jackpot is won and prize balls are generated. For this reason, according to the above-mentioned modified structure, once the variable probability big winning pattern is determined, the player will not be disappointed by being demoted to the normal big winning pattern, and the reliability of the variable probability big winning pattern can be improved. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Further, during the re-lottery display, a specific notification may be made to prompt the player to operate the effect operation button 24 . That is, during the re-lottery display, for example, a character image in which characters such as "press the push button" is displayed as a specific notification, and at the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the normal jackpot or the probability variable jackpot is confirmed. may be configured. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for promotion of the probability variable jackpot symbol.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sb2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

249 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the V interrupt processing is processing that is executed upon detection of a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 as a specific condition. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions. Each time the V interrupt process is executed, the pointer as predetermined information indicating the execution position of the display data table stored in the display data table buffer in the work RAM 104 is incremented by 1 and updated. Specifies the image to be displayed on the .

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of an image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffers 107a and 107b in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb2701, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 248) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sb2701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the state of the effects such as the advance notice effect set by the sound emission control device 90, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, etc. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that the effect image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In step Sb2702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sb2701), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . Then, it progresses to step Sb2703.

In step Sb2703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sb2702), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. The determined types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character are stored in the work RAM 104 in the form of a drawing list. Then, it progresses to step Sb2704.

In step Sb2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the drawing list generated by task processing (Sb2703) is transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes drawing processing for one frame of image based on the drawing list, and causes the pattern display device 41 to display one frame of image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing. Therefore, the image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 together with the drive signal. After that, the process advances to step Sb2705, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. For example, taking a game round related to winning a big hit as an example, in the game round as a predetermined game state, the predetermined information is from the initial state to the update end state, that is, the display for the stop symbol that is the combination of the same symbols This V interrupt processing is executed from the time the pointer is set to the initial position in the data table until it reaches the end. As a result, the drawing from the start of the variable display relating to the winning of the jackpot to the end of the fixed time of the stop display is completed. At a predetermined timing after the drawing is completed, an opening/closing execution mode is executed as a predetermined advantageous state, and prize balls are given to the player.

An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<5-7>> Functions and effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined specific condition in the variable display is satisfied by the update process, the predetermined information is updated, and the update of the predetermined information is completed in the predetermined game state. A predetermined advantageous state is generated at a predetermined timing after the state is established. Further, a predetermined notification is given in the first display mode or in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Further, a predetermined determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and if the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a profit is given based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Give value when conditions are met. Further, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, a predetermined notification is made in the first display mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update of the predetermined information is completed. At a later specific timing, the display mode is switched to the second display mode. Specifically, the ceiling number counter is updated each time a game round is executed, and the game state from the time when the initialization conditions are satisfied until the big win is won (including the case where the V prize big win is won by winning a small win in a winning lottery). In the above, time-saving provision is generated for a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing after the value of the counter for the number of ceiling times reaches a value corresponding to the number of times of reaching the ceiling. In addition, a game method for shooting a game ball at the time of winning a small hit is notified in the V aim notification performance or the V aim non-recommendation notification performance. Further, a winning lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and when the result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the game ball wins V by the player's shooting operation. When the ball enters the mouth, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot. Furthermore, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the threshold (100) corresponding to the number of breakeven times that is 100 times before the number of times the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling (1000 times) Until the predetermined timing is reached, the game method notification effect is performed with the V aim notification effect, and at the specific timing (timing of 99) after the predetermined timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of breakeven times, the game is played. The notification effect of the method is switched to the V aim non-recommended notification effect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win, the first display mode is displayed until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the update end state of the predetermined information. , and the display mode is switched to the second display mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. By establishing the profit giving condition based on the game operation of (1), the given value can be generated, and on the other hand, when the predetermined information is switched to the second display mode, the predetermined information is in an update end state, One can wait with anticipation to be able to generate a given advantageous situation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the above determination is a predetermined win, the display mode of the predetermined notification can be used to increase the expectation of the player without causing any inconvenience to the player. can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win, the threshold value corresponding to the number of breakeven times that is 100 times before the number of times the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling (1000 times) ( 100), the notification effect of the game method is performed in the V aim notification effect, and the specific timing (timing of 99) after the predetermined timing of reaching the threshold (100) corresponding to the break-even times. In , since the notification effect of the game method is switched to the V aim non-recommended notification effect, the player sees the predetermined notification in the V aim notification effect and plays the game with the right hand to win the V winning opening. By entering the game ball into 59, the game state can be shifted to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot. The value of the ceiling number counter reaches the value (0) corresponding to the ceiling reaching number (1000 times), and it is possible to wait with anticipation for the shift to the high support state for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, when the success/failure result of the winning lottery is a small winning, the expectation of the player can be heightened without giving inconvenience to the player by the display mode of the notification performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first state in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state in which the privilege is granted is the first value, and the second value in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state is higher than the first value. and a second state in which the first display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the first state, and the second display mode is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the second state . Specifically, it has a decisive battle stage H4 with a rush rush rate of about 50% and a ceiling reach stage H8 with a rush rush rate of about 100%, and the V aim notification effect can shift to the decisive battle stage H4. This is a mode suggesting that the V aim non-recommendation notification effect can shift to the ceiling reaching stage H8.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined notification is given in the second display mode, the player can guess that the rate of transition to the privilege granting state will increase, and the player is given a sense of anticipation. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the game method is notified by the V aim non-recommended notification effect, the player can guess that the rate of entering the rush state will increase, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. can.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the predetermined advantageous state can be given when the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is the second shooting mode, and the shooting operation is the first shooting mode. If it is in the mode, it is a state in which it is impossible to give a predetermined profit, and the game machine sets the firing operation for operating the firing means to the second firing mode after the predetermined information is in an update end state. means for performing a second firing mode notification effect for informing the player of the Specifically, the predetermined number of time-saving grants in the ceiling reaching stage H8 allow the ball to enter the second start port 34 and win a small hit when the shooting operation that activates the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed. When the shooting operation is left-handed, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second start hole 34, and it is impossible to win a small hit. After reaching the value (0) corresponding to the number of times, means for performing a right-handed informing effect for informing the player that the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is right-handed is provided. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can receive a predetermined benefit by playing the game in the second firing mode according to the second firing mode notification effect. Specifically, the player can win a small hit by playing a game with hitting to the right according to the hitting to the right notification effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is in the second shooting mode, the game ball can enter, and when the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the game is played. A predetermined ball entry area is provided in which the ball cannot be entered, and the profit giving condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area. Specifically, the V winning hole 59 is provided in which the game ball can enter when the game ball is hit to the right, and the game ball cannot enter when the game ball is hit to the left. It means that the game ball enters the V winning hole 59 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the player changes the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. By making the game ball enter the predetermined ball entry area by switching to the second shooting mode, it becomes possible to establish the profit giving condition. Here, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry area when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the first shooting mode, and the game ball can enter when the shooting operation is in the second shooting mode. Consider a non-enterable configuration. With this configuration, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the game ball is already shot in the first shooting mode toward the predetermined ball entry area. Since it has been done, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area with a high probability. Therefore, when the player sees the second display mode and decides that he/she wants to avoid the establishment of the profit giving condition, the game ball has already been shot in the first shooting mode, so the predetermined It was difficult to stop the game ball from entering the ball entry area. As a result, the player cannot select whether or not to establish the profit provision condition. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry area unless the shooting operation is switched from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. , in order to satisfy the profit giving condition, it is necessary to switch the shooting operation from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a predetermined win in the gaming state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode, the player changes the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. Depending on whether or not to switch to the second shooting mode, it is possible to select whether or not to establish the profit giving condition. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the normal state of left-handed, the player switches from left-handed to right-handed to make a V winning opening. By entering the game ball into 59, it becomes possible to establish the conditions for winning the V-prize jackpot. Therefore, since the game ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 59 unless the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism is switched from the left hitting to the right hitting, the player has the condition to win the V winning jackpot. In order to make this happen, it is necessary to switch from hitting left to hitting right. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a small win in the normal state of left-handed, the player can switch the shooting operation from right-handed to left-handed. It is possible to select whether or not to establish the conditions for winning the V-prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the profit provision condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period, and the game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period. In this case, the profit provision condition is not satisfied. Specifically, the condition for winning the V winning jackpot is that the game ball enters the V winning hole 59, and if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 59 within a predetermined period, the V The conditions for winning the winning jackpot are not established. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is required to make a determination as to whether or not to satisfy the profit provision condition at least within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is forced to make an early decision, and speeding up of the game can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, it is necessary for the player to determine whether or not the V prize jackpot winning is established at least within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player is forced to make an early decision, and speeding up of the game can be achieved.

As described above, according to the present gaming machine, when a predetermined win is won, by appropriately switching the display mode of the predetermined notification, the expectation of the player is heightened and the amusement of the game is further improved. It is possible to plan

<<5-8>> Modification of Fifth Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<5-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above fifth embodiment and each modification, V aim notification displayed when a small hit is won by a special figure 1 per lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 The condition for switching the effect to the V aim non-recommended notification effect is that the number of game times executed during the normal state (hereinafter referred to as the number of normal times executed) exceeds the break-even number (for example, 900 times). On the other hand, as a modified example, a predetermined period including the number of breakeven times is defined as an unknown profit/loss interval, and in the unknown profit/loss interval, a profit/loss review recommended notification effect different from the V target notification effect and the V target non-recommended notification effect is provided. is displayed, and when the number of times of normal execution exceeds the profit and loss unknown interval, the V aim non-recommendation notification effect may be displayed. That is, it is advantageous for the player to display either the V aim notification effect or the V aim non-recommended notification effect between the interval in which the V aim notification effect is displayed and the interval in which the V aim non-recommended notification effect is displayed. It is also possible to provide an unknown profit/loss interval in which it is not clear whether the

The number of break-even times is derived as a single numerical value, but in reality, it is based on the winning rate to the start port (both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34) due to nail adjustment, the remaining playable time (limitation by the player) , restrictions by the game hall), the winning rate to the big winning mouth (both the big winning mouth 36a of the variable winning device 36 and the big winning mouth 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57). can be numeric. Therefore, in this modified example, this range of possible numerical values is defined as the unknown profit/loss interval. Specifically, the notification effect of the game method displayed when the small winning is won by the special figure 1 winning lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 is the ceiling number counter. Switches as follows depending on the value of

FIG. 250 is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched according to the value of the number-of-ceilings counter in this modification. In the figure, the horizontal axis indicates the value of the ceiling number counter and the normal execution number. Here, it is assumed that the number of break-even times is, for example, 900 times (100 according to the ceiling number counter), which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached. In this modification, the range is 20 times on the side of the number of times the ceiling is reached and 20 times on the side opposite to the number of times the ceiling is reached, that is, the interval from 120 to 80 with the value of the ceiling counter. is defined as an unknown profit and loss interval, and the profit and loss examination recommendation notification effect is displayed in the unknown profit and loss interval.

Specifically, in this modified example, processing is performed as follows. The value of the ceiling number counter is between 1000 and 120 (the lower limit of the profit and loss unknown interval), that is, in the game rounds where the number of times of normal execution is from 1 time to 880 times (corresponding to the predetermined timing), the first start When a small win is won by a lottery for 1 special figure executed based on the entry of a game ball into a mouth 33, a pattern display device 41 is caused to display a V aim notification performance as a first display mode. Between 119 and 80 where the value of the ceiling number counter is below 120 (unknown profit and loss interval), that is, between 881 and 920 times when the number of times of normal execution exceeds 880 times, per special figure When a small prize is won by a lottery, a pattern display device 41 is caused to display profit and loss examination recommendation notification performance as a third display mode. The value of the ceiling number counter is between 79 and 0 below 80 (the upper limit of the profit and loss unknown interval), that is, between 921 times (corresponding to a specific timing) and 1000 times when the number of times of normal execution exceeds 920 times In the game round, when a small prize is won by lottery for one special figure, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a non-recommendation performance for V aim as a second display mode.

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing the V target profit/loss determination process for realizing the switching of the notification effect in this modification. The processing executed by the main controller 60 in this modification differs from the processing executed by the main controller 60 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment only in the V target profit/loss determination processing shown in FIG. and other processing is the same.

At step Sb2801, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sb2801 that the second symbol display flag is not ON (Sb2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2802. In step Sb2802, it is determined whether or not the counter update end flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the counter update completion flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sb2802 that the counter update end flag is not ON (Sb2802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2803.

In step Sb2803, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the difference obtained by subtracting the number of breakeven times from 1000 and 20 (that is, 1000 - number of breakeven times - 20). Since the number of breakeven times is 900, the difference is 80. If it is determined in step Sb2803 that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is the difference between 1000 minus the break-even number and 20, that is, 80 or more (Sb2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2804.

In step Sb2804, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the answer obtained by subtracting the number of break-even times from 1000 and adding 20 (that is, 1000-number of break-even times+20). Since the break-even number is 900, the above answer is 120. In step Sb2803, if the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is the result of subtracting the break-even number from 1000 and adding 20, that is, if it is determined to be 120 or more (Sb2804: NO), the process advances to step Sb2805. Set the notification command. The first notification command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to display a V aim notification effect. After step Sb2805 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2804 that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the result of subtracting the number of break-even times from 1000 and adding 20, that is, smaller than 120 (Sb2804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2806. 3 Set the notification command. It is assumed that the range of the ceiling number counter TNC for which a negative determination is made in step Sb2803 and affirmative judgment is made in step Sb2804, that is, the range in which the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is 80 or more and less than 120 corresponds to the profit and loss unknown interval. , the third notification command is set in the range. The third notification command is a command different from both the first notification command and the second notification command, and is a command for causing the sound light emission control device 90 to display a profit and loss consideration recommended notification effect. be. After step Sb2806 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process ends.

In step Sb2803, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling number counter TNC is smaller than the difference obtained by subtracting the number of breakeven times from 20 from 1000, that is, 80 (Sb2803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2807. Set command. The second notification command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to display a V aim notification effect. After step Sb2807 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process ends.

At step Sb2802, if it is determined that the counter update end flag is ON (Sb2802: YES), this V-target profit/loss determination process ends.

In step Sb2801, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (Sb2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2808. In step Sb2808, a first notification command is set. The processing of step Sb2808 is the same as the processing of step Sb2805. After step Sb2808 is executed, this V target profit/loss determination process ends.

FIG. 252 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a profit/loss review recommendation notification effect. As shown in the figure, in the profit and loss review recommendation notification production, a female character appears and the female character shouts, "I can't judge whether it's profitable or bad to aim for a V with a right-handed shot! You decide!" In this mode, the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the sound and light associated with the moving image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 .

The number of break-even times is derived as a single numerical value, but in reality, it is based on the winning rate to the start port (both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34) due to nail adjustment, the remaining playable time (limitation by the player) , restrictions by the game hall), the winning rate to the big winning mouth (both the big winning mouth 36a of the variable winning device 36 and the big winning mouth 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57). can be numeric. Furthermore, depending on the player, it is conceivable that the number of break-even times is considered in consideration of the rush rush rate of the player on the day, the rush rush rate of the gaming machine on which the game is played, and the like. In this modification, the values that these break-even times can take are obtained by experiments and simulations, and from the range that these values can take, 20 times are on the side of the number of times that the break-even times are reached, and the number of times that the ceiling is reached is 20 times. The range of 20 innings on the opposite side was defined as the unknown profit/loss interval.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the break-even times, which is one point, is used as a boundary to distribute the V-target notification effect and the V-target non-recommended notification effect, so the actual break-even times are different values. In some cases, it is advantageous for the player not to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59 in spite of the fact that the V aim notification effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Although the non-recommended notification effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41, there are cases where it is actually more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 59.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of this modified example, a profit-and-loss unknown interval that cannot be assigned to either the V-target notification effect or the V-target non-recommended notification effect is set, and the number of times of normal execution is greater than that of the profit-and-loss unknown interval. The V aim notification effect is distributed to the side where the V aim is less, and the V aim non-recommended notification effect is distributed to the side where the number of times of normal execution is greater than the profit and loss unknown section. In order to ensure that it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59 when the V winning prize is set, and when the V aim non-recommendation notification performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the V winning prize is obtained. Informing performance of the game method can be performed so that the game ball is surely advantageous to the player if the game ball is not allowed to enter the mouth 59.例文帳に追加Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modification, the reliability of the pachinko machine can be improved.

252, the player can say, ``I couldn't decide whether aiming for V with the right hand on the pachinko machine was profitable or bad. , restrictions by the game hall), your own rush rush rate of the day, and the rush rush rate of the game machine you are playing on that day. . Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to arouse the player's aggressiveness toward the game.

In other words, it can be said that this modification has the following features compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. According to this modified example, a period is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing during which the predetermined notification is given in the third display mode. Specifically, the predetermined timing at which the number of times of normal execution reaches 880, which is the upper limit of the V aim notification effect as the first display mode, and the normal time, which is the lower limit of the V aim non-recommended notification effect as the second display mode. Between the specific timing when the number of hour executions exceeds 920 times and reaches 921 times, there is provided an unknown profit/loss section in which the game method is notified by a profit/loss examination recommendation notification performance as a third display mode.

Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification in the third display mode, with the display mode representing the transition period from the first display mode to the second display mode as the third display mode. Therefore, the third display mode can make the player feel anticipation that the second display mode will appear in the future, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, the display mode representing the transition period from the V aim notification effect to the V aim non-recommended notification effect is used as the profit and loss examination recommended notification effect, and the game method can be notified in the profit and loss consideration recommended notification effect. . For this reason, the profit and loss examination recommendation notification performance can make the player feel the expectation that the V aim non-recommendation notification performance will appear in the future, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. .

The mode of profit and loss examination recommendation notification effect as the third display mode shown in FIG. 252 is an example, and other modes may be used. For example, the third display mode may be a mode in which the first display mode and the second display mode are repeated. Specifically, the V aim notification effect as the first display mode and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect as the second display mode may be repeated. According to this configuration, the third display mode can make the player feel excited as to whether the first display mode or the second display mode is to be decided. can be planned. Specifically, it is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the V aim notification effect and the V aim non-recommended notification effect is to be decided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, according to this configuration, it is not necessary to newly prepare the third effect data specific to the profit and loss examination recommendation notification effect, so that the memory capacity can be saved.

Furthermore, as another aspect of the profit-and-loss examination recommendation notification effect, the third display aspect may be a mode in which the first display aspect and the second display aspect are displayed at the same time. Specifically, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is divided into two, for example, left and right, and the V aim notification effect is displayed on one of the two divided surfaces, and the V aim non-recommended notification effect is displayed on the other. may be configured to simultaneously display the V aim notification effect as the first display mode and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect as the second display mode. According to this configuration, the third display mode can make the player feel excited as to whether the first display mode or the second display mode is to be decided. can be planned. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying the third display mode. Specifically, since the player can have a thrilling feeling as to whether the V aim notification effect or the V aim non-recommended notification effect is to be decided, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the profit/loss review recommendation notification effect.

Furthermore, as another aspect of the profit and loss consideration recommendation notification effect, the third display aspect may display a composite image composed of part of the first display aspect and part of the second display aspect. Specifically, it may be configured to display a composite image including a part of the V aim notification effect as the first display mode and a part of the V aim non-recommendation notification effect as the second display mode. Specifically, the part including the female character and the speech balloon in the image of the V aim notification effect shown in FIG. It is good also as a structure which displays the synthetic image which consists of. According to this configuration, the player can be reminded that the third display mode provides the same kind of notification as the first display mode and the second display mode. For this reason, the third display mode can make the player feel excited as to whether the first display mode or the second display mode is to be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. can be done. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying the third display mode. Specifically, the player can be reminded that the profit-and-loss consideration recommended notification effect is similar to the V-target notification effect and the V-target non-recommended notification effect. For this reason, the interest in the game can be improved by making the player feel excited as to which of the V aim notification performance and the V aim non-recommendation notification performance is decided by the profit and loss examination recommended notification performance. be able to. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the profit/loss review recommendation notification effect.

In this modification 1 and a modification in which the mode of profit and loss examination recommendation notification production is changed in modification 1, a lottery per special figure 1 is executed, and the success or failure result of the lottery per special figure 1 is a small hit. In this case, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the game round of the profit and loss unknown section, and when it is determined that it corresponds to the profit and loss unknown section, the profit and loss examination recommendation notification performance as the third display mode is executed. On the other hand, as a modification, even if the result of the winning lottery is not the predetermined winning lottery between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a predetermined notification may be made in the third display mode. good. Specifically, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, even if the success or failure result of the lottery per special figure 1 is not a small winning, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the game round of the profit and loss unknown section. Therefore, when it is determined that it corresponds to the unknown profit/loss section, the profit/loss consideration recommendation notification effect may be executed. Therefore, according to this modified configuration, even during fluctuations in the normal state, the third display mode is displayed when it falls between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. When a predetermined winning lottery results in a predetermined winning lottery, a given value is obtained by establishing a profit giving condition by performing a predetermined game operation, or a given value is obtained or a predetermined game is played. It is possible to take a long time to consider whether or not to generate a predetermined advantageous state by avoiding the satisfaction of the profit giving condition by not performing the operation. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to carefully consider the above without making a hasty decision, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, during the normal state fluctuation, when it falls under the unknown profit and loss section, the profit and loss review recommendation notification effect is always displayed, so the player can win a small prize by special figure 1 lottery. After seeing the profit and loss examination recommendation notification effect, if a small win is won, wait for the game ball to reach the ceiling without entering the game ball into the V winning opening 59, or enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59 and have a decisive battle. You can take your time and consider whether to bet on a rush entry rate of about 50% in stage H4. Therefore, according to this modified example, it is possible to carefully consider the above without making hasty decisions, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in a predetermined period provided between predetermined timings and specific timings, a specific notification is made to prompt the player to perform a specific game operation different from the shooting operation for operating the game ball shooting mechanism. may be Specifically, in the unknown profit/loss section, a specific notification may be made to prompt the player to operate the effect operation button 24 (FIG. 208). That is, in the unknown profit/loss section, as a specific notification, for example, a character image in which characters such as "press the push button" is displayed may be displayed. According to this modified configuration, when a player receives a specific notification, the player thinks that if he performs a specific game operation in accordance with the specific notification, the second display mode, which is the next display mode, will appear. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the prescribed information relating to the appearance of the second display mode will be in the update end state and that the prescribed advantageous state will occur. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the player sees a character image such as "press the push button" and presses the effect operation button 24 in accordance with a specific notification, the next display mode, V aim non-recommended notification effect, is displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that the number of times of normal execution is close to the number of times of reaching the ceiling. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 1 and modifications in which the aspect of the profit and loss examination recommendation notification effect is changed in modification 1, in the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing (profit and loss unknown interval), the predetermined notification is different It is configured to be able to execute a special performance. Specifically, in the unknown profit/loss section, for example, a special effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. Therefore, according to this modified configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether it is possible to enter a state in which the player is highly advantageous by the special effect. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, by the appearance of a predetermined character on the background screen, the player can know that the number of times the ceiling is reached is not so far, and the player has a sense of expectation that the ceiling time reduction will be given. can let For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the ceiling reaching count as the predetermined information is 1000 times, which is a constant count. On the other hand, as a modification, a plurality of candidate update counts that can be candidates for the update count required for predetermined information to reach an update end state are stored, a predetermined lottery is performed, and based on the lottery results of the predetermined lottery. Then, one candidate update count is specified from a plurality of candidate update counts, and the specified candidate update count is set as the update count. Specifically, a plurality of candidate ceiling reaching counts that can be candidates for the ceiling reaching count are stored in advance in a memory, and when the aforementioned initialization conditions are satisfied, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, A configuration may be adopted in which one candidate ceiling reaching frequency is specified from among the plurality of candidate ceiling reaching frequencies, and the specified candidate ceiling reaching frequency is set as the ceiling reaching frequency.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, since the number of times the ceiling is reached is a fixed number of times, the number of times the ceiling is reached can be determined by looking at the current number of revolutions displayed on the data counter installed at the top of the pachinko machine 10. can be predicted. On top of that, when the ceiling is reached at an early time when the number of times the ceiling is reached is not originally reached, the player can easily understand that the contents of the previous day's memory were left unchanged without the RAM clearing being performed in the hall. There was a problem of exposure. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this modification, since the number of updates is determined by a predetermined lottery, it is difficult for the player to predict the number of updates required for the predetermined information to reach an update end state. Become. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, since the number of times the ceiling is reached is determined by lottery, it is difficult for the player to predict the number of times the ceiling will be reached. It is possible to solve the problem that the player easily finds out that the was deferred.

<<5-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, one type of V aim notification effect is provided as the first display mode, but instead of this, a plurality of types of V aim notification effects may be prepared. That is, a plurality of candidate first display modes that can be the first display mode (V aim notification effect) are stored, a predetermined lottery is performed, and a plurality of candidate first display modes are selected based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the candidate first display modes is specified, and the specified candidate first display mode is set as the first display mode. Specifically, a plurality of candidate V aim notification effect data that can be the V aim notification effect are stored in advance in the memory. Each of the plurality of candidate V aim notification effect data is for recommending that the game ball be entered into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with the right hand, as in the case of the fifth embodiment. However, the image designs are different from each other. Then, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, one candidate V aim informing performance data is specified from a plurality of candidate V aim informing performance data stored in a memory, and the specified. The candidate V aim informing effect data is set as the V aim informing effect. Therefore, according to this modified example, since the predetermined notification can be given to the player in various modes as the first display mode, the first display mode which can take various modes will give the player a sense of anticipation. It can be provided, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Specifically, since the player can be given a predetermined notification in various modes as the V aim notification effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by the V aim notification effect that can take various modes. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, there is one type of non-recommendation notification effect for the V aim as the second display mode. . That is, a plurality of candidate second display modes that can be the second display mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are stored, a predetermined lottery is performed, and a plurality of candidate second display modes are displayed based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. One candidate second display mode is specified from among the modes, the specified candidate second display mode is set as the second display mode, and a predetermined advantage is obtained with the profit corresponding to the set second display mode. It may be configured to generate a state. Specifically, a plurality of candidate V aim non-recommendation notification effect data that can be the V aim non-recommendation notification effect are stored in advance in the memory. Each of the plurality of candidate V aim unrecommended annunciation effect data is for recommending not to let the game ball enter the V winning hole 59 by playing the game with left-handed hitting, as in the case of the fifth embodiment. However, the image designs are different from each other. Then, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and one candidate V aim non-recommended notification effect is specified from a plurality of candidate V aim non-recommended notification effect data stored in a memory based on the result of the predetermined lottery. , the specified candidate V aim non-recommendation notification effect is set as the V aim non-recommendation notification effect. Further, the profit corresponding to the set second display mode is used to determine the number of times of shortening of working hours in the ceiling shortening of working hours function as a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to give a predetermined notification to the player in various modes as the second display mode, and furthermore, the advantage given in the set second display mode and the predetermined advantageous state. can be correlated with the degree of For this reason, according to this feature, the player can guess the degree of advantage given in the predetermined advantageous state depending on which aspect the second display mode will be, and the player can have a sense of anticipation. can be granted. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, the player can be given a predetermined notification in various modes as a non-recommended notification effect for the V aim, and in addition, the set V-th target non-recommended notification effect and the time saving in the ceiling time saving function can be given. It is possible to have a correlation with the number of times. For this reason, according to this feature, the player can guess the number of time reductions given in the ceiling time reduction function depending on which mode the V aim non-recommendation notification effect will be, giving the player a sense of expectation. can do. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment and each modified example, no particular reference was made to each color tone for the V aim notification effect as the first display mode and the V aim non-recommended notification effect as the second display mode. It is configured to display an image with color tones. On the other hand, as a modification, the second display mode may be a mode in which an image with a color tone of red or gold is displayed, and the first display mode may be a mode in which an image with a color tone other than red and gold is displayed. . Specifically, the V aim notification effect may be configured to display an image in blue color tone, and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect may be configured to display an image in red color tone. Therefore, according to this modified example, when a predetermined notification is given in the second display mode, the player can have an image that the red color is hot, and the player can have a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the notification effect of the game method is performed in the V aim non-recommended notification effect, it is possible to give the player an image of red to hot, and to give the player a further sense of expectation. can. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. As another modification, the V aim notification effect may be configured to display an image in blue color tone, and the V aim non-recommendation notification effect may be configured to display an image in gold color tone. Therefore, according to this modified example, when a predetermined notification is given in the second display mode, the player can have an image that gold is profitable, and the player can have a sense of anticipation. can be done. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the notification effect of the game method is performed in the V-target non-recommended notification effect, the player can have an image that it is profitable from gold, and the player can have a further sense of expectation. can be done. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. In the above two modifications, the V aim notification effect is configured to display an image with a blue color tone, but it is not necessary to limit the image to a blue color tone. It may be an image with a color tone of

<<5-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the display time for displaying the V aim notification effect as the first display mode and the display time for displaying the V aim non-recommended notification effect as the second display mode are particularly mentioned. However, both display times were configured to be the same length. On the other hand, as a modification, the display time for displaying the second display mode may be longer than the display time for displaying the first display mode. Specifically, the display time for displaying the V aim non-recommendation notification effect may be longer than the display time for displaying the V aim notification effect. Therefore, according to this modification, when the predetermined notification is made in the second display mode, the predetermined notification can be given to the player more strongly than when the predetermined notification is made in the first display mode. For this reason, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation, and to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, when the notification performance of the game method is performed in the V aim non-recommended notification performance, the player is notified of the game method more strongly than when the notification performance of the game method is performed in the V aim notification performance. can be done. For this reason, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation, and to further improve the interest in the game.

<<5-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It becomes possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each modification, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<5-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<5-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiment and each of the modifications described above may be implemented by hardware, or part of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software. good too.

<<5-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic bA group>
The feature bA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bA1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. A gaming machine comprising a switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature bA2]
The gaming machine according to feature bA1,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) in which the predetermined notification is performed in a third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect in modification 1). game machine.

According to this feature, since a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), the first notification mode to the first By setting the notification mode representing the transition period to the second notification mode as the third notification mode, it is possible to perform the predetermined notification in the third notification mode. Therefore, the third notification mode can make the player feel anticipation that the second notification mode will appear in the future, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature bA3]
A gaming machine according to feature bA1 or feature bA2,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A game machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode for displaying the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

According to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect) includes a mode of displaying a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect). It is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the two notification modes will be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA3,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode in which the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are repeated.

According to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended Since the notification effect includes a mode in which the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are repeated, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are arranged according to the third notification mode. It is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the notification mode and the notification mode will be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature bA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA3,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode in which the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are displayed simultaneously.

According to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown section) during which the predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode is the first Since the notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are included at the same time, the third notification mode determines whether the first notification mode or the second notification mode is selected. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the notification in the third notification mode.

[Feature bA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA5,
When the specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means and the predetermined notification is performed in the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the predetermined game condition is not satisfied. a new variable display can be executed by the display means without generating the specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning big win) during the second period.

According to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (minor winning) and the predetermined notification is performed in the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the predetermined game condition is not established. In this case, a new variable display can be executed by the display means without generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot). It is possible to avoid the satisfaction of the game condition of , thereby making it possible to execute a new variable display without generating a specific profit. Therefore, since the update condition is established and the specific information can be updated, the specific information is in a predetermined update state, and a predetermined profit state can be generated. Therefore, the player can decide whether to take a specific profit or a predetermined profit state by performing a predetermined game operation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA6,
In the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing (the profit and loss unknown interval in the first modification), a special effect different from the predetermined notification (special effect in the decisive battle stage H4, special effect in the rush stage H7) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for playing.

According to this feature, during the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing (unknown profit/loss interval), a special effect different from the predetermined notification (special effect in the decisive battle stage H4, special effect in the rush stage H7) can be executed. Since the means is provided, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that the player will enter into a highly advantageous state by this special effect. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA7,
After the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the notification mode is not switched to the first notification mode at least until the profit generating means generates the specific profit. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the notification mode is not switched to the first notification mode until the profit generating means generates a specific profit. It is possible to improve the reliability of the two notification modes. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA8,
means for storing a plurality of candidate update counts (candidate ceiling reaching counts in modification 2) that can be candidates for the update count required for the specific information to reach the predetermined update state;
means for performing a predetermined lottery, specifying one candidate update count from among the plurality of candidate update counts based on the lottery results of the predetermined lottery, and setting the specified candidate update count as the update count; ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, means for storing a plurality of candidate update counts that can be candidates for the number of update counts required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state; and specifying one candidate update count from among a plurality of candidate update counts, and setting the specified candidate update count as the update count. It becomes difficult for the player to predict the number of updates required for the specific information to reach a predetermined update state. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA9,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided in which the predetermined notification is performed in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect),
The third notification mode is a composite image (recommended profit-and-loss review notification effect) composed of a part of the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and a part of the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect). A gaming machine characterized by including a mode for displaying

According to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown interval) during which predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode, and the third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect) is provided in the first The third notification mode is the first notification mode because it includes a mode of displaying a composite image composed of a part of the notification mode (V aim notification effect) and a part of the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect). , the player can be reminded that the same kind of notification as in the second notification mode is performed. For this reason, the third notification mode can make the player feel excited as to which of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is to be decided, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved. can be done. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the notification in the third notification mode.

[Feature bA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA10,
means for storing a plurality of candidate first notification modes that can be the first notification mode (V aim notification effect in modification 3);
A predetermined lottery (predetermined lottery in modification 3) is performed, one candidate first notification mode is specified from among the plurality of candidate first notification modes based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, and the specified candidate first notification mode is specified. means for setting a candidate first notification mode as the first notification mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, means for storing a plurality of candidate first notification modes that can be the first notification mode (V aim notification effect); and means for specifying one candidate first notification mode from among the candidate first notification modes and setting the specified candidate first notification mode as the first notification mode. , the predetermined notification can be performed in various modes. For this reason, according to this feature, the first notification mode that can take various modes can give the player a feeling of anticipation, and further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA11,
means for storing a plurality of candidate second notification modes that can be the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in modification 4);
A predetermined lottery (predetermined lottery in Modification 4) is conducted, and based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, one candidate second notification mode is identified from among the plurality of candidate second notification modes, and the identification is performed. means for setting the candidate second notification mode as the second notification mode;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the profit state generating means includes means for generating the predetermined profit state with a profit corresponding to the set second notification mode.

According to this feature, means for storing a plurality of candidate second notification modes that can be the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), and performing a predetermined lottery, based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, means for identifying one candidate second notification mode from among a plurality of candidate second notification modes and setting the specified candidate second notification mode as the second notification mode, wherein the profit status generating means Since means for generating a predetermined profit state with a profit corresponding to the second notification mode is provided, predetermined notification can be given to the player in various modes as the second notification mode, and furthermore, A correlation can be established between the set second notification mode and the degree of profit to be given in a predetermined profit state. For this reason, according to this feature, the player can guess the degree of profit to be given in a predetermined profit state depending on which mode the second notification mode will be, giving the player a sense of anticipation. can do. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA12,
The second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in modification 5) is a mode in which an image with a red or gold color tone is displayed,
The first notification mode (V aim notification effect in modification 5) is a mode in which an image with a color tone other than red and gold is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode in which a red or gold tone image is displayed, and the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) is a mode other than red and gold. Since it is a mode of displaying an image with a color tone of , when a predetermined notification is made in the second notification mode, the player has an image of being hot (in the case of red) or profitable (in the case of gold). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA13,
A first state (decisive battle stage H4) in which the transition rate to the privilege granting state (rush stage H7) that grants a privilege is the first value (the rush rate is about 50%);
a second state (ceiling reaching stage H8) in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state is a second value higher than the first value (the rush rate is about 100%);
has
The first notification mode (V aim notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the first state can be transitioned,
The second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the second state can be transitioned.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the first state (decisive battle stage H4) in which the rate of transition to the privilege granting state (rush stage H7) for granting a privilege is the first value (the rush rate is about 50%), and the privilege granting state a second state (ceiling reaching stage H8) in which the rate of transition to is a second value higher than the first value (inrush rate is about 100%), and a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) is a mode suggesting that the state can be shifted to the first state, and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the second state. When a predetermined notification is made in , the player can guess that the rate of transition to the privilege provision state will increase, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA14,
A predetermined period is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
Means for giving a specific notification for prompting the player to perform a specific operation different from the shooting operation for operating the shooting means during the predetermined period (means for displaying an image of "press the push button")
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, a predetermined period is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. Therefore, if the player performs a specific game operation in accordance with the specific notification when receiving the specific notification, the second notification mode, which is the next notification mode, will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific information related to the appearance of the second notification mode will be in a predetermined updated state and a predetermined profit state will be generated. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA15,
In the predetermined profit state, a predetermined profit can be given when the firing operation that operates the firing means is in the second firing mode (right-handed), and the firing operation is in the first firing mode (left-handed). beating) is a state in which it is impossible to grant the predetermined benefit,
The game machine is
After the specific information is in a predetermined update state (after the value of the ceiling number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached), the firing operation of operating the firing means is performed in a second firing mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for performing a second firing mode notification effect (right-handed notification effect) for informing a player that

According to this feature, the predetermined benefit state is such that the predetermined benefit can be imparted when the firing operation that operates the firing means is the second firing mode (right-handed), and the firing operation is the first firing. In the case of the mode (left-handed), it is impossible to give a predetermined profit, and the gaming machine updates the specific information after the predetermined update state (the value of the counter for the number of ceilings corresponds to the number of times the ceiling has been reached). after the value (0) reached), a second firing mode notification effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed to notify the player that the firing operation for operating the firing means will be the second firing mode. Since the means is provided, the player can receive a predetermined profit by playing the game in the first shooting mode according to the second shooting mode notification effect.

[Feature bA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA16,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, even if the determination result by the determination means is not the specific determination result (small winning), the third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1 ) means for performing the predetermined notification (unknown profit and loss interval in modification 1)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, even if the determination result by the determination means is not the specific determination result between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the predetermined Since it has a means (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) that can notify, even if the determination result by the determination means is not a specific determination result (small hit winning), between the predetermined timing and the specific timing , the third notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the player sees the third notification mode before the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, and performs a predetermined game operation to establish a predetermined game condition when the determination means results in a specific determination result. It is possible to take a long time to examine whether to obtain a specific profit by doing so or to generate a predetermined profit state by avoiding the establishment of a predetermined game condition by not performing a predetermined game operation. Therefore, according to this characteristic, the above examination can be carried out carefully without making hasty judgments, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature bA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA17,
The notification time for informing the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in Modification 6) is longer than the notification time for informing the first notification mode (V aim notification effect in Modification 6).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, since the notification time for announcing the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is longer than the notification time for announcing the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), the second notification mode When the predetermined notification is made in , the predetermined notification can be notified to the player more strongly than when the predetermined notification is made in the first notification mode. For this reason, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation, and to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA18,
The specific information (ceiling frequency counter) is a predetermined initial A game machine characterized by being set to a state (a value of 1000 corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached).

According to this feature, the specific information (ceiling frequency counter), when a specific profit can be generated by the profit generation means (including the case of winning a jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) Since it is set to a predetermined initial state (a value of 1000 corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached), the specific information is reset to the predetermined initial state each time a specific profit is generated. For this reason, when it is assured that a specific profit will be generated by the profit generating means, the player feels refreshed after receiving the specific profit, and the specific information is updated from the predetermined initial state. can enjoy. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA19,
A game ball can be entered when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the second shooting mode (right-handed), and a game ball can be entered when the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed). Equipped with a predetermined ball entry area (V winning opening) where the ball cannot be entered,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game condition is that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area.

According to this feature, the game ball can be entered when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the second shooting mode (right-handed), and the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed). A predetermined ball entry area (V winning opening) is provided in which the game ball cannot be entered in the case, and the predetermined game condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means in the game state of the shooting mode (left-handed), the player switches the shooting operation from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode, thereby entering a predetermined ball entry area. A predetermined game condition can be established by entering a game ball into the ball. Here, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry area when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shooting), and the shooting operation is in the second shooting mode (right-handed shooting). ), the game ball cannot be entered. With this configuration, when the determining means gives a specific determination result in the game state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed), the game ball is already in the first shooting mode toward the predetermined ball entry area. Since the ball has already been shot, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area with a high probability. Therefore, when the player sees the second notification mode and determines that the predetermined game condition is not satisfied, the game ball has already been shot in the first shooting mode. It was difficult to stop the game ball from entering the predetermined ball entry area. As a result, the player cannot select whether or not to satisfy the predetermined game condition. On the other hand, according to this feature, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry area unless the shooting operation is switched from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. In order to satisfy a predetermined game condition, it is necessary to switch the shooting operation from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means gives a specific determination result in the game state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shooting), the player can change the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. Depending on whether or not to switch to the second shooting mode, it is possible to select whether or not to establish a predetermined game condition. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature bA21]
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA20,
The predetermined game condition is that a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area within a predetermined period (6 seconds),
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game condition is not established when a game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period.

According to this feature, the predetermined game condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period, and if the game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period, Since the predetermined game condition is not satisfied, the player needs to determine whether or not the predetermined game condition is satisfied within at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is forced to make an early decision, and the game can be speeded up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bB group>
The feature bB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bB1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) in which the predetermined notification is performed in a third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect in modification 1). game machine.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, a period (profit/loss unknown section) is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing in which the predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), so that the first notification mode is provided. A notification mode representing a transition period from the second notification mode to the second notification mode is set as the third notification mode, and a predetermined notification can be performed in the third notification mode. Therefore, the third notification mode can make the player feel anticipation that the second notification mode will appear in the future, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic bC group>
The feature bC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bC1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode for displaying the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown interval) during which a predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode (profit and loss Consideration recommended notification effect) includes the aspect of displaying the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect). It is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the second notification mode and the second notification mode will be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bD group>
The feature bD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bD1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode in which the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are repeated.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, there is provided a period (profit and loss unknown interval) during which a predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode (profit and loss Consideration recommended notification effect) includes a mode that repeats the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect). It is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the second notification mode and the second notification mode will be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic bE group>
The feature bE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bE1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) for performing the predetermined notification in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1),
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode includes a mode in which the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are displayed simultaneously.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. , at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing in which the predetermined notification is performed in the third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect), and the third notification mode is Since the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) are included, the third notification mode allows the first notification mode and the second notification mode to be displayed. It is possible to make the player feel excited as to which of the two will be decided, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the notification in the third notification mode.

<Characteristic bF group>
The feature bF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bF1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
When the specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means and the predetermined notification is performed in the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the predetermined game condition is not established. a new variable display by the display means can be executed without generating the specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot).

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning) and a predetermined notification is performed in the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), a predetermined game condition is established. If not, the player does not perform a predetermined game operation because a new variable display can be executed by the display means without generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot). , it is possible to avoid the establishment of a predetermined game condition, thereby making it possible to execute a new variable display without generating a specific profit. Therefore, since the update condition is established and the specific information can be updated, the specific information is in a predetermined update state, and a predetermined profit state can be generated. Therefore, the player can decide whether to take a specific profit or a predetermined profit state by performing a predetermined game operation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bG group>
The feature bG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bG1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The game machine is
In the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing (the profit and loss unknown interval in the first modification), a special effect different from the predetermined notification (special effect in the decisive battle stage H4, special effect in the rush stage H7) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for playing.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this feature, during the period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing (unknown profit/loss interval), a special effect different from the predetermined notification (special effect in the decisive battle stage H4, special effect in the rush stage H7) is executed. This special effect can make the player feel a sense of expectation that the player will be able to enter into a highly advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bH group>
The feature bH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bH1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
After the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the notification mode is not switched to the first notification mode at least until the profit generating means generates the specific profit. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the notification mode is not switched to the first notification mode until a specific profit is generated by the profit generating means. , the reliability of the second notification mode can be improved. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bI group>
The feature bI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bI1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The game machine is
means for storing a plurality of candidate update counts (candidate ceiling reaching counts in modification 2) that can be candidates for the update count required for the specific information to reach the predetermined update state;
means for performing a predetermined lottery, specifying one candidate update count from among the plurality of candidate update counts based on the lottery results of the predetermined lottery, and setting the specified candidate update count as the update count; ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, means for storing a plurality of candidate update counts that can be candidates for the number of update counts required for specific information to reach a predetermined update state; and specifying one candidate update count from among a plurality of candidate update counts based on and setting the specified candidate update count as the update count, so that the update count is determined by a predetermined lottery. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict the number of updates required for the specific information to reach a predetermined update state. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bJ group>
The feature bJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bJ1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided in which the predetermined notification is performed in a third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect),
The third notification mode is a composite image (recommended profit-and-loss review notification presentation) composed of a part of the first notification mode (V aim notification presentation) and a part of the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended presentation presentation). A gaming machine characterized by including a mode for displaying

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, a period (profit and loss unknown interval) is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing for performing a predetermined notification in the third notification mode, and the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect) is The third notification mode is the first The player can be reminded that the notification mode and the second notification mode provide the same type of notification. For this reason, the third notification mode can make the player feel excited as to which of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is to be decided, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved. can be done. Further, according to this feature, it is possible to simplify the processing for performing the notification in the third notification mode.

<Characteristic bK group>
The feature bK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bK1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The game machine is
means for storing a plurality of candidate first notification modes that can be the first notification mode (V aim notification effect in modification 3);
A predetermined lottery (predetermined lottery in modification 3) is performed, one candidate first notification mode is specified from among the plurality of candidate first notification modes based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, and the specified candidate first notification mode is specified. means for setting a candidate first notification mode as the first notification mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, means for storing a plurality of candidate first notification modes that can be the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), performing a predetermined lottery, and based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, and means for specifying one candidate first notification mode from among a plurality of candidate first notification modes and setting the specified candidate first notification mode as the first notification mode. Predetermined notification can be performed in various manners as notification manners. Therefore, according to this feature, the first notification mode that can take various modes can give the player a feeling of anticipation, and further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bL group>
The feature bL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bL1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The game machine is
means for storing a plurality of candidate second notification modes that can be the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in modification 4);
A predetermined lottery (predetermined lottery in Modification 4) is conducted, and based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, one candidate second notification mode is specified from among the plurality of candidate second notification modes, and the identification is performed. means for setting the candidate second notification mode as the second notification mode;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the profit state generating means includes means for generating the predetermined profit state with a profit corresponding to the set second notification mode.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, there are means for storing a plurality of candidate second notification modes that can be the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), and performing a predetermined lottery, based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. means for identifying one candidate second notification mode from among a plurality of candidate second notification modes and setting the specified candidate second notification mode as the second notification mode; Since means for generating a predetermined profit state with a profit corresponding to the set second notification mode is provided, predetermined notification can be given to the player in various modes as the second notification mode. In addition, it is possible to establish a correlation between the set second notification mode and the degree of profit to be given in a predetermined profit state. For this reason, according to this feature, the player can guess the degree of profit to be given in a predetermined profit state depending on which mode the second notification mode will be, giving the player a sense of anticipation. can do. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Feature bM group>
The feature bM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bM1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in modification 5) is a mode in which an image with a red or gold color tone is displayed,
The first notification mode (V aim notification effect in modification 5) is a mode in which an image with a color tone other than red and gold is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. , at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode in which an image in red or gold tone is displayed, and the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) is a mode in which an image is displayed in red and gold. Since the image is displayed in a color tone other than gold, when a predetermined notification is made in the second notification mode, the player will be given an image of being hot (in the case of red) or profitable (in the case of gold). It is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bN group>
The feature bN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bN1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
A first state (decisive battle stage H4) in which the transition rate to the privilege granting state (rush stage H7) that grants a privilege is the first value (the rush rate is about 50%);
a second state (ceiling reaching stage H8) in which the rate of transition to the privilege provision state is a second value higher than the first value (the rush rate is about 100%);
has
The first notification mode (V aim notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the first state can be transitioned,
The second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the second state can be transitioned.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the first state (decisive battle stage H4) in which the rate of transition to the privilege granting state (rush stage H7) in which a privilege is granted is the first value (the rush rate is about 50%), and the privilege A second state (ceiling reaching stage H8) in which the transition rate to the grant state is a second value higher than the first value (rush rate is about 100%), and a first notification mode (V aim notification Effect) is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the first state, and the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is a mode that suggests that the state can be shifted to the second state. When a predetermined notification is made in the notification mode, the player can guess that the rate of transition to the privilege provision state will increase, and the player can be given a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bO group>
The feature bO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bO1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
A predetermined period is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
The game machine is
Means for giving a specific notification for prompting the player to perform a specific operation different from the shooting operation for operating the shooting means during the predetermined period (means for displaying an image of "press the push button")
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, a predetermined period is provided between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and during the predetermined period, the player is encouraged to perform a specific operation different from the shooting operation of operating the shooting means. Therefore, when the player receives the specific notification, if the player performs the specific game operation according to the specific notification, the second notification mode, which is the next notification mode, appears. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the specific information related to the appearance of the second notification mode will be in a predetermined updated state and a predetermined profit state will be generated. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bP group>
The feature bP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bP1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
In the predetermined profit state, a predetermined profit can be given when the firing operation that operates the firing means is in the second firing mode (right-handed), and the firing operation is in the first firing mode (left-handed). beating) is a state in which it is impossible to grant the predetermined benefit,
The game machine is
After the specific information is in a predetermined update state (after the value of the ceiling number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached), the firing operation of operating the firing means is a second firing mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: means for performing a second firing mode notification effect (right-handed notification effect) for informing a player that

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined profit state can be given when the firing operation that operates the firing means is in the second firing mode (right-handed), and the firing operation is in the first state. When the firing mode (left-handed) is the shooting mode (left-handed), the predetermined profit cannot be given. After reaching the value (0) corresponding to ), the second firing mode notification effect (right hitting notification effect) for informing the player that the firing operation to operate the firing means will be the second firing mode is provided, the player can receive a predetermined benefit by playing the game in the first shooting mode according to the second shooting mode notification effect.

<Characteristic bQ group>
The feature bQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bQ1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The game machine is
Between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, even if the determination result by the determination means is not the specific determination result (small winning), the third notification mode (profit and loss review recommended notification effect in modification 1 ) means for performing the predetermined notification (unknown profit and loss interval in modification 1)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, even if the determination result by the determination means is not the specific determination result between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the third notification mode (profit and loss examination recommended notification effect in Modification 1) Since it has a means (profit and loss unknown interval in modification 1) that can perform a predetermined notification, even if the determination result by the determination means is not a specific determination result (small hit winning), a predetermined timing and a specific timing , the third notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the player sees the third notification mode before the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, and performs a predetermined game operation to establish a predetermined game condition when the determination means results in a specific determination result. It is possible to take a long time to examine whether to obtain a specific profit by doing so or to generate a predetermined profit state by avoiding the establishment of a predetermined game condition by not performing a predetermined game operation. Therefore, according to this characteristic, the above examination can be carried out carefully without making hasty judgments, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic bR group>
The feature bR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bR1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The notification time for announcing the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect in modification 6) is longer than the notification time for notification of the first notification mode (V aim notification effect in modification 6).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the notification time for announcing the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) is longer than the notification time for announcing the first notification mode (V aim notification effect). When the predetermined notification is made in the notification mode, the predetermined notification can be notified to the player more strongly than when the predetermined notification is made in the first notification mode. For this reason, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation, and to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bS group>
The feature bS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bS1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The specific information (ceiling frequency counter) is a predetermined initial A game machine characterized by being set to a state (a value of 1000 corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached).

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after becoming (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number of times). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole due to the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached. , at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated, and on the other hand, seeing that the predetermined notification is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the specific information is the predetermined One can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, the expectation of the player can be increased without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the specific information (ceiling frequency counter) is used when a specific profit can be generated by the profit generating means (including the case of winning a jackpot (including the case of winning a small prize in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)). Furthermore, since it is set to a predetermined initial state (a value of 1000 corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached), the specific information is reset to the predetermined initial state each time a specific profit is generated. For this reason, when it is guaranteed that a specific profit will be generated by the profit generating means, the player feels refreshed after receiving the specific profit, and the specific information is updated from the predetermined initial state. can enjoy. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bT group>
The feature bT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bT1]
a launching means capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
A game ball can be entered when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the second shooting mode (right-handed), and a game ball can be entered when the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed). Equipped with a predetermined ball entry area (V winning opening) where the ball cannot be entered,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game condition is that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated. You can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the second shooting mode (right-handed), the game ball can be entered, and the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed). A predetermined ball entry area (V winning opening) is provided in which the game ball cannot be entered in the case of , and the predetermined game condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determining means in the game state of the first firing mode (left-handed), the player switches the firing operation from the first firing mode to the second firing mode to make a predetermined input. By entering the game ball into the ball area, it becomes possible to establish a predetermined game condition. Here, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry area when the shooting operation for operating the shooting means is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shooting), and the shooting operation is in the second shooting mode (right-handed shooting). ), the game ball cannot be entered. With this configuration, when the determining means gives a specific determination result in the game state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed), the game ball is already in the first shooting mode toward the predetermined ball entry area. Since the ball has already been shot, the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area with a high probability. Therefore, when the player sees the second notification mode and determines that the predetermined game condition is not satisfied, the game ball has already been shot in the first shooting mode. It was difficult to stop the game ball from entering the predetermined ball entry area. As a result, the player cannot select whether or not to satisfy the predetermined game condition. On the other hand, according to this feature, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry area unless the shooting operation is switched from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. In order to satisfy a predetermined game condition, it is necessary to switch the shooting operation from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode. Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means gives a specific determination result in the game state in which the shooting operation is in the first shooting mode (left-handed shooting), the player can change the shooting operation from the first shooting mode. Depending on whether or not to switch to the second shooting mode, it is possible to select whether or not to establish a predetermined game condition. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic bU group>
The feature bU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature bU1]
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A ball entry area provided in a game basin where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball can enter;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the ball entry area;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends);
After the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling Profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) at a predetermined timing (after the value of the number counter reaches a value (0) corresponding to the number of times the ceiling is reached);
A notification control means for performing a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or in a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the game ball entering the ball entry area;
When a specific determination result (small winning) is obtained by the determination means, and when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (a game ball is placed in the V winning opening by a shooting operation by the player) profit generating means for generating a specific profit (opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the V winning jackpot) when the player hits the ball;
with
The notification control means is
When the determination means results in the specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the value of the ceiling number counter is the number of times the ceiling is reached) before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. Until the timing of reaching the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and the predetermined notification is performed before the predetermined timing. Switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) at a later specific timing,
The predetermined game condition is that a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area within a predetermined period (6 seconds),
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined game condition is not established when a game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period.

According to this feature, the update means updates the specific information (ceiling number counter) when a predetermined update condition in the variable display is satisfied (when the determination time of the variable display ends), The specific information is updated to a predetermined state by the profit state generating means in a specific game state (game state from the establishment of the initialization condition to the winning of the jackpot (including the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot)) A predetermined profit state (predetermined number of time-saving grants) is generated at a predetermined timing after (after the ceiling number counter reaches a predetermined number). Further, the notification control means performs a predetermined notification (small win notification) in a first notification mode (V aim notification effect) or a second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect) different from the first notification mode. Further, the determination means executes a predetermined determination (hit lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the profit generating means determines a specific determination result (small winning) by the determination means. In this case, when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player (when the game ball enters the V winning hole by the player's shooting operation), a specific profit (for the V winning jackpot) The open/close execution mode H3) based on the Furthermore, by the switching means provided in the notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (ceiling number counter reaches a threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of break-even times, which is 100 times before 1000 times, which is the number of times the ceiling is reached, until the timing reaches the threshold value (100) corresponding to the number of times before break-even times. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect).

Therefore, according to this feature, when the determination means results in a specific determination result (small winning), a predetermined timing (the ceiling number counter reaches the ceiling value) a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state. A predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect) until the break-even number of times is reached, which is a predetermined period before the predetermined timing, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the notification mode is changed to the second notification mode. Since switching to the second notification mode (V aim non-recommended notification effect), the player sees the predetermined notification being made in the first notification mode (V aim notification effect), and performs a predetermined action based on a predetermined game operation. By establishing the game condition, a specific profit can be generated. You can wait in anticipation to be in an updated state and be able to generate a given profit state. Therefore, according to this feature, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without giving inconvenience to the player by the notification mode of the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined game condition is that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period, and the game ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry area within the predetermined period. In this case, since the predetermined game condition is not satisfied, the player needs to determine whether or not the predetermined game condition is satisfied within at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to this feature, the player is forced to make an early decision, and the game can be speeded up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the inventions of the above feature groups solve the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, and improving the soundness of games. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature group described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied will be described below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

A game machine such as a slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means. A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups may be used as appropriate to solve part or all of the above-described problems, or to achieve part or all of the above-described effects. , can be replaced or combined. Moreover, if the technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

<<6>> Sixth Embodiment:
<<6-0>> Introduction:

A conventional gaming machine is known to have an auxiliary member capable of changing the probability of winning a prize to a predetermined starting hole for the purpose of improving game playability. The auxiliary member is controlled to increase the probability of winning a prize at a predetermined starting port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game, thereby shifting to a winning easy control mode in which winning at a predetermined starting port becomes easier. do. After the transition to the easy winning control mode, the easy winning control mode is terminated when the end condition is met, such as when the variation based on the winning of the game ball to the predetermined starting port is performed a predetermined number of times.

During the period of the easy winning control mode, by outputting a signal for identifying the state corresponding to the period to the hall computer or the like, effects and data are displayed by the hall equipment.

However, in the conventional game machine, no countermeasures are taken against start suspension based on the auxiliary member at the end of the period of the easy winning control mode, and the identification performance of various game states is more difficult. Good functionality is desired.

The present game machine has been developed to solve the above-described conventional problems, and aims to improve the interest of the game by improving the performance of identifying the game state. Specifically, this gaming machine solves the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional game machines are known to have an external terminal board and output various signals from the external terminal board to a data display or a management control device on the game hall side. The various signals include what is called jackpot signal 1 and what is called jackpot signal 2 . The jackpot signal 1 is a signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (also called a high support state). The data display can display various information related to the game of the gaming machine based on various signals output from the gaming machine. It is possible to count the number of consecutive homes, which is the number of times the jackpot is won, and display the number of consecutive homes.

In addition, in the conventional game machine, the number of times of execution of games in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number, and the special 2 remaining hold may remain immediately after the high support state transitions to the low support state. In this case, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 stops when the number of games reaches the specified number of times and the variation stops, the data display stops counting the number of consecutive games. For this reason, immediately after the transition from the high support state to the low support state, the special 2 balance reserve remains, and if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery due to the special 2 balance reserve, the jackpot win will be displayed on the data display immediately before. It will be recognized as the first jackpot election without being counted in the number of consecutive villas in the high support state. As a result, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed appropriately on the data display, which makes the player feel uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as the gaming machine) aims to increase interest in a game by appropriately displaying information about the game. Specifically, for example, the object is to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the inability to properly display the number of consecutive games on the display device. there is A detailed description will be given below.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "first ball-entering section" as a "first ball-entering area", and a "second ball-entering area" as a "second ball-entering area". ', 'special random number information' as 'special information', 'acquired information storage unit' as 'acquired information storage means', 'specific condition' as 'predetermined condition', 'control ``Control mode switching processing'' as ``mode switching means'', ``identification information'' as ``information for identifying the state corresponding to the period'', and ``identification information output as ``first output means'' processing", "output stop processing" as "output stop means", "storage unit" as "storage means", "specific fluctuation display" as "predetermined fluctuation display", " "specified information" as "predetermined information"; "specified information output processing" as "second output means"; ``Continuous output processing'' as ``means for continuously outputting the prescribed information until a prescribed period of time has elapsed since the ”. In addition, as a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes "specified other conditions" as "predetermined other conditions", "special game information" as "special game state information", and "third It may be configured to include "special game information output processing" as "output means".

The "first ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A first start port where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a second start port where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the game ball enters. A normal pattern start gate where variable display of normal patterns is executed when a game ball enters, a general winning hole where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, There are a special electric starting opening that activates a special electric accessory when a game ball enters, a special winning opening, and a special winning opening.

The "second ball entry area" may be an area having a ball entry opening into which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. A second starting port where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the game ball enters, and a first start where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game ball enters. A normal pattern start gate where variable display of normal patterns is executed when a game ball enters, a general winning hole where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, There are a special electric starting opening that activates a special electric accessory when a game ball enters, a special winning opening, and a special winning opening.

The "special information" may be any information that is acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. , The value of the per random number counter used for the special drawing per lottery, the value of the per type counter, the value of the reach random number counter, the value of the variation type counter, the value of the electric accessory open counter, and the like.

The ``obtained information storage means'' stores the first special information obtained when the game ball enters the first ball entry area and the second special information obtained when the game ball enters the second ball entry area. and the second special information. Areas, buffers in RAM, and the like.

The "predetermined condition" may be a condition for judging the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. and that the lottery result of the winning lottery coincides with the value that becomes a small winning lottery.

The "control mode switching means" is means for maintaining the control mode in the second control mode for a specific period after the end of the special game state, and switching the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the specific period. If it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode for a specified number of times after the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the big win in the winning lottery, and the control is performed at the end of the specified number of times. A process for switching the mode from a high-frequency support mode to a low-frequency support mode, and opening/closing execution based on winning a small win in a winning lottery and then winning a V prize big win by entering a game ball into a V prize opening. After the end of the mode, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for a specified number of times, and the control mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the specified number of times. A process of maintaining the support mode in the high-frequency support mode for a specified number of times after the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the type being a specific type, and switching the control mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the specified number of times , an open/close execution mode based on winning a small winning prize in a winning lottery and winning a big winning prize by entering a game ball into a V winning opening afterward when a small winning prize is won in a winning lottery and the distributed winning classification is a specific classification. after the end of , the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for a prescribed number of times, and the control mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the prescribed number of times.

"Information for identifying the state corresponding to the period" may be any information for identifying the state corresponding to the special game state period or the specific period, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode indicating that the jackpot game state or the high support state is in progress, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress, and the special symbols (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that have been variably displayed are stopped. A symbol determination signal indicating that the game ball has been displayed, a first start opening ball entry signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first ball entry area, and a game ball has entered the second ball entry area. A second starting entrance ball entry signal, a signal indicating that the frame is being opened, a signal indicating that the door is being opened, a unique signal during the variable probability state, a unique signal during the high support state, and the like. The "signal" referred to here is information expressed using a certain code such as color, sound, light, and shape. Combination etc. are mentioned.

The "first output means" may be a means for continuously outputting information during a special game state or a specific period, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, Processing for continuously outputting information such as jackpot signal 2 during the support state, processing for continuously outputting information during the jackpot gaming state, processing for continuously outputting information during the high support state, and during the variable probability state A process of continuously outputting information in . Information output sources include an external terminal board, a main control device, a sound emission control device, a display control device, and the like.

The "output stop means" may be means for stopping the output of information at the end of a specific period, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, when there is no special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state Processing to stop outputting information such as jackpot signal 2, processing to stop outputting information at the end of the variable probability state, processing to stop outputting information at the end of the jackpot gaming state, outputting information at the end of the high support state and the like.

The "storage means" may be any means capable of storing the number of second special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the end of the specific period, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, the Special 2 remaining pending number storage area in RAM on the main control device side, holding number storage area in RAM on the main control device side, counter area provided in RAM on the main control device side, main control device side A flag area provided in the RAM, a buffer in the RAM on the main control device side, and a pending number counter area on the sound emission control device side.

The "predetermined variable display" may be a predetermined variable display for notifying the result of determination by the determination means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, the variable display based on the special figure 2 winning lottery Or, fluctuation display based on special figure 1 lottery, fluctuation display based on normal electric accessory open lottery, fluctuation display based on special figure 2 lottery in high support state, after transition from high support state to low support state Variation display based on special drawing 2 per lottery due to special 2 remaining reservation, and the like.

The "predetermined information" may be any information that can identify a state in which a predetermined variable display can be performed. , a jackpot signal 1, a jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode, a pattern determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) has been stopped, and a game in the first ball entry area A first starting ball entry signal indicating that a ball has entered, a second starting opening ball entry signal indicating that a game ball has entered a second ball entry area, a unique signal during the variable probability state, high support signals unique to the state, and so on.

When the number of second special information stored in at least the storage means is one or more after the end of the specific period, the "second output means" outputs a predetermined number corresponding to the number of the second special information. Any means for continuously outputting predetermined information until the end of the variable display of is sufficient, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, the number of special 2 remaining reservations stored at the end of the high support state is If it is 1 or more, the process of continuously outputting the predetermined information such as the jackpot signal 2 or the end of the high probability high support state until the predetermined number of fluctuation display corresponding to the number of the special 2 remaining reservations is completed When the number of Remaining Reserves of Special 2 stored is 1 or more, a process of continuously outputting predetermined information until a predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of Remaining Reserves of Special 2 is completed, etc. is mentioned. In addition to the configuration described above, the second output means continues to output the predetermined information even when the number of the second special information stored in the storage means is 0 after the end of the specific period. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

"Means for continuously outputting predetermined information until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display out of a predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped" can realize the gist of the present invention. There are various configurations, if any. Specifically, for example, the "predetermined period" is a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. , the number of shots of game balls after the stop display reaches a predetermined number, the lottery result of a specific lottery becomes a specific result, a combination of these, and the like.

The ``means for outputting the predetermined information in a manner different from the information'' may be means for outputting the predetermined information in a manner different from the information for identifying the state corresponding to the special game state or the specific period. , various configurations can be used as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. Specifically, "different aspects" include, for example, different signal shapes, different signal types, different signal output sources, different signal output destinations, Information represented by the signals is different, a combination thereof, and the like.

The ``predetermined other condition'' may be a condition for judging the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the lottery result of the winning lottery will be a big win. Matching with the value, and matching with the value that the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small winning lottery.

The "special game state information" may be information for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the special game state. Signal 1, jackpot signal 2 in normal output mode, jackpot signal 2 in special output mode, symbol determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) has been stopped, the first A first start entrance ball entry signal indicating that a game ball has entered the entrance area of , a second start entrance ball entrance signal indicating that a game ball has entered a second entrance area, and a variable probability state peculiar signals, peculiar signals during high support conditions, and the like.

The "third output means" may be means for outputting special game state information for identifying the state corresponding to the special game state period. , processing to output the jackpot signal 2, processing to output the pattern determination signal, processing to output the first start entrance signal, processing to output the second start entrance signal, during the probability variable state A process of outputting a specific signal, a process of outputting a specific signal in the high support state, a process of outputting a specific signal in the jackpot gaming state, and the like.

Although details will be described later, this game machine maintains the control mode in the second control mode for a specific period after the end of the special game state by the control mode switching process, and switches the control mode from the second control mode at the end of the specific period. Switch to the first control mode. Further, the identification information output process continues to output the identification information during the special game state or the specific period, and the output stop process stops the output of the identification information at the end of the specific period. Further, the storage unit stores the number of second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the end of the specific period. If the number of pieces of second special random number information stored at least in the storage unit is 1 or more after the end of the specific period by the specific information output process, a predetermined number corresponding to the number of the second special random number information Until the variable display is completed, it is possible to continuously output the specific information that enables identification of the state in which the specific variable display can be executed. Further, in the specific information output process, the specific information is continuously output until a predetermined period of time elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped. is output in a manner different from the identification information. Therefore, according to this feature, even if the output of the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end of the specific period, after the specific period ends, the predetermined number corresponding to the number of the second special random number information stored in the storage unit Since the specific information that can identify the state in which the specific variable display can be executed is continuously output until the variable display ends, after the specific period ends, the second special random number information is stored in the acquired information storage unit remains and the second special random number information satisfies a specific condition, specifically, for example, if the second special random number information matches a predetermined value, more specifically, for example, a jackpot winning In a display device such as a data display that receives identification information and specific information when it matches the value of It is possible to count the number of consecutive villas assuming that there is one. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed properly on the display device, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

In addition, according to the game machine, since the specific information is output in a manner different from the identification information, a display device such as a data display that receives the specific information can perform a specific display when the specific information is received. becomes possible. For this reason, on the display device, for example, it is possible to display that the second special random number information remaining after the end of the specific period is being changed and displayed. Therefore, in this game machine, the display device such as the data display that receives the specific information and the identification information can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In this manner, the game machine appropriately displays the second special random number information on the display device when the second special random number information remains in the acquired information storage section after the specific period ends, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. It becomes possible.

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as a sixth embodiment.

<<6-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 253 is an explanatory diagram showing part of the island facility 3 installed in the game hall. A plurality of island facilities 3 are provided in the game hall. The floor of the game hall is partitioned into a plurality of areas by island facilities 3 so that visitors and employees can walk and a sufficient space is secured for players to play games.

A plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in an island facility 3 in a horizontal row so as to face the front. Specifically, the island facility 3 is provided with a gaming machine installation shelf 5 . The game machine installation shelf 5 has a size in which the pachinko machine 10 is incorporated without any gap. When the pachinko machine 10 is incorporated into the game machine installation shelf 5, only the front surface is exposed. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 is installed so as to face the front.

A game ball lending machine 7 is installed adjacent to at least one of the left and right sides of the game machine installation shelf 5 in the island facility 3. - 特許庁The game ball lending machine 7 lends out game balls (pachinko balls) used in games in exchange for value media such as money. Further, above each pachinko machine 10 on the game machine installation shelf 5, a data display 9 for summarizing and displaying the game history of the pachinko machine 10 is installed. The data display 9 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 via a signal line (not shown), and receives various signals output from the pachinko machine 10 via this signal line. Based on these signals, the data display 9 displays the operation status of the pachinko machine 10, security, and the like.

FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the game machine installation shelf 5 of the island facility 3. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking when a win is made by the pachinko machine 10 or when a ready-to-win game occurs. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20.例文帳に追加The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

An operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as "right side"). When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for a player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 in front view (hereinafter also simply referred to as "left side"). When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized. It should be noted that, without operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player may perform an operation to rotate the operation handle 25 by a predetermined amount or more, thereby hitting to the right.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

255 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility 3 of the game hall are successively replenished. A tank rail 55 having an inclined surface, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are put out according to an instruction from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to operate. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

An external terminal plate 95 is provided on the upper right portion of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the back. The external terminal board 95 has a plurality of output side connectors, and various signals are output from these output side connectors to the data display device 9 and a management control device (not shown) on the game hall side.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

256 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a variable winning device 36, and a variable winning device 57 dedicated to small prizes. The variable winning device 36 is a device that operates when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery (including a V winning jackpot winning, which will be described later). be. That is, a device that operates when a small win is won is called a small win-only variable winning device, whereas a device that operates when a big win is won is simply called a "variable prize winning device".

The game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the variable winning device 36, and the small winning variable winning device 57 are individually formed on the game board 30. Guided to the opening above. Also, the game board 30 is provided with a through gate 35 . Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, the general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrance members that form ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 32, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71 (FIG. 255).

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and functions as a first ball entrance portion. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . A game ball can enter the first starting port 33 when the game is played with the left hand, but cannot be entered with the game ball when the game is played with the right hand. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a special figure 1 per lottery is executed. As a result of the special figure 1 lottery, when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing execution mode in which the second special electric accessory executes the opening/closing operation is started. The opening/closing execution mode is composed of an opening period, an opening/closing processing period, and an ending period. The opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric role is started, the opening/closing process period is the period in which the opening/closing process of the special electric role is actually executed, and the ending period is the special electric role. It is a waiting period until the next special figure per lottery (special figure 1 per lottery or special figure 2 per lottery) can be executed after the opening and closing process of the accessory is completed. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for one special figure, the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter simply referred to as "opening/closing (sometimes referred to as the "run mode" or "jackpot-based opening and closing run mode") is initiated. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various processes are performed assuming that the game is in the jackpot game state from the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, as a modification, the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode may be configured to perform various kinds of processing during the jackpot game state.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and functions as a second ball entrance portion. The second starting port 34 is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 30 in the vertical direction. A game ball can enter the second starting port 34 when the game is played with the right hand, but cannot be entered with the game ball when the game is played with the left hand. The second starting port 34 is provided with a normal electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the normal electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a special figure 2 winning lottery is executed. As a result of the special figure 2 lottery, when a small hit or a big hit is won, an opening and closing execution mode in which a special electric role item (first special electric role item or second special electric role item) executes an opening and closing operation is started. . The opening/closing execution mode is composed of an opening period, an opening/closing processing period, and an ending period, as described above. And, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the special figure 2, an opening/closing execution mode is started in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory executes opening/closing operation. On the other hand, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery, when a small win is won, the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter referred to as "small win (also referred to as "opening/closing execution mode based on

The through gate 35 functioning as the first ball-entering portion or the second ball-entering portion is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30 and has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through type gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the normal electric accessary 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow-down route of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port. It is possible to enter 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

The small-hit dedicated variable winning device 57 functioning as the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion is provided downstream of the second starting port 34 in the game ball flow-down route on the right side of the game board 30 . The small winning variable winning device 57 is a first special electric accessory, and includes a large winning opening 57a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 57b for opening and closing the large winning opening 57a. The opening/closing door 57b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 57a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a small win is won, the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the small win) for the first special electric accessory is started, dedicated to the small win. The opening/closing door 57b of the variable winning device 57 is in an open state in which game balls can enter, and then in a closed state. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57, ten game balls, which are the predetermined number of winning balls, are paid out by the payout device 71 as winning balls. The small-hit exclusive variable winning device 57 allows a game ball to enter when the game is played with the right hand, but does not allow the game ball to enter when the game is played with the left hand.

A V winning opening 59 is provided inside the big winning opening 57a. The V winning opening 59 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, it wins the V winning jackpot (also simply called "V winning jackpot winning"), and opens and closes based on the V winning jackpot. Run mode is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 59 is provided inside the large winning opening 57a, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 57a then surely enters the V winning opening 59. is configured as Then, when the condition that the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 is established, the V winning jackpot is won, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot in which the second special electric accessory performs the opening/closing operation starts. be done.

The variable prize winning device 36 functioning as the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion is provided on the downstream side of the small winning dedicated variable prize winning device 57 in the downflow route of the game balls on the right side of the game board 30 . The variable prize winning device 36 is a second special electric accessory, and includes a large prize winning port 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big prize winning port 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the V prize opening 59 and wins the V prize jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode for the second special electric accessory (hereinafter also referred to as "opening and closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot"). is started, and the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 repeats an open state and a closed state in which game balls can enter. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls, which is the predetermined number of prize balls, as prize balls. The variable winning device 36 allows a game ball to enter when the game is played with the right hand, but does not allow a game ball to enter when the game is played with the left hand.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a ball enters the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the variable winning device 36, or the small winning variable winning device 57. The game balls not played are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

A game ball entering each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 59, and the out opening 43 is placed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the formed individual openings and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30 . The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting game balls. By detecting the game balls with the discharge path detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot to the game board 30. - 特許庁

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. In addition, it also includes a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a special pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the lottery per special figure 1 triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display unit 37a, when the special figure 1 per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is performed, the segment display device until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. As a display mode, the variable display of the first pattern is performed as the specific variable display. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second symbol refers to a special symbol that is variable or stopped based on the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display unit 37b, when the lottery for the special figure 2 triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is performed, the segment display device until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. As a display mode, a variable display of the second pattern is performed as a specific variable display. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from when the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed until it is stopped is called the variation time. call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The pattern display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol (decorative symbol) in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. display. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. . Furthermore, the symbol display device 41 provides an effect (right-handed notification effect) for notifying the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will be right-handed, and the shooting mode of the game-ball shooting mechanism is changed from right-handed to left-handed. A production for notifying the player of returning to hitting (left-handed notification production), and by making the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism to be a right-handed shooting, the player is instructed to enter the game ball into the V winning hole 59.例文帳に追加A V aim notification effect for notification is also performed. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 257 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 257(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 257(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern of a character or the like is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 257(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 257(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display is started in which the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win or a small win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols is valid. It is formed on the line L1. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L1. In addition, the manner in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the manner described above. Various modes can be adopted for the variable display mode of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, the "game cycle" refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop of the variable display and the stop display until the end of the stop display ( In other words, until the fixed time of the stop display ends), the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special random number information acquired based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is one unit of processing for informing the player. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one win lottery for one piece of special random number information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special random number information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a and the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special random number information, and the stop display is performed. It continues for a predetermined period of time (also called fixed time). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special random number information based on the ball entering either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After variably displaying the predetermined pattern row, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special random number information, and the stopped display is continued for a fixed time. Also, the time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a fixed time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays the first reserved display area Ds1. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33 is up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be adopted.

<<6-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission controller 90 , and a display controller 100 .

The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and a RAM 64, which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. The power supply device 85 is equipped with a capacitor (not shown), and in the event of a power failure or the power switch 88 (FIG. 255) being turned off, it continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time. do.

Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 f are connected to the input port of the main control board 61 . Specifically, a plurality of detection sensors provided at various ball entrances such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 59, etc. is connected with The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters each ball entrance based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67f, and determines whether the game ball enters the through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a special figure per lottery (special figure 1 per lottery or special figure 2 per lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34, and a through gate A normal electric accessary item opening lottery is executed based on the entry of a ball into 35.

The output port of the main control board 61 is provided with a first special electric accessory drive section 57c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 57b of the small winning variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory, and a second special electric accessory. A second special electric accessory drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as a second special electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric accessory 34a, and the main display unit 45 are connected. It is Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the open/close execution mode based on the small win, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first special electric accessory drive unit 57c so that the open/close door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 is opened and closed. , In the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit, the drive control of the second special electric accessary product driving section 36c is performed so that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed. The "opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot" referred to here includes the opening/closing execution mode executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot executed when the small win is won in the winning lottery and the V prize jackpot is won. Both execution mode and execution mode are applicable. Also, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the normal electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the normal electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. FIG. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode based on the small win and the opening and closing execution mode based on the big win (including the V winning big win), the win type is determined in the opening and closing execution mode, and the number of round games executed in the opening and closing execution mode is determined. If so, display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is executed.

An output port of the main control board 61 is connected with a payout control device 70 , an audio emission control device 90 and an external terminal board 95 . To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command as identification information is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command as identification information, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 . Specifically, when a ball entering the general winning hole 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the ball enters the first starting hole 33. is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when entering the second start port 34 is specified, the payout of three game balls is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57 or the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is specified A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The process of transmitting the prize ball command as the identification information is executed as the identification information output process. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. Also, the operation handle 25 and the game ball shooting button 26 are connected to the shooting control device 80 .

The external terminal board 95 is provided with one input side connector and a plurality of output side connectors. The external terminal board 95 receives an input signal from the main controller 60 via the input side connector, and based on the received input signal, outputs various signals from each output side connector to the data display 9 or the game hall side. Output to a controller (not shown).

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time (determined time), which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 259 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a special figure winning lottery, a normal electric accessory open lottery, and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the main display section 45, the setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a random number counter C1 is used for the lottery per special figure (lottery per special figure or lottery per special figure 2). When winning a big win or winning a small win and entering a game ball into the V winning opening 59, a V winning jackpot is won and the number of round games, etc., are determined. Used. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for ready-to-win determination as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory open counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the normal electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored as pending information. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the area 64b. In the first reservation area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls entered into the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb. In the second reservation area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area. area is provided. When the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is retained information (hereinafter, special figure 2 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of ball entry, and the earlier the ball entry timing is, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c each time the game round being executed is completed, and is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is collated with the success/failure table, and it is determined whether or not a big win or a small win will be won. Also, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not a big win or a small win will be won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is determined in the order in which the game ball enters the first start hole 33, and the determination process execution area Move to execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

In addition, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. . Specifically, the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted. do. The data shift is to sequentially shift the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb, regardless of whether the hit in the first reservation area Ra is stored or not, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation area Rb. The value of the stored winning random number counter C1 is to be moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, the hit stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 Priority is given to the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in this embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34 The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is prioritized, and the data stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is determined among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb. The data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is shifted to the processing execution area 64c. If the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not stored in the second reservation area Rb, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra, the first area of the first reservation area Ra A process of moving the stored data to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed.

In the above description, it is explained in what order the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. However, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not limited to the value of the winning random number counter C1. Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the same order.

A reserved number storage area is provided in the first reserved area Ra. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reserved area Ra is incremented by 1, and the process of shifting the data for the first reserved area Ra is performed. The value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reserved area Ra is decremented by one each time it is performed. The value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reserved area Ra is limited so as not to exceed the maximum value of 4. As a result, the latest number of pending information stored in the first pending area Ra is stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra. Similarly, a reserved number storage area is provided in the second reserved area Rb. Each time a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb is incremented by 1, and the process of shifting the data for the second reserved area Rb is performed. The value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb is decremented by one each time it is performed. The value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second reserved area Rb is limited so as not to exceed the maximum value of 4. As a result, the latest number of pending information stored in the second pending area Rb is stored in the pending number storage area of the second pending area Rb.

Next, the details of the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is the second value in the hold information storage area 64b as an acquired information storage unit at the timing of the ball entering. 1 reservation area Ra, and when a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b as an acquired information storage unit at the timing of the ball entry. .

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big win or a small win, the determination process The winning type is determined using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, if the winning lottery result is a big win or a small win, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win, the MPU 62 generates reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. is determined.

Reach means that, among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win may be established. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a small win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the ready-to-win line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns in the remaining pattern rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of reach performance. A ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation (reliability) for winning a jackpot is executed in super reach than in normal reach, and a reach performance in which expectation for winning a big win is higher in special reach than in super reach is executed.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34 It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra is changed when the variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started and when the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed when the variation display in the second symbol display unit 37b starts and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. used in determining the variation pattern in The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the content of the ready-to-win effect (that is, the type of ready-to-win) according to the type of variation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric role product open counter C4 is displayed in the electric role execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/failure table (electric role lottery winning/failure table) stored in the role lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric role lottery counter C4 are different. It is collated, and it is determined whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is a special Corresponds to random number information. Also, at least one of the value of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the winning type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb Also called pending information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for matching with the winning random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the winning random number counter C1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and is used to collate the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for matching with the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are separately provided. are stored as table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 stores the former success/failure table, that is, the success/failure table for special figure 1 winning lottery, and the latter success/failure table, that is, the success/failure table for special figure 2 winning lottery, in the ROM 63. It is stored in area 63a.

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for special figure winning lottery. Figure 260 (a) shows the success or failure table for the lottery per special figure 1, Figure 260 (b) shows the success or failure table for the lottery per special figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 260(a), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 for the special figure 1 winning lottery. Of the 3980 values from 0 to 3979, the values (20 to 3979) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. That is, according to the success/failure table for the lottery per special figure, the winning probability of the jackpot is set so that the probability of 20 appearing out of 3980, that is, 1/199. The "jackpot" is a success/fail result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, which is the second special electric accessory, is opened/closed.

As shown in FIG. 260(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the winning random number counter C1 for the special figure 2 winning lottery. In addition, 290 values of 20 to 309 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 that is a small hit in the success/failure table for the lottery for the special figure 2. Of the 3980 values from 0 to 3979, the values (310 to 3979) other than the 310 values from 0 to 309 are outliers. That is, according to the success/failure table for the lottery per special figure 2, the probability that 20 out of 3980 appear, that is, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to be 1/199, and 290 out of 3980 The odds of winning a small win are set to be 29/398.

The "small win" is a success or failure result that triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win in which the opening/closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57, which is the first special electric accessory, is opened and closed. In this embodiment, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is limited to one time, and the opening time of the opening/closing door 57b at one time is, for example, 1.8 seconds. . As a modified example, the number of times the open/close door 57b is opened in the mode in which the open/close door 57b is opened and closed may be set to two times or more instead of once. The opening time of the opening/closing door 57b of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 at the time of the small winning may be changed to 2.2 seconds instead of 1.8 seconds.

"Out" is the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, and the opening and closing based on the small win in which the opening and closing door 57b of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 is opened and closed. This is a pass/fail result that does not serve as a trigger for transition to the execution mode.

Comparing the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 1 in FIG. 260 (a) with the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 2 in FIG. The table is more advantageous for the player than the success/failure table for special figure 1 winning lottery in FIG. In addition, the winning probability of the small hit set in the success/failure table for the special figure 2 lottery is not limited to 29/398, and may be another value. The fact that the value of the winning random number counter C1 as the acquired special random number information matches the value for winning the jackpot set in the success/failure table for special figure winning lottery in FIG. 260 corresponds to satisfying the specific condition. . The value of the hit random number counter C1 as the acquired special random number information matches the numerical range set as a small hit in the success/failure table for the special figure 2 per lottery shown in FIG. 260(b). Information falls under certain other conditions

Next, the hit type will be described. A plurality of types of wins can be set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following two aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of wins.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode of normal electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of winning balls to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed one or more times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the opening and closing door It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or a ball enters the opening and closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open/close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no game balls enter. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can enter.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the frequency of ball occurrence is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning ball to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, game balls are shot in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support are provided so that the frequency of the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the continued situation. mode can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4. In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34a may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role opening winning is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role open winning is set more than in the low frequency support mode. may Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a single opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is set long. In addition, when the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times in the high-frequency support mode when the open state is won, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a ball entering the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of conditions for obtaining special random number information. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a so-called one-and-two mixed machine, and adopts a configuration in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to a high-probability mode that increases the winning probability in the winning lottery. not.

In this embodiment, when a big win or a small win is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the winning type is sorted by using the winning type counter C2. The distribution of winning types corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit. The distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit is referred to when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no small hit in the lottery result of the special figure 1 per lottery, the distribution table for the special figure 1 small per is not prepared.

As shown in Figure 261, in the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit, there is a special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. As the type, "1R small win" is set. Specifically, all of the values of the hit type counter C2 from "0 to 99" correspond to the 1R small hit.

A small win is a win/fail result in which the mode of opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win becomes the high frequency winning mode. For the 1R small win, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is one time (one round). In addition, the object of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small winning is the opening/closing door 57b of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory. As a modification, the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win may be changed to 2 or more times instead of 1 time (1 round).

In this embodiment, even if a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and then a game ball enters the V winning opening 59 to win a V winning big win, it is acquired when a small win is won. The hit types are sorted using the hit type counter C2. The distribution of winning types corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for big wins. FIG. 262(a) shows a distribution table for the special figure 1 jackpot, and FIG. 262(b) shows a distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot. The distribution table for the special figure 1 big hit is referred to when a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. - 特許庁The distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot is used when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, or when the special figure 2 lottery is won. , and then the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 59 to be referred to when winning the V winning jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the distribution table for the special figure 1 jackpot has a special figure 1 per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. "8R jackpot A" and "8R jackpot B" are set as hit types. Specifically, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", 50 values of 0 to 49 are "8R jackpot A", and values other than 50 values of 0 to 49 (50 ~ 99) is the “8R jackpot B”. As a result, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1-per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the 8R jackpot A is won with a probability of 1/2, and the remaining 1/ Win the 8R jackpot B with a probability of 2.

A "jackpot" is a hit/fail result in which the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode can be the high-frequency support mode. In the "8R jackpot", the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds). "A" following "8R jackpot" indicates that the game state shifts to the high support state by changing the support mode to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is limited to 20 times, which is the prescribed number of times. "B" following "8R jackpot" indicates that the game state is maintained in the low support state without shifting the support mode to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The target of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode is the second special electric accessory.

As shown in FIG. 262(b), in the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, Alternatively, "15R jackpot A" is set as a hit type when winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, and then winning a V prize jackpot by entering a game ball into the V prize opening 59. ing. Specifically, all of the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" are "15R jackpot A". As a result, when a big hit is won in a special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the 2 start opening 34, or a small win is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery, and then the V winning opening When a game ball enters 59 to win the V winning jackpot, there is a probability of 100% that the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the opening/closing door thereof. 36b is opened 15 times (15 rounds), and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode changes to the high-frequency support mode, thereby shifting the game state to the high support state. In this case, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is limited to 20 times, which is the prescribed number of times. The target of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode is the second special electric accessory.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. 2. It is different from the case where a big win is made based on the entry of the game ball into the start hole 34 (including the case where a small win results in a V winning big win), and the advantage for the player is clear. A difference is provided. That is, when a big hit is achieved based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 (including the case of a small hit and a V winning big hit), the game ball to the first start port 33 Compared to the case of winning a jackpot based on the number of balls entered, the probability of winning a jackpot A that allows a transition to a high support state is high, and the number of rounds is increased, which is highly advantageous for the player. ing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, two types of 8R jackpot A and 8R jackpot B are set as the jackpot types in the special figure 1 jackpot distribution table of FIG. , There is no need to limit the number of types to two. For example, three types including 4R jackpot A may be used, four types, or five or more types may be used. Furthermore, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is not necessarily limited to 8R, and may be any number of times. Also, in the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot in FIG. Instead of 15R for the number of times, other number of times may be used. In short, when winning the jackpot in the lottery for the special figure 2, or when winning the small prize and winning the V prize jackpot, it is more advantageous for the player than when winning the jackpot in the lottery for the special figure 1. If the probability is high, the number of types to be distributed in the distribution table for the special figure 1 jackpot and the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot, the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened, and the opening and closing execution mode end The subsequent game state may be any.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table (normal electric accessary product open lottery success/failure table) used when executing the normal electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 263(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for normal electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 263(a), in the success/failure table for normal electric accessory opening lottery (for low frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, which means that the short opening of the electric role has been won, is 0 to Two values of 1 are set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the normal electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role short open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. be.

FIG. 263(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for normal electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 263(b), in the success/failure table for the normal electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, which means that the opening of the chief electric officer has been won, is 0 to 0. 462 values of 461 are set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the normal electric accessory opening lottery is executed, the electric chief opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is won to open the electric officer in the high frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds. be.

In this way, according to the success/failure table for the normal electric accessory open lottery, the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low frequency support mode. there is As a result, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down toward the second starting port 34 enters the second starting port 34 with a probability close to 100%. It should be noted that the respective opening times in the case of winning the short-term opener and in the case of winning the long-term opener are not necessarily limited to the above examples, and other times may be used.

<<6-3>> Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 264 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 258) is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a functioning as storage units, various counter areas 94b functioning as storage units, lottery counter areas 94c functioning as storage units, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs and pictures displayed on the design display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns and display pictures, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command (effect command) as identification information to the display control device 100 in correspondence with the progress of the game. The process of transmitting the effect command as the identification information is executed as the identification information output process. When the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display data table to be used is selected from the work RAM 104 according to the effect content specified in the effect command. The display data table is stored in the display data table buffer in the work RAM 104, and the pointer for grasping the current execution position in the display data table is set to "0" indicating the initial position. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer is updated by adding 1, and the type of image data to be drawn next is based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer in the display data table. Also, the display position of the image data, the scaling ratio of the image data, etc. (drawing list) are updated, and the updated drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 105 .

Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the received drawing list, draws one frame of image from the read image data at the position and display method based on the drawing list, and displays the video. The drawn image is developed in one of the first frame buffer 107a and the second frame buffer 107b in the RAM 107, and the one frame image previously developed in the other frame buffer is displayed on the pattern display device. The image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 by outputting to 41 . The VDP 105 performs the one-frame image rendering process and the one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the pattern display device 41 (approximately 20 milliseconds in this embodiment). 20 milliseconds”).

The VDP 105 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of one frame image is completed. Each time the MPU 102 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing and instructs the VDP 105 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the display process of causing the pattern display device 41 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 and issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105. Therefore, the VDP 105 performs image drawing processing and display processing. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 102 at intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffers 107a and 107b in which the image information is stored.

As described above, after receiving commands (effect commands) corresponding to various effects from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 independently from the sound emission control device 90 performs identification corresponding to the effect commands. An image as information can be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display control device 100 receives commands (effect commands) corresponding to various effects from the sound emission control device 90, and displays a varying/stopping symbol row on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Processing for displaying Z1 to Z3, a screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs, and a background image appearing on the rear side (rear side) of pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed as required.

The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have been previously described with reference to FIG. Specifically, when the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win or a small win, a predetermined predetermined A combination of symbols is formed on the pay line L1. For example, if a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distributed hit type is 8R jackpot A, odd number patterns excluding 7 A row (111, 333, or 555) is formed on the valid line L1. For example, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distributed hit type is 8R jackpot B, even number patterns excluding 8 A row (222, 444, 666) is formed on the valid line L1. If a big win or a small win is won in the special figure 2 win lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the sorted win type is 15R big win A, 7 patterns are arranged (777 ) is formed on the effective line L1. If a small hit is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the distributed hit type is 15R jackpot A, the 8 pattern arrangement (888) It is formed on the effective line L1. It should be noted that this is just an example, and another arrangement (combination) of the same symbols may be used. Furthermore, instead of arranging the same symbols, a combination of symbols according to other specific rules (for example, serial numbers) may be used.

Next, a description will be given of the screen effect when Super Reach or Special Reach occurs. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are prepared as types of reach, as described above.

In this embodiment, the normal reach is a reach that does not involve switching the screen effect displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Reach occurs when two of the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with the same pattern, and the third pattern changes at a slower speed than before, just before the third pattern stops. Then it slows down even more. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that the game will stop as it is and that the game will be a big win. It may change to super reach or special reach during the production of normal reach, or restart after stopping in a state where the patterns are not aligned, and enter the reach again.

Super ready-to-win or special ready-to-win is ready-to-win accompanied by switching of screen effects displayed on the pattern display device 41 . In the case of super reach or special reach, like the normal reach, after two of the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped with the same pattern, the screen performance changes after the reach occurs. The screen effect at this time is composed of moving images prepared in advance with a warrior character as the main character. More specifically, the screen presentation consists of a battle presentation (hereinafter also referred to as a battle presentation) in which the warrior character as the main character and the enemy character confront each other, and a result announcement presentation in which the warrior character is victorious or defeated. be done. A warrior character is a character that can fight. A character is a person, an animal, or the like that appears in works such as novels, comics, and games. Characters may include not only living things but also inorganic objects (robots, automobiles, battleships, etc.). Furthermore, the character should be judged to be acting based on subjective thinking, and by using anthropomorphism, it can also include conceptual things (country, prefecture, region, territory, clan), etc. good.

Before the battle effect is announced to the player whether the result is advantageous to the player (for example, winning a big win in a winning lottery) or disadvantageous (for example, losing in a winning lottery). This is an effect (suggestive effect) that suggests to the player whether the result will be advantageous or disadvantageous. The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the player whether the result is favorable or unfavorable depending on whether the warrior character has won or lost. After the end of the result notification effect, the row of symbols in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is displayed.

The screen effect executed at the time of the special reach or super reach is to display the moving image described above. can be configured to

Background images are described below. The background image is a variable background that can appear during a specific variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (for example, during a variable display related to a super reach effect, a special reach effect, etc.), and not only during the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is classified into the state background that can appear even after the fluctuation stops.

Specifically, the variable background is, for example, the back side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (and the above state It is a peculiar background effect that can appear in the layer above the background).

The state background is a unique background effect corresponding to the game state, and appears on the back side (rear side) of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the variable display and after the variable display is stopped. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of performance modes are prepared, and as a state background corresponding to each performance mode, moving images having a story in which the aforementioned warrior character appears are prepared. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that the effect mode is switched as the game state changes. Specifically, in a low support state (also called a normal state) in which the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, a normal production mode is set, and for example, the beautiful girl character as a warrior character described above walks slowly. A state background showing the situation is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . When the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode and the game state switches to the high-support state, the rush-time production mode is set, and, for example, a beautiful girl character running at full speed is displayed. A state background is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . In addition, the state background displayed in the normal production mode is a background image that can identify the state in which the variable display based on the special figure 1 lottery can be executed. The state background displayed in the rush effect mode is a state background during a high support state that functions as identification information capable of identifying a state in which variable display based on the special figure 2 lottery can be executed.

Further, when the high support state ends, the display of the state background in the rush performance mode is stopped, and the state background different from the state background in the rush performance mode is continuously displayed. The state background may be the state background in the normal state described above, more specifically, for example, a state background in which a beautiful girl character as a warrior character walks slowly. It may be a unique state background different from the state background at the time of the state. The unique state background may be, for example, a moving image showing a resurrection state in which a beautiful girl character as a warrior character gets down on her knees and rises from a dejected state. The specific state background may be configured to be selected when there is a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state, or may be selected regardless of the presence or absence of the hold. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the unique state background is configured to be continuously displayed until the variable display related to the special 2 remaining hold ends. For this reason, the variable display based on the special 2 balance hold that is executed when there is a special 2 balance hold at the end of the high support state is displayed under the unique state background displayed at the end of the high support state become.

The various background images described above may be configured to be continuously displayed from the beginning to the end without interruption, or may be configured to be temporarily interrupted in the middle and then resumed. For example, consider the case where the status background is displayed on the back side (rear side) of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the variable display in the variation that the result of the winning lottery is the big win. In this case, in the game round related to the winning of the jackpot, the state background may be continuously displayed from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation without interruption, or from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. On the way to, for example, by inserting a variable background when super reach or special reach occurs, the display of the state background is temporarily interrupted, and then the display of the state background is restored. Even if the result of the winning lottery is out, similarly, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, for example, by inserting the fluctuation background when super reach or special reach occurs, the state background may be temporarily interrupted, and then the display of the status background may be resumed. In short, as long as the display of the state background is restored after the fluctuation is stopped, the display may be interrupted between the time when the fluctuation is started and the time when the fluctuation is stopped.

The various background images described above display the moving images described above, but may be configured to output sound and light associated with the moving images to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display control device 100 displays on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 a screen effect during the opening and closing execution mode that shifts to when a jackpot is won, and a background image of the screen effect. A background image during the jackpot game corresponding to the screen effect, which appears on the side (rear side), is displayed as necessary.

<<6-4>> Structure of external terminal board:
FIG. 265 is a block diagram showing the external terminal board 95 and the data display 9. As shown in FIG. The external terminal board 95 is provided with one input side connector 95a and a plurality of output side connectors 95b. The external terminal board 95 receives a signal (outer end output signal) output by the main controller 60 via the input side connector 95a, and based on the received signal, outputs various signals from each output side connector 95b. The information is output to the display device 9 and a management control device (not shown) on the game hall side.

The external terminal plate 95 is provided with a plurality of channels (CN) for external output. Each output side connector 95b corresponding to each channel (CN) and each input side connector 9a provided in the data display 9 are connected by cables 96. FIG. One signal is output to the outside from each output connector 95b.

In the external terminal plate 95, the jackpot signal 1 is output from the output side connector 95b corresponding to CN1, the jackpot signal 2 is output from the output side connector 95b corresponding to CN2, and the pattern determination signal is output from the output side connector 95b corresponding to CN3. is output, the first starting port entrance signal is output from the output side connector 95b corresponding to CN4, and the second starting port entrance signal is output from the output side connector 95b corresponding to CN5.

The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that functions as identification information and indicates that the jackpot game state is in progress. The external terminal plate 95 starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 (outputting a constant voltage) at the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot, and stops outputting the jackpot signal 1 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that functions as identification information, and indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (also called a high support state).

Specifically, the external terminal plate 95 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (output of a constant voltage) at the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot as a signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress, and executes the opening/closing operation. The output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the end of the mode.

In addition, the external terminal plate 95 outputs a jackpot signal 2 (at a constant voltage) when the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode as a signal indicating that the time-saving gaming state (high support state) is in progress. output), and stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. When the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, it is based on the jackpot that is executed when a jackpot is won in a prize lottery and the sorted prize is 8R jackpot A or 15R jackpot A. This corresponds to the end of the open/close execution mode. When the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, i) the change in the number of game times in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment). This corresponds to the time of stopping (that is, the time of starting the stop display), or ii) the time of starting the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the time of starting the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win.

The symbol determination signal is a signal that functions as identification information, and indicates that the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that has been variably displayed has been stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the output is started when the variable display ends and the stop display is displayed, and the output is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed.

The first start hole entry signal is a signal that functions as identification information and indicates that a game ball has entered the first start hole 33 . The external terminal plate 95 outputs a first starting hole entry signal when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 .

The second start hole entry signal is a signal that functions as identification information and indicates that a game ball has entered the second start hole 34 . The external terminal plate 95 outputs a second starting port entry signal triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 34 .

In addition to these signals, the external terminal board 95 functions as identification information, such as a prize ball signal indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) have been dispensed, and a normal motorized role signal. Each channel can output a security signal or the like indicating that a ball has entered a ball hole related to the electric accessory when the object or the special electric accessory is not activated.

The signal (outer end output signal) output from the main controller 60 to the external terminal board 95 is serial data having a multi-bit information amount. This serial data is converted into parallel data by an S/P conversion circuit (serial/parallel conversion circuit) (not shown) and input to the input side connector 95 a of the external terminal board 95 . For serial data, for example, the 1st bit corresponds to the jackpot signal 1 (if the 1st bit is "1", the jackpot signal 1 is output; if it is "0", the jackpot signal 1 is not output); It is data in such a form that the bit corresponds to the jackpot signal 2 (if the second bit is "1", the jackpot signal 2 is output, and if it is "0", the jackpot signal 2 is not output). Therefore, when such serial data is converted into parallel data and input to the external terminal board 95, the signal transmission elements such as photorelays provided corresponding to each CN are converted to parallel data according to the respective input signals. Switch between conducting/non-conducting. As a result, various signals are output in the form of normal level signals from the channel in which the photorelay is turned on.

<<6-5>> Structure of Data Display:
As shown in FIG. 265, the data display 9 receives various signals output by the external terminal board 95 . The data display device 9 includes a data display control device 97 and a data display device 98, and displays the operation status of the connected pachinko machine 10, security, and the like. The data display device 98 comprises a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the data display device 98 are controlled by the data display control device 97 . The data display device 98 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 99 of the data display device 98 included in the data display 9. As shown in FIG. As shown, the display surface 99 includes a number-of-starts display section 99a, a number-of-big-hit display section 99b, a large-hit-history display section 99c, and the like.

The number of times of start display portion 99a displays the number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of times of start) that the fluctuation of the symbol starts after the end of the previous jackpot game state and the fluctuation of the symbol stops and is fixed. Specifically, the data display control device 97 changes from non-receipt to reception of the pattern determination signal when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, or when switching from reception of the jackpot signal 1 to non-reception (OFF edge). The number of times of pattern variation is counted based on the switching (ON edge) of , and the count value is displayed on the number-of-starts display portion 99a of the display screen 99 provided in the data display device 98. FIG. In addition, the data display control device 97 changes the pattern based on the switching (ON edge) from non-receiving to receiving the pattern determination signal, starting from the switching (OFF edge) from the reception of the jackpot signal 1 to the non-reception. is counted, and the count value is displayed on the start count display portion 99a of the display screen 99 provided in the data display device 98. FIG.

The number of times of jackpot winnings of the day is displayed in the number of times of jackpot winning display portion 99b. Specifically, the data display control device 97 counts the number of jackpots based on the switching (ON edge) from non-receipt to reception of the jackpot signal 1, and displays the count value on the display surface 99 of the data display device 98. is displayed on the number-of-times-for-big-hit display portion 99b.

In the jackpot history display section 99c, the number of starts required until the first win is displayed by a bar graph. In addition, the number of consecutive residences is displayed below the bar graph. One scale of the bar graph is 100 times. The number of consecutive houses is the number of times that the jackpot is won continuously from the first hit. Here, "big win" includes not only the case of winning the big win in the winning lottery, but also the case of winning the small win in the winning lottery and then winning the V winning big win. "Consecutive jackpot winning" means winning a jackpot in a winning lottery related to game times during the period from the start of the high-frequency support mode to the transition to the low-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as the rush). be. The "first hit" means a jackpot win in a normal state, not in a high support state (including a case where a small win is won and then a V prize jackpot is won). The bar graphs are newer as they go from right to left.

According to the contents of the jackpot history display section 99c illustrated in FIG. 266, since the bar graph for the first hit five times before on the far right has 6 scales, the first hit five times before has 500 to 599 symbols. I know you need a change. Since the number under the bar graph is 6, it can be seen that 6 games have been played since the first hit 5 times before. Also, since the bar graph for the first win four times before has two scales, it can be seen that the first win four times before required 100 to 199 symbol changes. Since the number under the bar graph is 1, it can be seen that the first hits four times before were single hits without consecutive hits. Since the bar graph for the first win three times before has three scales, it can be seen that the first win three times before required 200 to 299 symbol changes. Since the number under the bar graph is 4, it can be seen that 4 consecutive games have been played since the first hit three times before. Since the bar graph for the first wins two times before has 5 scales, it can be seen that the first wins two times before required 400 to 499 symbol changes. Since the number under the bar graph is 3, it can be seen that the player has played three games in a row since the first hit two times before. Since the leftmost bar graph for the previous first win has 5 scales, it can be seen that 400 to 499 symbol changes were required for the previous first win. Since the number under the bar graph is 1, it can be seen that the previous first hit was a single hit, not a consecutive hit.

Specifically, the data display control device 97 switches from reception of the jackpot signal 1 to non-reception (OFF edge) as a starting point, the number of pattern variations is counted based on the switching from non-reception to reception of the pattern confirmation signal (ON edge), and based on the count value, a bar graph is displayed on the display screen 99 provided with the data display device 98. is displayed in the jackpot history display section 99c. The bar graph is completed with the switch (ON edge) from the non-receipt of the jackpot signal 1 to the reception as the end point.

In addition, the data display control device 97, starting from the switching (ON edge) from the non-reception of the jackpot signal 2 to the reception, based on the switching (ON edge) from the non-reception of the jackpot signal 1 to the reception, the number of jackpots is counted, and the value obtained by adding the value 1 to the count value up to the end point, which is the change from reception to non-reception of the jackpot signal 2 (OFF edge), is used as the number of consecutive houses. is displayed in the jackpot history display section 99c. The reason why the value 1 is added to the count value is to count the winning of the jackpot, which triggered the start of the output of the jackpot signal 2, as the first consecutive game.

The data display device 9 includes a pattern confirmation signal functioning as specific information, a jackpot signal 1 and a jackpot signal 2 functioning as specific information, as well as a first starting entrance entrance signal and a second starting entrance entrance signal functioning as specific information. A ball signal and a prize ball signal light are received to display the operation status of the connected pachinko machine 10, and a security signal is received to display security and the like.

<<6-6>> Overview of Processing by Gaming Machine:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 267 to 274. FIG.

<<6-6-1>> Transition between high and low support modes:
First, a case where the support mode changes from high to low will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33, and the distributed hit type is the 8R jackpot A. , the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (see FIG. 262(a)). On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1-per lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distributed hit type is 8R jackpot B, the support mode is low-frequency support. The mode is continued, and the support mode does not shift to the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 262(a)).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in a special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34, or a small winning in the special figure 2 winning lottery , and after that, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 59 to win the V winning jackpot, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (Fig. 262 (b) )reference). In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and then the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59, the support mode continues the low frequency support mode and supports. The mode never transitions to high frequency support mode.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of games played after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches a specified number. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the specified number of times is, for example, 20 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high frequency support mode is continued up to 20 times, which is the prescribed number of times, after shifting to the high frequency support mode. When the number of game rounds executed after the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches 20 times, which is the specified number of times, when the fluctuation of the game round stops (that is, after the variable display starts, the variable display ends and the display switches to stop display), the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Note that the specified number of times is not necessarily limited to the above 20 times, and may be another number of times.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric role item open lottery that is executed when the through gate 35 is passed is extremely high, 231/233, is normal. The electric accessory 34a is in the electric open state with high frequency. Therefore, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right and plays the game so as to enter the game ball into the second start hole 34 provided with the normal electric accessory 34a. .

<<6-6-2>> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a game state that transitions as the game progresses, a high support state and a low support state depending on the level of the support mode can be taken. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode (hereinafter referred to as "opening and closing execution mode based on ”) and an opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as “opening/closing execution mode based on a jackpot”) for opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory. . The game progresses while transitioning between these game states. The opening and closing execution mode based on the big win includes the opening and closing execution mode based on winning the big win in the winning lottery, and the opening and closing execution mode based on winning the big win in the winning lottery, and the opening and closing execution mode based on winning the big win in the winning lottery, and then entering the game ball into the V winning opening 59. This corresponds to both the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the big prize winning (the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a high frequency support mode flag specifying the support mode is stored in the various flag storage area 64g functioning as a storage unit of the RAM64. The support mode is identified as the low-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the support mode is identified as the high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON. Therefore, each of the above-described low support state and high support state is specified by the high frequency support mode flag. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow of the game progresses while switching between a low support state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal state) and a high support state by switching the high-frequency support mode flag.

FIG. 267 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the game is started, the support mode is initially in a low support state (also called a normal state) H1, which is a low frequency support mode. In the low support state H1, the recommended shooting mode is left-handed, and the player makes the game ball flow down to the left side of the game area PA by playing the game with left-handed, and the first start as the first ball entry part. A game ball is entered into the mouth 33. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the first start port 33, a winning lottery (lottery per special figure 1) is made for the special random number information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the winning A game cycle is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the lottery. In the drawing, the contents described in the broken-line rectangle H1a labeled as "left-handed" correspond to the left-handed game mode so far. The contents described within the broken-line rectangle H1b described as "Special 2 Remaining Pending Digestion" in the figure will be described later.

A game cycle executed in the low support state H1 is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 as a trigger. When the lottery result of the lottery for one special figure in the game round executed in the low support state H1 is lost, the low support state H1 is continued, and the player enters the game ball into the first start port 33, Execute a game round.

If a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 winning lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed mode H1a in the low support state H1, and the distributed win type is the 8R jackpot B, the game is played after the game round ends. The opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot is executed as a privilege given to the person. That is, it shifts from the low support state H1 to the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the big win.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right, prior to the round game occurring in the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the big win. The player hits to the right in accordance with the suggested performance, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a, and obtains a prize ball. The number of round games generated in the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the jackpot is 8 rounds.

When the opening/closing execution mode H2 based on the jackpot ends, the game moves to the low support state H1. That is, the low frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode H2 based on the big hit that has shifted from the low support state H1, since the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the game ball hardly enters the second start port 34, so the big win is achieved. When the open/close execution mode H2 based on the base is completed, the mode H1b during the special 2 remaining hold digestion in the low support state H1 is not performed, but the mode H1a during left hitting in the low support state H1 is performed.

On the other hand, in the low support state H1, even if a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round and the sorted win type is the 8R big win A, the bonus given to the player after the game round ends is based on the big win. The open/close execution mode is executed. That is, it shifts from the low support state H1 to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the big win.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right, prior to the round game occurring in the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot. The player hits right according to these suggestive effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and enters the game ball into the big winning hole 36a to obtain a prize ball. When the 8R jackpot A is won and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot, the number of round games generated is 8 times (8 rounds).

When the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the high support state H4. That is, the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode (limited to 20 times, which is the specified number of times).

In the high support state H4, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect for prompting the player to hit to the right. In the high support state H4, the player makes the game ball flow down to the right side of the game area PA by hitting to the right according to the suggested effect, and the game ball flows to the second starting port 34 as the second ball entry part. let the ball in Since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the high support state H4, there is a 231/233 possibility that the result of the electric accessory open lottery that is executed upon passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric role open winning. , the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently in the electric open state. Therefore, in the high support state H4, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. - 特許庁When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery (special figure 2 winning lottery) is made for the special random number information acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34, and the winning A game cycle is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the lottery. That is, in the high support state H4, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. You can receive a winning lottery in a state where it is difficult to decrease.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game cycle executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 in the high support state H4, the sorted winning type is limited to the 15R big win A ( See the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot in FIG. When the 15R jackpot A is won and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot, the number of round games generated is 15 times (15 rounds).

When a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high support state H4, an opening and closing execution mode for opening and closing the large winning opening 57a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory. (Opening and closing execution mode based on a small hit) It shifts to H5.

In an opening/closing execution mode H5 based on a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 executes a V aim notification performance in which the player is recommended to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59 by playing the game with the right hand. . In the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, the player executes a right-handed hit according to the V aim notification effect, thereby causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and enter the game ball into the V winning opening 59. Let In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small hit, the number of times the opening/closing door 57b of the small hit dedicated variable winning device 57 is in the open state is one time (one round).

In the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, the game is played with the right hand, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, and the big winning hole 57a. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 59 provided inside, it wins the V winning jackpot, and opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory based on the jackpot. Execution mode H3 is entered. A predetermined number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls by entering the game balls into the big winning hole 57a opened by the operation of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small win, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 within a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) after winning the small win, the V winning big win is won. Otherwise, the opening/closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot is not executed. As a result, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 59, the state returns to the high support state H4.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the high support state H4 is lost, the high support state H4 is continued, the player enters the game ball into the second start port 34, and starts the game round. let it run. As described above, the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode continues until 20 times, which is the prescribed number of times, has been played.

In the high support state H4, when neither the big win nor the small win is won in the winning lottery and the number of execution times of the game rounds executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 20 times which is the specified number of times, the game rounds are executed. , the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high support state H4 is changed to the low support state H1.

In the present embodiment, as described above, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the 8R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot A ends, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for the specified number of times, and the control mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode when the specified number of times is completed. This series of processes functions as a control mode switching process.

In the present embodiment, as described above, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are each retained, and furthermore, the retention as an acquired information storage unit is performed. When the reservation information is stored in both the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb of the information storage area 64b (FIG. 259), it is stored in the second reservation area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The configuration is such that the winning lottery for the pending information is preferentially executed. For this reason, in the low support state H1, immediately after the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, if there is hold information remaining in the second reserve area Rb, this remaining hold information (hereinafter referred to as special 2 A winning lottery is preferentially carried out by calling a remaining reservation), and a game cycle is executed to notify the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery. In the figure, the content described in the broken-line rectangle H1b labeled "Toku 2 Remaining Reservation Digesting" corresponds to the mode of the game with the special Remaining Remaining Reservation. That is, immediately after transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, if there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the mode will be shifted to the mode H1b in which the special 2 remaining reserve is being digested. It should be noted that immediately after the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, if there is no Special 2 remaining hold, the state shifts to the left-handed state H1a.

In the mode H1b during the consumption of special 2 remaining reserve in the low support state H1, a win lottery is performed by the special 2 remaining reserve, and a game cycle is executed for informing the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, the winning lottery due to the special 2 remaining reservation uses the winning lottery table for the special figure 2 winning lottery shown in FIG.

Mode H6a during consumption of special 2 remaining reserves continues until the number of game times (up to 4 times) corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reserves, but a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game times before reaching this number of times. When it does, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode based on the small winning) H5 for opening and closing the big winning opening 57a of the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory.

<<6-6-3>> Continuity rate:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the game flow as described above, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low support state H1, and the state shifts to the high support state H4 by being distributed to the 8R jackpot A, the next time Next, the probability of winning a big win (including the case of winning a small win and then winning a V-winning big win) (hereinafter referred to as "continuation rate") will be described below.

The continuation rate can be obtained by the following procedure. First, in the special figure 2 winning lottery executed in the high support state H4, the probability A that neither the big hit nor the small winning is won is obtained from the success/failure table for the special figure 2 winning lottery shown in FIG. 260(b). The probability A is obtained as (3980-310)/3980.

Next, from the probability A, the probability B that neither the big win nor the small win is won in the special figure 2 winning lottery in all the game rounds within the prescribed number of times (20 times) is obtained. Specifically, the probability B is calculated according to the following equation (1).
B={(3980-310)/3980}^20...(1)
However, "^" is an operator representing exponentiation.

The persistence rate is then calculated by subtracting the probability B from one. In summary, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following equation (2).

Retention rate = 1-{(3980-310)/3980}^20...(2)

Calculating the formula (2) gives a continuation rate of about 80%.

It should be noted that the continuation rate obtained according to the formula (2) is for the case where there is no Special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state H4. Actually, there are many cases where there is a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state H4, and in this case the continuation rate is higher than the value obtained according to the formula (2). Assuming that the maximum number of T2 remaining reservations is 4, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following equation (3).

Retention rate = 1-{(3980-310)/3980}^24...(3)

Calculating the formula (3) gives a continuation rate of about 86%. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can achieve a high continuation rate of about 80% to about 86%.

Here, a problem in the conventional gaming machine will be described, and how the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment solves the problem will be described in detail.

A conventional gaming machine is known to have an auxiliary member capable of changing the probability of winning a prize to a predetermined starting hole for the purpose of improving game playability. The auxiliary member is controlled so as to increase the probability of winning a prize at a predetermined starting port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game, thereby shifting to a winning easy control mode in which winning at a predetermined starting port is facilitated. do. After the transition to the easy winning control mode, the easy winning control mode is terminated when the end condition is met, such as when the fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball to the predetermined starting port is performed a predetermined number of times.

During the period of the easy winning control mode, a signal for identifying the state corresponding to the period is output to the hall computer or the like, thereby effecting effects and data display by the hall equipment.

However, in conventional gaming machines, no countermeasures are taken against starting suspension based on the auxiliary member at the end of the period of the easy winning control mode, and the identification performance of various game states is more difficult. Good functionality is desired.

This gaming machine was created to solve the above-described conventional problems, and aims to enhance the interest of the game by improving the performance of identifying the game state. Specifically, this gaming machine solves the following problems.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of consecutive games is displayed in the jackpot history display section 99c of the display screen 99 of the data display device 98, as described above. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment achieves a high continuation rate of about 80% to about 86%. I can expect it. For the player, it is a great pleasure for the player to continue winning the jackpot without a break and increase the number of consecutive games, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

However, in the configuration of the conventional pachinko machine, although the jackpot was won in the jackpot lottery for the special random number information acquired in the high support state H4 which shifted after the jackpot win and the opening/closing execution mode ended, the data display 9 There was a possibility that the jackpot winning could not be counted as a consecutive game related to the high support state H4. Specifically, it is as follows.

The number of executions of games in which the high support state H4 continues reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment), and immediately after the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, there is a special 2 remaining hold. Think and see. In this case, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 stops when the number of game rounds reaches the specified number of times and the variation stops, the data display 9 stops counting the number of consecutive games. For this reason, immediately after the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, the special 2 balance reserve remains, and the big win is won in the winning lottery due to the special 2 balance reserve (I won the small win and won the V prize big win. ), the jackpot win is recognized as the first jackpot win without being counted in the number of consecutive homes in the last high support state H4 on the data display 9.例文帳に追加As a result, in the configuration of the conventional pachinko machine, the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed appropriately on the data display 9, even though the jackpot is won by the special 2 variation based on the time-saving game, and the player is not informed. There was a problem of giving discomfort.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by having a special configuration, in the winning lottery for the special 2 remaining hold acquired in the high support state H4 that has shifted after the jackpot winning and the opening and closing execution mode ends When the jackpot is won, the jackpot win can be counted as a consecutive game related to the high support state H4, so that the number of consecutive games can be properly displayed on the data display 9, and the player can be informed. I made it possible to prevent giving discomfort. The configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

<<6-6-4>> Time chart:
FIG. 268 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In the figure, from the upper stage to the lower stage, how the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, and the jackpot signal 2 change over time.

The display mode of the pattern variation can take the following display modes (i) to (iii).

(i) During variation in a game round: Display mode from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b until the variable display stops and becomes a stop display (ii) Game round During confirmation: Display mode from the start of the stop display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the stop display (iii) Non-game time: The first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b Display mode from the end of the stop display of the 2-symbol display part 37b to the start of the next variable display

The support mode can take a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode. Jackpot signal 1 can take output and stop. The jackpot signal 2 can take output and stop.

In the low support state H1, when a big win is won in a winning lottery in a game round and the sorted win type is 8R big win A, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory opens and closes. at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot), the support mode is shifted from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode (limited to 20 times, which is the specified number of times) (time t1). It should be noted that the numbers shown in [ ] in the figure (eg [1], [12]) indicate the number of times the game has been executed since the high frequency support mode started (after the high support state started). show.

The jackpot signal 1 is output until time t1 (end of opening/closing execution mode), and stops at time t1. The process of outputting the jackpot signal 1 as the special game information functions as the special game information output process.

On the other hand, at time t1, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started. That is, at the time t1 when the high support state is started, the output of the jackpot signal 2 as the identification information is started. The process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 as the identification information functions as the identification information output process.

FIG. 268 shows a case where a jackpot is won in a winning lottery within a prescribed number of game rounds (in the illustrated example, the 12th game round) after the start of the high-frequency support mode. The opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution based on the big win) in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 performs the opening/closing operation at the timing when the confirmation period in the game round executed for the 12th time the jackpot has been won ends (the confirmation time has elapsed). mode) is started, and the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t2).

Also, at time t2, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is started. That is, at time t2 when the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win starts, the jackpot signal 1 starts to be output.

On the other hand, at time t2, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. That is, at time t2 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the output of the jackpot signal 2 as identification information is stopped. However, at time t2, since the opening and closing execution mode is started when the jackpot is won in the win lottery in the 12th game round after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the jackpot as identification information is started. Start outputting signal 2 again. Therefore, at time t2, the output of the jackpot signal 2 as identification information is not interrupted.

During the period from time t1 to time t2 when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 as identification information functions as the identification information output process. Processing for stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode functions as output stop processing.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268, after the high-frequency support mode is started, the number of game rounds within a specified number of times (that is, the number of game rounds in the high support state) The output of the jackpot signal 2 is not interrupted when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. For this reason, the data display 9 can count the winning of the jackpot as the number of consecutive games during the high support state (during the rush). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot win is won in a win lottery in a game round in a high support state, the data display 9 can recognize and display that the jackpot win continues without interruption of the game. can. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 269 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and a V winning big win is won. In the drawing, from the top to the bottom, the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2, and how the jackpot signal 2 of the comparative example changes over time.

In FIG. 269, after the high-frequency support mode is started, the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the game round within the specified number of times (the example shown in the figure is the 12th game round), and then the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 59. This shows a case where the V winning jackpot is won by entering the ball. At the timing when the finalization in the game round executed in the twelfth time when the small prize is won ends (the fixed time has passed), the opening and closing door 57b of the small prize dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory opens and closes. is started (opening/closing execution mode based on a small win), and the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t12).

At time t12, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. That is, at time t12 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. Although the jackpot signal 2 of the comparative example is shown at the bottom of FIG. 269, this comparative example is also configured to stop the output of the jackpot signal 2 at time t12. According to the configuration of this comparative example, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped from time t12 until the time when the game ball enters the V prize opening 59 and the V prize jackpot is won (time t13), and the time when the V prize jackpot is won. At t13, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started. For this reason, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is interrupted between time t12 and time t13, and the data display 9 indicates that the V prize jackpot winning is in a high support state (during rush). ) could not be counted as the number of consecutive residences. As a result, according to the comparative example, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment,
a) When a small win is won in a high support state, start outputting a big win signal 2 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win (time t12),
b) After that, when a game ball enters the V winning hole 59 and wins the V winning jackpot, a jackpot signal is generated at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) (time t13). The output of 1 is started and the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started.

In addition, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 has already started at time t12, the start of the output of the jackpot signal 2 at the time t13 in b) is to start the output of the jackpot signal 2 again. Therefore, during the period from time t12 to time t13, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is not interrupted.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 269, the number of game rounds within a specified number of times after the start of the high-frequency support mode (that is, the number of game rounds in the high support state) Winning a small win in a winning lottery, and then winning a V winning jackpot by entering a game ball into a V winning opening 59, V winning from the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win (time t12). The output of the jackpot signal 2 is not interrupted during the period until the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot (time t13). For this reason, the data display 9 can count the winning of the jackpot as the number of consecutive games during the high support state (during the rush). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small win is made in a winning lottery in a game round in a high support state and a V prize big win is won, if the big win continues without a break in the series, the data display 9 can be recognized and displayed. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 270 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, but a V winning big win is not won. In the figure, from the upper stage to the lower stage, how the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, and the jackpot signal 2 change over time.

In FIG. 270, after the high-frequency support mode is started, a game ball is won in a winning lottery within a specified number of times (the example shown is the 12th game time), and then a game ball is entered into the V winning opening 59. does not enter the ball and does not win the V prize jackpot. Similar to the case shown in FIG. 269, at the timing when the determination in the game round executed in the twelfth time when the small hit is won ends (the fixed time has passed), the small hit dedicated variable as the first special electric accessory The opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on a small win) in which the opening/closing door 57b of the winning device 57 executes opening/closing operation is started, and the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t12).

At time t12, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. That is, at time t12 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, further, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 269, when a small hit is won in the high support state, a jackpot signal is generated at the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit (time t12). 2 starts outputting.

In the case of FIG. 270, after that, in the open/close execution mode H5 based on the small win, the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 during one round in which the opening/closing door 57b of the small win dedicated variable winning device 57 is in an open state. Therefore, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at time t23, which is the end of the opening/closing execution mode H5 based on the small prize. At time t23, the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) for opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory is not executed, so the support mode is high. Return to frequency support mode.

Also, at time t23, output of the jackpot signal 2 is restarted with the return to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, during the period from time t12 to time t23, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is not interrupted.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. If a small win is won in the winning lottery, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 59 after that and the V winning jackpot is not won, the period of the opening and closing execution mode based on the small win (time t12 to time t23 ), the output of the jackpot signal 2 is not interrupted. For this reason, the small win won in the 12th game round did not win the V prize jackpot, so it is not counted as the number of consecutive games during the high support state (during rush), but after that, in the game round within the prescribed number of times In the case of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery (including cases where a small win in the winning lottery results in a V-winning jackpot), the winning of the jackpot can be counted as the number of consecutive homes in a high support state (during a rush). Become. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small winning lottery is not won in a winning lottery in a game round in a high support state, and a V winning big win is not won, and a big win is won in a game round within a prescribed number of times thereafter. In this case, it is possible to make the data display 9 recognize and display that the jackpot winning continues without interruption of the series. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 271 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment loses in all game rounds in the high support state (no special 2 remaining hold). In the drawing, from the top to the bottom, the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, and how the jackpot signal 2 changes over time. The jackpot signal 2 extension flag is a flag for extending the output period of the jackpot signal 2 when there is a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state H4. The jackpot signal 2 extension flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 258) of the RAM64.

When the result of winning lottery is lost in all the game rounds within the specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment) in which the high support state continues, the game round reaching the specified number of times (the 20th game round) When the fluctuation display of has stopped and the display has stopped (that is, when the fluctuation has stopped), the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t32).

Also, at time t32, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. That is, at time t32 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. The process of stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 as the identification information at the time t32 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the high support state, functions as the output stop process.

Immediately after the number of executions of games in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment) and the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1 occurs, when there is no special 2 remaining hold , the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is never switched from OFF to ON. Therefore, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is not extended from time t32.

After the time t32 has passed, the game round (20th game round) in which the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues has reached the specified number of times is being determined, and then the game round is finished, and then the non-game round is completed. After a period of time, the game is restarted with hitting left in the mode H1a (FIG. 267) during hitting left in the low support state H1. As a result, the special figure 1 game round starts from time t33.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. At time t32 when the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, which is the time when the fluctuation of the game times is stopped when the number of times of execution of the continuous game times reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment), the jackpot is won. Stop outputting signal 2. For this reason, even if a jackpot win is won in the winning lottery of the special figure 1 after time t32, the jackpot win is not counted as the number of consecutive games during the high support state (during rush). Since the state of the rush ended at time t32, it is correct not to count the winning of the jackpot as the number of consecutive games during the rush. Therefore, even if a jackpot win is won in the winning lottery of the special figure 1 after time t32 and is not counted as the number of consecutive games during the rush, the player's interest in the game is not reduced.

FIG. 272 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment with the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state. In the figure, from the top to the bottom, how the pattern variation display mode, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, the jackpot signal 2, and the comparative jackpot signal 2 change over time. or In the illustrated example, there are three special 2 remaining reserves at the end of the high support state, and the jackpot is won in the third special 2 remaining reserve. The number of special 2 remaining reservations at the end of the high support state is the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state (second start reservation number RbN). can be determined from The display mode of the symbol variation shown in the upper row is a variation display based on a lottery per special figure 2, and functions as a specific variation display.

When the result of winning lottery is lost in all the game rounds within the specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment) in which the high support state continues, the game round reaching the specified number of times (the 20th game round) When the fluctuation display of has stopped and the display has stopped (that is, when the fluctuation has stopped), the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t42).

Immediately after the number of executions of games in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment) and the high support state H4 shifts to the low support state H1, when there is a special 2 remaining hold , the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is switched from OFF to ON (time t42).

The jackpot signal 2 extension flag is a flag for extending the output period of the jackpot signal 2 when there is a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state H4, as described above. Specifically, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag a) changes from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1 when the number of executions of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment). If there is a special 2 remaining hold immediately after the transition, it is switched to ON when the fluctuation of the game round that reaches the specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment) stops, b) based on the last one of the special 2 remaining holds A variable prize winning device 36 as a second special electric accessory that shifts at the end of the game round (at the end of the fixed time), or when a jackpot is won with a special 2 balance reserved, or when a small win is won and a V prize jackpot is won. is switched to OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b executes the opening/closing operation. In this embodiment, the value (the second start pending number RbN) is set as the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN in the special 2 remaining reserved quantity storage area, the value of the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is started, and the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN is 1 or more, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output.

Here, consider a configuration that does not include the jackpot signal 2 extension flag as a comparative example. According to the configuration of the comparative example, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at time t42. That is, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the time when the fluctuation of the game times is stopped when the number of game times executed in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number (20 times in this embodiment). At time t42, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. The state of stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues until the jackpot is won with the special 2 balance reserved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is provided, and when the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is switched from OFF to ON, the jackpot signal is executed during the execution period of the variation for the special 2 remaining hold. 2 output is provided. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is switched from OFF to ON at time t42, when there is a special 2 remaining hold, that is, the transition from the high support state to the low support state When the number of special 2 remaining reservations XRbN, which sets the number of special 2 remaining reservations at the timing of , is 1 or more, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is extended even after time t42.

After the time t42, when the success or failure result of the winning lottery based on the special 2 remaining reservation is a big hit, the finalization of the game round based on the third special 2 remaining reservation in which the jackpot is won ends (the confirmation time has elapsed ), the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 starts an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing operation is executed, and the output of the jackpot signal 1 is started (time t43).

Furthermore, at time t43, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is turned OFF. At time t43, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped based on the turn-off of the jackpot signal 2 extension flag. However, at time t43, since the opening/closing execution mode is started, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started again.

That is, from the time when the fluctuation of the game rounds stopped (time t42) when the number of executions of the game rounds in which the high support state continues reached the specified number (20 times in this embodiment), the winning lottery in the game rounds related to the special 2 remaining hold The jackpot signal 2 is continuously output without interruption during the period up to the start of the opening/closing execution mode (time t43) which is executed when the jackpot is won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 during the period from time t42 to time t43 is different from the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 up to time t42. . Specifically, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 until time t42 was a normal level signal mode (hereinafter referred to as "normal output mode") that continuously outputs a constant voltage. The output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in the period from time t42 to time t43 is a pulse signal mode (hereinafter referred to as "special output mode") that repeatedly switches between constant voltage output and output stop in a short period of time. bottom. The jackpot signal 2 of the special output mode functions as specific information capable of identifying the state in which the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state can be executed.

When the data indicator 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 is output in both the normal output mode and the special output mode for the received jackpot signal 2, and can distinguish which mode they are. can distinguish the two as different states. Specifically, the data indicator 9 detects the switching (OFF edge) from the reception of the jackpot signal 2 to the non-reception, and then detects the switching (ON edge) from the non-reception of the jackpot signal 2 to the reception. When the period until detection is equal to or less than a predetermined time, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is regarded as continuing, and when the period is repeated a predetermined number of times or more, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode. It is determined that With this configuration, the data display 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 changes from the normal output mode to the special output mode and continues to be output during the period from time t42 to time t43. . In addition, the data display 9 can also execute a special effect during the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode. As a special effect, when it is determined that the output of the jackpot signal 2 has switched from the normal output mode to the special output mode (after time t42), for example, a female character appears, There is a chance for you! Furthermore, the audio accompanying the moving image may be output from a speaker included in the data display 9 .

The data indicator 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 is output in both the normal output mode and the special output mode for the received jackpot signal 2, but cannot distinguish which mode it is. In the case of the specifications, the above-mentioned special effect cannot be performed, but the extension of the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues the output of the jackpot signal 2 during the period from time t42 to time t43. It can be determined that For this reason, in this case as well, when a jackpot win is won in a win lottery with a special 2 remaining balance reserved, the data display indicates that the jackpot win should be counted in the number of consecutive homes in the immediately preceding high support state H4. The device 9 can be made to recognize and display.

In addition, when the data display 9 determines that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery executed based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state based on the output mode of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 ( It is also possible to execute a special effect when winning a small prize and then winning a V prize jackpot. As a special effect in this case, when a change (ON edge) from non-receipt of the jackpot signal 1 to reception is detected while the jackpot signal 2 is being output in a special output mode (time t43 later), the data display device 98 may display a specific image, for example, an image (moving image) in which a female character appears and the female character shouts, "It's just last minute Renso! That's great!" Further, the audio accompanying the moving image may be output from a speaker included in the data display 9 . In addition, instead of the above configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state (the small winning is won, and then the V winning In other words, at the timing when the output of the jackpot signal 2 is shifted from the special output mode to the normal output mode, and the output of the jackpot signal 1 is started from the stopped state (time t43), a specific image, for example , a signal (specific image display instruction signal) for displaying an image (moving image) in which a female character appears and the female character shouts, "It's barely Renso, good job!" It may be configured to output to the device 9. Further, a signal for outputting a specific sound accompanying the moving image from a speaker included in the data display 9 may be output from the external terminal board 95 to the data display 9 . According to these configurations, it is possible to cause the data display device 9 to perform various displays and output various sounds, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

As described in detail above, in the configuration of the comparative example, as illustrated at the bottom of FIG. A period from when the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode (time t42) to when the open/close execution mode is started (time t43) when the big win is won in the winning lottery in the game round related to the special 2 remaining hold. , the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. As described above, the data display control device 97 counts the jackpots based on the switching (ON edge) from non-receipt to reception of the jackpot signal 1 during the period in which the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues. The number of consecutive residences is calculated based on the number of times. For this reason, in the configuration of the comparative example, the special 2 balance reserve remains immediately after the transition from the high support state H4 to the low support state H1, and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery due to the special 2 balance reserve, the jackpot is won. , Since the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped, the data display 9 does not count the number of consecutive houses in the previous high support state H4, and it is recognized as the first jackpot win. will be As a result, in the configuration of the comparative example, there was a problem that the number of consecutive games could not be displayed appropriately on the data display 9, giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. In the period from when the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode (time t42) to when the open/close execution mode is started (time t43) after winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round related to the special 2 remaining hold, Since the jackpot signal 2 is output in the above-described special output mode, the data display 9 continues to output the jackpot signal 2 during the period from time t42 to time t43 following the period up to time t42. It can be determined that For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot win is won in a win lottery with special 2 remaining reserve, the jackpot win should be counted as the number of consecutive players in the last high support state H4. , the data display 9 can be made to recognize and display. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode during the period from time t42 to time t43. , a video in which a female character shouts, "There's still a chance with a special 2 balance pending!" The image can be displayed on data display 98 . Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 273 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won with special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In the figure, from the top to the bottom, how the pattern variation display mode, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, the jackpot signal 2, and the comparative jackpot signal 2 change over time. or In the illustrated example, there are three special 2 remaining reserves at the end of the high support state, and the small winning is won in the third special 2 remaining reserve. The number of special 2 remaining reservations at the end of the high support state is the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state (second start reservation number RbN). It can be determined from the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN that is set. As a modification, the number of special 2 remaining suspensions at the end of the high support state may be determined from the second start suspension number RbN at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state.

Before and after time t42, each change in the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, the jackpot signal 2, and the jackpot signal 2 of the comparative example is the jackpot with the special 2 remaining hold shown in FIG. It is the same as if you were elected.

After the time t42, when the result of the winning lottery based on the special 2 remaining reserve is a small win at time t53, the decision during the game round related to the third special 2 remaining reserve in which the small win is won is completed. At the timing (when the fixed time has elapsed), the open/close door 57b of the small hit dedicated variable winning device 57, which is the first special electric accessory, starts the open/close execution mode based on the small hit to perform the opening/closing operation (time t53).

After the time t53, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 59 and the V winning jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory performs opening/closing operation. The execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is started (time t54).

Furthermore, at time t54, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is started, and the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is turned OFF. At time t54, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped based on the turning off of the jackpot signal 2 extension flag. However, at time t54, since the opening/closing execution mode is started, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is started again.

That is, from the time when the fluctuation of the game rounds stopped (time t42) when the number of executions of the game rounds in which the high support state continues reached the specified number (20 times in this embodiment), the winning lottery in the game rounds related to the special 2 remaining hold The jackpot signal 2 is continuously output during the period up to the start of the opening/closing execution mode (time t54) which is executed when the small prize is won and the V prize jackpot is won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in the period from the time t42 to the time t54 is the same as when the jackpot is won with the special 2 balance pending (Fig. 272), until the time t42. This is different from the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in (1). Specifically, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 until time t42 is a normal output mode in which a constant voltage is continuously output, whereas the jackpot signal 2 is output during the period from time t42 to time t54. The output mode is the above-described special output mode in which output is repeatedly switched between constant voltage output and output stop in a short period of time.

As described above, the data indicator 9 can determine both the normal output mode and the special output mode of the received jackpot signal 2 as output of the jackpot signal 2, and It is a configuration that can distinguish whether it is With this configuration, the data display 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 changes from the normal output mode to the special output mode and continues to be output during the period from time t42 to time t54. In addition, the data display 9 can also execute a special effect during the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode. Examples of special effects are also as explained above.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. When (time t42) shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode (time t42), opening and closing based on the V winning jackpot by winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V winning jackpot in a game round related to special 2 remaining hold. During the period until the run mode is started (time t54), since the jackpot signal 2 as the specific information is output in the above-described special output mode, the data display 9 continues until the time t42. During the period from time t42 to time t54, it can be determined that the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small win is won in the winning lottery with the special 2 remaining reserve and a V winning big win is won, the big winning (V winning big win) is the same as the previous high support. The data display 9 can be made to recognize and display that it should be counted in the number of consecutive residences in the state H4. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the number of consecutive games continues to be won and the number of consecutive games increases even though the game is a jackpot winning due to the special 2 fluctuation based on the time-saving game. Interest in games can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode during the period from time t42 to time t54. , a video in which a female character shouts, "There's still a chance with a special 2 balance pending!" The image can be displayed on data display 98 . Further, the audio accompanying the moving image may be output from a speaker included in the data display 9 . Therefore, with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 274 is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment loses in all game rounds based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state. In the figure, from the top to the bottom, how the pattern variation display mode, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, the jackpot signal 2, and the comparative jackpot signal 2 change over time. or In the illustrated example, there are three special 2 remaining reserves at the end of the high support state, and the game is lost in all game rounds based on the three special 2 remaining reserves. The number of special 2 remaining reservations at the end of the high support state is the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state (second start reservation number RbN). can be determined from

Before and after time t42, each change in the display mode of the symbol variation, the support mode, the jackpot signal 1, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag, the jackpot signal 2, and the jackpot signal 2 of the comparative example is the jackpot with the special 2 remaining hold shown in FIG. It is the same as if you were elected.

After time t42, if all the results of the winning lottery based on the special 2 remaining hold are lost, at the end of the game round based on the last one, the third special 2 remaining hold (fixed time end), the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is switched from OFF to ON (time t63).

At time t63, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped based on the turning off of the jackpot signal 2 extension flag. That is, the jackpot signal 2 is displayed until the end of the confirmation process after the last variation display of the number of special 2 remaining pending fluctuation displays that remain at the end of the high support state H4 is completed and the stop display is completed (determined (until the end of time), and stops outputting at time t63 when the period of determination has elapsed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in the period from the time t42 to the time t63 is the same as when the jackpot is won with the special 2 balance pending (Fig. 272), until the time t42. This is different from the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in (1). Specifically, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 until time t42 is a mode in which a constant voltage is continuously output (hereinafter referred to as "normal output mode"), whereas from time t42 The output mode of the jackpot signal 2 during the period up to t63 is a mode in which the output is repeatedly switched between the output of a constant voltage and the output stop (hereinafter referred to as "special output mode").

As described above, the data indicator 9 can determine both the normal output mode and the special output mode of the received jackpot signal 2 as output of the jackpot signal 2, and It is a configuration that can distinguish whether it is With this configuration, the data display 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 is continuous without interruption when the jackpot signal 2 is in the special output mode following the normal output mode. Further, the data display 9 can determine that the jackpot signal 2 is changed from the normal output mode to the special output mode and continues to be output during the period from time t42 to time t63. It is also possible to execute a special effect during the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is output in the special output mode. For example, the data display device 98 may be configured to display a moving image in which a female character appears and shouts, "You still have a chance with the special 2 balance pending!"

After the time t63 has elapsed, the game is resumed by hitting left in the mode H1a (FIG. 267) during the hitting to the left in the low support state H1 after the non-game period. As a result, the special figure 1 game round starts from time t64.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is changed from time t42, which is the end of the high support state, to the number of special 2 remaining pending numbers remaining at the end of the high support state After the last variable display of is completed and the display is stopped, the output is continued without interruption until the time t63 when the finalization is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the output is temporarily stopped in the middle of and then resumed. In short, at the end of the confirmation display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state, if the jackpot signal 2 is output, other than at the end of the confirmation display in each game round The output of the jackpot signal 2 may be stopped during all or part of the period of . Specifically, for example, during the variable display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped, and during the fixed display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold It may be configured to output the jackpot signal 2 .

Similarly, when the jackpot is won with special 2 balance pending at the end of the high sapo state illustrated in FIG. The jackpot signal 2 of the special output mode does not necessarily need to be continuously output from the beginning (time t42) to the end (time t43 in FIG. 272, time t54 in FIG. 273) without interruption. A configuration may be adopted in which the output is temporarily stopped in the middle of , and then the output is restored. In short, at the end of the confirmation display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state, if the jackpot signal 2 is output, other than at the end of the confirmation display in each game round The output of the jackpot signal 2 may be stopped during all or part of the period of . Specifically, for example, during the variable display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped, and during the fixed display in each game round based on the special 2 remaining hold It may be configured to output the jackpot signal 2 .

In summary, the mode of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 may include a mode in which the output is temporarily stopped and then resumed. A mode in which the output is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also one mode included in the predetermined continuation mode. Incidentally, the "jackpot signal 2" referred to here is not limited to the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode as the specific information, but the same applies to the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode as the identification information. That is, the mode of continuously outputting the identification information or the specific information may include a mode in which the output is temporarily stopped and then resumed.

In these modifications, in a plurality of consecutive game rounds, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped during variable display and the jackpot signal 2 is output during fixed display. For example, if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is interrupted due to noise or the like during the fluctuation display, the data display device 9 It is possible to suppress deterioration of identification performance.

As described in detail above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. At the end of the game cycle based on the special 2 remaining hold (at the end of the fixed time), the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. For this reason, even if a jackpot win is won in the winning lottery of the special figure 1 after time t63, the jackpot win is not counted as the number of consecutive games during the high support state (during rush). Since the state of the rush ended at time t42, it is correct not to count the winning of the jackpot as the number of consecutive games during the rush. Therefore, the player's interest in the game is not lowered.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by the control mode switching process, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode for a specific period after the end of the special game state, and the control mode is changed from the second control mode at the end of the specific period. Switch to the first control mode. Further, the identification information output process continues to output the identification information during the special game state or the specific period, and the output stop process stops the output of the identification information at the end of the specific period. Further, the storage unit stores the number of second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the end of the specific period. If the number of pieces of second special random number information stored at least in the storage unit is 1 or more after the end of the specific period by the specific information output process, a predetermined number corresponding to the number of the second special random number information Until the variable display is completed, it is possible to continuously output the specific information that enables identification of the state in which the specific variable display can be performed. Further, in the specific information output process, the specific information is continuously output until a predetermined period of time elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped. is output in a manner different from the identification information. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round, and the type of winning distributed is 8R jackpot A, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot ends, the support mode is changed to a specified number of times, high frequency support. mode, and switch the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the prescribed number of times. During the high support state in which the support mode is maintained at the high frequency support mode, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output, and the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the end of the high support state. Furthermore, when the high support state ends, the value (second start-up reservation number RbN) stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb is set as the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN in the special 2 remaining reservation number storage area. After the end of the high support state, at least when the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is 1 or more, the jackpot signal 2 until the predetermined number of fluctuation display matching the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN ends can be output continuously. Further, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until a predetermined period elapses after the last variation display of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is finished and the display is stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the output of the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end of the specific period, after the specific period ends, the number of second special random number information stored in the storage unit Since the specific information that can identify the state in which the specific variable display can be performed is continuously output until the predetermined number of variable displays are completed, after the specific period ends, the acquired information storage unit stores the second When special random number information remains and the second special random number information satisfies a specific condition, specifically, for example, when the second special random number information matches a predetermined value, for example, when a jackpot is won , the display device that receives the identification information and the specific information can appropriately display that the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific condition. Specifically, for example, even if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of the high support state, after the high support state ends, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state, Since the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the predetermined number of fluctuation display that matches the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN set to the stored value (second start reservation number RbN) is completed, After the end of the support state, there is a special 2 remaining reserve of the second start holding number RbN, and when a jackpot is won based on one of the special 2 remaining reserves, the data display 9 displays the immediately preceding high support. It is possible to count the number of consecutive homes as a jackpot winning based on the special 2 remaining reserve acquired in relation to the state. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the data display device 9 cannot display, for example, the number of consecutive games. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the specific information is output in a manner different from the identification information. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 that is continuously output during fluctuations based on the special 2 remaining hold is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode that is output during the high support state (special output mode). Output.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information can perform a unique display when the specific information is received. For this reason, on the display device, for example, it is possible to display that the second special random number information remaining after the end of the specific period is being changed and displayed. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information can be caused to perform various displays, thereby making the game more interesting. Specifically, for example, during fluctuations based on the special 2 remaining hold, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode different from the normal output mode that is output during the high support state, so in the data display 9, When the jackpot signal 2 of the special output mode is received, the data display device 98 can be made to display a special effect, for example, a video image in which a female character shouts ``There is still a chance to hold the special 2 balance!'' . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the stop display of the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special random number information stored at the end of the specific period ends continue to output the specific information. Specifically, for example, a special 2 remaining reserve that sets the value (second start reserve quantity RbN) stored in the reserve quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state The jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the stop display of the last variable display among the predetermined number of variable displays matching the value of the number XRbN is finished.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output of the specific information continues even during the period from the end of the last variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display. For this reason, the period during which the specific information is continuously output coincides with the period during which the game cycle is being executed based on the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit after the specific period ends, with high accuracy. can be made Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accuracy of the display can be improved when displaying, for example, that special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress on the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information. Specifically, for example, the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues even during the period from the end of the last variable display to the end of the stop display until the end of the stop display. For this reason, the period during which the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output is set with high precision during the execution of the game cycle based on the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage section after the end of the specific period. can be matched. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data display 9 receiving the jackpot signal 2 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining reserve is being digested, the accuracy of the display can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the identification information and the specific information are the same type of information output from the same output terminal. Specifically, for example, the identification information output during the high support state and the specific information output during the special 2 remaining hold digestion are jackpot signals as the same type of information output from the same output terminal 2. Alternatively, the identification information and the specific information may be different types of information output from different output terminals, or may be different types of information output from the same output terminal.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information for identifying the state corresponding to the special game state period or the specific period is stored in the second stored in the storage unit after the specific period ends. Output from the same output terminal continuously until a predetermined period of time has passed after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of special random number information in the is completed and the display is stopped. They can be output as the same type of information. As a result, the identification information can be output to the display device for an appropriate period with a simple structure. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game or the period of the high support state is sent to the second reservation area after the high support state ends. The value (second start pending quantity RbN) stored in the Rb pending quantity storage area is set, and the last variable display out of the predetermined number of variable displays matching the value of the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN is completed and stopped. It is possible to continuously output the same type of information from the same output terminal until a predetermined period elapses after the display. As a result, with a simple structure, the jackpot signal 2 can be output to a display device such as a data display for an appropriate period.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific variable display executed until the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special random number information stored in the storage unit after the specific period ends is completed. This is a variable display corresponding to the determination of the second special random number information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the 2-ball entry section. Specifically, for example, at the end of the high support state, the specific variable display that is executed until the predetermined number of variable displays that match the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN is completed is the game ball to the second start port 34 It is a variable display corresponding to the judgment about the special 2 reservation information acquired with the entry of the ball.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to identify from the special random number information that the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the end of the specific period is a variable display. can. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the display device that receives the specific information to perform various displays, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game. Specifically, for example, it is possible to identify from the jackpot signal 2 that it is a variable display about the special 2 remaining reserve stored in the second reserve area Rb at the end of the high support state. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the specific information is a mode in which data is repeatedly output at a predetermined cycle. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is a mode in which data is repeatedly output in a predetermined cycle.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific information can be made different from the identification information output by the identification information output process with a simple configuration. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the structure can be simplified. Specifically, for example, by a simple configuration, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode can be made different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the structure can be simplified.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific condition, the specific game state is generated until the specific game state occurs. Information is output in a predetermined continuous manner. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot will be won in the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode, until the jackpot game state occurs, the special A jackpot signal 2 in an output mode is output in a predetermined continuation mode.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the special condition, the specific information is set to the predetermined value. It is possible to reliably secure the period for outputting in the continuation mode until after the execution of the game round in which it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific condition is finished. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when displaying, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress on the display device that receives the specific information, the display ends before the special 2 remaining pending digestion ends. can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game cycle being executed while the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is being output satisfies the conditions for winning the jackpot, the jackpot in the special output mode is determined to be successful. A period for outputting the signal 2 in a predetermined continuation mode can be surely secured until after the execution of the game round determined to satisfy the conditions for winning the jackpot winning the special 2 remaining reserve. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data display device 9 receiving the jackpot signal 2 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the corresponding special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. It is possible to prevent the end of the display.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special random number information satisfies a specific other condition different from the specific condition, and after the satisfaction of the specific condition, a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player, A special game state is generated when it is determined that a special game state generation condition has been established and second special random number information relating to a game round being executed during output of specific information is determined to satisfy a specific other condition. The specific information is output in a predetermined continuous manner until the specified information is output. Specifically, for example, when it is established that the lottery result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information matches the value for the small winning, and after that, the game ball enters the V winning opening. Then, it is determined that the condition for generating the big winning game state is satisfied, and the lottery result of the winning lottery based on the special 2 remaining hold related to the game cycle executed during the output of the big winning signal 2 of the special output mode becomes the small winning. When it is determined that it matches the value, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is output in a predetermined continuous mode until a jackpot gaming state occurs.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific other condition, the specific information is sent to the predetermined condition. It is possible to reliably secure the period for outputting in the continuation mode until after the execution of the game cycle in which the second special random number information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition is finished. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific other condition, the specific information and The display device that receives the identification information can appropriately display that the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific other condition. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the special output mode jackpot signal 2 matches the value for winning the small hit, the jackpot in the special output mode A period for outputting the signal 2 in a predetermined continuation mode can be surely ensured until after the execution of the game round determined that the special 2 remaining reservation matches the value for winning the small prize. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode matches the value for winning the small prize. Also, on the data display device 9, it is possible to count the number of consecutive homes assuming that the special 2 remaining reserve acquired in relation to the immediately preceding high support state is a small win. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special 2 balance reserve is won with a small prize, the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed appropriately on the display device, and the player feels uncomfortable. can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special random number information satisfies a specific other condition different from the specific condition, and after the satisfaction of the specific condition, a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player, A special game state is generated when it is determined that a special game state generation condition has been established, and the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition. Continues to output identification information until Specifically, for example, when it is established that the lottery result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information matches the value for the small winning, and after that, the game ball enters the V winning opening. Then, it is determined that the condition for generating the big win game state is satisfied, and the lottery result of the win lottery based on the special 2 holding information related to the game cycle executed during the output of the big win signal 2 in the normal output mode becomes the small win. When it is determined that it matches the value, the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is continuously output until the jackpot game state occurs.

Here, "When it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific other condition, the identification information is continued until the special game state occurs." Consider a comparative example that does not include the "output According to the comparative example, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific other condition, after the change display of the game round is completed, , the output of the identification information is stopped until a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player. For this reason, it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific other condition during the specific period in which the control mode is maintained in the second control mode, and after that, a predetermined game is played based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Even if the condition is satisfied, the output of the identification information is interrupted, and the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period does not satisfy the specific other condition in the display device such as a data display. The number of renzhuang could not be counted as fulfilled. As a result, according to the comparative example, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific condition, the special condition is determined. Since the identification information is continuously output until the game state occurs, after the variable display of the game round in which the second special random number information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition is completed, the predetermined The output of the identification information is not interrupted until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on the game operation. For this reason, after the end of the specific period in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific other condition, and after that, a predetermined game operation is performed by the player. In the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information when the game condition is satisfied, the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific other condition, and Afterwards, it is possible to perform an appropriate display assuming that the special game state occurrence condition has been established by the establishment of the predetermined game condition based on the predetermined game operation by the player. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode matches the value for winning the small hit, the jackpot game state occurs. Since the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is continuously output until the game is finished, after the variable display of the game round determined to match the special 2 reservation information with the value for winning the small win, the predetermined predetermined by the player The output of the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is not interrupted until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on the game operation. For this reason, after the end of the specific period in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is determined that the special 2 reservation information matches the value for winning a small hit, and after that, a predetermined game operation is performed by the player. When the game condition is satisfied, the data display 9 can be made to recognize and display that the winning of the jackpot continues without interruption of the game. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a special game information output process for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, an identification information output process, a specific information output process, and a special Each output destination of the game information output process is the same display device. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state, identification information output process, specific information output process, and special game information Each output destination of output processing is the same data display device 9 .

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device corresponding to each output destination of the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display device 9 to grasp whether or not. For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called number of consecutive residences.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes special game information output processing for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, and the special game information is different from the specific information. be. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state is provided, and the jackpot signal 1 is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode. It is a different aspect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device that receives information from the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Furthermore, since the special game information is different from the specific information, it is possible to perform a specific display when the specific information is received on the display device that receives the specific information. For this reason, on the display device, for example, after the end of the specific period, it is possible to display that the second special random number information is being changed and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further enhanced. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display device 9 to grasp whether or not. For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called number of consecutive residences. Furthermore, since the jackpot signal 1 is in a different form from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode, the data display 9 can perform a unique display when the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is received. . For this reason, on the display device, for example, after the end of the high support state, it is possible to display that the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold is being performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes special game information output processing for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, and the special game information is different from the identification information. be. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state is provided, and the jackpot signal 1 is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode. It is a different aspect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device that receives information from the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Furthermore, since the special game information is in a form different from the identification information output by the identification information output process, it becomes easy to grasp the information on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the game status on the display device. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display device 9 to grasp whether or not. For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called number of consecutive residences. Furthermore, since the jackpot signal 1 is in a different mode from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode, the information on the data display 9 can be easily grasped. For this reason, the data display 9 can reliably display, for example, the number of consecutive houses.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a first ball-entering information output section that outputs first ball-entering information when a game ball enters the first ball-entering section. The processing and the output destination of the information of the first ball entry information output section are the same display device. Specifically, for example, a first ball entry information output unit for outputting a first ball entry signal triggered by entry of a game ball into the first ball entry 33 is provided, and identification information output processing and specific information output are provided. The data display 9 is the same as the output destination of the processing and the information of the first ball entry information output section.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can display, for example, the game status and display based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. As a result, it is possible to cause the display device to perform various displays, thereby making the game more interesting. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, it is possible to display, for example, the number of consecutive games and display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. FIG. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a second ball entry information output section that outputs second ball entry information triggered by entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section, and performs identification information output processing and specific information output. The processing and the output destination of the information of the second incoming ball information output unit are the same display device. Specifically, for example, provided with a second ball entry information output unit that outputs a second ball entry signal triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34, identification information output processing, specific information output The data display 9 is the same as the output destination of the information of the processing and the information of the second incoming ball information output section.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can display, for example, the state of the game and display based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section. As a result, the display device such as the data display can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, it is possible to display, for example, the number of consecutive homes and display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. FIG. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a stop display information output unit that outputs stop display information indicating that the variable display is finished and the stop display is performed. The output destination of each information of the output unit is the same display device. Specifically, for example, a pattern confirmation signal output unit that outputs a pattern confirmation signal indicating that a special symbol that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped is provided, and an identification information output process, a specific information output process, and a pattern confirmation are provided. The information output destinations of the signal output units are the same display device.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device displays, for example, the state of the game, and at the same time, when the number of execution times of the game cycle in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times, the high support state is changed to the low support state. Immediately after the transition to , if there is a special 2 balance hold, it is possible to display that the fluctuation of the special 2 balance hold has ended and the display has stopped. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can be made to perform various displays, and the game can be made more interesting. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, for example, the number of consecutive games is displayed, and immediately after the number of executions of games in which the high support state continues reaches a prescribed number of times and the high support state shifts to the low support state. , when there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the fluctuation of the special 2 remaining reserve is completed, the display is stopped, and a display to the effect that the special 2 symbol has been decided can be performed. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

<<6-7>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game cycle, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes are described below. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step Sc0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, it reads the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (entering detection information) as identification information. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0102.

In step Sc0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0103.

In step Sc0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variation type counter CS, and each counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0104. It should be noted that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 280) described later.

In step Sc0104, ball entry processing for the starting opening accompanying the ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step Sc0104 will be described later. After executing step Sc0104, the process proceeds to step Sc0105.

In step Sc0105, a through ball entry process associated with the ball entering the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entry process in step Sc0105 will be described later. After executing step Sc0105, the process proceeds to step Sc0106.

In step Sc0106, a ball-entering process for the big winning opening accompanying the ball entering the big winning opening 57a of the small winning variable winning device 57 or the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is executed. The details of the ball entering process for the big winning hole in step Sc0106 will be described later. After executing step Sc0106, the process proceeds to step Sc0107.

In step Sc0107, ball entry processing for the V winning opening accompanying the ball entering the V winning opening 59 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning hole in step Sc0107 will be described later. After executing step Sc0107, the process proceeds to step Sc0108.

In step Sc0108, an outer end output signal management process for managing a signal (outer end output signal) output from the main controller 60 to the external terminal board 95 is executed. The details of the outer-end output signal management process in step Sc0108 will be described later. After executing step Sc0108, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sc0104 in FIG. 275).

FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the start opening. In step Sc0201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step Sc0201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sc0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0202, and identification information for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls Set the prize ball command as After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0203.

In step Sc0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first start hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0204.

In step Sc0204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the first start hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0209.

In step Sc0201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sc0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step Sc0205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sc0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0206, identification information for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls Set the prize ball command as After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (Sc0205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step Sc0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting hole . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0208.

In step Sc0208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the ball entering the second start opening 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0209.

In step Sc0209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sc0204 or step Sc0208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step Sc0209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (Sc0209: NO), the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc0209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (Sc0209: YES), proceed to step Sc0210, add 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceed to step Sc0211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0212.

In step Sc0212, each value of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 275) is stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reservation area. Store in a storage area, that is, in a storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added in step Sc0210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sc0103 is It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sc0210. In addition, when the second start suspension number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sc0103 is set to the second suspension number RbN. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in area Rb, ie, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sc0210. After executing step Sc0212, the process proceeds to step Sc0213.

In step Sc0213, the first determination process is executed. In the first determination process, based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the winning lottery success/failure determination result (lottery result), and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. In the process of executing determination of the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small win or a V prize jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, etc., before the reservation information is subject to the winning lottery by the main controller 60. be. After executing step Sc0213, the process proceeds to step Sc0214.

In step Sc0214, a process of setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the ball has entered the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the entry, This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the pending information before the main control device 60 becomes a target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

Further, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33, the display in the first starting hole holding area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is held. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first start opening reservation region Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting hole 34, the sound emission control device 90 holds the display in the second starting hole holding region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the number to correspond to the increase in the number. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step Sc0214, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 terminates the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<Entering ball processing for through>
Next, the ball entry processing for through will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sc0105 in FIG. 275).

FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for through. In step Sc0301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step Sc0301, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sc0301: YES), proceed to step Sc0302, whether the number SN of accessory holdings is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the normal electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0301 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sc0301: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step Sc0302, when it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role product number SN (Sc0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0303, and 1 is added to the reserved role product number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0304.

In step Sc0304, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 275) is stored in the first memory area among the free memory areas of the electric worker holding area 64d of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc0302, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role product number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sc0302: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role product number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the ball entry processing for through is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for the big winning hole>
Next, the ball entry process for the big winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the big winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 275: step Sc0106).

FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a big winning hole. In step Sc0401, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered a large winning opening (hereinafter also referred to as a small winning large winning opening) 57a provided in the small winning dedicated variable winning device 57 or not. In step Sc0401, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning (Sc0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0402. On the other hand, in step Sc0401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning (Sc0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0404.

In step Sc0402, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set based on the ball entering the big winning hole 57a for small winning. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 57a for small winning, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sc0402, the process proceeds to step Sc0403.

In step Sc0403, the first big winning hole entering ball command is set. The first big winning hole entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 57a for small winning. The first big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process to be described later. After executing step Sc0403, the process proceeds to step Sc0404.

In step Sc0404, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered a big winning hole (hereinafter also referred to as a big winning hole for big wins) 36a provided in the variable winning device 36 or not. In step Sc0404, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a for big hits (Sc0404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0405. On the other hand, in step Sc0404, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 36a (Sc0404: NO), the ball entering process for the big winning hole ends.

In step Sc0405, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the big winning hole 36a for big win is set. In this embodiment, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 36a for big win, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. After executing step Sc0405, the process proceeds to step Sc0406.

In step Sc0406, a second big winning hole entering ball command is set. The second big winning hole ball entry command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 36a for big wins. The second big winning hole entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process to be described later. After step Sc0406 is executed, the ball-entering process for the big winning hole ends.

<Ball entry processing for V winning hole>
Next, the ball entry processing for the V winning hole will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning hole is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 275: step Sc0107).

FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. In step Sc0501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 59. In step Sc0501, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 59 (Sc0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0502.

In step Sc0502, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON. The V winning flag is turned ON when a game ball enters the V winning opening 59, and when the V winning flag is turned ON, an opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started, and the V winning jackpot is started. This is a flag that turns OFF when the opening/closing execution mode based on the The V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64. In step Sc0502, by determining whether or not the V winning flag is already ON, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning hole 59, the processing of steps Sc0503 and Sc0504 described later is performed. Adopts a configuration that does not run redundantly.

In step Sc0502, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (Sc0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0503, and the V winning flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sc0504 and sets a V prize-winning command. The V winning command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 59 and won the V winning jackpot. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process, which will be described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V winning command, the game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and wins the V winning jackpot, and based on the V winning, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. A V winning effect, which is a suggested effect, is executed.

After step Sc0504 is executed, this ball entry process for the V winning hole ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0501 that the game ball has not entered the V winning port 59 (Sc0501: NO), and if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sc0502 (Sc0502: YES) , ends the ball-entering process for the V winning hole without executing steps Sc0503 and Sc0504 described above.

<Signal management processing for outer end output>
Next, the outer end output signal management processing will be described. Outer end output signal management processing is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 275: step Sc0108).

FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the outer end output signal management process. In step Sc0601, it is determined whether or not it is in the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot. The "opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot" referred to here includes the opening/closing execution mode executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot executed when the small win is won in the winning lottery and the V prize jackpot is won. Both execution mode and execution mode are applicable. In step Sc0601, specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot in the fixed time lapse processing and the game state transition processing which will be described later, and the game state transition processing. is turned off when the opening/closing execution mode is to be terminated at .

In step Sc0601, when it is determined that it is in the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot (Sc0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0602, and jackpot signal 1 output processing for outputting jackpot signal 1 in the form of a normal level signal is performed. Execute. The jackpot signal 1 is one of a plurality of types of signals output by the external terminal plate 95, as described above, and indicates that the jackpot game state is in progress. Specifically, in step Sc0602, an outer end output signal having information that the jackpot signal 1 is in an output state is transmitted to the external terminal plate 95 so that the jackpot signal 1 is in an output state. After executing step Sc0602, the process proceeds to step Sc0603. The process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 1 as the special game information in step Sc0602 functions as the special game information output process.

In step Sc0603, a jackpot signal 2 output process of outputting a jackpot signal 2 in a normal output mode as identification information is executed. As described above, the jackpot signal 2 is one of a plurality of types of signals output by the external terminal plate 95, and during a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (also called a high support state). indicates that there is Specifically, in step Sc0603, a signal for outer end output having information that the jackpot signal 2 is in the output state is transmitted to the external terminal plate 95 so that the jackpot signal 2 is in the output state of the normal output mode. . After executing step Sc0603, the outer end output signal management process is terminated. The process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode in step Sc0603 functions as the identification information output process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0601 that it is not in the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot (Sc0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0604, and the jackpot signal 1 output stop process is executed. Specifically, the output of the jackpot signal 1 as the special game information, which started to be output in step Sc0602, is stopped. The process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 1 functions as specific information output process. After executing step Sc0604, the process proceeds to step Sc0605.
nothing.

In step Sc0605, it is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON. As described above, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is the number of special 2 remaining reservations when there is a special 2 remaining reservation at the end of the high support state H4, that is, the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state. is set, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. The jackpot signal 2 extension flag is the special 2 remaining hold immediately after the number of executions of the game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number (20 times in this embodiment) and the high support state shifts to the low support state. In some cases, it is switched to ON at the time when the variation of game rounds reaches the specified number of times and stops. Then, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is set at the end of the game cycle based on the last one of the special 2 balance pending (at the end of the fixed time), or when the jackpot is won with the special 2 balance pending or when the small win is V The opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 as the second special electric accessory which shifts when winning a big prize is switched to OFF at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the big win) for executing the opening/closing operation.

In step Sc0605, if it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON (Sc0605: YES), proceed to step Sc0606, and output the jackpot signal 2 in a special output mode (pulse signal mode) as specific information The jackpot signal 2 output process to be performed is executed. Specifically, an outer end output signal having information that the jackpot signal 2 is in the output state is transmitted to the external terminal plate 95 so that the jackpot signal 2 is in the output state of the special output mode. The process of continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode of step Sc0606 functions as the specific information output process. After executing step Sc0606, the outer end output signal management process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc0605, when it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is not ON (Sc0605: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0607, and it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode based on the small hit is in progress. The opening/closing execution mode based on the small win is an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 57b of the small win-dedicated variable winning device 57 as the first special electric accessory performs an opening/closing operation when a small win is won in the winning lottery. . In step Sc0607, specifically, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The small hit opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit in the fixed time lapse processing described later, and when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated in the game state transition processing described later. turned off.

In step Sc0607, when it is determined that the small winning opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc0607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0603 described above, and the jackpot signal 2 output for outputting the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode Execute the process.

On the other hand, in step Sc0607, when it is determined that the small hit opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sc0607: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0608, and it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high frequency support mode flag also functions as specific information.

In step Sc0608, when it is determined that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (Sc0608: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0603 described above, and jackpot signal 2 output processing for outputting the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode to run.

On the other hand, in step Sc0608, when it is determined that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (Sc0608: NO), the process advances to step Sc0609 to execute jackpot signal 2 output stop processing. Specifically, the output of the jackpot signal 2 started to be output in step Sc0603 or step Sc0606 is stopped. The process of stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 in step Sc0609 functions as the output stop process. After executing step Sc0609, the outer end output signal management process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter also referred to as "power on"). In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sc0701, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and initialization as necessary are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0702.

In step Sc0702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0703.

In step Sc0703, the output data such as the start-up command set in step Sc0702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sc0703, the process proceeds to step Sc0704.

In step Sc0704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0705.

In step Sc0705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sc0706. In step Sc0706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control processing, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step Sc0706, the process proceeds to step Sc0707.

In step Sc0707, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0708.

In step Sc0708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34a is to be in the open state. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0709.

In step Sc0709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sc0703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step Sc0709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (Sc0609: NO), in steps Sc0710 and Sc0711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sc0710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step Sc0711, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, in step Sc0709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (Sc0609: YES), the process returns to step Sc0703, and each process from step Sc0703 to step Sc0708 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sc0703 to step Sc0708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Sc0706 in FIG. 281).

FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step Sc0801, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sc0801, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot is in progress (Sc0801: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sc0802. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0801 that the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot is not in progress (Sc0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0802.

In step Sc0802, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode based on the small hit is in progress (Sc0802: YES), this game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sc0803. That is, when the open/close execution mode based on the small hit is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. do not have. On the other hand, in step Sc0802, when it is determined that it is not in the open/close execution mode based on the small hit (Sc0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0803.

In step Sc0803, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is executing a game cycle. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is executing a game cycle. Here, "during execution of the game cycle" corresponds to during variation or determination. The determination of step Sc0803 is the special figure determination stored in the special figure determination flag storage area in the special figure variation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM64, and the special figure determination flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g This is done by determining whether any one of the medium flags is ON.

In step Sc0803, when the special figure unit 37 determines that the game round is not being executed (Sc0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0804.

In step Sc0804, a variation start process for starting the variation in the special figure unit 37 and the variation in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sc0804, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc0803, when the special figure unit 37 determines that the game round is being executed (Sc0803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0805.

In step Sc0805, a variation stop process for stopping the variation in the special figure unit 37 and the variation in the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sc0805, this game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Sc0804 in FIG. 282).

FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing fluctuation start processing. In step Sc0901, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN exceeds "0". When the total pending number CRN is less than or equal to "0", it means that the pending start number for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, when it is determined in step Sc0901 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is equal to or less than "0" (Sc0901: NO), this fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0901 that the total pending number CRN exceeds "0" (Sc0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0902.

In step Sc0902, hold information shift processing for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sc0903. Details of the pending information shift process will be described later.

In step Sc0903, a winning determination process including a process when winning a big win or a small win in a winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sc0903, the process proceeds to step Sc0904.

In step Sc0904, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b based on the presence or absence of a big win, the presence or absence of a small win, the presence or absence of a reach, and the like. This is the processing for setting the variable time. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc0904, the process proceeds to step Sc0905.

In step Sc0905, a variation command is set. The command for variation includes whether the current game cycle is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, or acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Information indicating whether or not it relates to the hold information is included, and information on the presence or absence of occurrence of reach and information on the variable time set in step Sc0906 are included. After executing step Sc0905, the process proceeds to step Sc0906.

At step Sc0906, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the result of sorting determination. That is, the type command includes information specifying which of the 8R jackpot A, the 8R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A, and the 1R jackpot is the result of the sorting determination.

The variation command and type command set in steps Sc0905 and Sc0906 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0703 of the normal process (FIG. 281). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sc0906, the process proceeds to step Sc0907.

In step Sc0907, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, it is specified that the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round is the first symbol display portion 37a, and the variation as the specific variation display is performed. When the display is started and the second symbol display portion flag is ON, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle is specified as the second symbol display portion 37b, and the variation display as the specific variation display is performed. let it start. After executing step Sc0907, the process proceeds to step Sc0908.

In step Sc0908, the during special figure fluctuation flag stored in the during special figure fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sc0908, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of fluctuation start process (Sc0902 in FIG. 283).

FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing pending information shift processing. In step Sc1001, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for execution of the reservation information shift process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 259). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sc1001, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

In step Sc1001, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (Sc1001: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sc1002 to Sc1007 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sc1001, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sc1001: NO) , the reservation information shift processing for the second reservation area of steps Sc1008 to Sc1015 is executed.

In step Sc1002, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sc1003 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1004. At step Sc1004, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1005.

In step Sc1005, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sc1005, the process proceeds to step Sc1006.

In step Sc1006, when the second pattern display flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1007.

In step Sc1007, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the hold information shift process is terminated. Note that the shift command set in step Sc1007 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0703 of the normal process (FIG. 281).

In step Sc1001, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (Sc1001: NO), step Proceed to Sc1008.

In step Sc1008, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1009. In step Sc1009, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step Sc1010 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1011.

In step Sc1011, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sc1011, the process proceeds to step Sc1012.

In step Sc1012, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1013.

In step Sc1013, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second start port 34 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

The shift time command set in step Sc1013 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0703 of the normal process (FIG. 281). The sound emission control device 90, based on the received shift time command, displays a command for changing the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send to 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second start opening reservation region Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. After executing step Sc1013, the process proceeds to step Sc1014.

In step Sc1014, it is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON. In step Sc1014, when it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON (Sc1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1015, and 1 is subtracted from the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN. The special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN is a value that matches the value (second start reserved quantity RbN) stored in the reserved quantity storage area of the second reserved area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state. , is stored in a Special 2 remaining reserved quantity storage area (not shown) of the main side RAM 64 that functions as a storage unit.

In the present embodiment, the value (second start pending quantity RbN) stored in the pending quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state is stored in the special 2 remaining pending quantity storage area. What is stored as the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN is that the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output using the value (second start pending number RbN) stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb. This is because the following problem occurs in a configuration that determines a period (hereinafter referred to as a continuous output period).

Even in the low support state shifted from the high support state, the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the result of the electric accessory open lottery executed with the passage of the through gate 35 as a trigger is the electric role open winning, and the normal. It is possible that the electric accessory 34a is released. At this time, when the game ball is picked up by the opened normal electric accessory 34a and enters the second start port 34, the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b (Fig. 259) The second pending information will be stored. For this reason, in the configuration that determines the continuous output period of the jackpot signal 2 using the value (second start reservation number RbN) stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, high support as described above The second holding information stored by the game ball entering the second starting port 34 due to the electric role open winning immediately after the state is shifted to the low support state is the special 2 remaining at the end of the high support state. As a result, there may be a problem that the jackpot signal 2 cannot be continuously output during the accurate variation period of the special 2 remaining hold. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value (second start reservation number RbN) stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state is stored as the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN, the special 2 remaining pending number at the end of the high support state can be accurately grasped, and the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output using the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN The period can be determined accurately. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately display on the display device such as the data display 9 when the jackpot is won by special 2 variation based on the time-saving game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 263(a), in the success/failure table (for the low-frequency support mode) for the normal electric accessory open lottery used in the low-frequency support mode, the electric role short opening is won. The value of the electric accessary product open counter C4, which is the result, and the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4, which is the loss, are set. On the other hand, as a modification, in the normal electric accessory open lottery table (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory open counter C4 that means that the short opening of the electric role is won. , the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 that indicates that the winning of the electric role chief opening, and the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 that indicates the loss may be set. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to perform the lottery per special figure 2 in the normal state. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the winning lottery is higher in the special figure 2 winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and the number of game balls into the first start hole 33. Since the lottery per special figure is higher than the lottery per special figure triggered by entering a ball, the lottery per special figure 2 is more advantageous for the player than the lottery per special figure 1. - 特許庁For this reason, in this modification, when winning the long open lottery in the normal electric accessory opening lottery in the normal state, a special effect may be performed to suggest to the player that an advantageous state has been reached. .

Here, in the configuration of the modified example described above, a configuration is adopted in which the continuous output period of the jackpot signal 2 is determined using the value (second start retention number RbN) stored in the retention number storage area of the second retention area Rb. Consider if you do. In this configuration, as described above, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 due to the electoral open winning immediately after the transition from the high support state to the low support state, and the second stored The hold information will be erroneously determined to be the special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state. As a result, as described above, there was a problem that the jackpot signal 2 could not be continuously output during the accurate special 2 remaining hold fluctuation period. Since there is a risk that the above special effect will be performed based on the special 2 balance reservation at the end, the above-mentioned special effect is performed when winning the long open in the normal electric accessory open lottery in the normal state. I can't do it anymore. On the other hand, also in this modification, the second start pending quantity RbN at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state is stored as the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN in the special 2 remaining pending quantity storage area. By adopting a configuration that determines the continuous output period of the jackpot signal 2 using the remaining reserved number XRbN, it is also possible to perform the above-described special performance when winning the long open in the normal electric accessory open lottery in the normal state. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, by adopting the configuration according to the present invention in this modification to a so-called one type of pachinko machine in which a jackpot occurs with matching patterns, in a normal state that is not a variable probability state or a short time state, due to the electric role open winning When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned special effect.

After executing step Sc1015, this pending information shift process ends.

In step Sc1014, when it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is not ON (Sc1014: NO), this reservation information shift process is terminated without executing step Sc1015.

<Hit determination processing>
Next, hit determination processing will be described. The hit determination process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variation start process (Sc0804 in FIG. 282).

FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing hit determination processing. In step Sc1101, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1101, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sc1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1102, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for lottery per special figure 1. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the numerical range set as a big hit in the success/failure table for the special figure 1 per lottery shown in FIG. 260 (a). Determine whether or not After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1104.

On the other hand, in step Sc1101, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sc1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1103, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the lottery per special figure 2. . Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical value set as a big hit or a small hit in the success or failure table for the special figure 2 per lottery shown in FIG. 260 (b) Determines whether or not the range matches. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1104.

At step Sc1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (hit lottery) at step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is a big hit. In step Sc1104, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning (Sc1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1105.

At step Sc1105, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1105, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sc1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1106, and the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the special figure 1 small hit. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 1 small hit shown in FIG. 261 (a) Determines the result of the sorting decision depending on whether the After executing step Sc1106, the process proceeds to step Sc1107.

At step Sc1105, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1105, when it determines with the 2nd design display part flag not being ON (Sc1105:NO), it progresses to step Sc1106 and performs distribution determination with reference to the distribution table for special figure 1 jackpots. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 1 jackpot shown in FIG. 262 (a) The result of the sorting determination is specified depending on whether there is After executing step Sc1106, the process proceeds to step Sc1110.

On the other hand, in step Sc1105, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sc1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1107, and the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot. conduct. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges set in the distribution table for the special figure 2 jackpot shown in FIG. 262 (b) The result of the sorting determination is specified depending on whether there is After executing step Sc1107, the process proceeds to step Sc1110.

On the other hand, in step Sc1104, when the result of the winning/failure determination is not the jackpot winning (Sc1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1108.

In step Sc1108, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (hit lottery) in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is a small hit. In step Sc1108, when the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (Sc1108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1109, and the distribution is determined with reference to the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit. Specifically, depending on whether the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range set in the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit shown in FIG. Specifies the result of allocation judgment. After executing step Sc1109, the process proceeds to step Sc1107 described above.

In step Sc1110, a flag (hit flag) corresponding to the type of winning is turned ON based on the results of allocation determination obtained in steps Sc1106 or Sc1107 and step Sc1109. As can be seen from FIGS. 261 and 262, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are four types of winnings: 1R small win, 8R big win A, 8R big win B, and 15R big win A. As the winning flag, four types of flags are prepared: 1R small winning flag, 8R big winning A flag, 8R big winning B flag, and 15R big winning A flag. When the result of the distribution determination in step Sc1106 is 8R jackpot A, the 8R jackpot A flag is turned ON. Win flags are stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. FIG. When the result of the distribution determination in step Sc1106 is 8R big hit B, the 8R big hit B flag is turned ON. If the result of the distribution determination in step Sc1107 is 15R jackpot A, the 15R jackpot A flag is turned ON. On the other hand, if the result of distribution determination in step Sc1109 is 1R small hit and the result of distribution determination in step Sc1107 is 15R big hit A, turn on the 1R small hit flag and turn on the 15R big hit A flag do.

The ON/OFF of the 1R small winning flag in the winning flag makes it possible to specify the presence or absence of the small winning winning in the winning lottery. The presence or absence of a big win winning in a winning lottery and the result of distribution determination are specified by ON/OFF of the 8R big win A flag, ON/OFF of the 8R big win A flag and ON/OFF of the 15R big win A flag in the winning flags. can be done. After executing step Sc1110, the process proceeds to step Sc1111.

In step Sc1111, a process of setting a winning stop result is executed. Specifically, in the current game cycle in which a big win or a small win is won, the variable display is terminated in a state in which either stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for winning stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 258), it corresponds to the type of winning distributed in step Sc1106 or step Sc1107 and step Sc1109. The address information of the stop result data obtained is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sc1111, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sc1108, if the success or failure result of the winning lottery in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is not a small winning (Sc1108: NO), proceed to step Sc1112, refer to the reach determination table, reach occurs in the game round It is determined whether or not to Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 258). Determines whether or not it matches the value After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1113.

In step Sc1113, if the result of reach determination in step Sc1110 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sc1113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1114, and the reach occurrence flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Sc1114, the process proceeds to step Sc1115.

On the other hand, in step Sc1113, if the result of reach determination in step Sc1112 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sc1113: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1115 without executing step Sc1114.

In step Sc1115, a process of setting a stop result for failure is executed. Specifically, in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variable display is set to end in a state in which the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for failure in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 258), the address of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sc1115, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of variable start process (Sc0904 in FIG. 283).

FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing. In step Sc1201, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1202.

In step Sc1202, a process of specifying a fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is data in tabular form having data elements of fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from when the pattern starts to stop until it stops, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 stores various types of variable time tables according to the game state, presence/absence of small wins, presence/absence of big wins, presence/absence of time reduction grants, presence/absence of reach generation, and the like. In step Sc1202, one variable time table is identified from these variable time tables. Specifically, based on the judgment result of win/fail judgment and the judgment result of distribution judgment related to the current game round specified from the hit flag, and the judgment result of reach judgment specified from the reach occurrence flag, etc., One variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63d. After executing step Sc1202, the process proceeds to step Sc1203.

In step Sc1203, by referring to the fluctuation time table identified in step Sc1202, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sc1201 is acquired. After executing step Sc1203, the process proceeds to step Sc1204.

In step Sc1204, the variable time information acquired in step Sc1203 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation stop processing>
Next, fluctuation stop processing will be described. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (Sc0804 in FIG. 282).

FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop processing. In step Sc1301, it is determined whether or not the during special figure fluctuation flag of the during special figure fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64 is ON. As described above, the special figure fluctuating flag is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b starts the variation display, and is turned OFF when the variation display ends. be made. Therefore, according to the process of step Sc1301, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is in the process of variable display.

In step Sc1301, when it determines with a flag during a special figure fluctuation|variation being ON (Sc1301:YES), it progresses to step Sc1302.

In step Sc1302, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sc1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the aforementioned variable time setting process (FIG. 286). The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step Sc1302 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sc1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1303. Steps Sc1303 to Sc1314 are executed when stop display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is started.

If it is determined in step Sc1302 that the variable time has not elapsed (Sc1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1315 without executing steps Sc1303 to Sc1314. Also, in step Sc1301, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation flag is not ON (Sc1301: NO), without executing step Sc1302 to step Sc1314, the process proceeds to step Sc1315.

In step Sc1303, a process of ending the variation of the symbols in the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game turn out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performed. After executing step Sc1303, the process proceeds to step Sc1304.

In step Sc1304, the during special figure fluctuation flag stored in the during special figure fluctuation flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sc1304, the process proceeds to step Sc1305.

In step Sc1305, the during special figure determination flag stored in the during special figure determination flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64 is turned ON. The flag during special figure determination is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the stop display, and is turned OFF when the stop display is terminated. After executing step Sc1305, the process proceeds to step Sc1306.

In step Sc1306, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not all of the 1R small win flag, 8R big win A flag, 8R big win B flag, and 15R big win A flag of the RAM 64 are OFF. In step Sc1306, when it is determined that all are OFF, ie, the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss (Sc1306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1307.

In step Sc1307, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step Sc1307, when it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (Sc1307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1308, and it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter in which a value is set to the number-of-games counter PNC when the high-frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed in the high-frequency support mode. is. The number-of-games counter PNC is stored in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM64.

In step Sc1308, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sc1308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1309, and the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is decremented by one. After executing step Sc1309, the process proceeds to step Sc1310. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1308 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC is 0 or less (Sc1308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1310 without executing step Sc1309.

At step Sc1310, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds zero. In step Sc1310, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC does not exceed 0 (Sc1310: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1311 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sc1311, the process proceeds to step Sc1312.

In step Sc1312, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start suspension number RbN exceeds zero. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start pending number RbN stored in the second reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 exceeds zero. This makes it possible to determine whether or not there is the second pending information (special 2 remaining pending) stored in the second pending area Rb. In step Sc1312, when it is determined that the value of the second start suspension number RbN exceeds 0 (Sc1312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1313, and the jackpot signal 2 extension stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 Turn on the flag. After executing step Sc1313, the process proceeds to step Sc1314.

In step Sc1314, the value of the second start pending quantity RbN is set to the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN, which is the value stored in the special 2 remaining reserved quantity storage area of the main RAM 64. FIG. The special 2 remaining pending number storage area functions as a storage unit. After executing step Sc1314, the process proceeds to step Sc1315.

When it is determined in step Sc1312 that the value of the second start suspension quantity RbN is 0 (Sc1312: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1315 without executing steps Sc1313 and Sc1314. In step Sc1310, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sc1310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1315 without executing steps Sc1311 to Sc1314. If it is determined in step Sc1307 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sc1307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1315 without executing steps Sc1308 to Sc1314. Also, in step Sc1306, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not lost (Sc1306: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1315 without executing steps Sc1307 to Sc1314.

In step Sc1315, the fixed time elapsed process is executed. The details of the fixed time elapse processing will be described later. After executing step Sc1315, the fluctuation stopping process is terminated.

<Processing when fixed time elapses>
Next, the processing at the time when the fixed time has elapsed will be described. The fixed time elapsing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation stop process (Sc1315 in FIG. 287).

FIG. 288 is a flow chart showing processing at the time when the fixed time has elapsed. In step Sc1401, it is determined whether or not the during special figure determination flag of the during special figure determination flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM64 is ON. As described above, the flag during special figure determination is turned ON when one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is to start the stop display, and is turned OFF when the stop display ends. be made. Therefore, according to the processing of step Sc1401, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special figure unit 37 is being determined.

In step Sc1401, when it determines with a flag during special figure determination being ON (Sc1401:YES), it progresses to step Sc1402.

In step Sc1402, it is determined whether or not the fixed time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, in step Sc1402, it is determined whether or not the value of fixed time information in which a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) is set as an initial value has become "0". The value of the fixed time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step Sc1402, when it is determined that the confirmation time has elapsed (Sc1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1403, and the special figure stored in the special figure confirmation flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM64 Turn off the in-decision flag. After executing step Sc1403, the process proceeds to step Sc1404.

In step Sc1404, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R jackpot A flag, the 8R jackpot B flag, and the 15R jackpot A flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1404, it is determined that any one of the 8R jackpot A flag, the 8R jackpot B flag, and the 15R jackpot A flag is ON, that is, the win lottery result of the current game round is a jackpot win. If so (Sc1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1405.

In step Sc1405, the jackpot open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After execution of step Sc1405, the final fixed time elapsed processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc1404, if it is determined that the winning lottery result of the current game round is not a big hit (Sc1404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1406, and the winning lottery result of the current game round is determined. It is determined whether or not a small hit is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 1R small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1406, the 1R small hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a small hit (Sc1406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1407.

In step Sc1407, the small winning opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After execution of step Sc1407, the final confirmation time elapsed processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc1406, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is not a small winning lottery (Sc1406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1408.

In step Sc1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is zero. That is, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state, the value of the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN, which is the value that matches the value stored in the pending quantity storage area of the second holding area Rb, will change after that. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 after being subtracted each time it is executed. In step Sc1408, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN is 0 (Sc1408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1409, and the jackpot signal 2 extension flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM64 is It is determined whether it is ON. In step Sc1409, when it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON (Sc1409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1410, and the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is turned OFF. After step Sc1410 is executed, the final confirmation time elapse processing is terminated.

In step Sc1409, when the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is not ON (Sc1409: NO), the process at the time when the fixed time has elapsed ends without executing step Sc1410. In step Sc1408, when it is determined that the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN is not 0 (Sc1408: NO), this fixed time elapsing process is terminated without executing steps Sc1409 and Sc1410.

Also, in step Sc1401, when it is determined that the flag during special figure determination is not ON (Sc1401: NO), without executing step Sc1402 to step Sc1410, the final determination time elapsed time processing ends. If it is determined in step Sc1402 that the fixed time has not passed (Sc1402: NO), the process at the time when the fixed time has elapsed ends without executing steps Sc1403 to Sc1410.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (Sc0707 in FIG. 281).

FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sc1501, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to both the opening/closing execution mode based on the small win and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win (including the case where the V prize big win is won as a small win).

If it is determined in step Sc1501 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sc1501: NO), the process advances to step Sc1502 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is the period during which the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 57b of the small winning variable winning device 57 or the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. This flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening/closing processing period starts, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing operation ends.

If it is determined in step Sc1502 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sc1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1503 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step Sc1503, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sc1503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1504, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot open/close execution mode flag is ON. In step Sc1504, when it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc1504: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot after step Sc1505.

In step Sc1505, the jackpot signal 2 extension flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sc1505, the process advances to step Sc1506 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sc1506, the process proceeds to step Sc1507.

In step Sc1507, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening and closing scenario determines the pattern of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 57b provided in the small winning variable winning device 57 in the round game or the opening and closing door 36b provided in the variable winning device 36. In this embodiment, the opening and closing door A condition for shifting the doors 57b and 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "open condition") and a condition for shifting the doors 57b and 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter also referred to as "closed condition"). and is a recorded program.

The opening conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing for starting each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When one of the above items is established, the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b shift from the closed state to the open state.

Closing conditions are, for example, as follows.
- The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
- The number of game balls entered into the big winning openings 57a and 36a after starting each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is established, the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b shift from the open state to the closed state.

The opening/closing scenario is pre-stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63. FIG. The opening/closing scenario setting process of step Sc1508 is performed by selecting an opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63h based on a flag (win flag) corresponding to the type of win and an execution trigger determination flag. After executing step Sc1507, the process proceeds to step Sc1508.

In step Sc1508, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the opening period timer counter area that determines the opening time. The opening period timer counter area is provided in various counter areas 64 f of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sc1508, the process proceeds to step Sc1509.

In step Sc1509, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step Sc0703 in the normal process (FIG. 281). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step Sc1509, the process advances to step Sc1510 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc1504, when it is determined that the large winning opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sc1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1511 to determine whether or not the small winning opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. In step Sc1511, when it is determined that the small hit opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc1511: YES), without executing step Sc1505, the process proceeds to step Sc1506, and the processing of step Sc1506 to step Sc1510 is performed.

In step Sc1511, when it is determined that the small winning opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sc1511: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1512, and it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step Sc1512, if it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (step Sc1512: YES), proceed to step Sc1513, turn on the jackpot open/close execution mode flag, then proceed to step Sc1514, and turn on the execution opportunity determination flag. Turn ON. The execution trigger determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not the trigger for executing the current big win open/close execution mode is the V winning big win winning. After executing step Sc1514, the process advances to step Sc1505 to perform the processing of steps Sc1505 to Sc1510.

On the other hand, in step Sc1512, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sc1512: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, not only when a big win is won in the winning lottery (when the jackpot opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON), but also when a game ball enters the V winning opening 59 and a V winning jackpot is won. Also in this case (when the V winning flag is turned ON), the jackpot open/close execution mode is started.

When it is determined in step Sc1503 that the opening period flag is ON (Sc1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1515.

In step Sc1515, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening period timer counter area is "0". If it is determined in step Sc1515 that the opening period has ended (Sc1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1516 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1517.

In step Sc1517, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sc1517, the process proceeds to step Sc1518.

In step Sc1518, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. In subsequent step Sc1519, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1519, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step Sc1502, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sc1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1520 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sc1520, the process proceeds to step Sc1521.

In step Sc1521, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing doors 57b and 36b are opened is "0". judge. In step Sc1521, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sc1521: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1522. On the other hand, in step Sc1521, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (Sc1521: NO), the game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sc1522, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1523.

In step Sc1523, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step Sc1523, the process proceeds to step Sc1524.

In step Sc1524, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the ending period timer counter area that determines the ending time. The ending period timer counter area is provided in various counter areas 64 f of the RAM 64 . After executing step Sc1524, the process proceeds to step Sc1525.

In step Sc1525, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0703 in the normal process (FIG. 281). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sc1525, the process proceeds to step Sc1526.

In step Sc1526, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sc1501 that the ending period flag is ON (Sc1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1527.

In step Sc1527, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sc1524), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending period timer counter area set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sc1524 that the value of the ending period timer counter area set as the ending time is "0" (Sc1527: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1528.

In step Sc1528, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sc1529, and it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is the big winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R jackpot A flag, the 8R jackpot B flag, and the 15R jackpot A flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1529, when it is determined that all of the 8R jackpot A flag, 8R jackpot B flag, and 15R jackpot A flag are OFF, that is, the result of the hit lottery for the current game round is not a big hit ( Sc1529: NO), proceeding to step Sc1530, it is determined whether or not the execution trigger determination flag is ON.

In step Sc1530, if it is determined that the execution trigger determination flag is ON (Sc1530: YES), the trigger for execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the V winning jackpot winning, so the process proceeds to step Sc1531. .

At step Sc1531, the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. After executing step Sc1531, the process advances to step Sc1532 to turn off the execution trigger determination flag. After executing step Sc1532, the process proceeds to step Sc1533.

On the other hand, in step Sc1529, any one of the 8R jackpot A flag, the 8R jackpot B flag, and the 15R jackpot A flag is ON, that is, the winning lottery result of the current game round is a jackpot winning. If so (Sc1529: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1533 without executing steps Sc1530 to Sc1532.

In step Sc1533, transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win or the small win. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sc1533, the process proceeds to step Sc1534.

On the other hand, in step Sc1530, if it is determined that the execution trigger determination flag is not ON (Sc1530: NO), since the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is not due to the V winning jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step Sc1537. Proceeding, the processing for turning off the extension flag is executed, and then the processing proceeds to step Sc1534. The details of the extension flag OFF processing will be described later.

In step Sc1534, an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The set open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sc0703) in the normal process (FIG. 281). The sound emission control device 90 sets to end the ending effect based on the reception of the opening/closing execution mode end command. After executing step Sc1534, the process proceeds to step Sc1535.

In step Sc1535, the end processing for small hit opening and closing execution mode is executed. In the end processing for the small winning opening/closing execution mode, when the small winning opening/closing execution mode flag is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and the high frequency support mode flag is ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the small winning. If so, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1536 to turn off the jackpot open/close execution mode flag. After executing step Sc1536, the game state transition process is terminated.

In step Sc1527, when it is determined that the ending period has not ended, the game state transition processing is terminated without executing steps Sc1528 to Sc1536.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Sc1520 in FIG. 289).

FIG. 290 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sc1601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing door for small winning) 57b provided in the small winning variable winning device 57 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the first special electric accessory drive section 57c. If it is determined in step Sc1601 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sc1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1602.

In step Sc1602, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 57b for small wins have been established. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 57b for the small win. In step Sc1602, when it determines with opening conditions of the opening-and-closing door 57b for small hits being satisfied (Sc1602:YES), it progresses to step Sc1603.

In step Sc1603, the open/close door 57b for small wins is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1604.

In step Sc1604, a first open/close door open command is set. The first opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 57b for a small hit has been opened. The first opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1604, the process proceeds to step Sc1608.

In step Sc1602, when it is determined that the opening condition of the open/close door 57b for small winning is not established (Sc1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1608 without executing steps Sc1603 and Sc1604.

In step Sc1601, when it is determined that the open/close door 57b for small hits is open (Sc1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1605.

In step Sc1605, it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the open/close door 57b for small wins are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 57b for a small hit. In step Sc1605, when it determines with closing conditions of the opening-and-closing door 57b for small hits being satisfied (Sc1605:YES), it progresses to step Sc1606.

In step Sc1606, the open/close door 57b for small wins is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1607.

In step Sc1607, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 57b for a small hit has closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 281: step Sc0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1607, the process proceeds to step Sc1608.

In step Sc1605, when it is determined that the closing condition of the open/close door 57b for small winning is not established (Sc1605: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1608 without executing steps Sc1606 and Sc1607.

In step Sc1608, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door (hereinafter also referred to as the opening/closing door for big win) 36b provided in the variable winning device 36 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the second special electric accessory drive section 36c. In step Sc1608, when it determines with the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits not being open (Sc1608:NO), it progresses to step Sc1609.

In step Sc1609, it is determined whether or not the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b for the big win are established. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening/closing door 36b for the big win. In step Sc1602, when it determines with opening conditions of the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits having been satisfied (Sc1609:YES), it progresses to step Sc1610.

In step Sc1610, the opening/closing door 36b for big wins is opened. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1611.

In step Sc1611, a command for opening the second opening/closing door is set. The second opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b for the jackpot has been opened. The second opening/closing door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 281 : step Sc0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1611, the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step Sc1609, when it is determined that the condition for opening the opening/closing door 36b for the big win is not satisfied (Sc1609: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sc1610 and Sc1611.

In step Sc1608, when it determines with the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits being opened (Sc1608:YES), it progresses to step Sc1612.

In step Sc1612, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the open/close door 36b for the big win is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing door 36b for the big win. In step Sc1612, when it determines with closing conditions of the opening-and-closing door 36b for big hits being satisfied (Sc1612:YES), it progresses to step Sc1613.

In step Sc1613, the opening/closing door 36b for big wins is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1614.

In step Sc1614, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b for the jackpot has been closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 281: step Sc0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sc1614, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

In step Sc1612, when it is determined that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b for big wins is not established (Sc1612: NO), the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated without executing steps Sc1613 and Sc1614.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Sc1533 in FIG. 289).

FIG. 291 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sc1701, it is determined whether or not the 8R jackpot A flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sc1701, if it is determined that the 8R jackpot A flag is not ON (Sc1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1702, whether or not the 15R jackpot A flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. determine whether

If it is determined that the 8R jackpot A flag is ON in step Sc1701 (Sc1701: YES), or if it is determined that the 15R jackpot A flag is ON in step Sc1702 (Sc1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1703.

In step Sc1703, the hit flags (1R small win flag, 8R big win A flag, 8R big win B flag, and 15R big win A flag) stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1704 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. As a result, the game state is shifted to the high support state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1705, and 20 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC. As a result, the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues is set to 20 times. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1706, and a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. command. After step Sc1706 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends. The process of continuously outputting the high frequency support mode command functions as specific information output process.

On the other hand, in step Sc1702, if it is determined that the 15R big hit A flag is not ON (Sc1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1707, and the hit flag (1R small hit flag, 8R jackpot A flag, 8R jackpot B flag, and 15R jackpot A flag) are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1708 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1709 to transmit a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, to the sound emission control device 90. command. After step Sc1709 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for turning OFF the extension flag>
Next, processing for turning off the extension flag will be described. The extension flag OFF process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (Sc1537 in FIG. 289).

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing processing for turning off the extension flag. In step Sc1801, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is zero. That is, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state, the value of the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN, which is the value that matches the value stored in the pending quantity storage area of the second holding area Rb, will change after that. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 after being subtracted each time it is executed. In step Sc1801, when it is determined that the value of special 2 remaining pending number XRbN is 0 (Sc1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1802, and the jackpot signal 2 extension flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM64 is It is determined whether or not it is ON. In step Sc1802, when it is determined that the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is ON (Sc1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1803, and the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is turned OFF. After step Sc1803 is executed, this processing for turning off the extension flag ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc1802, when the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is not ON (Sc1802: NO), this extension flag OFF processing is terminated without executing step Sc1803. Also, in step Sc1801, when it is determined that the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN is not 0 (Sc1801: NO), this extension flag OFF processing is terminated without executing steps Sc1802 and Sc1803.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (Sc0708 in FIG. 281).

FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step Sc1901, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when the normal electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sc1901 that the supported flag is not ON (Sc1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1902.

In step Sc1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when an open election is won in the normal electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is a flag. If it is determined in step Sc1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sc1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1903.

At step Sc1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sc1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1903: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1904.

In step Sc1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display as the specific variation display in the general pattern unit . If it is determined in step Sc1904 that it is time to end the variable display (Sc1904: YES), the process advances to step Sc1905 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1904 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sc1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1906.

In step Sc1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step Sc1906 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (Sc1906: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1906 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (Sc1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1907.

In step Sc1907, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step Sc1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step Sc1907 (Sc1907: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step Sc1908 (Sc1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1909, and a normal electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the normal electric role item opening lottery be elected. In addition, at the same time as the ordinary electric accessories open lottery, "750" (ie 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1910.

In step Sc1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal electric accessory open lottery in step Sc1909 is support winning. In step Sc1910, when it is determined that the result of the normal electric accessory open lottery is support winning (Sc1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1911, the support winning flag is turned ON, and various counter areas 64f of RAM64 "3" is set in the provided second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the normal electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sc1910, when it is determined that the result of the normal electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (Sc1910: NO), the process for electric support is terminated without executing the process of step Sc1911.

If it is determined in step Sc1907 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sc1907: YES), or if it is determined in step Sc1908 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sc1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1912, and the normal electric accessory is opened. hold a lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the normal electric role item opening lottery be elected. In addition, at the same time as the normal electric accessary item open lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1913.

In step Sc1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal electric accessory open lottery in step Sc1912 is support winning. In step Sc1913, if it is determined that the support has not been won (Sc1913: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sc1913, when it is determined that the support winning is determined (Sc1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

In step Sc1902, when it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (Sc1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1915 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step Sc1915, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1915: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the normal figure unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1916.

In step Sc1916, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sc1917 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step Sc1901, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (Sc1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1918, and an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the normal electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (Sc1918 in FIG. 293).

FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step Sc2001, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the normal electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34a is open (Sc2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2002.

In step Sc2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the normal electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sc2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc2002: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. That is, if the open duration time of the normal electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step Sc2002, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2003 to perform closing processing for controlling the normal electric accessory 34a to the closed state. , "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the normal electric accessory 34a is "0", the normal electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is closed this time. is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the ordinary electric accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sc2003, the process proceeds to step Sc2004.

In step Sc2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step Sc2005 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step Sc2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sc2005: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sc2005: YES), the process advances to step Sc2006 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step Sc2001, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34a is not open (Sc2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2007 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the normal electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sc2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc2007: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sc2007, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sc2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2008, and an opening process for controlling the normal electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2009.

In step Sc2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sc2009: NO), the process advances to step Sc2010 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sc2010 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (Sc2010: YES), the process advances to step Sc2011 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2009 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (Sc2009: YES), or if it is determined in step Sc2010 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Sc2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2012, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

<<6-8>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed by the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the announcement effect and the result notification effect will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 295 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sc2101, the process proceeds to step Sc2102.

In step Sc2102, pending command handling processing is executed. In the pending command handling process, a process corresponding to the first pending command among the commands stored in step Sc2101 is performed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sc2102, the process proceeds to step Sc2103.

In step Sc2103, a game cycle effect setting process is executed. In the game round effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game round from the start of the symbol variation to the stop is set. Details of the game round effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc2103, the process proceeds to step Sc2104.

In step Sc2104, processing for opening/closing execution mode effect is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during the opening period, effects during the big winning opening opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period is performed. After executing step Sc2104, the process proceeds to step Sc2105.

In step Sc2105, a notification effect process is executed. The notification effect process is a process for realizing various notification effects. The notification effect includes, for example, a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism will be right-handed, and returning the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism from right-handed to left-handed. A left-handed notification effect for informing the player of the above, and a V-aiming notification for informing the player that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 59 by setting the shooting mode of the game ball shooting mechanism to right-handed. Perform performances, etc. Also, after executing step Sc2105, the process proceeds to step Sc2106.

In step Sc2106, background effect processing is executed. In the background rendering process, a process for displaying on the pattern display device 41 a background image (background moving image) determined according to a command indicating the game state received from the main MPU 62 is performed. For example, a process of displaying a background image corresponding to the normal production mode in the low support state, a background image corresponding to the rush production mode in the high support state, or the like is performed. Furthermore, when there is a special 2 remaining hold when transitioning from a high support state to a low support state, the background image corresponding to the rush production mode and the background image corresponding to the normal production mode in the low support state are different. Specific information output processing for displaying a specific background image is also performed. The peculiar background image can be a background image as specific information corresponding to the special 2 remaining pending consumption effect mode. Also, when transitioning from a high support state to a low support state, regardless of whether or not there is a special 2 remaining hold, what is the background image that corresponds to the rush production mode and the background image that corresponds to the normal production mode in the low support state? A specific information output process may be performed to display a specific background image as different specific information. When adopting this configuration, the particular background image may be configured to continue, for example, until 10 variations are performed after the transition from the high support state to the low support state. In this case, if there is a Special 2 remaining hold at the time of transition from the high support state to the low support state, the Special 2 change based on the Special 2 remaining hold is during the period in which the specific background image is displayed will be executed. After executing step Sc2106, the process proceeds to step Sc2107.

In step Sc2107, other processing is executed. Other processing includes processing for displaying a demonstration image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the player is not playing a game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, special game information output processing for displaying a background image corresponding to the jackpot game production mode during the jackpot game state as special game information is also performed. After executing step Sc2107, the process proceeds to step Sc2108.

In step Sc2108, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sc2108, the process proceeds to step Sc2109.

At step Sc2109, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sc2109, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (Sc2102 in FIG. 295).

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. In step Sc2201, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step Sc2201 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sc2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2202.

In step Sc2202, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 or not. In step Sc2202, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sc2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2203, and the sound The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the light-side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step Sc2203, the process proceeds to step Sc2205.

In step Sc2202, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sc2202: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting If it is determined that the transmission is based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process advances to step Sc2204 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Execute. The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 in the sound and light side MPU 92, and functions as a storage unit. In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step Sc2204, the process proceeds to step Sc2205.

The reason why steps Sc2203 and Sc2204 are processed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 is stored in memory, whereas the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there are 0 pieces of hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step Sc2205, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number counter area is the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to. After executing step Sc2205, the process proceeds to step Sc2206.

If it is determined in step Sc2201 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sc2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2206 without executing steps Sc2202 to Sc2205.

At step Sc2206, a pending display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pending information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 specified in step Sc2203, the display mode of the first pending display unit 37c (the color of the LED lamp to be lit and combination), and based on the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 specified in step Sc2204, the display mode of the second hold display unit 37d (LED to be lit lamp colors and combinations). After step Sc2206 is executed, this pending command handling process ends.

<Game round effect setting processing>
Next, the game round effect setting process will be described. The game round effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (Sc2103 in FIG. 295).

FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing a game round effect setting process. In step Sc2301, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received. In step Sc2301, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (Sc2301: NO), this game cycle effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2301 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (Sc2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2302.

In step Sc2302, the variation command and type command received this time are read, and from these commands, the presence or absence of a big win, the presence or absence of a small win, and the case of winning a big win including), the type of jackpot, presence or absence of reach, and information on fluctuation time. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2303.

In step Sc2303, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The production pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the pattern of production to be executed in the current game round (the content and execution timing of the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production) based on the production pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc2303, the process proceeds to step Sc2304.

In step Sc2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a big win or a small win, a combination of the same symbols is established on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 257(b)). Information corresponding to the stop result to be set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when a big win is won in the winning lottery of this game round, and the sorted win type is 8R jackpot A, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols excluding 7, that is, 111, 333, or 555 can be selected. If a big win is won in the winning lottery of the current game round and the sorted win type is 8R big win B, the same even numbered symbol combination excluding 8, that is, 222, 444 or 666 is selected. obtain. If a big win is won in the winning lottery of the current game round and the sorted win type is 15R big win A, the combination of "7" symbols, that is, 777 can be selected. If a small win is won in the winning lottery of this game round and the sorted win type is 15R big win A, the combination of "8" symbols, that is, 777 can be selected. Note that this is just an example, and other combinations of the same symbols may be used. Furthermore, instead of the combination of identical symbols, a combination of symbols according to other specific rules (for example, serial numbers) may be used.

In step Sc2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the allocation determination for the current game round is 8R jackpot A, 8R jackpot B, or 15R jackpot A, the same symbol is displayed on the activated line L1 (see FIG. 257(b)). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is the 8R jackpot A, the same combination of odd symbols excluding 7, that is, 111, 333, or 555 can be selected. If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is 8R jackpot B, the same even numbered symbol combination excluding 8, that is, 222, 444, or 666 can be selected. If the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is 15R jackpot A, a combination of "7" symbols, that is, 777 can be selected. This is just an example. For example, if the winning lottery result of the current game round is 8R jackpot A, 666 or 888 is selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the winning lottery of the current game round is selected. 222 or 444 are selected as the combination of the same symbols when the win/loss result is the 8R jackpot B, and when the win/failure result of the win lottery of the current game round is the 15R jackpot A, the same combination of the same symbols is selected. Other combinations of the same symbols, such as a configuration in which a combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected, may be used. Furthermore, instead of the combination of identical symbols, a combination of symbols according to other specific rules (for example, serial numbers) may be used.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the result of losing, the presence or absence of the reach generation is determined from the contents of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of ready-to-win symbols is established on the effective line L1. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1, and the stop result in which the combination of ready-to-win symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol.

In step Sc2305, a process for setting the variation pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sc2304 is performed. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting a variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2306.

In step Sc2306, the effect pattern set in step Sc2303, the stop pattern set in step Sc2304, the information of the variation pattern set in step Sc2305, the information of the pending display, etc. are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step Sc2307 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step Sc2307, the process proceeds to step Sc2308.

In step Sc2308, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first starting opening holding area Ds1 or the second starting opening holding area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 . The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sc2308, this game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Sc2303 in FIG. 297).

FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. In step Sc2401, the random number RN for effect pattern is obtained from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2402.

At step Sc2402, a process of identifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data whose data elements are patterns of effects to be executed in game rounds, fluctuation times, and random numbers RN for effect patterns. In the production pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, there are various types according to the presence or absence of a small hit, the presence or absence of a time saving grant, the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small win in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. A performance pattern table is stored. In step Sc2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the presence or absence of a small hit, the presence or absence of a time saving grant, grasped in step Sc2302 of the game round effect setting process (Fig. 297), the type of jackpot in the case of winning a small hit in a winning lottery and winning a V prize jackpot, reach One effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93 based on the presence or absence of occurrence. After executing step Sc2402, the process proceeds to step Sc2403.

In step Sc2403, the effect pattern table specified in Sc2402 is referred to, and the variation time grasped in step Sc2302 of the game cycle effect setting process (FIG. 297) and the current effect pattern random number RN value obtained in step Sc2401 Acquire a production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sc2403, the process proceeds to step Sc2404.

At step Sc2404, the effect pattern acquired at step Sc2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game cycle. After executing step Sc2404, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game cycle effect setting process (Sc2308 in FIG. 297).

FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sc2501, it is determined whether or not the command for variation received this time relates to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 or not. In step Sc2501, if it is determined that the variation command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (Sc2501: YES), proceed to step Sc2502, The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound and light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2501 that the variation command received this time is not related to the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33 (Sc2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2503. Next, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2504.

In step Sc2504, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sc2601, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffers 107a and 107b of the video RAM 107. FIG. Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2602.

In step Sc2602, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sc2701, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions. An image displayed on the pattern display device 41 is updated by adding 1 to the pointer indicating the execution position of the display data table stored in the display data table buffer in the work RAM 104 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Identify

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffers 107a and 107b in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc2801, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 301) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the effect command is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Specifically, for example, when an effect command indicating a background image corresponding to the normal effect mode in the low support state is stored in the command storage area, the background image specified by the effect command is displayed on the pattern display device. As indicated at 41, it begins to control the drawing and display of images. When a performance command indicating a background image corresponding to the rush performance mode in the high support state is stored in the command storage area, the background image specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. , to start controlling the drawing and display of the image. Further, when the effect command indicating the background image after shifting from the high support state to the low support state is stored in the command storage area, the background image specified by the effect command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. to start controlling the drawing and display of the image. Further, when a performance command indicating a background image corresponding to the jackpot game performance mode is stored in the command storage area during the jackpot game state, the background image designated by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. to start controlling the drawing and display of the image.

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (Sc2801), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, the effects such as the advance notice effect set by the sound emission control device 90, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode can be quickly changed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the design display device 41 displays the effect image corresponding to the mode. Thus, in the present embodiment, the identification information output process for displaying the background image corresponding to the rush effect mode is executed during the high support state, and the background image corresponding to the rush effect mode is displayed at the end of the high support state. Execute output stop processing to stop display.

In step Sc2802, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (Sc2801), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . For example, if you take the background image corresponding to the production mode as an example, the background image corresponding to the rush production mode will be displayed continuously during the high sapo state, and if there is a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high sapo state When the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN set to the value (second start reserved quantity RbN) stored in the reserved quantity storage area of the second reserved area Rb is 1 or more, the special 2 remaining reserved consumption time production mode is entered. Display the corresponding background image. In addition, the background image can be displayed until the mode is changed to the normal effect mode after all the variable display due to the special 2 balance hold is completed. As a result, the background image corresponding to the performance mode in the pattern display device 41 can be appropriately displayed when the special 2 balance is reserved at the end of the high support state, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, since the background image corresponding to each production mode is unique, the pattern display device 41 can be caused to display various background images, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved. . After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2803.

In step Sc2803, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (Sc2802), the type of the character (sprite, display object) making up the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. The determined types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character are stored in the work RAM 104 in the form of a drawing list. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc2804.

In step Sc2804, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the drawing list generated by task processing (Sc2803) is transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes drawing processing for one frame of image based on the drawing list, and causes the pattern display device 41 to display one frame of image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing. Therefore, the image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 together with the drive signal. After that, the process advances to step Sc2805, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends. The background image corresponding to the production mode at the time of consumption of the special 2 remaining hold is the last fluctuation display instead of the configuration that is displayed until the mode is changed to the normal production mode after all the fluctuation displays due to the special 2 remaining hold are completed. is terminated, the display is stopped, and a continuous output process is executed in which the display is continued until the stop display is finished. Alternatively, the display may be continued until the stop display of the last variable display ends and the next variable starts. For example, during the display of the background image corresponding to the above-mentioned special 2 remaining reservation digesting production mode, taking as an example a game round in which a jackpot is won based on the special 2 remaining reservation, the female character will say "Still special 2 remaining reservation The symbol display device 41 can be caused to display a moving image of a woman shouting, "There is a chance to win!" Furthermore, the audio accompanying the moving image may be configured to be output from the speaker 46 provided in the data display 9 . For example, taking a game round related to winning a jackpot as an example, in the game round, from the initial state to the update end state, that is, the pointer is at the initial position in the display data table for the stop symbols that are the combination of the same symbols. This V interrupt process is executed from the setting to the end. As a result, the drawing from the start of the variable display relating to the winning of the jackpot to the end of the fixed time of the stop display is completed. At a predetermined timing after the drawing is completed, the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and prize balls are provided to the player.

An example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

<<6-9>> Functions and effects:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control mode switching process maintains the control mode in the second control mode for a specific period after the end of the special game state, and switches the control mode to the second control mode at the end of the specific period. Switch from the second control mode to the first control mode. Further, the identification information output process continues to output the identification information during the special game state or the specific period, and the output stop process stops the output of the identification information at the end of the specific period. Further, the storage unit stores the number of second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the end of the specific period. If the number of pieces of second special random number information stored at least in the storage unit is 1 or more after the end of the specific period by the specific information output process, a predetermined number corresponding to the number of the second special random number information Until the variable display is completed, it is possible to continuously output the specific information that enables identification of the state in which the specific variable display can be executed. Further, in the specific information output process, the specific information is continuously output until a predetermined period of time elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped. is output in a manner different from the identification information. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round, and the type of winning distributed is 8R jackpot A, after the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot ends, the support mode is changed to a specified number of times, high frequency support. mode, and switch the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the end of the prescribed number of times. During the high support state in which the support mode is maintained at the high frequency support mode, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output, and the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the end of the high support state. Furthermore, when the high support state ends, the value (second start-up reservation number RbN) stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb is set as the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN in the special 2 remaining reservation number storage area. After the end of the high support state, at least when the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is 1 or more, the jackpot signal 2 until the predetermined number of fluctuation display matching the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN ends can be output continuously. Further, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until a predetermined period elapses after the last variation display of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is finished and the display is stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the output of the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end of the specific period, after the specific period ends, the number of second special random number information stored in the storage unit Since the specific information that can identify the state in which the specific variable display can be performed is continuously output until the predetermined number of variable displays are completed, after the specific period ends, the acquired information storage unit stores the second When special random number information remains and the second special random number information satisfies a specific condition, specifically, for example, when the second special random number information matches a predetermined value, for example, when a jackpot is won , the display device that receives the identification information and the specific information can appropriately display that the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific condition. Specifically, for example, even if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of the high support state, after the high support state ends, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state, Since the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the predetermined number of fluctuation display that matches the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN set to the stored value (second start reservation number RbN) is completed, After the end of the support state, there is a special 2 remaining reserve of the second start holding number RbN, and when a jackpot is won based on one of the special 2 remaining reserves, the data display 9 displays the immediately preceding high support. It is possible to count the number of consecutive homes as a jackpot winning based on the special 2 remaining reserve acquired in relation to the state. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the data display device 9 cannot display, for example, the number of consecutive games. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the specific information is output in a manner different from the identification information. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 that is continuously output during fluctuations based on the special 2 remaining hold is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode that is output during the high support state (special output mode). Output.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information can perform a unique display when the specific information is received. For this reason, on the display device, for example, it is possible to display that the second special random number information remaining after the end of the specific period is being changed and displayed. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information can be caused to perform various displays, thereby making the game more interesting. Specifically, for example, during fluctuations based on the special 2 remaining hold, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode different from the normal output mode that is output during the high support state, so in the data display 9, When the jackpot signal 2 of the special output mode is received, the data display device 98 can be made to display a special effect, for example, a video image in which a female character shouts ``There is still a chance to hold the special 2 balance!'' . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the stop display of the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special random number information stored at the end of the specific period ends Continue to output specific information. Specifically, for example, a special 2 remaining reserve that sets the value (second start reserve quantity RbN) stored in the reserve quantity storage area of the second reserve area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state The jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the stop display of the last variable display among the predetermined number of variable displays matching the value of the number XRbN is finished.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output of the specific information continues even during the period from the end of the last variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display. For this reason, the period during which the specific information is continuously output coincides with the period during which the game cycle is being executed based on the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit after the specific period ends, with high accuracy. can be made Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accuracy of the display can be improved when displaying, for example, that special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress on the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information. Specifically, for example, the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues even during the period from the end of the last variable display to the end of the stop display until the end of the stop display. For this reason, the period during which the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output is set with high precision during the execution of the game cycle based on the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage section after the end of the specific period. can be matched. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data display 9 receiving the jackpot signal 2 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining reserve is being digested, the accuracy of the display can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the identification information and the specific information are the same type of information output from the same output terminal. Specifically, for example, the identification information output during the high support state and the specific information output during the special 2 remaining hold digestion are jackpot signals as the same type of information output from the same output terminal 2. Alternatively, the identification information and the specific information may be different types of information output from different output terminals, or may be different types of information output from the same output terminal.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information for identifying the state corresponding to the special game state period or the specific period is stored at least in the storage unit after the specific period ends. When the number of the second special random number information is 1 or more, after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special random number information is completed and the display is stopped, a predetermined The same type of information can be output from the same output terminal continuously until the period elapses. As a result, the identification information can be output to the display device for an appropriate period with a simple structure. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game or the period of the high support state is sent to the second reservation area after the high support state ends. If the value of the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN set to the value (second start reserved quantity RbN) stored in the reserved quantity storage area of Rb is 1 or more, it matches the value of the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN It is possible to continuously output the same type of information from the same output terminal until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped. can. As a result, with a simple structure, the jackpot signal 2 can be output to a display device such as a data display for an appropriate period.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the end of the specific period, the specific variable display that is executed until the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special random number information stored in the storage unit is completed, This is a variable display corresponding to the determination of the second special random number information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entering section. Specifically, for example, at the end of the high support state, the specific variable display that is executed until the predetermined number of variable displays that match the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN is completed is the game ball to the second start port 34 It is a variable display corresponding to the determination of the special 2 reservation information acquired with the entry of the ball.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to identify from the special random number information that the second special random number information stored in the acquired information storage unit at the end of the specific period is a variable display. can. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the display device that receives the specific information to perform various displays, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game. Specifically, for example, it is possible to identify from the jackpot signal 2 that it is a variable display about the special 2 remaining reserve stored in the second reserve area Rb at the end of the high support state. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the specific information is a mode in which data is repeatedly output at a predetermined cycle. Specifically, for example, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is a mode in which data is repeatedly output in a predetermined cycle.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific information can be made different from the identification information output by the identification information output process with a simple configuration. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the structure can be simplified. Specifically, for example, by a simple configuration, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode can be made different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the structure can be simplified.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific condition, until the special game state occurs, the process continues until the specific game state occurs. Information is output in a predetermined continuous manner. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot will be won in the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode, until the jackpot game state occurs, the special A jackpot signal 2 in an output mode is output in a predetermined continuation mode.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the special condition, the specific information is set to the predetermined value. It is possible to reliably secure the period for outputting in the continuation mode until after the execution of the game round in which it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific condition is finished. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when displaying, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress on the display device that receives the specific information, the display ends before the special 2 remaining pending digestion ends. can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game cycle being executed while the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is being output satisfies the conditions for winning the jackpot, the jackpot in the special output mode is determined to be successful. A period for outputting the signal 2 in a predetermined continuation mode can be surely secured until after the execution of the game round determined to satisfy the conditions for winning the jackpot winning the special 2 remaining reserve. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data display device 9 receiving the jackpot signal 2 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the corresponding special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. It is possible to prevent the end of the display.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special random number information satisfies a specific other condition different from the specific condition, and after the satisfaction of the specific condition, a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player, A special game state is generated when it is determined that a special game state generation condition has been established and second special random number information related to a game round being executed during output of specific information is determined to satisfy a specific other condition. The specific information is output in a predetermined continuous manner until the specified information is output. Specifically, for example, when it is established that the lottery result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information matches the value for the small winning, and that the game ball enters the V winning hole after satisfying the above. Then, it is determined that the condition for generating the big win game state is established, and the lottery result of the win lottery based on the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round executed during the output of the big win signal 2 of the special output mode becomes the small win. When it is determined that the value matches the value, the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is output in a predetermined continuation mode until the jackpot gaming state occurs.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific other condition, the specific information is sent to the predetermined condition. It is possible to reliably secure the period for outputting in the continuation mode until after the execution of the game cycle in which the second special random number information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition is finished. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the specific information satisfies the specific other condition, the specific information and The display device that receives the identification information can appropriately display that the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific other condition. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the special output mode jackpot signal 2 matches the value for winning the small hit, the jackpot in the special output mode A period for outputting the signal 2 in a predetermined continuation mode can be surely ensured until after the execution of the game round determined that the special 2 remaining reservation matches the value for winning the small prize. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode matches the value for winning the small prize. Also, on the data display device 9, it is possible to count the number of consecutive homes assuming that the special 2 remaining reserve acquired in relation to the immediately preceding high support state is a small win. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special 2 balance reserve is won with a small prize, the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed appropriately on the display device, and the player feels uncomfortable. can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special random number information satisfies a specific other condition different from the specific condition, and after the satisfaction of the specific condition, a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player, A special game state is generated when it is determined that a special game state generation condition has been established, and the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition. Continues to output identification information until Specifically, for example, when it is established that the lottery result of the winning lottery based on the reservation information matches the value for the small winning, and after that, the game ball enters the V winning opening. Then, it is determined that the condition for generating the big win game state is satisfied, and the lottery result of the win lottery based on the special 2 holding information related to the game cycle executed during the output of the big win signal 2 in the normal output mode becomes the small win. When it is determined that it matches the value, the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is continuously output until the jackpot game state occurs.

Here, "When it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific other condition, the identification information is continued until the special game state occurs." Consider a comparative example that does not include the "output According to the comparative example, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific other condition, after the change display of the game round is completed, , the output of the identification information is stopped until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player. For this reason, it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific other condition during the specific period in which the control mode is maintained in the second control mode, and after that, a predetermined game is played based on a predetermined game operation by the player. Even if the condition is satisfied, the output of the identification information is interrupted, and the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period does not satisfy the specific other condition in the display device such as a data display. The number of renzhuang could not be counted as fulfilled. As a result, according to the comparative example, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second special random number information related to the game round being executed during the output of the identification information satisfies the specific condition, the special condition is determined. Since the identification information is continuously output until the game state occurs, after the variable display of the game round in which the second special random number information is determined to satisfy the specific other condition is completed, the predetermined The output of the identification information is not interrupted until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on the game operation. For this reason, after the end of the specific period in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is determined that the second special random number information satisfies the specific other condition, and after that, a predetermined game operation is performed by the player. In the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information when the game condition is satisfied, the second special random number information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period satisfies the specific other condition, and Afterwards, it is possible to perform an appropriate display assuming that the special game state occurrence condition has been established by the establishment of the predetermined game condition based on the predetermined game operation by the player. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the special 2 remaining hold related to the game round being executed during the output of the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode matches the value for winning the small hit, the jackpot game state occurs. Since the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is continuously output until the game is finished, after the variable display of the game round determined to match the special 2 reservation information with the value for winning the small win, the predetermined predetermined by the player The output of the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode is not interrupted until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on the game operation. For this reason, after the end of the specific period in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is determined that the special 2 reservation information matches the value for winning a small hit, and after that, a predetermined game operation is performed by the player. When the game condition is satisfied, the data display 9 can be made to recognize and display that the winning of the jackpot continues without interruption of the game. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a special game information output process for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, and includes an identification information output process, a specific information output process, and a special Each output destination of the game information output process is the same display device. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state, identification information output process, specific information output process, and special game information Each output destination of output processing is the same data display device 9 .

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device corresponding to each output destination of the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display 9 to grasp whether the For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called consecutive number.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes special game information output processing for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, and the special game information is different from the specific information. be. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state is provided, and the jackpot signal 1 is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode. It is a different aspect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device that receives information from the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Furthermore, since the special game information is different from the specific information, it is possible to perform a specific display when the specific information is received on the display device that receives the specific information. For this reason, on the display device, for example, after the end of the specific period, it is possible to display that the second special random number information is being changed and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display device that receives the specific information and the identification information can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display 9 to grasp whether the For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called consecutive number. Furthermore, since the jackpot signal 1 is in a different form from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode, the data display 9 can perform a unique display when the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is received. . For this reason, on the display device, for example, after the end of the high support state, it is possible to display that the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold is being performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes special game information output processing for outputting special game information for identifying a state corresponding to a period of the special game state, and the special game information is different from the identification information. be. Specifically, for example, a special game information output process for outputting a jackpot signal 1 for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot game state is provided, and the jackpot signal 1 is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode. It is a different aspect.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the identification information and the specific information can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the special game information indicates the special game state. Since it is possible to identify the state corresponding to the period, by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues, the number of times the special game state occurred during the consecutive specific period can be output. can be grasped by the display device. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately display the game situation on the display device that receives information from the identification information output process, the specific information output process, and the special game information output process. Furthermore, since the special game information is in a form different from the identification information output by the identification information output process, it becomes easy to grasp the information on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the game status on the display device. Specifically, for example, the state corresponding to the period of the jackpot gaming state or the period of the high support state can be identified by the jackpot signal 2, and the period corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be identified by the jackpot signal 1. Since the state can be identified, by superimposing both identifications, when the period of the high support state continues, how many times the jackpot game state occurred during the period of the continuous high support state It becomes possible for the data display device 9 to grasp whether or not. For this purpose, the data display 9 can display the so-called number of consecutive residences. Furthermore, since the jackpot signal 1 is in a different mode from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode, the information on the data display 9 can be easily grasped. For this reason, the data display 9 can reliably display, for example, the number of consecutive houses.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a first ball-entering information output section that outputs first ball-entering information when a game ball enters the first ball-entering section. The processing and the output destination of the information of the first entry information output unit are the same display device. Specifically, for example, a first ball entry information output unit for outputting a first ball entry signal triggered by entry of a game ball into the first ball entry 33 is provided, and identification information output processing and specific information output are provided. The data display 9 is the same as the output destination of the processing and the information of the first entering information output section.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can display, for example, the game status and display based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. As a result, it is possible to cause the display device to perform various displays, thereby making the game more interesting. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, it is possible to display, for example, the number of consecutive games and display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. FIG. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a second ball entry information output section that outputs second ball entry information triggered by entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section, and performs identification information output processing and specific information output. The processing and the output destination of the information of the second incoming ball information output unit are the same display device. Specifically, for example, provided with a second ball entry information output unit that outputs a second ball entry signal triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34, identification information output processing, specific information output The data display 9 is the same as the output destination of the information of the processing and the information of the second incoming ball information output section.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can display, for example, the state of the game and display based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section. As a result, the display device such as the data display can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further improved. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, it is possible to display, for example, the number of consecutive homes and display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. FIG. As a result, the data display 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a stop display information output unit that outputs stop display information indicating that the variable display is finished and the stop display is performed. The output destination of each information of the output unit is the same display device. Specifically, for example, a pattern confirmation signal output unit that outputs a pattern confirmation signal indicating that a special symbol that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped is provided, and an identification information output process, a specific information output process, and a pattern confirmation are provided. The information output destinations of the signal output units are the same display device.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device displays, for example, the state of the game, and at the same time, when the number of execution times of the game cycle in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times, the high support state is changed to the low support state. Immediately after the transition to , if there is a special 2 balance hold, it is possible to display that the fluctuation of the special 2 balance hold has ended and the display has stopped. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display device can be made to perform various displays, and the game can be made more interesting. Specifically, for example, on the data display 9, for example, the number of consecutive games is displayed, and immediately after the number of executions of games in which the high support state continues reaches a prescribed number of times and the high support state shifts to the low support state. , when there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the fluctuation of the special 2 remaining reserve is completed, the display is stopped, and a display to the effect that the special 2 symbol has been decided can be performed. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data display device 9 can be made to perform various displays, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

As described above, according to the game machine, when the second special random number information remains in the acquired information storage section after the end of the specific period, the display is appropriately performed on the display device, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

<<6-10>> Modified example of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<6-10-1>> Modification 1:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, immediately after the number of executions of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 274), When there is 2 remaining hold, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the fixed time ends (time t63) after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining hold ends and the stop display ends. However, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 in the period from the time t42 to the time t63 is a special output mode different from the normal output mode in which a constant voltage is continuously output, which is the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 until the time t42. It was the output mode. Specifically, the special output mode is a mode in which the constant voltage is repeatedly output and the output is stopped in a short period of time. On the other hand, as a modification, the special output mode is a constant voltage (referred to as a second voltage) whose voltage value of the signal is lower than the constant voltage (referred to as a first voltage) in the normal output mode. The first voltage as well as the second voltage may be a signal (high level signal) higher than the reference value for determining output/stop of the jackpot signal 2 . In short, although the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode is different from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode, the data display 9 that receives the jackpot signal 2 judges that the jackpot signal 2 is in the ON state. Any form of signal may be used as long as it can be used.

<<6-10-2>> Modification 2:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, immediately after the number of executions of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 274), When there are 2 remaining reserves, after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining reserves ends and the display becomes stop display, the jackpot signal 2 is output in a special output mode until the fixed time ends (time t63). It is configured to output. On the other hand, as a modification, in the period from time t42 to time t63, instead of outputting the jackpot signal 2 as a special output mode, the output side connector 95b (see FIG. 265) that outputs the jackpot signal 2 ) may be configured to output a specific signal (special 2 remaining pending digestion signal) from the output side connector 95b different from the output side connector 95b. That is, in the period from time t42 to time t63, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped, and the special 2 remaining pending digestion signal different from the jackpot signal 2 is output to the output connector 95b (Fig. 265) is output from the output side connector 95b. This special 2 remaining pending consumption signal is also transmitted to the data display 9 in the same manner as the jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 . The data display device 9, which is the receiver of the jackpot signal 2, is based on the jackpot signal 2 at the end of the high support state when the jackpot signal 2 receiving the special 2 remaining pending digesting signal is received. It is determined that the game cycle is being executed, that is, the special 2 remaining hold is being consumed. According to such a configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, the data display 9 can appropriately display, for example, the number of consecutive houses. Therefore, in this modification, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the data display 9 cannot properly display, for example, the number of consecutive games.

<<6-10-3>> Modification 3:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, immediately after the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 272), When there is 2 remaining hold, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the fixed time ends (time t63) after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining hold ends and the stop display ends. It was configured to On the other hand, as a modified example, when there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the fixed time ends after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining reserve ends and the display becomes a stop display (time t63). , until the time within the predetermined shortest variation time elapses from the end of the game, the jackpot signal 2 may be continuously output. The “shortest variation time” is the shortest variation time among the variation time information recorded in the variation time table in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. FIG. The "time within the shortest variation time" may be any time before and including the shortest variation time.

According to this modification, the jackpot signal 2 is output until the time within the shortest predetermined fluctuation time in the pachinko machine 10 elapses after the stop display of the last fluctuation display of the special 2 remaining hold is completed. continue. For this reason, the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output is set to the end of the game cycle based on the special 2 remaining hold after the end of the high support state and before the end of the variation display based on the next special 1 hold information. can be extended. Therefore, according to this modification, the period for continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 can be reliably ensured until after the execution of the game based on the special 2 remaining hold is finished after the end of the high support state. As a result, in this modification, when the data display unit 9 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is prevented from ending before the special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. be able to. In addition, if the extension period from the end of the fixed time is longer than the shortest variation time, the next variation based on the special random number information (special 1 suspension information) that is not special 2 remaining suspension will occur during the output of the jackpot signal 2. If the fixed time has passed since the game was stopped, and a big win is achieved due to the variation, there is a risk that this big win will be counted as the number of consecutive homes in the previous high support state. As a result, the data display 9 cannot properly display the number of consecutive houses. In order to prevent this, in this modification, the period of extension of the jackpot signal 2 from the end of the fixed time is set to a period of time within the shortest variation time. As another modification, the period of extension of the jackpot signal 2 from the end of the fixed time may be a period of time exceeding the shortest variation time.

<<6-10-4>> Modification 4:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, immediately after the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 272), When there is 2 remaining hold, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output until the fixed time ends (time t63) after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining hold ends and the stop display ends. It was configured to On the other hand, as a modified example, when there is a special 2 remaining reserve, the fixed time ends after the variable display based on the last one of the special 2 remaining reserve ends and the display becomes a stop display (time t63). , until the next variable display is started (time t64), the jackpot signal 2 may be continuously output.

According to this modification, the output of the jackpot signal 2 continues until the stop display (confirmation display) of the last variation display of the special 2 remaining hold ends and the next variation starts. For this reason, the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output is changed to the special random number information (special 1 suspension information) that is not the special 2 remaining suspension after the game cycle based on the special 2 remaining suspension is completed after the end of the high support state. It can be extended until the next variable display based on is started. Therefore, according to this modification, the period for continuously outputting the jackpot signal 2 can be reliably ensured until after the execution of the game based on the special 2 remaining hold is finished after the end of the high support state. As a result, in this modification, when the data display unit 9 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is prevented from ending before the special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. be able to. In addition, if the extension period from the end of the fixed time is longer than the time at which the next variation based on the special 1 reservation information ends, special random number information that is not special 2 remaining reservation (special 1 If the next variation based on the hold information) stops and the fixed time elapses, and the variation results in a big win, there is a risk that this big win will be counted in the number of consecutive homes in the previous high support state. As a result, the data display 9 cannot properly display the number of consecutive houses. In order to prevent this, in this modification, the jackpot signal 2 is extended until the next variable display based on special random number information (special 1 reserved information) that is not special 2 remaining reserved is started.

<<6-10-5>> Modification 5:
In the sixth embodiment and each modified example, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 272) due to the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaching the specified number of times, , If there is a special 2 remaining hold, that is, if there is second hold information (Special 2 remaining hold) stored in the second hold area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b (FIG. 259), the high support state The jackpot signal 2 is output until the predetermined number of fluctuation display that matches the value of the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN that sets the number of special 2 remaining pending at the timing of transition from to the low support state is completed. . In general, at the timing immediately after the number of execution times of the game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number and the high support state shifts to the low support state, the second start is picked up by the normal electric accessory 34a that is about to close. A game ball may enter the mouth 34 . Under specific conditions such as this case, depending on the timing of extracting the second special random number information from the second reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, the second reservation area may After the end of the high support state, it is possible that a larger number (1 or at most 2) of the second special random number information stored in Rb is larger than the number of second special random number information (maximum of 4). be. For this reason, the predetermined number is set to the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN, which is the number of the second special random number information stored in the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state. In the sixth embodiment, in which the value matches the value, the number of second special random number information stored in the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state There is a possibility that the output of the jackpot signal 2 may be stopped when executing the variation display for the greater amount (the amount of the ball entering the second starting hole 34 after the predetermined number is determined).

On the other hand, as a modification, timing within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the number of execution times of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaches a specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state. , the second special random number information stored in the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state when the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is detected. A value obtained by adding 1 to the set special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN may be determined as a predetermined number, and the jackpot signal 2 may be output until the fluctuation display of the predetermined number is completed. According to this configuration, at the timing of transition from the high-support state to the low-support state described above, of the variation display that is greater than the number of the second special random number information stored in the second reservation area Rb It is possible to prevent the output of the jackpot signal 2 from stopping when performing one variation display. For this reason, according to the present modification, the period in which the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output is changed from the high support state to the low support state when the number of execution times of the game cycle in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times. It is possible to ensure as much as possible until the second special random number information obtained by the game ball entering the second start port 34 at a timing within a predetermined period after the above is finished. Therefore, in this modification, when the data display device 9 that receives the jackpot signal 2 displays, for example, that the special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display ends before the special 2 remaining pending digestion ends. can be suppressed.

<<6-10-6>> Modification 6:
In the sixth embodiment and each modified example, at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state (time t42 in FIG. 272) due to the number of game rounds in which the high support state continues reaching the specified number of times, , when there is second pending information (Special 2 remaining pending) stored in the second pending area Rb of the pending information storage area 64b (FIG. 259), at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state The number of the second start pending quantity RbN is set to the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN, the value of the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is started, and the fixed time after the end of the variable display The jackpot signal 2 is output until the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN at the time of elapse of . On the other hand, as a modified example, the number of the second start suspension number RbN is used as it is without using the variable such as the special 2 remaining suspension number XRbN, and the second start suspension at the time of the elapse of the fixed time after the end of the variable display The jackpot signal 2 may be output until the number RbN becomes zero. Specifically, the processing of steps Sc1014 and Sc1015 is deleted in FIG. 284, the processing of step Sc1314 is deleted in FIG. Instead of the process of determining whether or not there is, the process of step Sc1801 in FIG. According to this configuration, there is no problem that it is impossible to distinguish between the game ball entering the second start port 34 and the game ball entering the second start port 34 due to the opening winning in the ordinary electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34a. However, as in the sixth embodiment, when the special 2 remaining hold remains after the end of the high support state, it is possible to improve the identification performance for the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

<<6-10-7>> Modification 7:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, when the high support state ends, if the number of the second start suspension number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 exceeds 0 ( That is, when it is 1 or more), the jackpot signal 2 extension flag is turned ON, and the value of the second start reservation number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 is changed to the special 2 remaining number. It is configured to be set to the reserved number XRbN (see FIG. 287). On the other hand, as a modification, at the end of the high support state, the value of the second start reservation number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb is set to the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN, and the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN is set. When the value of the number XRbN exceeds 0 (that is, when it is 1 or more), the jackpot signal 2 extension flag may be turned ON. Also with this configuration, the jackpot signal 2 can be activated at the same timing as in the sixth embodiment, and the jackpot signal 2 can be extended in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment.

<<6-10-8>> Modification 8:
In the sixth embodiment and each modification described above, when the high support state ends, if the number of the second start suspension number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 exceeds 0 ( That is, when it is 1 or more), the value of the second start pending quantity RbN is set to the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN, and the value of the special 2 remaining pending quantity XRbN is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is started. Until the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN becomes 0, the jackpot signal 2 as the specific information is continuously output. On the other hand, as a modification, at the end of the high support state, the jackpot signal 2 as the specific information is continuously output, and the second start reservation number stored in the second reservation area Rb at the end of the high support state. When the number of RbN exceeds 0 (that is, when it is 1 or more), the number of the second start pending number RbN is set to the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN, and the value of the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN is displayed as a variable display. It may be configured to decrement by 1 each time the execution is started, and to stop outputting the specific information when the value of the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN becomes 0. Even with this configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, when the special 2 remaining hold remains after the end of the high support state, the identification performance for the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of

<<6-10-9>> Modification 9:
In the above-described sixth embodiment and each modification (especially modification 7), when the high support state ends, the value of the second start reservation number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb is Set to the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN in the area, and when the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN exceeds 0 (that is, when it is 1 or more), the jackpot signal 2 as the specific information is continuously output , When the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN becomes 0, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. On the other hand, as a modification, at the end of the high support state, the jackpot signal 2 as the specific information is continuously output, and the value of the second start reservation number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb is changed. Set to the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN in the special 2 remaining reserved quantity storage area, and if the value of the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN exceeds 0 (that is, if it is 1 or more), the special 2 remaining reserved quantity XRbN The value may be decremented by 1 each time the execution of the variable display is started, and when the value of the special 2 remaining reservation number XRbN becomes 0, the output of the specific information may be stopped. Even with this configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, when the special 2 remaining hold remains after the end of the high support state, the identification performance for the variable display based on the special 2 remaining hold can be improved. It is possible to improve the interest of

In this modification, even when the number of pieces of second special random number information stored in the storage unit is 0 at the end of the specific period, the output process of outputting the specific information can be executed. Specifically, for example, as described above, the value (second start-up reservation number RbN) stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb at the timing of transition from the high support state to the low support state is set. Even when the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN is 0, the output process of outputting the jackpot signal 2 can be executed.

Therefore, according to this modification, even if the number of the second special random number information stored in the storage unit is 0 at the end of the specific period, the output process for outputting the specific information can be executed. The specific information is output regardless of whether the number of the second special random number information stored in the storage unit at the end of the specific period is 0 or 1 or more. For this reason, since it is possible to ensure the continuous output of the specific information at the end of the specific period, for example, the number of second special random number information stored in the storage unit from the end of the specific period is 1 or more, the output of the specific information is interrupted due to noise, etc., and the identification performance of the display device such as a data display is reduced. can. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Specifically, for example, when the high support state ends, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb (second start reservation number RbN) is set. Even if the value of the remaining pending number XRbN is 0, since the output process of outputting the jackpot signal 2 can be executed, the special 2 remaining pending number stored in the special 2 remaining pending number storage area at the end of the high support state A jackpot signal 2 is output regardless of whether the value of the number XRbN is 0 or 1 or more. For this reason, since it is possible to ensure the continuous output of the jackpot signal 2 at the end of the high support state, for example, the special 2 remaining reservation number storage area from the end of the high support state 2. The output of the specific information is interrupted due to noise or the like until it is determined whether or not the number of remaining pending numbers XRbN is 1 or more, and the identification performance of a display device such as a data display is degraded. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the configuration of the sixth embodiment, that is, at the end of the high support state, before continuing to output the jackpot signal 2, the value of the second start reservation number RbN stored in the second reservation area Rb is set to the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN in the special 2 remaining reserved number storage area, and when the value of the special 2 remaining reserved number XRbN exceeds 0, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output, while the special 2 remaining reserved In the configuration in which the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped when the value of the number XRbN is 0, when the value of the special 2 remaining pending number XRbN is determined to be 0, the high support state is finished and the special In the middle of the flow until the value of the 2 remaining pending number XRbN is determined to be 0 and the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped, the game ball is picked up by the normal electric accessory 34a during the closing operation and the second start port 34 A game ball may enter the ball. When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, there is a risk that the big win won will not be counted in the number of consecutive homes in the last high support state. On the other hand, in this modification, it is possible to expand the range that can be counted in the number of consecutive homes in the last high support state, and there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot can also be counted in the number of consecutive homes in the previous high support state. There is

<<6-10-10>> Modification 10:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It becomes possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<6-10-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not necessarily limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<6-11>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiment and each of the modifications described above may be implemented by hardware, or part of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software. good too.

<<6-12>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each modification, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic cA group>
The feature cA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature cA1]
A first ball entry area (first ball entry portion, first starting hole 33) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry area (second ball entry portion, second starting hole 34) having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (special random number information, value of hit random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry area, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry area Obtained information storage means (acquired information storage unit, first reserved area Ra and second reserved area Rb in reserved information storage area 64b) for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (a specific condition, that a lottery result of a winning lottery coincides with a value for winning a jackpot); determining means for performing the determination on the special information with priority over the determination on the first special information;
When the game cycle is defined as the period from the start of the variable display for informing the result of the determination by the determination means until the end of the variable display to the stop display and the end of the stop display, the game is played. a game turn execution means for executing a turn;
Assisting means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry area, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entry area. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is a first control mode (low-frequency support mode) and the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode (high-frequency support mode) in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry area than
Privilege ball entry means (large winning opening 36a) for awarding a prize ball as a privilege when a game ball enters;
When a special game state generation condition including at least that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is established by the determination means, a special game state is generated to cause the special ball entry means to perform a predetermined release. means and
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
After the end of the special game state, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode for a specific period, and the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the specific period. After the means (control mode switching process, opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot (including opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for a specified number of times, and the control mode is switched when the specified number of times is completed. processing to switch from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode),
The game machine is
In the period of the special game state or the specific period, the first output means (identification information output processing, processing to output the jackpot signal 2 from the external terminal plate);
At the end of the specific period, output stop means for stopping the output of the information (output stop processing, processing for stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 when there is no special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state);
Storage means for storing the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the end of the specific period number storage area) and
After the end of the specific period, when at least the number of the second special information stored in the storage means is 1 or more, a predetermined number of the variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special information are displayed. Predetermined information that can identify the state in which a predetermined variation display (specific variation display, variation display based on a lottery for a special figure 2) can be executed until the end (specific information, a special output mode jackpot different from the normal output mode Second output means capable of continuously outputting signal 2) (specific information output process, jackpot signal until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations stored at the end of the high support state are completed 2 continuously), and
with
The second output means is
means for continuously outputting the predetermined information until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display out of the predetermined number of variable displays ends and the stop display is performed (continuous output processing, predetermined number of Output processing for continuously outputting 2 jackpot signals until the end of the stop display (until the fixed time elapses) after the end of the last variable display of the variable displays and the stop display, and
Means for outputting the predetermined information in a manner different from the information (special mode output processing, special output mode different from jackpot signal 2 during jackpot game state or high support state) output processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, the control mode switching means maintains the control mode in the second control mode (high frequency support mode) for a specific period after the end of the special game state, and changes the control mode to the second control mode at the end of the specific period. to the first control mode (low frequency support mode). Further, the first output means continuously outputs information (jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode) for identifying the state corresponding to the period during the period of the special game state or the specific period, and stops the output. Means stop outputting information at the end of a specified period. Further, the storage means stores the number of second special information stored in the acquired information storage means (the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved area Rb in the reserved information storage area 64b) at the end of the specific period. . By the second output means, the number of second special information stored at least in the storage means (the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved area Rb in the reserved information storage area 64b) after the end of the specific period is 1 or more , until the predetermined number of variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special information is completed, the state in which the predetermined variable display (variable display based on the lottery per special figure 2) can be performed can be identified. It is possible to continuously output the predetermined information (jackpot signal 2 in a special output mode different from the normal output mode). Further, the second output means continuously outputs the predetermined information until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the stop display is performed (the predetermined number of variable displays). Output processing for continuously outputting 2 jackpot signals until the stop display ends after the last variable display of the display ends and the stop display ends (until the fixed time elapses) is the predetermined information. It is output in a manner different from information (information for identifying a state corresponding to a special game state or a specific period).

Therefore, according to this feature, even if the output of the information is temporarily stopped at the end of the specific period, after the specific period ends, a predetermined number of changes corresponding to the number of the second special information stored in the storage means Until the end of the display, the predetermined information capable of identifying the state in which the predetermined variable display can be executed is continuously output. When information remains and the second special information satisfies a predetermined condition, specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won, in a display device such as a data display that receives information, in relation to the immediately preceding specific period The number of consecutive residences can be counted assuming that the acquired second special information satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed properly on the display device, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined information is output in a manner different from the information output by the first output means. It is possible to perform a unique display. Therefore, on the display device, for example, after the end of the specific period, it is possible to display that the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is being changed and displayed. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the display device such as a data display for receiving predetermined information or information perform various displays, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature cA2]
The gaming machine according to feature cA1,
Output processing for outputting the predetermined information even when the number of the second special information stored in the storage means is 0 at the end of the specific period (at the end of the high support state in Modification 9, A gaming machine characterized in that a process of continuously outputting a jackpot signal 2) can be executed.

According to this feature, even if the number of the second special information stored in the storage means is 0 at the end of the specific period, the output process of outputting the predetermined information can be executed. Sometimes, the predetermined information is output regardless of whether the number of pieces of second special information stored in the storage means is 0 or 1 or more. For this reason, since it is possible to ensure the continuous output of the predetermined information at the end of the specific period, for example, the number of second special information stored in the storage means from the end of the specific period is It is possible to prevent the output of the predetermined information from being interrupted due to noise or the like until it is determined whether or not the value is 1 or more, thereby suppressing deterioration in the identification performance of a display device such as a data display. . As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature cA3]
A gaming machine according to feature cA1 or feature cA2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second output means continuously outputs the predetermined information until after the stop display of the last variable display ends.

According to this feature, the second output means continues to output the predetermined information until after the stop display of the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed, so that the last variable display is completed. The predetermined information continues to be output even during a period from when the stop display is displayed until the end of the stop display. For this reason, the period during which the predetermined information is continuously output is matched with high accuracy with the period during which the game cycle is being executed based on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means after the end of the specific period. be able to. Therefore, according to this feature, in a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information or information, when displaying, for example, that special 2 remaining pending consumption is being processed, the accuracy of the display can be improved.

[Feature cA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA3,
A gaming machine, wherein the information and the predetermined information are the same type of information (jackpot signal 2) output from the same output terminal (output side connector 95b).

According to this feature, after the end of the specific period, the information for identifying the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period corresponds to the number of the second special information stored in the storage means. It is possible to continuously output the same type of information from the same output terminal until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display of the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the display is stopped. can. Therefore, with a simple structure, the information can be output to a display device such as a data display for an appropriate period of time.

[Feature cA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA4,
The predetermined variable display is the variable display corresponding to the determination of the second special information acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area. game machine.

According to this feature, it is possible to identify from the predetermined information that the variable display is for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the end of the specific period. Therefore, in this feature, a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature cA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA5,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined information is a mode of repeatedly outputting data at a predetermined cycle (a special output mode of the jackpot signal 2).

According to this feature, since the predetermined information is in a form in which data is repeatedly output at a predetermined cycle, the predetermined information can be in a form different from the information output by the first output means with a simple configuration. . Therefore, according to this feature, the structure can be simplified.

[Feature cA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA6,
When it is determined that the special information related to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition, a specific image (a female character shouts "It's barely Renso, good job!"). A game machine characterized by comprising means for outputting a signal (specific image display instruction signal) for displaying a specific image.

According to this feature, when it is determined that the special information related to the game round being executed while the predetermined information is being output satisfies the predetermined condition, the means for outputting a signal for displaying the specific image is provided. On the display device that receives the signal, it is possible to display, for example, the number of consecutive houses and the fact that the jackpot has been won with special 2 balance reserved. Therefore, according to this feature, the display device such as the data display can be caused to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature cA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA7,
and means for outputting a signal for outputting a specific sound when it is determined that the special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition. game machine.

According to this feature, when it is determined that the special information related to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition, the means for outputting the signal for outputting the specific sound is provided. In addition to displaying the number of consecutive games, for example, the device that receives the signal can output a voice indicating that the jackpot has been won with special 2 balance pending. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

[Feature cA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA8,
When it is determined that the second special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition, the second output means causes the special game state generating means to cause the special game state generating means to generate the special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is output in a predetermined continuous manner until a game state occurs.

According to this feature, when it is determined that the second special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition, the second output means is made special by the special game state generating means. The predetermined information is output in a predetermined continuation mode until a game state occurs. For this reason, when it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined condition, the period during which the predetermined information is output in the predetermined continuation mode is set to the second period. can be reliably secured until after execution of a game round determined to satisfy a predetermined condition is finished. As a result, according to this feature, in a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information or information, for example, when displaying that the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is performed before the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. can be suppressed from ending.

[Feature cA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA9,
The special game state generation means satisfies a predetermined other condition (that the lottery result of the winning lottery matches the value for winning a small win) that the special information is different from the predetermined condition by the judging means, and the satisfaction is satisfied. Later, when a predetermined game condition (that the game ball enters the V winning opening 59) is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player, it is determined that the special game state generation condition is satisfied,
When it is determined that the second special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined other condition, the second output means causes the special game state generating means to cause the special game state generating means to generate the second special information. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is output in a predetermined continuous manner until a special game state occurs.

According to this feature, the special game state generation means satisfies the predetermined other condition that the special information is different from the predetermined condition by the determination means, and after the satisfaction, the predetermined game condition is generated based on the predetermined game operation by the player. is established, it is determined that the special game state occurrence condition is established, and when it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined other conditions, The second output means outputs the predetermined information in a predetermined continuous mode until the special game state generating means generates the special game state. For this reason, when it is determined that the second special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the predetermined information satisfies the predetermined other conditions, specifically, for example, when a small hit is won, the predetermined A period for outputting information in a predetermined continuation mode can be reliably secured until after the execution of the game cycle in which the second special information is determined to satisfy other predetermined conditions is finished. As a result, in this feature, even when a small prize is won, the second special information acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period is displayed on the display device such as the data display device that receives the predetermined information or information. It is possible to count the number of consecutive villas as satisfying As a result, in this feature, for example, when a small prize is won, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the number of consecutive games cannot be displayed appropriately on the display device.

[Feature cA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA10,
The special game state generation means satisfies a predetermined other condition (specific other condition, that the lottery result of the winning lottery matches the value for winning a small win) that the special information is different from the predetermined condition by the judging means. , when a predetermined game condition (that a game ball enters the V winning port 59) is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player after the above-mentioned satisfaction, the special game state occurrence condition is satisfied. judge,
When it is determined that the second special information relating to the game round being executed during the output of the information satisfies the predetermined other condition, the first output means causes the special game state generating means to cause the special game state generating means to generate the special game state. A game machine characterized by continuously outputting the information until a game state occurs.

According to this feature, the special game state generation means satisfies the predetermined other condition that the special information is different from the predetermined condition by the determination means, and after the satisfaction, the predetermined game condition is generated based on the predetermined game operation by the player. is established, it is determined that the special game state occurrence condition has been established, and if it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed during the information output satisfies the predetermined other conditions, the second The 1 output means continuously outputs information until a special game state is generated by the special game state generating means. Here, "when it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed during the information output satisfies the predetermined other condition, the first output means generates a special game state by the special game state generating means. Consider a comparative example that does not have a configuration that continues to output information until . According to the comparative example, when it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed during information output satisfies the predetermined other condition, after the variable display of the game round is completed, the game The first output means stops outputting information until a predetermined game condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game operation by the player. For this reason, in a display device such as a data display that receives information, it is determined that the second special information satisfies a predetermined other condition during a specific period in which the control mode is maintained in the second control mode, and thereafter the player determines that the second special information satisfies the other conditions. When a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by, the output of information by the first output means is interrupted, and the display device such as a data display is acquired in relation to the immediately preceding specific period. Therefore, the number of consecutive villas could not be counted because the second special information satisfies the predetermined other conditions. As a result, according to the comparative example, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to this modified example, when it is determined that the second special information related to the game round being executed while the information is being output satisfies the predetermined other condition, the first output means outputs the special information. Since the information is continuously output until the special game state is generated by the game state generating means, the game is started after the variable display of the game round determined that the second special information satisfies the predetermined other condition is completed. The output of information by the first output means is not interrupted until a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player. For this reason, after the end of the specific period in which the control mode is the second control mode, it is determined that the second special information satisfies the predetermined other conditions, and then a predetermined game is played based on a predetermined game operation by the player. When the conditions are met, the fact that the jackpot winning continues without interruption can be made to be recognized and displayed on a display device such as a data display. As a result, it is a great pleasure for the player that the jackpot winning continues without interruption and the number of consecutive games increases, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature cA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA11,
Under certain conditions (a game to the second start port 34 at a timing within a predetermined period after the number of times of execution of games in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state transitions to the low support state When a game ball is detected to enter the second ball entry area: The predetermined number is stored in the storage means at the end of the specific period. A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of second special information (configuration of modification 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the predetermined number when the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area is detected under the specific condition is the second special number stored in the storage means at the end of the specific period. It becomes the value which added 1 to the number of information. In general, there is a possibility that a game ball enters the second ball entry area at the exact timing of the end of the specific period in which the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the end of the special game state. Under certain conditions such as this, depending on the timing of retrieving the second special information from the acquired information storage means, after the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the specified period, the acquisition More (one or at most two more) variable displays may be performed than the number of second special information stored in the information. For this reason, in a comparative example in which the predetermined number is a value that matches the number of the second special information stored in the storage means at the end of the specific period, the above-described second special information stored in the acquired information There is a possibility that the output of the predetermined information may be stopped when performing the variable display for the number of special information larger than the number of the special information.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the predetermined number in the case where the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area is detected under the specific condition is stored in the storage means at the end of the specific period. Since the value is obtained by adding 1 to the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information, one of the above-described variable displays that is greater than the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information is displayed. can be suppressed from stopping the output of the predetermined information when executing Therefore, according to this feature, the period for continuously outputting the predetermined information is set until the second special information acquired by the game ball entering at the timing when the specific period ends is finished changing. can be secured as much as possible. As a result, according to this feature, in a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information or information, for example, when displaying that the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is performed before the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. can be suppressed from ending.

[Feature cA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA12,
Third output means for outputting special game state information (special game information, jackpot signal 1) for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the special game state (special game information output process, jackpot signal 1 output process ),
A gaming machine, wherein output destinations of the first output means, the second output means, and the third output means are the same display device (data display device).

According to this feature, the information and the predetermined information output from the first output means and the second output means can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the third output means. By the special game state information output from, it is possible to identify that it is in a state corresponding to a period of special game state, so by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues It is possible for the display device of the output destination to grasp how many times the special game state has occurred during the interval. For this reason, it is possible to display the so-called number of consecutive residences on the display devices corresponding to the output destinations of the first output means, the second output means, and the third output means.

[Feature cA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA13,
Third output means for outputting special game state information (special game information, jackpot signal 1) for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the special game state (special game information output process, jackpot signal 1 output process ),
The special game state information is in a different mode from the predetermined information (the jackpot signal 1 is in a mode different from the jackpot signal 2 in the special output mode).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the information and the predetermined information output from the first output means and the second output means can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the third output means. By the special game state information output from, it is possible to identify that it is in a state corresponding to a period of special game state, so by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues It is possible for the display device of the output destination to grasp how many times the special game state has occurred during the interval. Therefore, it is possible to count the number of consecutive residences in a display device such as a data display that receives information from the first output means, the second output means, and the third output means. Furthermore, since the special game state information is different from the predetermined information, a display device such as a data display that receives the predetermined information can display a unique display when the predetermined information is received. Therefore, on the display device, for example, after the end of the specific period, it is possible to display that the variable display is being performed based on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the display device such as a data display for receiving predetermined information or information perform various displays, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature cA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA14,
Third output means for outputting special game state information (special game information, jackpot signal 1) for identifying the state corresponding to the period of the special game state (special game information output process, jackpot signal 1 output process ),
A gaming machine, wherein the special game state information is in a different mode from the information (the jackpot signal 1 is in a different mode from the jackpot signal 2 in the normal output mode).

According to this feature, the information and the predetermined information output from the first output means and the second output means can identify the period of the special game state or the state corresponding to the specific period, and the third output means. By the special game state information output from, it is possible to identify that it is in a state corresponding to a period of special game state, so by superimposing both identifications, when the specific period continues It is possible for the display device of the output destination to grasp how many times the special game state has occurred during the interval. Therefore, it is possible to count the number of consecutive residences in a display device such as a data display that receives information from the first output means, the second output means, and the third output means. Furthermore, since the special game state information is in a form different from the information output by the first output means, it becomes easy to grasp the information on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display, for example, the number of consecutive houses on the display device.

[Feature cA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA15,
A first input that outputs first ball information (first start port entrance signal) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance region (first ball entrance portion, first start port 33) Equipped with ball information output means,
A gaming machine, wherein the information output destinations of the first output means, the second output means, and the first ball entry information output means are the same display device (data display device).

According to this feature, when the game ball enters the first ball entry area, the first ball entry information is output, and the output destination of this information, the output destination of the information by the first output means, and the second output means. Since the output destination of the predetermined information is the same display device, the display device can display, for example, the number of consecutive games and display based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry area. . Therefore, according to this feature, the display device such as the data display can be made to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

[Feature cA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA16,
A second input for outputting second ball entry information (second start port entry signal) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry region (second ball entry portion, second start port 34) Equipped with ball information output means,
A gaming machine, wherein the information output destinations of the first output means, the second output means, and the second ball entry information output means are the same display device (data display device).

According to this feature, the second ball entry information is output with the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area as a trigger, and this output destination is the output destination of the information by the first output means and the second output means. Since the display device is the same for both the output destination of the predetermined information by can be done. Therefore, according to this feature, the display device such as the data display can be made to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature cA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA17,
stop display information output means for outputting stop display information (symbol confirmation signal) indicating that the variable display is finished and the display is stopped;
A gaming machine, wherein output destinations of the information of the first output means, the second output means, and the stop display information output means are the same display device (data display device).

According to this feature, the stop display information output means for outputting the stop display information indicating that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is provided, and the first output means, the second output means, and the stop display information output means are provided. Since the output destination of each information is the same display device, for example, the number of consecutive games is displayed on the display device, and the number of times the game cycle in which the high support state continues reaches the specified number of times and the high support state is reached. Immediately after transition from the state to the low support state, if there is a special 2 remaining hold, it is possible to display that the variation of the special 2 remaining hold is finished and the display is stopped. Therefore, according to this feature, the display device such as the data display can be made to perform various displays, and as a result, the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

[Feature cA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA18,
The predetermined period is the period from the end of the last variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display, plus the time within the shortest variable time predetermined in the gaming machine. It is a period (configuration of modification 3)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the predetermined period is within the shortest variation time predetermined in the game machine during the period from the end of the last variable display to the end of the stop display until the end of the stop display. Since it is a period of time added to the time period of Output continues. For this reason, the period in which the predetermined information is continuously output is set to be based on the next first special information after the game cycle based on the second special information stored in the storage means ends after the specific period ends. It can be extended until before the end of the variable display. Therefore, according to this feature, the period for continuously outputting the predetermined information is ensured until after the execution of the game based on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means after the end of the specific period. can be secured to As a result, according to this feature, in a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information or information, for example, when displaying that the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is performed before the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. can be suppressed. If the extension time from the end of the stop display is made longer than the shortest fluctuation time, the next fluctuation based on the first special information that is not the special second remaining hold will stop during the output of the predetermined information, and the stop display will be displayed. If the game ends and a big win is achieved due to the variation, there is a risk that this big win will be counted as the number of consecutive homes in the immediately preceding specific period. As a result, the display device that receives the predetermined information cannot properly display, for example, the number of consecutive houses. In order to prevent this, in this feature, the period of extension of the predetermined information is set to a period of time within the shortest variation time.

[Feature cA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA19,
The second output means continuously outputs the predetermined information at least until the stop display of the last variation display ends and the next variation starts (configuration of modification 4).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, the predetermined information is continuously output until at least the stop display of the last variable display among the predetermined number of variable displays is completed and the next variation is started, so that the predetermined information is continuously output. The period for outputting the second special information is extended until the game cycle based on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means ends after the end of the specific period and the fluctuation based on the next first special information starts. be able to. Therefore, according to this feature, the period for continuously outputting the predetermined information is ensured until after the execution of the game based on the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means after the end of the specific period. can be secured to As a result, according to this feature, in a display device such as a data display that receives predetermined information or information, for example, when displaying that the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is in progress, the display is performed before the Special 2 remaining pending digestion is completed. can be suppressed from ending. If the extension period from the end of the stop display is made longer than the time at which the next variation ends, the next variation based on the first special information that is not the special second remaining hold will stop during the output of the predetermined signal. If the stop display ends and a big win is achieved due to the change, there is a risk that this big win will be counted as the number of consecutive games in the immediately preceding specific period. As a result, the display device that receives the predetermined information cannot properly display, for example, the number of consecutive houses. In order to prevent this, in this modified example, the predetermined information is continuously output until the stop display of the last variable display ends and the next variable starts.

[Feature cA21]
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA20,
A gaming machine, wherein the mode of continuous output includes a mode in which the output is temporarily stopped and then resumed.

According to this feature, since the mode of continuous output includes a mode in which the output is temporarily stopped and then resumed, a display device such as a data display that receives the output can be In a plurality of consecutive game rounds, if the output is stopped during the variable display and is output during the fixed display, the specification shall be such that it is determined that the output continues over the plurality of game rounds. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent the output from being interrupted due to noise or the like during variable display, and the deterioration of the identification performance of a display device such as a data display.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

A game machine such as a slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means. A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

<<7>> Seventh Embodiment:
<<7-0>> Introduction:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that executes a display effect on a liquid crystal display device and has various movable accessories that operate during the execution of the display effect in order to liven up the game effect. In recent years, the decoration of various movable accessories has been made gorgeous, and various actions have been performed by various movable accessories to diversify game effects and improve interest.

However, if the actions to be executed by the various movable accessories become more diverse, the drive programs for executing the various actions by the various movable accessories become enormous, and the capacity of the ROM increases. A problem arose.

Therefore, a driving scenario, which is a program that defines a series of actions of various movable accessories, is stored in the ROM, and when the series of actions is executed, the driving scenario is read from the ROM and stored in the RAM. A pachinko machine has been developed that causes various movable accessories to perform a series of actions based on a driving scenario stored in a RAM. According to a pachinko machine equipped with such a driving scenario, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is defined can be used (reused) in a plurality of effects, or the same driving scenario can be used a plurality of times during the execution of one effect. By adopting the configuration for repeated use, it is possible to reduce the number of programs to be stored in the ROM and reduce the capacity of the ROM used.

In addition, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is specified is read from the ROM, stored once in the RAM, and by executing the driving scenario stored in the RAM, the series of actions is executed by various movable accessories. By adopting a configuration in which a driving scenario once stored in a RAM is repeatedly executed to repeatedly execute a series of operations on various movable parts, various movable parts can be made to have a single single function as in the past. It is no longer necessary to execute a huge number of processes, such as reading a driving program defining a single operation from the ROM and storing it in the RAM each time an operation is to be executed. It has become possible to significantly reduce the number of readouts, reducing the processing load on pachinko machines.

However, in the conventional driving scenario, when the driving scenario is once stored in the RAM and the control of various movable parts is started based on the driving scenario, all the series of actions specified in the driving scenario are executed. was not able to end the control based on the driving scenario. For this reason, conventional driving scenarios have been used for presentations on the premise that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. As such an effect, for example, there is a development effect that makes the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not normal reach will develop into super reach.

In the development effect, for example, during a predetermined period of time during which normal reach is being executed, various movable accessories are repeatedly executed in a series of actions (for example, moving up and down multiple times), and when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the series of actions is performed. When it is terminated and it develops into super reach, the various movable accessories are made to perform the action corresponding to the super reach, and on the other hand, when it does not develop into super reach, the action corresponding to the case where it does not develop into super reach is executed by various movable accessories. In this configuration, the driving scenario is set so that the series of actions will end when the predetermined period has elapsed, and the positions and states of various movable accessories at the time of the end are also set in advance. Therefore, after completing a series of actions, it is possible to smoothly execute the action corresponding to the super reach and the action corresponding to the case where the super reach does not develop.

In this way, there is no problem when the conventional driving scenario is used for a production that assumes that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. The following problem may occur when using for an effect (for example, a button effect) in which the timing of ending a series of actions is undefined.

For example, as a button effect in which the timing of ending a series of actions is uncertain, there is a button announcement effect in which the lottery result related to the change is announced at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed. In the button announcement effect, for example, a series of actions (for example, actions to move up and down multiple times) are repeatedly performed by various movable accessories while the pattern is changing, and during the execution of the series of actions, the button acceptance valid period is set. When the effect operation button is pressed during the button reception valid period, the series of operations is terminated at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed, and the lottery result related to the change is a big win. In this case, the various movable accessories are caused to perform an action corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (for example, an action of falling and rotating). Various movable accessories are caused to perform the action (for example, the action of waiting on the spot).

However, when the conventional drive scenario is used for the above-described button notification effect, even if the effect operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, all the series of actions specified in the drive scenario are executed. Since the control based on the drive scenario cannot be terminated until it ends, there is a time lag from when the effect operation button is pressed until the series of actions is completed and the action corresponding to the lottery result is started. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable, and the exhilarating feeling of the button presentation may be spoiled.

Furthermore, when the performance operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, an image corresponding to the lottery result related to the change is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device without delay from the timing when the performance operation button is pressed. is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the image is output from the speaker without delay. Therefore, the time lag of the actions of various movable accessories becomes conspicuous, which may cause the player to feel even more uncomfortable and uncomfortable.

A game machine according to the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as the game machine) aims to end a series of actions of a movable accessory by appropriate control while effectively utilizing control programs and control data. A detailed description will be given below.

This game machine is
A ball entry means provided in the game area;
A winning lottery means for performing a winning lottery when a game ball enters the ball entering means;
display control means for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed by the display means from among a plurality of effect display modes in accordance with the lottery result of the win/fail lottery of the win/fail lottery;
movable control means provided in the game area for determining and executing one operation mode of the movable means that operates during the display of the specific effect on the display means from a plurality of modes;
with
The movable control means causes the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on specific information set corresponding to one of the action modes determined from the plurality of action modes based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. is to be carried out,
The movable means is driven and controlled between a first position, which is the initial position side, and a second position, which is the most driven position in the series of specific operations,
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position a plurality of times,
The movable control means is
determination means for determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied when the predetermined action is executed;
When the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific actions. a means of termination;
The above purpose is achieved by providing

The ``ball entry means'' may be any area having a ball entrance through which a game ball launched into the game area can enter. The first special symbol starting port where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game ball enters, and the second special symbol where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the game ball enters Start gate, normal pattern start gate where variation display of normal pattern is executed when game ball enters, V probability area where game state shifts to high probability mode when game ball enters, game Area V where the game state shifts to a game state (special electric open/close execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times when a ball enters, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters A prize winning opening, a large winning opening, a prize ball giving area in the large winning opening, an out opening provided at the bottom of the game board, a special electric accessory that activates a special electric accessory when a game ball enters, etc.

The "win or fail lottery" may be a lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the game ball enters the first special figure start port. The first special lottery that is executed when the ball enters, the second special lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the second special start gate, and the game ball enters the normal start gate Ordinary drawing lottery executed in the case, production to be executed during special pattern fluctuations, and production decision to determine the type of production to be executed during the game state where special electric accessories open and close multiple times (special electric opening and closing execution mode) lottery, etc.

The "win/fail lottery means" may perform a win/fail lottery when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A lottery process for determining the result of a special figure lottery by acquiring random number information based on the ball entering and collating the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, and a game ball at the second special figure start opening. A lottery process that determines the result of a special lottery by acquiring random number information based on the ball entering and comparing the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, based on the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate A lottery process for determining the result of the general pattern lottery by obtaining random number information and comparing the obtained random number information with a predetermined table.

The "display means" may be anything as long as it can display an effect according to the lottery result of the lottery lottery means. , an organic EL display, a plasma display, a cathode ray tube (CRT), a video projector, and the like.

The "specific effect" may be any effect that can be executed by the display means according to the lottery result of the lottery lottery of the lottery lottery means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, to the first special figure start port A display effect that constitutes a special figure variation effect that is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and a display that constitutes a special figure variation effect that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second special figure start port Production, display production that constitutes a normal pattern variation production that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern start gate, display production that is executed during the normal electric opening period, and is executed during the normal electric opening and closing period Display effect, Display effect executed during the normal ending period, Display effect executed during the special electric opening period, Display effect executed during the special electric opening and closing period, Display effect executed during the special electric ending, Demo state display effects executed during Further, the contents of these display effects include, for example, a notice effect, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a special reach effect, a battle effect, and a one-shot announcement effect.

The "display control means" may be any means as long as it determines and executes one specific effect to be executed by the display means from among a plurality of effect display modes. , a process of determining and executing one special figure variation performance to be executed by the pattern display device from among a plurality of performance patterns, and determining the contents of one specific performance to be executed by the display means from a plurality of performance contents. and the like.

The "movable means" may be anything that can operate while a specific effect is being displayed on the display means. Movable accessories for production that are provided and can move up and down, expand, rotate and reduce, movable accessories that are provided at the bottom of the pattern display device and can be raised and lowered, and production operation buttons Movable accessories that are provided inside and that can rotate plate-shaped members, movable accessories that can rotate plate-shaped members that are provided on the downflow path of game balls, movable accessories that can slide plate-shaped members, etc. is mentioned.

The "operation mode" may be anything that can be specified as a mode of operation of the movable means. Rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation amount, rotation direction in rotation operation, rotation speed, rotation amount, slide direction in slide operation, slide speed, slide amount, execution order of these operations, execution timing, execution interval, execution count and the like.

"Specific information" is information set by one setting process corresponding to one operation mode determined from a plurality of operation modes based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, and It is sufficient if the movable means is caused to perform a series of specific actions based on the information set by the processing. Driving scenarios that define information for execution, schedule data that predefines the content of predetermined operations and execution timing, the content of processes to be executed, the timing to be executed, the number of times, the timing to end, etc. are defined. various counters, values stored for comparison with the various counter values, and various pointers updated as the control progresses.

The "series of specific actions" may be a series of actions that can be executed by the movable means, and may be, for example, a series of up-and-down movement actions, a series of falling/enlarging/rotating/ Shrinking/rising motion, series of falling/rotating/rising motion, series of right/left/rotating motion, series of rotating motion, series of sliding motion, series of left/rotating/right moving, series of rightward Examples include movement, rotation, left movement, and the like.

The ``movable control means'' causes the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on specific information set corresponding to one action mode determined from among a plurality of actions based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a movable accessory for presentation is created based on a driving scenario set corresponding to one accessory action pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns. A sequence of dropping, enlarging, rotating, and moving the performance movable accessory based on a process for performing a series of vertical movement operations and a driving scenario set corresponding to one accessory operation pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns. processing for performing contraction/raising motions, processing for causing the movable means to perform a series of specific motions based on schedule data set corresponding to one motion mode determined from among a plurality of a process of causing the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on various counter values set corresponding to one operation mode; Processing for causing the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on the value, and processing for causing the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on various pointers set corresponding to one action mode determined from a plurality of pointers. , and so on.

The "initial position" may be the initial position or state when the movable means is not driven. and the initial state in which the movable accessory is not driven.

The "first position" may be any position where the movable means returns to the initial position side in a series of specific actions. The origin position, which is also the position at which the movable accessory returns the most in a series of actions, the W position (a modified example described later), the state in which the movable accessory returns the most in the series of actions, An initial state, which is also the most returned state in operation, and the like.

The ``second position'' may be any position where the movable means is most driven in a series of specific actions, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the movable accessory is most driven in a series of actions. The lowest position, which is the position, and the state in which the movable accessory is most driven in a series of actions, and the like.

The "predetermined action" may be any action that positions the movable means at or near the first position, which is the initial position side. to the initial position from the A position to be described later, an upward motion to move the performance movable accessory from the B position to the initial position described later, and the performance movable accessory to be moved from the A position to the W position described later. Ascending motion, moving the movable accessory for effect from position B to W, which will be described later, returning the movable accessory from the displaced position to the position before displacement, and moving the movable accessory from the most driven state. Examples include an operation to return to a non-active state, an operation to return the movable accessory from the most driven state to the initial state, and the like.

The "determining means" may be anything as long as it determines whether or not a condition for ending a series of specific actions is satisfied when a predetermined action is executed. A process for determining whether or not a condition for terminating the up-and-down movement operation is satisfied when the movable accessory for effect is positioned at the initial position by executing the ascending motion, and a process for determining whether or not the conditions for ending the up-and-down movement operation are satisfied when the movable accessory for effect is positioned at the initial position, A process of judging whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied when positioned at a position, and an operation of returning the movable accessory to a state in which it is not driven is executed so that the movable accessory is in a state in which it is not driven. A process of determining whether or not the conditions for ending a series of specific actions are satisfied when the A process of determining whether or not a condition for ending a specific action is satisfied, and the like.

The 'termination means' terminates the series of specific actions by stopping the movable means positioned at or near the first position when the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied. Anything can be used as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. A process of ending a series of specific actions by pressing a button, a process of stopping a movable accessory in a non-driven state and ending a series of specific actions, and a process of stopping a movable accessory in an initial state and performing a series of specific actions , and the like.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes a "ball entry section" as a "ball entry means", an "internal lottery" as a "win-win lottery", and a "win-win lottery means" as a " lottery processing”, a “display unit” as a “display means”, a “predetermined effect” as a “specific effect”, a “display control process” as a “display control means”, and a “movable means ” as a “movable accessory”, a “movement pattern” as a “movement mode”, a “movable control process” as a “movable control means”, and a “predetermined operating condition” as a “predetermined "start condition", "setting information" as "specific information", "series of actions" as "series of specific actions", and "initial position when non-driving" as "initial position" , a "most return position during driving" as a "first position", a "maximum displacement position during driving" as a "second position", a "return movement" as a "predetermined movement", and an "end It includes an "operation end condition" as a "condition", a "determination process" as a "determination means", and an "end process" as a "termination means". Further, as a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes a "short operation period" as a "first period", a "long operation period" as a "second period", and a "second period". A "short control period" as a "one control period", a "long control period" as a "second control period", a "first control" as a "first control", and a "second control period". A "second control" as a "second control", a "game operation" as a "predetermined game operation", an "operation waiting period" as a "waiting period", and a "non-driving period" , a "sound output unit" as a "sound output unit", a "light emitting unit" as a "light emitting unit", and a "predetermined interval period" as a "predetermined period" ' may be provided.

According to this gaming machine, although the details will be described later, it is possible to execute a lottery process for performing an internal lottery when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and according to the lottery result of the internal lottery can execute display control processing for determining and executing one predetermined effect to be executed on the display unit from among a plurality of effect display modes, is provided in the game area, and operates while the predetermined effect is being displayed on the display unit. It is possible to execute a movable control process for determining and executing one movement pattern of the movable accessory from among a plurality of patterns. Then, according to this game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a series of motions are caused to the movable accessory based on the setting information set corresponding to one motion pattern determined from among a plurality of motion patterns. It is possible to have it done.

Then, according to the game machine, the movable accessory is driven between the drive-time most-return position, which is the non-drive time initial position side, and the drive-time maximum displacement position, which is the most driven position, in a series of operations. The series of controlled actions is configured to perform a return action multiple times to position the movable accessory at or near the most returned position during drive, and when the return action is executed, It is determined whether or not the operation end condition of a series of operations is satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, the movable part is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving. It is possible to execute end processing for stopping the accessory and ending a series of actions.

Therefore, according to this game machine, the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving or in the vicinity of the most return position during driving without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions. The series of operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of operations is completed, it is possible to detect that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most-returned position during driving. It becomes possible to execute the following control that is assumed.

Here, unlike this game machine, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the condition for ending the action of a series of actions is satisfied, and if it is determined that the condition for ending the action is satisfied, the series of actions is forcibly performed at an arbitrary timing. In the case of adopting the configuration to end, the movable accessory stops at a different position each time between the most return position during driving and the maximum displacement position during driving. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of actions is finished, the position of the movable accessory at the timing of starting the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, there may arise a problem that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine, as described above, when the return motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition of the series of motions is satisfied, and if the motion end condition is satisfied, If it is determined that there is, the movable accessory located at the most return position during driving or near the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is completed. As a result, at the end of a series of actions, the movable accessory is positioned at or in the vicinity of the most-returned position during driving. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving.

Furthermore, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the image displayed on the display unit and the action of the movable accessory, so that it is possible to reduce discomfort and discomfort given to the player.

As described above, according to the game machine, it is possible to end the series of actions of the movable accessory by appropriate control while effectively utilizing the control program and the control data, and after the series of actions is finished, It is possible to execute the following control on the premise that the movable accessory is in a predetermined state.

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as the seventh embodiment.

<<7-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 303 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the seventh embodiment. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a special lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, or at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to perform an operation for shooting a game ball, which is an operation for a game. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can "hit to the right". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

304 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these units are provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the first control, which is the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a sealing seal is attached to an openable and closable portion, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "OPEN" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls the speakers, various lamps, etc. provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 executes second control for controlling the pattern display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back side of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 which is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. A tank rail 55 having a slope, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, such as a payout device 71 that performs

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 converts electric power supplied from an external commercial power source into electric power necessary for operating the pachinko machine 10 and supplies the electric power. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

305 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and a windmill 96 is arranged. These nails 42 and windmills 96 change the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the game area PA consists of a left side game area PAL in which game balls fired by "left hitting" can circulate, and a central lower game area PAC in which game balls circulating in the left side game area PAL can reach. , and a right game area PAR in which game balls shot by "right hitting" can circulate.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first special symbol starting port 33, a second special symbol starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, a normal symbol starting gate 35, a special electric prize winning device 57, and an out port 43. ing. In this embodiment, the first special figure start port 33 is provided in the central lower game area PAC where the game ball fired by "left hitting" can reach, and the game ball fired by "right hitting" reaches A normal figure starting gate 35, a second special figure starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, and a special electric winning device 57 are provided in order from the upstream side of the possible right game area PAR. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 . At the central opening of the game board 30, a variable display unit 40 and a movable accessory 170 for performance are provided as a device for executing a performance to liven up the game. Each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entry part having a ball entry hole into which game balls can enter, and five game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls when the game balls enter. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 .

The first special figure start port 33 is a ball entrance portion having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are released from the payout device 71 as prize balls. Along with the payout, the first special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is executed. A lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is executed, and as a result of the first special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, a special electric accessory (special electric accessory 57b) to be described later. is started. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening and closing process of the special electric accessory is started, the special electric opening and closing period is the period in which the opening and closing of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is the special After the opening and closing process of the electric accessory is completed, it is a waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed.

The special electric prize winning device 57 includes a large prize winning opening 57a into which a game ball can enter, and a special electric accessory 57b having a function of opening and closing the entrance of the special winning prize opening 57a.

The special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 57a. It is a movable accessory that is in an open state in which a ball can be entered into 57a.

In this embodiment, the special electric accessory 57b is arranged at a position where a game ball can reach (contact) in the right game area PAR, and a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member and a lower side of the plate-like member Support portions are provided at both ends and support the plate-shaped member so as to be rotatable forward (toward the front side). In the closed state, the special electric accessory 57b is housed so that the plate-like member is flush with the game board 30, and the game ball circulating from above the special electric accessory 57b is a special It is in a state in which it can pass through the front side (front side) of the electric accessory 57b. On the other hand, in the open state, the special electric accessory 57b is in a state in which the plate-like member is rotated forward (front side) around the support portion, and the special electric accessory 57b flows from above. A game ball enters a state in which it can enter the big winning hole 57a. In this embodiment, the special electric accessory 57b is configured to include a transparent or translucent member, so that the player can visually recognize the game balls flowing on the back side of the plate-like member through the plate-like member. configuration.

The big winning opening 57a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter when the special electric accessory 57b is in an open state, and when a game ball enters, ten game balls are awarded. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a ball.

The normal pattern start gate 35 is a through-hole type ball entry part having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball that enters the normal pattern start gate 35 remains in the game area PA and can be distributed. is. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main controller 60 executes the normal pattern lottery. As a result of the general drawing lottery, there are "normal drawing hit" that shifts the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter, and "normal drawing off" that does not shift the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter. include. As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern lottery is won, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode including the movable control processing for shifting the normal electric accessory 34b to the open state is executed. The general electric switching execution mode is composed of a general electric opening period, a general electric switching processing period, and a general electric ending period. The general electric opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is started, and the general electric opening/closing period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The electric ending period is a standby period after the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessary 34b is completed, until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

A second special figure start port 34 having a normal electric accessory 34b is arranged downstream of the normal figure start gate 35, and a game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 is provided with the normal electric accessory 34b. It is guided to the second special figure starting port 34.

The ordinary electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second special figure start port 34, and when the above-described ordinary electric open/close execution mode is started, the game ball becomes an open state in which the ball can enter the second special figure starting port 34.

The second special figure start port 34 is a ball entry portion having a ball entry port into which a game ball can be entered, and is provided in the right side game area PAR in this embodiment. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71, and the second special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is performed. executed. In this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, "special figure jackpot" and "special figure loss" are set as setting information. A lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is executed, and as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, a special electric accessory (special electric accessory 57b) to be described later. to the open state. In this embodiment, the second special figure starting port 34 is provided in the right side game area PAR, but the position of the second special figure starting port 34 is not limited to this, and the gist of the present invention is not limited to this. Other locations may be provided if feasible. For example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be provided in the left side game area PAL.

The out port 43 is provided at the lowest part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

Above the first special figure starting port 33, a stage 36x is provided. The stage 36x is configured to distribute more game balls to the right route and the left route than to the central route when distributing the game balls that have arrived. That is, the total number of game balls distributed to the right route and the game balls distributed to the left route is larger than the number of game balls distributed to the central route. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided below the stage 36x, and there is a high possibility that the game ball distributed to the central route enters the first special figure starting port 33. Therefore, the central route is more valuable to the player than the right and left routes. In addition, in this embodiment, the distribution stage 36x2 is made of resin.

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. Not only the mode, but also a mode in which the game ball remains in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area and continues to flow (flow down). In addition, the game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first special figure start opening 33, the second special figure starting opening 34 and the big winning opening 57a may be expressed as "winning".

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display 45 . The main display 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 and a round indicator 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first special symbol indicator 37a, a second special symbol indicator 37b, a first special figure reservation indicator 37c, and a second special figure reservation indicator 37d.

The first special symbol display 37a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. The first special symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the first special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first special symbol starting port 33 as a trigger. When the first special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, the first special symbol display device 37a displays corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. After that, the first special symbol display 37a performs stop display of the first special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the first special symbol start port 33, the 7 segment display device constituting the first special symbol display device 37a flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), then the first special symbol lottery lights up (stopped display) in a predetermined mode corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the first special symbol display 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also called a first special symbol game cycle. That is, the first special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery for each first special figure game round. In addition, the time required for one first special game round is also called the first special game time. The first special symbol game time is the first special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a to the stop display of the result of the first special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the first special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the first special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the first special figure stop time is constant (1.0 seconds). Therefore, by determining the first special figure fluctuation time, the first special figure game time is uniquely determined.

The second special symbol display 37b is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second special symbol starting port 34 as a trigger. When the second special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34, the second special symbol display device 37b displays a display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. After that, the second special symbol display 37b performs the stop display of the second special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the second special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol display 37b is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the 7 segment display device that constitutes the second special symbol display device 37b flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), The second special figure lottery Lights up (stops display) in a predetermined manner corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the second special symbol display 37b is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also called a second special symbol game cycle. That is, the second special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery for each second special figure game. In addition, the time required for one second special game time is also called the second special game time. The second special symbol game time is the second special symbol variation that is the time from the start of the second special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 37b to the stop display of the result of the second special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the second special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the second special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special figure stop time is constant. Therefore, by determining the second special figure fluctuation time, the second special figure game time is uniquely determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the game ball is the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, it has a function to suspend the execution of the first special figure lottery or the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball (also called special figure reservation function), A first special figure reservation display 37c that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special figure lottery, and a second special figure reservation display that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the reserved second special figure lottery. 37d.

The first special figure reservation display 37c is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved first special figure lottery numbers (information on the number of gaming balls entering the first special figure start port 33). be. In this embodiment, the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is suspended up to four (4 times). In this embodiment, the first special figure reservation indicator 37c is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 1 lottery lights up.

The second special figure reservation display 37d is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved second special figure lotteries. In this embodiment, the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is suspended up to four (4 times). In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation indicator 37d is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 2 lottery lights up.

Further, in the present embodiment, when both the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery are reserved, the second special figure lottery is preferentially executed, and the second special figure lottery is all reserved. After it is gone, it is configured to execute the first special figure lottery (so-called special 2 priority machine). Specifically, for example, when the first special lottery is held two (twice) and the second special lottery is held three (three times), the second special lottery After being executed three times and no longer held, the first special figure lottery will be executed twice. However, if the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 before the last second special figure lottery that has been withheld ends and the second special figure lottery is suspended again, it will be suspended. The first special figure lottery will not be executed until the second special figure lottery is completed.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display 38a and a normal pattern holding display 38b.

The normal symbol display 38a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols. The normal symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery, is executed with the entry of a game ball into the normal figure start gate 35 as a trigger. When the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. , Performs variable display of normal symbols. After that, the normal symbol display device 38a performs a normal symbol stop display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on the normal symbol display 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 38a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the 7-segment display device constituting the normal pattern display device 38a blinks in a predetermined manner (after the variable display), and then corresponds to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. Lights up in a predetermined manner (stops display). However, the normal symbol display 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal pattern game cycle. That is, the normal game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the normal game lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the normal game start gate 35 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one normal-pattern lottery for each normal-pattern game round. In addition, the time required for one normal game time is also called normal game time. The normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display on the normal pattern display 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped. It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the displayed time. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal map stop time is constant (0.1 seconds). Therefore, the normal pattern game time is uniquely determined by the normal pattern fluctuation time being determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball It has a function to suspend execution (also called a normal pattern reservation function), and has the above-described normal pattern reservation display 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved general pattern lottery reservations.

The normal pattern reservation display 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the normal pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 pieces (4 times). In addition, in this embodiment, the general pattern reservation indicator 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the LED lamps of the number corresponding to the number of reservations of the general pattern lottery are lit.

The round display device 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game means that a predetermined time (maximum open time) has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls entered) of game balls enter the big winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is met. The number of round games differs according to the type per special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening/closing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening/closing period. In this embodiment, the round indicator 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment indicators in which 7 segment light-emitting units are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. However, the round indicator 39 is not limited to two 7-segment indicators, and may have other configurations.

It should be noted that each display unit constituting the main display unit 45 described above is not limited to being configured by a segment display unit or a light-emitting display unit using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices, such as a matrix display, capable of showing the draw process and the draw results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display) is employed as the pattern display device 41 . The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100 which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display), and various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT may be employed.

When the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b fluctuates and stops, the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbols accordingly. and a display unit for performing stop display. Also, the symbol display device 41 is a display unit that displays not only variable display and stop display of decorative symbols, but also various effects such as advance notice effects and effects during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Above the pattern display device 41, a movable accessory 170 for presentation is provided.

The performance movable accessory 170 is a possible accessory arranged in front of (forward) the upper side of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. , which means a front view of the game board 30), five petal portions 172 are arranged around the rotary shaft portion 171. As shown in FIG. Each petal portion 172 is a plate-like transparent or translucent resin member, and has a petal shape when viewed from the front. The rotating shaft portion 171 is connected to a rod-shaped member extending in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30), and is configured to be rotatable around the rod-shaped member. . Each petal portion 172 connected to the rotating shaft portion 171 is configured to be rotatable as the rotating shaft portion 171 rotates. Furthermore, the performance movable accessory 170 is configured to be movable downward from the illustrated origin position. Details of the configuration and operation of the effect movable accessory 170 will be described later.

FIG. 306 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the decorative pattern and the pattern display device 41 which are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. FIG. 306(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 306(A), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 306B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a. As a modified example, a sub-display area SA, which is smaller than the main display area MA, may be displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 306(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design is displayed in a stationary state on the active line L1 for each decorative design row.

In this embodiment, the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, and the first special symbol or second When the variable display of the two special symbols is started, the variable display in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each decorative design to be scrolled is switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative design row Z1, decorative design row Z3, and decorative design row Z2. After that, in synchronization with the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b, one for each decorative symbol row Z1 to Z3. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed. When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery by the main control device 60 is a special big hit, when the variable display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row is finished and the display is stopped. Then, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The manner of variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative design row is not limited to the above-described manner, but includes the number of decorative design rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of decorative designs in each decorative design row, and the Various modes can be adopted as modes of variable display of decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be described. Reach means the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to winning is formed on the activated line L1 in some of the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It means a display state in which a certain combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and in this state, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the win refers to the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1, and in the state in which the reach line is formed, the decorative patterns are scrolled (variably displayed) in the decorative pattern row Z2. ) state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern forming the reach line is stop-displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to achieve a predetermined effect. The ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or hiding the combination of decoration patterns formed with the ready-to-win effect and the reach line. includes things.

As shown in FIG. 306(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first special figure reservation display area Ds1 and a second special figure reservation display area Ds2.

In the first special figure reservation display area Ds1, the number of the first special figure lotteries reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 (number of reserved first special figure lotteries) is displayed. be done. The pending first special drawing lottery is the first special drawing drawing that has not been executed, and the first special drawing that has not started the variable display of the first special drawing for informing the result of the drawing of the first special drawing drawing. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of first special figure lotteries that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved first special figure lotteries.

In the second special figure reservation display area Ds2, the number of second special figure lotteries (the number of reserved second special figure lotteries) that are reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is displayed. be done. The second special lottery pending is the second special lottery that has not been executed, and the second special lottery that has not started the variable display of the second special symbol for informing the lottery result of the second special lottery. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of second special figure lotteries that can be reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved second special figure lotteries.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 306(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays blinking and 1st special figure synchronous display part Sync1 that performs lighting display, second special figure synchronization that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 37b and a display unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed on the first special symbol display device 37a, the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync1 blinks and displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol display device 37b, the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync2 blinks and the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display device 37b. When displaying, the special figure synchronous display unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a first special figure reservation display area Ds1, a second special figure reservation display area Ds2, and a first special figure synchronization display section Sync1. , And, although the second special figure synchronous display part Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

<<7-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 307 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the detection sensors provided for each of the above-described various entrances. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from these detection sensors. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, and the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. Run a special draw.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a main display 45, a special electric accessory drive section 57c that opens and closes the special electric accessory 57b, and a normal electric accessory drive section 34c that opens and closes the normal electric accessory 34b. is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, when the first special figure lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first special symbol display device 37a in the main display device 45, and when the second special figure lottery is executed , Executes the display control of the second special symbol display 37b in the main display 45, and when performing the normal drawing lottery, executes the display control of the normal symbol display 38a in the main display 45, special electric opening and closing execution When the mode is executed, the display control of the round indicator 39 in the main indicator 45 is executed. Furthermore, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the special electric auditors drive unit 57c so that the special electric auditors 57b are opened and closed, and in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal electric auditors 34b The drive control of the normal electric accessary product drive unit 34c is performed so that the is opened and closed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . The main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls, which is setting information set for each ball entrance, to the payout controller 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47, which are light emitting units such as LEDs, arranged on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and is an audio output unit. It controls the drive of the speaker 46 and controls the display control device 100 . In addition, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect, which is a predetermined effect reflecting the operation, is performed. Various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc. are controlled so as to perform

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns that are finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, the content of ready-to-win presentation, and the content of presentation to be executed while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game cycle, is uniquely determined by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 308 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in the RAM 64. FIG. As shown in FIG. 308, the RAM 64 is provided with various counters used for internal lottery by the MPU 62 . Specifically, in this embodiment, the RAM 64 includes a special figure validity determination counter Cs1, a special figure type determination counter Cs2, a special figure reach determination counter Cs3, a special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and a general figure validity determination counter Cs1. A decision counter Cn1, a normal figure type decision counter Cn2, and a random number initial value counter Cini are provided. The special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used when determining the lottery result of the special figure lottery. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used for the special figure reach determination to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 are varied. Also, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b. In addition, the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 are used for the general pattern lottery. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial value as the setting information when the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2, and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

Moreover, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure reservation area 64b, a special figure determination area 64c, a general figure reservation area 64d, and a general figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entrance ball It is stored in time series in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the special figure success judgment counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry ball, the special figure Each value of the figure type determination counter Cs2 and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in time series in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 at the timing of the entry are stored in time series in the normal pattern reservation area 64d. be.

Next, the details of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not to win the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure success/failure determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. Special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1. Incidentally, the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 65535).

The value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entering ball is a special figure. It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the reservation area 64b. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

Each time a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, up to four values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 are stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b. Similarly, the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and is moved to the special figure determination area 64c in the order in which it was stored. Then, the value of the special figure judgment counter Cs1 moved to the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the special figure is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of this special symbol, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is updated periodically, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the value of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the above-described special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 in the order in which they are stored.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure validity determination using the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64e. Then, from among a plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure propriety determination is selected, and a special figure determination area 64e The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of special symbol. And MPU62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator which the special design display part 38a stops and displays based on the classification of the determined special design.

Next, the details of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 will be described. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used when determining whether or not the reach occurs when the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is not per special figure. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is periodically updated, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the values of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special figure success determination counter Cs1 and special figure type determination It is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b together with the value of the counter Cs2.

The value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the values of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 described above in order of being stored.

MPU62, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit in the special figure propriety determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM63 It is compared with the special figure reach determination table, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. In addition, when the result of the special figure propriety determination in the special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the MPU 62 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is acquired immediately before the start of the special symbol variation display. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, the details of the general/universal pattern right/wrong determination counter Cn1 will be described. The general pattern success/failure determination counter Cn1 is used to determine whether or not to be elected per general pattern. The general pattern success determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per this general pattern, is part of the general pattern lottery described above. The normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1.

The normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d at the timing of the passage.

Each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, up to four values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and are moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 moved to the general pattern determination area 64e is collated with the general pattern correctness determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the general pattern is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the normal pattern type. The normal pattern type determination, which is the determination of the type of normal pattern, is part of the normal pattern lottery described above. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored in the general pattern holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 described above is stored in the order of storage. It moves to the normal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern validity determination. Then, from among a plurality of general pattern type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one general pattern type determination table corresponding to the result of the general pattern propriety determination is selected, and a general pattern determination area 64e is selected. The value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general pattern type determination table, and the normal pattern type is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, the special figure propriety determination table will be described.

FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values within the range from 0 to 65535 in the special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1 be done. Then, according to the acquired value of the special figure success determination counter Cs1 and the special figure success determination table, the special figure success determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is performed. done. However, in the present embodiment, the special figure small per is not set as the setting information as one type per special figure.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low probability mode with a low probability of winning the special figure jackpot and a probability of winning the special figure jackpot higher than the low probability mode, as a lottery mode for special figure win/loss determination (special figure lottery). It is configured to be able to execute a high probability mode and a special figure lottery table for the low probability mode used in the special figure lottery in the low probability mode, and a special figure lottery in the high probability mode. It is equipped with a special figure propriety determination table for high probability mode. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, different special figure propriety determination tables are provided for the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery. That is, in this embodiment, the following four types of special figure propriety determination tables are provided as the special figure propriety determination tables used in the special figure lottery.
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)

As shown in FIG. 309(A), the first special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 205 values from 0 to 204 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/319.7 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 309(B), the second special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 205 values from 0 to 204 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/319.7 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 309(C), the first special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 1729 values from 0 to 1728 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode, the special figure jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/37.9.

As shown in FIG. 309(D), the second special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 1729 values from 0 to 1728 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode is about 1/37.9 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 310 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values in the range from 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2 be done. Then, special figure type determination for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is performed based on the result of the above-described special figure propriety determination and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment comprises a first special figure type determination table used in the first special figure lottery and a second special figure type determination table used in the second special figure lottery.

As shown in FIG. 310 (A), according to the first special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 0 to 19, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the result of the special hit/fail judgment is a special jackpot winning, When the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 20 to 39, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined as a special symbol B (8R probability variation big hit), and the special symbol right or wrong If the result of the determination is a special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 40 to 59, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is a special symbol C ( 4R probability variation big hit), the result of the special figure winning judgment is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 60 to 99, the type of special symbol (Type of stop symbol) is determined to be special symbol D (8R normal jackpot). On the other hand, if the result of the special figure propriety determination is the special figure out, regardless of the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the type of the special symbol (type of the stop symbol) is the special symbol Z (out) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 310 (B), according to the second special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 0 to 51, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the result of the special hit/fail judgment is a special jackpot winning, When the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 52 to 55, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined as a special symbol B (8R probability variation big hit), and the special figure right or wrong If the result of the determination is a special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 56 to 59, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is a special symbol C ( 4R probability variation big hit), the result of the special figure winning judgment is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 60 to 99, the type of special symbol (Type of stop symbol) is determined to be special symbol D (8R normal jackpot). On the other hand, if the result of the special figure propriety determination is the special figure out, regardless of the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the type of the special symbol (type of the stop symbol) is the special symbol Z (out) is determined.

Of the special design types (types of stop design), special design A (16R probability variation jackpot), special design B (8R probability variation jackpot), special design C (4R probability variation jackpot) and special design D (8R normal jackpot), All of them are common in that they trigger the execution of the special electric switching execution mode, but differ in the type of the special electric switching scenario selected when the special electric switching execution mode is executed.

The special electric opening/closing scenario is a control program that stores the mode of control of the special electric accessory 57b in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. will be different.

Next, the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table will be described.

FIG. 311 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table. The special electric opening/closing pattern selection table is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol and a special electric opening/closing scenario for realizing the special electric opening/closing pattern when winning the special electric jackpot. The special electric opening/closing pattern is an operation pattern for causing the special electric accessory 57b to perform a series of operations, specifically a series of opening/closing operations. The special electric accessory 57b is in the initial closed state, which is the initial position during non-driving, when the series of opening/closing operations is not executed, and is in the initial closed state. and the open state, which is the most driven maximum displacement position. A series of opening and closing operations are configured to perform a plurality of closing operations for shifting the special electric accessory 57b to the closed state when driving. In this embodiment, the closed state when driving when the special electric accessory 57b is closed by the closing operation included in the series of opening and closing operations is the same as the initial closed state. It does not have to be exactly the same as the closed state. That is, the special electric accessory 57b may not be completely returned to the initial closed state due to the closing operation. In other words, the closing operation may be an operation in which the special electric accessory 57b approaches the initial closed state side, and the game ball enters the big winning opening 57a in both the initial closed state and the driving closed state. is not possible. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, when the initial closed state and the driven closed state are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 311, in the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table, special electric opening/closing patterns corresponding to the types of special symbols (types of stop symbols) are respectively set. A certain special electric switching scenario is set for each special electric switching pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, a special electric opening/closing pattern A (special electric opening/closing scenario A) is set corresponding to the special symbol A, and a special electric opening/closing pattern B (special electric opening/closing scenario B) is set corresponding to the special symbol B. is set, a special electric opening and closing pattern C (special electric opening and closing scenario C) is set corresponding to the special pattern C, and a special electric opening and closing pattern D (special electric opening and closing scenario D) is set corresponding to the special design D there is That is, if the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol A, the special electric opening and closing pattern A (special electric opening and closing scenario A) when executing the special electric opening and closing execution mode is selected, and the special pattern jackpot is won in the special pattern suitability determination, and the result of the special pattern type determination is the special pattern B, when the special pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special pattern opening and closing pattern B (special pattern opening and closing scenario B) is selected, the special pattern jackpot is won in the special pattern suitability determination, and the result of the special pattern type determination is the special pattern C, when the special pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special pattern opening and closing pattern C (special pattern When the opening/closing scenario C) is selected, the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol D, the special opening/closing pattern D is executed when the special opening/closing execution mode is executed. (Special electric switching scenario D) is selected.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a special electric opening period in which the special electric accessory 57b is not driven from the initial closed state after the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied and before the series of opening/closing operations (special electric opening/closing period) starts. . When the special opening period of 3.0 seconds ends, the special opening/closing period begins. In the special electric opening/closing period, the round game opened by the special electric accessory 57b is executed 16 times (16 rounds). In addition, the number of times the special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one time, and one round game is when the special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, or the maximum The game ends when any of the conditions that 10 game balls, which are the number of entering balls, enter the big winning opening 57a, is established. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 2.0 seconds. That is, in the present embodiment, the series of opening and closing operations includes a special electric access period during which the special electric accessory 57b waits in the closed state during driving. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. Regarding the game state after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode described later becomes the high frequency support mode. And, in this embodiment, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the next special figure jackpot is won in the special figure lottery.

The special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B and the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C differ in the number of executions of the round game compared to the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A described above. (8R in the special electric switching scenario B and 4R in the special electric switching scenario C), and other control aspects are the same. That is, in the present embodiment, the period during which a series of opening and closing operations is executed is a special electric switching period of 4R or 8R, which is a short operation period, and a special electric switching period of 16R, which is an operating period longer than the special electric switching period of 4R or 8R. And prepare.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario D is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed 8 times (8 rounds). In addition, the number of times the special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one time, and one round game is when the special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, or the maximum The game ends when any of the conditions that 10 game balls, which are the number of entering balls, enter the big winning opening 57a, is established. Also, the special electric interval period between round games is set to 2.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. Regarding the game state after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario D ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode described later becomes the high frequency support mode. And, in this embodiment, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are when the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure lottery, or 100 special figure fluctuations are completed without winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery. end if

Next, the normal figure right/wrong determination table will be described.

FIG. 312 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure right/wrong determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. Then, according to the obtained value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern correctness determination table, the general pattern correctness determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low frequency support mode (low support state) as a support mode that defines the winning probability per normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the operation mode of the normal electric role. , Under the same conditions, it is configured to be able to execute a high-frequency support mode (high-support state) in which normal electric accessories operate more frequently than in low-frequency support mode, and is used in the general drawing lottery in low-frequency support mode. It has a general pattern suitability determination table for the low frequency support mode and a general pattern suitability determination table for the high frequency support mode used in the general pattern lottery in the high frequency support mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the following two types of general pattern correctness determination tables are provided as the general pattern correctness determination table used in the general pattern lottery.
・Normal map right/wrong judgment table (for low-frequency support mode)
・General map right/wrong judgment table (for high-frequency support mode)

As shown in FIG. 312 (A), in the general figure correctness determination table (for low frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the low frequency support mode, 0 to 65535 of the general figure accuracy determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the individual values, three values of 0 to 2 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the low-frequency support mode is the winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/21845.66.

The "universal map hit" is a judgment result that triggers the start of the general electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the normal pattern" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal switching execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 312 (B), in the general figure right or wrong determination table (for high frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the high frequency support mode, 0 to 65535 of the general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the values, 65535 values of 0 to 65534 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the high-frequency support mode is winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/1.0000153.

Next, the normal figure classification determination table is demonstrated.

FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2. Then, based on the obtained value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness determination, and the general pattern type determination table, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined Normal pattern type determination is performed.

As shown in FIG. 313, according to the general figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the general figure correctness determination is the winning per general figure, and the value of the acquired general figure type determination counter Cn2 is 0 to 49 If the value is, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined as normal pattern A (per normal pattern A), the result of the normal pattern validity determination is the winning per normal pattern, and the acquired normal pattern When the value of the figure type determination counter Cn2 is a value from 50 to 99, the type of normal design (type of stop design) is determined as normal design B (normal design win B). On the other hand, if the result of the general pattern correctness determination is normal pattern out, regardless of the value of the acquired general pattern type determination counter Cn2, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is normal pattern Z (normal pattern out).

Among the types of normal patterns (types of stop patterns), the normal pattern A (per normal pattern A) and the normal pattern B (per normal pattern B) trigger the execution of the normal electric switching execution mode, and the normal electric switching execution mode is executed, the utility switch scenario is loaded. The general electric switching scenario is a control program in which the manner of control of the general electric accessory 34b in the general electric switching execution mode is stored.

Next, the normal switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 314 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal switching scenario selection table. The normal switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when winning per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 314, normal switching scenarios corresponding to normal symbol types (stop symbol types) are set in the normal switching scenario selection table. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal switching scenario A is set corresponding to the normal symbol A, and the normal switching scenario B is set corresponding to the normal symbol B. That is, when the general pattern is elected in the general pattern propriety determination, and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern A, the general pattern opening and closing scenario A is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, In the general pattern correctness determination, when the general pattern is won, and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern B, the general pattern opening and closing scenario B is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed. Become.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario A is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 2.0 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. In the general electric opening/closing period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for one time is set to 0.8 seconds. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 2.0 seconds is started.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario B is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 2.0 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. In the normal electric switching period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened twice, and the opening time of one time is set to 0.8 seconds. Also, the interval period of closing between opening and closing (interval period of electric power) is set to 1.0 second. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 2.0 seconds is started.

It should be noted that, in the following description, for example, winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure propriety determination, and the fact that it was determined as a special symbol A (16R probability variation jackpot) in the special figure type determination is "in the special figure lottery, It is also expressed as "I was elected." Also, for example, it is expressed as "per normal pattern A in the general pattern lottery" that it is elected per normal pattern in the general pattern propriety determination and is determined as normal pattern A in the normal pattern type determination.

In addition, the game state in which the lottery mode of the above-mentioned special figure lottery is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is also referred to as "low probability low support state" or "normal state", and the lottery mode of the special figure lottery is a high probability mode, and the game state in which the support mode is a low frequency support mode is also called "high probability low support state" or "latent probability variable state (latent probability state)", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a low probability mode , The game state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode is also called a "low-probability high support state" or "time-saving state", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. This game state is also referred to as "high probability high support state" or "probability variable state".

<<7-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 315 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

The audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91 . The sound emission control board 91 includes an MPU 92 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a sound that generates a sound signal and drives the speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal to output a sound. An output LSI 98 and an audio data ROM 98a, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored, are mounted.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, the ROM 93 stores an effect pattern table 93a, a role product action pattern table 93b, a driving scenario 93c described later, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, drive scenario storage areas 94d, drive scenario counter areas 94e, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port.

The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60, the effect operation buttons 24, etc., and the MPU 92 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, signals indicating the operation mode of the effect operation buttons 24, and the like. configured to be receivable.

The output side of the MPU 92 is connected with the various lamps 47, the performance movable accessory driving mechanism 97, the sound output LSI 98, and the display control device 100. FIG.

The performance movable accessory drive mechanism 97 is a mechanism for driving the performance movable accessory 170 described above, and includes a vertical movement motor 174 , a rotation motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 . The vertical movement motor 174 is a motor for vertically moving the movable accessory for presentation 170, and the motor for rotation 176 is a motor for rotating the rotating shaft portion 171 of the movable accessory for presentation 170. The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is a mechanism for separating (enlarging) each petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 from the rotating shaft portion 171 . The drive scenario 93c described above is a program in which operation patterns (a part of accessory operation patterns to be described later) of the vertical movement motor 174, the rotation motor 176, and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 are defined. The details of the effect movable accessory 170, the effect movable accessory drive mechanism 97, and the driving scenario 93c will be described later.

The sound output LSI 98 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 98 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98a to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 98 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 98 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 98 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and executes end processing for ending the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 98 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 98 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 98 reads the corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate the sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 . The display control board 101 is mounted with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 receives and analyzes various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). ).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<7-4>> Overview of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment:
Next, the outline of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

<<7-4-1>> Configuration and operation of movable accessories for production:
As shown in FIG. 305, the effect movable accessory 170 is arranged on the front (front) upper side of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and is configured to be movable downward from the origin position shown in FIG. In addition, each petal portion 172 is configured to be separated from the rotation shaft portion 171 and expandable, and further configured to be rotatable around the rotation shaft portion 171 in a front view.

Fig. 316 shows that the effect movable accessory 170 moves to the lowest position (hereinafter referred to as the lowest point position), each petal part 172 separates (enlarges) from the rotating shaft part 171, and at the lowest point position It is an explanatory view showing the direction of arrow RL, that is, the state of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As shown in the figure, the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned slightly below the center of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 when it moves to the lowest position, which is the maximum displacement position during driving.

As shown in FIG. 305, the effect movable accessory 170 is configured so that each of the five petal portions 172 gathers on the rotating shaft portion 171 when the enlargement operation described later is not executed. It has a shape like a closed flower when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the performance movable accessory 170 is expanded as shown in FIG. 316, each of the five petal portions 172 separates from the rotating shaft portion 171, and is like an open flower when viewed from the front. shape.

In summary, the effect movable accessory 170 is configured to be able to perform the following actions.
305 and the lowest position shown in FIG. 316 Enlargement operation: Each petal 172 separates from the rotating shaft 171 and expands Action/Reduction action: Action of returning each petal 172 separated from the rotating shaft 171 to its original position and contracting/Rotating action: Action of rotating each petal 172 around the rotating shaft 171 This embodiment , the effect movable accessory 170 is configured to be able to move up and down, enlarge, reduce, and rotate as various effects are executed.

FIG. 317 is a schematic right side view showing the effect movable accessory 170 and the effect movable accessory driving mechanism 97 that drives the effect movable accessory 170 . The performance movable accessory 170 includes the rotating shaft portion 171 and the five petal portions 172 as described above. The performance movable accessory drive mechanism 97 includes a vertical movement motor 174 , a rack and pinion mechanism 175 , a rotation motor 176 , and an enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 .

The vertical movement motor 174 and the rack and pinion mechanism 175 are units that control the above-described vertical movement of the performance movable accessory 170 . The rack and pinion mechanism 175 is a mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the vertical movement motor 174 into linear motion, and includes a rack 175a and a pinion 175b. As shown in FIG. 317, the vertical movement motor 174 is connected to the center shaft of the pinion 175b, and the mounting portion 174a of the rotation motor 176 is connected to one end of the rack 175a. The rotation motor 176 and the effect movable accessory 170 are integrally configured to be vertically movable along the vertical direction Y of the game board 30 by the driving force of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, the vertical movement motor 174 is configured by a stepping motor.

The rotation motor 176 is a unit that controls the rotation of the performance movable accessory 170, and is configured by a stepping motor in this embodiment. The rotation motor 176 is connected to the end of the rotating shaft portion 171 opposite to the side to which the petal portion 172 is connected. is configured to be rotatable in the direction of arrow RL, that is, counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is a unit that controls the above-described enlargement and reduction operations of the performance movable accessory 170 , and is attached to the rotating shaft portion 171 and connected to each petal portion 172 . The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 has a solenoid, and when the solenoid is not energized, the petals 172 are gathered around the rotating shaft 171 in a closed flower-like shape (hereinafter referred to as the closed petal state). On the other hand, when the solenoid is energized, each petal portion 172 is separated from the rotating shaft portion 171 and is shaped like an open flower (hereinafter referred to as an open petal state). .

The vertical movement motor 174, the rotation motor 176, and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177, which are included in the presentation movable accessory drive mechanism 97, can receive control signals from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The motor 176 for moving up and down, the motor 174 for moving up and down, and the scaling mechanism 177 are controlled by the sound emission control device 90 .

<<7-4-2>> Accessory interlocking production with action of movable accessory for production (During the execution of the special game round), various effects can be executed. It is configured to be able to execute the performance linked to the character that accompanies the action of

The performance linked to the character is a display performance by the display of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a character performance by the operation of the performance movable accessory 170 corresponding to the display performance, a sound performance by the speaker 46, and various lamps 47. It is configured by executing the light emission effect etc. by collaborating.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a lottery process of performing an internal lottery when a game ball enters a ball entrance portion provided in the game area, and one process executed by the display unit according to the lottery result of the internal lottery is executed. A display control process for determining and executing a predetermined effect from among a plurality of effect display modes can be executed, and one operation pattern of a movable accessory provided in a game area and operating during display of a predetermined effect on a display unit. can be executed by determining from among a plurality of

Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, a lottery process for performing a special figure lottery when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 provided in the game area PA can be executed, and the display performance which is a predetermined performance constituting one special figure fluctuation performance executed by the pattern display device 41 according to the lottery result of the special figure lottery is selected from a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns). It is possible to execute display control processing that is determined and executed. Then, a movement control process is executed for determining and executing one role product operation pattern of the performance movable role product 170 that operates during the display of the display effect that constitutes the special figure variation effect on the pattern display device 41 from a plurality of patterns. It is possible.

More specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 performs various operations based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34. Random number information (values of various lottery counters) is acquired, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is determined based on the acquired various random number information. Then, the main control device 60 determines one special figure variation pattern based on the lottery result of the special figure lottery and the values of various counters obtained, and the special figure corresponding to the determined one special figure variation pattern A figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

The sound emission control device 90 determines the display performance constituting one special figure variation performance from among a plurality of performance patterns based on the received special figure variation pattern command, and corresponds to the determined one performance pattern. One sound emission pattern and one character object action pattern are determined from a plurality of respective ones, and sound emission control is executed based on the determined one sound emission pattern, and the decided one character action pattern is executed. Based on this, the motion control of the performance movable accessory 170 is executed. Also, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a display effect pattern command corresponding to the determined one effect pattern.

The display control device 100 specifies one effect pattern from the received effect pattern command for display, and executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the specified one effect pattern.

In this way, the display effect executed based on the effect pattern, the character object effect executed based on the character object action pattern, and the sound effect and light emission effect executed based on the sound light emission pattern are linked. By being combined and executed, the above-described character-linked effect is realized. Note that when an effect is executed in which the effect movable accessory 170 is not interlocked, the accessory action pattern is not determined.

The role product action pattern defines the type of driving scenario 93c to be used and the execution timing of the driving scenario 93c. The drive scenario 93c is a control program that defines a series of operations of the performance movable accessory 170, and is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 in this embodiment.

When the execution timing of the driving scenario 93c defined in the role product operation pattern arrives, the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 selects the role product operation pattern from the driving scenario 93c stored in the sound and light side ROM 93. and stores it in the driving scenario storage area 94d of the sound and light side RAM 94, and sequentially executes the processing corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter stored in the driving scenario counter area 94e. do. In this way, the effect movable accessory 170 can execute a series of actions defined in the driving scenario 93c.

<<7-4-3>> An example of a performance linked to a character:
Next, an example of a performance linked to a character that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIGS. 318 and 319 are explanatory diagrams showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect executable by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the character-linked battle effect is started when reach by the decorative pattern is established on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 and a predetermined start condition for the character-linked battle effect is satisfied. It is a production that will be done.

318 and 319 show, as positions included in the vertical movement range of the movable accessory for presentation 170, the origin position, which is the initial position during non-driving and the most returned position during driving, and an A position below the origin position. , the B position below the A position, and the lowest point position below the B position, which is the position of maximum displacement during driving. Note that these positions are based on the center of the rotating shaft portion 171 of the movable accessory 170 for presentation. Here, the non-driving initial position is the initial position in a state in which the production movable accessory 170 is not driven, and the drive most return position is the period during which the production movable accessory 170 is driven ( This is the position when it returns to the initial position side most during a period during which a series of vertical movement operations to be described later is executed). The maximum displacement position during driving is the position that is the most driven and the farthest from the initial position during the period in which the effect movable accessory 170 is driven (the period in which a series of vertical movement operations to be described later is executed). . In this embodiment, as will be described later, the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to return to the origin position when returning to the initial position side in a series of vertical movement operations. Therefore, in this embodiment, the most return position during driving is the same origin position as the initial position during non-driving.

As shown in FIG. 318(A), when the reach by the decorative pattern is established on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the decorative pattern is hidden and the pattern display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. 318(B). A moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a battle moving image) of a battle between a character on the player side (a female character in this embodiment) and a character on the enemy side (a male character in this embodiment) starts to be displayed on the surface 41a. be. When the display of the battle moving image is started, the effect movable accessory 170 moves back and forth between the origin position and the position A twice, and then moves back and forth between the origin position and the position B twice. A series of up-and-down motions, which are motions, are started, and the series of up-and-down motions are repeatedly executed. In this embodiment, the time required to complete one execution of this series of vertical movement operations is 3.0 seconds. Four rising motions, which are return motions returning from the A position or the B position to the origin position, are included.

In this embodiment, the drive scenario 93c1 defining this series of vertical movement operations is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93, and when this series of vertical movement operations is started, the driving scenario 93c1 is set to the sound and light side movement. It is read out from the ROM 93 and stored (set) in the driving scenario storage area 94d, and the control according to the driving scenario 93c1, which is the set setting information, is repeatedly executed by the sound emission control device 90. The details of the driving scenario 93c1, which is the setting information, will be described later.

Then, when the battle moving image is displayed for 30.0 seconds, in other words, when 30.0 seconds have passed since the series of up-and-down movement actions started, this series of up-and-down movement actions is executed 10 times. As shown in FIG. 318(C), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays the character string "Press the button!" A gauge is displayed. In this embodiment, the button acceptance valid period is set to 6.0 seconds. It should be noted that the above-described series of up-and-down movement operations are continuously executed even during the button reception valid period of 6.0 seconds.

When the effect operation button 24, which is a game operation, is pressed during this button acceptance valid period, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery related to this effect is a big hit, it is shown in FIG. 319 (A). Thus, the character string "Victory!"

On the other hand, with respect to the effect movable accessory 170, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, if the result of the special lottery related to the main effect is a jackpot, FIG. , the performance movable accessory 170 is moved at high speed from the origin position to the lowest point position, each petal part 171 is enlarged at the lowest point position, and each petal part 171 is rotated around the rotating shaft part 171. Rotate in the direction of arrow RL for 5.0 seconds, then contract each petal part 171, and then move the production movable accessory 170 from the lowest point position to the origin position. - Shrinking/rising operation will be executed.

In the present embodiment, a drive scenario 93c2 defining the series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising operations is stored in the ROM 93 on the sound and light side. When starting, the driving scenario 93c2 is read from the sound and light side ROM 93 and stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d, and the sound emission control device 90 executes control according to the driving scenario 93c2. . Details of the drive scenario 93c2 will be described later.

Here, during the button acceptance valid period, the movable accessory for presentation 170 is executed in a series of up-and-down movements specified in the driving scenario 93c1. During the movement between the position A, or between the origin position and the position B, the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the movement.

However, in a general driving scenario, once a driving scenario in which a series of actions is defined is executed, even if a condition for terminating the driving scenario is met in the middle of the series of actions defined in the driving scenario. , the driving scenario cannot be terminated until the series of actions specified in the driving scenario is completed to the end, and the execution of the next driving scenario is started after the conditions for terminating the driving scenario are satisfied. There may be a problem that a time lag occurs until

In the example of this effect, even if the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the series of vertical movement motions of the movable accessory for effect 170 during the button reception valid period, the series of vertical movement motions defined in the driving scenario is performed. is completed until the end of the drive scenario, and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed, a series of falling, expanding, rotating, shrinking, and rising actions specified in the next driving scenario are started. There may be a problem that a time lag occurs before the

Furthermore, in the example of this effect, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the valid period of button acceptance, the character string "Victory!!" Since it is displayed without delay, the delay in starting the series of falling, enlarging, rotating, shrinking, and rising actions becomes even more conspicuous, and the exhilaration of pressing the presentation operation button 24 is spoiled. can occur.

Therefore, in the driving scenario 93c1 of the present embodiment, each time the performance movable accessory 170 performs a rising motion, which is a return motion to return to the origin position, a vertical moving motion, which is a motion ending condition for ending the driving scenario 93c1, is performed. Determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the vertical movement operation termination condition is satisfied, the subsequent operation specified in the driving scenario 93c1 is performed. A configuration is adopted in which the driving scenario 93c1 is terminated without performing the driving scenario 93c1, and the next driving scenario 93c2 is executed. Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button reception valid period, the vertical movement operation end condition establishment flag is turned ON, and each time the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, the vertical movement is performed. It is determined whether or not the operation end condition establishment flag is ON, and if it is determined to be ON, the effect movable accessory 170 positioned at the origin position is stopped, and the driving scenario 93c1 is terminated. A configuration is adopted in which end processing is executed to end a series of vertical movement operations.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed during a series of vertical movement operations of the effect movable accessory 170 during the button acceptance valid period, the effect operation button 24 is pressed. After that, it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied at the timing when the effect movable accessory 170 first moves to the origin position, and the driving scenario 93c1 does not execute the subsequent operation specified in the driving scenario 93c1. After ending the scenario 93c1, it is possible to start a series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising operations defined in the next drive scenario 93c2. As a result, after the character string "Victory!!" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a series of falling, enlarging, rotating, contracting, and rising operations specified in the next driving scenario 93c2 are started. It is possible to shorten the time lag until it is activated, and it is possible to improve the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button 24.例文帳に追加

In addition, in FIG. 319(A), the case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button acceptance valid period has been described, but in the present embodiment, the effect operation button 24 is not pressed during the button acceptance valid period. employs a configuration in which the up-and-down movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON at the end of the button reception effective period (6.0 seconds in this embodiment). When the movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, it is determined that the vertical movement end condition establishment flag is ON, the driving scenario 93c1 is ended, and a series of falling, expanding, Rotation/reduction/rise operation is started.

Next, the case where the result of the special figure lottery related to the main effect is lost will be described.

When the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button acceptance valid period shown in FIG. On the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, a character string such as "defeat..." is displayed without a time lag from the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed.

On the other hand, regarding the effect movable accessory 170, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, if the result of the special drawing lottery related to the main effect is a loser, the process shown in FIG. As shown, a standby action is executed to make the effect movable accessory 170 stand by at the origin position for 5.0 seconds.

In the present embodiment, a drive scenario 93c3 defining this standby operation is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93, and when this standby operation is started, the drive scenario 93c3 is read from the sound and light side ROM 93. It is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d, and the sound emission control device 90 executes control according to the driving scenario 93c3. Details of the drive scenario 93c3 will be described later.

Here, even if the result of the special lottery related to the main effect is a loss, as in the case of winning the jackpot as described above, during the button acceptance valid period, the driving scenario for the effect movable accessory 170 Since the series of vertical movement operations defined in 93c1 is being executed, the effect movable accessory 170 is moving between the origin position and the position A, or between the origin position and the position B. , and the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the movement.

Hypothetically, if the above-described general driving scenario is adopted, even if the effect operation button 24 is pressed during a series of up-and-down movements of the effect movable accessory 170 during the button acceptance valid period, , the driving scenario cannot be terminated until the series of up-and-down movement motions specified in the driving scenario is completed to the end. There may be a problem that a time lag occurs before the start of

Furthermore, in the example of this effect, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the valid period of button reception, a character string such as "defeat..." is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. Although it is displayed without delay after the character string "defeat..." is displayed, the series of vertical movements of the movable accessory for presentation 170 continues for a while. However, even after knowing the unfavorable result of losing the special drawing lottery, the fact that the series of upward and downward moving motions of the performance movable accessory 170 continues may cause a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the driving scenario 93c1 of the present embodiment, as described above, each time the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, it is determined whether the vertical movement end condition for ending the driving scenario 93c1 is satisfied. is determined, and if it is determined that the vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied, the driving scenario 93c1 is terminated without executing the subsequent operation specified in the driving scenario 93c1, and the next operation is performed. A configuration for executing the driving scenario 93c3 is adopted.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed during a series of vertical movement operations of the effect movable accessory 170 during the button acceptance valid period, the effect operation button 24 is pressed. After that, it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied at the timing when the effect movable accessory 170 first moves to the origin position, and the driving scenario 93c1 does not execute the subsequent operation specified in the driving scenario 93c1. It is possible to end the scenario 93c1 and start the standby operation specified in the next driving scenario 93c3. As a result, even after the character string "defeat..." is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the series of up-and-down movements of the performance movable accessory 170 continues for a long period of time. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of , it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable.

In FIG. 319B, the case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button acceptance valid period has been described, but in the present embodiment, the effect operation button 24 is not pressed during the button acceptance valid period. employs a configuration in which the up-and-down movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON at the end of the button reception effective period (6.0 seconds in this embodiment). When the movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, it is determined that the vertical movement operation end condition establishment flag is ON, the driving scenario 93c1 is ended, and the standby operation specified in the next driving scenario 93c3 is started. become.

In this way, the execution period of a series of up-and-down movement motions based on the driving scenario 93c1 becomes a short short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and a short motion period when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It becomes a long operation period longer than the period. In other words, the series of up-and-down motions ends with the length of the short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and the length of the long action period when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It may end with

Next, the details of the driving scenarios 93c1, 93c2, and 93c3 described above will be described.

FIG. 320 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each drive scenario 93c1, 93c2, 93c3. The drive scenario 93c1 shown in FIG. 320(A) is a program that defines information for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to execute the above-described series of up-and-down motions. The drive scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 320(B) is a program defining information for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to execute the series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising operations described above. The driving scenario 93c3 shown in FIG. 320(C) is a program in which information for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to execute the standby action described above is defined.

In each of the driving scenarios 93c1, 93c2, and 93c3, objects to be driven (vertical movement motor 174, rotation motor 176, enlargement The reduction mechanism 177) and the operation contents to be set for the driving object or the processing contents to be executed are defined.

Specifically, when the motors (vertical movement motor 174 and rotation motor 176) are specified as objects to be driven, the excitation time (ms) , number of steps, and direction of motion are specified. Further, when a solenoid (the solenoid of the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177) is specified as a drive target, it specifies whether to start or end the energization of the solenoid.

A driving scenario 93c1 shown in FIG. 320(A) will be described. As described above, the driving scenario 93c1 is a program that defines information for causing the production movable accessory 170 to execute the above-described series of up-and-down motions.

In the driving scenario 93c1 shown in FIG. 320(A), information related to the movement (displacement) of the performance movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the position A corresponding to the value "1" of the driving scenario counter. is stored. Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, 250 ms as the excitation time, 100 as the number of steps, and the forward direction as the operating direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 100 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the performance movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the A position. An excitation time of 250 ms means that 100 pulses (steps) are output during 250 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 250 ms for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 100 steps and for the production movable accessory 170 to move from the origin position to the A position.

Here, the drive scenario counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time an operation or process defined in the drive scenario is completed. Therefore, when the operation content or processing content corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter is completed, specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 operates 100 steps (after 250 ms have passed), and the effect movable role is executed. When the object 170 moves from the origin position to the A position, 1 is added to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter, resulting in "2".

In the drive scenario 93c1, information related to the movement (displacement) of the effect movable accessory 170 from the position A to the origin position is stored in correspondence with the value "2" of the drive scenario counter. Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, 250 ms as the excitation time, 100 as the number of steps, and the negative direction as the operating direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 100 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the effect movable accessory 170 from position A to the origin position. An excitation time of 250 ms means that 100 pulses (steps) are output during 250 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 250 ms for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 100 steps to move the effect movable accessory 170 from position A to the origin position.

When the vertical movement motor 174 operates 100 steps (after 250 ms has passed) and the effect movable accessory 170 moves from position A to the origin position, 1 is added to the driving scenario counter value "2", and " 3”.

In the drive scenario 93c1, execution of end condition determination processing for determining whether or not a vertical movement end condition for ending the execution of the drive scenario is satisfied is stipulated in correspondence with the value "3" of the drive scenario counter. ing.

In the present embodiment, the upward/downward movement operation end condition is that the depression of the effect operation button 24 is detected within the button depression valid period defined in the set effect pattern, and the upward/downward movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON. or when the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is not detected within the button pressing valid period defined in the set effect pattern and the button pressing valid period elapses, the vertical movement operation end condition is established. That is, the flag is ON.

When it is determined by the end condition determination process that the up/down movement end condition is not established, 1 is added to the value of the drive scenario counter "3", resulting in "4".

On the other hand, if it is determined by the end condition determination process that the up/down motion end condition is met, the driving stored in the drive scenario storage area 94d is not executed, without executing the specified operation or processing. If the contents of the scenario 93c1 are cleared and the driving scenario to be executed next is defined in the set accessory action pattern, the next driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d, and the next driving scenario is stored. The scenario will be executed.

The contents defined corresponding to the driving scenario counter values "4", "5", and "6" of the driving scenario 93c1 are the driving scenario counter values "1", "2", Since they are the same as the contents defined corresponding to "3", the description is omitted.

In the drive scenario 93c1, information related to the movement (displacement) of the effect movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the B position is stored in correspondence with the value "7" of the drive scenario counter. Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, the excitation time is defined as 500 ms, the number of steps is defined as 200, and the forward direction is defined as the operating direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 200 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the performance movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the B position. An excitation time of 500 ms means that 200 pulses (steps) are output during 500 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, the time required for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 200 steps and the effect movable accessory 170 to move from the origin position to the B position is 500 ms, and the value of the drive scenario counter is The moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to "7" is the same as the moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "1".

When the vertical movement motor 174 operates 200 steps (after 500 ms has passed) and the effect movable accessory 170 moves from the origin position to the B position, 1 is added to the driving scenario counter value "7" and " 8”.

In the drive scenario 93c1, information related to the movement (displacement) of the effect movable accessory 170 from position B to the origin position is stored in correspondence with the value "8" of the drive scenario counter. Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, the excitation time is defined as 500 ms, the number of steps is defined as 200, and the operation direction is defined as the negative direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 200 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the performance movable accessory 170 from position B to the origin position. An excitation time of 500 ms means that 200 pulses (steps) are output during 500 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, the time required for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 200 steps to move the effect movable accessory 170 from position B to the origin position is 500 ms, and the value of the driving scenario counter is 500 ms. The moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to "8" is the same as the moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "2".

When the vertical movement motor 174 operates 200 steps (after 500 ms has passed) and the effect movable accessory 170 moves from position B to the origin position, 1 is added to the driving scenario counter value "8" and " 9”.

In the drive scenario 93c1, execution of the end condition determination process described above is defined in correspondence with the value "9" of the drive scenario counter.

The contents defined corresponding to the driving scenario counter values "10", "11", and "12" of the driving scenario 93c1 are the driving scenario counter values "7", "8", Since they are the same as the contents defined corresponding to "9", the description is omitted.

In addition, execution of a repeat process for setting the value of the driving scenario counter to "0" is defined in correspondence with the value "13" of the driving scenario counter of the driving scenario 93c1. When this repetition processing is completed, the driving scenario counter value "0" is incremented by 1 to become "1", and the contents corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "1" are executed again. In other words, the contents defined in the driving scenario 93c1 are repeatedly executed until the above-described vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied.

In this way, in the driving scenario 93c1, the effect movable accessory 170 moves from the origin position to the A position, performs the vertical movement operation twice to move from the A position to the origin position, and then moves the effect movable accessory 170 to the origin position. 170 is moved from the origin position to the B position, and an operation is stipulated in which a vertical movement operation is performed twice from the B position to the origin position. Then, when this series of vertical movement operations is completed, a process for setting the value of the driving scenario counter to "0" is executed, and after the completion of the process, 1 is added to the value of the driving scenario counter "0". It becomes "1", and the contents defined in the driving scenario 93c1 are repeatedly executed.

However, if the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied at the timing of returning to the origin position, then the specified operation or processing is not executed, and the driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. If the contents of the driving scenario 93c1 are cleared and execution of a new driving scenario is defined in the accessory action pattern, the new driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d and executed.

According to the driving scenario 93c1 described above, the period during which the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to the lowest position side (the period from when the effect movable accessory 170 leaves the origin position to when it returns to the origin position is A control period) includes a short control period (500 ms) for reciprocating between the origin position and the A position, and a long control period (1000 ms) for reciprocating between the origin position and the B position. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where a short control period is required until the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, and there are cases where a long control period longer than the short control period is required.

Next, details of the drive scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 320(B) will be described. As described above, the drive scenario 93c2 is a program that defines information for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to execute the series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising operations described above. The control for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to perform a series of falling, enlarging, rotating, contracting, and rising operations is an example of the first control that can be performed after the above-described series of up-and-down moving operations are completed.

In the driving scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 320(B), the operation for moving (displacing) the effect movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the lowest point position corresponds to the value "1" of the driving scenario counter. Stores relevant information. Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, 200 ms as the excitation time, 400 as the number of steps, and the positive direction as the operating direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 400 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the performance movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the lowest position. An excitation time of 200 ms means that 400 pulses (steps) are output during 200 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 200 ms for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 400 steps to move the effect movable accessory 170 from the origin position to the lowest position. The moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "1" is 5 times the moving speed of the effect movable accessory 170 corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "1" of the driving scenario 93c1. be doubled.

When the vertical movement motor 174 operates 400 steps (after 200 ms has passed) and the performance movable accessory 170 moves from the origin position to the lowest position, 1 is added to the driving scenario counter value "1". becomes "2".

In the driving scenario 93c2, information related to the operation for enlarging the petal part 172 of the effect movable accessory 170 is stored in correspondence with the driving scenario counter value "2". Specifically, the enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 is specified as a control target, and it is specified to start energizing the solenoid of the enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 .

When the solenoid of the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is energized and the flower petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 is enlarged, 1 is added to the value "2" of the driving scenario counter, resulting in "3".

In the driving scenario 93c2, information related to an operation for rotating the petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 around the rotating shaft portion 171 is stored in correspondence with the value "3" of the driving scenario counter. . Specifically, the rotation motor 176 is defined as the controlled object, 5000 ms as the excitation time, 1800 as the number of steps, and the positive direction as the operating direction. The contents of this operation are output (set) to the motor driver of the rotation motor 176 . In this embodiment, 1800 steps is the number of steps of the rotation motor 176 necessary for rotating the rotation shaft 171 of the movable accessory 170 for five rotations. An excitation time of 5000 ms means that 1800 pulses (steps) are output during 5000 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, the time required for the rotation motor 176 to operate 1800 steps and the rotating shaft portion 171 of the movable accessory 170 to rotate five times is 5000 ms.

When the rotation motor 176 operates 1800 steps (after 5000 ms has passed) and the petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 rotates five times around the rotation shaft portion 171, the drive scenario counter value "3" is changed to 1. is added to give "4".

In the drive scenario 93c2, information related to the action for shrinking the petal part 172 of the effect movable accessory 170 is stored corresponding to the value "4" of the drive scenario counter. Specifically, the enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 is defined as a control target, and the energization of the solenoid of the enlarging/reducing mechanism 177 is stipulated.

When the solenoid of the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is energized and the flower petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 is reduced, 1 is added to the driving scenario counter value "4", resulting in "5".

In the drive scenario 93c2, information related to the movement (displacement) of the effect movable accessory 170 from the lowest point position to the origin position is stored in correspondence with the value "5" of the drive scenario counter. . Specifically, the vertical movement motor 174 is defined as the controlled object, 3000 ms as the excitation time, 400 as the number of steps, and the negative direction as the operating direction. This operation content is output (set) to the motor driver of the vertical movement motor 174 . In this embodiment, 400 steps is the number of steps of the vertical movement motor 174 necessary for moving the performance movable accessory 170 from the lowest position to the origin position. An excitation time of 3000 ms means that 400 pulses (steps) are output during 3000 ms. Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 3000 ms for the vertical movement motor 174 to operate 400 steps and for the effect movable accessory 170 to move from the lowest position to the origin position. That is, the effect movable accessory 170 slowly moves from the lowest point position to the origin position over 3 seconds.

When the vertical movement motor 174 operates 400 steps (after 3000 ms) and the performance movable accessory 170 moves from the lowest position to the origin position, 1 is added to the drive scenario counter value "5". becomes "6".

Information of "end (END)" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the driving scenario counter value "6" of the driving scenario 93c2. By reading this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations defined in the driving scenario 93c2 have been completed.

In this way, in the driving scenario 93c2, the effect movable accessory 170 moves at high speed (at 200 ms) from the origin position to the lowest point position, and the petal part 172 expands at the lowest point position, and takes 5 seconds. After the petal part 172 rotates 5 times, the petal part 172 shrinks, and the performance movable accessory 170 moves from the lowest position to the origin position over 3 seconds (a series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, rising). actions) are specified. Note that the end condition determination process described above is not set between each operation in this drive scenario 93c2. The reason for this is that once a series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising operations are started, they are not terminated in the middle.

Next, details of the drive scenario 93c3 shown in FIG. 320(C) will be described. As described above, the drive scenario 93c3 is a program that defines information for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to execute the standby action described above. The control for causing the performance movable accessory 170 to perform the standby action is an example of the second control that can be performed after the above-described series of vertical movement actions are completed.

In the drive scenario 93c3 shown in FIG. 320(C), information for keeping the effect movable accessory 170 on standby for 5 seconds is stored corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter. Specifically, it is stipulated that a standby process of 5000 ms should be executed. Therefore, when this waiting process is executed, the effect movable accessory 170 waits at the same position for 5 seconds.

When the execution of the waiting process for 5000 ms is completed, 1 is added to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter, resulting in "2".

Information of "end (END)" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value "2" of the driving scenario counter of the driving scenario 93c3. By reading this "END" data, it is determined that all the operations defined in the driving scenario 93c3 have been completed.

In this way, the driving scenario 93c3 defines a standby action in which the effect movable accessory 170 waits for 5 seconds at the same position.

Next, after describing the problems in the conventional pachinko machine, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that executes a display effect on a liquid crystal display device and has various movable accessories that operate during the execution of the display effect in order to liven up the game effect. In recent years, the decoration of various movable accessories has been made gorgeous, and various actions have been performed by various movable accessories to diversify game effects and improve interest.

However, if the actions to be executed by the various movable accessories become more diverse, the driving programs for executing the various actions by the various movable accessories become enormous, and the capacity of the ROM increases. A problem arose.

Therefore, a driving scenario, which is a program that defines a series of actions of various movable accessories, is stored in the ROM, and when the series of actions is executed, the driving scenario is read from the ROM and stored in the RAM. A pachinko machine has been developed that causes various movable accessories to perform a series of actions based on a driving scenario stored in a RAM. According to a pachinko machine equipped with such a driving scenario, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is defined can be used (reused) in a plurality of effects, or the same driving scenario can be used a plurality of times during the execution of one effect. By adopting the configuration for repeated use, it is possible to reduce the number of programs to be stored in the ROM and reduce the capacity of the ROM used.

In addition, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is specified is read from the ROM, stored once in the RAM, and by executing the driving scenario stored in the RAM, the series of actions is executed by various movable accessories. By adopting a configuration in which a driving scenario once stored in a RAM is repeatedly executed to repeatedly execute a series of operations on various movable parts, various movable parts can be made to have a single single function as in the past. It is no longer necessary to execute a huge number of processes, such as reading a driving program defining a single operation from the ROM and storing it in the RAM each time an operation is to be executed. It has become possible to significantly reduce the number of readouts, reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine.

However, in the conventional driving scenario, when the driving scenario is once stored in the RAM and the control of various movable parts is started based on the driving scenario, all the series of actions specified in the driving scenario are executed. The control based on the driving scenario could not be terminated until the was completed. For this reason, conventional driving scenarios have been used for presentations on the premise that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. As such an effect, for example, there is a development effect that makes the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not normal reach will develop into super reach.

In the development effect, for example, during a predetermined period of time during which normal reach is being executed, various movable accessories are repeatedly executed in a series of actions (for example, moving up and down multiple times), and when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the series of actions is performed. When it is terminated and it develops into super reach, the various movable accessories are made to perform the action corresponding to the super reach, and on the other hand, when it does not develop into super reach, the action corresponding to the case where it does not develop into super reach is executed by various movable accessories. In this configuration, the driving scenario is set so that the series of actions will end when the predetermined period has elapsed, and the positions and states of various movable accessories at the time of the end are also set in advance. Therefore, after completing a series of actions, it is possible to smoothly execute the action corresponding to the super reach and the action corresponding to the case where the super reach does not develop.

In this way, there is no problem when the conventional driving scenario is used for a production that assumes that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. The following problem may occur when using for an effect (for example, a button effect) in which the timing of ending a series of actions is undefined.

For example, as a button effect in which the timing of ending a series of actions is uncertain, there is a button announcement effect in which the lottery result related to the change is announced at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed. In the button announcement effect, for example, a series of actions (for example, actions to move up and down multiple times) are repeatedly performed by various movable accessories while the pattern is changing, and during the execution of the series of actions, the button acceptance valid period is set. When the effect operation button is pressed during the button reception valid period, the series of operations is terminated at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed, and the lottery result related to the change is a big win. In this case, the various movable accessories are caused to perform an action corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (for example, an action of falling and rotating). Various movable accessories are made to perform the action (for example, the action of waiting on the spot).

However, when the conventional drive scenario is used for the above-described button notification effect, even if the effect operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, all the series of actions specified in the drive scenario are executed. Since the control based on the drive scenario cannot be terminated until it ends, there is a time lag from when the effect operation button is pressed until the series of actions is completed and the action corresponding to the lottery result is started. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable, and the exhilarating feeling of the button presentation may be spoiled.

Furthermore, when the performance operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, an image corresponding to the lottery result related to the change is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device without delay from the timing when the performance operation button is pressed. is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the image is output from the speaker without delay. Therefore, the time lag of the actions of various movable accessories becomes conspicuous, which may cause the player to feel even more uncomfortable and uncomfortable.

The configuration adopted by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to address the above problems will be specifically described below.

According to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a lottery process for performing an internal lottery when a game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the display unit executes the lottery process according to the lottery result of the internal lottery. A display control process for determining and executing one predetermined effect from among a plurality of effect display modes can be executed, and one of the movable accessories provided in the game area and operating during the display of the predetermined effect on the display unit. It is possible to execute a movement control process that determines and executes an operation pattern from among a plurality of patterns.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, a special figure lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 provided in the game area PA. A display control process capable of executing a lottery process, and determining and executing a display effect constituting an accessory interlocking effect to be executed by a pattern display device 41 from among a plurality of display effect patterns according to the lottery result of a special lottery. is executable. Then, one role product operation pattern of the movable role object 170 for presentation which is provided in the game area PA and operates during display of the display effect constituting the role interlocking effect on the pattern display device 41 is determined from a plurality of patterns. A movable control process to be executed can be executed.

Then, according to the present embodiment, based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the movable accessory is caused to perform a series of actions based on the setting information set corresponding to one action pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns. It is possible to have it done. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, once the setting information defining a series of actions is read from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the series of actions is executed. It is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as reading motion information corresponding to a single motion from a predetermined storage unit and storing it in an execution area each time an object is caused to perform a single motion. Therefore, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, one character action pattern determined from among a plurality of character action patterns is determined based on the establishment of conditions for starting a character-linked battle effect, which is a type of character-linked effect. Based on the drive scenario 93c1 set correspondingly, it is possible to cause the performance movable accessory 170 to perform a series of up-and-down movements. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the driving scenario 93c1 defining a series of vertical movement operations is once read from the sound and light side ROM 93 and stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d of the sound and light side RAM 94, which is an area for execution. Then, since the series of vertical movement motions is executed, the motion information corresponding to the single motion is read out from the predetermined storage unit every time the movable accessory for presentation 170 is made to perform the single motion. Since it is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as storing the data in the execution area, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory is driven between the most returned position during driving, which is the initial position during non-driving, and the maximum displacement position during driving, which is the most driven position in a series of operations. The series of actions are configured to perform a plurality of return actions that position the movable accessory at the most returned position during driving, and when the return actions are performed, the action end condition for the series of actions is Determine whether or not it is established, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is established, stop the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving and execute end processing to end the series of operations It is possible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions is performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Here, unlike the present embodiment, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the operation end condition for a series of operations is satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, the series of operations is forcibly executed. In the case of adopting the configuration to end, the movable accessory stops at a different position each time between the most return position during driving and the maximum displacement position during driving. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of actions is finished, the position of the movable accessory at the timing of starting the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of actions is completed, there may arise a problem that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the return motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition for the series of motions is satisfied, and if the motion end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is, the movable accessory located at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. As a result, at the end of a series of actions, the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the processing load of the game machine is reduced, and the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions. It is possible to quickly finish the series of actions at the earliest timing in a state where the movable accessory is moved, and after the series of actions is finished, the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. can be controlled.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the effect movable accessory 170 has an origin position, which is the initial position when not driven and the most returned position when driven, in a series of vertical movement operations, and the most driven position. A series of up-and-down movement operations are configured to perform a plurality of raising operations to position the production movable accessory 170 at the origin position. is executed, it is determined whether or not the up-down movement end condition of a series of up-down movement operations is satisfied. It is possible to execute end processing for stopping the performance movable accessory 170 and ending a series of vertical movement operations. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions can be performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Here, unlike the present embodiment, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the up-and-down movement end condition for the series of up-and-down movement motions is satisfied, and if it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied, the series In the case of adopting a configuration that forcibly terminates the vertical movement of (1), the movable accessory for presentation 170 stops at a different position each time between the origin position and the lowest point position. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of up-and-down movement motions are completed, the position of the movable accessory for presentation 170 at the start timing of the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of up-and-down movement motions are completed, there may arise a problem that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the rising motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the condition for terminating the vertical movement motion of the series of vertical motion motions is satisfied. When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory for presentation 170 located at the origin position is stopped to end the series of vertical movement operations. As a result, at the end of a series of vertical movement operations, the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. Therefore, after a series of up-and-down movement operations are finished, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the processing load of the game machine, the effect movable accessory 170 can be moved to the origin position without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions. , the series of vertical movement operations can be completed at the earliest timing, and the production movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position after the series of vertical movement operations is completed. It is possible to execute the following control on the premise that

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the period during which a series of operations is performed includes a short operation period and a long operation period longer than the short operation period. That is, there are cases where a series of operations ends with the length of the short operation period and cases where the series of operations ends with the length of the long operation period. , the effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of timings for ending a series of operations do not exist. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which multiple timings for terminating a series of actions are adopted, for example, if the timing for terminating a series of actions is fixed at the elapse of a predetermined period from the start of the series of actions, , it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the action end condition is satisfied during the execution of the series of actions, and the series of actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the setting information that defines the series of actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable accessory is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the The position of the movable accessory does not become unstable.

However, according to the present embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of actions, that is, the timings are indefinite. It is not effective to take measures such as adjusting the contents of the setting information that defines the series of operations in advance so that it exists at a predetermined position. Since it is indeterminate, the position of the movable accessory at the end of the series of actions is indeterminate, and it is assumed that the movable accessory is positioned at the return position during driving after the series of actions is completed. A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the return motion to position the movable accessory at the most returned position during driving is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition of the series of motions is satisfied, and the motion end condition is established, the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the period during which a series of vertical movement actions is executed becomes a short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. In some cases, the long operation period is longer than the short operation period. That is, a series of up-and-down motions ends with the length of the short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and ends with the length of the long action period when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. In other words, according to the present embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of vertical movement operations. The effect of this embodiment can be exhibited further. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which there are not multiple timings for ending the series of vertical movement operations, for example, the timing for ending the series of vertical movement operations is when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the series of vertical movement operations. When it is fixed, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the conditions for terminating the up-and-down movement are satisfied during execution of the series of up-and-down movement, and the series of up-and-down movement is performed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. should be terminated. Furthermore, if the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations is adjusted in advance so that the effect movable accessory 170 is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sequence of operations can be performed. The position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the up-and-down movement operation does not become undefined.

However, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of vertical movement motions, that is, the timings are indefinite. In some cases, it is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations so that the movable accessory for presentation 170 exists at a predetermined position. Since the timing to end the series of vertical movement motions is undefined, the position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the series of vertical movement motions becomes undefined. A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position.

Therefore, according to the embodiment, when the upward motion to position the effect movable accessory 170 at the origin position is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical motion end condition of the series of vertical motion motions is satisfied, When it is determined that the vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory 170 for presentation located at the origin position is stopped to end a series of vertical movement operations. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions is performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the period during which the movable accessory is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving includes a short control period and a long control period longer than the short control period. There are cases where a short control period is required until returns to the most return position during driving, and there are cases where a long control period longer than the short control period is required. According to this embodiment, even if a long control period longer than the short control period is required as the period during which the movable accessory is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving, the series of operations is always followed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time lag from the establishment of the operation end condition to the start of the next control.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the period during which the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to the lowest position side (the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position after leaving the origin position) A short control period that reciprocates between the origin position and the position A, and a long control period that is longer than the short control period and reciprocates between the origin position and the B position. , there are cases where a short control period is required until the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, and there are cases where a long control period longer than the short control period is required. According to the present embodiment, even if a long control period longer than the short control period is required as the period during which the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to the lowest position side, the series Since it is judged whether or not the vertical movement end condition of the vertical movement motion is established, the time lag from the establishment of the vertical movement end condition to the start of the next control can be shortened.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first control and the second control different from the first control can be executed as the control executed after the series of operations is completed, and the series of operations is completed. Regardless of whether the control to be executed later is the first control or the second control, it is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving. Further, in this embodiment, when the series of actions is completed due to the establishment of the action end condition, the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position at the time of completion of the series of actions. . Therefore, after completing a series of actions, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the next control such as the first control or the second control cannot be executed because the movable accessory is not positioned at the most return position during driving. becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, a series of dropping, expanding, rotating, shrinking, and rising actions are executed on the effect movable accessory 170 as control that is executed after a series of vertical movement actions are completed. and control to cause the movable accessory for presentation 170 to perform a standby action. In either case of the control for executing the enlargement/rotation/reduction/rise action and the control for executing the standby action of the movable accessory for presentation 170, the state where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position. is executed in In this embodiment, when the series of vertical movement motions is completed by satisfying the condition for completing the vertical movement motion, the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin point at the time when the series of vertical movement motions is completed. located in position. Therefore, after completing a series of vertical movement operations, the movable accessory for presentation 170 is not positioned at the origin position, and the movable accessory for presentation 170 is caused to execute a series of dropping, enlarging, rotating, shrinking, and rising operations. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the next control such as the control for causing the control or performance movable accessory 170 to perform the standby action cannot be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the condition for ending the action of a series of actions is satisfied can be changed based on the game operation of the player. By comparison, the effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the timing at which the action end condition of the series of actions is satisfied does not change, for example, the timing for ending the series of actions is fixed at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the series of actions. In this case, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the condition for ending the action is satisfied during execution of the series of actions, and the series of actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the setting information that defines the series of actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable accessory is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the The position of the movable accessory does not become unstable.

However, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the condition for ending the action of a series of actions is met can change based on the game operation of the player. It is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the contents of the setting information that defines the series of actions so that the movable accessory exists at a predetermined position, and furthermore, the action of the series of actions Since the timing at which the end condition is met can change based on the game operation of the player, the position of the movable accessory at the end of the series of actions becomes undefined, and after the series of actions is completed, the movable accessory cannot be fixed. is positioned at the most return position during driving, the next control cannot be executed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the return motion to position the movable accessory at the most returned position during driving is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition of the series of motions is satisfied, and the motion end condition is established, the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition for a series of up-and-down movement actions is met can change based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24. The effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited as compared with the configuration in which the timing of establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition of the up-and-down movement does not change. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition of the series of up-and-down movement operations is satisfied does not change, for example, the timing at which the series of up-and-down movement operations is terminated will be predetermined from the start of the series of up-and-down movement operations. If it is fixed at the time of elapse of the period, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the condition for ending the up-and-down movement motion is satisfied during execution of the series of up-and-down movement motions. What is necessary is just to complete|finish up-and-down movement operation|movement. Furthermore, if the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations is adjusted in advance so that the effect movable accessory 170 is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sequence of operations can be performed. The position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the up-and-down movement operation does not become undefined.

However, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition of the series of up-and-down movement actions is satisfied can be changed based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24. Measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the content of a driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations so that the performance movable accessory 170 is present at a predetermined position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the movement operation. Furthermore, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end conditions for the series of up-and-down movement actions are established can change based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24, so the end of the series of up-and-down movement actions. When the position of the movable accessory for presentation 170 becomes unstable, the following control is performed on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position after the series of vertical movement operations is completed. Problems such as not being able to execute may arise.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the upward motion to position the effect movable accessory 170 at the origin position is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical motion end condition of the series of vertical motion motions is satisfied. , when it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory 170 for presentation located at the origin position is stopped to end a series of up-and-down movement operations. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions is performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the control target to be executed after the series of actions is completed includes a control target different from the movable accessory, the movable accessory can be controlled after the series of actions is completed. It is possible to reduce the time lag between the control performed on the object and the control performed by the different controlled object.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 is a control target different from the effect movable accessory 170 as a control target to be executed after a series of up-and-down movement operations are completed. Since it is included, the control (a series of falling/enlarging/rotating/reducing/rising actions or standby actions) executed on the effect movable accessory 170 after completing the series of vertical movement actions and the pattern display device 41 It is possible to reduce the time lag with the executed control (control to display a character string such as "Victory!" or control to display a character string such as "Defeat...").

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the movable control process determines whether or not the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied when the control for driving the movable accessory toward the maximum displacement position during driving is executed. Since no determination is made, the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving can be executed at the fastest speed after the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied, while maintaining the advantage that It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. A specific description will be given below.

If a control is executed to drive the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position when driving, a configuration is adopted to determine whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied, and the movable accessory moves to the maximum displacement position when driving. Even if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied while driving, if the movable accessory is positioned on the maximum displacement position side during driving, it is determined that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. Since the premised next control cannot be executed, the start of the next control is waited until the movable accessory returns to the most return position during driving. Therefore, although there is no advantage of determining whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied when the control for driving the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position side is executed, the control becomes complicated, and the game machine becomes unusable. The processing load will increase. Also, hypothetically, the following control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving is executed by stopping the driving while the movable accessory is being driven to the maximum displacement position during driving. In this case, the action of the movable accessory becomes unnatural, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when control is executed to drive the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position during driving, it is not determined whether or not the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. Therefore, while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the next control assuming that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position when driving, it is possible to execute the control at the fastest speed after the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. It is possible to simplify and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid situations in which the movement of the movable accessory becomes unnatural and the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, when the control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition is satisfied. Since no determination is made, the next control on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position can be executed at the fastest speed after the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied. It is possible to simplify and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. A specific description will be given below.

If a control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest point side is executed, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition is satisfied, and the effect movable accessory 170 is Even if it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is established in the state of being driven to the lowest point position side, the movable role for presentation is not in the state where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned on the side of the lowest point position. Since the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the object 170 is positioned at the origin position, the start of the next control is waited until the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position. Therefore, even though there is no advantage in determining whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied when the control for driving the performance movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, the control becomes complicated. , the processing load of the gaming machine increases. Further, if the next control on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position is stopped while the movable accessory for presentation 170 is being driven to the lowest position side, the driving is stopped. If this is executed, the action of the effect movable accessory 170 may become unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, the vertical movement end condition of the series of vertical movement is satisfied. Since it is not determined whether or not there is, the advantage that the next control on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position can be executed at the fastest speed after the vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied is maintained. At the same time, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the movement of the effect movable accessory 170 becomes unnatural and the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the position where the movable accessory is returned to the non-driving initial position side in a series of actions is the same position as the non-driving initial position. , when returning to the non-driving initial position side, it returns to the non-driving initial position. Then, every time the movable accessory returns to the non-driving initial position in a series of actions, it is determined whether or not the action end condition of the series of actions is satisfied, and it is determined that the action end condition is satisfied. In this case, the movable accessory positioned at the non-driving initial position is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to unify the content of the next control to be executed after the end of the series of actions on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position during non-driving. . As a result, it is not necessary to prepare control based on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at a position other than the initial position when not driven as the contents of the next control, so that the control can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the position where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is returned to the origin position side, which is the non-driving initial position, in a series of vertical movement operations is the non-driving initial position. Since the position is the same as the origin position, the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position when returning to the origin position side in a series of vertical movement operations. Then, each time the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position in a series of vertical movement operations, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement operation end condition of the series of vertical movement operations is satisfied, and the vertical movement operation end condition is determined. is established, the performance movable accessory 170 positioned at the origin position is stopped, and the series of vertical movement operations is terminated. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the content of the next control to be executed after a series of vertical movement operations is completed is based on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position, which is the initial position when not driven. Content can be unified. As a result, it is no longer necessary to prepare control based on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at a position other than the original position, which is the initial position during non-driving, as the contents of the next control, thus simplifying the control. can be planned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the movable accessory includes a transparent or translucent member, the player can move the image displayed on the display unit located behind the movable accessory. It becomes possible to visually recognize through the role. Details of this effect will be described. The display unit can display the image corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by shortening the time lag between the image displayed on the display unit and the motion of the movable role, the image linked with the motion of the movable role can be played through the movable role. It is possible to realize an effective effect such as displaying an image to be viewed by a person on the display unit.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the effect movable accessory 170 is configured to include a transparent or translucent member, so the player can move the effect behind the effect movable accessory 170. An image displayed on the positioned pattern display device 41 can be viewed through the performance movable accessory 170 . Details of this effect will be described. The symbol display device 41 can display an image corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition without delay based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by shortening the time lag between the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the motion of the movable accessory for presentation 170, the image can be displayed in cooperation with the motion of the movable accessory for presentation 170. Thus, it is possible to realize an effective effect such as displaying on the pattern display device 41 an image that the player can visually recognize through the effect movable accessory 170 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target that is executed after the series of operations is completed includes the display section capable of displaying an image. The effect of this configuration will be described. The display unit can display the image corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the image displayed on the display section and the action of the movable accessory, so that the display section displays an image linked with the action of the movable accessory. It is possible to realize a realistic performance.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the control target to be executed after the series of vertical movement motions is completed includes the pattern display device 41 capable of displaying an image. The effect of this configuration will be described. The symbol display device 41 can display an image corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition without delay based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the time lag between the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the action of the movable accessory for effect 170 can be shortened, so that the image coordinated with the action of the movable accessory for effect 170 can be displayed. is displayed on the pattern display device 41, so that an effective effect can be realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target executed after the series of operations is completed includes the audio output unit capable of outputting sound. The effect of this configuration will be described. The sound output unit can output a sound corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the sound output by the audio output unit and the action of the movable role, so that the audio output unit is caused to output the sound in cooperation with the action of the movable role. It is possible to realize an effective performance such as

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the speaker 46 capable of outputting sound is included in the control targets that are executed after the series of vertical movement operations are completed. The effect of this configuration will be described. The speaker 46 can output without delay the sound corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the time lag between the sound output by the speaker 46 and the action of the movable accessory for presentation 170 can be shortened. It is possible to realize an effective effect such as outputting to 46.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target of the control executed after the series of operations is completed includes the light emitting unit capable of emitting light. The effect of this configuration will be described. The light emitting unit can emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the satisfaction of the operation termination condition without delay based on the satisfaction of the operation termination condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the light emission by the light emitting unit and the motion of the movable accessory. It is possible to realize performance.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, various lamps 47 that can emit light are included in the control targets that are executed after a series of vertical movement operations are completed. The effect of this configuration will be described. The various lamps 47 can emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fulfillment of the vertical movement operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the vertical movement operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the light emission of the various lamps 47 and the operation of the movable accessory for presentation 170, so that the various lamps can be illuminated in a light emission pattern that cooperates with the operation of the movable accessory for presentation 170. It is possible to realize an effective performance such as making the 47 emit light.

As described above, according to the game machine, it is possible to end the movable accessory by appropriate control while effectively utilizing the control program and the control data, and after the series of operations is completed, the movable accessory can be It becomes possible to execute the following control on the premise that a predetermined state is established.

<<7-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes normal processing and timer interrupt processing. In addition to normal processing and timer interrupt processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing will be explained. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sd0101, a startup initial setting process is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0102.

At step Sd<b>0102 , an activation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The activation command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0103.

At step Sd0103, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 2 ms in this embodiment).

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. In step Sd1101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0102.

In step Sd1102, various counter updating processes are executed. Specifically, special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1, special figure type determination counter Cs2, special figure reach determination counter Cs3, special figure fluctuation type counter Cs4, general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1, general figure type determination counter Cn2, random number initial value Each value of the counter Cini is incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2 and Cini are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1103.

In step Sd1103, ball entry processing for each ball entrance is executed. Details of ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described later. After executing step Sd1103, the process proceeds to step Sd1104.

In step Sd1104, special figure special electric control processing is executed. The special figure special electric control process executes the special figure lottery described above based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34, and the first special symbol display 37a, the second 2 This is the first control process for controlling the special symbol display 37b and the special electric accessory 57b. The details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sd1104, the process proceeds to step Sd1105.

In step Sd1105, a general map general electric control process is executed. The normal pattern normal electric control process executes the normal pattern lottery described above based on the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, and the second control process for controlling the normal symbol display 38a and the normal electric accessory 34b is. The details of the general map general electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Sd1105, the process proceeds to step Sd1106.

In step Sd1106, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above-described or later-described processing are transmitted to sub-side control devices such as the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, for example, when a prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to various effects are set, those commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Sd1107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for each entrance>
Next, ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described. The ball entry process for each ball entrance is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 323 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for each ball entrance. At step Sd1201, ball entry processing for a general winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the general winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is detected, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls, which is the setting information set in the general winning opening 32, is issued. Set as a command to be sent. After executing step Sd1201, the process proceeds to step Sd1202.

In step Sd1202, ball entry processing for the big winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the big winning hole, when the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 57a is detected, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls, which is the setting information set for the big winning hole 57a, is issued. Set as a command to be sent. After executing step Sd1202, the process proceeds to step Sd1203.

In step Sd1203, a ball entry process for the first special figure start opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening 33 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sd1203, the process proceeds to step Sd1204.

In step Sd1204, a ball entry process for the second special figure starting port is executed. In the ball entry process for the second special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 34 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the second special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sd1204, the process proceeds to step Sd1205.

In step Sd1205, the entry process for the normal figure starting gate is executed. In the entry process for the normal pattern starting gate, when the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 35 is detected, various processes are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the normal figure start gate will be described later. After step Sd1205 is executed, this ball entry processing for each ball entrance ends.

<Entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the first special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port. In step Sd1301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 33. In step Sd1301, if it is determined that the game ball entered the first special figure start port 33 (step Sd1301: YES), proceed to step Sd1302, the setting information set in the first special figure start port 33 A prize ball command corresponding to a certain number of prize balls is set as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1303. On the other hand, in step Sd1301, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first special figure starting port 33 (step Sd1301: NO), the entering process for the first special figure starting port ends.

In step Sd1303, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit. In addition, the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is a value indicating the number of the first special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is four.

In step Sd1303, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit (step Sd1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1304, and 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1305.

In step Sd1305, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number Ns1 to which 1 is added in step Sd1303. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1306.

In step Sd1306, a first special figure destination determination process is executed. In the first special figure destination determination process, each value (the first special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the first special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the first special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. After executing step Sd1306, the process proceeds to step Sd1307.

In step Sd1307, the first special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the first special figure destination determination process described above is set as the first special figure reservation command. The first special figure reservation command is for the sub-side control device, the first special figure destination determination for the first special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start port 33 It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the first special figure reservation information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. When the first special figure reservation command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 according to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After executing step Sd1307, the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd1303, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sd1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is the upper limit , without storing the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this first special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Entering ball processing for the second special figure start port>
Next, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the second special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port. In step Sd1401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 34. In step Sd1401, if it is determined that the game ball entered the second special figure start port 34 (step Sd1401: YES), proceed to step Sd1402, with the setting information set in the second special figure start port 34 A prize ball command corresponding to a certain number of prize balls is set as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1403. On the other hand, in step Sd1401, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the second special figure start opening 34 (step Sd1401: NO), the second special figure start opening processing ends.

In step Sd1403, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is a value indicating the number of second special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of game balls into the second special figure starting port 34 . In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is four.

In step Sd1403, when it determines with 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 being less than an upper limit (step Sd1403: YES), it progresses to step Sd1404 and adds 1 to 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1405.

In step Sd1405, the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 are stored in the second special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. Store in the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending number Ns2 to which 1 is added in step Sd1403. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1406.

In step Sd1406, a second special figure destination determination process is executed. In the second special figure destination determination process, each value (the second special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the second special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the second special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the second special lottery with the variation of the second special symbol. After executing step Sd1406, the process proceeds to step Sd1407.

In step Sd1407, the second special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the second special figure destination determination process described above is set as the second special figure reservation command. The second special figure reservation command is a second special figure destination determination for the second special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start port 34 for the control device on the sub side It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the second special figure reservation information becomes the target of the second special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the second special symbol. When the second special figure pending command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the second special figure pending number Ns2. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 of the design display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After executing step Sd1407, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port 34 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sd1403, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not less than the upper limit (step Sd1403: NO), that is, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is the upper limit , without storing each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this second special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Pitch ball processing for normal map starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The ball entry process for the normal map start gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball entrance described above.

FIG. 326 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a normal pattern start gate. In step Sd1501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal figure starting gate 35. In step Sd1501, when it is determined that the game ball entered the normal figure start gate 35 (step Sd1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1502. On the other hand, in step Sd1501, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern start gate 35 (step Sd1501: NO), this normal pattern start gate entry process is terminated.

In step Sd1502, it is determined whether or not the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the number Nn1 of normal pattern reservation is a value indicating the number of normal pattern lottery (waiting for execution) that is reserved based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35. In this embodiment, the upper limit (maximum value) of the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is four.

In step Sd1502, when it is determined that the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation is less than the upper limit (step Sd1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1503, and 1 is added to the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1504.

In step Sd1504, each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the general pattern reservation area 64d of the RAM64, that is, the general pattern in which 1 is added in step Sd1503 Store in a storage area corresponding to the number Nn1 of reservations. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1505.

In step Sd1505, the normal figure pending command is set. The general pattern reservation command is a command for recognizing that the general pattern lottery has been reserved based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35 for the control device on the sub side. After executing step Sd1505, the entry process for the normal pattern start gate 35 ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd1502, when it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is not less than the upper limit (step Sd1502: NO), that is, when it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is the upper limit, Without storing the respective values of the determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 in the normal pattern reservation area 64d, the entry process for the main normal pattern start gate is ended.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing will be described. The special figure special electric control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing the special figure special train control process. In step Sd2101, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sd2101, the process proceeds to step Sd2102.

In step Sd2102, a special symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sd2102, the process proceeds to step Sd2103.

In step Sd2103, special symbol fluctuation post-stop processing, which is processing after stopping the special symbol fluctuation, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sd2103, the process proceeds to step Sd2104.

In step Sd2104, special electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start process is a process for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode when the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied. The details of the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sd2104, the process proceeds to step Sd2105.

In step Sd2105, processing during the special electric opening period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening period is processing executed during the special electric opening period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening period will be described later. After executing step Sd2105, the process proceeds to step Sd2106.

In step Sd2106, processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is processing executed during the special electric opening/closing period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described later. After executing step Sd2106, the process proceeds to step Sd2107.

In step Sd2107, processing during the special electric ending period is executed. The processing during the special electric ending period is processing executed during the special electric ending period. The details of the processing during the special electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sd2107, this special figure special electric control process is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process described above.

FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Sd2201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value stored in the main RAM 64 is "01". The special figure special electric control value is a value indicating what stage the progress status of the control of the special symbol and the special electric accessory is, and in this embodiment, the special figure special electric control value being "01" means that It shows that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, when the special figure special electric control value is "01", the first special symbol or the second special figure when the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more This indicates that it is possible to start changing the symbol. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sd2201, when it is determined that the special symbol electric train control value is not "01" (step Sd2201: NO), this special symbol variation start process is executed without executing any of the processes after step Sd2202 described later. finish. That is, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the special symbol does not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sd2201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "01" (step Sd2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2202.

In step Sd2202, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more. In step Sd2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more (step Sd2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2203, and 1 is subtracted from the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd2204.

In step Sd2204, a second special figure reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the second special figure reservation information stored in each area of the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b, is executed. Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the second special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb to the special figure determination area 64c, The 2nd special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sd2204, the process proceeds to step Sd2208, which will be described later.

In step Sd2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not "1" or more (step Sd2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2205, and the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more Determine whether or not In step Sd2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not "1" or more (step Sd2205: NO), this special symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd2205, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more (step Sd2205: YES), proceed to step Sd2206 and subtract 1 from the first special figure reservation number Ns1 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sd2207.

In step Sd2207, a first special figure reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the first special figure reservation information stored in each area of the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, is executed. Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the first special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra to the special figure determination area 64c, The 1st special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing step Sd2207, the process proceeds to step Sd2208.

In step Sd2208, a special figure success/failure determination process, which is a process for determining whether or not to win a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure validity determination process, the above-described special figure validity determination table is selected based on the type of lottery mode and reservation, and the selected special figure validity determination table and the special figure determination area 64c are stored. Based on the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1, it is determined whether or not to win the special figure. After executing step Sd2208, the process proceeds to step Sd2209.

In step Sd2209, a special symbol type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, based on the special figure type determination result, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure type determination table, Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sd2209, the process proceeds to step Sd2210.

In step Sd2210, the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure type determined in the special figure type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a special symbol B, A special symbol B flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag. After executing step Sd2210, the process proceeds to step Sd2211.

In step Sd2211, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is the variation time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a (first special symbol variation time) or the variation time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b (second Toku-zu fluctuation time) is a process to determine. Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the lottery mode, the type of suspension, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure The special figure fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the figure fluctuation type counter Cs4 and the special figure fluctuation time table.

In step Sd2212, the value corresponding to the special figure variation time determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process is set to the special figure variation time timer counter. After executing step Sd2212, the process proceeds to step Sd2213.

In step Sd2213, a special figure variation pattern command is set. In the special figure variation pattern command, the variation of the special symbol this time is based on the entrance of the game ball to which special figure start opening, the first special figure start opening 33 or the second special figure start opening 34 In addition to containing information indicating the presence or absence of reach, information on the set special figure fluctuation time is included. After executing step Sd2213, the process proceeds to step Sd2214.

In step Sd2214, a special figure type command is set. The special figure type command includes the information of the result of the special figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a special figure jackpot) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command, which are the setting information set in steps Sd2213 and Sd2214, are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the production (production pattern) based on the received special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. . After executing step Sd2214, the process proceeds to step Sd2215.

In step Sd2215, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b is started. Then, it progresses to step Sd2216 and sets "02" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state of being changed. After that, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol variation stop processing will be described. The special symbol variation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control processing.

FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop processing. In step Sd2301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a fluctuating state. In step Sd2301, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "02" (step Sd2301: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd2301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "02" (step Sd2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2302.

In step Sd2302, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed do. In step Sd2302, when it is determined that the special figure variation time has not passed (step Sd2302: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sd2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2303.

In step Sd2303, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is fluctuating on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b is stopped in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. display. As a result, the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Stop is displayed. After executing step Sd2303, the process proceeds to step Sd2304.

In step Sd2304, a special figure stop display time setting process is executed. The special figure stop display time setting process includes the stop display time (first special figure stop display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 37a and the second special symbol stop display in the second special symbol display device 37b. It is a process of setting the time (second special figure stop display time). Specifically, in the special figure stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (1.0 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the special figure stop display time timer counter. After executing step Sd2304, it proceeds to step Sd2305 and sets "03" to the special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after stopping special symbol fluctuation>
Next, the processing after the special symbol fluctuation stop will be described. The special symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process.

FIG. 330 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Sd2401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol special electric control value of "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In step Sd2401, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "03" (step Sd2401: NO), this special symbol fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd2401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "03" (step Sd2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2402.

In step Sd2402, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop display time set in the special figure stop display time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the special figure stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sd2402, if it is determined that the special figure stop display time has not passed (step Sd2402: NO), this special symbol variation stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has elapsed (step Sd2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2403.

In step Sd2403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit (special figure jackpot). In step Sd2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Sd2403: NO), that is, the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special figure of this time is the special figure out. If there is, proceed to step Sd2404, turn off the special symbol type flag (in this case special symbol Z flag) that is ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd2405.

The processing from step Sd2405 to step Sd2410 described next determines whether or not the specified number of special figure fluctuations are executed in the low probability high support state (so-called time saving state), and the specified number of special figure fluctuations are executed. This is a process for turning off the high-frequency support mode flag and shifting to a low-probability low-support state (so-called normal state). The processing of each step will be specifically described below.

In step Sd2405, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sd2405 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step Sd2411, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2405 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (step Sd2405: YES), the process advances to step Sd2406 to determine whether or not the high-probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sd2406 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (step Sd2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2411, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2406 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (step Sd2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2407. That is, when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON and the high-probability mode flag is OFF (when the game state is a low probability high support state, a so-called time saving state), the process proceeds to step Sd2407.

In step Sd2407, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd2408 to determine whether or not the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not special figure variation of the specified number of times in the high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sd2408 that the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp is not 0 (step Sd2408: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2411, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2408 that the value of the high-support remaining number counter Nsp is 0 (step Sd2408: YES), the process advances to step Sd2409 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After that, the process advances to step Sd2410 to set a game state command indicating that the game state has become a low probability low support state (normal state) in which the high probability mode flag is OFF and the high frequency support mode flag is also OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd2411.

In step Sd2411, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is "01" is the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more. It shows a state in which it is possible to start the variation of the special symbol or the second special symbol. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sd2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Sd2403: YES), i. If it is a hit, proceed to step Sd2412 and set "04" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode are met. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated. Thereby, when the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric opening and closing execution mode start processing>
Next, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode start process. In step Sd3101, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special special electric control value of "04" indicates that the condition for starting the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a predetermined start condition, is satisfied. In step Sd3101, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "04" (step Sd3101: NO), this special electric power opening/closing execution mode start processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sd3101, when it is determined that the special special electric control value is "04" (step Sd3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3102.

In step Sd3102, special electric switching pattern determination processing is executed. In the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process, based on the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table and the special electric opening/closing pattern flag, one special electric opening/closing pattern in the special electric opening/closing execution mode is determined from among a plurality of patterns, and the special electric opening/closing pattern is referred to in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. This is processing for determining the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario. Then, a movable control process for controlling the special electric accessory 57b is executed based on the determined special electric opening/closing pattern (special electric opening/closing scenario). As will be described later, during execution of a series of opening/closing operations of the special electric accessory 57b based on the determined special electric opening/closing pattern, a display effect, which is a predetermined effect constituting the special electric opening/closing period effect, is displayed on the pattern display device 41. executed. After executing step Sd3102, the process proceeds to step Sd3103.

In step Sd3103, the special electric switching scenario corresponding to the determined special electric switching pattern is read from the main ROM 63 and stored in the main RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3104.

In step Sd3104, round number information is acquired from the special electric switching scenario corresponding to the determined special electric switching pattern, and the acquired round number information is set in the remaining round number counter RC provided in the main side RAM64. The value of the remaining round number counter RC is decremented by 1 each time a round game is completed. That is, based on the value set in the remaining round number counter RC, which is the setting information set corresponding to one special electric opening/closing pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns, the special electric accessory 57b performs a series of opening/closing operations. It is possible to make it work. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3105.

In step Sd3105, special electric opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric opening time), which is the period before starting the driving of the special electric accessory 57b. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric opening time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process described above, and the obtained special electric opening time information is stored in the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sd3105, the process proceeds to step Sd3106.

In step Sd3106, a special electric opening command including information capable of specifying the type of special electric opening/closing pattern is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices (various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41) so as to execute the special electric opening production and the right-handed information production. After executing step Sd3106, proceed to step Sd3107 and set the special figure special electric control value to "05". In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. After that, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated.

<Processing during the special electric opening period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric opening period. In step Sd3201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Sd3201, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "05" (step Sd3201: NO), the special electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sd3201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "05" (step Sd3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3202.

In step Sd3202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sd3202 that it is not the time to end the special electric opening period (step Sd3202: NO), this special electric opening period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3202 that it is time to end the special electric opening period (step Sd3202: YES), the process advances to step Sd3203 to set a special electric open/close period command. The set special electric opening/closing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. This special electric opening/closing period command includes information on the number of times the special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing period. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing period command, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect corresponding to the number of times the special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened based on the received special electric opening/closing period command. to control various performance devices. After executing step Sd3203, proceed to step Sd3204 and set "06" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric opening period has ended and the special electric open/close period has started. After that, the processing during the opening period of this special electric transmission ends.

<Processing during special electric opening/closing period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric opening/closing period. In step Sd3301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric open/close period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Sd3301, when it is determined that the special electric charge control value is not "06" (step Sd3301: NO), this special electric open/close period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sd3301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "06" (step Sd3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3302.

In step Sd3302, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Sd3302, when it is determined that the special electric accessory 57b is not open (step Sd3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd3303.

In step Sd3303, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process is established. In step Sd3303, when it is determined that the condition for opening the special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (step Sd3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3304.

In step Sd3304, the special electric accessory 57b is caused to perform the opening operation. In this embodiment, when the control to drive the special electric accessory 57b to the open state side is executed, whether or not the opening/closing operation end condition, which is the operation end condition for ending a series of opening/closing operations, is established. do not judge After executing step Sd3304, the process proceeds to step Sd3305.

In step Sd3305, a special electric release command is set. The special electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sd3305, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Sd3303, when it is determined that the opening condition of the special electric accessory 57b is not established (step Sd3303: NO), the processing during this special electric open/close period ends.

In step Sd3302, when it is determined that the special electric accessory 57b is open (step Sd3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3306.

In step Sd3306, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process is established. More specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one closing condition of the elapse of the maximum opening time or the maximum number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a is established. In step Sd3306, if it is determined that the closing condition of the special electric accessory 57b is satisfied, that is, if it is determined that at least one of the closing conditions described above is satisfied (step Sd3306: YES), to step Sd3307 It advances and causes the special electric accessory 57b to perform the closing action, which is the return action. Therefore, during the period in which the special electric accessory 57b is controlled to the open state side, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaches the maximum number of entering balls before the maximum opening time elapses, and the special electric accessory 57b reaches the maximum number of entering balls. When the accessory 57b is closed early, the opening period is shorter than the maximum opening time, and on the other hand, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaches the maximum number of entering balls before the maximum opening time elapses. If not, the special electric accessory 57b does not close until the maximum opening time elapses, and the maximum opening period is reached. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3308.

In step Sd3308, a special electric closing command is set. The special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the special electric accessory 57b has closed. The special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sd3308, the process proceeds to step Sd3309.

At step Sd3309, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining round number counter RC. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd3310 to determine whether or not the value of the remaining round number counter RC is zero. That is, when the closing operation is executed, a determination process is executed to determine whether or not the opening/closing operation end condition for ending the series of opening/closing operations is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sd3310 that the value of the remaining round number counter RC is not 0 (step Sd3310: NO), this special electric open/close period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3310 that the value of the remaining round number counter RC is 0 (step Sd3310: NO), the special electric opening/closing period ends and the special electric ending period begins. The process advances to a certain step Sd3311. That is, when it is determined that the opening/closing operation end condition that the value of the remaining round number counter RC is 0 is established, the special electric accessory 57b in the closed state is stopped to end a series of opening/closing operations. Execute the process. As a result, the special electric accessory 57b is closed at the end of a series of opening and closing operations. Therefore, after a series of opening and closing operations are finished, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the special electric accessory 57b is in the closed state. As described above, during the opening of the special electric accessory 57b, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaches the maximum number of entering balls before the maximum opening time elapses, and the special electric accessory 57b is closed early, and the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 57b elapses without the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaching the maximum number of entering balls before the maximum opening time elapses. It may not be closed until As a result, the timing at which the opening/closing operation end condition for ending a series of opening/closing operations can be changed based on the game ball shooting operation of the player.

Note that in this embodiment, when the value of the remaining round number counter RC set corresponding to one special electric opening/closing pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns becomes 0, the opening/closing operation ends the series of opening/closing operations. Although the configuration for determining that the end condition is satisfied is adopted, as a modification, the maximum number of rounds is set as setting information corresponding to one special electric switching pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns, and the executed rounds An executed round number counter indicating the number of games is prepared, the executed round number counter is incremented by 1 each time a round game is completed, and the value of the executed round number counter reaches the set maximum number of rounds. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an opening/closing operation end condition for terminating a series of opening/closing operations is established when the time has been reached.

In this embodiment, a configuration including one special electric accessory is adopted, but as a modified example, a configuration including two or more special electric accessories may be used. When this configuration is adopted, a series of opening and closing operations are performed on a plurality of special electric accessories based on the value set in one remaining round counter set based on the special electric opening and closing pattern (special electric opening and closing scenario). It may be configured to allow In the case of adopting a configuration including two or more special electric accessories, whether or not the opening/closing operation end condition is satisfied when the closing operation is executed for each of the plurality of special electric accessories. may be determined, and when the opening operation is executed for each of the plurality of special electric accessories, it may be configured not to determine whether the opening/closing operation end condition is satisfied. In addition, during a period in which one special electric accessory out of a plurality of special electric accessories is controlled to be in an open state, another special electric accessory out of a plurality of special electric accessories is controlled to be in a closed state. may be Also, after one special electric accessory out of the plurality of special electric accessories returns from the open state to the closed state, the other special electric accessory out of the plurality of special electric accessories is immediately released from the closed state. Instead of controlling it to the open state, it may be configured to control other special electric accessories from the closed state to the open state after the special electric interval period has elapsed.

In step Sd3311, a special electric ending time setting process is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric ending time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process described above, and the obtained special electric ending time information is stored in the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sd3311, the process proceeds to step Sd3312.

In step Sd3312, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric ending command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the special electric ending production, and controls various production devices so as to execute the decided special electric ending production. In the present embodiment, control targets different from the special electric accessory 57b are the control targets to be executed after the series of opening and closing operations are completed. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 capable of emitting light are included. After performing step Sd3312, it progresses to step Sd3313 and sets "07" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. After that, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

<Processing during special electric ending period>
Next, processing during the special electric ending period will be described. The processing during the special electric ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric ending period. In step Sd3401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Sd3401, if it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "07" (step Sd3401: NO), this special power ending period processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sd3401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "07" (step Sd3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3402.

In step Sd3402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sd3402 that it is not the time to end the special electric ending period (step Sd3402: NO), this process during the special electric ending period ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3402 that it is time to end the special electric ending period (step Sd3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3403.

In step Sd3403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step Sd3403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (step Sd3403: YES), proceed to step Sd3404 and turn on the high probability mode flag. After that, the process advances to step Sd3405 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. That is, when the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variable jackpot, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are turned ON, and the game state continues until the next jackpot is won. It will shift to the high-precision high support state that can be obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3408, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Sd3403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag that is ON does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot (step Sd3403: NO), proceed to step Sd3406 and turn on the high frequency support mode flag . Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd3407 to set 100 as a specified number in the high support remaining number counter Nsp. As described above, this high support remaining number counter Nsp is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation ends, and when the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp becomes 0, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, when the special figure type flag that is ON does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot, only the high frequency support mode flag is turned on, and the game state can continue until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times. It will shift to a low definite height support state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3408.

At step Sd3408, a game state command including information on the current game state is set. The set game state command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the game state command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various devices for effects based on the information indicating the game state included in the command so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the game state can be executed. After performing step Sd3408, it progresses to step Sd3409 and turns off a special figure classification flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3410.

In step Sd3410, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute an effect corresponding to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd3411.

In step Sd3411, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special figure reserved number Ns1 or the second special figure reserved number Ns2 is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Indicates a possible state. After that, the processing during the special electric ending period ends.

<Public power control processing>
Next, the general map general electric control processing will be described. The normal/universal electric power control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing normal map normal power control processing. In step Sd4101, a normal design fluctuation start process, which is a process for starting the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing step Sd4101, the process proceeds to step Sd4102.

In step Sd4102, a normal design fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sd4102, the process proceeds to step Sd4103.

In step Sd4103, a process after normal design fluctuation stop, which is a process after stopping the fluctuation of the normal design, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing step Sd4103, the process proceeds to step Sd4104.

In step Sd4104, normal electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The normal switching execution mode start process is a process for starting the normal switching execution mode when the conditions for starting the normal switching execution mode are satisfied. The details of the normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing step Sd4104, the process proceeds to step Sd4105.

In step Sd4105, processing is executed during the general electricity opening period. The normal/universal power opening period process is a process executed during the normal/universal power opening period. The details of the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described later. After executing step Sd4105, the process proceeds to step Sd4106.

In step Sd4106, processing during normal electric switching period is executed. The normal power switching period process is a process executed during the normal power switching period. The details of the processing during the normal power switching period will be described later. After executing step Sd4106, the process proceeds to step Sd4107.

In step Sd4107, processing during the normal electric ending period is executed. The general electric ending period process is a process executed during the general electric ending period. The details of the processing during the general electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Sd4107, this normal map normal electric control process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, normal design variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process described above.

FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Sd4201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value stored in the main side RAM64 is "01". Normal figure normal electric control value is a value indicating which stage the progress status of control of normal symbols and normal electric accessories is, and in this embodiment, normal figure normal electric control value is "01" indicates that the normal symbol is not changed and the normal open/close execution mode is not executed. In other words, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "01" indicates that it is possible to start the normal pattern fluctuation when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more. ing. In the present embodiment, the normal map normal power control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Sd4201, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "01" (step Sd4201: NO), without executing any of the processes after step Sd4202 described later, this normal pattern fluctuation start process exit. That is, when the normal symbols are fluctuating or during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal symbols do not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Sd4201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "01" (step Sd4201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd4202.

In step Sd4202, it is determined whether or not the number Nn of normal figure reservation is "1" or more. In step Sd4202, when it is determined that the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation is "1" or more (step Sd4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd4203, and 1 is subtracted from the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd4204.

In step Sd4204, the general pattern reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the general pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, after moving the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d to the general pattern determination area 64e, the second area → the first area , 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sd4204, the process proceeds to step Sd4205.

In step Sd4205, the normal pattern right or wrong determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not to be elected per normal pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern correctness determination process, based on the general pattern correctness determination table selected based on the game state and the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, the general pattern It is determined whether or not to win a prize. After executing step Sd4205, the process proceeds to step Sd4206.

In step Sd4206, normal pattern type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of normal symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern type determination process, based on the result of the general pattern type determination, the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, and the general pattern type determination table, normal Determine the type of pattern. After executing step Sd4206, the process proceeds to step Sd4207.

In step Sd4207, the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern type determined in the normal pattern type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is the normal symbol A in the normal pattern type determination process, the normal pattern A flag is turned ON as the normal pattern type flag. After executing step Sd4207, the process proceeds to step Sd4208.

In step Sd4208, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display 38a. Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the general pattern fluctuation time is determined based on the game state, the result of the general pattern suitability determination, and the general pattern fluctuation time table, and corresponds to the determined general pattern fluctuation time The value obtained is set in the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter. After executing step Sd4208, the process proceeds to step Sd4209.

In step Sd4209, the normal figure fluctuation command is set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation time that has been set. After executing step Sd4209, the process proceeds to step Sd4210.

In step Sd4210, the normal figure classification command is set. The general figure type command includes the information of the result of the general figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a general figure hit) and the result of the general figure type determination (normally the type of pattern).

Normal figure fluctuation commands and normal figure type commands set in steps Sd4209 and Sd4210 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received normal map variation command and the received normal map type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step Sd4210, the process proceeds to step Sd4211.

In step Sd4211, the normal pattern display device 38a starts to change the normal pattern. Then, it progresses to step Sd4212 and sets "02" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electric control value is "02" indicates that the general pattern is in a state of fluctuation due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. After that, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, normal design variation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control processing.

FIG. 337 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. In step Sd4301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value is "02" indicates that the normal symbol is in a state of fluctuation. In step Sd4301, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "02" (step Sd4301: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd4301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "02" (step Sd4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd4302.

In step Sd4302, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Sd4302, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not passed (step Sd4302: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd4302, when it determines with normal figure fluctuation time having passed (step Sd4302: YES), it progresses to step Sd4303.

In step Sd4303, the normal symbols that are fluctuating on the normal symbol display 38a are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol classification flag that is ON. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 38a. After executing step Sd4303, the process proceeds to step Sd4304.

In step Sd4304, normal figure stop display time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern stop display time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern stop display time (normal pattern stop display time) in the normal pattern display 38a. Specifically, in the normal map stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment) is set in the normal map stop display time timer counter. After performing step Sd4304, it progresses to step Sd4305 and sets "03" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "03" indicates that the normal pattern is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after normal pattern fluctuation stop>
Next, the processing after normal design fluctuation stop will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process.

FIG. 338 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Sd4401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value of "03" indicates that the normal symbol is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. In step Sd4401, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "03" (step Sd4401: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd4401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "03" (step Sd4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd4402.

In step Sd4402, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern stop display time set in the normal pattern stop display time setting process described above has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal map stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the normal map stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Sd4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has not passed (step Sd4402: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has elapsed (step Sd4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd4403.

In step Sd4403, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern. In step Sd4403, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is not ON (step Sd4403: NO), that is, the result of the normal pattern propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out of the general pattern. If there is, proceed to step Sd4404, the normal pattern type flag that is ON (normal pattern Z flag in this case) is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sd4405 and sets "01" to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electric control value is "01", when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol state. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sd4403, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON (step Sd4403: YES), that is, the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the normal pattern fluctuation If it is a hit, it proceeds to step Sd4406, and sets "04" to the normal/universal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal/universal electric power control value is “04” indicates that the conditions for starting the normal/universal electric switching execution mode are met. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

<Common electric switching execution mode start processing>
Next, normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described. The normal electric switching execution mode start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing normal electric switching execution mode start processing. In step Sd5101, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal power supply control value being “04” indicates that the condition for starting the normal/universal power switching execution mode has been established. In step Sd5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "04" (step Sd5101: NO), this normal/universal electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "04" (step Sd5101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5102.

In step Sd5102, a general electric switching scenario selection process is executed. The normal switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal switching scenario to be referenced in the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario selection table and the normal switching scenario selection table. After executing step Sd5102, the process proceeds to step Sd5103.

In step Sd5103, general electric opening time setting processing is executed. The general electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical opening time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical opening time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of this general electrical opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sd5103, the process proceeds to step Sd5104.

In step Sd5104, a general electric opening command is set. The set general electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After performing step Sd5104, it progresses to step Sd5105 and sets "05" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of "05" indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has started. After that, the normal electric switching execution mode start processing is terminated.

<Processing during the opening period of the public electricity>
Next, the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described. The normal/universal electric opening period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal/universal electric power control process.

FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing processing during the general electric opening period. In step Sd5201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value is "05" indicates that the electric power opening period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In step Sd5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "05" (step Sd5201: NO), this normal/universal electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sd5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "05" (step Sd5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5202.

In step Sd5202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical opening time timer counter set as the general electrical opening time in the general electrical opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sd5202 that it is not the time to end the general electric opening period (step Sd5202: NO), this general electric opening period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd5202 that it is time for the general electric opening period to end (step Sd5202: YES), the process advances to step Sd5203 to set the general electric opening/closing period command. The set electric open/close period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. This general electric switching period command includes information on the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric switching period. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the general electric opening/closing period command, based on the received general electric opening/closing period command, various production devices so as to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened. to control. After performing step Sd5203, it progresses to step Sd5204 and sets "06" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of “06” indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has ended and the general/universal electric opening/closing period has started. After that, the processing during the main electric power opening period ends.

<Processing during normal power switching period>
Next, the processing during the normal electric switching period will be described. The general electric switching period processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control processing.

FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the process during normal electric switching period. In step Sd5301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value is "06" indicates that the general electric opening and closing period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In step Sd5301, if it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "06" (step Sd5301: NO), this normal/universal electric open/close period processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "06" (step Sd5301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5302.

In step Sd5302, it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the normal switching period are met. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the normal switching period set in the normal switching scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sd5302 that the conditions for ending the normal switching period are not satisfied (step Sd5302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd5303.

In step Sd5303, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34b is open. In step Sd5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (step Sd5303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd5304.

In step Sd5304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sd5304, when it is determined that the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sd5304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5305.

In step Sd5305, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd5306.

In step Sd5306, a utility power disconnection command is set. The common electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the common electric accessory 34b has been opened. The general electric disconnection command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After step Sd5306 is executed, this processing during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sd5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (step Sd5304: NO), the process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

In step Sd5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened (step Sd5303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5307.

In step Sd5307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Sd5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Sd5307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5308.

In step Sd5308, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd5309.

In step Sd5309, a general electricity closing command is set. The general electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the general electric accessory 34b is closed. The general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After step Sd5309 is executed, this processing during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Sd5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (step Sd5307: NO), this process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

If it is determined in step Sd5302 that the conditions for ending the normal switching period are satisfied (step Sd5302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5310.

In step Sd5310, a normal electric ending time setting process is executed. The general electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical switching ending time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical ending time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. set to the end time timer counter. The value of this electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sd5310, the process proceeds to step Sd5311.

In step Sd5311, a general electric ending command is set. The set general electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After performing step Sd5318, it progresses to step Sd5319 and sets "07" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. After that, the process during the normal electric switching period ends.

<Processing during the normal ending period>
Next, the processing during the general electric ending period will be described. The normal electric ending period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing processing during the normal electric ending period. In step Sd5401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the electric power ending period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In step Sd5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "07" (step Sd5401: NO), this normal/universal electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Sd5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "07" (step Sd5401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5402.

In step Sd5402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical ending time timer counter set as the general electrical ending time in the general electrical ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in step Sd5402 that it is not the time to end the general electrical ending period (step Sd5402: NO), this general electrical ending period process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd5402 that it is time to end the general electric ending period (step Sd5402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd5403.

In step Sd5403, the normal figure classification flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd5404.

In step Sd5404, a general electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set general electric switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd5405.

In step Sd5405, "01" is set to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number Nn of reserved normal patterns is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of normal patterns. After that, the normal electric ending period process ends.

<<7-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (1 msec in this embodiment). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step Sd6101, the process proceeds to step Sd6102.

In step Sd6102, a special figure variation effect setting process is executed. The special figure variation effect setting process is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command and a special figure type command are received from the main MPU 62, and when the special figure game round is started, the special figure game round It is a process of setting the production pattern of the special figure fluctuation production to be executed in. The details of the special figure fluctuation effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd6102, the process proceeds to step Sd6103.

At step Sd6103, special electric opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. The effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is a process of determining the contents of various effects to be executed during the special electric opening/closing execution mode and setting the determined effects to be executed. The details of the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be described later. After executing step Sd6103, the process proceeds to step Sd6104.

At step Sd6104, a process for effect operation buttons is executed. The effect operation button processing is a process for determining whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed during the button acceptance valid period, and whether or not the button acceptance valid period has passed without pressing the effect operation button 24. . Details of the effect operation button processing will be described later. After executing step Sd6104, the process proceeds to step Sd6105.

In step Sd6105, a movable accessory driving process for presentation is executed. The effect movable accessory drive process is a process of driving and controlling the effect movable accessory 170 based on the driving scenario set in the accessory action pattern. The details of the performance movable accessory driving process will be described later. After executing step Sd1605, the process proceeds to step Sd1606.

In step Sd6106, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing step Sd6106, the process proceeds to step Sd6107.

At step Sd6107, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step Sd6107, the process proceeds to step Sd6108.

In step Sd6108, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above-described or later-described processing are transmitted to the display control device 100, the effect movable accessory 170, and the like. After executing step Sd6108, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Special figure fluctuation production setting process>
Next, the special figure fluctuation production setting process will be described. The special figure fluctuation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation effect setting process. In step Sd6201, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command and a special figure type command have been received. In step Sd6201, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command have not been received (Sa6201: NO), this special figure variation effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sd6201, when it determines with having received the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure classification command (Sa6201:YES), it progresses to step Sd6202.

In step Sd6202, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the effect pattern (announcement effect, contents of ready-to-win effect, timing of execution, mode of stop pattern) to be executed in this special game round based on the effect pattern table. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, from the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command received this time, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and read the information of the fluctuation time, sound light Random number information for effect patterns is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the side RAM 94 . Then, an effect pattern is determined and set by referring to the effect pattern table based on these information and the current game state. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6203.

In step Sd6203, a sound emission pattern and a character object action pattern corresponding to the set effect pattern are determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6204.

At step Sd6204, a display effect pattern command including information on the set effect pattern is set. The set display effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sd6204, the process proceeds to step Sd6205.

In step Sd6205, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for causing the display control device 100 to update the pending display in the first special figure pending display area Ds1 or the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the design display device 41. After executing step Sd6205, this special figure fluctuation effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing during special electric opening and closing execution mode>
Next, the effect setting processing during the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be described. The effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process. By the effect setting processing during the special electric opening/closing execution mode, an effect corresponding to the special electric opening (for example, an effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern) is executed, and during the execution of this effect, the special electric accessory 57b opens and closes. will do.

FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. In step Sd6301, it is determined whether or not a special electric opening command has been received. If it is determined in step Sd6301 that the special electric opening command has been received (Sa6301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6302.

In step Sd6302, the content of the special electric opening performance is determined and set according to the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern related to the current special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6303.

In step Sd6303, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the determined special electric opening effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6304.

In step Sd6304, a special electric opening command for display including information capable of specifying the contents of the decided special electric opening effect is set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6301 that the special electric opening command has not been received (Sa6301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd6305 without executing the above-described steps Sd6302 to Sd6304.

In step Sd6305, it is determined whether or not a special electric opening/closing period command has been received. If it is determined in step Sd6305 that the special electric switching period command has been received (Sa6305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6306.

In step Sd6306, the content of the special electric switching period presentation is determined and set according to the type of the special electric switching pattern related to the special electric switching execution mode of this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6307.

In step Sd6307, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the determined special electric opening/closing period effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6308.

In step Sd6308, a special electric switching period command for display including information capable of specifying the content of the determined special electric switching period effect is set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6305 that the special electric switching period command has not been received (Sa6305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd6309 without executing the above-described steps Sd6306 to Sd6308.

In step Sd6309, it is determined whether or not a special electric ending command has been received. If it is determined in step Sd6309 that the special electric ending command has been received (Sa6309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6310.

In step Sd6310, the content of the special electric ending effect is determined and set according to the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern related to the current special electric opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, as controls executed after a series of opening and closing operations are finished, control for executing an ending effect A and control for executing an ending effect B different from the control are performed. It is viable. It should be noted that both the control for executing the ending effect A and the control for executing the ending effect B are executed with the special electric accessory 57b closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6311.

In step Sd6311, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the content of the determined special electric ending effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6312.

In step Sd6312, a special electric ending command for display including information capable of specifying the contents of the decided special electric ending effect is set. After that, the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6309 that the special electric opening/closing period command has not been received (Sa6309: NO), the special electric opening/closing execution mode effect is executed without executing the above-described steps Sd6310 to Sd6312. End the setting process.

<Processing for production operation buttons>
Next, processing for effect operation buttons will be described. The effect operation button process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 346 is a flow chart showing processing for effect operation buttons. In the effect operation button processing, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed during the button reception valid period set in the effect pattern, the up-and-down movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON, and during the button reception valid period. Even if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed in 1, when the end timing of the button reception effective period comes, the vertical movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON. The details of the processing of each step will be described below.

In step Sd6401, it is determined whether or not it is during the button acceptance valid period of the effect operation button 24 set in the effect pattern. In step Sd6401, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 is not in the button acceptance valid period (step Sd6401: NO), the process for the effect operation button is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6401 that the effect operation button 24 is in the valid period for button acceptance (step Sd6401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6402.

At step Sd6402, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. At step Sd6402, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (step Sd6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6403 to turn on the vertical movement end condition fulfillment flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd6404 to set a vertical movement operation end condition establishment command for display to notify the display control device 100 that the vertical movement operation end condition is established. The set up-and-down display movement end condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sd6404, the process for the main effect operation button ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6402 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (step Sd6402: NO), the process advances to step Sd6405 to determine whether or not it is time to end the button acceptance valid period of the effect operation button 24. . If it is determined in step Sd6405 that it is time to end the button acceptance effective period (step Sd6405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6403 described above, and the vertical movement end condition fulfillment flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sd6404 to set a vertical movement operation end condition establishment command for display to notify the display control device 100 that the vertical movement operation end condition is established. The set up/down movement operation end condition establishment command for display is transmitted to the display control device 100 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. After executing step Sd6404, the processing for the main effect operation button ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd6405, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the button reception effective period (step Sd6405: NO), the processing for the main effect operation button is executed without executing the processing of steps Sd6403 and Sd6404 described above. finish.

<Driving processing for movable accessory for production>
Next, the production movable accessory drive process will be described. The effect movable accessory driving process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing the production movable accessory driving process. The effect movable accessory driving process is a process of driving and controlling the effect movable accessory 170 based on the driving scenario defined in the accessory action pattern. The details of the processing of each step will be described below.

In step Sd6501, it is determined whether or not it is time to store the drive scenario by referring to the set role product motion pattern. If it is determined in step Sd6501 that it is time to store the driving scenario (step Sd6501: YES), the process advances to step Sd6502 to read out one driving scenario defined in the character action pattern from the sound and light side ROM 93. and stores it in the driving scenario storage area 94 d of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd6503 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6501 that it is not the timing to store the driving scenario (step Sd6501: NO), the process advances to step Sd6504 without executing the processing of steps Sd6502 and Sd6503.

At step Sd6504, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 94d of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. In step Sd6504, when it is determined that the drive scenario is not stored (step Sd6504: NO), the movable accessory drive processing for this effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6504 that the driving scenario is stored (step Sd6504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6505.

At step Sd6505, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter among the processes defined in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d is "end". If it is determined in step Sd6505 that the process corresponding to the driving scenario counter value is not "end" (step Sd6505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd6506.

In step Sd6506, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter among the processes defined in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d is the "end condition determination process". do. If it is determined in step Sd6506 that the process corresponding to the driving scenario counter value is not the "end condition determination process" (step Sd6506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd6507.

In step Sd6507, among the processes specified in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d, the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is executed. Specifically, it executes a process for controlling a control target (a motor or a solenoid) defined in correspondence with the value of the driving scenario counter. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd6508.

In step Sd6508, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter among the processes specified in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d has been completed. In step Sd6508, when it is determined that the process corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter has not been completed (step Sd6508: NO), the main effect movable accessory drive process is terminated. As a result, the process of step Sd6507 is repeatedly executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is completed. If it is determined in step Sd6508 that the processing corresponding to the driving scenario counter value has been completed (step Sd6508: YES), the process advances to step Sd6509 to add 1 to the driving scenario counter value. After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends.

At step Sd6505 described above, if it is determined that the processing corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is "finished" (step Sd6505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6512, where the driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Clear the driving scenario. After that, the process advances to step Sd6513 to determine whether or not a driving scenario to be executed next is defined in the role product motion pattern. In step Sd6513, if it is determined that the driving scenario to be executed next is specified in the role product motion pattern (step Sd6513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6514, and the next step specified in the role product motion pattern The driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd6515 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6513 that the driving scenario to be executed next is not defined in the role product action pattern (step Sd6513: NO), the processing of steps Sd6514 and Sd6515 described above is not executed. , ends the movable accessory driving process for this effect.

If it is determined in step Sd6506 that the process corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter is the "end condition determination process" (step Sd6506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6510, where the up/down motion end condition establishment flag is set. is ON. If it is determined in step Sd6510 that the up/down motion end condition fulfillment flag is not ON (step Sd6510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd6509 described above, and 1 is added to the value of the drive scenario counter. After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6510 that the vertical movement end condition establishment flag is ON (step Sd6510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6511 to turn the vertical movement end condition establishment flag OFF. Proceeding to step Sd6512, the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area 94d is cleared. After that, the process advances to step Sd6513 to determine whether or not a driving scenario to be executed next is defined in the role product motion pattern. In step Sd6513, if it is determined that the driving scenario to be executed next is specified in the role product motion pattern (step Sd6513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd6514, and the next step specified in the role product motion pattern The driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Thereafter, the process advances to step Sd6515 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd6513 that the driving scenario to be executed next is not defined in the role product action pattern (step Sd6513: NO), the processing of steps Sd6514 and Sd6515 described above is not executed. , ends the movable accessory driving process for this effect.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sd8101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8102.

In step Sd8102, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

349 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sd8201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of an image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd8301, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process described above is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a display effect pattern command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that a moving image corresponding to the effect pattern specified by the command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. .

In the command processing (step Sd8301), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step Sd8302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (step Sd8301), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8303.

In step Sd8303, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (step Sd8302), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is selected. is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8304.

In step Sd8304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (step Sd8303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8305, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt process.

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Sd8401, it is determined whether or not there is a display effect pattern command. In step Sd8401, if it is determined that there is a display effect pattern command (step Sd8401: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd8402, the display effect pattern command is analyzed, and the animation corresponding to the effect pattern specified by the command is displayed. A display control process for controlling drawing and display of an image is started so that (display effect) is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd8401 that there is no display effect pattern command (step Sd8401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd8403 without executing step Sd8402.

In step Sd8403, it is determined whether or not there is a display vertical movement end condition establishment command. In step Sd8403, if it is determined that there is a display vertical movement end condition establishment command (step Sd8403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd8404, and a moving image (display effect) corresponding to establishment of the vertical movement end condition is displayed on the pattern display device 41, a display control process for controlling the drawing and display of the image is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd8403 that there is no display up/down movement end condition satisfaction pattern command (step Sd8403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd8405 without executing step Sd8404.

In step Sd8405, it is determined whether or not there is a display special electric opening command. In step Sd8405, if it is determined that there is a special electric opening command for display (step Sd8405: YES), proceed to step Sd8406, analyze the special electric opening command for display, and use the special electric opening effect of the contents specified by the command A display control process for controlling drawing and display of an image is started so that a corresponding moving image (display effect) is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8407. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd8405 that there is no display special electric opening command (step Sd8405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd8407 without executing step Sd8406.

In step Sd8407, it is determined whether or not there is a display special electric opening/closing period command. In step Sd8407, if it is determined that there is a special electric opening/closing period command for display (step Sd8407: YES), proceed to step Sd8408, analyze the special electric opening/closing period command for display, and special electric opening/closing of the contents specified by the command. A display control process for controlling image drawing and display is started so that a moving image (display effect) corresponding to the period effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Specifically, a display control process for determining and executing a display effect constituting one special electric opening/closing period effect to be executed by the symbol display device 41 from among a plurality of effect display modes according to the lottery result of the special drawing lottery. Execute. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8409. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd8407 that there is no display special electric switching period command (step Sd8407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd8409 without executing step Sd8408.

In step Sd8409, it is determined whether or not there is a special electric ending command for display. In step Sd8409, if it is determined that there is a special electric ending command for display (step Sd8409: YES), proceed to step Sd8410, analyze the special electric ending command for display, and use the special electric ending production of the contents specified by the command A display control process for controlling drawing and display of an image is started so that a corresponding moving image (display effect) is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Sd8411. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd8409 that there is no special electric ending command for display (step Sd8409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd8411 without executing step Sd8410.

In step Sd8411, processing corresponding to other commands is executed. Specifically, for example, when there is a game state command for display, the image is drawn and displayed so that the background moving image corresponding to the game state specified by the command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Start the display control process to be controlled. Then, after executing the processing corresponding to all the commands, the command processing ends.

<<7-7>> Functions and effects:

Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems in the conventional pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that executes a display effect on a liquid crystal display device and has various movable accessories that operate during the execution of the display effect in order to liven up the game effect. In recent years, various types of movable accessories have been decorated gorgeously, and various types of movable accessories have been made to perform various actions to diversify game effects and improve interest.

However, if the actions to be executed by the various movable accessories become more diverse, the drive programs for executing the various actions by the various movable accessories become enormous, and the capacity of the ROM increases. A problem arose.

Therefore, a driving scenario, which is a program that defines a series of actions of various movable accessories, is stored in the ROM, and when the series of actions is executed, the driving scenario is read from the ROM and stored in the RAM. A pachinko machine has been developed that causes various movable accessories to perform a series of actions based on a driving scenario stored in a RAM. According to a pachinko machine equipped with such a driving scenario, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is defined can be used (reused) in a plurality of effects, or the same driving scenario can be used a plurality of times during the execution of one effect. By adopting the configuration for repeated use, it is possible to reduce the number of programs to be stored in the ROM and reduce the capacity of the ROM used.

In addition, a driving scenario in which a series of actions is specified is read from the ROM, stored once in the RAM, and by executing the driving scenario stored in the RAM, the series of actions is executed by various movable accessories. By adopting a configuration in which a driving scenario once stored in a RAM is repeatedly executed to repeatedly execute a series of operations on various movable parts, various movable parts can be made to have a single single function as in the past. It is no longer necessary to execute a huge number of processes, such as reading out from the ROM and storing in the RAM a drive program defining a single operation each time an operation is to be executed. It has become possible to significantly reduce the number of readouts, reducing the processing load on pachinko machines.

However, in the conventional driving scenario, when the driving scenario is once stored in the RAM and the control of various movable parts is started based on the driving scenario, all the series of actions specified in the driving scenario are performed. was not able to end the control based on the driving scenario. For this reason, conventional drive scenarios have been used for presentations on the premise that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. As such an effect, for example, there is a development effect that makes the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not normal reach will develop into super reach.

In the development effect, for example, during a predetermined period of time during which normal reach is being executed, various movable accessories are repeatedly executed in a series of actions (for example, moving up and down multiple times), and when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the series of actions is performed. When it is terminated and it develops into super reach, the various movable accessories are made to perform the action corresponding to the super reach, and on the other hand, when it does not develop into super reach, the action corresponding to the case where it does not develop into super reach is executed by various movable accessories. In this configuration, the driving scenario is set so that the series of actions will end when the predetermined period has elapsed, and the positions and states of various movable accessories at the time of the end are also set in advance. Therefore, after completing a series of actions, it is possible to smoothly execute the action corresponding to the super reach and the action corresponding to the case where the super reach does not develop.

In this way, there is no problem when the conventional driving scenario is used for an effect on the premise that a series of actions are executed by various movable accessories to the end. The following problem may occur when using for an effect (for example, button effect) in which the timing of ending a series of actions is undefined.

For example, as a button effect in which the timing of ending a series of actions is uncertain, there is a button announcement effect in which the lottery result related to the change is announced at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed. In the button announcement effect, for example, a series of actions (for example, actions to move up and down multiple times) are repeatedly performed by various movable accessories while the pattern is changing, and during the execution of the series of actions, the button acceptance valid period is set. When the effect operation button is pressed during the button reception valid period, the series of operations is terminated at the timing when the effect operation button is pressed, and the lottery result related to the change is a big win. In this case, the various movable accessories are caused to perform an action corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (for example, an action of falling and rotating). Various movable accessories are caused to perform the action (for example, the action of waiting on the spot).

However, when the conventional drive scenario is used for the above-described button notification effect, even if the effect operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, all the series of actions specified in the drive scenario are executed. Since the control based on the drive scenario cannot be terminated until it ends, there is a time lag from when the effect operation button is pressed until the series of actions is completed and the action corresponding to the lottery result is started. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable, and the exhilarating feeling of the button presentation may be spoiled.

Furthermore, when the performance operation button is pressed during the button acceptance valid period, an image corresponding to the lottery result related to the change is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device without delay from the timing when the performance operation button is pressed. is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the image is output from the speaker without delay. Therefore, the time lag of the actions of various movable accessories becomes conspicuous, which may cause the player to feel even more uncomfortable and uncomfortable.

The configuration adopted by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to address the above problems will be specifically described below.

According to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a lottery process for performing an internal lottery when a game ball enters the ball entrance portion provided in the game area, and the display unit executes the lottery process according to the lottery result of the internal lottery. A display control process for determining and executing one predetermined effect from among a plurality of effect display modes can be executed, and one of the movable accessories provided in the game area and operating during the display of the predetermined effect on the display unit. It is possible to execute a movement control process that determines and executes an operation pattern from among a plurality of patterns.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, a special figure lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 provided in the game area PA. A display control process capable of executing a lottery process, and determining and executing a display effect constituting an accessory interlocking effect to be executed by a pattern display device 41 from among a plurality of display effect patterns according to the lottery result of a special lottery. is executable. Then, one role product operation pattern of the movable role object 170 for presentation which is provided in the game area PA and operates during display of the display effect constituting the role interlocking effect on the pattern display device 41 is determined from a plurality of patterns. A movable control process to be executed can be executed.

Then, according to the present embodiment, based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the movable accessory is caused to perform a series of actions based on the setting information set corresponding to one action pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns. It is possible to have it done. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, once the setting information defining a series of actions is read from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the series of actions is executed. It is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as reading motion information corresponding to a single motion from a predetermined storage unit and storing it in an execution area each time an object is caused to perform a single motion. Therefore, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, one character action pattern determined from among a plurality of character action patterns is determined based on the establishment of conditions for starting a character-linked battle effect, which is a type of character-linked effect. Based on the drive scenario 93c1 set correspondingly, it is possible to cause the performance movable accessory 170 to perform a series of up-and-down movements. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the driving scenario 93c1 defining a series of vertical movement operations is once read from the sound and light side ROM 93 and stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d of the sound and light side RAM 94, which is an area for execution. Then, since the series of vertical movement motions is executed, the motion information corresponding to the single motion is read out from the predetermined storage unit every time the movable accessory for presentation 170 is made to perform the single motion. Since it is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as storing the data in the execution area, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory is driven between the most returned position during driving, which is the initial position during non-driving, and the maximum displacement position during driving, which is the most driven position in a series of operations. The series of actions is configured to perform multiple return actions to position the movable accessory at the most returned position when driving, and when the return action is performed, the action end condition for the series of actions is Determine whether or not it is established, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is established, stop the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving and execute end processing to end the series of operations It is possible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Here, unlike the present embodiment, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the operation end condition for a series of operations is satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, the series of operations is forcibly executed. In the case of adopting the configuration to end, the movable accessory stops at a different position each time between the most return position during driving and the maximum displacement position during driving. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of actions is finished, the position of the movable accessory at the timing of starting the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of actions is completed, there may arise a problem that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the return motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition for the series of motions is satisfied, and if the motion end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that there is, the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. As a result, at the end of a series of actions, the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the processing load of the game machine is reduced, and the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions. It is assumed that the series of actions can be completed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is in the state of being moved, and that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving after the series of actions is completed. can be controlled.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the effect movable accessory 170 has an origin position, which is the initial position when not driven and the most returned position when driven, in a series of vertical movement operations, and the most driven position. A series of up-and-down movement operations are configured to perform a plurality of raising operations to position the production movable accessory 170 at the origin position. is executed, it is determined whether or not the up-down movement end condition of a series of up-down movement operations is satisfied. It is possible to execute end processing for stopping the performance movable accessory 170 and ending a series of vertical movement operations. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions can be performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Here, unlike the present embodiment, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the up-down movement end condition for the series of up-down movement motions is satisfied, and if it is determined that the up-down movement end condition is satisfied, the series In the case of adopting a configuration that forcibly terminates the vertical movement of (1), the performance movable accessory 170 stops at a different position each time between the origin position and the lowest point position. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of up-and-down movement motions are completed, the position of the movable accessory for presentation 170 at the start timing of the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of up-and-down movement motions are completed, there may arise a problem that the next control on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position cannot be executed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the rising motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the up-down motion end condition of the series of up-down motions is satisfied. When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory for presentation 170 located at the origin position is stopped to end the series of vertical movement operations. As a result, at the end of a series of vertical movement operations, the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. Therefore, after a series of up-and-down movement operations are completed, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, the effect movable accessory 170 can be moved to the origin position without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions. , the series of vertical movement operations can be completed at the earliest timing, and the production movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position after the series of vertical movement operations is completed. It is possible to execute the following control on the premise that

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the period during which a series of operations is performed includes a short operation period and a long operation period longer than the short operation period. That is, there are cases where a series of operations ends with the length of the short operation period and cases where the series of operations ends with the length of the long operation period. , the effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of timings for ending a series of operations do not exist. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which multiple timings for terminating a series of actions are adopted, for example, if the timing for terminating a series of actions is fixed at the elapse of a predetermined period from the start of the series of actions, , it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the action end condition is satisfied during the execution of the series of actions, and the series of actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the setting information that defines the series of actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable accessory is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the The position of the movable accessory does not become unstable.

However, according to the present embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of actions, that is, the timings are indefinite. It is not effective to take measures such as adjusting the contents of the setting information that defines the series of operations in advance so that it exists at a predetermined position. Since it is indeterminate, the position of the movable accessory at the end of the series of actions is indeterminate, and it is assumed that the movable accessory is positioned at the return position during driving after the series of actions is completed. A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the return motion to position the movable accessory at the most returned position during driving is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition of the series of motions is satisfied, and the motion end condition is established, the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the period during which a series of vertical movement actions is executed becomes a short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. In some cases, the long operation period is longer than the short operation period. That is, a series of up-and-down motions ends with the length of the short action period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and ends with the length of the long action period when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. In other words, according to the present embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of vertical movement operations. The effects of the present embodiment can be further exhibited. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which there are not multiple timings for ending the series of vertical movement operations, for example, the timing for ending the series of vertical movement operations is when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the series of vertical movement operations. When it is fixed, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the conditions for terminating the up-and-down movement are satisfied during execution of the series of up-and-down movement, and the series of up-and-down movement is performed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. should be terminated. Furthermore, if the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations is adjusted in advance so that the effect movable accessory 170 is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sequence of operations can be performed. The position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the vertical movement operation does not become unfixed.

However, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of vertical movement motions, that is, the timings are indefinite. In some cases, it is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations so that the movable accessory for presentation 170 exists at a predetermined position. Since the timing to end the series of vertical movement motions is undefined, the position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the series of vertical movement motions becomes undefined. A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position.

Therefore, according to the embodiment, when the upward motion to position the effect movable accessory 170 at the origin position is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical motion end condition of the series of vertical motion motions is satisfied, When it is determined that the vertical movement operation end condition is established, the movable accessory 170 for presentation located at the origin position is stopped, and a series of vertical movement operations is ended. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions is performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the period during which the movable accessory is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving includes a short control period and a long control period longer than the short control period. There are cases where a short control period is required until returns to the most return position during driving, and there are cases where a long control period longer than the short control period is required. According to this embodiment, even if a long control period longer than the short control period is required as the period during which the movable accessory is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving, the series of operations is always followed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time lag from the establishment of the operation end condition to the start of the next control.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the period during which the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to the lowest position side (the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position after leaving the origin position) A short control period that reciprocates between the origin position and the position A, and a long control period that is longer than the short control period and reciprocates between the origin position and the B position. , there are cases where a short control period is required until the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position, and there are cases where a long control period longer than the short control period is required. According to the present embodiment, even if a long control period longer than the short control period is required as the period during which the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to the lowest position side, the series Since it is judged whether or not the vertical movement end condition of the vertical movement motion is established, the time lag from the establishment of the vertical movement end condition to the start of the next control can be shortened.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first control and the second control different from the first control can be executed as the control executed after the series of operations is completed, and the series of operations is completed. Regardless of whether the control to be executed later is the first control or the second control, it is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving. Further, in this embodiment, when the series of actions is completed due to the establishment of the action end condition, the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position at the time of completion of the series of actions. . Therefore, after completing a series of actions, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the next control such as the first control or the second control cannot be executed because the movable accessory is not positioned at the most return position during driving. becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, a series of dropping, expanding, rotating, shrinking, and rising actions are executed on the effect movable accessory 170 as control that is executed after a series of vertical movement actions are completed. and control to cause the movable accessory for presentation 170 to perform a standby action. In either case of the control for executing the enlargement/rotation/reduction/rise action and the control for executing the standby action of the movable accessory for presentation 170, the state where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position. is executed in In this embodiment, when the series of vertical movement motions is completed by satisfying the condition for completing the vertical movement motion, the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin point at the time when the series of vertical movement motions is completed. located in position. Therefore, after completing a series of vertical movement operations, the movable accessory for presentation 170 is not positioned at the origin position, and the movable accessory for presentation 170 is caused to execute a series of dropping, enlarging, rotating, shrinking, and rising operations. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the next control such as the control for causing the control or performance movable accessory 170 to perform the standby action cannot be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the condition for ending the action of a series of actions is satisfied can be changed based on the game operation of the player. By comparison, the effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the timing at which the action end condition of the series of actions is satisfied does not change, for example, the timing for ending the series of actions is fixed at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the series of actions. In this case, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the condition for ending the action is satisfied during execution of the series of actions, and the series of actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the setting information that defines the series of actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable accessory is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the The position of the movable accessory does not become unstable.

However, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the condition for ending the action of a series of actions is met can change based on the game operation of the player. It is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the contents of the setting information that defines the series of actions so that the movable accessory exists at a predetermined position, and furthermore, the action of the series of actions Since the timing at which the end condition is met can change based on the game operation of the player, the position of the movable accessory at the end of the series of actions becomes undefined, and after the series of actions is completed, the movable accessory cannot be fixed. is positioned at the most return position during driving, the next control cannot be executed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the return motion to position the movable accessory at the most returned position during driving is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition of the series of motions is satisfied, and the motion end condition is established, the movable accessory positioned at the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving. , and after the end of the series of operations, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition for a series of up-and-down movement actions is met can change based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24. The effect of the present embodiment can be further exhibited as compared with the configuration in which the timing of establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition of the up-and-down movement does not change. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition of the series of up-and-down movement operations is satisfied does not change, for example, the timing at which the series of up-and-down movement operations is terminated will be predetermined from the start of the series of up-and-down movement operations. If it is fixed at the time of elapse of the period, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the condition for ending the up-and-down movement motion is satisfied during execution of the series of up-and-down movement motions. What is necessary is just to complete|finish up-and-down movement operation|movement. Furthermore, if the content of the driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement operations is adjusted in advance so that the effect movable accessory 170 is in a predetermined position after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sequence of operations can be performed. The position of the performance movable accessory 170 at the end of the up-and-down movement operation does not become undefined.

However, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition of the series of up-and-down movement actions is established can be changed based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24. Measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the content of a driving scenario that defines a series of up-and-down movement motions so that the performance movable accessory 170 is present at a predetermined position after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the movement motion. Furthermore, the timing at which the up-and-down movement end condition of the series of up-and-down movement operations is satisfied can change based on the player's pressing operation of the effect operation button 24, so the end of the series of up-and-down movement operations. When the position of the movable accessory for presentation 170 becomes unstable, the following control is performed on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position after the series of vertical movement operations is completed. Problems such as not being able to execute may arise.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the upward motion to position the effect movable accessory 170 at the origin position is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical motion end condition of the series of vertical motion motions is satisfied. , when it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory 170 for presentation located at the origin position is stopped to end a series of up-and-down movement operations. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the series of vertical motion motions is performed while the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the following control can be executed on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the control target to be executed after the series of actions is completed includes a control target different from the movable accessory, the movable accessory can be controlled after the series of actions is completed. It is possible to reduce the time lag between the control performed on the object and the control performed by the different controlled object.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 is a control target different from the effect movable accessory 170 as a control target to be executed after a series of up-and-down movement operations are completed. Since it is included, the control (a series of falling/enlarging/rotating/reducing/rising actions or standby actions) executed on the effect movable accessory 170 after completing the series of vertical movement actions and the pattern display device 41 It is possible to reduce the time lag with the executed control (control to display a character string such as "Victory!" or control to display a character string such as "Defeat...").

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the movable control process determines whether or not the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied when the control to drive the movable accessory toward the maximum displacement position during driving is executed. Since the determination is not made, the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving can be executed at the fastest speed after the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied, while maintaining the advantage. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. A specific description will be given below.

If a control is executed to drive the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position when driving, a configuration is adopted to determine whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied, and the movable accessory moves to the maximum displacement position when driving. Even if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied while driving, if the movable accessory is positioned on the maximum displacement position side during driving, it is determined that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. Since the premised next control cannot be executed, the start of the next control is waited until the movable accessory returns to the most return position during driving. Therefore, although there is no advantage of determining whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied when the control for driving the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position side is executed, the control becomes complicated, and the game machine becomes unusable. The processing load will increase. Also, hypothetically, the following control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving is executed by stopping the driving while the movable accessory is being driven to the maximum displacement position during driving. In this case, the action of the movable accessory becomes unnatural, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when control is executed to drive the movable accessory to the maximum displacement position during driving, it is not determined whether or not the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. Therefore, while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the next control assuming that the movable accessory is positioned at the most return position when driving, it is possible to execute the control at the fastest speed after the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. It is possible to simplify and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid situations in which the movement of the movable accessory becomes unnatural and the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, when the control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition is satisfied. Since no determination is made, the next control on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position can be executed at the fastest speed after the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied. It is possible to simplify and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. A specific description will be given below.

If a control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest point side is executed, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition is satisfied, and the effect movable accessory 170 is Even if it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is established in the state of being driven to the lowest point position side, the movable role for presentation is not in the state where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned on the side of the lowest point position. Since the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the object 170 is positioned at the origin position, the start of the next control is waited until the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position. Therefore, even though there is no advantage in determining whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied when the control for driving the performance movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, the control becomes complicated. , the processing load of the gaming machine increases. Further, if the next control on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position is stopped while the movable accessory for presentation 170 is being driven to the lowest position side, the driving is stopped. If this is executed, the action of the effect movable accessory 170 may become unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the control for driving the effect movable accessory 170 to the lowest position side is executed, the vertical movement end condition of the series of vertical movement is satisfied. Since it is not determined whether or not there is, the advantage that the next control on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position can be executed at the fastest speed after the vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied is maintained. At the same time, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the movement of the effect movable accessory 170 becomes unnatural and the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the position where the movable accessory is returned to the non-driving initial position side in a series of actions is the same position as the non-driving initial position. , when returning to the non-driving initial position side, it returns to the non-driving initial position. Then, every time the movable accessory returns to the initial position during non-driving in a series of actions, it is determined whether or not the action end condition of the series of actions is satisfied, and it is determined that the action end condition is satisfied. In this case, the movable accessory positioned at the non-driving initial position is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to unify the content of the next control to be executed after the end of the series of actions on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position during non-driving. . As a result, it is not necessary to prepare control based on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at a position other than the initial position when not driven as the contents of the next control, so that the control can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the position where the movable accessory for presentation 170 is returned to the origin position side, which is the non-driving initial position, in a series of vertical movement operations is the non-driving initial position. Since the position is the same as the origin position, the effect movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position when returning to the origin position side in a series of vertical movement operations. Then, each time the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position in a series of vertical movement operations, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement operation end condition of the series of vertical movement operations is satisfied, and the vertical movement operation end condition is determined. is established, the performance movable accessory 170 positioned at the origin position is stopped, and the series of vertical movement operations is terminated. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the content of the next control to be executed after a series of vertical movement operations is completed is based on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position, which is the initial position when not driven. Content can be unified. As a result, it is no longer necessary to prepare control based on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at a position other than the original position, which is the initial position during non-driving, as the contents of the next control, thus simplifying the control. can be planned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the movable accessory includes a transparent or translucent member, the player can move the image displayed on the display unit located behind the movable accessory. It becomes possible to visually recognize through the role. Details of this effect will be described. The display unit can display the image corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by shortening the time lag between the image displayed on the display unit and the motion of the movable role, the image linked with the motion of the movable role can be played through the movable role. It is possible to realize an effective effect such as displaying an image to be viewed by a person on the display unit.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the effect movable accessory 170 is configured to include a transparent or translucent member, so that the player can move the effect behind the effect movable accessory 170. An image displayed on the positioned pattern display device 41 can be viewed through the performance movable accessory 170 . Details of this effect will be described. The symbol display device 41 can display an image corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition without delay based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after a series of up-and-down movement operations are completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by shortening the time lag between the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the motion of the movable accessory for presentation 170, the image can be displayed in cooperation with the motion of the movable accessory for presentation 170. As a result, it is possible to realize an effective effect such as displaying on the pattern display device 41 an image that the player visually recognizes through the effect movable accessory 170 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target that is executed after the series of operations is completed includes the display section capable of displaying an image. The effect of this configuration will be described. The display unit can display the image corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the image displayed on the display unit and the action of the movable accessory, so that the display unit displays an image linked with the action of the movable accessory. It is possible to realize a realistic performance.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the control target to be executed after the series of vertical movement motions is completed includes the pattern display device 41 capable of displaying an image. The effect of this configuration will be described. The symbol display device 41 can display an image corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition without delay based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the time lag between the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the action of the movable accessory for effect 170 can be shortened, so that the image coordinated with the action of the movable accessory for effect 170 can be displayed. is displayed on the pattern display device 41, so that an effective effect can be realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target that is executed after the series of operations is completed includes an audio output unit capable of outputting sound. The effect of this configuration will be described. The sound output unit can output a sound corresponding to the establishment of the operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the sound output by the audio output unit and the action of the movable role, so that the audio output unit is caused to output the sound linked with the action of the movable role. It is possible to realize an effective performance such as

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, the speaker 46 capable of outputting sound is included in the control targets that are executed after the series of vertical movement operations are finished. The effect of this configuration will be described. The speaker 46 can output without delay the sound corresponding to the fulfillment of the up-and-down movement end condition based on the establishment of the up-and-down movement end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the time lag between the sound output by the speaker 46 and the action of the movable accessory for presentation 170 can be shortened. It is possible to realize an effective effect such as outputting to 46.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the control target of the control executed after the series of operations is completed includes the light emitting unit capable of emitting light. The effect of this configuration will be described. The light emitting unit can emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the satisfaction of the operation termination condition without delay based on the satisfaction of the operation termination condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the action end condition is satisfied, the series of actions is performed without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions of the movable accessory. It is possible to finish the operation at the earliest timing, and after finishing the series of operations, it is possible to quickly execute the next control. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the light emission by the light emitting unit and the motion of the movable accessory. It is possible to realize performance.

Specifically, for example, according to the present embodiment, various lamps 47 that can emit light are included in the control targets that are executed after a series of vertical movement operations are completed. The effect of this configuration will be described. The various lamps 47 can emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fulfillment of the vertical movement operation end condition without delay based on the establishment of the vertical movement operation end condition. Then, as described above, according to the present embodiment, when the up-and-down movement motion end condition is satisfied, it waits until all the motions included in the series of up-and-down motion motions of the effect movable accessory 170 are completed. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of up-and-down movement operations is completed. can be shortened until the next control is started. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the light emission of the various lamps 47 and the operation of the movable accessory for presentation 170, so that the various lamps can be illuminated in a light emission pattern that cooperates with the operation of the movable accessory for presentation 170. It is possible to realize an effective performance such as making the 47 emit light.

As described above, according to the game machine, the control program and the control data can be effectively used, and the movable accessory can be terminated by appropriate control. It becomes possible to execute the following control on the premise that a predetermined state is established.

<<7-8>> Modified example of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<7-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 318(B), 318(C), and 320(A), in a series of up-and-down movement operations specified in the driving scenario 93c1, the effect movable accessory 170 is moved to the A position. Alternatively, the movement destination (return position during driving) when moving from position B to the origin position is the same position as the origin position which is the initial position during non-driving. When the movable accessory 170 is moved from the A position or the B position to the origin position side, the destination (driving most return position) is a position between the origin position and the A position (hereinafter referred to as the initial position when not driving). (also referred to as W position). The configuration of this modified example will be specifically described below.

Figures 352, 353, and 354 are explanatory diagrams showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In these figures, FIG. 352 corresponds to FIG. 318 of the above embodiment, FIG. 353 is the same as FIG. 319 of the above embodiment, and FIG. 354 is a diagram added in this modified example. .

In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 352(B) and 352(C), in a series of up-and-down motions, the movable accessory for presentation 170 is moved from position A or position B to the origin position side. The destination (the most returned position when driving) is the W position between the origin position which is the initial position when not driving and the A position, except when it is moved to the origin position at the end of the series of vertical movement operations. . In other words, the contents of the driving scenario 93c1w that defines the series of vertical movement motions in this modified example are different from the contents of the driving scenario 93c1 that defines the series of vertical movement motions in the above-described embodiment.

Then, in this modification, each time the effect movable accessory 170 is moved to the W position in the series of vertical movement operations, and when it is moved to the origin position at the end of the series of vertical movement operations, the above-mentioned It is configured to determine whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is established, and if it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is established, the series of up-and-down movement operations is terminated. .

The position of the movable accessory for production 170 when it is determined that the above-mentioned vertical movement operation end condition is satisfied is the origin position, and if the result of the special drawing lottery related to the production is a jackpot winning, the figure As shown in 353(A), a series of falling/expanding/rotating/reducing/rising actions specified in the drive scenario 93c2 are executed. This operation is the same as the above embodiment shown in FIG. 319(A).

Similarly, when it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition described above is satisfied, the position of the movable accessory for production 170 is the origin position, and the result of the special drawing lottery for the production is a loss. , and as shown in FIG. 353(B), the standby operation defined in the drive scenario 93c3 is executed. This operation is the same as the above embodiment shown in FIG. 319(B).

Here, a series of falling/expanding/rotating/reducing/rising actions specified in the drive scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 353(A) and the standby action specified in the drive scenario 93c3 shown in FIG. 353(B) are all operations based on the premise that the execution is started from the state where the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position. Therefore, when the position of the effect movable accessory 170 is the W position when it is determined that the up-and-down movement operation end condition described above is satisfied, these operations defined in the driving scenario 93c2 and the driving scenario 93c3 are performed. , or even if the movement can be started, the position of the movement destination is different from the assumed position.

Therefore, in this modification, a series of dropping, expanding, rotating, A configuration further provided with a driving scenario 93c2w defining contraction/raising motions and a driving scenario 93c3w defining a series of rising/standby motions is adopted.

As shown in FIG. 354(A), the position of the effect movable accessory 170 when it is determined that the above-described up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied is the W position, and the result of the special figure lottery related to the effect. is a jackpot winning, a series of falling, expanding, rotating, shrinking, and rising operations defined in the drive scenario 93c2w are executed. In the series of falling/enlarging/rotating/reducing/rising operations specified in this drive scenario 93c2w, the movement (falling) from the W position toward the lowest point position is started.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 354(B), the position of the effect movable accessory 170 when it is determined that the above-described up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied is the W position, and the special figure related to the effect is If the result of the lottery is a loss, a series of ascending/standby actions specified in the driving scenario 93c3w are executed. In the series of ascending/standby operations specified in this drive scenario 93c3w, the operation starts from movement (ascending) from the W position toward the origin position.

FIG. 355 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each drive scenario 93c1w, 93c2, 93c3, 93c2w, 93c3w provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. The difference from the embodiment shown in FIG. 320 is that the contents of the driving scenario 93c1w of this modification shown in FIG. 355(A) differ from the contents of the driving scenario 93c1 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 355(D) and 355(E). A drive scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 355(B) and a drive scenario 93c3 shown in FIG. A drive scenario 93c3w shown in E) is a drive scenario for when the vehicle is stopped at the W position added in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 355(A), in the driving scenario 93c1w of this modified example, in a series of up-and-down movement operations, except for the movement operation from position B to the origin position defined by the value "11" of the driving scenario counter, , A position or B position to the origin position side, the movement destination (driving most return position) is not the origin position but the W position. Other points are the same as the driving scenario 93c1 of the above embodiment. The distance from the origin position to the W position and the distance from the W position to the A position correspond to 50 steps.

A driving scenario 93c2 shown in FIG. 355B and a driving scenario 93c3 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 355(D), in the driving scenario 93c2w of this modified example, in a series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising actions, the operation content defined by the value "1" of the driving scenario counter is The contents of the operation are to move (drop) from the W position to the lowest position. Other points are the same as the driving scenario 93c2 of the above embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 355(E), in the driving scenario 93c3w of this modified example, an operation of moving (raising) from the W position to the origin position is added as an operation content defined by the value "1" of the driving scenario counter. ing. Other points are the same as the driving scenario 93c3 of the above embodiment.

As described above, even with the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment. A specific description will be given below.

According to this modification, the movable accessory is driven and controlled between the most returned position during driving, which is the initial position when not driving, and the maximum displacement position during driving, which is the most driven position, in a series of operations. , the series of actions is configured to perform a plurality of return actions to position the movable accessory at or near the most return position during drive, and when the return action is executed, a series of It is determined whether or not the operation end condition of the operation is satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, the movable accessory positioned at or near the return position during driving or near the return position during driving. can be executed to end the series of operations by stopping the Therefore, according to this modification, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed, the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving. The series of operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of operations is completed, it is possible to detect that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving. It becomes possible to execute the following control that is assumed.

Here, assuming that, unlike this modified example, it is determined at an arbitrary timing whether the condition for terminating the motion of the series of motions is satisfied, and the series of motions is forcibly executed at an arbitrary timing when it is determined that the condition for terminating the motion is satisfied. In the case of adopting the configuration to end, the movable accessory stops at a different position each time between the most return position during driving and the maximum displacement position during driving. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after the series of actions is finished, the position of the movable accessory at the timing of starting the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, there may arise a problem that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving. .

On the other hand, according to the present modification, as described above, when the return motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the motion end condition for the series of motions is satisfied, and if the motion end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that there is, the movable accessory located at the most return position during driving or near the most return position during driving is stopped, and the series of operations is completed. As a result, at the end of a series of actions, the movable accessory is positioned at or in the vicinity of the most-returned position during driving. Therefore, after the series of actions is completed, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving.

Thus, according to this modification, the processing load of the game machine can be reduced, and the movable accessory can be moved to the most return position or driven without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of actions. The series of actions can be quickly completed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory is positioned near the most return position, and after the series of actions is completed, the movable accessory is at the most return position at the time of driving or at the time of driving. It becomes possible to execute the following control on the premise that it is positioned near the most return position.

Specifically, for example, according to this modified example, the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the W position, which is the most returned position during driving on the origin position side, and the most driven position in a series of vertical movement operations. It is driven and controlled between the lowest point position, and the series of vertical movement operations is configured to perform a plurality of upward movements to position the movable accessory 170 for presentation at or near the W position, When the rising motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition of the series of vertical movement motions is satisfied. It is possible to execute an end process of stopping the effect movable accessory 170 located near the W position (for example, the origin position) and ending a series of vertical movement operations. Therefore, according to this modification, without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions, the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the W position or in the vicinity of the W position. A series of vertical movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and it is possible to detect that the production movable accessory 170 is positioned at or near the W position after the series of vertical movement operations is completed. It becomes possible to execute the following control that is assumed.

Here, unlike the present modified example, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing that the up-down movement end condition of the series of up-down movement motions is satisfied, and if it is determined that the up-down movement end condition is satisfied, the series In the case of adopting a configuration that forcibly terminates the vertical movement of (1), the movable accessory for presentation 170 stops at a different position each time between the origin position and the lowest point position. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of up-and-down movement motions are completed, the position of the movable accessory for presentation 170 at the start timing of the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of up-and-down movement operations are completed, a problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the W position or in the vicinity of the W position.

On the other hand, according to the present modification, as described above, when the rising motion is executed, it is determined whether or not the condition for terminating the vertical moving motion of the series of vertical moving motions is satisfied. When it is determined that the termination condition is established, the movable accessory for presentation 170 positioned at or near the W position is stopped to terminate the series of vertical movement operations. As a result, at the end of a series of vertical movement operations, the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at or near the W position. Therefore, after the series of up-and-down movement operations are finished, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at the W position or in the vicinity of the W position.

Thus, according to this modification, the effect movable accessory 170 can be moved to the W position without waiting for the completion of all the motions included in the series of vertical movement motions while reducing the processing load of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the series of vertical movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing while the movable accessory 170 is positioned in the vicinity of the W position. Alternatively, it is possible to execute the following control on the premise that it is located near the W position.

As described above, even with the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment. However, the configuration of the above embodiment is superior to this modified example in the following points.

In the above embodiment, when returning to the origin position side in a series of vertical movement operations, the effect movable accessory 170 is controlled to return to the origin position instead of the W position shown in the modified example. The position of the performance movable accessory 170 when judging the vertical movement operation end condition is unified to the origin position. Therefore, as a driving scenario to be executed after the up/down movement end condition is satisfied, a driving scenario in the case of stopping at a position other than the origin position as in this modified example (driving scenario for stopping at W position in this modified example) is prepared. This eliminates the need for this, and can reduce the amount of data and simplify processing.

That is, according to the above embodiment, the position where the movable accessory is returned to the non-driving initial position side in a series of actions is the same position as the non-driving initial position. , when returning to the non-driving initial position side, it returns to the non-driving initial position. Then, every time the movable accessory returns to the non-driving initial position in a series of actions, it is determined whether or not the action end condition of the series of actions is satisfied, and it is determined that the action end condition is satisfied. In this case, the movable accessory positioned at the non-driving initial position is stopped, and the series of operations is terminated. Therefore, according to the above embodiment, it is possible to unify the contents of the next control to be executed after the end of the series of actions on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position during non-driving. . As a result, it is not necessary to prepare control based on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at a position other than the initial position when not driven as the contents of the next control, so that the control can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, according to the above-described embodiment, the position where the movable accessory 170 is returned to the origin position side, which is the non-driving initial position, in the series of vertical movement operations is the non-driving initial position. Since the position is the same as the origin position, the movable accessory for effect 170 returns to the origin position, not to the W position shown in the modified example, when returning to the origin position side in a series of vertical movement operations. . Then, each time the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position in a series of vertical movement operations, it is determined whether or not the vertical movement operation end condition of the series of vertical movement operations is satisfied, and the vertical movement operation end condition is determined. is established, the performance movable accessory 170 positioned at the origin position is stopped, and the series of vertical movement operations is terminated. Therefore, according to the above embodiment, the content of the next control to be executed after the series of vertical movement operations is completed is based on the premise that the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at the origin position, which is the initial position when not driven. Content can be unified. As a result, as the contents of the next control, it is necessary to prepare control on the premise that the movable accessory for effect 170 is positioned at a position other than the origin position (for example, the W position in the modified example) which is the initial position at the time of non-driving. Therefore, control can be simplified.

<<7-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, after a predetermined start condition is established and before a series of actions is started, there may be a pre-start non-driving period in which the movable accessory is not driven from the non-driving initial position. . The effect of this configuration will be described.

Here, unlike this modified example, a case where there is no pre-start non-driving period in which the movable accessory is not driven from the non-driving initial position before the start of a series of actions will be described. In general, there are a certain number of players who press the effect operation button 24 immediately after the button reception valid period starts. When such a player presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button reception effective period, that is, immediately after the start of a series of actions, and the action end condition is established, the movable role is already activated. Since it is just after the object starts to be driven, it takes time for the movable accessory to return to the most return position during driving, and the time lag until the next control is started becomes large. Therefore, the player who presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button reception effective period may not feel the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button 24.

Therefore, as in this modification, before the start of a series of actions, there is a pre-start non-driving period in which the movable accessory is not driven from the non-driving initial position, and the pre-start non-driving period starts. By adopting a configuration in which the button reception effective period starts from time, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the button reception effective period starts, the movable accessory is driven to the non-driving initial position. Before moving from, it is possible to quickly execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position at the time of non-driving. Therefore, according to this modification, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button reception effective period, the time lag until the next control is started is avoided from increasing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who presses the effect operation button 24 with the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button acceptance valid period.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, after the conditions for starting the character-linked battle production are satisfied, before the series of up-and-down movement operations are started, the production-use movable accessory 170 is set to the non-driving initial stage. A configuration may be adopted in which there is a pre-start non-driving period in which the motor is not driven from the origin position, which is the position. The effect of this configuration will be described.

Here, unlike this modified example, it is assumed that there is no pre-start non-driving period in which the performance movable accessory 170 is not driven from the origin position, which is the initial non-driving time position, before the start of the series of vertical movement operations. A case of adoption will be described. In general, there are a certain number of players who press the effect operation button 24 immediately after the button reception valid period starts. When such a player presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the valid period of button acceptance, that is, immediately after the start of a series of up-and-down motions, and establishes the up-and-down motion end condition. Since the movable accessory for presentation 170 has already started to be driven, it takes time for the movable accessory for presentation 170 to return to the origin position (or the W position), which is also the most return position during driving. The time lag until the start of the next control becomes large. Therefore, the player who presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button reception effective period may not feel the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button 24.

Therefore, as in this modified example, before the start of a series of vertical movement operations, there is a pre-start non-driving period during which the performance movable accessory 170 is not driven from the origin position, which is the initial non-driving position. By configuring the button acceptance valid period to start from the start of the pre-start non-driving period, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 immediately after the button reception valid period starts, the presentation operation button 24 can be moved for presentation. Before the accessory 170 is driven and moves from the origin position which is the initial position when not driven, the movable accessory 170 for presentation is positioned at the origin position which is the initial position when not driven. Control can be executed quickly. Therefore, according to this modification, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button reception effective period, the time lag until the next control is started is avoided from increasing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who presses the effect operation button 24 immediately after the start of the button acceptance effective period with the exhilarating feeling of pressing the effect operation button 24.例文帳に追加

<<7-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the series of operations may include an operation standby period during which the movable accessory waits at the most return position during driving. The effect of this configuration will be described. If the series of actions includes an action waiting period in which the movable accessory waits at the most returned position when driven, and if it is repeatedly determined whether or not the action end condition is satisfied during the action waiting period, the action When the operation end condition is satisfied during the standby period, a series of operations is performed at the earliest timing without causing a time lag until the movable accessory returns from a position other than the most returned position during driving to the most returned position during driving. As well as being able to end it quickly, it is possible to immediately execute the next control on the premise that the movable accessory is positioned at the most returned position during driving. That is, according to this modification, it is possible to include a period in which the series of operations can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of operations is being performed.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the series of up-and-down movement operations includes the operation of waiting at the origin position (or W position), which is also the most return position during driving. The configuration may include a waiting period. The effect of this configuration will be described. A series of vertical movement operations includes an operation standby period in which the effect movable accessory 170 waits at the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position when driven, and the vertical movement operation end condition is set during the operation standby period. If it is configured to repeatedly determine whether or not it is established, when the up-and-down movement end condition is established during the operation standby period, the performance movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position (or W position) to return to the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position during driving, and the series of vertical movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, It is possible to immediately execute the next control on the premise that the performance movable accessory 170 is positioned at the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position during driving. That is, according to this modified example, it is possible to include a period in which the series of vertical movement motions can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of vertical movement motions is executed. .

<<7-8-4>> Modification 4:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the movable accessory may be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the game ball. According to this configuration, the movable accessory can change the behavior of the game ball. Then, in this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, when the action end condition is met, the series of actions is executed at the earliest timing without waiting for all the actions included in the series of actions to be completed. Since the series of operations can be terminated quickly and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of operations is completed, the time lag between the establishment of the operation termination condition and the start of the next control can be shortened. be able to. Therefore, the player decides the timing of establishing the operation end condition and starting the next control of the movable accessory according to the position and speed of the game ball circulating in the game area, and realizes the behavior intended by the player. It becomes possible to give a change to a game ball. As described above, according to this modification, it is possible to realize a novel game such as determining the timing of establishing the action end condition and changing the behavior of the game ball by the action of the movable accessory.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the movable accessory for presentation 170 may be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the game ball. According to this configuration, the effect movable accessory 170 can change the behavior of the game ball. Then, in this modified example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied, the series of up-and-down movement operations is performed without waiting for the completion of all the operations included in the series of up-and-down movement operations. Since the operation can be terminated at the earliest timing and the next control can be quickly executed after the series of vertical movement operations is completed, the next control can be executed after the vertical movement operation end condition is established. It is possible to shorten the time lag until the start of control. Therefore, the player decides the timing of establishing the up-and-down movement end condition and starting the next control of the effect movable accessory 170 according to the position and speed of the game ball circulating in the game area PA, and plays the game. It is possible to give a game ball a change in behavior intended by a person. As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to realize a novel game such as changing the behavior of the game ball by the action of the movable accessory 170 for effect by adjusting the timing of establishing the up-and-down motion end condition. It becomes possible.

<<7-8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a plurality of movable accessories may be provided, and the plurality of movable accessories may be configured to perform a series of actions based on one set setting information. According to this configuration, once the setting information defining the series of actions is read from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the plurality of movable accessories can be caused to execute the series of actions. Therefore, every time each of a plurality of movable accessories executes a single action, the action information corresponding to the single action is read from a predetermined storage unit and stored in an execution area. The processing of numbers can be omitted. As a result, according to this modified example, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the gaming machine and realize various effects using a plurality of movable accessories.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 are provided, and the plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 are connected in series based on one set driving scenario 93c1. may be configured to perform the vertical movement operation. According to this configuration, once the driving scenario 93c1 defining a series of up-and-down movements is read out from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 can store the series of motions. Since it is possible to execute a vertical movement action, every time each of the plurality of production movable accessories 170 is caused to execute a single action, the action information corresponding to the single action is read out from the predetermined storage unit. It is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as storing the data in the execution area. As a result, according to this modified example, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the gaming machine and realize various effects using the plurality of movable accessories 170 for effects.

<<7-8-6>> Modification 6:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, a plurality of movable accessories are provided, and when each of the plurality of movable accessories is caused to perform a return action, it is determined whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied. It is good also as a structure which carries out. According to this configuration, at the timing when it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied, at least one movable accessory determined to be satisfied with the operation end condition is at the most returned position during driving or at the time of driving. It will be in the vicinity of the most returned position. Therefore, if the movable accessory other than the one movable accessory is located at the most return position when driving or near the most return position when driving, the series of operations is quickly completed at the earliest timing. After the end of the series of actions, the following control is executed on the premise that each of the plurality of movable accessories is positioned at or near the return position during drive. It becomes possible to

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, when a plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 are provided, and each of the plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 is caused to perform an upward motion, Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the vertical movement end condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, at the timing when it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied, at least one performance movable accessory 170 determined as being satisfied with the up-and-down movement end condition is driven. It is in a state of being positioned at or near the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position. Therefore, if the movable effect 170 other than the one movable effect 170 is positioned at or near the origin position (or the W position), which is also the return position during driving, the series can be quickly completed at the earliest timing, and after completion of the series of vertical movement operations, each of the plurality of production movable accessories 170 is moved to the origin position (or It is possible to execute the following control on the premise that the vehicle is positioned at or near the position W).

<<7-8-7>> Modification 7:
In the above embodiment and each modification, when a plurality of movable accessories are provided, and control is executed to drive each of the plurality of movable accessories to the maximum displacement position when driving, the operation end condition is A configuration may be adopted in which it is not determined whether or not it is established. According to this configuration, the next control on the premise that each of the plurality of movable accessories is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving is performed when the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the game at the fastest speed later. A specific description will be given below.

Hypothetically, if control is executed to drive each of a plurality of movable accessories to the maximum displacement position side during driving, a configuration is adopted to determine whether or not an operation end condition is satisfied, and a plurality of movable accessories are provided. Even if it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied in a state where each of is driven to the maximum displacement position side when driving, one movable accessory that has determined that the operation end condition is satisfied is the maximum displacement position side when driving , the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the one movable accessory is positioned at the most return position during driving or near the most return position during driving. The start of control is waited until the one movable accessory returns to the most-returned position during driving or near the most-returned position during driving. Therefore, even though there is no advantage of determining whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied when executing control to drive each of the plurality of movable accessories to the maximum displacement position side at the time of driving, the control is complicated. As a result, the processing load of the gaming machine increases. In addition, if the movable accessory is positioned near the most returned position during driving or near the most returned position during driving, the following control is performed when the movable accessory is positioned at the maximum displacement position during driving. If the driving is stopped in the middle of being driven, the motion of the one movable accessory becomes unnatural, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this modification, when control is executed to drive each of the plurality of movable accessories to the maximum displacement position during driving, whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied is determined. Since it is not determined, the next control on the premise that each of the plurality of movable accessories is positioned at or near the most returned position during driving is executed as soon as possible after the operation end condition of the series of operations is satisfied. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute at . Furthermore, according to this modified example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the motion of one movable accessory determined to satisfy the motion end condition becomes unnatural, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 are provided, and each of the plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 is driven to the lowest position side. It may be configured such that when the control is executed, it is not determined whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the next control based on the premise that each of the plurality of movable accessories 170 is positioned at or near the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position during driving, is performed in a series of up and down. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the game machine while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the moving operation at the fastest speed after the up-and-down moving operation end condition of the moving operation is satisfied. A specific description will be given below.

Suppose that a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not a vertical movement end condition is satisfied when control is executed to drive each of the plurality of movable accessories 170 toward the lowest position. Even if it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied in a state in which each of the production movable accessories 170 is driven to the lowest point side, the up-and-down movement end condition is determined to be satisfied. When the movable accessory 170 for presentation is positioned at the lowest position side, the movable accessory for presentation 170 is positioned at or near the origin position (or W position) which is also the most return position during driving. Since the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the will wait until it returns to Therefore, even though there is no advantage in determining whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied when control is executed to drive each of the plurality of performance movable accessories 170 to the lowest position side. , the control becomes complicated and the processing load of the gaming machine increases. Further, if the one effect movable accessory 170 is positioned at or near the origin position (or the W position), which is also the most return position when driving, the following control is performed for the one effect movable accessory 170. When the accessory 170 is driven to the lowest position side and the driving is stopped and executed, the movement of the one performance movable accessory 170 becomes unnatural, and the player feels uncomfortable. It can make you feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the present modification, when control is executed to drive each of the plurality of movable accessories 170 toward the lowest position, the vertical movement end condition is satisfied. Since it is not determined whether or not there is, the following control is performed on the premise that each of the plurality of movable accessories 170 is positioned at or near the origin position (or W position), which is also the most return position during driving. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the game machine while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the up-and-down movement operation at the fastest speed after the up-and-down movement operation end condition is satisfied. Furthermore, according to this modified example, the motion of the one performance movable accessory 170 determined to satisfy the vertical movement motion end condition becomes unnatural, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be avoided.

<<7-8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, a plurality of movable accessories are provided, and during a period in which one of the plurality of movable accessories is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving, a plurality of movable accessories are provided. It may be configured such that other movable accessories out of the accessories are controlled to be positioned at the most returned position during driving. According to this configuration, neither one of the plurality of movable accessories nor the other movable accessories is controlled to the maximum displacement position during driving. Therefore, even though it is determined that the operation end condition is satisfied when one movable accessory returns from the maximum displacement position during driving to the most returned position during driving, the other movable accessory is driven. Since it is controlled to the maximum displacement position side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a series of actions cannot be completed until the other movable accessory returns to the most return position during driving.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications, a plurality of movable accessory 170 are provided, and one of the movable accessory 170 is the most movable accessory 170 for presentation. During the period of control to the lower point position side, the other of the plurality of movable effects 170 for effects is positioned at the origin position (or W position) which is also the return position during driving. It may be configured to control to According to this configuration, one of the plurality of movable accessory 170 for presentation and the other movable accessory for presentation 170 are both controlled to the lowest position side. does not occur. Therefore, it is determined that the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied when one of the performance movable accessories 170 returns from the lowest position side to the origin position (or W position), which is also the most return position during driving. In spite of this, the other movable accessory for presentation 170 is controlled to the lowest position side, and the other movable accessory for presentation 170 is at the origin position (or W position) which is also the most returned position during driving. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a series of up-and-down movement operations cannot be completed until returning.

<<7-8-9>> Modification 9:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a plurality of movable accessories are provided, and after one movable accessory among the plurality of movable accessories returns from the maximum displacement position during driving to the most returned position during driving, After the lapse of a predetermined interval period, another movable accessory out of the plurality of movable accessories may be controlled from the most return position during driving to the maximum displacement position during driving. According to this configuration, during a predetermined interval period after one movable accessory returns to the most returned position when driven, all of the plurality of movable accessories are positioned at the most returned position when driven. The effect of this configuration will be described. If it is configured to repeatedly determine whether or not the operation end condition is satisfied in the predetermined interval period, when the operation end condition is satisfied in the predetermined interval period, all of the plurality of movable accessories are driven. Because it is located at the most retracted position, a series of actions can be performed at the earliest timing without causing a time lag until some movable accessories return to the most retracted position when driving from a position other than the most retracted position when driving. As well as being able to end it quickly, it is possible to immediately execute the next control on the premise that all of the plurality of movable accessories are positioned at the most return position during driving. That is, according to this modification, it is possible to include a period in which the series of operations can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of operations is being performed.

Specifically, for example, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a plurality of movable accessory 170 are provided, and one movable accessory 170 out of the plurality of movable accessories 170 is the largest. After returning from the lower point position side to the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position during driving, after a predetermined interval period has passed, the other movable accessory for presentation among the plurality of movable accessories for presentation 170 170 may be controlled from the origin position (or W position), which is also the most returned position during driving, to the lowest position side. According to this configuration, during a predetermined interval period after one movable accessory 170 returns to the origin position (or W position), which is also the most return position during driving, the plurality of movable accessories 170 All of them are located at the origin position (or W position) which is also the most returned position during driving. The effect of this configuration will be described. If it is configured to repeatedly determine whether or not the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied in the predetermined interval period, when the up-and-down movement end condition is satisfied in the predetermined interval period, a plurality of movable roles for presentation are determined. Since all the objects 170 are located at the origin position (or W position) which is also the most returned position when driving, some of the movable accessories 170 for presentation are located at the origin position (or W position) which is also the most returned position when driving. A series of up-and-down movement operations can be quickly completed at the earliest timing without causing a time lag until returning to the origin position (or the W position), which is also the most returned position during driving, from a position other than the It is possible to immediately execute the next control on the premise that all of the performance movable accessories 170 are positioned at the origin position (or W position), which is also the most return position during driving. That is, according to this modified example, it is possible to include a period in which the series of vertical movement motions can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of vertical movement motions is executed. .

<<7-8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the outer frame of the pachinko machine is not limited to being made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin. , stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. However, after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, a first cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so that it cannot be opened, and the front door frame A configuration in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so that it cannot be opened may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. You may employ the structure provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, the configuration in which the rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side when viewed from the front is adopted. may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment and each modification, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine employs a configuration including an upper tray and a lower tray, but the lower tray may be omitted and a configuration including only the upper tray may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side in front view may be adopted. Also, a configuration in which the operation handle is provided on both the right side and the left side when viewed from the front may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment and each of the modifications, the operating handle is provided with a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is gripping the operating handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operating handle). However, a configuration in which the touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a structure or the like may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the operating handle is turned clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are shot per minute. A configuration in which less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls are fired per minute may be used, and a configuration in which 100 or more (eg, 200) game balls are fired per minute may be used. good. Alternatively, the game ball may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration in which a speaker is provided as means capable of outputting sound is adopted, but a configuration in which an earphone jack is provided in addition to or instead of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding pachinko machines by connecting the earphones or headphones he/she has brought with him/herself to the earphone jack. It is possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the special symbols that start the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the various starting ports. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying the normal symbols that start the variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates, For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , a rotating drum type display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the decorative pattern is not limited to numerals, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, etc., and combinations thereof can be employed. For example, as decorative patterns, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations thereof may be employed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In the case of adopting a configuration in which two or more rows of decorative patterns are employed, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative patterns stop on a specific line. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory. A configuration in which the large winning slot can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation shaft, or a configuration in which the large winning slot is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotation shaft to open the starting port, front and rear of the game board A structure or the like in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in a direction may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, the number of winning balls set in each ball opening (starting hole, general winning opening, big winning opening, etc.) is an example, and is set for each ball opening By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<<7-8-11>> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices, namely the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device and It is good also as a structure provided with two control devices called a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. In addition, in the above embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not limited to the division described in the above embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 , 100 as a whole should be able to execute various processes in the above embodiment.

<<7-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment and each modification may be realized by hardware, or part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software. good too.

<<7-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example will be appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic dA group>
The feature dA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature dA1]
Ball entry means (ball entry portion/first special figure start opening 33, second special figure start opening 34) provided in the game area (game area PA),
A winning lottery means (lottery processing/processing for executing a special lottery) for performing a winning lottery (internal lottery/first special lottery, second special lottery) when a game ball enters the ball entering means;
A plurality of performances of one specific performance (predetermined performance/display performance constituting special figure variation performance) executed by display means (display unit/symbol display device 41) according to the lottery result of the success/failure lottery of the success/failure lottery means display control means (display control processing/processing for determining and executing a display effect pattern) for determining and executing display modes;
A plurality of one operation modes (movement pattern/movement pattern) of the movable means (movable role/movable role for production 170) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the specific effect on the display means Movable control means (movable control processing/processing for determining and executing a role product action pattern) that determines and executes from
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means selects one of the plurality of operation modes (operation pattern/accessory item) determined from among the plurality based on establishment of a predetermined operation condition (predetermined start condition/accessory item-linked battle production start condition). based on specific information (setting information/driving scenario 93c1) set corresponding to the operation pattern), the movable means is caused to perform a series of specific operations (a series of operations/a series of vertical movement operations);
The movable means moves to a first position (return position during driving/origin position (embodiment), W position (modification)) on the side of the initial position (initial position during non-driving/origin position) in the series of specific operations. and a second position (maximum displacement position during driving/lowest point position), which is the most driven position,
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action (return action/up action) for positioning the movable means at or near the first position a plurality of times,
The movable control means is
Judgment means (judgment processing/vertical movement operation end condition) for judging whether or not the end condition (operation end condition/vertical movement operation end condition) of the series of specific operations is satisfied when the predetermined operation is executed judgment process) and
When the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific actions. Termination means (termination processing/processing for terminating the vertical movement operation);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this feature, when a game ball enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a lottery is executed, and one specific effect executed by the display means is executed according to the lottery result of the lottery. It is possible to determine and execute from the performance display modes, and it is possible to determine and execute one operation mode of the movable means provided in the game area and operating during the display of the specific performance on the display means from a plurality of modes. .

According to this feature, based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the movable means performs a series of specific actions based on specific information set corresponding to one action mode determined from among a plurality of actions. Let Therefore, according to this feature, once the specific information defining a series of specific actions is read from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the series of specific actions is executed. It is possible to omit a huge number of processes such as reading out motion information corresponding to a single motion from a predetermined storage unit and storing it in an execution area each time the means is caused to perform a single motion. Therefore, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the movable means is drive-controlled between the first position, which is the initial position side, and the second position, which is the most driven position, in the series of specific actions, and the series of specific actions is , the predetermined motion of positioning the movable means at or near the first position is executed a plurality of times, and when the predetermined motion is executed, whether the condition for terminating the series of specific motions is satisfied. If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific operations. Therefore, according to this feature, the series of specific actions can be performed while the movable means is positioned at or near the first position without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of specific actions. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of specific actions is completed, the next control is executed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. It becomes possible to

Here, unlike this feature, if it is determined at an arbitrary timing whether the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied, and the series of specific actions is forcibly terminated at an arbitrary timing when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied In the case of adopting a configuration that allows the movable means to stop at a different position each time between the first position and the second position. As a result, for example, when the next control is started after a series of specific actions are finished, the position of the movable means at the timing of starting the next control will be different each time. Therefore, after a series of specific actions are completed, a problem may arise in that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position.

On the other hand, according to this feature, as described above, when the predetermined action is executed, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied, When the determination is made, the movable means located at or near the first position is stopped to end the series of specific actions. As a result, the movable means is positioned at or near the first position at the end of the series of specific actions. Therefore, it is possible to execute the next control on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the series of specific actions is completed.

Thus, according to this feature, the processing load of the game machine is reduced, and the movable means is moved to the first position or to the first position without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of specific actions. The series of specific actions can be quickly completed at the earliest timing while the movable means is positioned near the first position, and the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the series of specific actions is completed. It is possible to execute the following control on the premise that

[Feature dA2]
The gaming machine according to feature dA1,
As the period for executing the series of specific actions, a first period (short action period/execution period when the effect operation button 24 is pressed) and a second period longer than the first period (long action period/execution period when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed);

According to this feature, the period during which the series of specific operations is executed includes the first period and the second period longer than the first period. That is, the series of specific actions may end in the length of the first period or may end in the length of the second period. Since there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of specific actions, the effect of the feature dA1 can be further exhibited compared to a configuration in which there are not a plurality of timings for ending the series of specific actions. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which there are not multiple timings for ending the series of specific actions, for example, the timing for ending the series of specific actions is fixed at the elapse of a predetermined period from the start of the series of specific actions. In this case, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied during execution of the series of specific actions, and the series of specific actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the specific information that defines the series of specific actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable means is at a given position when the predetermined period of time elapses, then the series of specific actions can be completed at the end of the series of specific actions. There is no possibility that the position of the movable means will become unstable.

However, according to this feature, there are a plurality of timings for ending the series of specific actions, that is, the timings are indefinite. It is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the contents of the specific information that defines the series of specific actions so that the series of specific actions are present at a predetermined position, and furthermore, the series of specific actions is terminated. Since the timing is indeterminate, the position of the movable means at the end of the series of specific actions is indeterminate, and the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the series of specific actions is finished. A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the

Therefore, according to this characteristic subordinate to the characteristic dA1, when the predetermined movement of positioning the movable means at or near the first position is executed, whether or not the condition for ending the series of specific movements is satisfied. If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific operations. Therefore, according to this feature, without waiting for all the actions included in the series of specific actions to be completed, the series of specific actions can be performed in a state in which the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of specific actions is completed, the next control is executed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. It becomes possible to

[Feature dA3]
A gaming machine according to feature dA1 or feature dA2,
As a period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, a first control period (short control period/a period for reciprocating between the initial position and the A position) and a period longer than the first control period and a long second control period (long control period/period of going back and forth between the initial position and the B position).

According to this feature, the period during which the movable means is controlled toward the second position includes the first control period and the second control period longer than the first control period. There are cases where a first control period is required to return to the first position, and where a second control period longer than the first control period is required. According to this feature, even if the second control period longer than the first control period is required as the period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, the series of specific Since it is determined whether or not the end condition of the operation is satisfied, it is possible to shorten the time lag from when the end condition is satisfied until the next control is started.

[Feature dA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA3,
As the control executed after the series of specific actions is finished, the first control (first control/control for causing the movable accessory for effect 170 to perform a series of falling, expanding, rotating, contracting, and rising actions); A second control different from the first control (second control/control to cause the effect movable accessory 170 to perform a standby action) can be executed, and is executed after the series of specific actions is completed. In either case of the first control or the second control, the control is executed with the movable means positioned at or near the first position. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, the first control and the second control different from the first control can be executed as the control executed after the series of specific actions is finished, and the series of specific actions can be executed. Regardless of whether the control executed after the end is the first control or the second control, it is executed with the movable means positioned at or near the first position. Further, in this characteristic subordinate to the above characteristic dA1, when the series of specific actions is terminated by the satisfaction of the termination condition, the movable means moves to the first position or the first 1 position. Therefore, after completing a series of specific actions, the movable means is not located at the first position or near the first position, and the next control such as the first control or the second control cannot be executed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of trouble.

[Feature dA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are established can be changed based on a predetermined game operation (game operation/depressing operation of the performance operation button 24) by the player.

According to this feature, the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied can be changed based on the predetermined game operation of the player, so compared to a configuration in which the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions is not changed. Therefore, the effect of the feature dA1 can be further exhibited. A specific description will be given below.

Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions does not change, for example, the timing for ending the series of specific actions is fixed at the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the series of specific actions. In this case, it is not necessary to frequently determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied during execution of the series of specific actions, and the series of specific actions may be terminated when the predetermined period of time elapses. Furthermore, if the content of the specific information defining the series of specific actions is adjusted and set in advance so that the movable means is in a given position when the predetermined period of time elapses, when the series of specific actions ends There is no possibility that the position of the movable means will become unstable.

However, according to this feature, the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions is met can change based on the predetermined game operation of the player. Sometimes it is not effective to take measures such as adjusting and setting in advance the contents of the specific information that defines the series of specific actions so that the movable means exists at a predetermined position. can change based on the player's predetermined game operation, the position of the movable means at the end of the series of specific actions becomes indeterminate, and after the series of specific actions is finished, A problem may arise that the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position.

Therefore, according to this characteristic subordinate to the characteristic dA1, when the predetermined movement of positioning the movable means at or near the first position is executed, it is determined whether or not the conditions for terminating the series of specific movements are satisfied. If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific operations. Therefore, according to this feature, without waiting for the completion of all the actions included in the series of specific actions, the series of specific actions can be performed in a state in which the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. can be completed at the earliest timing, and after the series of specific actions is completed, the next control is executed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. It becomes possible to

[Feature dA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA5,
A gaming machine, wherein control targets to be controlled after the series of specific actions are completed include a control target (display section/symbol display device 41) different from the movable means.

According to this feature, the control target executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes the control target different from the movable means. It is possible to reduce the time lag between the control to be performed and the control to be performed by the different controlled object.

[Feature dA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA6,
The gaming machine, wherein the movable control means does not determine whether or not the end condition is satisfied when executing the control to drive the movable means to the second position side.

According to this feature, when the movable control means executes the control to drive the movable means toward the second position, the movable means does not determine whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. is positioned at or near the first position, the control can be simplified while maintaining the advantage of being able to execute the next control at the fastest speed after the conditions for ending a series of specific actions are met. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the game machine. A specific description will be given below.

If a control for driving the movable means to the second position side is executed, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not conditions for ending a series of specific actions are satisfied, and the movable means is driven to the second position side. Even if it is determined that the end condition is met in the state where the movable means is positioned on the second position side, it is assumed that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position. Since the next control cannot be executed, the start of the next control is waited until the movable means returns to the first position or the vicinity of the first position. Therefore, although there is no advantage of judging whether or not the end condition is satisfied when executing the control to drive the movable means to the second position side, the control becomes complicated and the processing load of the game machine increases. will do. Further, if the following control is performed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, the driving is stopped while the movable means is being driven toward the second position. In this case, the movement of the movable means becomes unnatural, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when the movable control means executes the control to drive the movable means to the second position side, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied. Therefore, it maintains the advantage that the next control on the premise that the movable means is positioned at or near the first position can be executed at the fastest speed after the end condition of a series of specific operations is satisfied. At the same time, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the movement of the movable means becomes unnatural and the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

[Feature dA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA7,
A gaming machine, wherein a position where the movable means is returned to the initial position side in the series of specific actions is the same position as the initial position.

According to this feature, the position where the movable means is returned to the initial position side in the series of specific actions is the same position as the initial position. , will return to the initial position. Then, each time the movable means returns to the initial position in a series of specific actions, it is determined whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied. The movable means located at the initial position is stopped to end the series of specific operations. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to unify the content of the next control to be executed after the series of specific actions is completed on the premise that the movable means is positioned at the initial position. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the control on the premise that the movable means is positioned at a position other than the initial position as the contents of the next control, so that the control can be simplified.

[Feature dA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA8,
A gaming machine characterized in that there is a non-driving period (pre-start non-driving period) in which the movable means is not driven from the initial position after the predetermined operating condition is established and before the series of specific actions is started.

According to this feature, there is a non-driving period in which the movable means is not driven from the initial position after the predetermined operating condition is established and before the series of specific operations is started. The effect of this configuration will be described.

Here, unlike this feature, a case in which there is no non-driving period in which the movable means is not driven from the initial position before the start of a series of specific operations will be described. In general, there are a certain number of players who press the effect operation button immediately after the button reception valid period starts. When such a player presses the effect operation button immediately after the start of the button reception valid period, that is, immediately after the series of specific actions is started, and the end condition is satisfied, the movable means has already been activated. Since it is just after starting to drive, it takes time for the movable means to return to the first position again, and the time lag until starting the next control increases. Therefore, the player who presses the effect operation button immediately after the start of the button reception valid period may not feel the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button.

Therefore, as in this feature, before starting a series of specific actions, there is a non-driving period in which the movable means is not driven from the initial position, and the button acceptance effective period starts from the start of the non-driving period. With this configuration, when the player presses the effect operation button immediately after the button acceptance effective period starts, the movable means is positioned at the initial position before the movable means is driven and moved from the initial position. It is possible to quickly execute the next control on the premise that the Therefore, according to this feature, when the player presses the effect operation button immediately after the button reception effective period starts, it is possible to avoid the time lag from starting the next control to increase. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who presses the effect operation button immediately after the start of the button acceptance effective period with the exhilaration of pressing the effect operation button.

[Feature dA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA9,
A gaming machine, wherein the series of specific actions includes a waiting period (action waiting period) during which the movable means waits at the first position.

According to this feature, the series of specific actions includes a waiting period during which the movable means waits at the first position. The effect of this configuration will be described. If a series of specific actions includes a waiting period in which the movable means waits at the first position, and if it is repeatedly determined whether or not the termination condition is satisfied during the standby period, the termination condition is satisfied during the standby period. When this is established, the series of specific actions can be quickly completed at the earliest timing without causing a time lag until the movable means returns to the first position from a position other than the first position, and the movable means can is positioned at the first position, the next control can be executed immediately. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to include a period in which the series of specific actions can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of specific actions is being performed.

[Feature dA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA10,
A game machine, wherein the movable means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with a game ball.

According to this feature, since the movable means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the game ball, the movable means can change the behavior of the game ball. Further, in this feature subordinate to feature dA1, when the end condition is satisfied, the series of specific actions can be performed at the earliest timing without waiting for all the actions included in the series of specific actions to be completed. In addition, after the series of specific actions are completed, the next control can be executed quickly, so that the time lag from the establishment of the termination condition to the start of the next control can be shortened. can be done. Therefore, the player decides the timing of establishing the termination condition and starting the next control of the movable means in accordance with the position and speed of the game ball circulating in the game area, and changes the behavior intended by the player. It becomes possible to give it to a game ball. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to realize a novel game such as determining the timing to satisfy the end condition and changing the behavior of the game ball by the operation of the movable means.

[Feature dA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA11,
A gaming machine, wherein the movable means includes a transparent or translucent member.

According to this feature, since the movable means includes a transparent or translucent member, the player can view the image displayed on the display means located behind the movable means through the movable means. becomes possible. Details of this effect will be described. The display means can display an image corresponding to the fact that the termination condition is met without delay based on the fact that the termination condition is met. According to this characteristic subordinate to the characteristic dA1, when the end condition is met, the series of specific movements is performed without waiting for the completion of all the movements included in the series of specific movements of the movable means. Since it is possible to quickly end the series of specific actions at the earliest timing and to quickly execute the next control after finishing the series of specific actions, it is possible to wait until the start of the next control after the end condition is satisfied. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to this feature, by shortening the time lag between the image displayed on the display means and the movement of the movable means, the image linked with the movement of the movable means is visible to the player through the movable means. It is possible to realize an effective effect such as displaying an image on the display means.

[Feature dA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA12,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display means (display section/symbol display device 41) capable of displaying an image is included in the control target to be executed after the series of specific actions is completed.

According to this feature, the control target executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes the display means capable of displaying an image. The effect of this configuration will be described. The display means can display an image corresponding to the fact that the termination condition is met without delay based on the fact that the termination condition is met. According to this characteristic subordinate to the characteristic dA1, when the end condition is met, the series of specific movements is performed without waiting for the completion of all the movements included in the series of specific movements of the movable means. Since it is possible to quickly end the series of specific actions at the earliest timing and to quickly execute the next control after finishing the series of specific actions, it is possible to wait until the start of the next control after the end condition is satisfied. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the image displayed on the display means and the operation of the movable means, so that an effective presentation can be achieved in which an image linked with the operation of the movable means is displayed on the display means. can be realized.

[Feature dA14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA13,
A gaming machine, wherein a control target to be executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes sound output means (sound output unit/speaker 46) capable of outputting sound.

According to this feature, the control target executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes the sound output means capable of outputting sound. The effect of this configuration will be described. The sound output means can output a sound corresponding to the establishment of the termination condition without delay based on the establishment of the termination condition. According to this characteristic subordinate to characteristic dA1, when the end condition is met, the series of specific movements is performed without waiting for the completion of all the movements included in the series of specific movements of the movable means. Since it is possible to quickly end the series of specific actions at the earliest timing and to quickly execute the next control after finishing the series of specific actions, it is possible to wait until the start of the next control after the end condition is satisfied. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to this feature, since the time lag between the sound output by the sound output means and the operation of the movable means can be shortened, it is possible to effectively output the sound to the sound output means in cooperation with the operation of the movable means. It is possible to realize a performance.

[Feature dA15]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA14,
A game machine characterized in that a control target to be executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes light-emitting means (light-emitting section/various lamps 47) capable of emitting light.

According to this feature, the control target that is executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes the light emitting means capable of emitting light. The effect of this configuration will be described. The light emitting means can emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the satisfaction of the termination condition without delay based on the satisfaction of the termination condition. According to this characteristic subordinate to characteristic dA1, when the end condition is met, the series of specific movements is performed without waiting for the completion of all the movements included in the series of specific movements of the movable means. Since it is possible to quickly end the series of specific actions at the earliest timing and to quickly execute the next control after finishing the series of specific actions, it is possible to wait until the start of the next control after the end condition is satisfied. Time lag can be shortened. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to shorten the time lag between the light emission by the light emitting means and the operation of the movable means, so that an effective presentation is realized in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern linked to the operation of the movable means. It becomes possible to

[Feature dA16]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA15,
A plurality of the movable means are provided,
The movable control means performs the series of specific actions (series of actions/series of vertical movement actions) for the plurality of movable means based on the set specific information (setting information/driving scenario 93c1). A game machine characterized in that it is a game machine that

According to this feature, a plurality of movable means are provided, and the movable control means causes the plurality of movable means to perform a series of specific operations based on one set specific information. Therefore, once the specific information defining a series of specific actions is read out from the predetermined storage unit and stored in the execution area, the plurality of movable means can be caused to execute the series of specific actions. A huge number of processes such as reading out motion information corresponding to a single motion from a predetermined storage unit and storing it in an execution area each time each of a plurality of movable means is caused to perform a single motion. can be omitted. As a result, according to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game machine and realize various effects using a plurality of movable means.

[Feature dA17]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA16,
A plurality of the movable means are provided,
The movable control means is
means for determining whether or not the termination condition (operation termination condition/vertical movement operation termination condition) is satisfied when each of the plurality of movable means is caused to execute the predetermined motion. Amusement machine.

According to this feature, a plurality of movable means are provided, and means is provided for determining whether or not a termination condition is satisfied when each of the plurality of movable means is caused to execute a predetermined operation. Therefore, according to this feature, at the timing when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied, at least one movable means determined that the termination condition is satisfied is at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position. is positioned at Therefore, if the other movable means other than the one movable means is located at the first position or near the first position, the series of specific actions can be quickly completed at the earliest timing. , it becomes possible to execute the following control on the premise that each of the plurality of movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the series of specific actions is completed.

[Feature dA18]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA17,
A plurality of the movable means are provided,
The movable control means does not determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied when executing control to drive each of the plurality of movable means to the second position side. game machine.

According to this feature, a plurality of movable means are provided, and when the movable control means executes control to drive each of the plurality of movable means to the second position side, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied. is not determined, the next control on the premise that each of the plurality of movable means is positioned at or near the first position can be executed at the fastest speed after the conditions for ending a series of specific actions are met. It is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the game machine while maintaining the advantage of becoming a game machine. A specific description will be given below.

Assuming that control for driving each of the plurality of movable means to the second position side is executed, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not a termination condition is satisfied, and each of the plurality of movable means is moved to the second position. Even if it is determined that the end condition is satisfied while driving to the position side, the one movable means determined to be satisfied with the end condition is positioned on the second position side. Since the next control cannot be executed on the premise that the means is positioned at or near the first position, the next control cannot be started when the one movable means is at the first position or at the first position. will wait until it returns to the vicinity of . Therefore, although there is no advantage in determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied when executing control to drive each of the plurality of movable means to the second position side, the control becomes complicated, and the game is played. This means that the processing load on the machine will increase. Further, if the one movable means is positioned at the first position or near the first position, the following control may be performed while the one movable means is being driven to the second position side. If it is executed with the drive stopped, the movement of the one movable means becomes unnatural, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to this feature, when the movable control means executes control to drive each of the plurality of movable means to the second position side, the movable control means determines whether or not the termination condition is satisfied. Since no determination is made, the next control on the premise that each of the plurality of movable means is positioned at or near the first position can be executed at the fastest speed after the conditions for ending a series of specific actions are met. While maintaining this advantage, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, according to this feature, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the movement of the one movable means determined to satisfy the end condition becomes unnatural, causing the player to feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. .

[Feature dA19]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA18,
A plurality of the movable means are provided,
The movable control means controls the movement of the other movable means of the plurality of movable means to the first position during a period in which one movable means of the plurality of movable means is controlled to the second position side. A game machine characterized by comprising means for controlling the position.

According to this feature, a plurality of movable means are provided, and the movable control means controls the movement of the other movable means out of the plurality of movable means during a period in which one movable means out of the plurality of movable means is controlled to the second position side. Since the movable means is controlled to be positioned at the first position, a situation in which one of the plurality of movable means and the other movable means are both controlled to the second position side does not occur. Therefore, the other movable means is controlled to the second position side even though it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when one movable means returns to the first position from the second position side. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which a series of specific actions cannot be completed until the other movable means returns to the first position.

[Feature dA20]
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA19,
A plurality of the movable means are provided,
The movement control means controls the movement of the plurality of movable means after a predetermined period (predetermined interval period) has elapsed after one of the plurality of movable means has returned from the second position side to the first position. A gaming machine comprising means for controlling another movable means of the means from the first position to the second position side.

According to this feature, a plurality of movable means are provided, and the movable control means controls the movement of the plurality of movable means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after one movable means of the plurality of movable means returns to the first position from the second position side. Since the other movable means of the movable means is controlled from the first position to the second position side, for a predetermined period after one movable means returns to the first position, all of the plurality of movable means are in the first position. will be located in position. The effect of this configuration will be described. If it is determined repeatedly whether or not the termination condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, all of the plurality of movable means are positioned at the first position when the termination condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. , a series of specific actions can be quickly completed at the earliest timing without generating a time lag until some movable means return to the first position from positions other than the first position, and the plurality of movable means are positioned at the first position, the next control can be executed immediately. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to include a period in which the series of specific actions can be completed without causing a time lag in the period during which the series of specific actions is being performed.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and presentation are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of the game, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

A game machine such as a slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means. A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups may be used as appropriate to solve part or all of the above-described problems, or to achieve part or all of the above-described effects. , can be replaced or combined. Moreover, if the technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

<<8>> Eighth Embodiment:
Connection method, communication method and disconnection method between pachinko machine 10 and smartphone 200 <8-0> Introduction:
Conventionally, it has been desired to input and output various types of information between a game machine and a player. There is a demand for further improvement in convenience.

Specifically, for example, when exchanging information with a gaming machine using a player's mobile terminal such as a smartphone, a two-dimensional code is created that can identify the information that the gaming machine intends to output. , and the player can read the two-dimensional code using a portable terminal, connect the portable terminal to the Internet, and identify the read two-dimensional code as information. Therefore, there is a demand for inputting information to and outputting information from the gaming machine more simply.

Here, when inputting information to the gaming machine and outputting information from the gaming machine by communicating with the player's mobile terminal by providing a Bluetooth or WiFi module on the gaming machine side, the following A problem arises. That is, when a player opens his mobile terminal and tries to communicate with an arbitrary gaming machine in a game hall, it is very complicated work to search for the arbitrary gaming machine and establish a safe communication state. will be required.

The present invention is directed to overcoming one or more of the problems set forth above,
a success/fail lottery means for executing a success/failure lottery based on determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established that the predetermined lottery condition has been established;
variable display means for executing variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
a specific game executing means for executing a specific game state after a specific variable display for displaying a specific display result executed when the result of the lottery is a specific result;
effect execution means for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
Input means that allows a player to make a predetermined input to the effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The input means
A detection means that enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state,
This game machine is
Output means for outputting a plurality of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and related to the effect execution means when a first input state occurs in which the detection means is in the predetermined detection state. with
When a second input state occurs in which input of predetermined information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of output information is detected, input and output of information relating to predetermined settable information in the effect executing means is enabled. It is characterized by being configured as follows.

As a result, it is possible to obtain a special effect that it is possible to suitably input information to the gaming machine and output information from the gaming machine.

The "input means" may be any means as long as the player can make a predetermined input to the effect execution means.・Processing of signal input, information/signal input via Bluetooth (“Bluetooth” is a registered trademark), processing of information/signal input via effect operation buttons, custom settings via effect operation buttons Selection, processing for inputting information/signals via a cross key, processing for inputting information/signals via an operation handle, and the like.

The "determining means" may determine whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established. Processing for determining whether or not established, processing for determining whether the conditions for executing the second special drawing lottery were established, and whether the conditions for executing the general drawing lottery were established A lottery for determining the effect to be executed during the process of judging, the effect to be executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the type of effect to be executed during the game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times. and a process of determining whether or not the conditions for

The "success lottery" may be a lottery executed based on the determination that the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied by the determination means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the first special figure The first special drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the start opening, the second special drawing drawing that is executed when the game ball enters the second special start opening, and the normal start gate The normal drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the ball, the type of production that is executed during the game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, and the production that is executed during the fluctuation of the special pattern. Production decision lottery for deciding, etc. are mentioned.

The "predetermined detection state" may be a state that transitions when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance. For example, a state in which another NFC module is detected to be close to or in contact with the NFC antenna of the NFC module up to a predetermined distance, or a detection switch that detects that a production operation button is operated has a detection target. A state in which it is detected that a detection target has approached or contacted a predetermined distance, a state in which a detection switch that detects operation of a cross key has detected that a detection target has approached or contacted to a predetermined distance, Infrared sensors, etc. that detect when another Bluetooth module approaches or touches the Bluetooth antenna of the Bluetooth module within a predetermined distance, or when the detection target approaches the glass unit of the game machine. Examples include a state in which an optical sensor detects a detection target, and a state in which a detection unit that detects that an operation handle has been operated detects that the operation handle has been operated.

"Lottery lottery means" may be any one that performs a lottery lottery, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, random number information is generated based on the fact that a game ball enters the first special figure start port. A lottery process for determining the result of a special figure lottery by matching the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, and acquiring random number information based on the fact that a game ball entered the second special figure start port. , A lottery process that determines the result of a special lottery by comparing the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, acquires random number information based on the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate, and uses the acquired random number information A lottery process that determines the result of the normal figure lottery by collating with a predetermined table, and the like.

The "first input state" may be a state in which the detection means is in a predetermined detection state. A state in which it is detected that the module has come close to or abutted within a predetermined distance, a state in which it has been detected that another Bluetooth module has come close to or abutted to the Bluetooth antenna of the Bluetooth module to a predetermined distance, A state in which a detection target is detected by an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects that a detection target has approached the glass unit of the game machine, or a detection switch that detects that a production operation button has been operated. A state in which proximity or contact to a distance is detected, a state in which a detection switch that detects operation of the cross key detects that a detection target has approached or contacted to a predetermined distance, and a state in which an operation handle is detected. For example, a state in which the operation of the operating handle is detected by a detection unit that detects that the is operated.

The ``specific game execution means'' may be anything as long as it executes a specific game state, and if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, a special electric opening and closing execution mode, which is a game state in which a special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times , a process of executing a high-frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate frequently, and a process of executing a low-frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate infrequently.

The "plurality of information" may be information stored in a predetermined storage unit and related to the effect execution means, and may be any information that can be used as long as it can implement the gist of the present invention, such as , Bluetooth connection information (for example, Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, Bluetooth password) stored in the ROM of the NFC module, and the operation detection unit of the production operation button is in a predetermined detection state. Information on setting screens and sound information for various effects stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that is displayed and notified to the player when the input state of occurs, Bluetooth module Bluetooth connection information, game history information, custom settings for production, information on the screen for displaying them, and information on the proximity of the detection target to the glass unit of the game machine stored in the ROM provided by When a first input state occurs in which a sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor for detection is in a predetermined detection state, the ROM of the sound emission control device and the display control device that displays and notifies the player Information on various performances and sounds stored in the program ROM, and display/notification to the player when a first input state in which the operation detection unit of the operating handle is in a predetermined detection state occurs. A first input state has occurred in which various effects information and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device, and the operation detection unit of the cross key has entered a predetermined detection state. Examples include information on setting screens for various effects stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device, which are displayed and notified to the player in the event of an event.

The "standby state" may be a state of waiting for execution of predetermined processing or input of predetermined information/signal. ), Bluetooth monitoring state waiting for information/signal input via Bluetooth ("Bluetooth" is a registered trademark), and information/signal via the operation handle. The state of waiting for the input of, the state of waiting for the input of information / signals via the production operation button, the state of waiting for the input of information / signals via the cross key, the state of waiting for the input of information / signals via the cross key, and the next fluctuation after the change display Examples include a non-fluctuation state until display is started.

The "effect element" may be anything as long as it constitutes an effect to be executed or an effect. Effects that are executed, effects that are executed during the support mode, effects that are executed during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, and the sounds and lights that make up these effects are listed. be done.

"Variable effect" may be performed using a plurality of effect elements that are executed during variable display, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the result of the first special drawing lottery is suggested. , a production that suggests the result of the second special lottery, a reach production, a one-shot announcement production, and the like.

The "effect execution means" may be a process of performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during variable display, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol A special figure variation effect setting process, which is a process for setting a variation effect to be executed during the variable display of , and a movable role for effect in the variable effect to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Examples include a production movable accessory drive process, which is a process to be controlled, a sound and light control device and a display control device that execute these processes, and a sub-control device that integrates these control devices.

The "predetermined lottery condition" in the present invention may be a condition for executing a predetermined lottery. , Conditions for executing the second special lottery, conditions for executing the general lottery, effects executed during the fluctuation of special symbols, and game states in which special electric accessories open and close multiple times (special electric opening and closing execution mode), conditions for executing the production determination lottery for determining the type of production to be executed during the mode, and the like.

"Input" may be any processing or operation performed on the gaming machine from the outside, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, information / signal input or input via NFC (Near Field Communication) , Input of information and signals via Bluetooth ("Bluetooth" is a registered trademark), input of information and signals via the operation handle, input of information and signals via the production operation buttons, and input of information and signals via the four-way controller Input of information/signal, input of information by communication, input of information by image display, input of information by voice, and the like can be mentioned.

The "detection target" is any object that can be detected, and as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a target that can be detected by NFC, a target that can be detected by Bluetooth, and an operation handle. A player's finger as an object that can be detected by being operated, a player's finger as an object that can be detected by operating the effect operation button, and a player's finger as an object that can be detected by operating the cross key , an object that can be detected by approaching the glass unit of the game machine, an object that can be detected by operating the operating handle, and the like. More specifically, smart phones, tablets, and the like as mobile terminals are exemplified.

The "predetermined information" may be information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of output information. For example, a connection request that is information corresponding to Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, Bluetooth password), Bluetooth connection information stored in the ROM of the Bluetooth module, game history information, and custom settings for effects A sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects information corresponding to information and information on the screen for displaying the information and the approach of the detection target to the glass unit of the game machine enters a predetermined detection state. Information corresponding to various effects information and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device, which are displayed and notified to the player when the first input state occurs. or stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device or the program ROM of the display control device that displays and notifies the player when the operation detection unit of the operation handle enters a predetermined detection state and the first input state occurs. Information corresponding to information of various effects and sound information provided, and display to the player when a first input state occurs in which the operation detection unit of the effect operation button is in a predetermined detection state.・Information selected and input by the player corresponding to the image display of information on the setting screen of various effects stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device to be notified and the program ROM of the display control device, and detection of operation of the cross key Various effects stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that are displayed and notified to the player when the first input state in which the unit is in a predetermined detection state occurs. information selected and input by the player corresponding to the image display of the information on the setting screen.

"Variation display" is based on the result of the winning lottery, if it is to display the variation for a predetermined period, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the display of the variation of the first special symbol, the second 2 Variation display of special symbols, display of variation of normal symbols, and the like.

The “detection unit” may be any unit that can detect a predetermined detection target, and can be, for example, an NFC antenna of an NFC module, a Bluetooth antenna of a Bluetooth module, a game An optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects when a detection target approaches the glass unit of the machine, a detection unit that detects that the operation handle has been operated, a detection switch that detects that the production operation button has been operated, etc. , a detection switch for detecting that the cross key has been operated, and the like.

The "specific game state" may be executed after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning lottery is a specific result, and is the gist of the present invention. If possible, for example, a game state in which special electric accessories open and close multiple times (special electric opening and closing execution mode), a high frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate at high frequency, and ordinary electric accessories operate at low frequency low-frequency support mode, etc.

The "predetermined distance" may be any distance that allows a predetermined detection unit to detect that a predetermined detection target is in proximity or contact. The distance at which the antenna for Bluetooth can detect other NFC modules, the distance at which the Bluetooth antenna of the Bluetooth module can detect other Bluetooth modules, the infrared sensor that detects when the detection target approaches the glass unit of the game machine, etc. The optical sensor can detect the proximity or contact of the detection target with the glass unit, and the detection switch that detects the operation of the production operation button can detect the proximity or contact of the detection target. The distance, the distance at which the detection switch that detects that the cross key is operated can detect that the detection target is approaching or touches, and the detection unit that detects that the operation handle is operated. Examples include a distance at which contact can be detected.

The ``detection means'' may be any device that enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state. If the purpose can be realized, for example, an NFC module that enters a predetermined detection state when a detection target (e.g., another NFC module) approaches or contacts an NFC antenna within a predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state. Or, in a predetermined standby state, a Bluetooth module that becomes a predetermined detection state when a detection target (for example, another Bluetooth module) approaches or contacts the Bluetooth antenna to a predetermined distance, or a game in a predetermined standby state A sensor unit that enters a predetermined detection state when the detection target approaches or contacts an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects that the detection target has approached the glass unit of the machine, or a predetermined standby state. The operation detection unit enters a predetermined detection state when the detection target approaches or touches the detection unit that detects that the operation handle is operated by a predetermined distance, and the detection target is produced in a predetermined standby state. An operation detection unit that enters a predetermined detection state when a detection switch that detects that an operation button has been operated is brought close to or in contact with a predetermined distance, and a cross key is operated as a detection target in a predetermined standby state. For example, an operation detection unit that comes into a predetermined detection state when it comes close to or abuts on a detection switch that detects that the operation is performed by a predetermined distance.

The "storage unit" may store a plurality of pieces of information related to the effect execution means, which is information to be output when a first input state occurs in which the detection means is in a predetermined detection state. If the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a plurality of information related to the effect execution means, which is information to be output when the first input state in which the NFC module is in a predetermined detection state occurs, is stored. A RAM provided in the NFC module as a storage unit that stores a plurality of information related to the effect execution means, which is information to be output when a first input state occurs in which the Bluetooth module is in a predetermined detection state Information output when a first input state occurs in which a storage unit or a sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects the approach of a detection target to the glass unit of the game machine enters a predetermined detection state. A storage unit that stores a plurality of information related to the effect execution means, and information that is output when a first input state occurs in which the operation detection unit of the effect operation button is in a predetermined detection state. A first input state in which the program ROM, character ROM, and video RAM of the display control device as a storage unit for storing a plurality of information related to the effect executing means and the operation detection unit of the cross key are in a predetermined detection state. The program ROM, character ROM, and video RAM of the display control device as a storage unit for storing a plurality of information related to the effect execution means, which is information to be output when it occurs, and the operation detection unit of the operation handle are predetermined detection Examples include a storage unit that stores a plurality of pieces of information related to the effect executing means, which is information to be output when the first input state has occurred. More specifically, the ROM included in the NFC module, the ROM included in the Bluetooth module, the ROM included in the voice emission control device, the program ROM included in the display control device, the character ROM, and the like.

"Information about settable information" is a predetermined input and output in the effect execution means that can be input and output when the second input state in which the input of predetermined information corresponding to the plurality of output information is detected occurs. Any information related to settable information may be used, and as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, information related to information of effects that can be input and can be custom set (custom setting information), or information that can be input. Information that can be set and input for the custom information of the selected effect and information about such information, setting confirmation information of the custom setting information of the effect that is information that can be output and information about those information, and output Examples of information that can be played include game history information when a game is played on a custom-configured gaming machine and information related thereto.

The “output” may be any processing or operation performed from the game machine to the outside, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, Bluetooth connection information stored in the ROM provided in the NFC module Output, Bluetooth connection information stored in the ROM of the Bluetooth module, game history information, information on custom settings for effects, and information on the screen for displaying them, and output to the glass unit of the game machine A sound emission control device that displays and notifies a player when a first input state occurs in which a sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects the approach of a detection target enters a predetermined detection state. When a first input state occurs in which the operation detection unit of the operation handle is in a predetermined detection state. Various performance information and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that are displayed and notified to the player, and the operation detection unit of the cross key is in a predetermined detection state. Information of various effect setting screens stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that is displayed and notified to the player when the first input state of A sound emission control device that outputs image display and sound information, and displays and notifies the player when a first input state occurs in which the operation detection unit of the effect operation button is in a predetermined detection state. Image display and sound information output of various effect setting screen information stored in the ROM and the program ROM of the display control device, and other information output by communication, image display information output, voice information and information that can be externally output by the game machine, such as game history information.

The “output means” may be any means or configuration that performs processing or operations performed by the game machine to the outside, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, it is stored in the ROM provided in the NFC module. Bluetooth connection information (e.g., Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, Bluetooth password) output processing and control processing, and Bluetooth connection information and game history information stored in the ROM of the Bluetooth module A sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects the approach of the detection target to the glass unit of the game machine, and the output control of the screen information for displaying information related to custom settings and effects When the first input state that is the detection state of occurs, the information of various effects and sounds stored in the ROM of the audio light emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that are displayed and notified to the player Information output control, ROM and display of the sound light emission control device that displays and notifies the player when the first input state in which the operation detection unit of the effect operation button is in a predetermined detection state occurs Image display control for image display of information on various effect setting screens stored in the program ROM of the control device, output control and display of sound information, and the operation detection unit of the operation handle are in a predetermined detection state. When the first input state occurs, output control of information on various effects and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device for displaying and notifying the player, , in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that displays and notifies the player when the first input state in which the operation detection unit of the cross key is in a predetermined detection state occurs Image display control for image display of information on setting screens for various effects stored, output control for sound information, and the like are included.

The "second input state" may be any state in which input of predetermined information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of output information is detected. Information corresponding to the completed Bluetooth communication status, Bluetooth connection information stored in the ROM of the Bluetooth module, game history information, information on custom settings for effects, and information on the screen for displaying them Display and notification to the player when an input is detected or when a sensor unit equipped with an optical sensor such as an infrared sensor that detects the proximity of a detection target to the glass unit of the game machine enters a predetermined detection state. A state in which information corresponding to various performance information and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device is detected, and the operation detection unit of the operation handle is in a predetermined detection state. The state of detecting information corresponding to various effects information and sound information stored in the ROM of the sound emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that is displayed and notified to the player when Information of various effects setting screens stored in the ROM of the audio light emission control device and the program ROM of the display control device that are displayed and notified to the player when the operation detection unit of is in a predetermined detection state Sound emission control that displays and notifies the player when information selected and input by the player is detected in response to the image display of , or when the operation detection unit of the effect operation button is in a predetermined detection state. Examples include a state in which information selected and input by the player in response to image display of information on setting screens for various effects stored in the ROM of the device or the program ROM of the display control device is detected.

The "settable information" may be any information that can be set in the effect execution means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, information of effects that can be custom set, custom information of selected effects , game history information in a custom-configured gaming machine, setting confirmation information of custom setting information for effects, volume setting information, light intensity setting information, and the like.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes an "internal lottery" as a "win or fail lottery", a "lottery process" as a "win or fail lottery means", and a "fluctuation display means" as a "fluctuation display means". a "display section", a "winning game spin variation" as a "specific variation display", a "specific game execution section" as a "specific game execution means", and an "output element" as a "production element". and may be provided with "effect execution processing" as "effect execution means".

Further, as a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes an "external input" as an "input", an "external input means" as an "input means", and a "waiting state" as a "waiting state". period", a "object" as a "detection target", a "detection execution unit" as a "detection unit", a "predetermined distance" as a "predetermined distance", and a "predetermined detection a "detection completion state" as a "state", a "detection unit" as a "detection means", a "detection completion state" as a "first input state", and a "predetermined storage unit" ``predetermined storage means'', ``plurality of related information'' as ``plurality of information'', ``output'' as ``output'', and ``output means'' as ``external "output means", "information input" as "predetermined information input", "corresponding information input state" as "second input state", and "settable information" as "settable information" information", and "information corresponding to configurable information" as "information on configurable information".

Equipped with ``suppression processing'' as ``suppression means'', ``input of specific element'' as ``specific input'', ``end processing'' as ``end input means'', and ``predetermined condition'' may be provided with a "predetermined condition", a "limiting process" as a "limiting means", and a "specific output information" as a "specific information".

A more specific configuration of the gaming machine will be described below as an eighth embodiment.

<<8-1>> Game machine structure:
FIG. 356 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine") of the eighth embodiment. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can communicate with a smart phone 200 as a mobile terminal. A smartphone 200 includes a touch panel 202 capable of displaying images. The pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 communicate via Bluetooth (“Bluetooth” is a registered trademark). Also, NFC (Near Field Communication) is used for pairing performed when the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 are first connected using Bluetooth. Bluetooth pairing using NFC, a Bluetooth communication method, and a communication disconnection method will be described later.
The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

As shown, the pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a special lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, or at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit as an external input means that allows the player to input externally to the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10, the custom setting of the effect, and the adjustment of the sound volume and the amount of light. When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

The production operation button 24 has an operation detection unit (not shown) as a detection unit that detects that the production operation button 24 has been operated. The operation detection unit includes a button body, which is a movable part that moves when the player operates the effect operation button 24, and a detection switch as a detection execution part that detects that the button body has been operated. A detected portion that can be detected by a detection switch is provided at a predetermined distance from the contact surface of the button body with which the player's fingers or the like come into contact. When the player's finger or the like, which is an object that can be detected, presses (moves) the button body by a predetermined amount, the part to be detected moves accordingly, and when the part to be detected contacts the detection switch, an operation detection unit is detected. is in the ON state, which is the detection completion state. The sound and light side MPU 92 detects the ON state of the operation detection unit and executes processing corresponding to the operation of the effect operation button 24 .

A cross key 27 is provided on the right side of the effect operation button 24 when the front door frame 14 is viewed from the front. The cross key 27 is used to set an effect mode that can be changed by the player, set the appearance frequency and degree of expectation of a predetermined effect, set the light intensity of a liquid crystal display as a display surface 41a described later, and set the sound output from the speaker 46. It is an operation unit as an external input means that allows the player to input externally for setting the volume and the like.

An NFC module 110 is provided above the cross key 27 when the front door frame 14 is viewed from the front. As described above, the NFC module 110 is used for pairing when the pachinko machine 10 connects with the smart phone 200 via Bluetooth. The details of the processing performed between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 during pairing will be described later.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate to shoot game balls. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, in conjunction with the operation, game balls are ejected from the game ball launching mechanism onto the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment). fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the drive of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping the game ball shooting by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Then, when the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 25 is less than a predetermined amount, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is less than a predetermined amount, the shot game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotational operation amount of the operating handle 25 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, that is, when the shooting intensity of the game ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the shot game ball flows down the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The shooting mode of the game ball in this case is also called "right hitting".

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the periphery of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. In other words, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can "hit to the right". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

357 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game, and the main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a sealing seal is attached to an openable and closable portion, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "OPEN" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls the speakers, various lamps, etc. provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back side of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 which is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. A tank rail 55 having a slope, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from a payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, such as a payout device 71 that performs

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88 . The power supply device 85 converts electric power supplied from an external commercial power source into electric power necessary for operating the pachinko machine 10 and supplies the electric power. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85 . By ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

358 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and a windmill 96 is arranged. These nails 42 and windmills 96 change the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the game area PA consists of a left side game area PAL in which game balls fired by "left hitting" can circulate, and a central lower game area PAC in which game balls circulating in the left side game area PAL can reach. , and a right game area PAR in which game balls shot by "right hitting" can circulate.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first special symbol starting port 33, a second special symbol starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, a normal symbol starting gate 35, a special electric prize winning device 57, and an out port 43. ing. In this embodiment, the first special figure start port 33 is provided in the central lower game area PAC where the game ball fired by "left hitting" can reach, and the game ball fired by "right hitting" reaches A normal figure starting gate 35, a second special figure starting port 34, a normal electric accessory 34b, and a special electric winning device 57 are provided in order from the upstream side of the possible right game area PAR. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 . At the central opening of the game board 30, a variable display unit 40 and a movable accessory 170 for performance are provided as a device for executing a performance to liven up the game. Each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described below.

The general winning hole 32 is a ball entry part having a ball entry hole into which game balls can enter, and five game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls when the game balls enter. In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 .

The first special figure start port 33 is a ball entrance portion having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, three game balls are released from the payout device 71 as prize balls. Along with the payout, the first special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is executed. A lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is executed, and as a result of the first special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, a special electric accessory (special electric accessory 57b) to be described later. is started. The special electric opening/closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening and closing process of the special electric accessory is started, the special electric opening and closing period is the period in which the opening and closing of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is the special After the opening and closing process of the electric accessory is completed, it is a waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed.

The special electric prize winning device 57 includes a large prize winning opening 57a into which a game ball can enter, and a special electric accessory 57b having a function of opening and closing the entrance of the special winning prize opening 57a.

The special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 57a. It is a movable accessory that is in an open state in which a ball can be entered into 57a.

In the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 57b is arranged at a position where a game ball can reach (contact) in the right game area PAR, and a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member and a lower side of the plate-like member Support portions are provided at both ends and support the plate-shaped member so as to be rotatable forward (front side). In the closed state, the special electric accessory 57b is housed so that the plate-like member is flush with the game board 30, and the game ball circulating from above the special electric accessory 57b is a special electric accessory. It is in a state where it can pass through the front side (front side) of the electric accessory 57b. On the other hand, in the open state, the plate-like member of the special electric accessory 57b is rotated forward (front side) around the support portion, and the special electric accessory 57b flows from above. A game ball enters a state in which it is possible to enter the big winning hole 57a.

The big winning hole 57a is a ball-entering hole into which a game ball can enter when the special electric accessory 57b is in an open state. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a ball.

The normal pattern start gate 35 is a through-hole type ball entry part having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball that enters the normal pattern start gate 35 remains in the game area PA and can be distributed. is. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, the main controller 60 executes the normal pattern lottery. As a result of the general drawing lottery, there are "normal drawing hit" that shifts the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter, and "normal drawing off" that does not shift the normal electric accessory 34b to the state where it can enter. include. As a result of the general pattern lottery, when the general pattern lottery is won, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode including the movable control processing for shifting the normal electric accessory 34b to the open state is executed. The general electric switching execution mode is composed of a general electric opening period, a general electric switching processing period, and a general electric ending period. The general electric opening period is a pre-start non-driving period that is an operation standby period until the opening and closing processing of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is started, and the general electric opening and closing period is the opening and closing processing of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. It is a period to be executed, and the normal electric ending period is an operation standby period after the opening and closing process of the normal electric accessory 34b is completed until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. In addition, when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened multiple times during the normal open/close period, a predetermined interval period during which the normal electric accessory 34b maintains the closed state is included between the plurality of open periods. Also, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the payout of prize balls is not executed.

A second special figure start port 34 having a normal electric accessory 34b is arranged downstream of the normal figure start gate 35, and a game ball entering the normal figure start gate 35 is provided with the normal electric accessory 34b. It is guided to the second special figure starting port 34.

The ordinary electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second special figure start port 34, and when the above-described ordinary electric open/close execution mode is started, the game ball becomes an open state in which the ball can enter the second special figure starting port 34.

The second special figure start port 34 is a ball entry portion having a ball entry port into which a game ball can be entered, and is provided in the right side game area PAR in this embodiment. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71, and the second special figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is performed. executed. In this embodiment, as a result of the second special figure lottery, "special figure jackpot" and "special figure loss" are set as setting information. A lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is executed, and as a result of the second special figure lottery, when the special figure jackpot is won, a special electric accessory (special electric accessory 57b) to be described later. to the open state. In this embodiment, the second special figure starting port 34 is provided in the right side game area PAR, but the position of the second special figure starting port 34 is not limited to this, and the gist of the present invention is not limited to this. Other locations may be provided if feasible. For example, the second special figure starting port 34 may be provided in the left side game area PAL.

The out port 43 is provided at the lowest part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. - 特許庁

Above the first special figure starting port 33, a stage 36x is provided. The stage 36x is configured to distribute more game balls to the right route and the left route than to the central route when distributing the game balls that have arrived. That is, the total number of game balls distributed to the right route and the game balls distributed to the left route is larger than the number of game balls distributed to the central route. In this embodiment, the first special figure starting port 33 is provided below the stage 36x, and the game balls distributed to the central route are likely to enter the first special figure starting port 33. Therefore, the central route is more valuable to the player than the right and left routes. In addition, in this embodiment, the stage 36x is made of resin.

In addition, "entering ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or predetermined area. Not only the mode, but also a mode in which the game ball remains in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area and continues to flow (flow down). In addition, the game balls entering the general winning opening 32, the first special figure start opening 33, the second special figure starting opening 34 and the big winning opening 57a may be expressed as "winning".

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display 45 . The main display 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 and a round indicator 39 .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first special symbol indicator 37a, a second special symbol indicator 37b, a first special figure reservation indicator 37c, and a second special figure reservation indicator 37d.

The first special symbol display 37a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. The first special symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the first special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first special symbol starting port 33 as a trigger. When the first special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, the first special symbol display device 37a displays corresponding to the lottery result of the first special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. After that, the first special symbol display 37a performs stop display of the first special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the first special symbol start port 33, the 7 segment display device constituting the first special symbol display device 37a flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), then the first special symbol lottery lights up (stopped display) in a predetermined mode corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the first special symbol display 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also called a first special symbol game cycle. That is, the first special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the first special figure lottery for each first special figure game round. In addition, the time required for one first special game round is also called the first special game time. The first special symbol game time is the first special symbol variation, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a to the stop display of the result of the first special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the first special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the first special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the first special figure stop time is constant (1.0 seconds). Therefore, by determining the first special figure fluctuation time, the first special figure game time is uniquely determined.

The second special symbol display 37b is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol means a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second special symbol starting port 34 as a trigger. When the second special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34, the second special symbol display device 37b displays a display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special figure lottery. As a display mode until performing, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. After that, the second special symbol display 37b performs the stop display of the second special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the second special symbol variation time.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol display 37b is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the 7 segment display device that constitutes the second special symbol display device 37b flashes in a predetermined manner (after fluctuating display), The second special figure lottery Lights up (stops display) in a predetermined manner corresponding to the result of the lottery. However, the second special symbol display 37b is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

In addition, after the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b is started, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, and the time until the stop display ends is also called a second special symbol game cycle. That is, the second special figure game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the second special figure lottery for each second special figure game. In addition, the time required for one second special game time is also called the second special game time. The second special symbol game time is the second special symbol variation that is the time from the start of the second special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 37b to the stop display of the result of the second special symbol lottery. It is composed of time and the second special figure stop time, which is the time during which the result of the second special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special figure stop time is constant. Therefore, by determining the second special figure fluctuation time, the second special figure game time is uniquely determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the game ball is the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, it has a function to suspend the execution of the first special figure lottery or the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball (also called special figure reservation function), A first special figure reservation display 37c that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special figure lottery, and a second special figure reservation display that displays information corresponding to the number of reservations of the reserved second special figure lottery. 37d.

The first special figure reservation display 37c is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved first special figure lottery numbers (information on the number of gaming balls entering the first special figure start port 33). be. In this embodiment, the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is suspended up to four (4 times). In this embodiment, the first special figure reservation indicator 37c is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 1 lottery lights up.

The second special figure reservation display 37d is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved second special figure lotteries. In this embodiment, the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is suspended up to four (4 times). In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation indicator 37d is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of reservations in the FIG. 2 lottery lights up.

Further, in the present embodiment, when both the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery are reserved, the second special figure lottery is preferentially executed, and the second special figure lottery is all reserved. After it is gone, it is configured to execute the first special figure lottery (so-called special 2 priority machine). Specifically, for example, when the first special lottery is held two (twice) and the second special lottery is held three (three times), the second special lottery After being executed three times and no longer held, the first special figure lottery will be executed twice. However, if the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34 before the last second special figure lottery that has been withheld ends and the second special figure lottery is suspended again, it will be suspended. The first special figure lottery will not be executed until the second special figure lottery is completed.

The normal pattern unit 38 includes a normal pattern display 38a and a normal pattern holding display 38b.

The normal symbol display 38a is a display unit that performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols. The normal symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed and stopped when a normal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery, is executed with the entry of a game ball into the normal figure start gate 35 as a trigger. When the normal pattern lottery is executed with the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, the normal pattern display 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. , Performs variable display of normal symbols. After that, the normal symbol display device 38a performs a normal symbol stop display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. In the following description, the time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on the normal symbol display 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 38a is composed of a 7-segment display in which 7 segment light-emitting portions are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the 7-segment display device constituting the normal pattern display device 38a blinks in a predetermined manner (after the variable display), and then corresponds to the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. Lights up in a predetermined manner (stops display). However, the normal symbol display 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have another configuration.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display until the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal pattern game cycle. That is, the normal game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the normal game lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the normal game start gate 35 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one normal-pattern lottery for each normal-pattern game round. In addition, the time required for one normal game time is also called normal game time. The normal pattern game time is the normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display on the normal pattern display 38a until the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is stopped. It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the displayed time. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal map stop time is constant (0.1 seconds). Therefore, the normal pattern game time is uniquely determined by the normal pattern fluctuation time being determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening and closing execution mode or during the variable display of the normal pattern, the general pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball It has a function to suspend execution (also called a normal pattern reservation function), and has the above-described normal pattern reservation display 38b that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved general pattern lottery reservations.

The normal pattern reservation display 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal pattern lottery numbers. In this embodiment, the normal pattern lottery based on the entry ball of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 pieces (4 times). In addition, in this embodiment, the general pattern reservation indicator 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the LED lamps of the number corresponding to the number of reservations of the general pattern lottery are lit.

The round display device 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. A round game means that a predetermined time (maximum open time) has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls entered) of game balls enter the big winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is met. The number of round games differs according to the type per special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The round display 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening/closing period in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening/closing period. In this embodiment, the round indicator 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment indicators in which 7 segment light-emitting units are arranged in a figure-of-eight shape. However, the round indicator 39 is not limited to two 7-segment indicators, and may have other configurations.

It should be noted that each display unit constituting the main display unit 45 described above is not limited to being configured by a segment display unit or a light-emitting display unit using an LED lamp. It may consist of various display devices, such as a matrix display, capable of showing the draw process and the draw results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41 as external output means. The pattern display device 41 performs image display as an external output. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display) is employed as the pattern display device 41 . The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by a display control device 100 which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display), and various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT may be employed.

When the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b fluctuates and stops, the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbols accordingly. and a display unit for performing stop display. In addition, the symbol display device 41 is a display unit that displays not only variable display and stop display of decorative symbols, but also various effects such as a notice effect as a variable effect and a display of effects during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Above the pattern display device 41, a movable accessory 170 for presentation is provided.

The performance movable accessory 170 is a possible accessory arranged in front of (forward) the upper side of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. , which means a front view of the game board 30), five petal portions 172 are arranged around the rotary shaft portion 171. As shown in FIG. Each petal portion 172 is a plate-like transparent or translucent resin member, and has a petal shape when viewed from the front. The rotating shaft portion 171 is connected to a rod-shaped member extending in the front-rear direction of the game board 30 (the direction perpendicular to the surface of the game board 30), and is configured to be rotatable around the rod-shaped member. . Each petal portion 172 connected to the rotating shaft portion 171 is configured to be rotatable as the rotating shaft portion 171 rotates. Furthermore, the performance movable accessory 170 is configured to be movable downward from the illustrated origin position.

FIG. 359 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the decorative pattern and the pattern display device 41 which are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. FIG. 359(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 359(A), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numbers 1 to 8 as decorative patterns. As the decorative patterns to be variably displayed, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each pattern representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be employed.

FIG. 359B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a.

Three decorative pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the decorative pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 359(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1 for each decorative design row.

In this embodiment, the game ball enters the first special symbol starting port 33 or the second special symbol starting port 34, and the first special symbol or second When the variable display of the two special symbols is started, the variable display in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each decorative design to be scrolled is switched from variable display to standby display in the order of decorative design row Z1, decorative design row Z3, and decorative design row Z2. After that, in synchronization with the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b, one for each decorative symbol row Z1 to Z3. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed. When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery by the main control device 60 is a special big hit, when the variable display of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern row is finished and the display is stopped. Then, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, a combination of the same decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The manner of variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative design row is not limited to the above-described manner, but includes the number of decorative design rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of scrolling of decorative designs in each decorative design row, and the Various modes can be adopted as modes of variable display of decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be explained. Reach means the possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to winning is formed on the activated line L1 in some of the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It means a display state in which a certain combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and in this state, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the remaining decorative pattern rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the win refers to the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1, and in the state in which the reach line is formed, the decorative patterns are scrolled (variably displayed) in the decorative pattern row Z2. ) state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern forming the reach line is stop-displayed in the decorative pattern row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the decorative patterns are displayed in the remaining decorative pattern row in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform the ready-to-win effect. Alternatively, a combination of decorative patterns formed with reach lines is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to produce a reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 359(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first special figure reservation display area Ds1 and a second special figure reservation display area Ds2.

In the first special figure reservation display area Ds1, the number of the first special figure lotteries reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 (number of reserved first special figure lotteries) is displayed. be done. The pending first special drawing lottery is the first special drawing drawing that has not been executed, and the first special drawing that has not started the variable display of the first special drawing for informing the result of the drawing of the first special drawing drawing. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of first special figure lotteries that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved first special figure lotteries.

In the second special figure reservation display area Ds2, the number of second special figure lotteries (the number of reserved second special figure lotteries) that are reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is displayed. be done. The second special lottery pending is the second special lottery that has not been executed, and the second special lottery that has not started the variable display of the second special symbol for informing the lottery result of the second special lottery. Say the drawing lottery. In this embodiment, the number of second special figure lotteries that can be reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 can display the reservation corresponding to the four reserved second special figure lotteries.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 359(B), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 has a blinking display synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 37a 1st special figure synchronous display part Sync1 that performs lighting display, second special figure synchronization that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 37b and a display unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed on the first special symbol display device 37a, the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync1 blinks and displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the special figure synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol display device 37b, the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync2 blinks and the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display device 37b. When displaying, the special figure synchronous display unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

In addition, an image for adjusting volume and light intensity (hereinafter also referred to as volume and light intensity adjustment image SLA) can be displayed on the display surface 41a.

FIG. 360 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a volume/light amount adjustment image. As described above, the output from the speaker 46 in the performance performed by the pachinko machine 10 (variation performance, performance performed in the special electric opening and closing execution mode in which the round game is performed, and performance performed in the general electric opening and closing execution mode) A volume/light amount adjustment image SLA can be displayed on the display surface 41a so that the volume (volume) of the sound to be played and the amount of light emitted (output) from the various lamps 47 can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 360(a), the volume/light amount adjustment image SLA includes a volume/light amount adjustment image ST and a light amount adjustment image LT. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the volume value as the output value can be adjusted in five levels from level 1 to level 5. FIG. The value of the amount of light as an output value can also be adjusted in five steps from level 1 to level 5. FIG. When the player presses the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 once in a game standby state (a state in which no game is played), a volume light amount adjustment image SLA (including a volume adjustment image ST and a light amount adjustment image LT) is displayed. is displayed on the display surface 41a.

In the volume adjustment image ST, a five-level scale is displayed to indicate the volume value to be set. The number of scales painted in black indicates the currently set volume value. By operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 27 while the volume light amount adjustment image SLA is being displayed, the player can select and input one value from the values of level 1 to level 5 of the volume. . By operating the left button of the cross key 27, the player can lower the volume level with level 1 as the lower limit. Also, the player can raise the volume level up to level 5 by operating the right button of the cross key 27 . When the input of one volume level value determined by the player is completed, the value is stored in the storage area in the sound and light side MPU 92, and the volume level corresponding to the input value is displayed in the volume adjustment image. ST is displayed on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period.

On the other hand, the light amount adjustment image LT is displayed with a five-level scale to indicate the value of the light amount to be set. The number of scales painted in black indicates the value of the currently set amount of light. By operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 27 while the volume light amount adjustment image SLA is being displayed, the player can select and input one value from the light amount level 1 to level 5 values. . By operating the lower button of the cross key 27, the player can lower the light amount level with level 1 as the lower limit. Also, the player can raise the light amount level up to level 5 by operating the up button of the cross key 27 . Then, when the player completes inputting one light amount level value determined by the player, the value is stored in the storage area in the sound and light side MPU 92, and the light amount level corresponding to the input value is displayed in the light amount adjustment image. LT is displayed on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 360(b), during the period during which the game round is being executed (the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the player changes the level value of the sound volume and the amount of light. can be entered. When the player presses the performance operation button 24 or the cross key 27 once during the game cycle, a volume light amount adjustment image SLA (including the volume adjustment image ST and the light amount adjustment image LT) as an input content display image is displayed. is displayed in the lower left area of the display surface 41a. Subsequent operations are the same as those described above, and will be omitted. Further, when the value of the sound volume and the light intensity level is input by the player during the period in which the game round is being executed, the sound volume adjustment image ST and the light intensity adjustment image LT corresponding to the input values are displayed on the display surface 41a. is displayed for a predetermined period. Further, when the player inputs the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light while the game is being played, the pachinko machine 10 outputs the sound and the light at the input level immediately after the input. do.

It should be noted that the output of the sound and light corresponding to the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light input by the player is maintained as long as the game continues. Therefore, the output of sound and light corresponding to the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light input (set) by the player during the execution of the game cycle is, for example, the special electric switching execution mode and the ordinary electric switching execution mode executed after that. is also maintained in

Further, on the display surface 41a, an option image is displayed that enables the player to select and perform custom setting of effects and browsing of game history.

FIG. 361 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an option image. When the player presses the production operation button 24 once and performs an input operation on the production operation button 24 in the waiting state of the game (the non-fluctuation state as the waiting period in which no game is played), button operation is performed. The detection switch is turned on, and an option image OPG displaying a plurality of related information is displayed on the display surface 41a. As the option image OPG, image data stored in advance in the storage unit of the display control device 100 is output and displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 361(a), the option image OPG includes a custom setting selection image CTG that allows the player to select a custom setting of effects, a game history selection image HSG for displaying the game history, A language setting selection image LNG is displayed for setting the language for voice and character display in the production.

When the player uses the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 to select one of the images for selection corresponding to the plurality of images output and displayed on the display surface 41a and inputs information, settings for the selected image are performed. An image is displayed. Specifically, when the player selects and inputs the custom setting selection image CTG to enter the corresponding information input state, the custom setting selection state is entered, and the sub control device (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) is activated. An input is detected, and an effect custom setting image PSG as shown in FIG. 361(b) is output and displayed on the display surface 41a. The effect custom setting image PSG displays, as settable information, an image for enabling setting of appearance frequency and degree of expectation of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, the effect custom setting image PSG includes a one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1, which is an image that enables setting of the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect, and one of effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10. An image CT2 for setting the expectation level of the school of fish performance, which is one of the performances that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the expectation level of the bubble performance, which is one of the performances that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10. A setting image CT3 is displayed.

The image CT1 for setting the frequency of one-shot announcement effect can set the appearance frequency of the one-shot announcement effect as an input of information corresponding to information that can be set by the player's operation input with the cross key 27 . The appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect will be described later. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves corresponding to the operation input is displayed, and it is possible to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect.

The fish school effect expectation level setting image CT2 can be used to set the fish school effect expectation level as input of information corresponding to information that can be set by the player's operation input with the cross key 27 . The degree of expectation for the effect of the school of fish will be described later. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves corresponding to the operation input is displayed, and it is possible to set the degree of expectation of the fish school presentation.

The bubble effect expectation level setting image CT3 allows the player to set the expectation level of the bubble effect by operating the cross key 27 and inputting the image CT3. The degree of expectation for the bubble effect will be described later. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves corresponding to the operation input is displayed, and it is possible to set the expectation level of the bubble effect.

Further, in a state where the option image OPG is displayed on the display surface 41a, when the player operates the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 to select and input the game history selection image HSG, the game history information is displayed. is displayed.

FIG. 362 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game history information displayed on the display surface 41a. The pachinko machine 10 stores, in a predetermined storage section, information about the variation display in the game rounds in which the special figure jackpot was won in the game rounds executed in the past, and displays the game history selection image HSG based on the information. In the game history selection image HSG, the game history information includes the number of times the player has won a certain number of variable jackpots in a series of games, the number of times of normal jackpots, the number of prize balls won, and the number of times the player has won a predetermined number of jackpots in the past. It outputs and displays the type of the production performed and the type of jackpot in each jackpot game round. Since the game history information of games executed with custom settings is output as the game history information, the game history information is recognized as information corresponding to the information that can be custom set, and the effects of the custom settings are also output. Players can have fun.

In this manner, various images can be displayed on the display surface 41a. These images displayed on the display surface 41a are information stored in the program ROM 103, the character ROM 106, and the video RAM 107 as predetermined storage means of the sub-controller, and are read out by the display-side MPU 102 to be displayed on the display surface 41a. Output (image display).

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes a main display area MA, a first special figure reservation display area Ds1, a second special figure reservation display area Ds2, and a first special figure synchronization display section Sync1. , And, although the second special figure synchronous display part Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

<<8-2>> Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 363 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

Note that the main controller 60 is defined as a "main controller", and the sound emission controller 90 and the display controller 100 are collectively defined as a "sub controller". That is, the pachinko machine 10 is controlled by a main control device and a sub control device.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port.

An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power.

Further, the input side of the main control board 61 is connected to the detection sensors provided for each of the above-described various entrances. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance based on the signals from these detection sensors. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes the first special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33, and the second special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 34. Run a special draw.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a main display 45, a special electric accessory drive section 57c that opens and closes the special electric accessory 57b, and a normal electric accessory drive section 34c that opens and closes the normal electric accessory 34b. is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, when the first special figure lottery is executed, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first special symbol display device 37a in the main display device 45, and when the second special figure lottery is executed , Executes the display control of the second special symbol display 37b in the main display 45, and when performing the normal drawing lottery, executes the display control of the normal symbol display 38a in the main display 45, special electric opening and closing execution When the mode is executed, the display control of the round indicator 39 in the main indicator 45 is executed. Furthermore, in the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the special electric auditors drive unit 57c so that the special electric auditors 57b are opened and closed, and in the general electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal electric auditors 34b The drive control of the normal electric accessary product drive unit 34c is performed so that the is opened and closed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61 . The main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the number of prize balls set for each ball entrance based on the ball entry determination result to the payout controller 70 . When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47, which are light emitting units such as LEDs, arranged on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and is an audio output unit. It controls the drive of the speaker 46 and controls the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like. Furthermore, the sound emission control device 90 is provided with a cross key 27, and as described above, the setting of the effect mode that the player can change, the setting of the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect, and the liquid crystal as the display surface 41a. It is used when the player makes various settings such as setting the amount of light on the display and setting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 46 .

Further, the audio emission control device 90 is provided with an NFC module 110 and a Bluetooth module 111 (hereinafter also referred to as a BT module 111). The state of the NFC module 110 is constantly monitored by the sound and light side MPU 92 . The NFC module 110 performs pairing when the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 are connected via Bluetooth under the control of the sound and light side MPU 92 when the smartphone 200 equipped with the NFC module approaches the NFC detectable distance as a predetermined distance. necessary connection information for NFC by radio waves of a predetermined frequency for NFC.
In the present embodiment, the connection information transmitted by radio waves of a predetermined frequency for NFC is the Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, and Bluetooth password in the Bluetooth module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 . The Bluetooth module 111 is used to communicate with the smart phone 200 using Bluetooth. Processing in the NFC module 110 and the Bluetooth module 111 will be described later.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the variation time of the decorative patterns in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative patterns that are finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, the content of ready-to-win presentation, and the content of presentation to be executed while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in the present embodiment, the time during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game cycle, is uniquely determined by determining the variation time of the decorative symbols. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 364 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in the RAM 64. FIG. As shown in FIG. 364, the RAM 64 is provided with various counters used for internal lottery by the MPU 62 . Specifically, in this embodiment, the RAM 64 includes a special figure validity determination counter Cs1, a special figure type determination counter Cs2, a special figure reach determination counter Cs3, a special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4, and a general figure validity determination counter Cs1. A decision counter Cn1, a normal figure type decision counter Cn2, and a random number initial value counter Cini are provided. The special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used when determining the lottery result of the special figure lottery. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used for the special figure reach determination to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 are varied. Also, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b. In addition, the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 are used for the general pattern lottery. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial value as the setting information when the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2, and Cini is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

Moreover, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure reservation area 64b, a special figure determination area 64c, a general figure reservation area 64d, and a general figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entrance ball It is stored in time series in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, and when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the special figure success judgment counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry ball, the special figure Each value of the figure type determination counter Cs2 and the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in time series in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 at the timing of the entry are stored in time series in the normal pattern reservation area 64d. be.

Next, the details of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is used to determine whether or not to win the special figure per (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure success/failure determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. Special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1. Incidentally, the random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 65535).

The value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entering ball is a special figure. It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the reservation area 64b. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

Each time a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33, up to four values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 are stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b. Similarly, the value of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and is moved to the special figure determination area 64c in the order in which it was stored. Then, the value of the special figure judgment counter Cs1 moved to the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure judgment table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the special figure is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of special symbol. The special figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of this special symbol, is part of the above-described special figure lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is updated periodically, and when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the value of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry is in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b remembered.

The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the above-described special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 in the order in which they are stored.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure validity determination using the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64e. Then, from among a plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure propriety determination is selected, and a special figure determination area 64e The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of special symbol. And MPU62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator which the special design display part 38a stops and displays based on the classification of the determined special design.

Next, the details of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 will be described. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is used when determining whether or not the reach occurs when the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is not per special figure. The special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is periodically updated, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special It is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b along with the values of the figure suitability determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 at the timing of the entry is the above-mentioned special figure success determination counter Cs1 and special figure type determination It is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b together with the value of the counter Cs2.

The value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33. Similarly, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 is stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b up to four each time the game ball enters the second special figure start port 34. In this embodiment, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the second special figure reservation area Rb is preferentially over the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra , and are moved to the special figure determination area 64c together with the values of the special figure propriety determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 described above in order of being stored.

MPU62, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit in the special figure propriety determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c is stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM63 It is compared with the special figure reach determination table, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. In addition, when the result of the special figure propriety determination in the special figure lottery is the special figure jackpot, the MPU 62 determines that reach occurs regardless of the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 38a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is acquired immediately before the start of the special symbol variation display. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure variation time is determined.

Next, the details of the general/universal pattern right/wrong determination counter Cn1 will be described. The general pattern success/failure determination counter Cn1 is used to determine whether or not to be elected per general pattern. The general pattern success determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per this general pattern, is part of the general pattern lottery described above. The normal figure correctness determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, when the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1.

The normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d at the timing of the passage.

Each time a game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, up to four values of the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal pattern holding area 64d, and are moved to the normal pattern determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 moved to the general pattern determination area 64e is collated with the general pattern correctness determination table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the general pattern is won. is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the normal pattern type. The normal pattern type determination, which is the determination of the type of normal pattern, is part of the normal pattern lottery described above. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, the updated value is the timing of the entry, and the above-mentioned general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. It is stored in the general pattern holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 is stored in the normal pattern reservation area 64d up to 4 each time a game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, and the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 described above is stored in the order of storage. It moves to the normal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the normal pattern validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal pattern determination area 64e to perform the normal pattern validity determination. Then, from among a plurality of general pattern type determination tables stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, one general pattern type determination table corresponding to the result of the general pattern propriety determination is selected, and a general pattern determination area 64e is selected. The value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general pattern type determination table, and the normal pattern type is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display which is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, the special figure propriety determination table will be described.

FIG. 365 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values within the range from 0 to 65535 in the special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1 be done. Then, according to the acquired value of the special figure success determination counter Cs1 and the special figure success determination table, the special figure success determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is performed. done.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low probability mode with a low probability of winning the special figure jackpot and a probability of winning the special figure jackpot higher than the low probability mode, as a lottery mode for special figure win/loss determination (special figure lottery). It is configured to be able to execute a high probability mode and a special figure lottery table for the low probability mode used in the special figure lottery in the low probability mode, and a special figure lottery in the high probability mode. It is equipped with a special figure propriety determination table for high probability mode. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, different special figure propriety determination tables are provided for the first special figure lottery and the second special figure lottery. That is, in this embodiment, the following four types of special figure propriety determination tables are provided as the special figure propriety determination tables used in the special figure lottery.
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for low probability mode)
・ 1st special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)
・ 2nd special figure success/failure determination table (for high probability mode)

As shown in FIG. 365(A), the first special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 205 values from 0 to 204 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/319.7 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 365(B), the second special figure validity determination table (for low probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the low probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 205 values from 0 to 204 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and the other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success/failure determination) in the low probability mode is about 1/319.7 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 365 (C), the first special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the first special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 1729 values from 0 to 1728 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, as a result of the first special figure lottery (first special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode, the special figure jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/37.9.

As shown in FIG. 365 (D), the second special figure validity determination table (for high probability mode) used in the second special figure lottery in the high probability mode has 0 to 65535 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Of the 65536 values up to, 1729 values from 0 to 1728 are set as values that will win the special figure jackpot, and other values are set as values that will be out of the special figure. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure lottery (second special figure success/failure determination) in the high probability mode is about 1/37.9 probability of winning the special figure jackpot.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

Figure 366 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, one value is acquired from the values in the range from 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2 be done. Then, special figure type determination for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol) is performed based on the result of the above-described special figure propriety determination and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment comprises a first special figure type determination table used in the first special figure lottery and a second special figure type determination table used in the second special figure lottery.

As shown in FIG. 366 (A), according to the first special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 0 to 19, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the result of the special hit/fail judgment is a special jackpot winning, When the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 20 to 39, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined as a special symbol B (8R probability variation big hit), and the special symbol right or wrong If the result of the determination is a special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 40 to 59, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is a special symbol C ( 4R probability variation big hit), the result of the special figure winning judgment is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 60 to 99, the type of special symbol (Type of stop symbol) is determined to be special symbol D (8R normal jackpot). On the other hand, if the result of the special figure propriety determination is the special figure out, regardless of the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the type of the special symbol (type of the stop symbol) is the special symbol Z (out) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 366 (B), according to the second special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 0 to 51, the type of special design (type of stop design) is determined to be a special design A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the result of the special hit/fail judgment is a special jackpot winning, When the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 52 to 55, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is determined as a special symbol B (8R probability variation big hit), and the special figure right or wrong If the result of the determination is a special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value from 56 to 59, the special symbol type (stopped symbol type) is a special symbol C ( 4R probability variation big hit), the result of the special figure winning judgment is the special figure jackpot winning, and the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2 is a value of 60 to 99, the type of special symbol (Type of stop symbol) is determined to be special symbol D (8R normal jackpot). On the other hand, if the result of the special figure propriety determination is the special figure out, regardless of the value of the acquired special figure type determination counter Cs2, the type of the special symbol (type of the stop symbol) is the special symbol Z (out) is determined.

Of the special design types (types of stop design), special design A (16R probability variation jackpot), special design B (8R probability variation jackpot), special design C (4R probability variation jackpot) and special design D (8R normal jackpot), All of them are common in that they trigger the execution of the special electric switching execution mode, but differ in the type of the special electric switching scenario selected when the special electric switching execution mode is executed.

The special electric opening/closing scenario is a control program that stores the mode of control of the special electric accessory 57b in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. will be different.

Next, the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table will be described.

FIG. 367 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table. The special electric opening/closing pattern selection table is a table for selecting a special electric opening/closing pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol and a special electric opening/closing scenario for realizing the special electric opening/closing pattern when winning the special electric jackpot. The special electric opening/closing pattern is an operation pattern for causing the special electric accessory 57b to perform a series of operations, specifically a series of opening/closing operations. The special electric accessory 57b is in the initial closed state, which is the initial position during non-driving, when the series of opening/closing operations is not executed, and is in the initial closed state. and the open state, which is the most driven maximum displacement position. A series of opening and closing operations are configured to perform a plurality of closing operations for shifting the special electric accessory 57b to the closed state when driving. In this embodiment, the closed state when driving when the special electric accessory 57b is closed by the closing operation included in the series of opening and closing operations is the same as the initial closed state. It does not have to be exactly the same as the closed state. That is, the special electric accessory 57b may not be completely returned to the initial closed state due to the closing operation. In other words, the closing operation may be an operation in which the special electric accessory 57b approaches the initial closed state side, and the game ball enters the big winning opening 57a in both the initial closed state and the driving closed state. is not possible. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, when the initial closed state and the driven closed state are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 367, in the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table, special electric opening/closing patterns corresponding to the types of special symbols (types of stop symbols) are set respectively. A certain special electric switching scenario is set for each special electric switching pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, a special electric opening/closing pattern A (special electric opening/closing scenario A) is set corresponding to the special symbol A, and a special electric opening/closing pattern B (special electric opening/closing scenario B) is set corresponding to the special symbol B. is set, a special electric opening and closing pattern C (special electric opening and closing scenario C) is set corresponding to the special pattern C, and a special electric opening and closing pattern D (special electric opening and closing scenario D) is set corresponding to the special design D there is That is, if the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol A, the special electric opening and closing pattern A (special electric opening and closing scenario A) when executing the special electric opening and closing execution mode is selected, and the special pattern jackpot is won in the special pattern suitability determination, and the result of the special pattern type determination is the special pattern B, when the special pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special pattern opening and closing pattern B (special pattern opening and closing scenario B) is selected, the special pattern jackpot is won in the special pattern suitability determination, and the result of the special pattern type determination is the special pattern C, when the special pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, the special pattern opening and closing pattern C (special pattern When the opening/closing scenario C) is selected, the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure suitability determination, and the result of the special figure type determination is the special symbol D, the special opening/closing pattern D is executed when the special opening/closing execution mode is executed. (Special electric switching scenario D) is selected.

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a special electric opening period in which the special electric accessory 57b is not driven from the initial closed state after the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied and before the series of opening/closing operations (special electric opening/closing period) starts. . When the special opening period of 3.0 seconds ends, the special opening/closing period begins. In the special electric opening/closing period, the round game opened by the special electric accessory 57b is executed 16 times (16 rounds). In addition, the number of times the special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one time, and one round game is when the special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, or the maximum The game ends when any of the conditions that 10 game balls, which are the number of entering balls, enter the big winning opening 57a, is satisfied. Further, the interval period (special electric interval period) between round games is set to 2.0 seconds. That is, in the present embodiment, the series of opening and closing operations includes a special electric access period during which the special electric accessory 57b waits in the closed state during driving. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. Regarding the game state after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode described later becomes the high frequency support mode. And, in this embodiment, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the next special figure jackpot is won in the special figure lottery.

The special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B and the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario C differ in the number of executions of the round game compared to the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A described above. (8R in the special electric switching scenario B and 4R in the special electric switching scenario C), and other control aspects are the same. That is, in the present embodiment, the periods during which a series of opening and closing operations are performed are the special electric switching periods of 4R and 8R, which are short operation periods, and the special electric switching periods of 16R, which are long operating periods longer than the special electric switching periods of 4R and 8R. a period of time;

When the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario D is started, first, a special electric opening period of 3.0 seconds is started, and then the special electric electric switching period is started. During the special electric opening/closing period, the round game in which the special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed 8 times (8 rounds). In addition, the number of times the special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one time, and one round game is when the special electric accessory 57b is opened for 29.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time, or the maximum The game ends when any of the conditions that 10 game balls, which are the number of entering balls, enter the big winning opening 57a, is satisfied. Also, the special electric interval period, which is a predetermined interval period between round games, is set to 2.0 seconds. When the special electric opening/closing period ends, a special electric ending period of 3.0 seconds begins. Regarding the game state after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario D ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode described later becomes the high frequency support mode. And, in this embodiment, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are when the special figure jackpot is won in the special figure lottery, or 100 special figure fluctuations are completed without winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery. end if

Next, the normal figure right/wrong determination table will be described.

FIG. 368 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure right/wrong determination table.

As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 65535 in the normal pattern correctness determination counter Cn1. Then, according to the obtained value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern correctness determination table, the general pattern correctness determination, which is a determination of whether or not to be elected per general pattern, is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a low frequency support mode (low support state) as a support mode that defines the winning probability per normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the operation mode of the normal electric role. , Under the same conditions, it is configured to be able to execute a high-frequency support mode (high-support state) in which normal electric accessories operate more frequently than in low-frequency support mode, and is used in the general drawing lottery in low-frequency support mode. It has a general pattern suitability determination table for the low frequency support mode and a general pattern suitability determination table for the high frequency support mode used in the general pattern lottery in the high frequency support mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the following two types of general pattern correctness determination tables are provided as the general pattern correctness determination table used in the general pattern lottery.
・Normal map right/wrong judgment table (for low-frequency support mode)
・General map right/wrong judgment table (for high-frequency support mode)

As shown in FIG. 368 (A), in the general figure right or wrong determination table (for low frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the low frequency support mode, 0 to 65535 of the general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the individual values, three values of 0 to 2 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the low-frequency support mode is the winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/21845.66.

The "universal map hit" is a judgment result that triggers the start of the general electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the normal pattern" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the normal switching execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 368 (B), the general figure success determination table (for high frequency support mode) used in the general figure lottery in the high frequency support mode includes 0 to 65535 of the general figure accuracy determination counter Cn1 65536 Of the values, 65535 values of 0 to 65534 are set as values that will be elected per normal pattern, and other values are set as values that will be out of the normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the general pattern suitability determination in the high-frequency support mode is winning per general pattern with a probability of 1/1.0000153.

Next, the normal figure classification determination table is demonstrated.

FIG. 369 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal pattern start gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2. Then, based on the obtained value of the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2, the result of the above-mentioned normal pattern correctness determination, and the general pattern type determination table, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined Normal pattern type determination is performed.

As shown in FIG. 369, according to the general figure type determination table of the present embodiment, the result of the general figure correctness determination is the winning per general figure, and the value of the acquired general figure type determination counter Cn2 is 0 to 49 If the value is, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is determined as normal pattern A (per normal pattern A), the result of the normal pattern validity determination is the winning per normal pattern, and the acquired normal pattern When the value of the figure type determination counter Cn2 is a value from 50 to 99, the type of normal design (type of stop design) is determined as normal design B (normal design win B). On the other hand, if the result of the general pattern correctness determination is normal pattern out, regardless of the value of the acquired general pattern type determination counter Cn2, the type of normal pattern (type of stop pattern) is normal pattern Z (normal pattern out).

Among the types of normal patterns (types of stop patterns), the normal pattern A (per normal pattern A) and the normal pattern B (per normal pattern B) trigger the execution of the normal electric switching execution mode, and the normal electric switching execution mode is executed, the utility switch scenario is loaded. The general electric switching scenario is a control program in which the manner of control of the general electric accessory 34b in the general electric switching execution mode is stored.

Next, the normal switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 370 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal switching scenario selection table. The normal switching scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal switching scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol when winning per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 370, normal switching scenario corresponding to the normal symbol type (stop symbol type) is set in the normal switching scenario selection table. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal switching scenario A is set corresponding to the normal symbol A, and the normal switching scenario B is set corresponding to the normal symbol B. That is, when the general pattern is elected in the general pattern propriety determination, and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern A, the general pattern opening and closing scenario A is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed, In the general pattern correctness determination, when the general pattern is won, and the result of the general pattern type determination is the normal pattern B, the general pattern opening and closing scenario B is selected when the general pattern opening and closing execution mode is executed. Become.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario A is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 2.0 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. In the general electric opening/closing period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for one time is set to 0.8 seconds. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 2.0 seconds is started.

When the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario B is started, first, the normal switching opening period of 2.0 seconds is started, and then the normal switching period is started. In the normal electric switching period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened twice, and the opening time of one time is set to 0.8 seconds. Also, the interval period of closing between opening and closing (interval period of electric power) is set to 1.0 seconds. When the common switching period ends, a common ending period of 2.0 seconds is started.

That is, in the present embodiment, the normal switching period is a short operation period in which the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once, depending on the type of the selected normal switching scenario. It may be a long operation period in which it is opened twice. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34b is set to 0.8 seconds regardless of the type of the selected normal electric opening/closing scenario. 34b is controlled to the open state, depending on the type of the selected electric switching scenario, for example, a short control period of 0.4 seconds or a long control period of 0.8 seconds. It may be configured such that it may be set in a period.

It should be noted that, in the following description, for example, winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure propriety determination, and the fact that it was determined as a special symbol A (16R probability variation jackpot) in the special figure type determination is "in the special figure lottery, It is also expressed as "I was elected." Also, for example, it is expressed as "per normal pattern A in the general pattern lottery" that it is elected per normal pattern in the general pattern propriety determination and is determined as normal pattern A in the normal pattern type determination.

In addition, the game state in which the lottery mode of the above-mentioned special figure lottery is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is also referred to as "low probability low support state" or "normal state", and the lottery mode of the special figure lottery is a high probability mode, and the game state in which the support mode is a low frequency support mode is also called "high probability low support state" or "latent probability variable state (latent probability state)", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a low probability mode , The game state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode is also called a "low-probability high support state" or "time-saving state", and the lottery mode of the special drawing lottery is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. This game state is also referred to as "high probability high support state" or "probability variable state".

<<8-3>> Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emitting Control Device and Display Control Device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 371 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

The audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91 . The sound emission control board 91 includes an MPU 92 which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a sound that generates a sound signal and drives the speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal to output a sound. An output LSI 98 and an audio data ROM 98a, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored, are mounted.

The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, the ROM 93 stores an effect pattern table 93a, a character object action pattern table 93b, a drive scenario 93c, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, drive scenario storage areas 94d, drive scenario counter areas 94e, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port.

The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60, the effect operation button 24, the cross key 27, etc. It is configured to be able to receive a signal or the like indicating.

The output side of the MPU 92 is connected with the various lamps 47, the performance movable accessory driving mechanism 97, the sound output LSI 98, and the display control device 100. FIG.

The NFC module 110 and the BT module 111 are connected to input/output ports of the sound and light side MPU 92 . The NFC module 110 has an NFC antenna as a detection unit for detecting the NFC module of the communication partner. A detection completion state (NFC detection state) occurs when the NFC module of the communication partner, which is an object to be detected, comes close to or touches within a predetermined NFC detectable distance from the NFC antenna. Furthermore, the NFC module 110 includes a RAM 110a as a predetermined storage means for storing data to be output when the NFC module of the communication partner is detected. Data stored in the RAM 110 a can be rewritten by the sound and light side MPU 92 .

The performance movable accessory drive mechanism 97 is a mechanism for driving the performance movable accessory 170 described above, and includes a vertical movement motor 174 , a rotation motor 176 , and an enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 . The vertical movement motor 174 is a motor for vertically moving the movable accessory for presentation 170, and the motor for rotation 176 is a motor for rotating the rotating shaft portion 171 of the movable accessory for presentation 170. The enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 is a mechanism for separating (enlarging) each petal portion 172 of the performance movable accessory 170 from the rotating shaft portion 171 . The driving scenario 93c described above is a program in which operation patterns of the vertical movement motor 174, the rotation motor 176, and the enlargement/reduction mechanism 177 are defined.

The sound output LSI 98 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates sound to be reproduced based on instructions from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . Specifically, when the sound output LSI 98 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, it identifies the sound to start reproducing as instructed by the reproduction start command, and converts the sound data corresponding to the identified sound into the sound data format. Read from the ROM 98a to generate the sound to be played. The sound output LSI 98 then outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46 . When the sound output LSI 98 receives a reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 98 specifies the sound whose reproduction is to be ended according to the reproduction end command, and executes end processing for ending the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 98 has 16 audio channels, generates up to 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes) them, and outputs them from the speaker 46 . In addition, the sound output LSI 98 can mute the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel according to instructions from the MPU 92, and cancel the mute setting. The sound output LSI 98 reads the corresponding audio data for the audio channel set to mute to generate the sound to be reproduced. By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel to be silenced to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel to be silenced is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46 .

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 . The display control board 101 is mounted with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 receives and analyzes various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). ).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

<<8-4>> Overview of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment:
Next, the outline of the processing of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can connect and communicate with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone 200 or a tablet terminal via Bluetooth. The pachinko machine 10 is connected to a mobile terminal to input predetermined information from the mobile terminal and output predetermined information to the mobile terminal. For example, information for customizing the performance of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as custom setting information) can be input from the smartphone 200 , or game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be output to the smartphone 200 . A connection method (pairing process), a communication method (during communication process), and a disconnection method (disconnection process) between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 will be described below. A connection method (pairing process), a communication method (during communication process), and a disconnection method (disconnection process) described below are executed using a dedicated application APP installed on smartphone 200 .

Regarding the connection method (pairing process), communication method (during communication process), and disconnection method (disconnection process) between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200, a plurality of processing methods are conceivable as processes that can be executed on the smartphone 200 side. Similarly, a plurality of processing methods are conceivable as processing that can be executed on the pachinko machine 10 side. Also, a plurality of types of combinations of the processing on the smartphone 200 side and the processing on the pachinko machine 10 side are conceivable.

Therefore, in the following description, regarding the pairing process, multiple types of pairing processes that can be used on the smartphone 200 side will be described in order, and then multiple types of pairing processes that can be used on the pachinko machine 10 side will be described in order. . In addition, in the explanation of each process, it will also be explained which of the processes on the other side (the pachinko machine 10 seen from the smartphone 200 and the smartphone 200 seen from the pachinko machine 10) can be combined.

As for the in-communication process, a plurality of types of in-communication processes that can be employed on the pachinko machine 10 side will be described in order.

Regarding the disconnection process, multiple types of disconnection processes that can be used on the smartphone 200 side will be described in order, and then multiple types of disconnection processes that can be used on the pachinko machine 10 side will be described in order. In addition, in the explanation of each process, it will also be explained which of the processes on the other side (the pachinko machine 10 seen from the smartphone 200 and the smartphone 200 seen from the pachinko machine 10) can be combined.

Further, the processing described below will be described as a processing pattern. For example, processing on the smartphone side of the pairing processing will be described as a processing pattern with PS and a code. The process on the gaming machine side of the pairing process will be described as a process pattern denoted by PY. The first processing pattern PS is called a processing pattern PS1. A second type of processing pattern PS is called a processing pattern PS2. Similarly, the first processing pattern PY is called a processing pattern PY1. The second type of processing pattern PY2 is called processing pattern PS2.

Similarly, processing on the gaming machine side during communication is denoted by CY.

Processing on the smartphone side of the disconnection processing is denoted by DS. Processing on the game machine side of the disconnection processing is denoted by DY.

<Pairing process>
[Processing pattern PS1] (smartphone 200 side processing)
FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern PS1 in pairing processing (smartphone side). As described above, this process is started by application APP of smartphone 200 .

Processing overview:
An outline of the processing will be described first. This processing is Bluetooth pairing processing using NFC. A RAM 110a as predetermined storage means provided in the NFC module 110 as a detection unit of the pachinko machine 10 stores a plurality of related information. Specifically, the Bluetooth connection information necessary for pairing with the BT module 111 provided in the pachinko machine 10 via Bluetooth is stored. More specifically, at least three pieces of information (connection information) of the device name of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10, the Bluetooth address, and the Bluetooth password are stored in the RAM 110a. In the NFC monitoring state as a predetermined waiting period, the smartphone 200, which is a predetermined detectable object, is at a predetermined distance from the NFC antenna as a predetermined detection execution unit provided in the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10. When the NFC module 110 approaches or comes into contact with a certain NFC detectable distance, the NFC module 110 enters an NFC detection state as a detection completion state. When the NFC module 110 is in the NFC detection state, it executes a process of outputting the connection information by NFC as an external output means for externally outputting the connection information, which is the information stored in the RAM 110a. The NFC module included in the smart phone 200 receives the connection information of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 via NFC. Then, the smartphone 200 outputs a connection request, which is predetermined information corresponding to the received connection information, from the Bluetooth module included in the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 within a predetermined period of time via Bluetooth radio waves. When the pachinko machine 10 detects an input of a connection request, which is an input of predetermined information corresponding to the Bluetooth connection information output from the NFC module 110, predetermined settable information for execution of the effect occurs. It is possible to input and output information (for example, output of game history information) related to information (custom setting information) of performance that can be custom set as related information. More specifically, the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the connection information included in the connection request sent from the smartphone 200 matches the connection information of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10. If they match, Bluetooth communication with the smartphone 200 is started.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se7001, it is determined whether a connection start operation has been performed on the application APP of the smart phone 200 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the “connection button” displayed on the touch panel 202 of the smartphone 200 as a function of the application APP has been operated. If it is determined in step Se7001 that the connection button has been operated (step Se7001: YES), the process advances to step Se7002 to activate the NFC module included in the smartphone 200. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Se7003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7001 that the connection button has not been operated (step Se7001: NO), this processing ends.

In step Se7003, it is determined whether or not connection information has been acquired from the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 via NFC radio waves. If it is determined in step Se7003 that the connection information has been acquired (step Se7003: YES), the process proceeds to step Se7004. In step Se7004, a connection request including the acquired connection information is transmitted from the Bluetooth module of the smart phone 200 to the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 via Bluetooth radio waves. After that, the process proceeds to step Se7005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7003 that the connection information has not been acquired (step Se7003: NO), this process ends.

At step Se7005, it is determined whether or not a connection response has been received from the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 in response to the connection request sent to the pachinko machine 10. In step S7005, when it is determined that a connection response has been received (step Se7005: YES), the pairing with the pachinko machine 10 succeeds, and as step Se7006, communication with the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 via Bluetooth is started. do.

On the other hand, in step S7005, when the connection response is not received from the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 (step Se7005: NO), the process proceeds to step Se7007, and the process ends as a connection failure.

According to this process, in the NFC monitoring state, when the smartphone 200 approaches or contacts the NFC antenna of the pachinko machine 10 within the NFC detectable distance, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 enters the NFC detection state, and the NFC module 110 is in the NFC detection state, the Bluetooth connection information stored in the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 is output from the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Then, when the pachinko machine 10 detects that a connection request corresponding to the output Bluetooth connection information has been input from the smartphone 200, information related to predetermined settable information is input from the smartphone 200 (for example, custom (information on settable effect information) and output of information on predetermined settable information (for example, output of information on game history information) toward the smartphone 200, so that information for the pachinko machine 10 A special effect can be obtained in that it is possible to suitably perform input and output of information from the pachinko machine 10 .

As a more specific effect, the smartphone 200 can acquire connection information necessary for Bluetooth connection (including pairing) with the pachinko machine 10 via NFC. is not necessary to input, and the smartphone 200 can be automatically paired and connected via Bluetooth simply by bringing the smartphone 200 close to or in contact with the gaming machine to be connected. This process is very effective in an environment where a plurality of devices (pachinko machines 10) that can be connected to the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth exist and may be randomly connected. Also, in connection with the pachinko machine 10, it is very sanitary because it is not necessary to touch the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加For example, infection with infectious diseases can be suppressed.

[Processing pattern PS2] (smartphone 200 side processing)
FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern PS2 in pairing processing (smartphone side). As described above, this process is started by operating the connection button in the application APP of the smart phone 200 .

Processing overview:
The difference between the processing pattern PS2 and the processing pattern PS1 is that in this processing, when there is no connection response from the pachinko machine 10, a timer is set and a connection request is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 for a predetermined period.
A flowchart will be described below.

Since the processing of steps Se7101 to Se7106 is the same as the processing pattern PS1 and has already been described, the description of this processing will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S7105 that there is no connection request from the pachinko machine 10 (step S7105: NO), the process advances to step Se7107 to set a timer and add the timer value. After that, the process advances to step S7108 to determine whether or not the timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment). If it is determined in step S7108 that the timer value is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S7108: YES), the process advances to step Se7109, and the process ends as connection failure. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7108 that the timer value is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S7108: NO), the process proceeds to step S7104.

According to this processing, if a connection request cannot be received, a connection request is made for a predetermined period of time. can initiate communication. In a situation where it is difficult for the smartphone 200 to come close to or contact the pachinko machine 10 for a certain period of time (for example, in a crowded situation) or in a situation where a communication failure is likely to occur, it is very effective because multiple connection requests can be executed. .

[Processing pattern PS3] (smartphone 200 side processing)
FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern PS3 in pairing processing (smartphone side). As described above, this process is started by operating the connection button in the application APP of the smart phone 200 .

Processing overview:
The difference between the processing pattern PS3 and the processing pattern PS1 is that in this processing, when there is no connection response from the pachinko machine 10, the connection request is retried, and even if the number of retries reaches a predetermined number or more, the pachinko machine 10 The point is that if there is no connection response, the connection fails and the processing ends.
A flowchart will be described below.

The processing of steps Se7201 to Se7206 is the same as the processing pattern PS1 and has already been described, so the description of this processing is omitted.

If it is determined in step S7205 that there is no connection request from the pachinko machine 10 (step S7205: NO), the process advances to step Se7207 to add the number of retries. That is, a counter for the number of retries is set to count the number of retries. Thereafter, the process advances to step S7208 to determine whether or not the number of retries is equal to or greater than the maximum try value (for example, 5 times in this embodiment). Note that the try maximum value is a preset value. If it is determined in step S7208 that the number of retries is equal to or greater than the maximum try value (for example, 5 times in this embodiment) (step S7208: YES), the process advances to step Se7209 to terminate this process as a connection failure. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7208 that the timer value is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S7208: NO), the processing proceeds to step S7204 and is repeated.

According to this processing, when a connection request cannot be received, a connection request is made a predetermined number of times. Communication can be initiated by request. In a situation where it is difficult for the smartphone 200 to come close to or contact the pachinko machine 10 for a certain period of time (for example, in a crowded situation) or in a situation where a communication failure is likely to occur, it is very effective because multiple connection requests can be executed. .

[Processing pattern PY1] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY1 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is a process on the pachinko machine 10 side in the pairing process. As described above, the process on the pachinko machine 10 side is executed as one process included in the timer interrupt process (audio light emission control) executed by the sound light emission control device 90 . Note that timer interrupt processing (audio emission control) will be described later. As described above, this process is a Bluetooth pairing process using NFC. A RAM 110a as predetermined storage means provided in the NFC module 110 as a detection unit of the pachinko machine 10 stores a plurality of related information. Specifically, the Bluetooth connection information necessary for pairing with the BT module 111 provided in the pachinko machine 10 via Bluetooth is stored. More specifically, at least three pieces of information (connection information) of the device name of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10, the Bluetooth address, and the Bluetooth password are stored in the RAM 110a. In the NFC monitoring state as a predetermined waiting period, the smartphone 200, which is a predetermined detectable object, is at a predetermined distance from the NFC antenna as a predetermined detection execution unit provided in the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10. When the NFC module 110 approaches or comes into contact with a certain NFC detectable distance, the NFC module 110 enters an NFC detection state as a detection completion state. When the NFC module 110 is in the NFC detection state, it executes a process of outputting the connection information by NFC as an external output means for externally outputting the connection information, which is the information stored in the RAM 110a. The NFC module included in the smart phone 200 receives the connection information of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 via NFC. Then, the smartphone 200 outputs a connection request, which is predetermined information corresponding to the received connection information, from the Bluetooth module included in the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 within a predetermined period of time via Bluetooth radio waves. When the pachinko machine 10 detects an input of a connection request, which is an input of predetermined information corresponding to the Bluetooth connection information output from the NFC module 110, predetermined settable information for execution of the effect occurs. It is possible to input and output information (for example, output of game history information) related to information (custom setting information) of performance that can be custom set as related information. More specifically, the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the connection information included in the connection request sent from the smartphone 200 matches the connection information of the BT module 111 of the pachinko machine 10. If they match, Bluetooth communication with the smartphone 200 is started.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se7301, it is determined whether or not the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching. That is, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 monitors whether the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is in close proximity or in contact. In Step Se7301, when it is determined that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is close to the NFC detectable distance, which is the predetermined distance (Step Se7301: YES), in Step Se7302, the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 is detected via NFC. Outputs (sends) the connection information for Bluetooth connection stored in the . After that, the process proceeds to step Se7303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7301 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is not approaching (step Se7301: NO), this process ends.

In Step Se7303, it is determined whether or not a connection request has been received from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds). If it is determined in Step Se7303 that a connection request has been received from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth within the predetermined period (Step Se7303: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7304.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7303 that the connection request has not been received from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth within the predetermined period (step Se7303: NO), this process ends.

In step Se7304, it is determined whether or not the connection information included in the connection request received from the smartphone 200 matches the connection information transmitted by the pachinko machine 10 in step S7302. If it is determined in step Se7304 that the connection information included in the connection request received from the smartphone 200 matches the connection information transmitted by the pachinko machine 10 (step Se7304: YES), the process proceeds to step Se7305, and the smartphone 200 to send a connection response. After that, the process proceeds to step Se7306, and communication with the smartphone 200 is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7304 that the connection information included in the connection request received from the smartphone 200 does not match the connection information transmitted by the pachinko machine 10 (step Se7304: NO), this process ends. do.

According to this process, in the NFC monitoring state, when the smartphone 200 approaches or contacts the NFC antenna of the pachinko machine 10 within the NFC detectable distance, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is in the NFC detection state (first input state), and the NFC module 110 outputs the Bluetooth connection information stored in the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 from the pachinko machine 10 when a state occurs in which the NFC module 110 is in the NFC detection state. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 detects that a connection request corresponding to the output Bluetooth connection information is input from the smartphone 200 (second input state) occurs, the predetermined settable information from the smartphone 200 is generated. (e.g., information about effects that can be customized) can be input, and information about predetermined settable information can be output to the smartphone 200 (e.g., information about game history information can be output). A special effect can be obtained in that information can be suitably input to and output from the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, when reception of a connection request is not detected until a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the NFC detection state, in order to generate a state in which it is detected that a connection request has been input from the smartphone 200, the NFC detection state is again generated. raises a condition that requires that to occur. That is, if there is no connection request (not received) via Bluetooth within a predetermined period in step Se7303 (step Se7303: NO), this processing ends. In order to generate a state (second input state) in which the pachinko machine 10 detects that a connection request corresponding to the output Bluetooth connection information has been input from the smartphone 200, A certain smartphone 200 is brought close to or in contact with an NFC antenna as a predetermined detection execution unit included in the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 to a predetermined NFC detectable distance, and the detection completion state of the NFC module 110 is reached. (first input state). Therefore, when the smartphone 200 is separated from the pachinko machine 10 after the occurrence of the NFC detection state (first input state) and a predetermined period of time elapses, the pairing process is terminated, It is possible to perform pairing processing with

Here, even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection completion state (first input state) occurred, the state in which the input of the connection request as the input of the predetermined information is not detected is the player's intention. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the detection completion state (first input state) has occurred, or the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine. According to this processing, in such a case, it is necessary to generate the detection complete state (first input state) again in order to generate the second input state in which the input of the connection request is detected. By generating such a state, the player who generated the detection completion state and the player who generated the second input state, which is the state in which the input of the connection request is detected from that state, can be avoided. can do.

More specifically, it is possible to avoid unnecessary Bluetooth connection when the smart phone 200 is unintentionally brought close to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time. Furthermore, according to this process, it is not necessary to display the connection information necessary for Bluetooth connection (pairing) with the pachinko machine 10 on the display surface 41a to show it to the player. It can greatly simplify the actions that must be performed.

Note that in step Se7303 of this process, the connection request received from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth may be received without setting a time limit (a time limit within a predetermined period). That is, the processing in step Se7303 of this processing may be set to "Is there a connection request via Bluetooth?".

In addition, when the input of the connection request as the input of the predetermined information is not detected even though the predetermined period has passed since the detection completion state (first input state) occurred, the display surface of the pachinko machine 10 In 41a, a configuration may be adopted in which characters or images are displayed to prompt the player to bring the smartphone 200 closer to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 again. Specifically, a configuration may be employed in which characters (images) such as "touch again" are displayed on the display surface 41a.

Furthermore, in a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the smartphone 200, a display indicating that it is necessary to bring the smartphone 200 close to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the display surface 41a for communication. You may For example, a display such as "Touch for communication" may be displayed. Then, when the smartphone 200 approaches or contacts the pachinko machine 10, a connection request as an input of predetermined information is issued even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection completion state (first input state) occurred. is not detected, on the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10, text or an image may be displayed to prompt the player to bring the smartphone 200 closer to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 again. .

[Processing pattern PY2] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY2 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
The difference between the processing pattern PY2 and the processing pattern PY1 is that when a connection response is made to one smart phone 200, invalid connection information is sent via NFC to a smart phone approaching the pachinko machine 10 after that. is the point of sending That is, after receiving a connection request from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth and transmitting a connection response to the smartphone 200, the connection information stored in the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 is rewritten as invalid. Specifically, out of the three pieces of Bluetooth connection information: Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, and Bluetooth password, only the Bluetooth device name can be rewritten to be invalid, or only the Bluetooth address can be rewritten. can be invalidated, or only the Bluetooth password can be invalidated. Also, two of these three pieces of information may be rewritten as invalid ones. That is, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth address may be rewritten to invalid ones, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones, and the Bluetooth address and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones. can be rewritten as invalid. Also, all of these three pieces of information may be rewritten to be invalid.

With such a configuration, a process of suppressing the output of the connection information that is output when the NFC detection state occurs in the NFC monitoring state is executed. Specifically, connection information in which at least one of the three pieces of information of the Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, and Bluetooth password is invalid is transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 via NFC. . After that, a connection request is transmitted from the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 checks whether all three pieces of information of the Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, and Bluetooth password included in the connection request match. make a judgment. That is, if any one of the three pieces of information of the Bluetooth device name, the Bluetooth address, and the Bluetooth password is invalid, the smart phone 200 cannot establish a Bluetooth connection with the pachinko machine 10 . By doing so, the pachinko machine 10 can suppress the output of the connection information output when the NFC detection state occurs in the NFC monitoring state. Further, when a state (second input state) occurs in which Bluetooth connection is established with one smartphone 200, connection with other smartphones can be avoided until normal disconnection is performed. That is, it is possible to avoid multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.).
A flowchart will be described below.

The processing from step Se7401 to step Se7205 is the same as the processing pattern PY1 and has already been described, so the description of this processing is omitted.

In step Se7406, the connection information stored in the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 is rewritten as invalid. By doing so, as described above, when a Bluetooth connection is established with one smartphone 200, connection with other smartphones can be avoided until normal disconnection. After executing step Se7406, the process proceeds to step Se7407, starts communication with the smartphone 200, and ends the process. Step Se7406 suppresses the output of the connection information output when the NFC detection state occurs in the NFC monitoring state when a connection request is input (received) from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth. Correspond to processing.

According to this process, in a state where a connection request including connection information is received (input) and a Bluetooth connection state is occurring as a second input state, smartphone 200 as a newly detected object performs detection. It is possible to suppress the output of connection information (effective connection information) as a plurality of pieces of information when the NFC antenna as a unit is brought close to or in contact with the NFC antenna as a predetermined distance. More specifically, for example, when the smart phone 200 is in the Bluetooth connection state by inputting a connection request through the NFC detection state as the detection completion state due to proximity or contact with the NFC antenna, the other mobile terminal is in the Bluetooth connection state. Even if the NFC antenna is brought close to or in contact with the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance, the output of the Bluetooth connection information as a plurality of related information that is output when the NFC detection state occurs is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the Bluetooth connection state due to the proximity or contact of the terminal. That is, it is possible to suppress the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state with a plurality of mobile terminals.

In other words, according to this process, as described above, it is possible to avoid unintentionally establishing a Bluetooth connection with a smartphone that is unexpectedly close to or in contact with the smartphone. Further, when a state (second input state) occurs in which Bluetooth connection is established with one smartphone 200, connection with other smartphones can be avoided until normal disconnection is performed. That is, it is possible to avoid multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.).

As mentioned above, when rewriting the connection information to invalid one, only the Bluetooth device name is invalid among the three pieces of information of the Bluetooth device name, the Bluetooth address, and the Bluetooth password as the Bluetooth connection information. , only the Bluetooth address may be rewritten to be invalid, or only the Bluetooth password may be rewritten to be invalid. Also, two of these three pieces of information may be rewritten as invalid ones. That is, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth address may be rewritten to invalid ones, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones, and the Bluetooth address and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones. can be rewritten as invalid. Also, all of these three pieces of information may be rewritten to be invalid. In this way, various modes can be adopted as modes for rewriting the connection information to be invalid. Multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.) can be avoided by rewriting any one of the information to be invalid.

[Processing pattern PY3] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY3 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
In this process, the difference between the processing pattern PY2 and the processing pattern PY1 is that when a connection response is made to one smartphone 200, the connection information cannot be output (transmitted) from the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10. After that, the smartphone approaching the pachinko machine 10 cannot be connected via Bluetooth. That is, in this process, similarly to the processing pattern PY2, when a connection request is input (received) from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth, the connection information output when an NFC detection state occurs in the NFC monitoring state is Execute processing to suppress output.

Specifically, in this process, after making a connection response to one smartphone 200, an ON signal is output to the pin connected to the NFC module 110, and the power received by the antenna part in the NFC module 110 is grounded (GND). , so that connection information cannot be output (transmitted) from the NFC module 110 .
A flowchart will be described below.

The processing of steps Se7501 to Se7505 is the same as the processing pattern PY1 and has already been described, so the description of this processing will be omitted.

At Step Se7506, an ON signal is output to the pin connected to the NFC module 110. FIG. After executing step Se7506, the process proceeds to step Se7507, starts communication with the smartphone 200, and ends the process. Step Se7506 suppresses the output of the connection information output when the NFC detection state occurs in the NFC monitoring state when a connection request is input (received) from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth. Correspond to processing.

According to this process, as described above, when a connection response is made to one smart phone 200, it is possible to prevent a smart phone approaching the pachinko machine 10 from being connected via Bluetooth. That is, it is possible to avoid multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.).

[Processing pattern PY4] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 378 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY4 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is a process of performing pairing with a mobile terminal approaching the pachinko machine 10 only when a Bluetooth connection has not yet been established with one mobile terminal. That is, it is possible to avoid multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.).
A flowchart will be described below.

At Step Se7601, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is already connected to the mobile terminal via Bluetooth. In step Se7601, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has already been connected to the mobile terminal via Bluetooth (step Se7601: NO), this process ends.

In step Se7601, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to any mobile terminal via Bluetooth (step Se7601: YES), the process proceeds to step Se7602.

The processing of Steps Se7602 to Se7607 is the same as that of Steps Se7301 to Se7306 in the processing pattern PY1, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this processing, it is possible to avoid multiple connections with mobile terminals (smartphones, etc.) by very simple processing.

[Processing pattern PY5] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 379 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY5 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This processing is configured to limit the number of connected devices on the premise that multiple connections with mobile terminals via Bluetooth are permitted. Specifically, the upper limit number of connectable mobile terminals (connection upper limit) is set in advance, and after the number of connected mobile terminals reaches the connection upper limit, pairing is not executed. . For example, when the game histories stored in the pachinko machine 10 are supplied by a plurality of players, a plurality of mobile terminals can be connected to the pachinko machine 10 at the same time to receive the game histories, thereby improving convenience. be able to.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se7701, it is determined whether or not the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching. That is, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 monitors whether the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is in close proximity or in contact. If it is determined in Step Se7701 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching or in contact (Step Se7701: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7701 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is not approaching (step Se7701: NO), this process ends.

In Step Se7702, it is determined whether or not the number of mobile terminals currently connected via Bluetooth has reached the connection upper limit. If it is determined in Step Se7702 that the number of mobile terminals currently connected via Bluetooth has reached the connection upper limit value (Step Se7702: NO), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se7702 that the number of mobile terminals currently connected via Bluetooth has not reached the connection upper limit (Step Se7702: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7703.

Steps Se7703 to Se7707 in this process are the same as Steps Se7302 to Se7306 in the process pattern PY1, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this processing, it is possible to set a limit on the number of connected devices on the premise that multiple connections with mobile terminals via Bluetooth are permitted. For example, when the game histories stored in the pachinko machine 10 are supplied by a plurality of players, a plurality of mobile terminals can be connected to the pachinko machine 10 at the same time to receive the game histories, thereby improving convenience. be able to.

[Processing pattern PY6] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 380 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY6 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
In this process, when a new mobile terminal approaches the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 while the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth, the connection with the mobile terminal currently connected via Bluetooth is disconnected and a new mobile terminal is connected. It is a configuration that performs Bluetooth connection with a mobile terminal approaching. For example, when no one is playing the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 is connected via Bluetooth to a mobile terminal whose owner is unknown (a mobile terminal whose location is unknown), the pachinko machine 10 can be used to play a game. By bringing the mobile terminal of the player who is about to play closer, the Bluetooth connection with the mobile terminal whose whereabouts is unknown is cut off, and a new Bluetooth connection is made with the legitimate mobile terminal of the player who plays the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se7801, it is determined whether or not the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching. That is, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 monitors whether the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is in close proximity or in contact. If it is determined in Step Se7801 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching (Step Se7801: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7801 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is not approaching (step Se7801: NO), this process ends.

At Step Se7802, it is determined whether or not the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in step Se7802 that the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth (step S7802: YES), the process advances to step Se7803 to disconnect the mobile terminal already connected via Bluetooth. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se7804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7802 that the mobile terminal is not connected via Bluetooth (step S7802: NO), the process proceeds directly to step Se7804.

In Step Se7804, connection information is output (transmitted) via NFC to the NFC module on the newly approached smartphone 200 side. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se7805.

The processing of Steps S7805 to Se7808 is the same as the processing of Steps Se7303 to Se7306 in the processing pattern PY1, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this processing, when a new mobile terminal approaches the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 while the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth, the connection with the mobile terminal currently connected via Bluetooth is disconnected. , it is possible to establish a Bluetooth connection with a newly approaching mobile terminal. For example, when no one is playing the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 is connected via Bluetooth to a mobile terminal whose owner is unknown (a mobile terminal whose location is unknown), the pachinko machine 10 can be used to play a game. By bringing the mobile terminal of the player who is about to play closer, the Bluetooth connection with the mobile terminal whose whereabouts is unknown is cut off, and a new Bluetooth connection is made with the legitimate mobile terminal of the player who plays the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be done.

[Processing pattern PY7] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 381 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY7 in the pairing processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
In this processing, when a new mobile terminal approaches the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 while the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth, a disconnection response is sent to the mobile terminal currently connected via Bluetooth. After that, the connection with the mobile terminal that is currently connected via Bluetooth is cut off, and the Bluetooth connection with a mobile terminal that has newly approached is performed. For example, when no one is playing the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 is connected via Bluetooth to a mobile terminal whose owner's location is unknown (a mobile terminal whose location is unknown), the unknown mobile phone Disconnection can be confirmed to the terminal. Then, by bringing the mobile terminal of the player who is going to play the pachinko machine 10 closer, the Bluetooth connection with the mobile terminal whose location is unknown is cut off, and the legitimate mobile terminal of the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine 10 is disconnected. You can make a new Bluetooth connection.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se7901, it is determined whether or not the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching. That is, the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 monitors whether the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is in close proximity or in contact. If it is determined in Step Se7801 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is approaching (Step Se7901: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7901 that the NFC module on the smartphone 200 side is not approaching (step Se7901: NO), this process ends.

In Step Se7902, it is determined whether or not the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in Step Se7902 that the mobile terminal is already connected via Bluetooth (Step S7902: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se7908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se7902 that the mobile terminal is not connected via Bluetooth (step S7902: NO), the process proceeds to step Se7903.

In Step Se7908, a disconnection response is transmitted to the already connected portable terminal. At this time, on the premise that the mobile terminal to be disconnected exists within the Bluetooth communication range, a signal is sent to the mobile terminal to display a display confirming to the player that the Bluetooth communication will be disconnected. Send to the mobile terminal via Bluetooth. For example, a signal is sent to the mobile terminal via Bluetooth to cause the mobile terminal to display a confirmation display such as "Can I terminate the connection with the pachinko machine?" Furthermore, as will be described later, when the in-communication processing (processing pattern CY4 to processing pattern CY8) in which data is not transmitted and received all the time during communication is adopted, a processing for causing the mobile terminal to display the confirmation is executed. may be used as a trigger to transmit and receive data to and from the portable terminal. By adopting such a configuration, disconnection of communication with the gaming machine while the player is not aware of it can be avoided, and data can be transmitted/received to/from the gaming machine before the communication is disconnected. This can be done, and it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable. After executing Step Se7908, in Step Se7909, the timer for disconnection is set, and the process proceeds to Step Se7910.

In Step Se7910, it is determined whether or not the time set in the disconnection timer has elapsed. If it is determined in Step Se7910 that the disconnection timer has not passed the set time (Step Se7910: NO), the process advances to Step Se7911 to update the disconnection timer. After that, the processing of steps Se7910 and Se7911 is repeated until the set time of the disconnection timer elapses.

If it is determined in Step Se7910 that the disconnection timer has passed the set time (Step Se7910: YES), the process advances to Step S7912 to disconnect the mobile terminal already connected via Bluetooth. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se7903.

The processing of Steps Se7903 to S7907 is the same as that of Steps Se7804 to Se7808 in the processing pattern PY6, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this process, when no one is playing the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 is connected via Bluetooth to a mobile terminal whose owner is unknown (a mobile terminal whose location is unknown), Disconnection can be confirmed for a predetermined unknown mobile terminal. Then, by bringing the mobile terminal of the player who is going to play the pachinko machine 10 closer, the Bluetooth connection with the mobile terminal whose location is unknown is cut off, and the legitimate mobile terminal of the player who plays the game with the pachinko machine 10 is disconnected. You can make a new Bluetooth connection.

<Processing during communication>
Next, the processing during communication will be described. In the following description, in addition to the processing pattern in which the pachinko machine 10 receives custom setting information from the smartphone 200, the processing pattern in which the pachinko machine 10 outputs data to the smartphone 200 will also be described. As for the in-communication process, only the process in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Since the smartphone 200 has established a Bluetooth connection with the pachinko machine 10 , data transmission from the pachinko machine 10 is always received.

[Processing pattern CY1] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY1 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This processing is processing when data is received from the smartphone 200 . The data that the pachinko machine 10 receives from the smart phone 200 includes, for example, custom setting information.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8001, it is determined whether or not the smartphone 200 is connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in step Se8001 that the smartphone 200 is connected via Bluetooth (step Se8001: YES), the process proceeds to step Se8002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8001 that the smartphone 200 is not connected via Bluetooth (step Se8001: NO), this process ends.

In step Se8002, it is determined whether or not there is data (custom setting information) input from the smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se8002 that there is data (custom setting information) input from the smartphone 200 (step Se8002: YES), the process advances to step S8003 to display the data on the display surface 41a based on the input data. indicate. Also, based on the received custom setting information, a value related to the effect is set. Thereafter, in step Se8004, setting completion data indicating completion of custom setting is transmitted to smartphone 200. FIG. After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8002 that there is no data input from smartphone 200 (step Se8002: NO), this process ends.

According to this process, the input data can be displayed on the display surface 41a when the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth.

[Processing pattern CY2] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY2 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This processing is processing when data is received from the smartphone 200 . Data is input only when the smart phone 200 is in proximity and is connected via Bluetooth. The data that the pachinko machine 10 receives from the smart phone 200 includes, for example, custom setting information.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8101, it is determined whether the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smart phone 200 or not. That is, it detects whether the smartphone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 . When it is determined in Step Se8101 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (Step Se8101: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8101 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 has not detected the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (step Se8101: NO), this process ends.

The processing of Steps Se8102 to Se8105 is the same as that of Steps Se8001 to Se8004 in the processing pattern CY1, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this processing, data input is performed only when the smartphone 200 is close to the smartphone 200 and is connected via Bluetooth, so that data input from another mobile terminal can be avoided unintentionally.

[Processing pattern CY3] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY3 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This process is a process of transmitting the data of the pachinko machine 10 to the smart phone 200 . During the period in which the Bluetooth connection between the pachinko machine 10 and the smart phone 200 is established, if there is output data, the data is always transmitted. As the data to be transmitted, data relating to game history information, sound data relating to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, privilege data on the application APP, and the like can be employed.
A flowchart will be described below.

In Step Se8201, it is determined whether or not the smartphone 200 is connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in Step Se8201 that the smart phone 200 is connected via Bluetooth (Step Se8201: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8201 that the smartphone 200 is not connected via Bluetooth (step Se8201: NO), this process ends.

At Step Se8202, it is determined whether or not there is data to be output. If it is determined in Step Se8202 that there is data to be output (Step Se8202: YES), the data is transmitted to the smart phone 200 in Step Se8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8202 that there is no data to be output (step Se8202: NO), this process ends.

According to this processing, data can always be transmitted if there is output data while the Bluetooth connection between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 is established.

[Processing pattern CY4] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY4 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This process is for transmitting data from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 . Data is transmitted only when the smart phone 200 is in proximity and is connected via Bluetooth. That is, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. As the data to be transmitted, data relating to game history information, sound data relating to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, privilege data on the application APP, and the like can be employed.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8301, it is determined whether or not the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smart phone 200 or not. That is, it detects whether the smartphone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 . In step Se8301, when it is determined that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (step Se8301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se8302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8301 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 has not detected the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (step Se8301: NO), this process ends.

The processing of Steps Se8302 to Se8304 is the same as that of Steps 8201 to Se8203 in the processing pattern CY3, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this process, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. Therefore, only when the player wants data (for example, game history information) to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the smartphone 200 can be brought close to the pachinko machine 10 and the data can be received by the smartphone 200.例文帳に追加

[Processing pattern CY5] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY5 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
In this process, when there is data that can be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the data is temporarily stored in a buffer, and when the amount of stored data reaches a predetermined amount, the data is transmitted to the smartphone 200. For example, game history information data can be stored in a buffer and transmitted to the smartphone 200 when a predetermined capacity is reached. The number of transmissions from the pachinko machine 10 to the smart phone 200 can be reduced, and the processing load for data transmission can be reduced.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8401, it is determined whether or not the smart phone 200 is connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in Step Se8401 that the smartphone 200 is connected via Bluetooth (Step Se8401: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8401 that the smartphone 200 is not connected via Bluetooth (step Se8401: NO), this process ends.

At Step Se8402, it is determined whether or not there is data to be output. If it is determined in step Se8402 that there is data to be output (step Se8402: YES), in step Se8403 the data is stored in the transmission buffer. After that, the process proceeds to step Se8404.

At Step Se8404, it is determined whether or not the amount of data stored in the buffer has reached a predetermined amount. If it is determined in step Se8404 that the amount of data stored in the buffer has reached the predetermined amount, the process advances to step Se8405 to transmit the data stored in the buffer to the smart phone 200 . After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8404 that the amount of data stored in the buffer has not reached the predetermined amount, this processing ends.

According to this process, the data to be output is temporarily stored in the buffer, and when the volume of the stored data reaches a predetermined volume, it is transmitted to the smartphone 200, so the number of transmissions from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of data transmission. This process is optimal for transmitting data that does not need to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 in real time, such as game history information.

[Processing pattern CY6] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY6 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This processing is configured to transmit data only when the smart phone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 and is connected via Bluetooth. That is, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. As the data to be transmitted, data relating to game history information, sound data relating to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, privilege data on the application APP, and the like can be employed. Further, when there is data that can be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the data is temporarily stored in a buffer, and when the amount of stored data reaches a predetermined amount, the data is transmitted to the smartphone 200.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8501, it is determined whether the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smartphone 200 or not. That is, it detects whether the smartphone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 . When it is determined in Step Se8501 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smartphone 200 (Step Se8501: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8502. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se8501 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 has not detected the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (step Se8501: NO), this processing ends.

The processing of Steps Se8502 to Se8506 is the same as the processing of Steps Se8401 to Se8405 in the processing pattern CY5, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this process, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. Therefore, only when the player wants data (for example, game history information) to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the smartphone 200 can be brought close to the pachinko machine 10 and the data can be received by the smartphone 200.例文帳に追加In addition, the data to be output is temporarily stored in a buffer, and when the volume of the stored data reaches a predetermined volume, it is transmitted to the smartphone 200, so the number of transmissions from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 can be reduced. , it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of data transmission. This process is optimal for transmitting data that does not need to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 in real time, such as game history information.

[Processing pattern CY7] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY7 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
In this process, data that can be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stored in a buffer, and the data is transmitted to the smartphone 200 when a data transmission request is received from the smartphone 200 .

In Step Se8601, it is determined whether or not the smartphone 200 is connected via Bluetooth. If it is determined in Step Se8601 that the smart phone 200 is connected via Bluetooth (Step Se8601: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8601 that the smartphone 200 is not connected via Bluetooth (step Se8601: NO), this process ends.

At Step Se8602, it is determined whether or not there is data to be output. At Step Se8602, when it is determined that there is data to be output (Step Se8602: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8603 to store the data in the buffer. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se8604.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8602 that there is no data to be output (step Se8202: NO), this process ends.

In step Se8604, it is determined whether or not a data transmission request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se8604 that a data transmission request has been received from smartphone 200 (step Se8604: YES), the data stored in the buffer is transmitted to smartphone 200 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8604 that a data transmission request has not been received from smartphone 200 (step Se8604: NO), this process ends.

This process can be applied, for example, when the player operates the operation icon 286 (“Receive game history information”) on the application APP of the smartphone 200 to request reception of the game history. That is, the data can be transmitted after receiving the trigger of the information acquisition request from the player. Players can avoid receiving unnecessary data.

[Processing pattern CY8] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY8 in the in-communication processing (pachinko machine 10 side processing).

Processing overview:
This processing is configured to transmit data only when the smart phone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 and is connected via Bluetooth. That is, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. As the data to be transmitted, data relating to game history information, sound data relating to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, privilege data on the application APP, and the like can be employed. Furthermore, data that can be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stored in a buffer, and the data is transmitted to the smartphone 200 when a data transmission request is received from the smartphone 200 .

At Step Se8701, it is determined whether the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smartphone 200 or not. That is, it detects whether the smartphone 200 is approaching the pachinko machine 10 . When it is determined in Step Se8701 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 is detecting the NFC module of the smartphone 200 (Step Se8701: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se8702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se8701 that the NFC module of the pachinko machine 10 has not detected the NFC module of the smart phone 200 (step Se8701: NO), this processing ends.

The processing of Steps Se8702 to Se8706 is the same as the processing of Steps Se8601 to Se8605 in the processing pattern CY7, so description thereof will be omitted.

According to this process, when the first input state, which is the NFC detection state, occurs in the second input state in which the Bluetooth connection is established, the process of transmitting (outputting) data as the specific information is executed. Therefore, only when the player wants data (for example, game history information) to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the smartphone 200 can be brought close to the pachinko machine 10 and the data can be received by the smartphone 200.例文帳に追加Furthermore, for example, it can be applied when a player operates a game history information reception button on the application APP of the smartphone 200 to request reception of the game history. That is, the data can be transmitted after receiving the trigger of the information acquisition request from the player. Players can avoid receiving unnecessary data.

By appropriately combining the above-described in-communication processes, for example, captured image data of an image displayed on the display surface 41a can be transmitted to the smartphone 200, game history information can be transmitted to the smartphone 200, and special benefits according to game results can be obtained. (For example, benefits on the application APP) may be transmitted to the smartphone 200, or audio data of the pachinko machine 10 may be transmitted to the smartphone 200 so that it can be heard with earphones connected to the smartphone 200. can. In addition, it transmits to the smartphone 200 the notification data of the jackpot at the pachinko machine 10 and the notification data to the player on other effects, and makes the smartphone 200 behave based on the data (for example, display on the touch panel 202, vibration, audio output). Further, since the operation of the smart phone 200 can be transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 as data, the smart phone 200 can be used as a substitute for the effect operation button 24.例文帳に追加In addition, as described above, custom setting information set on the smartphone 200 can be transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 .

<Cutting process>
Next, the cutting process will be explained.

[Processing pattern DS1] (Smartphone 200 side processing)
FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DS1 in disconnection processing (smartphone side).

Processing overview:
This process is configured to cancel the Bluetooth connection with the pachinko machine 10 when the player operates the game end button operated when canceling the Bluetooth connection with the game machine at the end of the game on the application APP of the smartphone 200. is.
A flowchart will be described below.

At step Se8801, a Bluetooth disconnection request is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step Se8802, and the communication with the pachinko machine 10 is disconnected. As will be described later, the gaming machine side also performs processing for disconnecting communication upon receiving a disconnection request from the smartphone 200 (processing patterns DY1, DY2, DY5, DY8).

According to this process, the Bluetooth connection can be disconnected by a simple process.

[Processing pattern DS2] (Smartphone 200 side processing)
FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DS2 in disconnection processing (smartphone side).

Processing overview:
This process is configured to receive data from the pachinko machine 10 before disconnecting the Bluetooth connection, and then disconnect.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se8901, a Bluetooth disconnection request is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se8902 to determine whether there is data to be received from the pachinko machine 10 or not. Specifically, the determination is made by receiving a signal indicating that there is data to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10, which is the other party to which the disconnection request was transmitted. In step Se8902, when it is determined that there is data to be received from the pachinko machine 10 (step Se8902: YES), the process proceeds to step Se8903 and data is received from the pachinko machine 10. The processing of steps Se8902 and Se8903 is repeated until all the data stored in the pachinko machine 10 are received.

In step Se8902, when it is determined that there is no data to be received from the pachinko machine 10 (step Se8902: NO), the process proceeds to step Se8904 and disconnects the communication, and ends this process.

According to this processing, it is possible to disconnect the communication after receiving all the data to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 .

[Processing pattern DY1] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY1 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is a process of disconnecting communication when the smart phone 200 issues a disconnection request to the pachinko machine 10 .
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se9001, it is determined whether or not a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9001 that a disconnection request has been received from the smartphone 200 (step Se9001: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9002 and communication with the smartphone 200 is disconnected. After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9001 that a disconnection request has not been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9001: NO), this process ends.

According to this process, communication with the smartphone 200 can be disconnected by a simple process.

[Processing pattern DY2] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 393 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY2 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process rewrites the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFC module 110 to be invalid in order to avoid multiple connections with other mobile terminals when the pairing process with the smartphone 200 is executed. In this case, the connection information is rewritten to a valid one when disconnecting the communication. Specifically, this process is applied as the disconnection process when the process pattern PY2 (see FIG. 376) is adopted as the pairing process.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se<b>9101 , it is determined whether or not a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9101 that a disconnection request has been received from the smartphone 200 (step Se9101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9102 and communication with the smartphone 200 is disconnected. After that, the process proceeds to step Se9103.

In step Se9103, the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFC module 110 is rewritten from invalid to valid. After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9101 that a disconnection request has not been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9101: NO), this process ends.

According to this process, the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFC module was rewritten to be invalid in order to avoid multiple connections with the mobile terminal. It is possible to communicate with a new mobile terminal.

[Processing pattern DY3] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY3 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is performed when the processing pattern (CY2/CY4/CY6/CY8) configured to perform communication only when the smartphone 200 is in proximity to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 is adopted as the during-communication process. In addition, this processing is adopted as the cutting processing. That is, it is a process of disconnecting communication when the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10 cannot detect the NFC module of the smart phone 200 .
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se<b>9201 , it is determined whether or not the NFC module 110 has detected NFC of the smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9201 that the NFC module 110 has not detected the NFC of the smart phone 200 (step Se9201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9202 to disconnect the communication.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9201 that the NFC module 110 has detected NFC of the smart phone 200 (step Se9201: NO), this process ends.

According to this processing, communication can be performed only when the smart phone 200 is close, and communication can be cut off when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko machine 10, for example. Therefore, connection with the new player's mobile terminal can be started smoothly.

[Processing pattern DY4] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY4 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is configured to disconnect communication when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se9301, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In step Se9301, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off (step Se9301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9302 to disconnect the communication.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9301 that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is not turned off (step Se9301: NO), this process ends.

According to this processing, communication can be disconnected when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

In addition, as another adoptable configuration, a configuration in which communication can be cut off on the pachinko machine 10 side when the smart phone 200 is powered off may be employed. In that case, in step Se9301, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the smartphone 200 is powered off.

[Processing pattern DY5] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY5 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is configured to transmit transmittable data to the smartphone 200 before disconnecting the Bluetooth connection, and then disconnect the communication. This processing corresponds to the processing pattern DS2 on the smartphone 200 side.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se<b>9401 , it is determined whether or not a Bluetooth disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9401 that a Bluetooth disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9402.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9401 that a Bluetooth disconnection request has not been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9401: NO), this process ends.

In step Se<b>9402 , it is determined whether or not there is data to be transmitted to smartphone 200 . If it is determined in Step Se9402 that there is data to be transmitted to smartphone 200 (Step Se9402: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se9403 to transmit data to smartphone 200 . The processing of steps Se9402 and Se9403 is repeated until all the data stored in the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted.

If it is determined in step Se9402 that there is no data to be transmitted (step Se9402: NO), the process proceeds to step Se9404, disconnects the communication, and terminates this process.

According to this processing, it is possible to disconnect the communication after receiving all the data to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200 .

[Processing pattern DY6] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY6 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is based on the premise that the pachinko machine 10 has another NFC module (hereinafter also referred to as NFC for cutting) in addition to the NFC module 110 . The NFC for cutting is installed inside the pachinko machine 10 with the inner frame 13 opened. That is, unless the staff of the game hall uses the cylinder lock 17 to open the inner frame 13, the NFC for cutting cannot be accessed. This NFC for disconnection is provided for the staff of the game hall to forcibly disconnect the communication. In other words, when the Bluetooth connected state as the second input state occurs, the process forcibly enters the Bluetooth connected state as the second input state by inputting a signal by NFC for disconnection as a specific input. This is the process to end the Therefore, the NFC for disconnection is turned ON only when a dedicated NFC terminal possessed only by the staff of the game hall is approached. The NFC for disconnection is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and controlled by the sound and light side MPU 92 . This process is a process of disconnecting communication using NFC for disconnection.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se9501, the sound and light side MPU 92 monitors the NFC for disconnection. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se9502 to determine whether or not the NFC for disconnection is in the ON state. That is, it is determined whether or not a dedicated NFC terminal has approached.

If it is determined in Step Se9502 that the NFC for disconnection is ON (Step Se9502: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se9504 to disconnect the communication. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se9505 to rewrite the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFC module 110 from invalid to valid. After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in Step Se9502 that the NFC for disconnection is not in the ON state (Step Se9502: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se9503.

In step Se9503, it is determined whether or not a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9503 that a disconnection request has not been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9503: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9503 that a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9503: YES), steps Se9504 and Se9505 described above are executed, and this process ends.

According to this process, the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state can be forcibly terminated. That is, communication can be forcibly disconnected. For example, when communication is established with a mobile terminal whose whereabouts are unknown, the hall staff can forcibly disconnect the communication.

Further, as a modified example, by forcibly performing an input (ON state) by the NFC for disconnection in the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state, the Bluetooth input before the input by the NFC for disconnection is performed. A configuration including means for invalidating the input data (for example, custom setting information) by the user may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, the content of new custom setting information input after input via NFC for disconnection is reflected without being affected by the content of custom setting information input before input via NFC for disconnection. be able to. More specifically, for example, when communication is established with a mobile terminal whose location is unknown, when the hall staff forcibly disconnects the communication using the NFC for disconnection, the mobile terminal whose location is unknown by then can be invalidated, and the content of new custom setting information input from a mobile terminal by a new player after input by NFC for disconnection can be reflected.

In this process, NFC for disconnection is used to forcibly disconnect communication, but the configuration is not limited to such, and other configurations may be used as specific inputs. For example, a switch capable of forcibly disconnecting communication may be provided on the front door frame 14 . An NFC for cutting may be installed on the front door frame 14 . A configuration may be employed in which a sensor capable of detecting the approach of a hand or the like to the window section 18 is provided, and communication is forcibly disconnected when the hand approaches the window section 18 .

[Processing pattern DY7] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 398 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY7 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This process is configured to set a valid time for one connection with the mobile terminal. Specifically, a timer (connection timer) for counting connection time is provided, and communication is disconnected when the actual connection time (connection timer value) reaches a preset connection valid time.
A flowchart will be described below.

In Step Se9601, it is determined whether or not the connection timer value has reached a preset connection valid time. If it is determined in Step Se9601 that the connection timer value has reached the preset connection valid time (Step Se9601: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se9602 to disconnect the communication.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se9601 that the connection timer value has not reached the preset connection valid time (Step Se9601: NO), this processing ends.

According to this processing, it is possible to set a limit on the communication time for one communication.

[Processing pattern DY8] (Pachinko machine 10 side processing)
FIG. 399 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY8 in the cutting processing (pachinko machine 10 side).

Processing overview:
This processing is intended to be executed when the mobile terminal that has been connected (communicated) and disconnected in the past stores the Bluetooth connection information of the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile terminal approaches the pachinko machine 10 again. In order to prevent automatic connection to the pachinko machine 10 without being connected automatically, when disconnecting the communication with the connected mobile terminal, the connection information itself of the BT module 111 is changed to new connection information. Then, the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 is also changed to the new connection information. In order for the mobile terminal to be connected to the pachinko machine 10 again, it can be connected after approaching the pachinko machine 10 again and performing pairing processing. That is, when ending the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state, if the predetermined condition of approaching the pachinko machine 10 again and performing pairing processing before connecting is not satisfied, the second As the input state of 2, a process is executed to restrict the occurrence of the Bluetooth connection state. In this process, when disconnecting the communication, the password of the BT module 111 itself and the password stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 are changed each time. may be adopted.
A flowchart will be described below.

In step Se<b>9701 , it is determined whether or not a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 . If it is determined in step Se9701 that a disconnection request has been received from smartphone 200 (step Se9701: YES), the process proceeds to step Se9702 and communication with smartphone 200 is disconnected. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se9703.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se9701 that the disconnection request has not been received from the smartphone 200 (step Se9701: NO), the process proceeds to step Se9703.

At step Se9703, the password in the connection information of the BT module 111 itself of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to a new password. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se9704.

At Step Se9704, the password in the connection information stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 is changed to the new password. That is, both the password of the BT module 111 itself and the password stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 are changed, and both are set to the same password. After that, this process is terminated.

According to this process, when ending the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state, the pairing process is performed by approaching the pachinko machine 10 again as a predetermined condition for generating the second input state again. By setting the condition that the connection is made after performing problem can be circumvented. For example, if the smartphone 200, which has established a communication state with a predetermined gaming machine in the past, can unconditionally establish communication with the pachinko machine 10 from the next time, the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 will be connected against the will of the player. may establish communication with the According to this process, even if the smartphone 200 has established the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state with the pachinko machine 10 in the past, in order to establish the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state next time, By setting a predetermined occurrence condition, it is possible to avoid the problem that the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 establish a Bluetooth connection state as the second input state against the player's will.

More specifically, it is possible to prevent automatic connection of a portable terminal that has been connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the past. That is, in order for the smartphone 200 to be connected to the pachinko machine 10 again, the smartphone 200 can be connected after performing the pairing process by approaching or contacting the pachinko machine 10 again. In this process, when disconnecting the communication, the password of the BT module 111 itself and the password stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 are changed each time. may be adopted.

Here, the effect of this processing will be described in more detail. Conventionally, there are various products using NFC and products using Bluetooth. Acquisition of Bluetooth connection information with one touch by NFC and making a Bluetooth connection based on the information on the smartphone side can also be applied to other devices. For example, Bluetooth connectable earphones can be considered. When connecting the earphone to a smartphone via Bluetooth, it is necessary to perform pairing. At that time, it is also possible to acquire the Bluetooth connection information on the earphone side with one touch by NFC and perform Bluetooth connection for pairing with the earphone based on the information on the smartphone side. However, normally, pairing is performed when connecting for the first time, and the significant point of Bluetooth is that it is automatically connected after that, and each time NFC is used to acquire connection information and pairing Going there and making a connection is rather disadvantageous, such as an increase in processing, an increase in the user's time and effort, and the cost of installing the NFC function. That is, the effect of installing NFC in a device using normal Bluetooth is relatively small, and the disadvantage is large. However, the idea of acquiring Bluetooth connection information with one touch using NFC and connecting to the other party based on that information on the smartphone side is not a viable option for players in pachinko parlors where there are many other devices (game machines) that can be connected. This is very effective when pairing the smartphone of the player with a gaming machine arbitrarily selected by the player. Pachinko parlors are generally equipped with a wide variety of gaming machines from a large number of companies. When playing a game, a player arbitrarily selects one of them and plays the game. However, the player does not play with the same gaming machine every day, but changes the gaming machine on which he plays many times during the day. Not only that, there are also players who change the hole they play on a daily basis. In such a case, it is not desirable for the player, the gaming machine, or the pachinko hall to be automatically connected to the gaming machine that has been paired once, and the smartphone of the player and the gaming machine can communicate automatically. It is disadvantageous to be This process can solve the problem. Specifically, as described above, when ending the Bluetooth connection state as the second input state, the player approaches the pachinko machine 10 again as a predetermined condition for generating the second input state again. By setting the condition that the connection is made after the pairing process is performed, the second input state is generated once, and from the next time onwards, the second input state is unconditionally changed to the second input state. Or you can avoid processing problems. In other words, the process of acquiring Bluetooth connection information with one touch using NFC and making a Bluetooth connection on the smartphone side based on that information has a small effect and a large disadvantage even if it is applied to a general device. When applied to a machine, the effect is very large.

The disconnection processing on the gaming machine side has been described above, but there are three cases where the communication state between the smartphone 200 in the Bluetooth communication state and the pachinko machine 10 is disconnected.
(Case 1) When a disconnection request is received from the smartphone 200 (DY1, DY2, DY5, DY8)
(Case 2) Disconnection on the game machine side (DY3, DY4, DY6, DY7)
(Case 3) When the smartphone 200 is out of the Bluetooth communicable range As in case 3 above, if the player moves out of the Bluetooth-connected gaming machine and goes out of the Bluetooth communicable range, the Bluetooth communication state can no longer be maintained, resulting in a substantially disconnected state. In this case, there is no disconnection request from the smartphone 200 side, and even if the pachinko machine 10 transmits a disconnection confirmation, there is no reply. In this case, the disconnection process is performed based on the fact that the connection has been disconnected. In this case, the processing is performed assuming that a request has been made by judging "Is there a disconnection request?"
The connection method, communication method, and disconnection method between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 have been described above.

Next, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described after describing the problems with the conventional pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it has been desired to input and output various types of information between a game machine and a player. There is a demand for further improvement in convenience.

Specifically, for example, when exchanging information with a gaming machine using a player's mobile terminal such as a smartphone, a two-dimensional code is created that can identify the information that the gaming machine intends to output. A player can read the two-dimensional code using a portable terminal, connect to the Internet with the portable terminal, and identify the read two-dimensional code as information. Therefore, there is a demand to input information to and output information from the gaming machine more simply.

Here, when inputting information to the gaming machine and outputting information from the gaming machine by communicating with the player's mobile terminal by installing a Bluetooth or WiFi module on the gaming machine side, the following A problem arises. That is, when a player opens his mobile terminal and tries to communicate with an arbitrary gaming machine in a game hall, it is very complicated work to search for the arbitrary gaming machine and establish a safe communication state. will be required.

The configuration adopted by the pachinko 10 of the present embodiment to address the above problems will be specifically described below.

According to this embodiment, as a configuration, an internal lottery is executed based on determination that the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied by the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery process, a variable display unit that executes variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery, and a winning game cycle that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the internal lottery is a specific result. A specific game execution unit for executing a specific game state after the end of the variation, an effect execution process for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effects during the variable display for the predetermined period, and an external input by the player for the effect execution process. and an external input means capable of Then, according to the present embodiment, the external input means detects a detection completion state when a predetermined detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance during a predetermined standby period. unit, and when a first input state in which the detection unit is in a detection completion state occurs, the game machine stores information stored in a predetermined storage means and a plurality of associations related to effect execution processing. An external output means is provided for externally outputting information, and when a corresponding information input state in which predetermined information input corresponding to a plurality of externally output related information is detected occurs, a predetermined settable element in the effect execution process is generated. External inputs and external outputs of the corresponding information are possible.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, it is possible to suitably perform information input to and output from the gaming machine. Therefore, the information corresponding to the elements that can be set for the performance execution process can be input to the gaming machine from the outside, and can be output from the gaming machine to the outside, thereby improving the interest of the game. can. Since the information on the elements that can be set for the effect execution process stored in the game machine can be output to the outside of the game machine, the information on the elements that can be set for the effect execution process outside the game machine can be output. It can be used, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as the state of the game machine, the input and output of information related to the elements that can be set in the execution of the effect occur due to the occurrence of a state in which the input of information corresponding to a plurality of performance execution related information is detected after the detection completion state. Since it is configured to be possible, it is possible to avoid unintentionally inputting and outputting information about elements that can be set in the performance execution without any conditions or state transitions. .

Further, when a predetermined object to be detected approaches or touches the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance, the detection complete state is reached. By doing so, it is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information about elements that can be set in the performance of the rendering. More specifically, in order to enter the detection completion state, the intention of the player is confirmed by making it a condition that a predetermined object to be detected approaches or contacts the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information corresponding to information that can be set in the execution of the effect against the intention of the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the first special figure lottery and the conditions for executing the second special figure lottery are satisfied. It is possible to execute a special lottery based on the fact that the condition is determined to be satisfied, and based on the result of the special lottery, execute the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined period, and the result of the special lottery A special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed after the end of the variation of the winning game round to display a specific display result executed in the case of a big hit, and the variation performance is executed during the variation display for a predetermined period, and the variation performance is executed. On the other hand, an input means by Bluetooth is provided to enable the player to input custom setting information. Then, the input means by Bluetooth is the NFC module that enters the NFC detection state when the smartphone approaches or touches the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance in the NFC monitoring state, and the NFC module enters the NFC detection state. means for outputting the Bluetooth connection information stored in the NFC RAM 110a by NFC when a first input state occurs, and inputting a connection request corresponding to the means for outputting the Bluetooth connection information by NFC. is detected, it is possible to input through Bluetooth the custom setting information of the effect and output through Bluetooth the game history information in the execution of the effect.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is preferable to input and output information of effects that can be custom set for execution of effects in the pachinko machine 10 and game history information via Bluetooth. becomes possible. Therefore, performance information and game history information that can be custom set for performance execution can be input to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside, and can be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved. Customizable performance information and game history information can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 for execution of the performance stored in the pachinko machine 10, and the performance can be executed outside the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Information on effects that can be customized and game history information can be used, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

As a more specific effect, for example, it is possible to prepare custom setting information related to presentation of the gaming machine in advance, and to input the custom setting information to the gaming machine from the outside (for example, mobile terminal) when playing a game. By adopting such a configuration, instead of performing custom setting of the effect by the player operating the effect operation buttons provided in the gaming machine or the cross key, for example, the player can customize the effect preset on the mobile terminal. Setting information can be input to the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time spent by the player to make custom settings on the gaming machine. As a result, the configuration makes it easy for players who want to play games on a game machine as soon as possible and players who want to enjoy games even for a short time because they have come all the way to the game hall to use the custom settings of the production. can be

Furthermore, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make custom settings for effects on the smartphone 200, so manual input using the effect operation buttons or the cross key before the start of the game can be avoided. can be done. A player can comfortably perform custom settings for effects on a portable terminal (for example, a smartphone) using a touch panel or the like with excellent operability. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily make detailed custom settings related to the effect, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the state of the pachinko machine 10, after passing through the NFC detection state, a state in which an input of a connection request, which is information corresponding to the connection information of Bluetooth, is detected occurs. Information and game history information can be input and output. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting history information.

In addition, when the smartphone 200 approaches or touches the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance, the NFC detection state is entered. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting the information of the performance that can be custom set for the execution of the performance and the game history information. More specifically, in order to enter the NFC detection state, the player's intention can be confirmed by making it a condition that the smartphone 200 is brought close to or in contact with the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inputting and outputting the information of the performance that can be custom set for the execution of the performance and the game history information against the intention of the player.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when the corresponding information input state occurs, suppression is performed to suppress the output of a plurality of related information that was output when the detection completion state occurred during the predetermined waiting period. can be processed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when a new detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit within a predetermined distance while the corresponding information input state is occurring, a plurality of Output of related information can be suppressed. For example, when a detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit and enters the corresponding information input state after passing through the detection completion state, another detectable object is at a predetermined distance from the detection execution unit. Since the output of a plurality of related information output when the detection completion state occurs even if the object approaches or abuts to the target, the corresponding information is input in response to the proximity or abutment of the detectable object. state can be suppressed. In other words, it is possible to prevent a plurality of detectable objects from entering a corresponding information input state.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request is completed occurs, a plurality of associations output when a detection completion state occurs in a predetermined waiting period. A suppression process for suppressing the output of information can be performed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed is occurring, the new mobile terminal reaches the NFC detectable distance with respect to the NFC antenna. It is possible to suppress the output of Bluetooth connection information when the device is in close proximity or contact with the device. For example, when a mobile terminal goes through the NFC detection state due to proximity or contact with the NFC antenna and enters the Bluetooth communication state where the input of the connection request is completed, another mobile terminal detects NFC from the NFC antenna. Since it suppresses the output of the Bluetooth connection information that is output when the NFC detection state occurs even if the mobile terminal comes close to or touches within a possible distance, a connection request will not be issued when the other mobile terminal comes close to or touches. It is possible to suppress entering the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of is completed. That is, it is possible to prevent a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed with a plurality of other mobile terminals that can be detected.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, if input of a plurality of related information is not detected until a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the detection completion state, the corresponding information input state cannot be generated again. Generates the condition necessary to generate a detection complete condition.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, a state in which input of a plurality of pieces of related information is not detected even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the occurrence of the detection completion state occurs against the player's will. There is a possibility that a detection completion state has occurred, a case where the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine, and the like. According to this embodiment, in such a case, in order to generate the corresponding information input state, the player who caused the detection completion state is generated by generating a state that needs to generate the detection completion state again. Then, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who generated the corresponding information input state is different from that state.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the input of the connection request is completed when the input of the connection request is not detected until a predetermined period has elapsed since the NFC detection state occurred. In order to generate the Bluetooth communication state, a state is generated that requires the NFC detection state to be generated again.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the NFC detection state occurred, the state in which the input of the connection request is not detected is not the player's intention. On the other hand, there is a possibility that an NFC detection state has occurred, or the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine. According to the present embodiment, in such a case, in order to generate the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed, the NFC detection state is generated by generating a state that requires the NFC detection state to be generated again. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who generated the state is different from the player who generated the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed from that state.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when a corresponding information input state occurs, a termination process for forcibly ending the corresponding information input state is performed by inputting a specific element.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the corresponding information input state occurs, by performing the termination process of forcibly ending the corresponding information input state by inputting a specific element, the corresponding information If maintaining the input state causes inconvenience in the game or processing, or a problem in the game or processing, by forcibly ending the corresponding information input state, the inconvenience or problem can be avoided or solved. can be resolved.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when a Bluetooth communication state occurs in which input of a connection request is completed, the input of the connection request is forcibly completed by inputting via NFC for disconnection. Perform termination processing to end the Bluetooth communication state.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, when the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed occurs, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is forcibly completed by performing the input by NFC for disconnection By performing the end processing to terminate the connection request input, if maintaining the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed causes inconvenience in the game or processing, or problems in the game or processing, force This inconvenience or problem can be avoided or resolved by terminating the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, when the corresponding information input state occurs, by inputting a specific element, the external input input before the input of the specific element is performed. Perform invalidation processing to invalidate.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the corresponding information input state occurs, by inputting a specific element, the external input input before the input of the specific element is performed. Since it is invalidated, it is possible to reflect the contents of a new external input input after the specific element is input without being affected by the contents of the external input input before the specific element is input.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when a Bluetooth communication state occurs in which input of a connection request is completed, the NFC for disconnection is input by inputting the NFC for disconnection. Disable Bluetooth input that was entered before

Therefore, as a specific effect, it is possible to reflect the content of new custom setting information input after input via NFC for disconnection without being affected by the content of custom setting information input before input via NFC for disconnection. can. More specifically, for example, when communication is established with a mobile terminal whose location is unknown, when the hall staff forcibly disconnects the communication using the NFC for disconnection, the mobile terminal whose location is unknown by then can be invalidated, and the content of new custom setting information input from a mobile terminal by a new player after input by NFC for disconnection can be reflected.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when the corresponding information input state is terminated and a predetermined occurrence condition is not satisfied, a restriction process is performed to restrict the occurrence of the corresponding information input state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the corresponding information input state is ended, the corresponding information input state is once generated by setting a predetermined condition for generating the corresponding information input state again. With this, it is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by unconditionally shifting to the corresponding information input state from the next time. For example, if a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined game machine in the past becomes able to establish communication with the game machine unconditionally from the next time, the game machine and the mobile terminal may may establish communication with the According to the present embodiment, even a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined gaming machine in the past can set a predetermined condition to establish communication next time, thereby allowing the mobile terminal to establish a communication state against the player's will. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the game machine and the portable terminal.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when the connection request input is completed and the Bluetooth communication state is terminated, the connection request Restrict to not generate the Bluetooth communication state where the input of is completed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, when ending the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed is generated again. By setting a condition to pass through the NFC detection state again, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed once has been generated. It is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by shifting to the communication state. For example, when the smartphone 200 that has established a communication state with a predetermined pachinko machine 10 in the past becomes able to unconditionally establish communication with the pachinko machine 10 from the next time, the pachinko machine 10 will There is a risk that communication with the smartphone 200 will be established. According to the present embodiment, even if the smartphone 200 has established a communication state with the pachinko machine 10 in the past, by providing a condition that the NFC detection state is passed again in order to establish communication next time, a game can be played. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 against the will of the person.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, when the detection completion state occurs in the corresponding information input state, the specific output information is output.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, when the detection completion state occurs in the corresponding information input state, the specific output information is output. That is, the specific output information is output when the player brings the detectable object close to or in contact with the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance to complete the detection. Therefore, it is possible to avoid outputting the specific output information against the player's will, and to output the specific output information after confirming the player's intention.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, game history information is output when an NFC detection state occurs in a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, game history information is output when an NFC detection state occurs in a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed. That is, the game history information is output when the player brings the smartphone 200 close to or in contact with the NFC antenna to the NFC detectable distance to enter the NFC detection state. Therefore, outputting the game history information against the player's will can be avoided, and the game history information can be output after confirming the player's intention.

As another specific configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 are in a Bluetooth communication state (corresponding information input state), another NFC-equipped mobile terminal approaches or abuts the NFC of the pachinko machine 10. When the detection completion state is reached, disconnection confirmation data (confirmation image, etc.) for disconnection is first transmitted (output) to the smartphone 200 in the Bluetooth communication state. good too. More specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which data of a confirmation image asking “Do you want to disconnect?” is transmitted to the smartphone 200 . By doing so, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the smartphone 200 that was previously in the Bluetooth communication state without the recognition of the player who is the owner of the smartphone 200 .

<<8-5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes normal processing and timer interrupt processing. In addition to normal processing and timer interrupt processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing will be explained. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Se0101, a startup initial setting process is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0102.

At step Se 0102 , an activation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . The activation command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0103.

At step Se0103, interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, infinite loop processing is repeated to wait, and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed (every 2 ms in this embodiment).

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. In step Se1101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is saved. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0102.

In step Se1102, various counter updating processes are executed. Specifically, special figure right or wrong determination counter Cs1, special figure type determination counter Cs2, special figure reach determination counter Cs3, special figure fluctuation type counter Cs4, general figure right or wrong determination counter Cn1, general figure type determination counter Cn2, random number initial value Each value of the counter Cini is incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, each value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1, Cn2 and Cini are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1103.

In step Se1103, ball entry processing for each ball entrance is executed. Details of ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described later. After executing step Se1103, the process proceeds to step Se1104.

In step Se1104, special figure special electric control processing is executed. The special figure special electric control process executes the special figure lottery described above based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34, and the first special symbol display 37a, the second 2 This is the first control process for controlling the special symbol display 37b and the special electric accessory 57b. The details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Se1104, the process proceeds to step Se1105.

In step Se1105, the normal figure normal electric control process is performed. The normal pattern normal electric control process executes the normal pattern lottery described above based on the entrance of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35, and the second control process for controlling the normal symbol display 38a and the normal electric accessory 34b is. The details of the general map general electric control processing will be described later. After executing step Se1105, the process proceeds to step Se1106.

In step Se1106, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above-described or later-described processing are transmitted to sub-side control devices such as the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, for example, when a prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to various effects are set, those commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step Se1107, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for each entrance>
Next, ball entry processing for each ball entrance will be described. The ball entry process for each ball entrance is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 402 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for each ball entrance. At step Se1201, ball entry processing for a general winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the general winning opening, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is detected, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls, which is the setting information set in the general winning opening 32, is issued. Set as a command to be sent. After executing step Se1201, the process proceeds to step Se1202.

At step Se1202, ball entry processing for the big winning hole is executed. In the ball entry process for the big winning hole, when the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 57a is detected, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls, which is the setting information set for the big winning hole 57a, is issued. Set as a command to be sent. After executing step Se1202, the process proceeds to step Se1203.

In step Se1203, a ball entry process for the first special figure start opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start opening 33 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Se1203, the process proceeds to step Se1204.

In step Se1204, a ball entry process for the second special figure start opening is executed. In the ball entry process for the second special figure start opening, when the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start opening 34 is detected, various kinds of processing are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the second special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Se1204, the process proceeds to step Se1205.

In step Se1205, the entry process for the normal figure starting gate is executed. In the entry process for the normal pattern starting gate, when the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 35 is detected, various processes are executed. The details of the entering ball processing for the normal figure start gate will be described later. After step Se1205 is executed, this ball entry processing for each ball entrance ends.

<Entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the first special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the first special figure starting port. In step Se1301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 33. In step Se1301, if it is determined that the game ball entered the first special figure start port 33 (step Se1301: YES), proceed to step Se1302, the setting information set in the first special figure start port 33 A prize ball command corresponding to a certain number of prize balls is set as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1303. On the other hand, in step Se1301, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the first special figure starting opening 33 (step Se1301: NO), the entering process for the first special figure starting opening is terminated.

In step Se1303, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is less than the upper limit. In addition, the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is a value indicating the number of the first special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 33. In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is four.

In step Se1303, when it determines with 1st special figure reservation number Ns1 being less than an upper limit (step Se1303: YES), it progresses to step Se1304 and adds 1 to 1st special figure reservation number Ns1. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1305.

In step Se1305, the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 are stored in the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending number Ns1 to which 1 is added in step Se1303. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1306.

In step Se1306, a first special figure destination determination process is executed. In the first special figure destination determination process, each value (the first special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the first special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the first special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. After executing step Se1306, the process proceeds to step Se1307.

In step Se1307, the first special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the first special figure destination determination process described above is set as the first special figure reservation command. The first special figure reservation command is for the sub-side control device, the first special figure destination determination for the first special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first special figure start port 33 It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the first special figure reservation information becomes the target of the first special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the first special symbol. When the first special figure reservation command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 according to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first special figure reservation display area Ds1 of the design display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the first special figure reservation number Ns1. After executing step Se1307, the ball entry process for the first special figure start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Se1303, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not less than the upper limit (step Se1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is the upper limit , without storing the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this first special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Entering ball processing for the second special figure start port>
Next, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port will be described. The ball entry processing for the second special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry processing for each ball entry port described above.

FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port. In step Se1401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port . In step Se1401, if it is determined that the game ball entered the second special figure start port 34 (step Se1401: YES), proceed to step Se1402, the setting information set in the second special figure start port 34 A prize ball command corresponding to a certain number of prize balls is set as a command to be transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1403. On the other hand, in step Se1401, when it is determined that the game ball did not enter the second special figure start opening 34 (step Se1401: NO), the second special figure start opening processing is terminated.

In step Se1403, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is a value indicating the number of second special figure lotteries that are reserved (waiting for execution) based on the entry of game balls into the second special figure starting port 34 . In this embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is four.

In step Se1403, when it determines with 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2 being less than an upper limit (step Se1403: YES), it progresses to step Se1404 and adds 1 to 2nd special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1405.

In step Se1405, the values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 are stored in the second special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b of the RAM64. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation number Ns2 to which 1 is added in step Se1403. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1406.

In step Se1406, a second special figure destination determination process is executed. In the second special figure destination determination process, each value (the second special figure Reservation information), the judgment result of the second special figure lottery (judgment result of special figure right or wrong judgment, judgment result of special figure type judgment, judgment result of presence or absence of special figure reach, etc.), the second special figure It is a process to determine before the pending information becomes the target of the second special lottery with the variation of the second special symbol. After executing step Se1406, the process proceeds to step Se1407.

In step Se1407, the second special figure pending command is set. Specifically, each determination result of the second special figure destination determination process described above is set as the second special figure reservation command. The second special figure reservation command is a second special figure destination determination for the second special figure reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second special figure start port 34 for the control device on the sub side It is a command for recognizing the determination result of the process before the second special figure reservation information becomes the target of the second special figure lottery accompanied by the variation of the second special symbol. When the second special figure pending command is received, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display in the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the increase in the second special figure pending number Ns2. A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second special figure reservation display area Ds2 of the design display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After executing step Se1407, the ball entry process for the second special figure starting port 34 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Se1403, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not less than the upper limit (step Se1403: NO), that is, if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is the upper limit , without storing each value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1, the special figure type determination counter Cs2, the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 and the special figure variation type counter Cs4 in the special figure reservation area 64b, this second special figure start port End the ball entry process for

<Pitch ball processing for normal map starting gate>
Next, a description will be given of the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. The ball entry process for the normal map start gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ball entry process for each ball entrance described above.

FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the normal pattern starting gate. In step Se1501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal figure starting gate 35. In step Se1501, when it is determined that the game ball entered the normal figure starting gate 35 (step Se1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1502. On the other hand, in step Se1501, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the normal pattern starting gate 35 (step Se1501: NO), the normal pattern starting gate entry processing is terminated.

In step Se1502, it is determined whether or not the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is less than the upper limit. It should be noted that the number Nn1 of normal pattern reservation is a value indicating the number of normal pattern lottery (waiting for execution) that is reserved based on the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 35. In this embodiment, the upper limit (maximum value) of the number Nn1 of normal figure reservation is four.

In step Se1502, when it is determined that the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation is less than the upper limit (step Se1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1503, and 1 is added to the number Nn1 of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1504.

In step Se1504, each value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 and the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the general pattern reservation area 64d of the RAM64, that is, the general pattern in which 1 is added in step Se1503 Store in a storage area corresponding to the number Nn1 of reservations. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1505.

In step Se1505, a normal figure pending command is set. The general pattern reservation command is a command for recognizing that the general pattern lottery has been reserved based on the entrance of the game ball to the general pattern start gate 35 for the control device on the sub side. After executing step Se1505, the entry process for the normal pattern starting gate 35 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Se1502, if it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is not less than the upper limit (step Se1502: NO), that is, if it is determined that the normal figure reservation number Nn1 is the upper limit, Without storing the respective values of the determination counter Cn1 and the normal pattern type determination counter Cn2 in the normal pattern reservation area 64d, the entry process for the main normal pattern start gate is terminated.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing will be described. The special figure special electric control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the special figure special train control process. In step Se2101, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing Step Se2101, the process proceeds to Step Se2102.

In step Se2102, a special symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing Step Se2102, the process proceeds to Step Se2103.

In step Se2103, special symbol fluctuation post-stop processing, which is processing after stopping the special symbol fluctuation, is executed. The details of the special symbol variation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing Step Se2103, the process proceeds to Step Se2104.

In step Se2104, special electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start process is a process for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode when the conditions for starting the special electric opening/closing execution mode are satisfied. The details of the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing Step Se2104, the process proceeds to Step Se2105.

In step Se2105, processing during the special electric opening period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening period is processing executed during the special electric opening period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening period will be described later. After executing Step Se2105, the process proceeds to Step Se2106.

In step Se2106, processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is processing executed during the special electric opening/closing period. The details of the processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described later. After executing Step Se2106, the process proceeds to Step Se2107.

In step Se2107, processing during the special electric ending period is executed. The processing during the special electric ending period is processing executed during the special electric ending period. The details of the processing during the special electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Se2107, this special figure special electric control processing is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process described above.

FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. In step Se2201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value stored in the main side RAM64 is "01". The special figure special electric control value is a value indicating what stage the progress status of the control of the special symbol and the special electric accessory is, and in this embodiment, the special figure special electric control value being "01" means that It shows that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, when the special figure special electric control value is "01", the first special symbol or the second special figure when the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more This indicates that it is possible to start changing the symbol. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Se2201, if it is determined that the special symbol electric control value is not "01" (step Se2201: NO), this special symbol variation start process is executed without executing any of the processes after step Se2202 described later. finish. That is, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, the special symbol does not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Se2201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "01" (step Se2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2202.

In step Se2202, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is greater than or equal to "1". In step Se2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is "1" or more (step Se2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2203, and 1 is subtracted from the second special figure reservation number Ns2. After that, the process proceeds to step Se2204.

In step Se2204, the second special figure reservation information shift process, which is the process of shifting the second special figure reservation information stored in each area of the second special figure reservation area Rb of the special figure reservation area 64b, is executed. Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the second special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb to the special figure determination area 64c, The 2nd special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing Step Se2204, the process proceeds to Step Se2208, which will be described later.

In step Se2202, when it is determined that the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is not "1" or more (step Se2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2205, and the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more Determine whether or not In step Se2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is not "1" or more (step Se2205: NO), this special symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se2205, when it is determined that the first special figure reservation number Ns1 is "1" or more (step Se2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2206, and 1 is subtracted from the first special figure reservation number Ns1 . After that, the process proceeds to Step Se2207.

In step Se2207, a first special figure reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the first special figure reservation information stored in each area of the first special figure reservation area Ra of the special figure reservation area 64b, is executed. Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information shift process, after moving the first special figure reservation information stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra to the special figure determination area 64c, The 1st special figure reservation information in each area is shifted in order of 2 area -> 1st area, 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area. After executing Step Se2207, the process proceeds to Step Se2208.

In step Se2208, a special figure success/failure determination process, which is a process for determining whether or not to win a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure validity determination process, the above-described special figure validity determination table is selected based on the type of lottery mode and reservation, and the selected special figure validity determination table and the special figure determination area 64c are stored. Based on the value of the special figure success/failure determination counter Cs1, it is determined whether or not to win the special figure. After executing Step Se2208, the process proceeds to Step Se2209.

In step Se2209, a special symbol type determination process, which is a process for determining the type of special symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, based on the special figure type determination result, the value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure type determination table, Determine the type of pattern. After executing Step Se2209, the process proceeds to Step Se2210.

At step Se2210, the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure type determined in the special figure type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag, and when it is determined that it is a special symbol B, A special symbol B flag is turned ON as a special symbol type flag. After executing Step Se2210, the process proceeds to Step Se2211.

In step Se2211, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is the variation time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a (first special symbol variation time) or the variation time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b (second Toku-zu fluctuation time) is a process to determine. Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the lottery mode, the type of suspension, the result of the special figure right or wrong determination, the value of the special figure reach determination counter Cs3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c, and the special figure The special figure fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the figure fluctuation type counter Cs4 and the special figure fluctuation time table.

In step Se2212, the value corresponding to the special figure variation time determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process is set to the special figure variation time timer counter. After executing Step Se2212, the process proceeds to Step Se2213.

In step Se2213, a special figure variation pattern command is set. In the special figure variation pattern command, the variation of the special symbol this time is based on the entrance of the game ball to which special figure start opening, the first special figure start opening 33 or the second special figure start opening 34 In addition to containing information indicating the presence or absence of reach, information on the set special figure fluctuation time is included. After executing Step Se2213, the process proceeds to Step Se2214.

In step Se2214, a special figure type command is set. The special figure type command includes the information of the result of the special figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a special figure jackpot) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command, which are the setting information set in steps Se2213 and step Se2214, are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the production (production pattern) based on the received special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. . After executing Step Se2214, the process proceeds to Step Se2215.

In step Se2215, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 37b is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Se2216 to set the special figure special electric control value to "02". In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a state of being changed. After that, the special symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol variation stop processing will be described. The special symbol variation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control processing.

FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation stop processing. In step Se2301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "02" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a fluctuating state. In step Se2301, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "02" (step Se2301: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se2301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "02" (step Se2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2302.

In step Se2302, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed do. In step Se2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has not passed (step Se2302: NO), this special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se2302, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Se2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2303.

In step Se2303, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is fluctuating on the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b is stopped in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. display. As a result, the first special symbol display device 37a or the second special symbol display device 37b displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Stop is displayed. After executing Step Se2303, the process proceeds to Step Se2304.

In step Se2304, a special figure stop display time setting process is executed. The special figure stop display time setting process includes the stop display time (first special figure stop display time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 37a and the second special symbol stop display in the second special symbol display device 37b. It is a process of setting the time (second special figure stop display time). Specifically, in the special figure stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (1.0 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the special figure stop display time timer counter. After executing step Se2304, it proceeds to step Se2305 and sets "03" to the special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special symbol special electric control value is "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after stopping special symbol fluctuation>
Next, the processing after the special symbol fluctuation stop will be described. The special symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special symbol special electric control process.

FIG. 409 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Se2401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol special electric control value of "03" indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In step Se2401, when it is determined that the special symbol special electric control value is not "03" (step Se2401: NO), this special symbol fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se2401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "03" (step Se2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2402.

In step Se2402, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop display time set in the special figure stop display time setting process described above has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the special figure stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Se2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has not passed (step Se2402: NO), this special symbol variation stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se2402, when it is determined that the special figure stop display time has elapsed (step Se2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2403.

In step Se2403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit (special figure jackpot). In step Se2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Se2403: NO), that is, the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is out of the special figure. If there is, proceed to step Se2404, turn off the special symbol type flag (in this case special symbol Z flag) that is ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Se2405.

The processing from step Se2405 to step Se2410 described next determines whether or not the specified number of special figure fluctuations are executed in the low probability high support state (so-called time saving state), and the specified number of special figure fluctuations are executed. This is a process for turning off the high-frequency support mode flag and shifting to a low-probability low-support state (so-called normal state). The processing of each step will be specifically described below.

In step Se2405, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Se2405 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step Se2413, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2405 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (step Se2405: YES), the process advances to step Se2406 to determine whether or not the high-probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Se2406 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (step Se2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2413, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2406 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (step Se2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2407. That is, when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON and the high-probability mode flag is OFF (when the game state is a low probability high support state, a so-called time saving state), the process proceeds to step Se2407.

At step Se2407, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Se2408 to determine whether or not the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not special figure variation of the specified number of times in the high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in Step Se2408 that the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp is not 0 (Step Se2408: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se2413, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2408 that the value of the high-support remaining number counter Nsp is 0 (step Se2408: YES), the process advances to step Se2409 to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. After that, the process advances to step Se2410 to set a game state command indicating that the game state has become a low probability low support state (normal state) in which the high probability mode flag is OFF and the high frequency support mode flag is also OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Se2411.

At Step Se2411, it is determined whether or not there is a hold. Specifically, when at least one of the first special figure reserved number Ns1 and the second special figure reserved number Ns2 is 0 or more, it is determined that there is a reservation, and the first special figure reserved number Ns1 and the second If any of the special figure reservation number Ns2 is 0, it is determined that there is no reservation. In step Se2411, when it is determined that there is a hold (step Se2411: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2413. On the other hand, in step Se2411, when it is determined that there is no hold (step Se2411: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2412.

At step Se2412, a demo command is set. A demo command is a command that is set when the variable display is stopped and there is no hold. After that, the process proceeds to step Se2413.

In step Se2413, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value is "01" is the first special figure reservation number Ns1 or the second special figure reservation number Ns2 is 1 or more. It shows a state in which it is possible to start the variation of the special symbol or the second special symbol. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Se2403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Se2403: YES), i. If it is a hit, proceed to step Se2414 and set "04" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "04" indicates that the conditions for starting the special electric open/close execution mode are satisfied. After that, this special symbol variation post-stop processing is terminated. Thereby, when the result of the special figure propriety determination related to the variation of the special symbol of this time is a special figure hit, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric opening and closing execution mode start processing>
Next, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing will be described. The special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode start process. In step Se3101, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special special electric control value of "04" indicates that the condition for starting the special electric open/close execution mode, which is a predetermined start condition, is satisfied. In step Se3101, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "04" (step Se3101: NO), this special electric power opening/closing execution mode start processing ends. On the other hand, in step Se3101, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "04" (step Se3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3102.

In step Se3102, special electric switching pattern determination processing is executed. In the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process, based on the special electric opening/closing pattern selection table and the special electric opening/closing pattern flag, one special electric opening/closing pattern in the special electric opening/closing execution mode is determined from among a plurality of patterns, and the special electric opening/closing pattern is referred to in the special electric opening/closing execution mode. This is processing for determining the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario. Then, a movable control process for controlling the special electric accessory 57b is executed based on the determined special electric opening/closing pattern (special electric opening/closing scenario). As will be described later, during execution of a series of opening/closing operations of the special electric accessory 57b based on the determined special electric opening/closing pattern, a display effect, which is a predetermined effect constituting the special electric opening/closing period effect, is displayed on the pattern display device 41. executed. After executing Step Se3102, the process proceeds to Step Se3103.

In step Se3103, the special electric switching scenario corresponding to the determined special electric switching pattern is read from the main side ROM63 and stored in the main side RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3104.

In step Se3104, round number information is acquired from the special electric switching scenario corresponding to the determined special electric switching pattern, and the acquired round number information is set in the remaining round number counter RC provided in the main side RAM64. The value of the remaining round number counter RC is decremented by 1 each time a round game is completed. That is, based on the value set in the remaining round number counter RC, which is the setting information set corresponding to one special electric opening/closing pattern determined from among a plurality of patterns, the special electric accessory 57b performs a series of opening/closing operations. It is possible to make it work. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3105.

In step Se3105, special electric opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the special electric opening time), which is the non-driving period before the start of driving the special electric accessory 57b. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric opening time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process described above, and the obtained special electric opening time information is stored in the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing Step Se3105, the process proceeds to Step Se3106.

In step Se3106, a special electric opening command including information capable of specifying the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices (various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41) so as to execute the special electric opening production and the right-handed information production. After executing step Se3106, it progresses to step Se3107 and sets "05" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started. After that, the special electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated.

<Processing during the special electric opening period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing processing during special electric opening period. In step Se3201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "05" indicates that the special electric opening period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Se3201, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "05" (step Se3201: NO), the special electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Se3201, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "05" (step Se3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3202.

In step Se3202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is "0".

In step Se3202, if it is determined that the special electric opening period is not finished (step Se3202: NO), the special electric opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in Step Se3202, if it is determined that the special electric opening period ends (Step Se3202: YES), the process advances to Step Se3203 to set the special electric open/close period command. The set special electric opening/closing period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. This special electric opening/closing period command includes information on the number of times the special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric opening/closing period. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing period command, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect corresponding to the number of times the special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened based on the received special electric opening/closing period command. to control various performance devices. After executing step Se3203, it proceeds to step Se3204 and sets "06" to the special figure special electric control value. In the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric opening period has ended and the special electric open/close period has started. After that, the processing during the opening period of this special electric transmission ends.

<Processing during special electric opening/closing period>
Next, processing during the special electric opening/closing period will be described. The processing during the special electric opening/closing period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric opening/closing period. In step Se3301, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "06" indicates that the special electric open/close period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Se3301, when it is determined that the special electric charge control value is not "06" (step Se3301: NO), the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends. On the other hand, in step Se3301, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "06" (step Se3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3302.

In step Se3302, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 57b is open. In step Se3302, when it is determined that the special electric accessory 57b is not open (step Se3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Se3303.

In step Se3303, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process is established. In step Se3303, when it is determined that the opening condition of the special electric accessory 57b is established (step Se3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3304.

In step Se3304, the special electric accessory 57b is made to perform the opening operation. In this embodiment, when the control to drive the special electric accessory 57b to the open state side is executed, whether or not the opening/closing operation end condition, which is the operation end condition for ending a series of opening/closing operations, is established. do not judge After executing Step Se3304, the process proceeds to Step Se3305.

In step Se3305, a special electric release command is set. The special electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The special electric release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Se3305, the processing during the special electric opening/closing period ends.

In step Se3303, when it is determined that the opening condition of the special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (step Se3303: NO), the processing during this special electric open/close period ends.

In step Se3302, when it is determined that the special electric accessory 57b is open (step Se3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3306.

In step Se3306, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the special electric accessory 57b is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process is established. More specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one closing condition of the elapse of the maximum opening time or the maximum number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a is established. In step Se3306, if it is determined that the closing condition of the special electric accessory 57b is satisfied, that is, if it is determined that at least one of the closing conditions described above is satisfied (step Se3306: YES), to step Se3307 It advances and causes the special electric accessory 57b to perform the closing action, which is the return action. Therefore, during the period in which the special electric accessory 57b is controlled to the open state side (open control period), the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaches the maximum number of entering balls before the maximum opening time elapses. When the special electric accessory 57b closes early, it becomes a short open period with a short control period, and on the other hand, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 57a reaches the maximum before the maximum open time elapses. When the number of entering balls is not reached, the special electric accessory 57b does not close until the maximum opening time elapses, and the maximum opening period of the long control period is reached. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3308.

In step Se3308, a special electric closing command is set. The special electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the special electric accessory 57b has closed. The special electric closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing Step Se3308, the process proceeds to Step Se3309.

At step Se3309, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining round number counter RC. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se3310 to determine whether or not the value of the remaining round number counter RC is zero. In step Se3310, if it is determined that the value of the remaining round number counter RC is not 0 (step Se3310: NO), this special electric open/close period process ends. On the other hand, in step Se3310, if it is determined that the value of the remaining round number counter RC is 0 (step Se3310: NO), the processing of the previous stage for terminating the special electric open/close period and shifting to the special electric ending period The process advances to a certain step Se3311.

In step Se3311, a special electric ending time setting process is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the special electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric ending time information is obtained from the special electric opening/closing scenario determined by the special electric opening/closing pattern determination process described above, and the obtained special electric ending time information is stored in the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. set to The value of this special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing Step Se3311, the process proceeds to Step Se3312.

In step Se3312, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric ending command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the special electric ending production, and controls various production devices so as to execute the decided special electric ending production. In the present embodiment, control targets different from the special electric accessory 57b are the control targets to be executed after the series of opening and closing operations are completed. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 capable of emitting light are included. After executing step Se3312, it progresses to step Se3313 and sets "07" to a special figure special electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the special figure special electric control value is "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started. After that, the processing during this special electric opening/closing period ends.

<Processing during special electric ending period>
Next, processing during the special electric ending period will be described. The processing during the special electric ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the special electric electric control processing.

FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing processing during the special electric ending period. In step Se3401, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control value of "07" indicates that the special electric ending period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In step Se3401, when it is determined that the special electric power control value is not "07" (step Se3401: NO), this special power ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Se3401, when it is determined that the special figure special electric control value is "07" (step Se3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se3402.

In step Se3402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process described above is "0".

In step Se3402, if it is determined that the special electric ending period has not ended (step Se3402: NO), this special electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in Step Se3402, when it is determined that the special electric ending period is coming to an end (Step Se3402: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se3403.

In step Se3403, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step Se3403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (step Se3403: YES), proceed to step Se3404 and turn on the high probability mode flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se3405 to turn on the high frequency support mode flag. That is, when the special figure type flag that is ON corresponds to the probability variable jackpot, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are turned ON, and the game state continues until the next jackpot is won. It will shift to the high-precision high support state that can be obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3408, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in step Se3403, if it is determined that the special figure type flag that is ON does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot (step Se3403: NO), proceed to step Se3406, turn on the high frequency support mode flag . Thereafter, the process advances to step Se3407 to set 100 as a specified number in the high support remaining number counter Nsp. As described above, this high support remaining number counter Nsp is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation ends, and when the value of the high support remaining number counter Nsp becomes 0, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, when the special figure type flag that is ON does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot, only the high frequency support mode flag is turned on, and the game state can continue until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times. It will shift to a low definite height support state. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3408.

At step Se3408, a game state command including information on the current game state is set. The set game state command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the game state command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various devices for effects based on the information indicating the game state included in the command so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the game state can be executed. After executing step Se3408, it progresses to step Se3409 and turns off the special figure classification flag. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se3410.

At Step Se3410, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special electric opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the special electric opening/closing execution mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 controls various production devices so as to execute an effect corresponding to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Se3411.

In step Se3411, "01" is set to the special figure special electric control value. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special figure reserved number Ns1 or the second special figure reserved number Ns2 is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Indicates a possible state. After that, the processing during the special electric ending period ends.

<Public power control processing>
Next, the general map general electric control processing will be described. The normal/universal electric power control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process described above.

FIG. 414 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process. In step Se4101, a normal design fluctuation start process, which is a process for starting the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display device 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later. After executing Step Se4101, the process proceeds to Step Se4102.

In step Se4102, a normal design fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the normal design fluctuation in the normal design display 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation stop processing will be described later. After executing Step Se4102, the process proceeds to Step Se4103.

In step Se4103, normal design fluctuation post-stop processing, which is processing after stopping the fluctuation of the normal design, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop post-processing will be described later. After executing Step Se4103, the process proceeds to Step Se4104.

In step Se4104, normal electric switching execution mode start processing is executed. The normal switching execution mode start process is a process for starting the normal switching execution mode when the conditions for starting the normal switching execution mode are satisfied. The details of the normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described later. After executing Step Se4104, the process proceeds to Step Se4105.

In step Se4105, processing during the general electric opening period is executed. The normal/universal power opening period process is a process executed during the normal/universal power opening period. The details of the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described later. After executing Step Se4105, the process proceeds to Step Se4106.

In step Se4106, processing during normal electric switching period is executed. The normal power switching period process is a process executed during the normal power switching period. The details of the processing during the normal power switching period will be described later. After executing Step Se4106, the process proceeds to Step Se4107.

In step Se4107, the normal electric ending period process is executed. The general electric ending period process is a process executed during the general electric ending period. The details of the processing during the general electric ending period will be described later. After executing step Se4107, this normal figure normal electric control processing is ended.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start process>
Next, normal design variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process described above.

FIG. 415 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. In step Se4201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value stored in the main side RAM64 is "01". Normal figure normal electric control value is a value indicating which stage the progress status of control of normal symbols and normal electric accessories is, and in this embodiment, normal figure normal electric control value is "01" indicates that the normal symbol is not changed and the normal open/close execution mode is not executed. In other words, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "01" indicates that it is possible to start the normal pattern fluctuation when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more. ing. In the present embodiment, the normal map normal power control value is first set to "01" in the startup initial setting process described above.

In step Se4201, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "01" (step Se4201: NO), without executing any of the processes after step Se4202 described later, this normal pattern fluctuation start process exit. That is, when the normal symbols are fluctuating or during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal symbols do not start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in step Se4201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "01" (step Se4201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se4202.

In step Se4202, it is determined whether or not the number Nn of normal figure reservation is "1" or more. In step Se4202, when it is determined that the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation is "1" or more (step Se4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Se4203, and 1 is subtracted from the number Nn of the normal pattern reservation. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se4204.

In step Se4204, the general pattern reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the general pattern reservation information stored in each area of the general pattern reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern reservation information shift process, after moving the general pattern reservation information stored in the first area of the general pattern reservation area 64d to the general pattern determination area 64e, the second area → the first area , 3rd area -> 2nd area, 4th area -> 3rd area, and so on. After executing Step Se4204, the process proceeds to Step Se4205.

In step Se4205, the normal pattern right or wrong determination process, which is the process of determining whether or not to be elected per normal pattern, is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern correctness determination process, based on the general pattern correctness determination table selected based on the game state and the value of the general pattern correctness determination counter Cn1 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, the general pattern It is determined whether or not to win a prize. After executing Step Se4205, the process proceeds to Step Se4206.

In step Se4206, normal pattern type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of normal symbol (type of stop symbol), is executed. Specifically, in the general pattern type determination process, based on the result of the general pattern type determination, the value of the general pattern type determination counter Cn2 stored in the general pattern determination area 64e, and the general pattern type determination table, normal Determine the type of pattern. After executing Step Se4206, the process proceeds to Step Se4207.

In step Se4207, the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern type determined in the normal pattern type determination process is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is the normal symbol A in the normal pattern type determination process, the normal pattern A flag is turned ON as the normal pattern type flag. After executing Step Se4207, the process proceeds to Step Se4208.

In step Se4208, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display 38a. Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the general pattern fluctuation time is determined based on the game state, the result of the general pattern suitability determination, and the general pattern fluctuation time table, and corresponds to the determined general pattern fluctuation time The value obtained is set in the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter. After executing Step Se4208, the process proceeds to Step Se4209.

In step Se4209, the normal figure fluctuation command is set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation time that has been set. After executing Step Se4209, the process proceeds to Step Se4210.

In step Se4210, the normal figure classification command is set. The general figure type command includes the information of the result of the general figure propriety determination (whether or not there is a general figure hit) and the result of the general figure type determination (normally the type of pattern).

Normal figure variation command and normal figure type command set in steps Se4209 and step Se4210 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process of the timer interrupt process. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance based on the received normal map variation command and the received normal map type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing Step Se4210, the process proceeds to Step Se4211.

In step Se4211, the normal pattern display device 38a starts to change the normal pattern. Then, it progresses to step Se4212 and sets "02" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electric control value is "02" indicates that the general pattern is in a state of fluctuation due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. After that, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, normal design variation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control processing.

FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. In step Se4301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "02". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value is "02" indicates that the normal symbol is in a state of fluctuation. In step Se4301, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "02" (step Se4301: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se4301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "02" (step Se4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se4302.

In step Se4302, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time set in the normal pattern fluctuation time setting process described above has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed. do. In step Se4302, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has not passed (step Se4302: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se4302, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time has passed (step Se4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Se4303.

In step Se4303, the normal symbols that are fluctuating on the normal symbol display 38a are stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the normal symbol classification flag that is ON. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 38a. After executing Step Se4303, the process proceeds to Step Se4304.

In step Se4304, normal figure stop display time setting processing is executed. The normal pattern stop display time setting process is a process of setting the normal pattern stop display time (normal pattern stop display time) in the normal pattern display 38a. Specifically, in the normal map stop display time setting process, a value corresponding to a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment) is set in the normal map stop display time timer counter. After executing step Se4304, it proceeds to step Se4305, and sets "03" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general pattern general electrical control value is "03" indicates that the normal pattern is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

<Processing after normal pattern fluctuation stop>
Next, the processing after normal design fluctuation stop will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation post-stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal pattern normal electric control process.

FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop post-processing. In step Se4401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "03". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electrical control value of "03" indicates that the normal symbol is in the state of being displayed in a stopped state. In step Se4401, when it is determined that the normal pattern normal electric control value is not "03" (step Se4401: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation after-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se4401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "03" (step Se4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se4402.

In step Se4402, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern stop display time set in the normal pattern stop display time setting process described above has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the normal map stop display time timer counter in the main side RAM 64 has become "0", and if it is "0", the normal map stop display time has elapsed I judge. In step Se4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has not passed (step Se4402: NO), this normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se4402, when it is determined that the normal pattern stop display time has elapsed (step Se4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Se4403.

In step Se4403, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern. In step Se4403, if it is determined that the normal pattern type flag corresponding to the normal pattern is not ON (step Se4403: NO), that is, the result of the normal pattern propriety determination related to the fluctuation of the normal pattern is out of the normal pattern. If there is, proceed to step Se4404, the general pattern type flag that is ON (normal pattern Z flag in this case) is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Se4405 and sets "01" to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general pattern general electric control value is "01", when the general pattern reservation number Nn is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol state. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Se4403, if it is determined that the general pattern type flag corresponding to the general pattern is ON (step Se4403: YES), that is, the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the normal pattern fluctuation If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Se4406, and "04" is set to the normal/universal power control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal/universal electric power control value is “04” indicates that the conditions for starting the normal/universal electric switching execution mode are met. After that, the normal pattern fluctuation post-stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the general pattern propriety determination related to the variation of the normal pattern of this time is the general pattern, the general electric opening and closing execution mode is started.

<Common electric switching execution mode start processing>
Next, normal electric switching execution mode start processing will be described. The normal electric switching execution mode start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing normal electric switching execution mode start processing. In step Se5101, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "04". As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal/universal power supply control value being “04” indicates that the condition for starting the normal/universal power switching execution mode has been established. In step Se5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "04" (step Se5101: NO), this normal/universal electric opening/closing execution mode start processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se5101, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "04" (step Se5101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5102.

In step Se5102, normal electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The normal switching scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal switching scenario to be referenced in the normal switching execution mode based on the normal switching scenario selection table and the normal switching scenario selection table. After executing Step Se5102, the process proceeds to Step Se5103.

In step Se5103, general electric opening time setting processing is executed. The general electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric opening period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical opening time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical opening time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of this general electrical opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing Step Se5103, the process proceeds to Step Se5104.

At Step Se5104, a general electric opening command is set. The set general electric opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Se5104, it proceeds to step Se5105, and sets "05" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of "05" indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has started. After that, the normal electric switching execution mode start processing is ended.

<Processing during the opening period of the public electricity>
Next, the processing during the general electricity opening period will be described. The normal/universal electric opening period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal/universal electric power control process.

FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the processing during the general electricity opening period. In step Se5201, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "05". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value is "05" indicates that the electric power opening period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In Step Se5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "05" (step Se5201: NO), this normal/universal electric power opening period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Se5201, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "05" (step Se5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5202.

In Step Se5202, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric opening period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical opening time timer counter set as the general electrical opening time in the general electrical opening time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in Step Se5202 that it is not the time to end the general electric opening period (Step Se5202: NO), this general electric opening period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se5202 that it is time for the general electric opening period to end (Step Se5202: YES), the process advances to Step Se5203 to set the general electric opening/closing period command. The set electric open/close period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. This general electric switching period command includes information on the number of times the electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric switching period. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the general electric opening/closing period command, based on the received general electric opening/closing period command, various production devices so as to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened. to control. After executing step Se5203, it proceeds to step Se5204 and sets "06" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In the present embodiment, the normal/universal electric control value of “06” indicates that the general/universal electric opening period has ended and the general/universal electric opening/closing period has started. After that, the processing during the main electric power opening period ends.

<Processing during normal power switching period>
Next, the processing during the normal electric switching period will be described. The general electric switching period processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the general electric power control processing.

FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing the processing during the normal power switching period. In step Se5301, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "06". As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric power control value is "06" indicates that the general electric opening and closing period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In Step Se5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "06" (Step Se5301: NO), this normal/universal electric switching period process ends. On the other hand, in step Se5301, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "06" (step Se5301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5302.

At Step Se5302, it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the normal switching period is satisfied. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the normal switching period set in the normal switching scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in Step Se5302 that the end condition of the normal switching period is not satisfied (Step Se5302: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se5303.

In step Se5303, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 34b is open. In step Se5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is not open (step Se5303: NO), the process proceeds to step Se5304.

In step Se5304, it is determined whether or not the condition for opening the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Se5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established (step Se5304: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5305.

In step Se5305, the normal electric accessory 34b is released. After that, the process proceeds to step Se5306.

At Step Se5306, a general electric disconnection command is set. The common electric open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the common electric accessory 34b has been opened. The general electric disconnection command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After step Se5306 is executed, this processing during the normal electric switching period ends.

In step Se5304, when it is determined that the opening condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (step Se5304: NO), the process during the normal electric open/close period ends.

In step Se5303, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened (step Se5303: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5307.

In step Se5307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is established. Specifically, the normal switching scenario selected by the normal switching scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b set in the normal switching scenario is established. In step Se5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is satisfied (step Se5307: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5308.

At Step Se5308, the normal electric accessory 34b is closed. After that, the process proceeds to step Se5309.

At Step Se5309, a general electric closing command is set. The general electric closing command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the general electric accessory 34b is closed. The general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process. After step Se5309 is executed, the process during normal electric switching period ends.

In step Se5307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the normal electric accessory 34b is not established (step Se5307: NO), the normal electric open/close period processing is terminated.

When it is determined in Step Se5302 that the conditions for ending the normal switching period are satisfied (Step Se5302: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se5310.

In step Se5310, a normal electric ending time setting process is executed. The general electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the general electric ending period (hereinafter also referred to as the general electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the general electrical switching ending time information is acquired from the general electrical switching scenario selected by the general electrical switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired general electrical ending time information is stored in the general electrical switching scenario provided in the RAM 64. set to the end time timer counter. The value of this electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing Step Se5310, the process proceeds to Step Se5311.

At Step Se5311, a general electric ending command is set. The set general electric ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After executing step Se5318, it progresses to step Se5319 and sets "07" to the normal figure normal electric control value. In this embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the general electric ending period has started. After that, the process during the normal electric switching period ends.

<Processing during the normal ending period>
Next, the processing during the general electric ending period will be described. The normal electric ending period process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal electric power control process.

FIG. 421 is a flow chart showing processing during the normal electric ending period. In step Se5401, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal electric power control value is "07". As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the general electric power control value is "07" indicates that the electric power ending period has started due to the establishment of a predetermined start condition. . In step Se5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is not "07" (step Se5401: NO), this normal/universal electric ending period processing ends. On the other hand, in step Se5401, when it is determined that the normal/universal electric power control value is "07" (step Se5401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se5402.

In Step Se5402, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the general electric ending period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electrical ending time timer counter set as the general electrical ending time in the general electrical ending time setting process described above is "0".

If it is determined in Step Se5402 that it is not the time to end the general electrical ending period (Step Se5402: NO), this general electrical ending period processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se5402 that it is time for the general electric ending period to end (Step Se5402: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se5403.

In step Se5403, the normal figure classification flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Se5404.

In step Se5404, a general electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set general electric switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in various output processes in the timer interrupt process. After that, the process proceeds to step Se5405.

In step Se5405, "01" is set to the normal figure normal electric control value. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number Nn of reserved normal patterns is 1 or more, it is possible to start the fluctuation of normal patterns. After that, the normal electric ending period process ends.

<<8-6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (1 msec in this embodiment). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing Step Se6101, the process proceeds to Step Se6102.

In step Se6102, a mobile terminal communication compatible process is executed. The mobile terminal communication support process is, as described above, a process of connecting and communicating with a mobile terminal using NFC, a process related to disconnection, a process of receiving custom setting information, and a process of transmitting game history information. After executing Step Se6102, the process proceeds to Step Se6103.

In step Se6103, custom setting processing is performed. The custom setting process sets parameters related to various effects and table data based on the custom setting information received from the portable terminal. After executing Step Se6103, the process proceeds to Step Se6104.

In step Se6104, a special figure variation effect setting process is executed. The special figure variation effect setting process is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command and a special figure type command are received from the main MPU 62, and when the special figure game round is started, the special figure game round It is a process of setting the production pattern of the special figure fluctuation production to be executed in. The details of the special figure fluctuation effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Se6104, the process proceeds to Step Se6105.

At step Se6105, special electric opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. The effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is a process of determining the contents of various effects to be executed during the special electric opening/closing execution mode and setting the determined effects to be executed. The details of the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be described later. After executing Step Se6105, the process proceeds to Step Se6106.

In step Se6106, button operation corresponding processing is executed. The button operation corresponding process is a process for determining whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed during the button reception effective period, or whether the button reception effective period has passed without pressing the effect operation button 24.例文帳に追加The details of the button operation handling process will be described later. After executing Step Se6106, the process proceeds to Step Se6107.

At step Se6107, a performance movable accessory driving process is executed. The effect movable accessory drive process is a process of driving and controlling the effect movable accessory 170 based on the driving scenario set in the accessory action pattern. The details of the performance movable accessory driving process will be described later. After executing step Se1605, the process proceeds to step Se1606.

At step Se6108, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the effect processes described above. After executing Step Se6108, the process proceeds to Step Se6109.

At step Se6109, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing Step Se6109, the process proceeds to Step Se6110.

In step Se6110, various commands and various output data set as transmission targets in the above-described or later-described processing are transmitted to the display control device 100, the effect movable accessory 170, and the like. After executing step Se6110, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Special figure fluctuation production setting process>
Next, the special figure fluctuation production setting process will be described. The special figure fluctuation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation effect setting process. In step Se6201, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command and a special figure type command have been received. In step Se6201, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command have not been received (Sa6201: NO), this special figure variation effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Se6201, when it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command are received (Sa6201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6202.

At step Se6202, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the effect pattern (announcement effect, contents of ready-to-win effect, timing of execution, mode of stop pattern) to be executed in this special game round based on the effect pattern table. . Specifically, in the present embodiment, from the special figure variation pattern command and the special figure type command received this time, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and read the information of the fluctuation time, sound light Random number information for effect patterns is acquired from the lottery counter area 94 c of the side RAM 94 . Then, based on these information and the custom setting information received from the portable terminal in the portable terminal communication process (step Se6102), the special figure of this A performance pattern to be executed in a game cycle is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6203.

In step Se6203, the sound emission pattern and the character object action pattern corresponding to the set production pattern are determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6204.

At step Se6204, a display effect pattern command including information on the set effect pattern is set. The set display effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in various output processes of the timer interrupt process. After executing Step Se6204, the process proceeds to Step Se6205.

In step Se6205, update processing at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for causing the display control device 100 to update the pending display in the first special figure pending display area Ds1 or the second special figure pending display area Ds2 of the design display device 41. After executing step Se6205, this special figure fluctuation effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing during special electric opening and closing execution mode>
Next, the effect setting processing during the special electric opening/closing execution mode will be described. The effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode. At Step Se6301, it is determined whether or not a special electric opening command has been received. If it is determined in Step Se6301 that the special electric opening command has been received (Sa6301: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se6302.

In step Se6302, the content of the special electric opening effect is determined and set according to the special electric opening/closing pattern type related to the special electric opening/closing execution mode of this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6303.

In step Se6303, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the determined special electric opening effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6304.

In step Se6304, a special electric opening command for display including information capable of specifying the content of the decided special electric opening effect is set. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se6301 that the special electric opening command has not been received (Sa6301: NO), the process advances to step Se6305 without executing the processing from step Se6302 to step Se6304 described above.

At Step Se6305, it is determined whether or not a special electric opening/closing period command has been received. If it is determined in Step Se6305 that the special electric switching period command has been received (Sa6305: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se6306.

At Step Se6306, the contents of the special electric opening/closing period presentation are determined and set according to the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern related to the current special electric opening/closing execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6307.

At Step Se6307, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the determined special electric opening/closing period effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6308.

In step Se6308, a special electric switching period command for display including information capable of specifying the content of the determined special electric switching period effect is set. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se6305 that the special electric opening/closing period command has not been received (Sa6305: NO), the process advances to Step Se6309 without executing the processing from Step Se6306 to Step Se6308 described above.

In step Se6309, it is determined whether or not a special electric ending command has been received. If it is determined in Step Se6309 that the special electric ending command has been received (Sa6309: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se6310.

At Step Se6310, the content of the special electric ending effect is determined and set according to the type of the special electric opening/closing pattern related to the current special electric opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, the first control for executing the ending effect A and the second control for executing the ending effect B different from the control are executed after the series of opening and closing operations are completed. It is possible to control and It should be noted that both the control for executing the ending effect A and the control for executing the ending effect B are executed with the special electric accessory 57b closed. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6311.

In step Se6311, a sound emission pattern corresponding to the contents of the determined special electric ending effect is determined and set. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6312.

In step Se6312, a special electric ending command for display including information capable of specifying the contents of the decided special electric ending effect is set. After that, the effect setting process during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is ended.

On the other hand, in step Se6309, if it is determined that the special electric opening/closing period command has not been received (Sa6309: NO), without executing the processing from step Se6310 to step Se6312 described above, the effect during the special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. End the setting process.

<Processing for button operation>
Next, the button operation corresponding processing will be described. The button operation corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing button operation handling processing. The button operation corresponding process is a corresponding process when the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 is operated by the player.

At step Se6401, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 has been operated. If it is determined in step Se6401 that the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 has been operated (Se6401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se6401 that neither the effect operation button 24 nor the cross key 27 has been operated (Se6401: NO), this button operation corresponding process is terminated.

At step Se6402, processing corresponding to the operation of the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 by the player is executed according to the game state.

For example, as described with reference to FIG. 5(a), when the player presses the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 once in the game standby state (the game is not executed), the sound volume light amount adjustment image SLA is displayed. (including the volume adjustment image ST and the light amount adjustment image LT) are displayed on the display surface 41a.

In the volume adjustment image ST, a five-level scale is displayed to indicate the volume value to be set. By operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 27 while the volume light amount adjustment image SLA is being displayed, the player can select and input one value from the values of level 1 to level 5 of the volume. . By operating the left button of the cross key 27, the player can lower the volume level with level 1 as the lower limit. Also, the player can raise the volume level up to level 5 by operating the right button of the cross key 27 . When the input of one sound volume level value determined by the player is completed, the value is stored in the storage area (RAM 94) in the sound and light side MPU 92, and the sound volume level corresponding to the input value is stored. A volume adjustment image ST is displayed on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period.

On the other hand, the light amount adjustment image LT is displayed with a five-level scale to indicate the value of the light amount to be set. By operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 27 while the volume light amount adjustment image SLA is being displayed, the player can select and input one value from the light amount level 1 to level 5 values. . By operating the lower button of the cross key 27, the player can lower the light amount level with level 1 as the lower limit. Also, the player can raise the light amount level up to level 5 by operating the up button of the cross key 27 . When the player completes inputting the value of one light amount level determined by the player, the value is stored in the storage area (RAM 94) in the sound and light side MPU 92, and the light amount level corresponding to the input value is stored. It is displayed for a predetermined period on the display surface 41a as the light amount adjustment image LT.

In addition, as explained in FIG. 5(b), during the period during which the game round is being executed (the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display of the special symbols), the player can change the volume and light level. It is possible to enter a value. When the player presses the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 once during the game cycle, the volume light amount adjustment image SLA (including the volume adjustment image ST and the light amount adjustment image LT) is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 41a. area. Further, when the value of the sound volume and the light intensity level is input by the player during the period in which the game round is being executed, the sound volume adjustment image ST and the light intensity adjustment image LT corresponding to the input values are displayed on the display surface 41a. is displayed for a predetermined period. Further, when the player inputs the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light while the game is being played, the pachinko machine 10 outputs the sound and the light at the input level immediately after the input. do.

In addition, for example, in a waiting state of a game as a waiting period (a non-fluctuation state in which a game cycle is not executed), the player presses the effect operation button 24 once to perform an input operation on the effect operation button 24. Then, the detection switch of the effect operation button 24 in the operation detection unit is turned on, which is the detection state, and the option image OPG (see FIG. 6) is displayed on the display surface 41a. The option image OPG is image-displayed on the display surface 41a by outputting image data stored in the storage unit of the display control device 100 in advance. As described with reference to FIG. 6, the option image OPG includes a custom setting selection image CTG that allows the player to select a custom setting for the effect, a game history selection image HSG for displaying the game history, and a A language setting selection image LNG for setting a language for voice and character display is displayed. When the player uses the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 to select one of the selection images corresponding to the plurality of images output and displayed on the display surface 41a, the custom setting selection as the corresponding information input state is performed. state, and the setting image for the selected image is displayed. Specifically, when the player selects and inputs the custom setting selection image CTG, the sub-control device (sound light emission control device 90, display control device 100) detects the input and displays the image in FIG. 361(b). An effect custom setting image PSG as shown is output and displayed on the display surface 41a. In the effect custom setting image PSG, information regarding a customizable effect as a settable element is displayed. Specifically, an image is displayed for enabling the setting of the frequency of appearance and the degree of expectation for the effects to be executed in the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, in the effect custom setting image PSG, the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1, which is an image that enables setting of the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect, and the degree of expectation of the fish school effect can be set. An image CT2 for setting the degree of expectation for a school of fish effect and an image CT3 for setting an expectation degree of bubble effect that enables setting of the degree of expectation for the bubble effect are displayed.

The image CT1 for setting the frequency of the one-shot announcement effects allows the player to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot announcement effects by operating the cross key 27 as an external input. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves in response to the operation input is output, and it is possible to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot announcement effect.

The fish school effect expectation level setting image CT2 allows the player to set the fish school effect expectation level by operating the cross key 27 as an external input. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves in response to the operation input is displayed, and it is possible to set the appearance frequency of the fish school performance expectation degree.

The bubble effect expectation level setting image CT3 allows the player to set the bubble effect expectation level by operating the cross key 27 as an external input. When the player makes an operation input with the cross key 27, an image in which the cursor moves corresponding to the operation input is displayed, and it is possible to set the expectation level of the bubble effect.

In a state where the effect custom setting image PSG (see FIG. 6) is displayed, the player performs custom settings for various effects, and then inputs the effect operation button 24 to turn on the button operation detection switch. , the state where the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed on the display surface 41a ends, and the display surface 41a outputs and displays image information indicating that the setting has been completed as specific output information (setting completion notification image/not shown). After that, the standby state image is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the effect custom setting image PSG (see FIG. 6) is displayed, the option image OPG is not displayed.

Note that the custom setting selection image CTG, the game history selection image HSG, and the language setting are displayed by operating the cross key 27 and the effect operation button 24 until a predetermined period elapses while the option image OPG is displayed on the display surface 41a. If no selection input is made for any of the selection images LNG, the display surface 41a returns to the standby state screen. In order for the player to make custom settings for the effect again, the player presses the effect operation button 24 once to shift to the state where the option image OPG is displayed on the display surface 41a. By operating the operation button 24, the custom setting selection image CTG is selected and the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed on the display surface 41a, whereby the effect custom setting is performed.

In the state where the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed, if a game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 as an input of a specific element, the display surface In the state where the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed in 41a, end processing for forcibly ending is executed. Then, the display of the decorative pattern and the variable effect is started on the display surface 41a. In this case, the custom setting of the effect set by operating the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 before the start of the variable display becomes effective, and the setting is applied when determining the effect in the subsequent game. be. As a modified example, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 in a state where the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed and the effect custom setting is performed, the second Before the game ball enters the 1 special figure starting port 33 or the 2nd special figure starting port 34, a configuration is adopted to invalidate the contents of the custom setting input by operating the performance operation button 24 and the cross key 27. good too. A first special figure is obtained without being affected by contents input by operating a performance operation button 24 and a cross key 27 before a game ball enters a first special figure starting port 33 or a second special figure starting port 34.例文帳に追加After the game ball enters the starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34, the content of the custom setting input by operating the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 is reflected.

Further, when the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed and the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed by operating the effect operation button 24, the game round is started and the variable display is started after the display state of the effect custom setting image PSG is terminated. and the effect custom setting image PSG cannot be displayed. That is, if the condition that the variable display is finished is not satisfied as the predetermined occurrence condition, it is not possible to shift to the state where the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed on the display surface 41a as the restriction process. . In order to display the effect custom setting image PSG again, the variable display is completed, and the effect operation button 24 is pressed once again to shift to the state where the option image OPG is displayed on the display surface 41a. After that, the custom setting selection image CTG is selected by operating the cross key 27 and the effect operation button 24, and the effect custom setting image PSG is displayed on the display surface 41a.

<Driving processing for movable accessory for production>
Next, the production movable accessory drive process will be described. The effect movable accessory driving process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 426 is a flow chart showing the effect movable accessory driving process. The performance movable accessory drive process is a process of driving and controlling the presentation movable accessory 170 based on the driving scenario defined in the role product action pattern. Details of the processing of each step will be described below.

In step Se6501, it is determined whether or not it is time to store the drive scenario by referring to the set role product motion pattern. If it is determined in step Se6501 that it is time to store the driving scenario (step Se6501: YES), the process advances to step Se6502 to read out one driving scenario defined in the character action pattern from the sound and light side ROM 93. and stores it in the driving scenario storage area 94 d of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se6503 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the process proceeds to step Se6504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Step Se6501 that it is not the time to store the driving scenario (Step Se6501: NO), the process advances to Step Se6504 without executing Steps Se6502 and Se6503.

At step Se6504, it is determined whether or not the drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 94d of the sound and light RAM 94. FIG. In step Se6504, when it is determined that the driving scenario is not stored (step Se6504: NO), the movable accessory driving process for this effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se6504 that the driving scenario is stored (step Se6504: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6505.

At step Se6505, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter among the processes defined in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d is "end". If it is determined in step Se6505 that the process corresponding to the driving scenario counter value is not "end" (step Se6505: NO), the process proceeds to step Se6506.

At step Se6506, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the counter for driving scenario among the processes defined in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d is the "end condition determination process". do. If it is determined in step Se6506 that the process corresponding to the driving scenario counter value is not the "end condition determination process" (step Se6506: NO), the process proceeds to step Se6507.

At step Se6507, among the processes specified in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d, the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is executed. Specifically, it executes a process for controlling a control target (a motor or a solenoid) defined in correspondence with the value of the driving scenario counter. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6508.

At step Se6508, it is determined whether or not the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter among the processes specified in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d has been completed. In step Se6508, when it is determined that the process corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter has not been completed (step Se6508: NO), the main effect movable accessory drive process is terminated. As a result, the process of step Se6507 is repeatedly executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the process corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is completed. If it is determined in step Se6508 that the processing corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter has been completed (step Se6508: YES), the process advances to step Se6509 to add 1 to the value of the driving scenario counter. After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends.

In step Se6505 described above, if it is determined that the processing corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter is "finished" (step Se6505: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6512, where the driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Clear the driving scenario. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6513, and it is determined whether or not a driving scenario to be executed next is defined in the role product motion pattern. In step Se6513, if it is determined that the driving scenario to be executed next is specified in the role product motion pattern (step Se6513: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6514, and the next step specified in the role product motion pattern The driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se6515 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se6513 that the driving scenario to be executed next is not specified in the role product action pattern (step Se6513: NO), the processing of steps Se6514 and Se6515 described above is not executed. , ends the movable accessory driving process for this effect.

In step Se6506 described above, if it is determined that the process corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter is the "end condition determination process" (step Se6506: YES), the process advances to step Se6510, and the vertical movement operation end condition fulfillment flag is set. is ON. If it is determined in Step Se6510 that the up/down movement end condition fulfillment flag is not ON (Step Se6510: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se6509 described above, and 1 is added to the value of the drive scenario counter. After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, in Step Se6510, if it is determined that the vertical movement end condition establishment flag is ON (Step Se6510: YES), the process advances to Step Se6511 to turn the vertical movement end condition establishment flag OFF. Proceeding to step Se6512, the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area 94d is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6513, and it is determined whether or not a driving scenario to be executed next is defined in the role product motion pattern. In step Se6513, if it is determined that the driving scenario to be executed next is specified in the role product motion pattern (step Se6513: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6514, and the next step specified in the role product motion pattern The driving scenario is stored in the driving scenario storage area 94d. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se6515 to set the drive scenario counter to "1". After that, the movable accessory driving process for this effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se6513 that the driving scenario to be executed next is not specified in the role product action pattern (step Se6513: NO), the processing of steps Se6514 and Se6515 described above is not executed. , ends the movable accessory driving process for this effect.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing standby processing. The standby process is a process that is executed while the variable display is stopped. Details of the processing of each step will be described below.

At step Se6601, it is determined whether or not the standby timer flag is ON. The standby timer flag is a flag that is turned ON when a standby timer, which will be described later, is set. If it is determined in Step Se6601 that the standby timer flag is not ON (Step Se6601: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se6602.

At step Se6602, it is determined whether or not a demo command has been received. If it is determined in step Se6602 that a demo command has been received (step Se6602: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6603.

At step Se6603, a standby timer is set. The standby timer is a timer that counts the time during which the variable display is stopped. In this embodiment, the waiting timer is set to 1 minute. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6604.

At Step Se6604, the standby flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to Step Se6605. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se6601 that the standby timer flag is ON (step Se6601: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6605.

At Step Se6605, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the standby timer is zero. If it is determined in Step Se6605 that the remaining time of the standby timer is 0 (Step Se6605: YES), the process proceeds to Step Se6606.

At Step Se6606, a standby image is displayed on the display surface 41a. Specifically, an image indicating that the game is in a waiting state is displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6607.

In step Se6607, default processing is executed. Specifically, the content of custom settings for effects set by the player who was executing the game immediately before entering the standby state (standby state) and the output values for the output state of the volume and light intensity, which are the output elements. , the setting is changed to default setting contents and default values stored in advance in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Specifically, in the waiting state of the game as the waiting period, the game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) even though the player has set the values (levels) of the sound volume and the amount of light as the output values. If not, a process of setting the values (levels) of the sound volume and the amount of light to default values as specific setting values pre-stored in the ROM 93 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Default values are stored in the ROM 93 of the pachinko machine 10 in advance. In the pachinko machine 10, the values of level 3 are stored in advance in the ROM 93 as default values (levels) of the sound volume and the amount of light. Therefore, for example, even if the player inputs level 1 as a predetermined input value for the sound volume level in the standby state of the game, or even if level 5 is input as the input value, After that, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, the value of level 3 is set as the level of the volume output value. As for the amount of light, even if the player has input level 1 as a predetermined input value of the amount of light (level) as an output value in the waiting state of the game as the waiting period, the level 1 is used as the input value. Even if 5 is input, if the game is not played for a predetermined period after that, the value of level 3 is set as the level of the output value of the amount of light. For example, if the values input by the player as the sound volume and light intensity levels in the standby state of the game are the same as the default values, the same values as those input by the player will be set if the game is not played for a predetermined period thereafter. default values are set as volume and light levels.

In this embodiment, the default values for the volume and light amount levels are level 3, but other configurations may be used. For example, the volume default value may be level 1. In this case, for example, even if the player has input level 2 or level 5 as the sound volume level in the standby state of the game, the game will not be played for a predetermined period thereafter. In this case, the value of level 1 is input and set as the volume level. Alternatively, for example, the volume default value may be level 5. In this case, for example, even if the player has input level 2 or level 4 as the sound volume level in the standby state of the game, the game will not be played for a predetermined period thereafter. In this case, the value of level 5 is input and set as the volume level.

Also, for example, the default value of the amount of light may be level 2. In this case, for example, even if the player has input level 3 or level 5 as the light amount level in the game standby state, the game will not be played for a predetermined period thereafter. In this case, the value of level 2 is input and set as the level of the amount of light. Further, for example, level 4 may be the default value of the amount of light. In this case, for example, even if the player has input level 2 or level 3 as the light amount level in the game standby state, the game will not be played for a predetermined period thereafter. In this case, a value of level 4 is input and set as the level of the amount of light.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, level 3, which is the same value for both sound volume and light intensity, is adopted as the default value, but a configuration in which the default value for sound volume and the default value for light intensity are different may be adopted. For example, a configuration in which the default value of volume is 4 and the default value of light amount is 2 may be adopted. The default value of the sound volume and the default value of the amount of light can independently adopt different values between levels 1 to 5. FIG.

It should be noted that the output of the sound and light corresponding to the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light input by the player is maintained as long as the game continues. Therefore, the output of sound and light corresponding to the level values of the sound volume and the amount of light input (set) by the player during the execution of the game cycle is, for example, the special electric switching execution mode and the ordinary electric switching execution mode executed after that. is also maintained in

After executing the default process in step Se6607, the flow advances to step Se6608. On the other hand, even when it is determined in Step Se66605 that the remaining time of the standby timer is not 0 (Step Se6605: NO), the process proceeds to Step Se6608. In step Se6608, it is determined whether or not the special figure pending command is received. That is, it is determined whether or not a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 33 or the second special figure starting port 34 and a hold occurs. In step Se6608, when it is determined that the special figure pending command is received (step Se6608: YES), the process proceeds to step Se6609, and the waiting timer flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step Se6610 to reset the standby timer and terminate this standby process.

On the other hand, in step Se6608, when it is determined that the special figure pending command has not been received (step Se6608: NO), this standby process is terminated as it is.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Se6701, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to Step Se6702.

In step Se6702, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

429 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step Se6801, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

430 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se6901, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process described above is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a display effect pattern command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that a moving image corresponding to the effect pattern specified by the command is displayed on the pattern display device 41. .

In the command processing (step Se6901), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step Se6902, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (step Se6901), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Se6903.

In step Se6903, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (step Se6902), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is selected. are specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, the process proceeds to step Se6904.

In step Se6904, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (step Se6903), are transmitted to the VDP 105 . The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step Se6905, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<<8-7>> Problems and effects in the eighth embodiment:
Hereinafter, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be specifically described after describing the problems in the conventional pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it has been desired to input and output various types of information between a game machine and a player. There is a demand for further improvement in convenience.

Specifically, for example, when exchanging information with a gaming machine using a player's mobile terminal such as a smartphone, a two-dimensional code is created that can identify the information that the gaming machine intends to output. A player can read the two-dimensional code using a portable terminal, connect to the Internet with the portable terminal, and identify the read two-dimensional code as information. Therefore, there is a demand to input information to and output information from the gaming machine more simply.

Here, when inputting information to the gaming machine and outputting information from the gaming machine by communicating with the player's mobile terminal by installing a Bluetooth or WiFi module on the gaming machine side, the following A problem arises. That is, when a player opens his mobile terminal and tries to communicate with an arbitrary gaming machine in a game hall, it is very complicated work to search for the arbitrary gaming machine and establish a safe communication state. will be required.

The configuration adopted by the pachinko machine 10 (gaming machine) of the present embodiment to address the above problems will be specifically described below.

According to this embodiment, as the configuration of the gaming machine, the internal lottery is performed based on the determination that the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied by the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery process to be executed, a variable display unit that executes a variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery, and a winning that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the internal lottery is a specific result. A specific game execution unit for executing a specific game state after the end of the game round variation, an effect execution process for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effects during the variable display for the predetermined period, and a player's response to the effect execution process. and external input means for external input. Then, according to the present embodiment, the external input means detects a detection completion state when a predetermined detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance during a predetermined standby period. equip the unit. Furthermore, in the game machine, when the first input state in which the detection unit is in the detection completion state occurs, the plurality of related information stored in the predetermined storage means and related to the effect execution process are sent to an external device. An external output means for outputting is provided. Then, when a corresponding information input state in which predetermined information input corresponding to a plurality of externally output related information is detected occurs, external input and external output of information corresponding to predetermined settable elements in the performance execution process is possible.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, it is possible to suitably perform information input to and output from the gaming machine. Therefore, the information corresponding to the elements that can be set for the performance execution process can be input to the gaming machine from the outside, and can be output from the gaming machine to the outside, thereby improving the interest of the game. can. Since the information on the elements that can be set for the effect execution process stored in the game machine can be output to the outside of the game machine, the information on the elements that can be set for the effect execution process outside the game machine can be output. It can be used, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as the state of the game machine, the input and output of information related to the elements that can be set in the execution of the effect occur due to the occurrence of a state in which the input of information corresponding to a plurality of performance execution related information is detected after the detection completion state. Since it is configured to be possible, it is possible to avoid unintentionally inputting and outputting information about elements that can be set in the performance execution without any conditions or state transitions. .

Further, when a predetermined object to be detected approaches or touches the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance, the detection complete state is reached. By doing so, it is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information about elements that can be set in the performance of the rendering. More specifically, in order to enter the detection completion state, the intention of the player is confirmed by making it a condition that a predetermined object to be detected approaches or contacts the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information corresponding to information that can be set in the execution of the effect against the intention of the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the first special figure lottery and the conditions for executing the second special figure lottery are satisfied. It is possible to execute a special lottery based on the fact that the condition is determined to be satisfied, and based on the result of the special lottery, execute the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined period, and the result of the special lottery A special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed after the end of the variation of the winning game round to display a specific display result executed in the case of a big hit, and the variation performance is executed during the variation display for a predetermined period, and the variation performance is executed. On the other hand, an input means by Bluetooth is provided to enable the player to input custom setting information. Then, the input means by Bluetooth is the NFC module that enters the NFC detection state when the smartphone approaches or touches the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance in the NFC monitoring state, and the NFC module enters the NFC detection state. means for outputting the Bluetooth connection information stored in the NFC RAM 110a by NFC when a first input state occurs, and inputting a connection request corresponding to the means for outputting the Bluetooth connection information by NFC. is detected, it is possible to input through Bluetooth the custom setting information of the effect and output through Bluetooth the game history information in the execution of the effect.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is preferable to input and output information of effects that can be custom set for execution of effects in the pachinko machine 10 and game history information via Bluetooth. becomes possible. Therefore, performance information and game history information that can be custom set for performance execution can be input to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside, and can be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the outside, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved. Customizable performance information and game history information can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 for execution of the performance stored in the pachinko machine 10, and the performance can be executed outside the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Information on effects that can be customized and game history information can be used, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

As a more specific effect, for example, it is possible to prepare custom setting information related to presentation of the gaming machine in advance, and to input the custom setting information to the gaming machine from the outside (for example, mobile terminal) when playing a game. By adopting such a configuration, instead of performing custom setting of the effect by the player operating the effect operation buttons provided in the gaming machine or the cross key, for example, the player can customize the effect preset on the mobile terminal. Setting information can be input to the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time spent by the player to make custom settings on the gaming machine. As a result, the configuration makes it easy for players who want to play games on a game machine as soon as possible and players who want to enjoy games even for a short time because they have come all the way to the game hall to use the custom settings of the production. can be

Furthermore, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make custom settings for effects on the smartphone 200, so manual input using the effect operation buttons or the cross key before the start of the game can be avoided. can be done. A player can comfortably perform custom settings for effects on a portable terminal (for example, a smartphone) using a touch panel or the like with excellent operability. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily make detailed custom settings related to the effect, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the state of the pachinko machine 10, after passing through the NFC detection state, a state in which an input of a connection request, which is information corresponding to the connection information of Bluetooth, is detected occurs. Information and game history information can be input and output. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting history information.

In addition, when the smartphone 200 approaches or touches the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance, the NFC detection state is entered. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting the information of the performance that can be custom set for the execution of the performance and the game history information. More specifically, in order to enter the NFC detection state, the player's intention can be confirmed by making it a condition that the smartphone 200 is brought close to or in contact with the NFC antenna within the NFC detectable distance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inputting and outputting the information of the performance that can be custom set for the execution of the performance and the game history information against the intention of the player.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when the corresponding information input state occurs, suppression is performed to suppress the output of a plurality of related information that was output when the detection completion state occurred during the predetermined waiting period. can be processed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when a new detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit within a predetermined distance while the corresponding information input state is occurring, a plurality of Output of related information can be suppressed. For example, when a detectable object approaches or abuts the detection execution unit and enters the corresponding information input state after passing through the detection completion state, another detectable object is at a predetermined distance from the detection execution unit. Since the output of a plurality of related information output when the detection completion state occurs even if the object approaches or abuts to the target, the corresponding information is input in response to the proximity or abutment of the detectable object. state can be suppressed. In other words, it is possible to prevent a plurality of detectable objects from entering a corresponding information input state.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request is completed occurs, a plurality of associations output when a detection completion state occurs in a predetermined waiting period. A suppression process for suppressing the output of information can be performed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed is occurring, the new mobile terminal reaches the NFC detectable distance with respect to the NFC antenna. It is possible to suppress the output of Bluetooth connection information when the device is in close proximity or contact with the device. For example, when a mobile terminal goes through the NFC detection state due to proximity or contact with the NFC antenna and enters the Bluetooth communication state where the input of the connection request is completed, another mobile terminal detects NFC from the NFC antenna. Since it suppresses the output of the Bluetooth connection information that is output when the NFC detection state occurs even if the mobile terminal comes close to or touches within a possible distance, a connection request will not be issued when the other mobile terminal comes close to or touches. It is possible to suppress entering the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of is completed. That is, it is possible to prevent a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed with a plurality of other mobile terminals that can be detected.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, if input of a plurality of related information is not detected until a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the detection completion state, the corresponding information input state cannot be generated again. Generates the condition necessary to generate a detection complete condition.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, a state in which input of a plurality of pieces of related information is not detected even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the occurrence of the detection completion state occurs against the player's will. There is a possibility that a detection completion state has occurred, a case where the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine, and the like. According to this embodiment, in such a case, in order to generate the corresponding information input state, the player who caused the detection completion state is generated by generating a state that needs to generate the detection completion state again. Then, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who generated the corresponding information input state is different from that state.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the input of the connection request is completed when the input of the connection request is not detected until a predetermined period has elapsed since the NFC detection state occurred. In order to generate the Bluetooth communication state, a state is generated that requires the NFC detection state to be generated again.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, even though a predetermined period of time has passed since the NFC detection state occurred, the state in which the input of the connection request is not detected is not the player's intention. On the other hand, there is a possibility that an NFC detection state has occurred, or the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine. According to the present embodiment, in such a case, in order to generate the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed, the NFC detection state is generated by generating a state that requires the NFC detection state to be generated again. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who generated the state is different from the player who generated the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed from that state.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when a corresponding information input state occurs, a termination process for forcibly ending the corresponding information input state is performed by inputting a specific element.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the corresponding information input state occurs, by performing the termination process of forcibly ending the corresponding information input state by inputting a specific element, the corresponding information If maintaining the input state causes inconvenience in the game or processing, or a problem in the game or processing, by forcibly ending the corresponding information input state, the inconvenience or problem can be avoided or solved. can be resolved.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when a Bluetooth communication state occurs in which input of a connection request is completed, the input of the connection request is forcibly completed by inputting via NFC for disconnection. Perform termination processing to end the Bluetooth communication state.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, when the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed occurs, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is forcibly completed by performing the input by NFC for disconnection By performing the end processing to terminate the connection request input, if maintaining the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request is completed causes inconvenience in the game or processing, or problems in the game or processing, force This inconvenience or problem can be avoided or resolved by terminating the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when the corresponding information input state is terminated and a predetermined occurrence condition is not satisfied, a restriction process is performed to restrict the occurrence of the corresponding information input state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the corresponding information input state is ended, the corresponding information input state is once generated by setting a predetermined condition for generating the corresponding information input state again. With this, it is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by unconditionally shifting to the corresponding information input state from the next time. For example, if a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined game machine in the past becomes able to establish communication with the game machine unconditionally from the next time, the game machine and the mobile terminal may may establish communication with the According to the present embodiment, even a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined gaming machine in the past can set a predetermined condition to establish communication next time, thereby allowing the mobile terminal to establish a communication state against the player's will. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the game machine and the portable terminal.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when the connection request input is completed and the Bluetooth communication state is terminated, the connection request Restrict to not generate the Bluetooth communication state where the input of is completed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, when ending the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed is generated again. By setting a condition to pass through the NFC detection state again, the Bluetooth communication state in which the input of the connection request has been completed once has been generated. It is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by shifting to the communication state. For example, when the smartphone 200 that has established a communication state with a predetermined pachinko machine 10 in the past becomes able to unconditionally establish communication with the pachinko machine 10 from the next time, the pachinko machine 10 will There is a risk that communication with the smartphone 200 will be established. According to the present embodiment, even if the smartphone 200 has established a communication state with the pachinko machine 10 in the past, by providing a condition that the NFC detection state is passed again in order to establish communication next time, a game can be played. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 against the will of the person.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, when the detection completion state occurs in the corresponding information input state, the specific output information is output.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, when the detection completion state occurs in the corresponding information input state, the specific output information is output. That is, the specific output information is output when the player brings the detectable object close to or in contact with the detection execution unit by a predetermined distance to complete the detection. Therefore, it is possible to avoid outputting the specific output information against the player's will, and to output the specific output information after confirming the player's intention.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, game history information is output when an NFC detection state occurs in a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, game history information is output when an NFC detection state occurs in a Bluetooth communication state in which input of a connection request has been completed. That is, the game history information is output when the player brings the smartphone 200 close to or in contact with the NFC antenna to the NFC detectable distance to enter the NFC detection state. Therefore, outputting the game history information against the player's will can be avoided, and the game history information can be output after confirming the player's intention.

More specific effects according to this embodiment will be described below. As the state of the gaming machine, a second input state (communication start state due to input of a connection request including connection information from the smartphone 200) occurs after a first input state (a state in which NFC of the smartphone 200 is detected). By doing so, it is possible to input and output information related to settable information (performance customization and game history). It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information related to customs and game history).

Further, when a predetermined detection target (NFC of smartphone 200) approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit (NFC module 110 of pachinko machine 10) to a predetermined distance, the first input state is entered. Input and output of information related to settable information (customization of effects and game history) is performed only by the presence of an unspecified detection target (NFC of smartphone 200) around the detection unit (NFC module of pachinko machine 10). can be avoided. More specifically, in order to be in the first input state and the second input state, a predetermined detection target (NFC of smartphone 200) is a predetermined detection unit (NFC module of pachinko machine 10). By making it a condition that the player comes close to or touches within a distance, it is possible to confirm the intention of the player, and input and output information related to information that can be set (customization of effects and game history) contrary to the intention of the player. can be avoided.

In addition, in the state where the second input state is occurring, the pachinko machine 10 detects that a new predetermined detection target (mobile terminal) is at a predetermined distance from a predetermined detection unit (NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10). It is possible to suppress the output of a plurality of pieces of information (connection information) when they come close to or abut against each other. That is, when the mobile terminal enters the second input state after passing through the first input state due to the mobile terminal approaching or coming into contact with the predetermined detection unit, the other mobile terminal is at a predetermined distance from the predetermined detection unit. Since the output of a plurality of pieces of information output when the first input state occurs is suppressed even if the mobile terminal comes close to or contacts with the other mobile terminal, the second input is suppressed in response to the proximity or contact of the other mobile terminal. state can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress the second input state with a plurality of portable terminals. More specifically, as in the processing pattern PY2 and the processing pattern PY3, when communication with the smartphone 200 is started, the connection information in the RAM 110a of the NFC module 110 is rewritten as invalid, or the connection information cannot be output. state can be made.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 does not detect input of predetermined information (input of connection information) until a predetermined period of time has passed after the occurrence of the first input state (state in which NFC of the smartphone 200 is detected). Second, a state is generated that requires the generation of the first input state again in order to generate the second input state.

A state in which a predetermined input (input of connection information) is not detected even though a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first input state (the state in which NFC of the smartphone 200 is detected) is a player's intention. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the first input state has occurred, or the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine. According to this feature, in such a case, the first input state is generated by generating a state that requires the first input state to be generated again in order to generate the second input state. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who caused the second input state is different from the player who generated the second input state from that state.

Specifically, it corresponds to the processing pattern PY1. According to the processing pattern PY1, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined that a connection request has been received only for connection requests received from the smartphone 200 via Bluetooth within a predetermined period. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary Bluetooth connection when the smart phone 200 is unintentionally brought close to or in contact with the pachinko machine 10 in a short period of time.

Further, when the second input state occurs, the pachinko machine 10 forcibly terminates the second input state by performing a specific input (input by NFC for disconnection).

That is, when the second input state occurs, performing a specific input forcefully terminates the second input state, thereby maintaining the second input state. If any of the above inconveniences or problems in the game or processing occurs, the inconveniences or problems can be avoided or resolved by forcibly ending the second input state.

Specifically, it corresponds to the processing pattern DY6. According to processing pattern DY6, communication can be forcibly disconnected. For example, when communication is established with a mobile terminal whose whereabouts are unknown, the hall staff can forcibly disconnect the communication.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is arranged so as not to generate the second input state when the predetermined condition (the condition of passing through the first input state again) is not satisfied when ending the second input state. limit to

According to this configuration, when ending the second input state, by providing a predetermined condition for generating the second input state again, the fact that the second input state has been generated once, It is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by unconditionally shifting to the second input state from the next time. For example, if a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined game machine in the past becomes able to establish communication with the game machine unconditionally from the next time, the game machine and the mobile terminal may may establish communication with the According to this configuration, even a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined gaming machine in the past can be prevented from doing so against the player's will by setting a predetermined condition for establishing communication next time. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the game machine and the portable terminal.

Specifically, it corresponds to the processing pattern DY8. If the Bluetooth connection information of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the mobile terminal that has been connected (communicated) and disconnected in the past, when the mobile terminal approaches the pachinko machine 10 again In order to avoid being connected to the pachinko machine 10 automatically, when disconnecting the communication with the connected mobile terminal, the connection information itself of the BT module 111 is changed to new connection information, and the NFT module is changed accordingly. The connection information stored in the RAM 110a in 110 is also changed to the new connection information.

According to this processing, it is possible to prevent a portable terminal that has been connected to the pachinko machine 10 from being automatically connected. That is, in order for the mobile terminal to be connected to the pachinko machine 10 again, it can be connected after approaching the pachinko machine 10 again and performing pairing processing. In this process, when disconnecting the communication, the password of the BT module 111 itself and the password stored in the RAM 110a in the NFT module 110 are changed each time. may be adopted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the second input state (communication start state due to the input of the connection request including the connection information from the smartphone 200), the first input state (the state in which the NFC of the smartphone 200 is detected) occurs. An output means for outputting specific information (history information, etc.) in a case is provided.
That is, the player brings a predetermined detection target (the NFC module of the smartphone 200) close to or in contact with a predetermined detection unit (the NFC module 110 of the pachinko machine 10) to a predetermined distance to enter a detection state. Specific information (history information, etc.) is output (by entering the first input state). Therefore, it is possible to avoid outputting the specific information against the player's will, and to output the specific information after confirming the player's will.

Specifically, it corresponds to the processing pattern CY4 and the processing pattern CY6. This process is configured to transmit data only when smart phone 200 is close to smartphone 200 and is connected via Bluetooth. As the data to be transmitted, data relating to game history information, sound data relating to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, privilege data on the application APP, and the like can be employed.

Only when the player wants data (for example, game history information) to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the smartphone 200, the smartphone 200 can be brought close to the pachinko machine 10 and the data can be received by the smartphone 200.例文帳に追加

<<8-8>> Modified example of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<8-8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, the smartphone 200 is used as an example of a mobile terminal, but any mobile terminal capable of wireless communication may be used, and is not limited to a smart phone. The mobile terminal may be, for example, a tablet terminal capable of wireless communication, a personal computer capable of wireless communication, or a mobile terminal dedicated to wireless communication with the pachinko machine 10 . Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment.

<<8-8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal equipped with the NFC module is brought close to the pachinko machine 10 to perform NFC communication. may be configured to perform communication by Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment.

<<8-8-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, NFC is used as one type of short-range wireless communication, but a configuration using other short-range wireless communication instead of NFC may be employed. For example, infrared communication or Wi-Fi may be adopted. Also, infrared communication or Wi-Fi may be adopted instead of Bluetooth. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment.

In addition, as a configuration that does not employ NFC, a touch sensor is provided on the glass unit 19 of the pachinko machine 10, and when the smartphone 200 is brought into contact with the glass unit 19, a two-dimensional code including connection information with the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the display surface 41a. is displayed, the two-dimensional code is read by the camera of the smart phone 200, and based on the read connection information, a Bluetooth connection request is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 for Bluetooth connection. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to acquire connection information and establish a Bluetooth connection without using NFC. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment.

<<8-8-4>> Modification 4:
Information exchanged by wireless communication between the mobile terminal and the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to custom setting information and game history information. Information suggesting the result, or video information or audio information of the performance being executed in the pachinko machine 10 may be transmitted. Moreover, it is also possible to send from the mobile terminal to the pachinko machine 10 some personal information such as the gender and name of the player of the pachinko machine 10, and information on the characters in the performance customized on the application APP. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create various possibilities of wireless communication between the mobile terminal and the pachinko machine 10, and to further improve the interest.

<<8-9>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, part of the functions implemented by software in the above embodiment and each of the modifications described above may be implemented by hardware, or part of the functions implemented by hardware may be implemented by software. good too.

<<8-10>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example will be appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic eA group>
The feature eA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature eA1]
Win/fail lottery means (lottery processing) for executing a win/fail lottery (internal lottery) based on determination that the predetermined lottery condition has been established by a judging means for judging whether or not a prescribed lottery condition has been established. and,
Variation display means (variation display unit) for executing variation display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
A specific game execution means (specific game execution) for executing a specific game state after a specific variation display (winning game round variation) displaying a specific display result executed when the result of the winning lottery is a specific result part) and
Effect execution means (effect execution processing/execution of effect) for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements (effect/effect during fluctuation) during the variable display for the predetermined period;
Input means (external input means/input means by Bluetooth) that allows a player to make a predetermined input (external input/input of custom setting information) to the effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The input means
In a predetermined standby state (waiting period/NFC monitoring state), a predetermined detection target (object/smartphone) is at a predetermined distance (predetermined distance/NFC detectable) from a predetermined detection unit (detection execution unit/NFC antenna). a detection unit (detection unit/NFC module) that becomes a predetermined detection state (detection completion state/NFC detection state) when the device comes close to or touches the device up to a distance);
This game machine is
When the first input state (detection completion state/NFC detection state) in which the detection means is in the predetermined detection state occurs, the Output means (external output means/output connection information by NFC) for outputting (external output/output of information) a plurality of information (multiple related information/Bluetooth connection information) which is information and is related to the production execution means processing),
A second input state (corresponding information input state/Bluetooth communication state in which connection request input is completed) in which input of predetermined information (information input/connection request input) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of output information is detected ) occurs, the information (information corresponding to the settable information/custom setting information of the effect) regarding the predetermined settable information (settable information/custom settable effect information) in the effect execution means It is characterized by being configured to enable input (external input/input via Bluetooth) and output (external output/image output).

According to this feature, it is possible to suitably input information to and output information from the gaming machine. In addition, it is configured such that it is possible to input and output information relating to settable information to the effect executing means. That is, it is possible to input information about the settable information to the gaming machine from the outside, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. For example, it is possible to prepare custom setting information related to effects of the gaming machine in advance, and input the custom setting information to the gaming machine from the outside (for example, a mobile terminal) when playing a game. By adopting such a configuration, instead of performing custom setting of the effect by the player operating the effect operation buttons provided in the gaming machine or the cross key, for example, the player can customize the effect preset on the mobile terminal. Setting information can be input to the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time spent by the player to make custom settings on the gaming machine. As a result, the configuration makes it easy for players who want to play games on a game machine as soon as possible and players who want to enjoy games even for a short time because they have come all the way to the game hall to use the custom settings of the production. can be

Furthermore, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make custom settings for the effects on the mobile terminal, so manual input using the effect operation buttons and the cross key before the start of the game is avoided. be able to. A player can comfortably perform custom settings for effects on a portable terminal (for example, a smartphone) using a touch panel or the like with excellent operability. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily make detailed custom settings related to the effect, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, the information on the settable information stored in the gaming machine can be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the information on the settable information can be used outside the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest in the game. can be planned.

Furthermore, as the state of the gaming machine, the input and output of information related to the settable information is enabled by generating the second input state after passing through the first input state. It is possible to avoid unintentional input and output of information related to settable information without state transition.

In addition, since the first input state is entered when a predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance, it is only possible that an unspecified detection target exists around the detection unit. It is possible to avoid inputting and outputting information related to the settable information in . More specifically, in order to enter the first input state, a predetermined detection target is brought close to or in contact with a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance, so that the intention of the player is expressed. This makes it possible to confirm and avoid the input and output of information relating to the settable information contrary to the player's intention.

[Feature eA2]
The gaming machine according to feature eA1,
When the second input state (correspondence information input state/connection information input completion and Bluetooth communication state) occurs, the first input state (detection completion state/ provided with suppression means (suppression processing/suppression of output of Bluetooth connection information) that suppresses the output of the plurality of information (Bluetooth connection information) when NFC detection completion state) occurs. Characteristic game machine.

According to this feature, in a state where the second input state is occurring, when a new predetermined detection target approaches or abuts on a predetermined detection unit within a predetermined distance, a plurality of pieces of information are output. can be suppressed. More specifically, for example, when the mobile terminal enters the second input state after passing through the first input state due to the mobile terminal coming close to or in contact with the predetermined detection unit, the other mobile terminal touches the predetermined detection unit. On the other hand, even if the mobile terminal approaches or contacts within a predetermined distance, it suppresses the output of a plurality of pieces of information output when the first input state occurs. can be suppressed from entering the second input state. That is, it is possible to suppress the second input state with a plurality of portable terminals.

In the above-described embodiment, as a method of suppressing the second input state with a plurality of mobile terminals, three pieces of information of Bluetooth device name, Bluetooth address, and Bluetooth password are used as Bluetooth connection information. Of these, only the Bluetooth device name may be invalidated, only the Bluetooth address may be invalidated, or only the Bluetooth password may be invalidated. Also, two of these three pieces of information may be rewritten as invalid ones. That is, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth address may be rewritten to invalid ones, the Bluetooth device name and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones, and the Bluetooth address and Bluetooth password may be rewritten to invalid ones. can be rewritten as invalid. Also, all of these three pieces of information may be rewritten to be invalid.

[Feature eA3]
A gaming machine according to feature eA1 or feature eA2,
If the input of the predetermined information (input of connection information) is not detected until a predetermined period elapses after the occurrence of the first input state (detection completion state/NFC detection completion state), the second A gaming machine comprising means for generating a state in which it is necessary to generate the first input state (NFC detection state) again in order to generate the input state (input of connection information).

A state in which the input of predetermined information is not detected even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the occurrence of the first input state is a possibility that the first input state has occurred against the player's will. , the player has already finished the game and left the gaming machine. According to this feature, in such a case, the first input state is generated by generating a state that requires the first input state to be generated again in order to generate the second input state. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the player who caused the second input state is different from the player who generated the second input state from that state.

[Feature eA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA3,
When the second input state (correspondence information input state/connection information input, pairing establishment state) occurs, performing a specific input (input of a specific element/NFC for disconnection) forces the above A game machine comprising end input means (end processing/end of Bluetooth communication state) for ending the second input state.

According to this feature, when the second input state occurs, the second input state is maintained by providing the termination input means for forcibly terminating the second input state by performing a specific input. To avoid or eliminate the inconvenience or problem by forcibly terminating the second input state when a game or processing inconvenience or a game or processing problem arises as a result. can be done.

[Feature eA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA4,
When the second input state (corresponding information input state/Bluetooth communication state) occurs, by performing a specific input (input of a specific element/NFC for disconnection), the specific input is performed. A gaming machine comprising invalidation means (invalidation processing) for invalidating the predetermined input previously input.

According to this feature, when the second input state occurs, performing a specific input invalidates a predetermined input that was input before the specific input. It is possible to reflect the content of a new predetermined input that is input after a specific input without being affected by the content of a predetermined input that has been input previously.

[Feature eA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA5,
When ending the second input state (corresponding information input state/Bluetooth communication state), if a predetermined condition (predetermined occurrence condition/repeated NFC detection state via NFC detection state) is not satisfied, the above A game machine characterized by comprising a restriction means (restriction process) for restricting so as not to generate a second input state (restriction process/password rewriting of NFC and Bluetooth).

According to this feature, when ending the second input state, by providing a predetermined condition for generating the second input state again, the fact that the second input state has been generated once, It is possible to avoid problems in the game or processing caused by unconditionally shifting to the second input state from the next time. For example, if a mobile terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined game machine in the past becomes able to establish communication with the game machine unconditionally from the next time, the game machine and the mobile terminal may may establish communication with the According to this feature, even a portable terminal that has established a communication state with a predetermined gaming machine in the past can be prevented from doing so against the player's will by setting a predetermined condition for establishing communication next time. It is possible to avoid the problem of establishing communication between the game machine and the portable terminal.

[Feature eA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA6,
A game characterized by comprising output means for outputting specific information (information for specific output/game history information, data for confirmation of disconnection) when the first input state occurs in the second input state. machine.

According to this feature, the specific information is output when the first input state occurs in the second input state. That is, when the player brings a predetermined detection target close to or in contact with a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance to enter a detection state (by entering a first input state), the specific information is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid outputting the specific information against the player's will, and to output the specific information after confirming the player's will.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and performance are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

<<9>> Ninth Embodiment:
Custom setting method for production <9-0> Introduction:
A conventional gaming machine improves the comfort and interest of a game by reflecting the input of information from the player in the game presentation. Although this makes it possible to meet the demands of various players, the input of information may impose a burden on the data retention and control of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a demand for suitable data retention and control of gaming machines without reducing the diversity of information input by players. Specifically, for example, when the player decides the output mode of the effect element used in the variable game and makes it possible to input, a plurality of candidates are displayed, and the player decides an arbitrary candidate and selects it. By inputting information, the gaming machine determines the output mode of the effect element based on the input information. However, the more objects that can be set at the predetermined timing when the gaming machine sets the output mode of the effect element, the more data corresponding to the target and the more complicated the processing becomes. Disabling input by the player, however, can prevent an increase in data and processing, but reduces the comfort and enjoyment of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to reduce the burden on a gaming machine at predetermined output mode setting timings while allowing a variety of inputs by a player.

The present invention is directed to overcoming one or more of the problems set forth above,
a success/fail lottery means for executing a success/failure lottery based on determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established that the predetermined lottery condition has been established;
variable display means for executing variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
a specific game execution means for executing a specific game machine state after a specific variable display for displaying a specific display result executed when the result of the winning lottery is a specific result;
effect execution means for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
an input means for enabling the player to determine and input a value for an output mode of the specific effect element selected by the player from among the plurality of effect elements, wherein ,
The value for the output mode can be selected and input by the player from among a plurality of values, and
This game machine is
specific display means for executing a corresponding specific display when the input of the one predetermined value determined by the player is completed;
a predetermined output value setting means that can be executed after executing the specific display,
The predetermined output value setting means can set a value for the output mode of the specific effect element used when the effect execution means executes the variable effect,
The predetermined output value setting means receives a second value different from the first value even when the player inputs the first value as the value for the output mode. Even in such a case, a specific value different from the first value and the second value and stored in advance in a storage means can be set as the value of the output mode. characterized by

As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming machine at the predetermined timing for setting the output mode for the effect elements of the game performance while allowing the player to select the effect elements of the game performance with respect to the game machine. Become.

The "predetermined lottery condition" in the present invention may be a condition for executing a predetermined lottery. , Conditions for executing the second special lottery, conditions for executing the general lottery, effects executed during the fluctuation of special symbols, and game states in which special electric accessories open and close multiple times (special electric opening and closing execution mode), conditions for executing the production determination lottery for determining the type of production to be executed during the mode, and the like.

The "input means" may be any means as long as the player can make a predetermined input to the effect execution means.・Processing of signal input, information/signal input via Bluetooth (“Bluetooth” is a registered trademark), processing of information/signal input via effect operation buttons, custom settings via effect operation buttons Selection, processing for inputting information/signals via a cross key, processing for inputting information/signals via an operation handle, and the like.

The "specific effect element" may be any one selected by the player from among a plurality of effect elements. , a partial effect that constitutes the effect, a specific effect among the effects that are executed during the opening and closing execution mode, a partial effect that constitutes the effect, and the effect that is executed during the support mode. Of these, a specific production or a partial production that constitutes the relevant production, or a specific production or the relevant production among the productions that are executed during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display Examples include partial productions, and specific ones among sounds, lights, images, and videos that constitute these productions and partial productions.

"Lottery lottery means" may be any one that performs a lottery lottery, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, random number information is generated based on the fact that a game ball enters the first special figure start port. A lottery process for determining the result of a special figure lottery by matching the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, and acquiring random number information based on the fact that a game ball entered the second special figure start port. , A lottery process that determines the result of a special lottery by comparing the acquired random number information with a predetermined table, acquires random number information based on the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate, and uses the acquired random number information A lottery process that determines the result of the normal figure lottery by collating with a predetermined table, and the like.

"Variation display" is based on the result of the winning lottery, if it is to display the variation for a predetermined period, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the display of the variation of the first special symbol, the second 2 Variation display of special symbols, display of variation of normal symbols, and the like.

The "specific game state" may be executed after the end of a specific variable display that displays a specific display result that is executed when the result of the winning lottery is a specific result, and is the gist of the present invention. If possible, for example, a game state in which special electric accessories open and close multiple times (special electric opening and closing execution mode), a high frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate at high frequency, and normal electric accessories operate at low frequency low-frequency support mode, etc.

The "specific game execution means" may be anything as long as it executes a specific game state. , a process of executing a high-frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate frequently, and a process of executing a low-frequency support mode in which normal electric accessories operate infrequently.

The "specific display" may be any display that corresponds to the completion of the input of a predetermined value determined by the player. When the player completes the input by selecting from a plurality of values as values for the appearance frequency and expectation level of a specific effect among the effects executed during the performance and the partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect Corresponding display (for example, display indicating that custom settings have been accepted, display of values input by the player, display indicating that input has been accepted, display indicating completion of setting, display indicating completion of input, etc.) ), a specific effect among the effects executed during the opening/closing execution mode, and the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect. is completed, the corresponding display (for example, a display indicating that the custom setting has been accepted, a display of the value entered by the player, a display indicating that the input has been accepted, a display indicating that the setting has been completed, display indicating completion of input, etc.), the frequency of appearance of a particular effect among the effects executed during the support mode and the partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect, and the degree of expectation of the player from among a plurality of values. is selected and the input is completed, the corresponding display (for example, a display indicating that the custom settings have been accepted, a display of the values entered by the player, a display indicating that the input has been accepted, and a display indicating that the settings have been completed) display, display indicating completion of input, etc.), and a specific effect among the effects performed during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, or a partial When the player selects and completes input from multiple values for the appearance frequency and expectation of effects, a display corresponding to it (for example, a display indicating that custom settings have been accepted, or a display indicating that the player has entered (e.g. display of value, display of reception of input, display of completion of setting, display of completion of input, etc.), volume of sound, amount of light, and image that constitute production or partial production When the player selects from multiple values for the brightness, saturation, and color of the image, and the brightness, saturation, and color of the image, and the input is completed, the corresponding display (for example, a message indicating that custom settings have been accepted) , a display of a value input by a player, a display indicating that an input has been received, a display indicating completion of setting, a display indicating completion of input, etc.).

The "determining means" may determine whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established. Processing for determining whether or not established, processing for determining whether the conditions for executing the second special drawing lottery were established, and whether the conditions for executing the general drawing lottery were established A lottery for determining the effect to be executed during the process of judging, the effect to be executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the type of effect to be executed during the game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times. and a process of determining whether or not the conditions for

The "effect element" may be any effect that is executed or a part that constitutes the effect, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the effect that is executed during the variable display or the part that constitutes the effect effects, effects that are executed during the opening and closing execution mode, partial effects that make up the relevant effects, effects that are executed during the support mode, partial effects that make up the relevant effects, and the end of the variable display Effect executed during the period from the start of the next variable display to the start of the next variable display, a partial effect that constitutes the effect, and sound and light that constitute these effects and the partial effect.

The "effect execution means" may be a process of performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during variable display, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol A special figure variation effect setting process, which is a process for setting a variation effect to be executed during the variable display of , and a movable role for effect in the variable effect to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Examples include a production movable accessory drive process, which is a process to be controlled, a sound and light control device and a display control device that execute these processes, and a sub-control device that integrates these control devices.

The "output mode" may be a mode of outputting the effect element, and if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, it constitutes a specific effect or the effect that is executed during the variable display. Appearance frequency, degree of expectation and types of partial effects, appearance frequency, degree of expectation and types of specific effects among effects executed during the opening and closing execution mode, partial effects that make up the relevant effects, and support The appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and type of specific effects among the effects executed during the mode and partial effects that make up the relevant effects, and the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display Appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and type of specific effects among the effects to be executed and partial effects that make up the relevant effects, volume of sound, amount of light, and images that make up these effects and partial effects The lightness, saturation, and color of an image, and the lightness, saturation, and color of an image.

The "value for the output mode" may be a value for the mode of outputting the effect element. Values for the appearance frequency and expectation level of partial effects that make up the production, and the appearance frequency and expectation level of a specific production among the productions executed during the opening and closing execution mode and the partial production that makes up the production. Values, values for appearance frequencies and expectations of specific effects among the effects executed during the support mode and partial effects that make up the relevant effects, and values for the degree of expectation and the start of the next variable display from the end of the variable display. Values for the appearance frequency and degree of expectation of specific effects and partial effects that make up the specific effects and partial effects that are performed during the period until values for the amount of light, the brightness, saturation, and color of an image, and the brightness, saturation, and color of an image.

The "success lottery" may be a lottery executed based on the determination that the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied by the determination means, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the first special figure The first special drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the start opening, the second special drawing drawing that is executed when the game ball enters the second special start opening, and the normal start gate The normal drawing lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the ball, the type of production that is executed during the game state (special electric opening and closing execution mode) in which the special electric accessory opens and closes multiple times, and the production that is executed during the fluctuation of the special pattern. Production decision lottery for deciding, etc. are mentioned.

The "one predetermined value" may be any value that the player can select and input from among a plurality of values as a value for the output mode. A value that the player can select and input from a plurality of values as a value for the appearance frequency or degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects that are executed during the performance or a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect, or a value that can be input by the player. A value that a player can select and input from among a plurality of values as a value for the appearance frequency or degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects executed during the execution mode or a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect, or A player selects from a plurality of values for the volume of sound, the amount of light, the brightness, saturation, and color of an image, and the brightness, saturation, and color of an image, which constitute a production or partial production. A player selects from a plurality of values as values that can be input, and values for the appearance frequency and degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects executed during the support mode and a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect. The values that can be entered by , the appearance frequency and degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects that are executed during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, and the partial effects that make up the relevant effect As a value for , there is a value that the player can select and input from among a plurality of values.

The "specific display means" may be means for executing specific display, and may be any means that can realize the gist of the present invention. Examples include control processing for displaying.

The "specific value" may be a value different from the first value and the second value as the value of the output mode and stored in advance in the storage means, and the gist of the present invention can be realized. If there is, for example, a value different from the value input by the player as the value of the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects executed during the variable display or a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect, or , a value different from the value input by the player as a value of the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects executed during the opening/closing execution mode or a partial effect constituting the relevant effect, or a support mode A value that is different from the value input by the player as the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects that are executed during the performance or the partial effects that make up the relevant effect, or the value that is different from the value entered by the player as the It is different from the value input by the player as a value for the frequency of appearance and the degree of expectation of a specific effect among the effects that are executed during the period until the variable display of , or a partial effect that constitutes the relevant effect. Values and values entered by the player as values for the volume of sound, the amount of light, the brightness, saturation, and color of images, and the brightness, saturation, and color of images that make up the presentation or partial presentation. A value (for example, a default value) and the like.

The 'output value setting means' may be any means that can be executed after executing a specific display and is a means for setting an output value. Means for setting the appearance frequency and expected value (output value) of a specific performance or a partial performance that constitutes the performance, the volume of the sound that constitutes the performance or the partial performance, means for setting values (output values) for the amount of light, the brightness, saturation, and color of images, and the brightness, saturation, and color of video; Means for setting the appearance frequency and expected value (output value) of partial effects that make up the production, specific effects among the effects that are executed during the support mode, and partial effects that make up the relevant effects Means for setting the appearance frequency and expectation value (output value) of , and specific effects among the effects executed during the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display, and the relevant effects. Means for setting the appearance frequency of the partial effect to be performed and the value (output value) for the degree of expectation.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes an "internal lottery" as a "win or fail lottery", a "lottery process" as a "win or fail lottery means", and a "fluctuation display means" as a "fluctuation display means". a "display section", a "winning game round variation" as a "specific variation display", a "specific game execution section" as a "specific game execution means", and an "output element" as a "production element". and may be provided with "effect execution processing" as "effect execution means".

Further, as a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes an "output element" as a "effect element", a "specific output element" as a "specific effect element", and an "output mode". ``output state'' as ``input means'', ``external input means'' as ``input means'', ``set value'' as ``value for output mode'', and ``one predetermined value'' as ``one "predetermined possible input value", "specific image display" as "specific display", "specific image display section" as "specific display means", "output value as "output value setting means" "setting process", "output value" as "value for output mode", "first input value" as "first value", and "second input value" as "second value" "input value", "specific setting value" as "specific value", "storage unit" as "storage means", and "first input process" as "first input means" ``second input processing'' as ``second input means''; ``input value storage unit'' as ``input value storage area''; and ``image indicating that one predetermined value has been input , an ``image display unit'' as ``image display means'', ``game history information'' as ``execution history information'', and a ``history information storage area'' as A "history information storage section" may be provided, and a "history information output process" as a "history information output means" may be provided.

A more specific configuration of the game machine will be described below as the ninth embodiment. It should be noted that the difference between the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment and the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment will be described below. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment employs the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment except for the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment in the following description.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player makes custom settings for effects, the player can input the appearance frequency and degree of expectation of effects as output elements in units of 1%. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes means for inputting using the effect operation buttons 24 and the cross key 27 of the pachinko machine 10 as a means for the player to externally input the custom setting of the effect to the pachinko machine 10, and a smartphone. and a means for externally inputting using a portable terminal such as 200. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is also characterized by a method of processing values of appearance frequency and degree of expectation externally input by the player as custom setting information so as to be changeable in units of 1%. In this description, after explaining the custom setting of the effect using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27, the custom setting of the effect using the smartphone is explained, and then the custom setting information externally input. The method of processing for is explained.

Note that the custom settings of the present embodiment are configured on the premise that the custom settings made on the smartphone 200 are input to the pachinko machine 10 by communication, but some players do not have smartphones. It is also possible. In order to avoid such inequalities among players, the present embodiment is configured to enable custom settings equivalent to those of smartphones by manual input, although it takes a lot of time and effort.

<<9-1>> Custom setting of production using production operation button 24 and cross key 27:
FIG. 431 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect custom setting image PSGa in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 431( a ), the effect custom setting image PSGa displays an image for enabling setting of appearance frequency and degree of expectation of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, the effect custom setting image PSGa includes a one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1a, which is an image that enables setting of the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect, and one of effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10. An image CT2a for setting the expectation level of the school of fish performance, which is one of the performances that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the expectation level of the bubble performance, which is one of the performances that can be executed in the pachinko machine 10. A setting image CT3a is displayed.

The one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1a allows the player to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect by operating the cross key 27 and inputting the image CT1a. As shown in the figure, a slider is displayed in the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1a, and when the user operates the arrow cursor included in the slider with the left and right buttons of the cross key 27, the one-shot notification effect appears. It is possible to set the frequency. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effects between 0% and 100% in units of 1%. Also, in the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1a, the appearance frequency value set by the slider is displayed in real time.

In the present embodiment, the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect is the number of game times in which the one-shot notification effect for the whole is executed when the number of game times in which the lottery result of the special lottery is a jackpot. It is the ratio (%) of the number. That is, when the frequency of appearance is set to 100%, the one-shot announcement effect is executed in all the game rounds in which the special figure lottery wins a big hit, and when the appearance frequency is set to 0%, the number of game rounds in which the special figure lottery wins a big win is executed. The one-shot announcement effect is not executed at all.

The fish school effect expectation level setting image CT2a allows the player to set the degree of expectation of the fish school effect by operating the cross key 27 for input. As shown in the figure, a slider is displayed in the image CT2a for setting the expectation level of the fish school effect, and the user sets the expectation level of the fish school effect by operating the arrow cursor included in the slider with the left and right buttons of the cross key 27. It is possible to In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of the fish school presentation between 10% and 90% in units of 1%. In addition, the value of the degree of expectation set by the slider is displayed in real time in the image CT2a for setting the degree of expectation of fish school effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation (reliability) of the production is the total number of multiple game times in which the production is executed, that is, the special lottery in which the production is executed. It is calculated as a ratio of the number of game rounds in which the effect is executed and the jackpot is won to the total when the total number of the game rounds in which the player wins and the game rounds in which the player loses is counted as the whole. For example, if there are 1,000 game times in which the fish school performance is executed, there are 600 game times in which the fish school performance is executed and the jackpot is won, and there are 400 game times in which the fish school performance is executed and loses. If there is, the degree of expectation for the effect of the school of fish is calculated as 60% (600/1000).

The bubble effect expectation level setting image CT3a allows the player to set the expectation level of the bubble effect by inputting an operation with the cross key 27. FIG. As shown in the figure, a slider is displayed in the image CT3a for setting the expectation level of the bubble effect, and the user sets the expectation level of the fish school effect by operating the arrow cursor included in the slider with the left and right buttons of the cross key 27. It is possible to In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of the bubble effect between 10% and 50% in units of 1%. In addition, the value of the degree of expectation set by the slider is displayed in real time in the bubble effect expectation degree setting image CT3a.

After the player inputs the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of these effects, the player operates the effect operation button 24, thereby ending the display of the effect custom setting image PSGa on the display surface 41a, and FIG. 431(b). , an image FG1 saying "Custom setting has been accepted with the following contents" is displayed on the display surface 41a as a specific image display. Further, an image FG2 is displayed on the display surface 41a indicating that the values set by the player for the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of each effect have been input.

It should be noted that the value of the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of these effects is the value at the time when the player moves and stops the arrow cursor of the slider for setting the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of each effect. 10. Therefore, for example, when the player moves the arrow cursor to the 35% position in the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image CT1 and stops it, the game ball enters the first special figure start port 33 and the effect custom Even when the display of the setting image PSGa ends, the value of 35% is input to the pachinko machine 10 as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency input by the player.

The custom setting of the effect using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 has been described above.

<<9-2>> Custom settings for performance using a smartphone:
In this embodiment, the user of the smart phone 200 can make various settings related to the effects to be executed by the pachinko machine 10 in advance using a game machine dedicated application (hereinafter also referred to as an application APP) installed on the smart phone 200. is. That is, the user of the smart phone 200 can make custom settings for the effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 using the application APP. Specifically, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot when a predetermined effect is executed, the appearance frequency of the one-shot announcement effect that suggests the confirmation of the jackpot, the playback order of the music movies played during the round game, etc. , various settings related to effects can be set on the application APP installed in the smartphone 200 . Before playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, at the user's home), the user can use the application APP to make custom settings for the performance of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In the following description, the user of the smart phone 200 and the player of the pachinko machine 10 may simply be referred to as the user or the player.

Then, when the player plays a game on the pachinko machine 10, the information on the custom setting of the effect set by the player using the application APP (hereinafter referred to as custom setting information) is transmitted from the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 via Bluetooth. can be sent by communication via As described above, in this embodiment as well, NFC is used for pairing the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 when connecting via Bluetooth, as in the eighth embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 determines setting values relating to effect processing to be executed based on the custom setting information received from the smart phone 200 via Bluetooth communication, and executes the effect according to the setting values. A detailed description will be given below.

FIG. 432 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation image (hereinafter also referred to as an initial operation image) displayed on touch panel 202 when application APP is activated on smartphone 200 . As illustrated, an operation icon 204, an operation icon 205, an operation icon 206, and an operation icon 207 are displayed on the initial operation image. "Custom setting" is displayed on the operation icon 204, and when the user operates the operation icon 204, the display of the touch panel 202 is switched to an operation image that allows custom setting regarding the effect.

The operation icon 205 displays "connect to game machine", and when the user operates the operation icon 205, an operation icon for establishing a Bluetooth connection using NFC between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 is displayed. The display on the touch panel 202 is switched to the displayed operation image (hereinafter also referred to as a connection operation image). The connection operation image will be described later.

The operation icon 206 displays "game end (disconnection from game machine)". If the user operates the operation icon 206 while the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 are connected via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth connection between the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 is released. If the user operates the operation icon 206 when the pachinko machine 10 and the smartphone 200 are not connected via Bluetooth, the message "not connected to the game machine" is displayed (not shown), and the touch panel 202 is operated for initial operation. Return to viewing images.

In addition, the operation icon 207 displays “End”, and when the user operates the operation icon 207, the application APP running on the smartphone 200 is terminated.

FIG. 433 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation image (model selection image) displayed on the touch panel 202 when the operation icon 204 (“custom setting”) is operated by the user. As shown in FIG. 433(a), when the operation icon 204 (see FIG. 432) is operated by the user, the touch panel 202 displays an operation for selecting the model of the gaming machine for which the user desires the custom setting of the effect. An image (hereinafter also referred to as a model selection image) is displayed. The model selection image displays a plurality of operation icons 208 for selecting the model of the gaming machine. Specifically, the image of the operation icon 208 that allows the user to select one of a plurality of types of gaming machines such as "model A", "model B", "model C", and "model D". is displayed.

For example, when the user operates an operation icon displayed as "model A" among the operation icons 208, as shown in FIG. An image (hereinafter also referred to as an effect setting image) is displayed. The model of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is model A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 433(b), the operation icon 209 displayed in the model selection image displays "return". When the user operates the operation icon 209, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the initial operation image (see FIG. 432). The operation icon 209 is displayed when the user wants to return to the initial operation image without selecting a model, or when the user mistakenly operates the operation icon 204 in the initial operation image to move to the model selection image. Used.

As shown in FIG. 433(b), in the effect setting image, items that can be custom set in the effect executed by model A are displayed as a plurality of operation icons 210 to 219 selectable by the user. . The operation icon 210 displays "setting the frequency of one-shot announcement effect", and when the user operates the operation icon 210, an image ( (hereinafter also referred to as one-shot notification effect frequency setting image) is displayed on the touch panel 202 . The details of the image for setting the one-shot effect frequency will be described later.

The operation icon 212 displays "Fish shoal effect expectation setting", and when the user operates the operation icon 212, the user can set the expectation level of the fish shoal effect, which is an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the jackpot. An image (hereinafter also referred to as an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect) is displayed on the touch panel 202 . The details of the image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect will be described later.

The operation icon 214 displays "expectation degree of bubble effect setting", and when the user operates the operation icon 214, the user can set the degree of expectation of the bubble effect, which is the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the jackpot. An image (hereinafter also referred to as a bubble effect expectation level setting image) is displayed on the touch panel 202 . The details of the image for setting the degree of expectations for bubble effect will be described later.

"Cut-in effect setting" is displayed on the operation icon 216, and when the user operates the operation icon 216, an image (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as cut-in effect setting image) is displayed on the touch panel 202 . Details of the cut-in effect setting image will be described later.

"Round music setting" is displayed on the operation icon 218, and when the user operates the operation icon 218, an image (hereinafter, referred to as "round music setting image) is displayed on the touch panel 202 . The details of the round music setting image will be described later.

“Custom setting completed” is displayed on the operation icon 219 , and when the user operates the operation icon 219 , the information (custom setting information) that the user has customized is stored in the memory of the smartphone 200 . When the user operates operation icon 219, the image displayed on touch panel 202 returns to the initial operation image (see FIG. 432).

Next, the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image will be described.

FIG. 434 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image for setting the one-shot effect frequency. FIG. 435 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the one-shot notification effect (hibiscus flash effect) executed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 210 (see FIG. 433(b)), as shown in FIG. A notification effect frequency setting image is displayed on the touch panel 202 .

Here, the hibiscus flash effect, which is the one-shot announcement effect, will be explained first. As shown in FIG. 435, the one-shot notification effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 is a effect (hibiscus flash effect) in which the effect movable accessory 170 operates. Specifically, the performance movable accessory 170 moves downward, and each petal portion 172 rotates due to the rotating motion of the rotating shaft portion 171 . At that time, each petal portion 172 moves in a direction away from the rotation shaft portion 171, thereby creating a presentation effect as if a flower had bloomed. An LED is provided on a member constituting the rotating shaft portion 171, and blinks when the one-shot notification effect is executed. In addition, the speaker 46 outputs a sound effect for one-shot notification.

The description returns to the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image shown in FIG. A slider 220 is displayed on the image for setting the frequency of the one-shot announcement effects displayed on the touch panel 202, and the appearance frequency of the one-shot announcement effects is set by the user operating an arrow 222 included in the slider 220 left and right. It is possible to In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effects between 0% and 100% in units of 1%. Also, the display unit 224 displays in real time the appearance frequency value set by the slider 220 .

Further, as shown in the figure, an operation icon 226 is displayed on the image for setting the one-shot effect frequency. “Setting completed” is displayed on the operation icon 226 , and when the user operates the operation icon 226 , information on the appearance frequency of one-shot notifications set by the user is stored in the memory of the smartphone 200 . By the operation of the operation icon 226 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)).

Next, an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect will be described.

FIG. 436 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 212 (see FIG. 433), an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect is displayed on the touch panel 202 as shown in FIG. 436(a).

Here, the effect of the school of fish will be explained first. As shown in FIG. 436(b), the fish shoal effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 displays a plurality of fish on the display surface 41a during execution of the game round, thereby displaying the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the game round. It is a production that suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit.

The description returns to the image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect shown in FIG. 436(a). A slider 228 is displayed in the image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect displayed on the touch panel 202, and the user can set the degree of expectation for fish school effect by manipulating an arrow 230 included in the slider 228 left and right. is. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of the fish school presentation between 10% and 90% in units of 1%. Moreover, the value of the degree of expectation set by the slider 220 is displayed in real time on the display unit 232 . In this embodiment, unlike the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect, the expectation level of the fish school effect cannot be set to 0% or 100%. The reason for this will be explained later in "Processing Based on Custom Setting Information in Gaming Machine".

Further, as shown in FIG. 436(a), an operation icon 234 is displayed in the image for setting the degree of expectation for effect of a school of fish. “Setting completed” is displayed on the operation icon 234 , and when the user operates the operation icon 234 , the information on the degree of expectation of the fish school effect set by the user is stored in the memory of the smartphone 200 . By the operation of the operation icon 234 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)).

Next, the image for setting the expectation degree of bubble effect will be described.

FIG. 437 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image for setting the degree of expectations for bubble effect. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 214 (see FIG. 433), an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect is displayed on the touch panel 202 as shown in FIG. 437(a).

Here, the bubble effect will be explained first. As shown in FIG. 437(b), the bubble effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 displays a plurality of bubbles on the display surface 41a during execution of the game round, thereby displaying the lottery result of the special figure lottery of the game round. It is a production that suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit.

The description returns to the image for bubble effect expectation setting shown in FIG. 437(a). A slider 236 is displayed in the bubble effect expectation level setting image displayed on the touch panel 202, and the user can set the fish school effect expectation level by operating an arrow 238 included in the slider 236 left and right. is. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the degree of expectation of the bubble effect between 10% and 50% in units of 1%. In addition, the value of the degree of expectation set by the slider 2236 is displayed on the display unit 240 in real time. In addition, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the bubble effect is configured so that it cannot be set to 0% or 100%, unlike the appearance frequency of the one-shot notification effect, similarly to the fish school effect described above. . The reason for this will be explained later in "Processing for Custom Settings in Gaming Machines".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the setting of the standard effect when the user does not make the custom settings, the bubble effect is set as a effect with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the above-described fish school effect. Therefore, even in the custom setting, the maximum value that can be set as the degree of expectation for the bubble effect is set to a value (50%) lower than the maximum value (90%) that can be set as the degree of expectation for the school of fish effect.

As shown in FIG. 437(a), an operation icon 242 is displayed in the image for setting the degree of expectation for bubble effect. Operation icon 242 displays “setting completed”, and when the user operates operation icon 242 , information on the degree of expectation for bubble effect set by the user is stored in the memory of smartphone 200 . By the operation of the operation icon 242 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)).

Next, the cut-in effect setting image will be described.

FIG. 438 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the cut-in effect setting image. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 216 (see FIG. 433), a cut-in effect setting image is displayed on the touch panel 202 as shown in FIG. 438(a).

The cut-in effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is inserted and displayed (cut-in) on the display surface 41a while a series of effects are displayed on the display surface 41a during execution of the game round.

In the cut-in effect setting image displayed on the touch panel 202, three operation icons 244 to 248 displaying the names of three types of characters that can be inserted and displayed as a cut-in effect are selectably displayed. By selecting and operating (touching) one operation icon from the three operation icons, the user can select a character to be inserted and displayed as a cut-in effect.

Further, the operation icon 250 displayed in the cut-in effect setting image is displayed as "return". By the operation of the operation icon 250 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)). The operation icon 250 is used when the user wants to return to the effect setting image without setting the cut-in effect, or when the user accidentally operates the operation icon 216 in the effect setting image and moves to the cut-in effect setting image. It is used in case of accident. Incidentally, when the cut-in effect is not set in the custom setting, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in effect with a character preset as a standard.

FIG. 438(b) shows, as an example, an image displayed when the user operates the operation icon 244 displaying "Marine-chan" in the cut-in effect setting image (hereinafter referred to as the selected character setting image). It is an explanatory diagram shown. As shown in the figure, the selected character setting image includes operation icons 252 to 256 for selecting the clothes of the selected character (Marine-chan), and an operation for selecting the pose of the character during cut-in production. An icon 258 to an operation icon 262 are displayed.

For example, when the user operates the operation icon 254 labeled "Yukata" and the operation icon 260 labeled "Embarrassed smile", the custom setting is performed in the pachinko machine 10, and a marine wearing a yukata is displayed. An image in which the character of Chan smiles shyly is executed as a cut-in effect.

Further, as illustrated, an operation icon 264 is displayed in the cut-in effect setting image. Operation icon 264 displays “setting completed”, and when the user operates operation icon 264 , the setting information for the cut-in effect set by the user is stored in the memory of smartphone 200 . By the operation of the operation icon 264 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)).

Next, the round music setting image will be described.

FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round music setting image. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 218 (see FIG. 433), a round music setting image as shown in FIG. 439 is displayed on the touch panel 202. FIG. In addition, as described above, the round music is music (video and music) played during the round game.

As shown in the figure, four types of music (music A to music D) are displayed as operation icons 268 to 274 in the display area 266 of the round music setting image displayed on the touch panel 202 . By sliding the operation icons 268 to 274 displayed in the display area 266 to the display area 276, the user can set the music to be reproduced during the round game and the reproduction order of the music.

For example, as shown in FIG. 439, the user slides the operation icons 268 to 274 displayed in the display area 266 to display "song C", "song A", and "song B" in the display area 276 from the top. are arranged in the order of "song C"→"song A"→"song B" during a round game on the pachinko machine 10. In the example shown in FIG.

As another example, when the user slides the operation icons 268 to 274 displayed in the display area 266 and arranges only "music C" in the display area 276, the round game in the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Only "music C" is repeatedly reproduced.

As still another example, the user slides the operation icons 268 to 274 displayed in the display area 266 to select "song C", "song A", "song B", "song B" from the top of the display area 276. It is also possible to arrange the same song ("song A" in this example) multiple times, such as in the order of "song A". In this case, "song C"→"song A"→"song B"→"song A" is repeatedly reproduced during a round game on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 439, an operation icon 278 is displayed on the round music setting image. Operation icon 278 displays “setting completed”, and when the user operates operation icon 278 , the setting information of the round music set by the user is stored in the memory of smartphone 200 . By the operation of the operation icon 278 by the user, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the effect setting image (see FIG. 433(b)).

As described above, there are more items that can be custom-set by the smartphone 200 than items that can be custom-set by inputs from the performance operation buttons 24 and the cross key 27 of the pachinko machine 10 . The effect operation button 24 is poor in operability with the cross key 27, and when it is assumed that the player makes detailed settings for the effect, the burden on the player becomes large. Items that can be custom-set by input with the key 27 are limited to items that the player can easily input with the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 . On the other hand, the smart phone 200 has a touch panel 202 and is excellent in operability, so it is configured to allow fine settings for presentation. It should be noted that the items that can be custom-set by the operation buttons 24 of the pachinko machine 10 or the cross key 27 may be configured to allow fine setting in the same manner as the items that can be custom-set by the smart phone 200 . However, when such a configuration is adopted, the burden of operating the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 on the player becomes large when customizing the effect.

As described above, the custom setting information set in the one-shot notification effect frequency setting image, the fish school effect expectation setting image, the bubble effect expectation setting image, the cut-in effect setting image, and the round music setting image is stored in the memory of the smartphone 200 as final custom setting information by operating the operation icon 219 (“custom setting complete”) displayed in the effect setting image in FIG. 370(b). .

Next, a case where the operation icon 205 (“connect to gaming machine”) is operated in the initial operation image (see FIG. 432) will be described. As described above, when the user operates the operation icon 205 , the connection operation image is displayed on the touch panel 202 .

FIG. 440 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection operation image. As shown in FIG. 440(a), an operation icon 280 is displayed in the connection operation image. The operation icon 280 displays "connect". When the user operates the operation icon 280, connection processing between the smartphone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition, the touch panel 202 displays a connecting image shown in FIG. 440(b). The connection processing performed between the smart phone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 includes pairing using NFC and Bluetooth communication started after pairing. The connection processing will be described later. It should be noted that the operation icon 282 displayed in the image for connection operation displays "return". When the user operates the operation icon 282, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the initial operation image (see FIG. 432).

After the connection process is started, when the smartphone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 start communicating via Bluetooth, an image indicating that the smartphone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 are connected is displayed on the touch panel 202 (hereinafter also referred to as a connection completion image). is displayed.

FIG. 441 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection completion image. As shown in FIG. 441(a), the connection completion image displays on the touch panel 202 that the smart phone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 are connected. Further, as illustrated, an operation icon 284 and an operation icon 286 are displayed on the connection completion image. “Send custom setting information” is displayed on the operation icon 284 , and the custom setting information set in the smart phone 200 is sent to the pachinko machine 10 . Note that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration may be employed in which the smartphone 200 automatically transmits custom setting information to the pachinko machine 10 when the smartphone 200 and the pachinko machine 10 start communicating via Bluetooth.

When the transmission of the custom setting information from the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 is completed, a custom setting information transmission completion image is displayed on the touch panel 202 as shown in FIG. 441(b). The custom setting information transmission completion image indicates that the transmission of the custom setting information has been completed. In addition, the operation icon 290 displayed on the custom setting information transmission completion image displays "end". When the user operates operation icon 290, the image displayed on touch panel 202 returns to the initial operation image (see FIG. 432).

Also, in the connection completion image (see FIG. 441(a)), when the operation icon 286 is operated by the player, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 is received. When the smartphone 200 receives the game history information, the touch panel 202 displays a game history information reception image.

FIG. 442 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game history information reception image. As shown in the figure, in the game history information reception image, the game history information includes the number of times the variable jackpot was won in a series of games by the player, the number of times the normal jackpot was won, the number of prize balls won, and the number of games in which a predetermined number of jackpots were won in the past. The type of effect executed in , and the type of jackpot in each jackpot game round are displayed. Further, the operation icon 292 displayed in the game history information reception image is displayed as "end". When the player operates the operation icon 292, the image displayed on the touch panel 202 returns to the initial operation image (see FIG. 432).

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 receives the custom setting information from the smartphone 200, an image showing the contents set by the user as the custom setting (hereinafter also referred to as a custom setting information reception completion image) is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10. do.

FIG. 443 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a custom setting information reception completion image as an input content display image. As shown in the figure, when the pachinko machine 10 receives the custom setting information from the smartphone 200, it displays the contents of the custom setting made by the user using the smartphone 200 on the display surface 41a as the custom setting information reception completion image. As shown in the figure, an image FG1a saying "Custom setting has been accepted with the following contents" is displayed on the display surface 41a as a specific image display. In addition, an image FG2a is displayed on the display surface 41a indicating that values set by the player for the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of each effect have been input. Note that the custom setting information reception completion image does not hinder the player from playing the game, and the custom setting information reception completion image is promptly terminated when a game cycle is started on the pachinko machine 10 . As a modification, for example, the custom setting information reception completion image may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 3 seconds have elapsed) after a game cycle is started. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to confirm the contents of the custom setting. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the custom setting information reception completion image is continuously displayed in a small size on the display surface 41a while the game is being played. By doing so, the player can always check the contents of the custom setting. As another configuration, the custom setting information reception completion image is displayed on the display surface 41a by the player operating the effect operation button 24 or the cross key 27 during the period during which the game round is being executed or during the period of the standby state. may be adopted. By doing so, the player can confirm the contents of the custom setting at a desired timing.

It should be noted that the transmission of the custom setting information from the smart phone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 may be configured such that the transmission is possible during the execution of the game round or during the entire period of the pachinko machine 10 . In that case, the pachinko machine 10 may reflect the custom setting information transmitted from the smartphone 200 in the performance of the game round from the start of the game round immediately after receiving the custom setting information. However, it may be from the start of the game cycle caused by the game ball entering the first special figure start port 33 or the second special figure start port 34 at the time after the custom setting information is received. . Then, the custom setting information reception completion image may be configured to be displayed in an area of the display area of the display surface 41a that does not overlap with the varying decorative pattern. For example, the custom setting information reception completion image may be configured to be displayed in a lower right area of the display surface 41a, which is not superimposed on the variable decorative pattern.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 receives the custom setting information from the smartphone 200, in addition to displaying the custom setting information reception completion image on the display surface 41a, the pachinko machine 10 executes internal processing based on the custom setting information. The internal processing performed when the pachinko machine 10 receives custom setting information will be described below.

<<9-3>> Processing for externally input custom setting information:
Next, processing by the pachinko machine 10 for custom setting information input from the outside will be described.

<Processing related to one-shot notification effect frequency>
FIG. 444 shows the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set by the user using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 or using the smartphone 200 (application APP). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining values of notification effect frequency; In the following description, an external input means for externally inputting custom setting information to the pachinko machine 10 using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27, and an external input means for externally inputting custom setting information to the pachinko machine 10 using the smartphone 200. Means is sometimes collectively referred to simply as "external input means".

As shown in FIG. 444, when the player inputs a value of 0% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency through the external input means, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency becomes 0% on the pachinko machine 10 side as well. Set the table data used for the production as follows. That is, it is set so that the one-shot notification effect is not executed.

Further, when the player inputs a value in the range of 1 to 99% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by the external input means, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency is set to 50% on the pachinko machine 10 side. (hereinafter also referred to as table for determining the effect pattern (for jackpot)) used for determining the effect during the game is set. Specifically, in the random number used to determine the effect to be executed when the jackpot is won in the special lottery and the effect pattern determination table (for the jackpot) corresponding to the random number, the effect to be executed is a one-shot announcement effect. A performance pattern determination table (for a big win) is referred to so that the ratio of 5:5 to the ratio of the performance other than the one-shot announcement.

When the player inputs a value of 100% as the value of the one-shot notification performance frequency by the external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side also uses the value of the one-shot notification performance frequency to be 100% for performance. A performance pattern determination table (for jackpot) is set. That is, it is set so that the one-shot notification effect is always executed.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 as described above, even if the user can custom set the one-shot notification effect frequency in the range of 0% to 100% in increments of 1%, there are three types (0%, 50%). %, 100%) effect pattern determination table (for jackpot). If the user (player) can set the one-shot announcement effect frequency in the range of 0% to 100% in units of 1% by means of an external input means, each 1% of the one-shot announcement effect frequency corresponds to it. When the pachinko machine 10 prepares a performance pattern determination table (for big wins), it is necessary to store 101 kinds of performance pattern determination tables (for big wins) in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93). 10 storage capacity is heavily loaded. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the one-shot notification performance frequency in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the performance pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified and the storage capacity for storing the performance pattern determination table (for big win). reduction can be realized.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value is determined for each range, and the determined representative value is set to the pachinko machine 10. In order to set the one-shot announcement effect frequency in , if the user custom sets the one-shot announcement effect frequency to any value in the range of 1% to 99%, the frequency (value) actually set by the user Although the one-shot notification effect may not be executed in the pachinko machine 10 as expected, unless the number of times the one-shot notification effect is executed in the number of times the jackpot is won is counted on a statistical scale, the one-shot notification effect custom-set by the user may not be executed. It is difficult to notice that there is a deviation between the value of the frequency of the announcement performance and the value of the frequency of the one-shot announcement performance actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user by the external input means is 0% and when it is 100%, the one-shot notification effect frequency is also applied to the pachinko machine 10. is set to 0% or 100%. This is because the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency of 0% means that the one-shot notification effect is not performed, and the pachinko machine 10 has set the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency to 0% by the external input means. If the one-shot notification effect is executed even once, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user deviates from the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This is because it is easily noticed that there is

Similarly, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency is 100%, it means that the one-shot notification effect is performed every time in the game round where the big win is achieved. Although the pachinko machine 10 is set to , the one-shot notification effect is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. If the jackpot game is executed even once, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user and the value of the one-shot notification effect actually performed on the pachinko machine 10 This is because it is easy to notice that there is a deviation from the value of the set one-shot notification effect frequency.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually custom-set by the user (player) through the external input means is 0% and 100%, the pachinko machine 10 Also, since the effect pattern determination table (for big win) is set so that the one-shot notification effect frequency is 0% or 100%, the above problem can be solved, and the custom-set one-shot notification effect frequency is set. It is possible to make it more difficult for the user to notice that there is a deviation between the value and the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can realize simplification of processing for setting the effect pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 and reduction of the storage capacity for storing the effect pattern determination table (for big wins). In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the user to notice that there is a deviation between the custom-set one-shot notification effect frequency value and the one-shot notification effect frequency value actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can.

<Processing related to expectation level of fish school effect>
FIG. 445 shows the fish school effect expectation set in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the fish school effect expectation value set by the user using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 or using the smartphone 200 (application APP). It is an explanatory view explaining a value of a degree.

As shown in FIG. 445, when the player inputs a value in the range of 10% to 90% as the value of the degree of expectation of the fish school effect by the external input means, the value of the fish school effect becomes 50% on the pachinko machine 10 side. As shown, the result of the special lottery is a table for determining the effect pattern (for the big hit), which is the table data used to determine the effect in the game round in which the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the special lottery is out (including out of the reach) ) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) used for determining the production in the game turn is set.

Specifically, while taking into consideration the probability of a big hit in a special lottery, the frequency of appearance of the fish school effect in the effect pattern determination table (for big wins) and the appearance of the fish school effect in the effect pattern determination table (for loss). By adjusting the frequency of appearance, the ratio of the number of big win game times in which the fish school performance is executed to the total number of game times in which the fish school performance is executed becomes the value of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the effect of the school of fish to 50%.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 as described above, even if the user can custom-set the degree of expectation for the performance of a school of fish in the range of 10% to 90% in increments of 1%, one type of performance (50%) is provided. This can be dealt with by preparing a set of a pattern determination table (for big win) and an effect pattern determination table (for loss). Supposing that the user (player) can set the fish school performance expectation level in the range of 10% to 90% in increments of 1% by external input means, a performance pattern corresponding to each 1% of the fish school performance expectation level is generated. If the pachinko machine 10 prepares a set of a determination table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss), there are 81 types of performance pattern determination table (for big win) and effect pattern determination table (for loss). ) must be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93), which imposes a heavy burden on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the value of the fish school performance expectation level that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, and a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the expected degree of fish school performance in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the performance pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified, and the performance pattern determination table (for big win) and the performance pattern determination table (for loss) are provided. ) can be reduced.

<Processing Regarding Expected Degree of Bubble Production>
FIG. 446 shows the bubble effect set in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the bubble effect expectation value set by the user using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 or using the smartphone 200 (application APP). It is an explanatory view explaining the value of the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 446, when the player inputs a value in the range of 10% to 50% as the bubble effect expectation value by the external input means, the bubble effect value becomes 30% on the pachinko machine 10 side. As shown, the result of the special lottery is a table for determining the effect pattern (for the big hit), which is the table data used to determine the effect in the game round in which the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the special lottery is out (including out of the reach) ) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) used for determining the production in the game turn is set.

Specifically, while considering the jackpot probability in the special lottery, the frequency of appearance of the bubble performance in the performance pattern determination table (for big win) and the appearance of the bubble performance in the performance pattern determination table (for loss). By adjusting the frequency of appearance, the ratio of the number of times of big winning games in which the bubble performance is executed to the total number of times of the game in which the bubble performance is executed becomes the value of the degree of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of expectations for bubble presentation to 30%.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 in such a manner, the user can custom-set the expectation level of bubble performance in the range of 10% to 50% in increments of 1% in the same manner as the expectation level of the school of fish explained above. However, it can be dealt with by preparing a set of one type (30%) of the effect pattern determination table (for big win) and the effect pattern determination table (for loss). If the user (player) can set the expected degree of bubble effect in the range of 10% to 50% in units of 1% by means of an external input means, an effect pattern corresponding to each 1% of the expected degree of bubble effect is generated. If the pachinko machine 10 prepares a set of a determination table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss), there are 41 types of performance pattern determination table (for big win) and effect pattern determination table (for loss). ) must be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93), and the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is heavily loaded. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the value of the degree of expectation for bubble effect that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, and a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the bubble effect expectation level in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the effect pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified, and the effect pattern determination table (for big win) and the effect pattern determination table (for loss) are provided. ) can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the standard production settings when the user does not make custom settings, the bubble production is set as a production with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the fish school production described above. . Therefore, even in the custom setting, the maximum value that can be set as the degree of expectation for the bubble effect is set to a value (50%) lower than the maximum value (90%) that can be set as the degree of expectation for the school of fish effect.

In addition, the processing described above is executed in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the custom setting information input by the player through the external input means, but two or three effects out of the one-shot notification effect, the fish school effect, and the bubble effect are the same. It does not prevent execution in game rounds. For example, it is possible to execute the fish shoal effect after executing the bubble effect in the same game round.

<Cut-in production, processing related to round music>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-shot notification effect frequency, the expected degree of fish school effect, and the expected degree of bubble effect are set by the user using the smartphone 200 (application APP). Although the values set in 10 may differ, the settings related to the cut-in effect and the round music are set so that the content set by the user using the smartphone 200 (application APP) and the content set in the pachinko machine 10 match. It is configured. Even if the settings related to the cut-in effect and the settings related to the round music are set in the pachinko machine 10 with the same contents as those set in the smartphone 200 (application APP), the processing load and storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 do not change significantly. It is from. Moreover, by adopting the contents set by the user and the contents set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the user think that the pachinko machine 10 behaves as customized by the user. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the content set by the user and the content set in the pachinko machine 10 are inconsistent with each other in the notification performance frequency, the expected degree of fish school performance, and the expected degree of bubble performance. In addition, the user can recognize the goodness of the customization by acting according to the user's customization in the cut-in production and round music.
The processing based on the custom setting information by the gaming machine has been described above.

<<9-4>> Various processes executed in the main control device, sound emission control device, and display control device:
Regarding the various processes executed in the main control device, the sound emission control device, and the display control device, the custom setting processing (step Se6103) in the sound emission control device is different from that of the eighth embodiment, and the contents of the other processes are the same. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. Note that the custom setting process (step Se6103) in the present embodiment has the contents of the process explained in the above "<<9-3>> Processing for Externally Input Custom Setting Information".

<<9-5>> Problems and effects in the ninth embodiment:
In the following, the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described after describing the problems of the conventional pachinko machine.

A conventional gaming machine improves the comfort and interest of a game by reflecting the input of information from the player in the game performance. Although this makes it possible to meet the demands of various players, the input of information may impose a burden on the data retention and control of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a demand for suitable data retention and control of gaming machines without reducing the diversity of information input by players. Specifically, for example, when the player decides the output mode of the effect element used in the variable game and makes it possible to input, a plurality of candidates are displayed, and the player decides an arbitrary candidate and selects it. By inputting information, the gaming machine determines the output mode of the effect element based on the input information. However, the more objects that can be set at the predetermined timing when the gaming machine sets the output mode of the effect element, the more data corresponding to the target and the more complicated the processing becomes. Disabling input by the player, however, can prevent an increase in data and processing, but reduces the comfort and enjoyment of the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to reduce the burden on a gaming machine at predetermined output mode setting timings while allowing a variety of inputs by a player.

The configuration adopted by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment to address the above problems will be specifically described below.

According to this embodiment, as a configuration, an internal lottery is executed based on determination that the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied by the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. A variable display unit that performs lottery processing and performs variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery, and a winning game that displays a specific display result that is executed when the internal lottery result is a specific result. Equipped with a specific game execution part for executing a specific game machine state after the end of the rotation variation, an effect execution process for performing a variation performance using a plurality of output elements during a variation display for a predetermined period, and a player among the plurality of output elements external input means for allowing the player to determine and input a value for the output state of a particular output element with respect to the particular output element selected by the player. The value for the output state can be input by the player selecting one predetermined input value from a plurality of values, and the gaming machine inputs one predetermined input value determined by the player. and a predetermined output value setting processing unit that can be executed after executing the specific image display. The effect execution means can set an output value for the output state of the specific output element used when executing the variable effect, and the predetermined output value setting processing unit can be set by the player as a value for the output state Even if the first input value is input or if a second input value different from the first input value is input, the output state value is the first input value. It is configured to be able to set a specific setting value which is different from the value and the second input value and which is stored in advance in the storage means.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, while allowing the player to select the output element of the game effect for the game machine, the output state of the output element of the game effect is set at the predetermined timing. It is possible to reduce the burden. That is, even if the player selects and inputs the first input value and the second input value as one predetermined value for the output state from a plurality of values, the specified value stored in advance in the storage means is input. Set value is set. By doing so, it is possible to prepare data (for example, an effect pattern table) related to effects corresponding to each of a plurality of values that the player can select as a value for the output state, or to select one of the values. It becomes the structure which does not need to perform the process corresponding to one. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the first special figure lottery and the conditions for executing the second special figure lottery are satisfied. It is possible to execute a special lottery based on the fact that the condition is determined to be satisfied, and based on the result of the special lottery, execute the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined period, and the result of the special lottery A special electric opening/closing execution mode is executed after the end of the variation of winning game times for displaying a specific display result executed in the case of a big hit, and a variation performance is performed using a plurality of performances during the variation display for a predetermined period, A means is provided for inputting custom settings that the player can determine and input values for appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and music of a specific performance selected by the player from among a plurality of performances. The values for the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation can be input by the player selecting one predetermined input value from a plurality of values, and the pachinko machine 10 receives the one predetermined input determined by the player. A pattern display device 41 (display surface 41a) that executes display of the corresponding custom setting information reception completion image when the input of the value is completed, and custom settings that can be executed after executing the display of the custom setting information reception completion image. processing, and by custom setting processing, it is possible to set values for the appearance frequency and expectation level of a specific production used when executing a variable production. Even if the first setting value is input by the user as a value for the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation, or if a second setting value different from the first setting value is input, As values of the frequency of appearance and degree of expectation, representative values different from the first set value and the second set value and stored in advance in the ROM 93 can be set.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine at a predetermined timing for setting the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation for the performance while giving the player a range of selection of the performance for the pachinko machine 10 10 burden can be reduced. That is, even if the player selects and inputs the first setting value and the second setting value as one predetermined setting value from a plurality of values for the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation, the value is stored in the ROM 93 in advance. representative value is set. By doing so, it is possible to prepare data (for example, an effect pattern table) related to effects corresponding to each of a plurality of values that the player can select as values for the frequency of appearance and degree of expectation, or to prepare a plurality of values. It becomes the structure which does not need to perform the process corresponding to each one. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, the output of the specific output element includes at least one of image output, audio output, light output, and motion output of the movable character.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, the value for the output state of any one of image output, sound output, light output, and motion output of a movable role is selected from a plurality of values by the player. selects and inputs the first input value and the second input value as one predetermined input value, the specific set value stored in advance in the storage means is set. Therefore, it is possible to realize simplification of processing and reduction of the data capacity regarding the output element of any one of image output, audio output, light output, and motion output of the movable character. . in particular. Data related to production corresponding to each of multiple values that the player can select as a value for the output state of image output, sound output, light output, or motion output of a movable part ( For example, it is not necessary to prepare an effect pattern table or to execute processing corresponding to each of a plurality of values. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the output of a specific effect includes at least one of image output, audio output, light output, and motion output of a movable character. .

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to this embodiment, as a value for the appearance frequency or degree of expectation of any of image output, sound output, light output, or motion output of a movable character, Even if the player selects and inputs the first setting value and the second setting value as one predetermined setting value from a plurality of values, the representative value stored in advance in the ROM 93 is set. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing and reduce the data volume related to the rendering of any one of image output, audio output, light output, and motion output of the movable character. in particular. An effect corresponding to each of multiple values that the player can select as a value for the appearance frequency or degree of expectation of image output, sound output, light output, or motion output of a movable character. It is not necessary to prepare data (for example, effect pattern table) related to the value or to execute processing corresponding to each of a plurality of values. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, at least a first external input means capable of inputting a value corresponding to the output state of the first output element, and a second output element different from the first output element. a second external input means capable of inputting a value corresponding to the output state, wherein the external input means is configured to be capable of inputting different values corresponding to the first output element and the second output element.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, the player can set a value corresponding to each output state for a plurality of output elements. It is possible to set the performance with an original combination that matches the taste of the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, at least a value corresponding to the appearance frequency/expectation level of the first effect (for example, fish school effect) can be input, and the first effect different from the first effect can be input. It is possible to input values corresponding to the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of the second effect (for example, bubble effect). Input is possible.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, it is possible for the player to set a value corresponding to the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation for each of a plurality of effects. As a combination of the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation for the game, it is possible to set the effect with an original combination that matches the taste of the player.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, the predetermined output value setting processing unit sets the specific set value input by the player when the same value as the specific set value is input by the player. .

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, the predetermined output value setting processing unit sets the specific set value input by the player when the same value as the specific set value is input by the player. Therefore, the value corresponding to the output state of the output element is not always set to a value different from the value input by the player. When the stored specific set value matches, the output element can be output in an output state that accurately reflects the value input by the player as the output state of the output element.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the custom setting process sets the value of the representative value input by the player when the same value as the representative value is input by the player.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, if the player inputs the same value as the representative value, the custom setting process sets the representative value input by the player. , the value corresponding to the appearance frequency and expectation of the effect is not always set to a value different from the value input by the player. When the representative value stored in the storage means matches, the performance can be executed with the frequency of appearance and degree of expectation that accurately reflect the values input by the player as the frequency of appearance and degree of expectation of performance. .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when one predetermined input value is input by a player, an input value storage unit that stores that one predetermined input value has been input; and image display means for displaying an input content display image indicating that one predetermined input value has been input for the output state of a specific output element.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, when one predetermined input value is input by the player, it is stored that the one predetermined input value is input, and in the variable effect, a specific input value is stored. An input content display image is displayed to indicate that one predetermined input value has been input for the output state of the output element. Thus, the player can confirm the value entered by the player for the output state of a particular output element. Then, it is possible to make the player think that the output element is output in the output state corresponding to the value input by the player himself/herself. Further, in such a state, a specific setting value different from the first input value and the second input value and stored in advance in the storage means is actually set as the value of the output state. Since the output element is output in an output state corresponding to , it is possible to surprise and convince the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when one predetermined input value is input by the player as the value of appearance frequency, degree of expectation, or music, the one predetermined input value is input. and a design for displaying a custom setting information reception completion image indicating that one predetermined input value has been input for the appearance frequency, expectation level, or music of a specific performance in the variable performance. A display device 41 (display surface 41a) is provided.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, when one predetermined input value is input by the player, the fact that the one predetermined input value has been input is stored, and in the variable effect, a specific effect is performed. A custom setting information reception completion image indicating that one predetermined input value has been input for the frequency of appearance, degree of expectation, and music is displayed. Therefore, the player can confirm the appearance frequency and expectation level of a specific effect, and the values input by the player himself/herself for the music. Then, it is possible to make the player think that the appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and music corresponding to the value input by the player himself/herself will be output. Furthermore, in such a state, representative values stored in the ROM 93 in advance, which are different from the first set value and the second set value, are actually set as the frequency of appearance, the degree of expectation, and the values of the music. Since the performance is executed with the frequency of appearance, degree of expectation, and music corresponding to the representative value, the player can be surprised and persuaded.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the external input means can input a value corresponding to the output state of a specific output element during the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for the predetermined period. be.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, a value corresponding to the output state of a specific output element can be input during the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for the predetermined period. can input a value corresponding to the output state of a specific output element at a desired timing, thereby improving convenience and interest.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the means for inputting custom settings includes the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation of a specific effect in the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a predetermined period. or a value corresponding to a piece of music can be input.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, according to the present embodiment, during the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display for a predetermined period, the appearance frequency, the degree of expectation, and the value corresponding to the song can be input, the player can input values corresponding to the appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and music of a specific performance at a desired timing, thereby improving convenience and interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, the external input means is capable of inputting a predetermined value to the output element output in the specific game state before the occurrence of the specific game state, and before the occurrence of the specific game state means for outputting an output element to be output in a specific game state in an output state based on a predetermined input when a predetermined input is made in .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, it is possible to input a predetermined value to the output element output in the specific game state before the occurrence of the specific game state. Immediately before or after the start of , the player does not have to set the output elements to be output in the specific game state in a short period of time. Therefore, the player can easily set the output state of the output elements in the specific game state.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as an effect, when a predetermined input is made before occurrence of the specific game state, the output element output in the specific game state is output in an output state based on the predetermined input. As described above, the predetermined output value setting processing section in the gaming machine of the present embodiment sets the first input value Even if a second input value different from is input, the value of the output state is a value different from the first input value and the second input value and stored in advance in the storage means It is configured to be able to set specific settings. However, as this embodiment, when a predetermined input is made before the specific game state occurs, the output state in the specific game state is based on the input by the player. be able to. The setting of the output elements in the specific game state (during the round game) (for example, the order of the songs in the opening and closing execution mode) can be set according to the appearance frequency value and the expectation value like the effect during the variable display. effect pattern table and does not require a large amount of data for each value. Therefore, by outputting the output element in the output state in the specific game state based on the player's input, it is possible to output the output element reflecting the player's preference setting.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the means for inputting custom settings is capable of inputting a predetermined value before the occurrence of the specific game state with respect to the effect output in the specific game state. A means is provided for executing an effect output in a specific game state with an appearance frequency and an expectation level based on the input when a predetermined input is made before the game state occurs.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, a predetermined input can be made before the opening/closing execution mode is generated for the effect executed in the opening/closing execution mode. Also, after the game starts, the player does not have to set the effects to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode in a short period of time. Therefore, the player can easily set the appearance frequency, degree of expectation, and music in the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, as a specific effect, for example, when a predetermined input is made before the opening/closing execution mode occurs, an effect output in the specific game state is executed with the appearance frequency and degree of expectation based on the predetermined input. As described above, in the custom setting process in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player inputs the first set value as the value for the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation, the first set value Even if a second setting value different from is input, a value different from the first setting value and the second setting value is stored in advance in the storage means as the value of the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation. It is configured to be able to set the stored specific settings. However, in this embodiment, if a predetermined input is made before the opening/closing execution mode is generated, the music and the order of the music in the opening/closing execution mode are produced in accordance with the player's input. can be executed. The setting of effects in the opening and closing execution mode (for example, the order of songs in the opening and closing execution mode) can be set with many production pattern tables corresponding to the appearance frequency value and the expectation value like the production in the variable display. It does not need to be provided and does not require a lot of data capacity for each value. Therefore, the music and the order of music in the opening/closing execution mode can be executed in accordance with the player's input, thereby making it possible to execute the performance reflecting the player's preference settings.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, the first input value is a value larger than the specific setting value, and the second input value is a value smaller than the specific setting value.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first input value is larger than the specific set value or the second input value is smaller than the specific set value, the output state can be set to a specific setting value stored in advance in the storage means, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output state while performing simple internal control.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to this embodiment, the first set value is a value larger than the representative value, and the second set value is a value smaller than the representative value.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, even if the first set value is a value larger than the representative value and the second set value is a value smaller than the representative value, the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation Since a representative value stored in advance in the storage means can be set as the value, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the frequency of appearance and the degree of expectation while performing simple internal control.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, the first input value and the second input value are values greater than the specific set value.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first input value and the second input value are larger than the specific setting value, the specific setting stored in advance in the storage means is used as the value of the output state. Since the value can be set, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output state while performing simple internal control.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the first set value and the second set value are values greater than the representative value.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, even if the first set value and the second set value are values larger than the representative value, the representative value stored in advance in the storage means as the value of the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation can be set, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the appearance frequency and the expectation value while performing simple internal control.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as a configuration, the first input value and the second input value are values smaller than the specific set value.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the first input value and the second input value are smaller than the specific setting value, the specific setting stored in advance in the storage means is used as the value of the output state. Since the value can be set, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output state while performing simple internal control.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, the first set value and the second set value are values smaller than the representative value.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, even if the first set value and the second set value are values smaller than the representative value, the representative value stored in advance in the storage means as the value of the appearance frequency or the degree of expectation can be set, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output state while performing simple internal control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, when one predetermined input value is input by the player, an input value storage unit for storing that the one predetermined input value has been input; A history information storage area for storing execution history information related to a specific variation display executed in a state in which one predetermined input value is input by an operator, and a history for outputting the execution history information stored in the history information storage area. and information output means.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, as an effect, when one predetermined input value is input by the player, the one predetermined input value is stored, and the one predetermined input value is input. A state change effect is executed in the change display, and execution history information relating to the change display is output. , the difference can surprise or delight the player.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, when one predetermined set value is input by a player, a RAM for storing that the one predetermined set value has been input; In a state in which one predetermined set value is input by a player, a storage area for storing game history information relating to a specific variation display executed, and the game history information stored in the storage area are output.

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, when one predetermined setting value is input by the player, the one predetermined setting value is stored, and it is as if the one predetermined setting value is prospered. A variable performance is executed in the variable display, and the game history information related to the variable display is output, so that the player can confirm the result of output control with a value different from one predetermined set value input by the player. can surprise or delight the player with the difference.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a configuration, the plurality of values that the player can input are among the plurality of values as the value for the output state when a specific output element is output in the variable display for a predetermined period. is input, a display result other than a specific display result can be displayed as a result of the variable display for a predetermined period.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, regarding the configuration of a plurality of values, when a specific output element is output in a variable display for a predetermined period of time, any one of the plurality of values can be selected as the value for the output state. Even if a value is input, display results other than a specific display result can be displayed as a result of variable display for a predetermined period. In other words, the plurality of values that the player can select as the value for the output state does not include a value indicating that a specific display result is always displayed when a specific output element is output. configured to prevent By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set a specific set value that is different from the value input by the player and that is stored in advance in the storage means as the value of the output state of the specific output element. You can make it difficult for people to notice you. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to set a value for the output state of the variable effect.

As a specific configuration, for example, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of values that the player can input as the appearance frequency and the degree of expectation are set to the appearance frequency or as a value for the degree of expectation, a display result other than a specific display result (for example, a display result other than a jackpot) will be displayed as a result of the variable display for a predetermined period of time. configured to obtain

Therefore, as a specific effect, for example, regarding the configuration of a plurality of values, when a specific effect is output in a variable display for a predetermined period, which value is input from among the plurality of values as the value for the degree of expectation Even if it is, display results other than the specific display results (for example, display results other than the big win) can be displayed as a result of the variable display for the predetermined period. In other words, a value indicating that a specific display result (jackpot display) will always be displayed when a specific effect is executed, among a plurality of values that the player can select as a value for the degree of expectation. (For example, expectations of 100%) are not included. By adopting such a configuration, the player is informed that a representative value, which is different from the value input by the player and is stored in advance in the storage means, is set as the value of the degree of expectation for the specific performance. You can make it less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to set a value for the degree of expectation of the variable effect.

<Effect of applying the eighth embodiment to the ninth embodiment>
When the eighth embodiment is applied to the present embodiment (ninth embodiment), the following special effects are obtained. That is, since the smartphone 200 can be used to customize the effects, it is possible to avoid manual input using the effect operation buttons or the cross key before starting the game. The player can comfortably perform custom settings for effects on the smartphone 200 using a touch panel or the like with excellent operability. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily make detailed custom settings related to the effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

Custom setting information relating to performance of the pachinko machine 10 is set and prepared in advance using an application APP of the smartphone 200, and the custom setting information can be input from the smartphone 200 to the pachinko machine 10 when playing a game. . By adopting such a configuration, the player does not perform custom setting of the effect by operating the effect operation button 24 provided in the pachinko machine 10 or the cross key 27, but sets the effect in advance by the player using the smartphone 200. Custom setting information can be input to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time spent by the player to make custom settings on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, it is easy for the player who wants to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 as soon as possible and the player who wants to enjoy the game even for a short time because he has come all the way to the game hall to use the custom setting of the performance. can be configured.

That is, even detailed custom settings related to effects can be set in advance using the smartphone 200 when the player has time, and the settings can be made when playing a game on the gaming machine. can be avoided. In addition, even when changing the gaming machine on which a game is played, customization is possible only by transmitting custom setting information from the smartphone 200 to the gaming machine on which a new game is played. Custom settings can be made easily.

<<9-6>> Modified example of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

<<9-6-1>> Modification 1:
<Modified example of processing related to one-shot notification effect frequency>
FIG. 447 shows a value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set by the user using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 or using the smartphone 200 (application APP) as a modified example of the processing related to the one-shot notification effect frequency. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 447, when the player inputs a value of 0% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency through the external input means, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency also becomes 0% on the pachinko machine 10 side. Set the table data used for the production as follows. That is, it is set so that the one-shot notification effect is not executed.

Further, when the player inputs a value in the range of 1 to 20% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by the external input means, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency is set to 10% on the pachinko machine 10 side. (hereinafter also referred to as table for determining the effect pattern (for jackpot)) used for determining the effect during the game is set. Specifically, in the random number used to determine the effect to be executed when the jackpot is won in the special lottery and the effect pattern determination table (for the jackpot) corresponding to the random number, the effect to be executed is a one-shot announcement effect. A performance pattern determination table (for a big win) is referred to so that the ratio of 1:9 to the ratio of the performance other than the one-shot announcement is 1:9.

Furthermore, when the player inputs a value in the range of 21 to 40% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by the external input means, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency is set to 30% on the pachinko machine 10 side. Set the table for determining the effect pattern (for big win) used for the effect. When the player inputs a value in the range of 41 to 60% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by an external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side performs an effect so that the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency becomes 50%. Set the effect pattern determination table (for jackpot) used for. When the player inputs a value in the range of 61 to 80% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by an external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side performs an effect so that the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency becomes 70%. Set the effect pattern determination table (for jackpot) used for. When the player inputs a value in the range of 81 to 99% as the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency by an external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side performs an effect so that the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency becomes 90%. Set the effect pattern determination table (for jackpot) used for.

When the player inputs a value of 100% as the value of the one-shot notification performance frequency by the external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side also uses the value of the one-shot notification performance frequency to be 100% for performance. A performance pattern determination table (for jackpot) is set. That is, it is set so that the one-shot notification effect is always executed.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 as described above, even if the user can custom set the one-shot notification effect frequency in the range of 0% to 100% in 1% increments, there are seven types (0%, 10 %, 30%, 50%, 70%, 90%, 100%) can be prepared by preparing an effect pattern determination table (for big wins). If the user (player) can set the one-shot announcement effect frequency in the range of 0% to 100% in units of 1% by means of an external input means, each 1% of the one-shot announcement effect frequency corresponds to it. When the pachinko machine 10 prepares a performance pattern determination table (for big wins), it is necessary to store 101 kinds of performance pattern determination tables (for big wins) in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93). 10 storage capacity is heavily loaded. On the other hand, as in this modification, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the one-shot notification performance frequency in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the performance pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified and the storage capacity for storing the performance pattern determination table (for big win). reduction can be realized.

Furthermore, in this modification, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value is determined for each range, and the determined representative value is set to the pachinko machine 10. In order to set the one-shot announcement effect frequency in , if the user custom sets the one-shot announcement effect frequency to any value in the range of 1% to 99%, the frequency (value) actually set by the user Although the one-shot notification effect may not be executed in the pachinko machine 10 as expected, unless the number of times the one-shot notification effect is executed in the number of times the jackpot is won is counted on a statistical scale, the one-shot notification effect custom-set by the user may not be executed. It is difficult to notice that there is a deviation between the value of the frequency of the announcement performance and the value of the frequency of the one-shot announcement performance actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In addition, as compared with the above embodiment, in this modification, the number of performance pattern determination tables (for big wins) to be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93) is increased and the storage capacity is also increased. Since the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency that can be custom set is divided into multiple ranges and a representative value is set for each range, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user and the actual pachinko machine The deviation from the value of the one-shot notification performance frequency set to 10 is reduced, making it more difficult for the player to notice the deviation and to make the player less likely to feel a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this modification, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user by the external input means is 0% and when it is 100%, the one-shot notification effect frequency is also applied to the pachinko machine 10. is set to 0% or 100%. This is because the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency of 0% means that the one-shot notification effect is not performed, and the pachinko machine 10 has set the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency to 0% by the external input means. If the one-shot notification effect is executed even once, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user deviates from the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This is because it is easily noticed that there is

Similarly, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency is 100%, it means that the one-shot notification effect is performed every time in the game round where the big win is achieved. Although the pachinko machine 10 is set to , the one-shot notification effect is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. If the jackpot game is executed even once, the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency custom-set by the user and the value of the one-shot notification effect actually performed on the pachinko machine 10 This is because it is easy to notice that there is a deviation from the value of the set one-shot notification effect frequency.

In this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, when the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually custom-set by the user (player) by the external input means is 0% and 100%, the pachinko machine 10, since the performance pattern determination table (for jackpot) is set such that the one-shot notification effect frequency is 0% or 100%, the above problem can be solved, and the custom-set one-shot notification effect is provided. It is possible to make it more difficult for the user to notice that there is a deviation between the value of the frequency and the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example can simplify the processing for setting the effect pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 and reduce the storage capacity for storing the effect pattern determination table (for big wins). In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the user to notice that there is a deviation between the custom-set one-shot notification effect frequency value and the one-shot notification effect frequency value actually set in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can.

<<9-6-2>> Modification 2:
<Modified example of processing related to fish school performance expectation level>
FIG. 448 shows, as a modified example of the processing related to the expectation level of fish school effect, a 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the value of the degree of expectation for fish school effect set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 448, when the player inputs a value in the range of 10% to 30% as the expected degree of fish school effect by the external input means, the value of the fish school effect becomes 20% on the pachinko machine 10 side. As shown, the result of the special lottery is a table for determining the effect pattern (for the big hit), which is the table data used to determine the effect in the game round in which the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the special lottery is out (including out of the reach) ) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) used for determining the production in the game turn is set.

Specifically, while taking into consideration the probability of a big hit in a special lottery, the frequency of appearance of the fish school effect in the effect pattern determination table (for big wins) and the appearance of the fish school effect in the effect pattern determination table (for loss). By adjusting the frequency of appearance, the ratio of the number of big win game times in which the fish school performance is executed to the total number of game times in which the fish school performance is executed becomes the value of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the effect of the school of fish to 20%.

Furthermore, when the player inputs a value in the range of 31 to 50% as the expected degree of fish school performance by the external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side performs performance so that the expected degree of fish school performance becomes 40%. A pattern determination table (for big win) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) are set. When the player inputs a value in the range of 51 to 70% as the expected degree of performance of the school of fish by an external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side determines the performance pattern so that the expected degree of performance of the school of fish becomes 60%. A game table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss) are set. Similarly, when the player inputs a value in the range of 71% to 90% as the expected degree of fish school performance by the external input means, the pachinko machine 10 side sets the expected degree of fish school performance to 80%. A performance pattern determination table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss) are set.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 as described above, even if the user can custom set the degree of expectation for the effect of a school of fish in the range of 10% to 90% in increments of 1%, there are four types (20%, 40% , 60%, 80%) by preparing a set of a performance pattern determination table (for jackpot) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss). Supposing that the user (player) can set the fish school performance expectation level in the range of 10% to 90% in increments of 1% by external input means, a performance pattern corresponding to each 1% of the fish school performance expectation level is generated. If the pachinko machine 10 prepares a set of a determination table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss), there are 81 types of performance pattern determination table (for big win) and effect pattern determination table (for loss). ) must be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93), which imposes a heavy burden on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this modification, the value of the fish school performance expectation level that can be customized by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the expected degree of fish school performance in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the performance pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified, and the performance pattern determination table (for big win) and the performance pattern determination table (for loss) are provided. ) can be reduced.

Also, in comparison with the above-described embodiment, in this modification, the number of sets of the effect pattern determination table (for jackpot) and the effect pattern determination table (for loss) to be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93) However, the value of the expected degree of fish school performance that can be customized than in the above embodiment is divided into a plurality of ranges, and the representative value is set for each range. The deviation between the performance expectation level value and the fish school performance expectation level value actually set in the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, making it more difficult for the player to notice the deviation and making the player feel uncomfortable. You can make it less noticeable.

<<9-6-3>> Modification 3:
<Modified Example of Processing Concerning Bubble Effect Expectation Level>
FIG. 449 shows, as a modified example of the process relating to the bubble effect expectation level, the value of the bubble effect expectation level set by the user using the effect operation button 24 and the cross key 27 or using the smartphone 200 (application APP). It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 449, when the player inputs a value in the range of 10% to 30% as the bubble effect expectation value by the external input means, the bubble effect value becomes 20% on the pachinko machine 10 side. As shown, the result of the special lottery is a table for determining the effect pattern (for the big hit), which is the table data used to determine the effect in the game round in which the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the special lottery is out (including out of the reach) ) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) used for determining the production in the game turn is set.

Specifically, while considering the jackpot probability in the special lottery, the frequency of appearance of the bubble performance in the performance pattern determination table (for big win) and the appearance of the bubble performance in the performance pattern determination table (for loss). By adjusting the frequency of appearance, the ratio of the number of times of big winning games in which the bubble performance is executed to the total number of times of the game in which the bubble performance is executed becomes the value of the degree of expectation. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of expectations for bubble presentation to 20%.

Furthermore, when the player inputs a value in the range of 31% to 50% as the value of expectation for bubble presentation through the external input means, the Pachinko machine 10 side performs performance so that the value of expectation for bubble presentation is 40%. A pattern determination table (for big win) and a production pattern determination table (for loss) are set.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 in such a manner, the user can custom-set the expectation level of bubble performance in the range of 10% to 50% in increments of 1% in the same manner as the expectation level of the school of fish explained above. However, it can be dealt with by preparing a set of two types (20%, 40%) of the performance pattern determination table (for big win) and the performance pattern determination table (for loss). If the user (player) can set the expected degree of bubble effect in the range of 10% to 50% in units of 1% by means of an external input means, an effect pattern corresponding to each 1% of the expected degree of bubble effect is generated. If the pachinko machine 10 prepares a set of a determination table (for big win) and a performance pattern determination table (for loss), there are 41 types of performance pattern determination table (for big win) and effect pattern determination table (for loss). ) must be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93), and the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is heavily loaded. On the other hand, as in this modification, the value of the degree of expectation for bubble effect that can be custom set by the player by the external input means is divided into a plurality of ranges, a representative value as a specific set value is determined for each range, and the determined By setting the representative value to the bubble effect expectation level in the pachinko machine 10, the processing related to the setting of the effect pattern table in the pachinko machine 10 is simplified, and the effect pattern determination table (for big win) and the effect pattern determination table (for loss) are provided. ) can be reduced.

Also, in comparison with the above-described embodiment, in this modification, the number of sets of the effect pattern determination table (for jackpot) and the effect pattern determination table (for loss) to be stored in the pachinko machine 10 (ROM 93) Although the storage capacity increases, the value of the bubble production expectation that can be customized than the above embodiment is finely divided into multiple ranges, and the representative value is set for each range, so the user can customize the bubble The difference between the value of performance expectation and the value of bubble performance expectation actually set in the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, making it more difficult for the player to notice the deviation and making the player feel uncomfortable. You can make it less noticeable.

<<9-7>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which a special electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

<<9-8>> Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiment and each of the modifications, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features (feature group) of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiment and each modified example will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations in the above embodiment or each modified example will be appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic fA group>
The feature fA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature fA1]
a success/fail lottery means for executing a success/failure lottery based on determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established that the predetermined lottery condition has been established;
variable display means for executing variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
A specific game that executes a specific game machine state (round game) after a specific variable display that displays a specific display result (jackpot result) that is executed when the result of the lottery is a specific result (jackpot) a means of execution;
Effect execution means for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements (output elements/character/accessory actions in the effect) during the variable display for the predetermined period;
A value for the output mode (output state/appearance frequency/expectation/type) of the specific effect element (specific output element/specific effect) selected by the player from among the plurality of effect elements and an input means (external input means/means for inputting custom settings) that allows the player to determine and input the
The value for the output mode (value for the output state) can be input by the player selecting one predetermined value (one predetermined input value) from a plurality of values,
This game machine is
specific display means (specific image display unit) for executing a corresponding specific display (specific image display) when the input of the one predetermined value determined by the player is completed;
Predetermined output value setting means (output value setting processing unit/custom setting processing) that can be executed after executing the specific display,
By the predetermined output value setting means, a value (output value/value to be referred to when executing the effect) for the output mode of the specific effect element used when the effect executing means executes the variable effect can be set. is a
The predetermined output value setting means sets the first value even when the player inputs a first value (first input value/first set value) as a value for the output mode. Even if a second value (second input value/second set value) different from the value is input, the first value and the second value are used as the value of the output mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to set a specific value (specific set value/representative value) that is different from and stored in advance in a storage means.

According to this feature, even if the player has input the first value as the value for the output mode, the predetermined output value setting means inputs the second value different from the first value. Even if the value of the output mode is set, a specific value different from the first value and the second value and stored in advance in the storage means can be set as the value of the output mode. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming machine at the predetermined timing for setting the output mode for the effect element of the game effect while allowing the player to select the effect element of the game effect with respect to the game machine. . That is, even if the player selects and inputs the first value and the second value as one predetermined value for the output mode from a plurality of values, the specific value stored in advance in the storage means is set. By doing so, it is possible to prepare data (for example, an effect pattern table) related to effects corresponding to each of a plurality of values that the player can select as values for the output mode, or It becomes the structure which does not need to perform the process corresponding to one. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

[Feature fA2]
The gaming machine according to feature fA1,
A game machine, wherein the output of the specific effect element includes at least one of an image output, a sound output, a light output, and an operation output of a movable character.

According to this feature, the player selects one predetermined value from a plurality of values as a value for the output mode of either image output, sound output, light output, or motion output of the movable part. Even if the first value and the second value are selected and input as , specific values stored in advance in the storage means are set. Therefore, it is possible to realize simplification of processing and reduction of the data volume related to the effect element of any one of image output, sound output, light output, and motion output of the movable character. . in particular. Data relating to effects corresponding to each of a plurality of values that the player can select as a value for the output mode of image output, sound output, light output, or motion output of a movable role ( For example, it is not necessary to prepare an effect pattern table or to execute processing corresponding to each of a plurality of values. As a result, simplification of processing can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to execute the effect.

[Feature fA3]
A gaming machine according to feature fA1 or feature fA2,
A first input means (first external input means/one-shot notification frequency) capable of inputting at least a value corresponding to the output mode of the first effect element, and a second effect element different from the first effect element A second input means (second external input means/expectation degree of fish school effect) capable of inputting a value corresponding to the output mode of
The gaming machine, wherein the input means (external input means) is configured to be able to input different values for the first effect element and the second effect element.

According to this feature, the player can set values corresponding to respective output modes for a plurality of effect elements. You can set the production with an original combination.

[Feature fA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined output value setting means sets the specific value input by the player when the same value as the specific value is input by the player.

According to this feature, the predetermined output value setting means sets the specific value input by the player when the same value as the specific value is input by the player. It is not always set to a value different from the value input by the player as the value corresponding to , but the value input by the player as the value corresponding to the output mode of the effect element and the specific value stored in advance in the storage means. match, the effect element can be output in an output mode that accurately reflects the value input by the player as the output mode of the effect element.

[Feature fA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA4,
an input value storage area (input value storage unit/RAM 94) for storing that the one predetermined value is input when the one predetermined value is input by the player;
image display means for displaying an image (input content display image/custom setting information reception completion image) indicating that the one predetermined value is input for the output mode of the specific effect element in the variable effect; with
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this feature, when one predetermined value is input by the player, the fact that the one predetermined value has been input is stored, and in the variable effect, in response to the output mode of the specific effect element, display an image indicating that a predetermined value has been entered. Therefore, the player can confirm the value input by the player himself/herself for the output mode of the specific effect element. Then, the player can be made to think that the effect element is output in an output mode corresponding to the value input by the player himself/herself. Furthermore, in such a state, a specific value different from the first value and the second value and stored in advance in the storage means is actually set as the value of the output mode. Since the performance element is output in the corresponding output mode, the player can be surprised and persuaded.

[Feature fA6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the input means is capable of inputting a value corresponding to the output mode of the specific effect element during the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display of the predetermined period.

According to this feature, since the value corresponding to the output mode of the specific effect element can be input during the entire period from the start of the variable display of the predetermined period to the end, the player can select the desired timing. , a value corresponding to the output mode of a specific effect element can be input, and convenience and interest can be improved.

[Feature fA7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA6,
The input means is capable of performing a predetermined input to the production element (output element/music) output in the specific game state (round game) before the specific game state occurs,
A game characterized by comprising means for outputting an effect element output in the specific game state in an output mode based on the predetermined input when the predetermined input is made before the specific game state occurs. machine.

According to this feature, it is possible to input a predetermined value to the effect element output in the specific game state before the specific game state occurs. , the player does not have to set the effect elements to be output in a specific game state in a short period of time. Therefore, the player can easily set the output mode of the effect element in the specific game state.

Further, when a predetermined input is made before the occurrence of the specific game state, the effect element output in the specific game state is output in an output mode based on the predetermined input. As described above, the predetermined output value setting means in the gaming machine of this feature group is different from the first value even if the player inputs the first value as the value for the output mode. Even when the second value is input, a specific value different from the first value and the second value and stored in advance in the storage means is set as the value of the output mode. configured to obtain However, as this feature, when a predetermined input is made before the occurrence of the specific game state, the output mode in the specific game state is to output the effect required in the output mode based on the input by the player. can be done. The setting of the production elements in a specific game state (during a round game) (for example, the order of songs during the round) can be set in many productions corresponding to the appearance frequency value and the expectation value, such as the production during the variable display. It does not require a pattern table and does not require a large amount of data for each value. Therefore, by outputting the effect element in the output mode in the specific game state based on the input by the player, it is possible to output the effect element reflecting the player's preference setting.

[Feature fA8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA7,
A gaming machine, wherein the first value is a value greater than the specific value, and the second value is a value smaller than the specific value.

According to this feature, whether the first value is larger than the specific value or the second value is smaller than the specific value, it is stored in advance in the storage means as the value of the output mode. Since it is possible to set a specified specific value, it is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output mode while performing simple internal control.

[Feature fA9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA7,
A gaming machine, wherein the first value and the second value are larger than the specific value.

According to this feature, even if the first value and the second value are larger than the specific value, the specific value stored in advance in the storage means can be set as the value of the output mode, which is convenient. It is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output mode while performing such internal control.

[Feature fA10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA7,
A gaming machine, wherein the first value and the second value are smaller than the specific value.

According to this feature, even if the first value and the second value are smaller than the specific value, the specific value stored in advance in the storage means can be set as the value of the output mode, which is convenient. It is possible to give the player the feeling of setting the value of the output mode while performing such internal control.

[Feature fA11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA10,
an input value storage area for storing that the one predetermined value (custom set value) is input when the one predetermined value is input by the player;
a history information storage area for storing execution history information relating to the specific variable display executed in a state in which the one predetermined value is input by the player;
and history information output means for outputting the execution history information stored in the history information storage area.

According to this feature, when one predetermined value is input by the player, the one predetermined value is stored, and a variable effect as if the one predetermined value were prospered is displayed in the variable display. Since the execution history information about the variable display is output, the player confirms the result of the output control with a value different from the one predetermined value input by the player, so that the game can be played with respect to the difference. It can surprise and delight people.

[Feature fA12]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA11,
The plurality of values are
In the case where the specific effect element (specific output element/fish school effect) is output in the variable display for the predetermined period, it is assumed that any one of the plurality of values is input as the value for the output mode. and a gaming machine, wherein a display result (mismatch) other than the specific display result can be displayed as a result of the variable display for the predetermined period.

According to this feature, with respect to the configuration of the plurality of values, when a specific effect element is output in a variable display for a predetermined period of time, any one of the plurality of values is input as the value for the output mode. However, as a result of the variable display for a predetermined period, display results other than the specific display results (outliers) can be displayed. In other words, among a plurality of values that the player can select as the value for the output mode, a value indicating that a specific display result will always be displayed when a specific effect element is output (for example, the effect (value of 100% as the degree of expectation of By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set a specific value different from the value input by the player and previously stored in the storage means as the value of the output mode of the specific effect element. You can make it difficult for people to notice you. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to set the value for the output mode of the variable effect.

[Feature fA13]
A gaming machine according to any one of features fA1 to fA12,
The plurality of values are
In the case where the specific effect element (specific output element/fish school effect) is output in the variable display for the predetermined period, it is assumed that any one of the plurality of values is input as the value for the output mode. A gaming machine, wherein the specific display result (jackpot winning) can be displayed as a result of the variable display for the predetermined period.

According to this feature, with respect to the configuration of the plurality of values, when a specific effect element is output in a variable display for a predetermined period of time, any one of the plurality of values is input as the value for the output mode. However, it is configured so that a specific display result (big win winning) can be displayed as a result of variable display for a predetermined period. In other words, among a plurality of values that the player can select as the value for the output mode, a value (for example, A value of 0% as the degree of expectation of production) is configured not to be included. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set a specific value different from the value input by the player and previously stored in the storage means as the value of the output mode of the specific effect element. You can make it difficult for people to notice you. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to set the value for the output mode of the variable effect.

In addition, the invention of each feature group described above solves the following problems.

For game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and performance are used for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the game machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172988).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements are made for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, improving the soundness of games, etc. Improvements in technology are desired.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in each feature group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the feature groups described above can be applied or to which each feature group is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and ball entry means provided in the game area for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter. an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means; and the acquired information A gaming machine comprising privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Technical features included in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are used as appropriate to solve some or all of the above problems or achieve some or all of the above effects. , can be replaced or combined. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate. In addition, a configuration realized by appropriately combining the plurality of embodiments described above or by combining a part of the configuration included in one embodiment with a part of the configuration included in another embodiment is adopted. can also

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 30... Game board 31 Guidance rail 31a Inner rail portion 31b Outer rail portion 60 Main control device 70 Payout control device 71 Payout device 80 Launch control device 81 ... game ball launching mechanism 85 ... power supply device 90 ... sound emission control device 100 ... display control device

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 1st starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the area|region for 2nd starting mouth reservation, and a reservation digestion area|region. It is a front view of the game board when the main rotating accessory for production has moved to the lowest position. FIG. 10 is a schematic right side view showing a main rotating accessory for presentation and a main rotating accessory for presentation driving section for operating the main rotating accessory for presentation. It is an explanatory view showing the operation of the production main rotating role in the one-shot announcement production process. It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production. It is a schematic right side view showing the sub-rotating role for production and the sub-rotating role for production driving section for operating the sub-rotating role for production. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the main rotating accessory for effect and the sub rotating accessory for effect by the big or small effect processing; It is an explanatory view showing a second predetermined rotation stop position of the main rotating accessory for production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a second specific rotation stop position of the sub rotating accessory for effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the main rotating accessory for production is at a second predetermined rotation stop position, and the sub-rotating accessory for production is at a second specific rotation stop position; It is a side schematic diagram of a rotating device of a comparative example. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation completion|finish process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a front view showing a pair of sub rotating accessories for production in a modification. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the operation at the time of the jackpot in Case 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation at the time of a big hit in Case 2; It is an explanatory view showing the operation at the time of the big hit in Case 3. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for gates. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 1st starting ports. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process of setting the variable time for the first starting opening; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing first fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start processing for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold|maintenance information shift process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the decision processing for the 2nd starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for a 2nd starting port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port. It is a flow chart showing a low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability high support state fluctuating time information acquisition process for the second starting port. It is a flow chart showing a high-probability-low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. 9 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation stop processing; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process when a standby state transition flag is ON. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of opening period flag ON. 9 is a flow chart showing processing when an opening/closing processing period flag is ON; It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing when an ending period flag is ON; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a small hit opening and closing process. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of ball entry. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing; It is a flow chart which shows game round production setting processing for special 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first effect pattern setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of the low probability high support state for the first starting port. It is a flow chart showing production pattern setting processing at the time of high-precision high support state for the first start opening. It is a flow chart showing a high probability low support state effect pattern setting process for the first start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the game round production|presentation setting process for special 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second effect pattern setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of low probability low support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process at the time of low probability high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of high-precision high support state for the second start opening. It is a flow chart showing a production pattern setting process at the time of high probability low support state for the second start opening. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a front view of a game board provided in a pachinko machine as a modification. It is a front view of a game board provided in a pachinko machine as a modification. It is an explanatory view showing a left round number sorting device. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switching scenario selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; It is an explanatory view explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a battle production|presentation and a battle result production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a countdown effect, an opportunity suggesting effect, and information on the number of balls entered; It is explanatory drawing which shows step-up production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for the V winning prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric switching scenario selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; It is an explanatory view explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an electric distribution apparatus aim right hitting information production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a battle production|presentation and a battle result production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a countdown effect, an opportunity suggesting effect, and information on the number of balls entered; It is explanatory drawing which shows step-up production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart showing the ball entry processing for the V winning prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a fifth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success-or-failure table for special figure per lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for small hits. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table for the V prize jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing the electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched depending on the value of the number-of-ceilings counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the information production|presentation of a game method. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation mode when the lottery result of lottery per special figure 1 turns into small hit winning in a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a ceiling time saving process. 10 is a flow chart showing V target profit/loss determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart showing a transition process at the end of the V winning jackpot game. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how the notification effect of the game method is switched according to the value of the number-of-ceilings counter in the modified example; 10 is a flowchart showing V target profit/loss determination processing in a modified example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of profit-and-loss examination recommendation notification production. It is an explanatory view showing a part of the island facilities installed in the game hall when explaining the sixth embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a sixth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success-or-failure table for special figure per lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure 2 small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for big hits. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table used when executing a normal electric accessory open lottery. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an external terminal board and a data display; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the data display device with which a data display is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won in a high support state in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in a high support state in a pachinko machine and a V winning big win is won. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small win is won in a pachinko machine in a high support state and a V winning big win is not won. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the pachinko machine loses in all the game rounds in the high support state (no special 2 remaining hold). It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a jackpot is won with a special 2 remaining hold at the end of a high support state in a pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when a small hit is won with a special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine. It is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when it is out in all the game rounds based on special 2 remaining hold at the end of the high support state in the pachinko machine. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for the big winning opening. It is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for the V winning hole. 9 is a flowchart showing outer-end output signal management processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information shift process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable time setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a fixed time elapsing process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for extension flag OFF. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game round production|presentation setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing effect pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric opening/closing pattern selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the performance movable accessory moves to the lowest point position, each petal part separates (enlarges) from the rotating shaft part, and rotates counterclockwise at the lowest point position. FIG. 3 is a schematic right side view showing a movable performance accessory and a movable performance drive mechanism for driving the movable accessory for presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the character-linked battle production which is an example of the character-linked production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the character-linked battle production which is an example of the character-linked production. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each driving scenario; 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation effect setting process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric opening/closing execution mode effect setting process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for production|presentation operation buttons performed in MPU of an audio|voice light emission control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance movable accessory driving process executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. It is an explanatory diagram showing a character-linked battle effect, which is an example of a character-linked effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the modified example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of each driving scenario provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a decorative design which is variably displayed in a design display device, and a design display device. It is an explanatory view explaining a sound 0 amount light amount adjustment image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an option image; It is an explanatory view explaining the game history information displayed on the display surface 041a. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing various counters and various storage areas provided in a RAM 64; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special figure propriety determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special figure type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a special electric opening/closing pattern selection table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure right/wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal figure classification determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a mains switching scenario selection table; 3 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PS1; 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PS2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PS3; 3 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY3; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY5; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY6; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern PY7; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY3; 4 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY5; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY6; 10 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern CY7; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern CY8; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DS1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DS2; 4 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY1; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY2; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY3; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY4; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY5; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY6; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a processing pattern DY7; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing pattern DY8; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for each ball entrance. It is a flow chart showing the entering ball processing for the first special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the ball entering process for the second special figure starting port. It is a flow chart showing the entry process for the normal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart which shows special figure special electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric opening-and-closing execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special electric opening-and-closing period. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special electric ending period. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal design fluctuation post-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric switching execution mode start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a general electricity opening period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric switching period. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a normal electric ending period. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the sound and light side MPU 92; It is a flow chart which shows special figure fluctuation production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting processing during the special electric opening and closing execution mode. 4 is a flowchart showing button operation corresponding processing. It is a flow chart which shows movable accessory drive processing for production. It is a flow chart which shows standby processing. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect custom setting image PSGa in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a call with an initial operation image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a model selection image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a one-shot notification effect frequency setting image; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a hibiscus flash effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for setting the degree of expectation for fish school effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for setting the degree of expectations for bubble effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cut-in effect setting image; It is an explanatory view explaining the image for a round music setting. It is an explanatory view explaining the image for connection operation. It is an explanatory view explaining a connection completion image. It is an explanatory view explaining a game history information reception image. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a custom setting information reception completion image; It is an explanatory view explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the value of the expected degree of fish school effect set in the pachinko machine 10; It is an explanatory view explaining the value of the one-shot notification effect frequency set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining a modification of processing about one-shot announcement production frequency. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the processing related to the degree of expectation for effect of a school of fish; It is an explanatory view explaining a modification of processing about a bubble production expectation level.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the following sixth embodiment and its modification)
a first ball entry area having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
a second ball entry area having a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry area, and the first special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry area Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
Means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, wherein the determination for the second special information is higher than the determination for the first special information. means for judging with priority;
When the game cycle is defined as the period from the start of the variable display for informing the result of the determination by the determination means until the end of the variable display to the stop display and the end of the stop display, the game is played. a game turn execution means for executing a turn;
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry area;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry area, and a state that a game ball enters the second ball entry area. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state that enables or facilitates the sphere;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means are a first control mode and a second control mode rather than the first control mode. a control means having at least a second control mode in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry area;
a bonus ball entry means for awarding a prize ball as a bonus when a game ball enters;
When a special game state generation condition including at least that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is established by the determination means, a special game state is generated to cause the special ball entry means to perform a predetermined release. means and
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
After the end of the special game state, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode for a specific period, and the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode at the end of the specific period. have the means to
The game machine is
a first output means for continuously outputting information for identifying the state corresponding to the period during the special game state or the specific period;
output stop means for stopping the output of the information at the end of the specific period;
storage means for storing the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the end of the specific period;
After the end of the specific period, when at least the number of the second special information stored in the storage means is 1 or more, a predetermined number of the variable displays corresponding to the number of the second special information are displayed. a second output means capable of continuously outputting predetermined information capable of identifying a state in which predetermined variable display can be performed until the end;
with
The second output means is
means for continuously outputting the predetermined information until a predetermined period elapses after the last variable display out of the predetermined number of variable displays ends and the display becomes a stop display;
means for outputting the predetermined information in a manner different from the information;
have
A gaming machine characterized by:

Claims (1)

a success/fail lottery means for executing a success/failure lottery based on determination by a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined lottery condition has been established that the predetermined lottery condition has been established;
variable display means for executing variable display for a predetermined period based on the result of the lottery;
a specific game executing means for executing a specific game state after a specific variable display for displaying a specific display result executed when the result of the lottery is a specific result;
effect execution means for performing a variable effect using a plurality of effect elements during the variable display for the predetermined period;
Input means that allows a player to make a predetermined input to the effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The input means
A detection means that enters a predetermined detection state when a predetermined detection target approaches or contacts a predetermined detection unit by a predetermined distance in a predetermined standby state,
This game machine is
Output means for outputting a plurality of information stored in a predetermined storage unit and related to the effect execution means when a first input state occurs in which the detection means is in the predetermined detection state. with
When a second input state occurs in which input of predetermined information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of output information is detected, input and output of information relating to predetermined settable information in the effect executing means is enabled. A gaming machine characterized by being configured as follows.

Images